Power Engineering Guide Edition 7 1

Power Engineering Guide
Edition 7.1
siemens.com/energy
Answers for energy.
Imprint
Publisher
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Energy Sector
Freyeslebenstrasse 1
91058 Erlangen, Germany
www.siemens.com/energy
Infrastructure & Cities Sector
Wittelsbacherplatz 2
80333 Munich, Germany
www.siemens.com/infrastructure-cities
Publishing House:
Publicis Pro, Erlangen, Germany
DTP:
Mario Willms
Publicis Pro, Erlangen, Germany
Edition 7.1
2014 by Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Munich and Berlin, Germany.
Siemens Energy Sector Power Engineering Guide Edition 7.1
Foreword
Dear reader,
This updated edition of the well-known Power Engineering Guide is a manual for everyone involved in the generation,
transmission and distribution of electrical energy from system planning, to implementation and control. Our guide is
designed to assist and support engineers, technicians, planners and advisors, as well as students, trainees and teachers
of electrical engineering and energy technology. Beyond that, we hope the Power Engineering Guide will also be useful
as a reference work for technical questions and support continuing education and training in the technical field.
Our guide covers the entire portfolio of Siemens products for the transmission and distribution of electrical power
including high, medium and low voltage, switching substations, transformers and switchgear, and is organized by product
and function. It also covers solutions in the areas of Smart Grids: energy automation, energy management and network
communication, as well as service and support. Key terms and abbreviations are explained in a handy appendix, and
Internet addresses are provided for additional in-depth information.
Siemens AG is a global leader in electronics and electrical engineering. Siemens products, systems and integrated,
complete solutions benefit customers by meeting a wide variety of local requirements. They represent the key technologies
of the future and set global standards. All our developments and innovations which also affect methods and processes
are distinguished by energy efficiency, economy, reliability, environmental compatibility and sustainability. The portfolio
includes solutions for power transmission and distribution, for Smart Grids, for low and medium voltage as well as energy
automation.
The importance of electricity is emphasized by the rapidly increasing number of electrical applications and the fact that
demand will continually grow in the coming decades. To help our customers master their respective challenges and
achieve success and further growth, we continue to work on selectively strengthening and optimizing our portfolio.
As a result, in addition to traditional products for power transmission and distribution, todays portfolio includes a wide
range of additional products. We offer grid operators, electricity customers, planners and builders of electrical systems the
additional benefits of integrated communications and automation technology. Our spectrum of services includes the
planning, maintenance and repair of entire power supply systems.
Thanks to our vast experience in managing projects around the world, we provide power utilities, industrial companies,
cities, urban planer and city hubs (airports and harbors) with cost-efficient custom-tailored solutions. Please do not hesitate
to contact your local Siemens sales office. You will find the contacts to Siemens in your region at www.siemens.com/energy
and www.siemens.com/infrastructure-cities.
Yours,
Power Engineering Guide Editorial Team
Contents
Power Transmission and Distribution Solutions
17
Switchgear and Substations
81
Products and Devices
163
Transformers
257
Protection, Substation Automation,

Power Quality and Measurements
299
Energy Management
425
Communication Network Solutions

for Smart Grids
469
Power System Analysis and Planning
495
Services & Support
509
10
Glossary
527
11
Abbreviations, Trademarks
535
12
Smart Grids and the New Age of Energy
6
7
8
9
1 Smart Grids and the New Age of Energy
Fig. 1-1: The process of urbanization continues to accelerate. At the same time, the density and complexity of urban power supply systems
are also increasing
1
Electrical energy is the backbone of our economy, and supports
every aspect of social and cultural life today. The comfort of
always having electricity available is anything but guaranteed,
however. We face major challenges in providing adequate power
generation, transmission and distribution to meet the worlds
needs.
The global demand for electrical energy is steadily increasing at
the rate of approximately three percent a year, faster than the
two percent annual increase in the global demand for primary
energy. There are many factors contributing to this escalation,
including rapid population growth and longer life spans. The
process of urbanization continues to accelerate, and growing
amounts of electricity must be transported to heavily populated
areas, usually over long distances. At the same time, the density
and complexity of urban power supply systems are also
increasing (fig. 1-1).
Fossil fuels, on the other hand, are becoming more scarce, and
exploration and production of oil and gas are becoming more
expensive. To slow the threat of climate change we must reduce
our CO2 emissions worldwide; for power supply systems, this
means increased integration of renewable energy sources such
as hydro, wind and solar power. At the same time, it also means
boosting the energy efficiency of power supply systems, so that
they contribute to our environmental and climate protection
efforts, and help keep energy costs under control. The growing
international trade in energy, fueled by the liberalization of
energy markets, and the integration of power grids across regions
requires investment in more transmission power supply systems
to ensure system stability and guarantee power supplies.
To meet all these challenges, an intelligent and flexible system
infrastructure, smart generation, and smart buildings are essential. Achieving this will require a fundamental shift from the
traditional unidirectional flow of energy and communication to
a bidirectional power flow (fig. 1-2). In traditional power supply
systems, power generation follows the load but in the future,
power consumption will follow generation rather than the other
way around.
Power supply systems of today and tomorrow must integrate
every type of power generation to bridge the increasing distances between power generation offshore wind farms, for
example and the consumer.
The objectives set for Smart Grids are as diverse as they are
exciting and ambitious. Instead of overloads, bottlenecks and
blackouts, Smart Grids will ensure the reliability, sustainability
and efficiency of power supplies. Information and communication systems within the network will be systematically expanded
Fig. 1-2: The Power Matrix: The energy system is being transformed. Distributed power generation is growing increasing the systems
complexity. The energy chain has evolved into a multi-faceted system with countless new participants the power matrix. It reflects
the reality of the energy system. Individual power matrices are appearing in each country and region depending on the specific
situation, challenges and goals. Siemens knows the markets and needs of its customers, and offers innovative and sustainable
solutions in all parts of the power matrix
Fig. 1-3: A Smart Grid ensures that renewable energy sources can be better integrated into the system thanks to a two-way flow of energy
and a bidirectional flow of communication data. Whereas the generation of power in conventional power supply systems depends on
consumption levels, a Smart Grid is also able to control consumption depending on the availability of electrical power in the grid

and homogenized. Automation will increase considerably, and
appropriately equipped smart substations will help reduce the
cost and labor intensity of planning and operation. Ongoing,
comprehensive monitoring will improve the way that plants and
the grid are run.
Distributed power generation and storage units will be combined into virtual power plants so they can also participate in the
development of the market. Susceptibility to failure will be
considerably reduced by self-healing systems that manage and
redundantly compensate for faults at the local level. Consumers
will participate as end customers through smart meters that
offer them better control of their own consumption, and this will
make load management easier because peak loads can be
avoided through price benefits. The potential of Smart Grids is
enormous, and includes the use of buildings and electric vehicles linked into the network as controllable power consumers,
generation, and even storage units.
Information and communication technology forms the crucial
links between power generation, transmission, distribution and
consumption. The Smart Grid will create consistent structures,
optimize power generation, and balance fluctuating power
production with consumption (fig. 1-3).
Siemens plays a leading role in the creation and expansion of
Smart Grids. Not only is Siemens uniquely positioned to transmitt and distribute power, Siemens is also the world market
leader in energy automation, which plays a decisive role in the
creation of Smart Grids.
Network planning
Building Smart Grids is a highly complex task that begins with
a detailed quantitative assessment of the system requirements,
definition of actual targets and their required performance
levels, and specification of system concepts and equipment.
Further, a comprehensive strategy for building Smart Grids
is necessary not only for the power supply system, but also for
other infrastructures and their interactions.
The foundation for designing an efficient Smart Grid is a detailed
analysis of the systems required performance. This is the key
task for strategic network planning. Keeping a rigorous focus on
the system as a whole ensures that the architecture and configuration deliver the necessary performance levels, and meet other
requirements as well. A state-of-the-art solution will integrate
the most innovative technologies for power generation, transmission, distribution and consumption, while taking into
account each systems individual history and current condition.
In most cases, the transition from todays power supply system
to the future Smart Grid cannot be made in one step; instead it
requires step-by-step modification plans.
See chapter 9, page 496.
Power electronics (HVDC / FACTS)
Siemens power electronic solutions for High Voltage Direct
Current transmission (HVDC) and Flexible Alternating Current
Transmission Systems (FACTS) address the greatest challenges in

power transmission.
FACTS devices can significantly increase the power transmission

capacity of existing alternating current (AC) systems and extend
maximum AC transmission distances by balancing the variable
reactive power demand of the system. Reactive power compensation is used to control AC voltage, increase system stability,
and reduce power transmission losses.
State-of-the-art FACTS devices include Fixed Series Compensators
(FSC) and Thyristor Controlled Series Compensators (TCSC), or
Static VAR Compensators (SVC) for dynamic shunt compensation. The latest generation of Siemens SVC devices is called SVC
PLUS. These are highly standardized compact devices that can
easily be implemented in demanding network environments; for
example, to allow connection of large offshore wind farms.
AC technology has proven very effective in the generation,
transmission and distribution of electrical power. Nevertheless,
there are tasks that cannot be performed economically or with
technical precision using AC. These include power transmission
over very long distances, as well as between networks operating
asynchronously or at different frequencies. In contrast, a unique
feature of HVDC systems is their ability to feed power into grids
that cannot tolerate additional increases in short-circuit currents.
The transmission capacity of a single HVDC transmission system
has recently been extended by the Siemens Ultra High Voltage
Direct Current transmission system (UHVDC). With a capacity of
more than seven gigawatts and low rate of loss, UHVDC transmission is the best way to ensure highly efficient power transmission of 2,000 kilometers or more. Electrical Super Grids
based on UHVDC transmission can interconnect regions across
climate and time zones, allowing seasonal changes, time of day
and geographical features to be used to maximum advantage.
Siemens most recent development in HVDC transmission is
called HVDC PLUS. Its key component is an innovative Modular
Multilevel Converter (MMC) that operates virtually free of harmonics. HVDC PLUS converter stations are highly compact
because there is no need for complex filter branches. This
feature makes HVDC PLUS perfectly suited for installation on
offshore platforms; for example, to connect offshore wind
farms.
See section 2.2, page 23 (HVDC), and
section 2.3, page 32 (FACTS).
Bulk renewable integration
In order to begin fulfilling the climate protection requirements
of 2020, we need to use energy efficiently and reduce CO2
emissions. Power generation needs to change accordingly.
Large power plants will continue to ensure basic supplies, but
there will also be renewable energy sources that fluctuate
locally depending on weather and other conditions.
GPS
Control room HMI

HMI
HMI
Printer
Master clock
Router
Server 1
Server 2
UPS
Firewall
Corporate
network
Energy automation system
HV switchgear
MV switchgear
LV compartments
HV
MV
LV
Our solutions integrate

all voltage levels and all
necessary information
from the energy supply
enviroment in one system.
M
3~
Fig. 1-4: Siemens smart substation automation systems
Energy Management System (EMS)

At power plants, the focus is on ensuring reliable supply, using
generation resources efficiently, and reducing transmission
losses. An Energy Management System (EMS) handles these by
balancing the demands of the transmission system, generating
units, and consumption. Intelligent Alarm Processors (IAPs)
reduce the critical time needed to analyze faults in the grid and
take corrective action, as well as the risk of incorrect analysis.
Innovative Voltage Stability Analysis (VSA) applications running
automatically and independently alert the operator before
critical situations that jeopardize static system voltage stability
occur, giving the operator time to take preventive action rather
than having to react under stress. Increased grid reliability is
provided by Optimal Power Flow (OPF) applications that continuously work to keep the systems voltage level high, and eliminate
invalid voltage conditions. Any control measures that must be
taken can be automatically executed in a closed-loop-control
procedure.
Using the most efficient resources is a challenge under todays
more stringent environmental restrictions, increasingly competitive markets, and growing contractual complexity. An integrated
set of closely interacting applications ranging from back
office-based, year-ahead resource optimization and maintenance
planning to week- or day-ahead unit commitment and hydro-
10
scheduling to online closed-loop control of generating units

ensures maximum efficiency grounded in powerful optimization
algorithms and models. Security Constrained Unit Commitment
(SCUC) has become the essential application for managing the
worlds most complex energy market in California at California
ISO. SCUC increases grid and market efficiency, reduces barriers
to alternative power resources like demand-response and green
generation, and gives the operators new tools for managing
transmission bottlenecks and dispatching the lowest-cost power
plants.
Smart substation automation and protection
The automation and protection of substations must be enhanced
to securely meet the extended requirements of future Smart
Grids. The substation is in the process of becoming a node on
the utility IT network for all information from the distribution
substation to the customer. For example, data from the feeder
automation units, power quality, meters, decentralized energy
resources and home automation systems will be collected and
analyzed to improve the system. Besides the new Smart Grid
challenges, the usual tasks of protection, control and automation have to remain as reliable and efficient as ever. The objectives for substations are beginning to cross departmental bound-

aries, encompassing operations, maintenance and security
requirements. Smart substation solutions and their individual
components should be designed with this overarching vision and
framework in mind. The use of intelligent feeder devices, an
open IEC 61850 communication architecture, powerful substation computers, equipment knowledge modules and local
storage all support this approach. The automated substation for
Smart Grids must integrate all aspects of intelligence, from
protection, automation and remote control to operational safety
and advanced data collection. Going beyond the traditional
concept of substation control and protection, the new automated substation must reflect the point of view of operators and
maintenance personnel to become a best-in-class system that is
simple both to operate and maintain. Smart substation automation ensures rapid and more importantly correct responses to
unpredictable system events. The ability to reliably supply
electrical power on demand can only be guaranteed by considering the power supply system in its entirety (fig. 1-4).
Smart substation automation systems from Siemens support the
following goals:
Secure and reliable power supply
Guaranteed high levels of protection for facilities and people
Reduction of manual interactions to enhance rapid self-healing
operations
Implementation of intelligent remote error monitoring,
detection, reporting
Enabling condition-based predictive maintenance
Support for engineering and testing through plug-and-play
functionality
Proactively distributing substation information to all relevant
stakeholders
Reduced costs for installation and maintenance.
Siemens smart substation automation systems are always
customized to meet each customers specific requirements. The
use of standard components allows the system to scale in every
respect. Siemens solutions offer a fully integrated and fully
automated way to operate substations under normal and emergency conditions. The system is flexible and open for future
modifications, making it easy to expand the substation while
allowing the addition of new Smart Grid functions.
Integrated Substation Condition Monitoring (ISCM)
Integrated Substation Condition Monitoring (ISCM) is a modular
system for monitoring all relevant substation components, from
the transformer and switchgear to the overhead line and cable.
Based on known, proven telecontrol units and substation automation devices, ISCM provides a comprehensive solution perfectly suited to substation environments. It integrates seamlessly
into the existing communication infrastructure so that monitoring information from the station and the control center is
displayed.
Communication solutions
The new Age of Electricity is characterized by a mix of both
central and decentralized power generation, which requires
bidirectional energy flows including power from smart buildings and residential areas where consumers are becoming
prosumers. A key prerequisite for this paradigm shift is a homogeneous, end-to-end communication network that provides
sufficient bandwidth between all grid elements.
Telecommunication systems for power grid transmission have

a long history in the utility industry. In todays transmission
grids, almost all substations are integrated into a communication network that allows online monitoring and controlling by an
Energy Management System (EMS).
In a distribution grid, the situation is quite different. Whereas
high-voltage substations are often equipped with digital communication, the communication infrastructure at lower distribution levels is weak. In most countries, fewer than ten percent of
transformer substations and ring-main units (RMUs) are monitored and controlled remotely.
Communication technologies have continued to develop rapidly
over the past few years, and the Ethernet has become the
established standard in the power supply sector. International
communication standards like IEC 61850 will further simplify the
exchange of data between different communication partners.
Serial interfaces will, however, continue to play a role in the
future for small systems.
Because of the deregulation of energy markets, unbundling of
vertically integrated structures, sharp increases in decentralized
power production, and growing need for Smart Grid solutions,
the demand for communications is rapidly increasing. And this
applies not just to higher bandwidths, but also to new Smart
Grid applications, such as the integration of RMUs and private
households into power utilities.
For these complex communication requirements, Siemens offers
customized, rugged communication network solutions for
fiber optic, power line and wireless infrastructures based on
energy industry standards.
An important element in creating and operating Smart Grids is
comprehensive, consistent communication using sufficient
bandwidth and devices with IP/Ethernet capability. Networks of
this kind must eventually extend all the way to individual consumers, who will be integrated into them using smart metering.
Consistent end-to-end communication helps meet the requirement for online monitoring of all grid components and, among
other things, creates opportunities to develop new business
models for smart metering and integrating distributed power
generation.
See section 10.1.3, page 514.
11

Advanced Distribution Management System (ADMS)
Energy distribution systems become increasingly complex due
to the integration of distributed energy resources and storage,
smart metering, and demand response. In combination with
increased grid automation, this leads to inundating utilities
systems with data that needs to be intelligently managed. At the
same time, utilities are under growing regulatory and customer
pressure to maximize grid utilization and provide reliability at all
times.
Catering to the next era of distribution control systems, the

ADMS integrates three core components Distribution SCADA,
OM, and Advanced Fault and Network Analysis, operated under
a Common User Environment. It enables the user to
Monitor, control and optimize the secure operation of the
distribution network and
Efficiently manage day-to-day maintenance efforts while
guiding operators during critical periods such as storms and
outage related restoration activities.
ADMS integrates the intelligent use of smart meter information
and regulating capabilities for distributed resources at the same
time, thus providing a solid foundation for the management of
the emerging Smart Grid.
feeder because of different primary equipment or communication availability. However, with or without limited communication access, a certain level of automation and Smart Grid functionality can still be realized, as can a mix of functions in one
feeder automation system. The following levels of distribution
automation can serve as a roadmap for grid upgrades moving
toward the implementation of a Smart Grid:
Local Automation (without communication)
Sectionalizer (automated fault restoration by using switching
sequences)
Voltage regulator (automated voltage regulation for long
feeders)
Recloser controller (auto reclose circuit-breaker for overhead
lines)
Monitoring only (one-way communication to distribution
substation or control center)
Messaging box (for example, short-circuit indicators with
one-way communication to distribution substation or control
center for fast fault location)
Control, monitoring and automation (two-way communication
to distribution substation or control center)
Distribution Automation RTU (DA-RTU) with powerful
communication and automation features applicable to
Smart Grid functions, for instance:
Automated self-healing routines
Node station for power quality applications
Data concentrator for smart metering systems
Node station for decentralized power generation
Node station for demand-response applications
Protection, control, monitoring and automation (two-way
communication to distribution substation or control center)
Recloser controller for overhead lines, plus auto-reclose
breaker with enhanced protection functionality and advanced
communication and automation features
Fig. 1-5: Spectrum Power ADMS combines SCADA, outage

management, and fault and network analysis functions for
the first time on a software platform under a common user
interface
See section 7.2, page 443.

Distribution automation and protection
The prerequisite for comprehensive automation and protection
design is determining the required levels of automation and
functionality for distribution substations and RMUs. This could
differ among the RMUs in one distribution grid or in the same
12
To fulfill all these requirements in a Smart Grid feeder automation

system, a modular approach to protection, monitoring, automation and communication equipment is needed. Siemens offers a
complete portfolio for each level of Smart Grid application:
Robust primary and secondary equipment to withstand tough
outdoor conditions
Flexible IO modules adapted to the requirements of the
specific RMU type, for example, for direct output to motordriven switches or input from RMU sensors
Optimized CPUs with advanced automation and protection
functions to secure a safe and reliable power supply, with automated system recovery functions and convenient remote access
Reliable (emergency) power supplies for all components in the
RMU, for example, to operate the switchgear motor drive, to
run a heating system for outdoor application, or to power the
controller and communication units
Future-oriented, fast communication via different infrastructures, for example, GPRS-/GSM modem, fiber optic, and power
line carrier

Multiple communication protocols like IEC61850 and DNPi to
connect the RMU with the distribution substation, control
center, or end-user applications
Modular, sustainable controller functions to fulfill specific Smart
Grid requirements like fault detection and isolation, automatic
reclosing functions, voltage or load-flow regulation, and more
A user-friendly, powerful engineering tool with seamless
integration in the overall engineering process of the distribution
automation system to enable maximum re-use of data
Open interfaces for all system components, enabling the
integration of other applications; in other words, a system that
is equipped for future Smart Grid modifications
To manage these tasks with a global perspective, it is crucial to
fully understand the overall structure of distribution grids:
primary and secondary equipment, voltage levels (from high
voltage via medium voltage to low voltage), indoor and outdoor
applications, and multiple local regulations and standards. A big
advantage derives from the use of flexible components in the
same system family for the diverse feeder automation applications. Siemens provides this and more with our comprehensive
Advanced Energy Automation portfolio, which transforms a
Smart Grid vision into reality.
Distributed Energy Resources (DER)
The integration of distributed energy resources (DER) calls for a
completely new concept: the virtual power plant. A virtual
power plant connects many small plants that participate in the
energy market in a completely new way. It makes it possible to
use sales channels that otherwise would not be available to the
operators of individual plants. Linked together in the network,
the plants can be operated even more efficiently and therefore
more economically than before, benefiting the operators of
decentralized generating facilities.
In the virtual power plant, decentralized energy management

and communication with the generating facilities play a special
role, and thanks to the Siemens products Decentralized Energy
Management System (DEMS) and DER Controller, are optimally
supported. The centerpiece is DEMS, which enables the intelligent, economical and environmentally friendly linkage of decentralized energy sources. The DER Controller facilitates communications, and is specifically tailored to the requirements of
decentralized energy sources.

Decentralized Energy Management System (DEMS)
DEMS, the core of the virtual power plant, is equally appropriate
for utilities, industrial operations, operators of functional buildings, energy self-sufficient communities, regions and energy
service providers. DEMS uses three tools predictions, operational planning and real-time optimization to optimize power.
The prediction tool anticipates electrical and heat loads; for
example, as a function of the weather and the time of day.
Predicting generation from renewable energy sources is also
important, and is based on weather forecasts and the unique
characteristics of the plants. Short-term planning to optimize
operating costs of all installed equipment must comply with
technical and contractually specified background conditions
every 15 minutes for a maximum of one week in advance. The
calculated plan minimizes the costs of generation and operation,
while DEMS also manages cost efficiency and environmental
considerations.
Fig. 1-6: In vitual power plants, decentralized energy management and communication with generating facilities play a special role, and
thanks to the Siemens products DEMS and DER controller, are optimally supported
13

Smart metering solutions
Smart metering connects consumers to the Smart Grid through
bi-directional communication, thus underpinning the new
relationship between consumer and producer. The Smart Grid is
already radically changing the gas, water and electricity landscape. More than ever, regulatory requirements, technology
advances, and heightened expectations of system operators are
driving the integration of communicating hardware and systems,
leading to an explosion of data. Siemens smart metering solutions are making the benefits of the Smart Grid tangible today.
Siemens class-leading technology and services are deployed
and proven in markets around the world. There are a number
of smart metering solutions and services on the market and
potentially, one could end up using multiple agents to support
your metering needs making a complex solution even more
confusing. Siemens removes this complexity. Its end-to-end
domain knowledge and expertise spanning the entire energy
conversion chain is our main differentiator. Siemens offers
a comprehensive line of products, accredited solutions, and
services, supplying complete solution packages for smart
metering. Siemens can supply the meter, retrieve, validate and
present the data, and open up useful energy management
opportunities, taking responsibility for the whole operation,
from start to finish.
Siemens smart metering portfolio includes:

Metering hardware and system components, including singlephase and three-phase AMI meters
Automated metering and information system (AMIS)
Grid application platform EnergyIP
Smart prepayment metering solution
Solutions to combat non-technical loss (MECE)
Grid metering solutions
Commercial and industrial metering solutions
Smart multi-dwelling unit solution, and
End-to-end smart metering design, implementation and
integration services
Siemens grid application platform EnergyIP helps leading electric, gas and water utilities worldwide modernize the speed of
processing sensor data. Siemens transforms business operations
with a software application approach that delivers accurate
billing, proactive outage management, revenue protection,
customer engagement, and more. Deployed at over 50 utilities
worldwide, our solutions empower utilities to rapidly deploy
software and communications systems in order to effectively
scale and maximize operational efficiency.
See section 10.3, page 521.
There is no doubt that the future belongs to the Smart Grid, and
that power generation will change significantly by the time it
becomes a reality. Large power plants will continue to ensure
the basic supply, but there will also be renewable energy
sources, causing fluctuations in the grid. In the not too distant
future, flexible intermediate storage of temporary excess power
in the grid will be possible using electric vehicles and stationary
storage units. Sensors and smart meters will switch these units
14
on or off, ensuring efficient load management. From generating

large offshore wind farms to delivering smart metering in
homes, Siemens is one of the worldwide leading providers of
products, systems, technology and solutions for Smart Grids.
15
16
2.1 Overview of Technologies and Services

2.1.1 Solutions for Smart and Super Grids
with HVDC and FACTS
2.1.2 AC/DC Transmission and Distribution
2.1.3 Totally Integrated Power
We Bring Power to the Point
Safely and Reliably
2.1.4 Consultant Support for Totally Integrated Power
2.1.5 Managing Entire Projects
2.1.6 Partners throughout the System Life Cycle
18
2.2
High-Voltage Direct-Current Transmission
2.2.1 Siemens HVDC Technologies
2.2.2 Main Types of HVDC Schemes
2.2.3 LCC HVDC The Classical Solution
2.2.4 Ultra-HVDC Transmission (UHVDC) Bulk Power
2.2.5 HVDC PLUS One Step Ahead
2.2.6 DC Compact Switchgear DCCS
2.2.7 Siemens HVDC Control System: Win-TDC
2.2.8 Services
23
23
23
24
25
25
27
30
31
Flexible AC Transmission Systems

2.3
2.3.1 Parallel Compensation
2.3.2 Series Compensation
2.3.3 Synchronous Condenser
32
32
34
35
2.4
Power Transmission Lines
2.4.1 Gas-Insulated Transmission Lines
2.4.2 High-Voltage Power Cables
2.4.3 Overhead Lines
36
36
41
46
2.5
Grid Access Solutions
for Decentralized Power Generation
2.5.1 References
60
62
18
18
20
21
22
22
2.6
SIESTORAGE66
2.6.1 The Modular Energy Storage System
for a Reliable Power Supply
66
2.6.2 Spot-on for a Wide Range ofApplications
68
2.6.3 High Power Availability andReliability
69
2.6.4 Benefits of Comprehensive Competence
71
2.7 E-Houses for Power Distribution
2.7.1 Plug-and-Play Power Supply Solution
2.7.2 Cost-Effective Solution
2.7.3 Time-Efficient Solution
2.7.4 Flexible and Optimized Design
2.7.5 One-Stop Solution
2.8 Microgrids The Next Step towards
an Efficient Use of Distributed Resources
2.8.1 Operation, Monitoring, Administration,
Planning All Under One Roof
2.8.2 Microgrid Market Segments
2.8.3 Siemens Microgrid Management Systems
72
72
73
73
73
75
76
76
77
79
17
2 Power Transmission and Distribution Solutions

2.1 Overview of
Technologies and Services
Feeding the power generated at different locations over long

distances into power systems often calls for optimized power
transmission and distribution solutions. Despite the challenges it
poses, however, interconnecting of different regions, countries
or even continents remains a viable option for providing these
areas with economical access to power (fig. 2.1-1). As a solution
provider with extensive experience in every aspect of power
transmission and distribution, Siemens has already implemented
a large number of projects linking power systems or connecting
decentralized generating units to the grid. In each case, conditions were unique. And because Siemens strives to provide its
customers with the most cost-efficient results, the implemented
solutions using different technologies were also unique.
With Totally Integrated Power, Siemens offers a comprehensive
low-voltage and medium-voltage portfolio which makes power
distribution efficient, reliable, and safe in cities, infrastructure,
buildings, and industrial plants.
2.1.1 Solutions for Smart and Super

Grids with HVDC and FACTS
The power grid of the future must be secure, cost-effective and
environmentally compatible. The combination of these three
tasks can be tackled with the help of ideas, intelligent solutions
as well as advanced technologies.
Innovative solutions with HVDC (High-Voltage Direct-Current
Transmission) and FACTS (Flexible AC Transmission Systems)
have the potential to cope with the new challenges. By means of
power electronics, they provide features which are necessary to
avoid technical problems in the power systems, they increase
the transmission capacity and system stability very efficiently
and help to prevent cascading disturbances.
The vision and enhancement strategy for the future electricity
networks are, for example, depicted in the program for Smart
Grids, which was developed within the European Technology
Platform.
Features of a future Smart Grid such as this can be outlined as
follows:
Flexible: fulfilling operator needs whilst responding to the
changes and challenges ahead
Accessible: granting connection access to all network users,
particularly for Renewable Energy Sources (RES) and highefficiency local generation with zero or low carbon emissions
18
Reliable: assuring and improving security and quality of supply

Economic: providing best value through innovation, efficient
energy management and level playing field competition and
regulation
Smart Grids will help achieve a sustainable development. It is
worthwhile mentioning that the Smart Grid vision is in the same
way applicable to the system developments in other regions of the
world. Smart Grids will help achieve a sustainable development.
An increasingly liberalized market will encourage trading opportunities to be identified and developed. Smart Grids are a necessary response to the environmental, social and political demands
placed on energy supply.
2.1.2 AC/DC Transmission and

Distribution
HVDC and FACTS
Todays power transmission systems have the task of transmitting
power from point A to point B reliably, safely and efficiently. It is
also necessary to transmit power in a manner that is not harmful
to the environment. Siemens offers comprehensive solutions,
technical expertise and worldwide experience to help system
operators meet these challenges.
For each application and technical transmission stage, Siemens
offers optimized solutions with HVDC transmission or FACTS for
the most efficient operation of power systems.
Typical applications for FACTS include fast voltage control,
increased transmission capacity over long lines, power flow
control in meshed systems, and power oscillation damping. With
FACTS, more power can be transmitted within the power system
(section 2.3). When technical or economical feasibility of conventional three-phase technology reaches its limit, HVDC will be
the solution (fig. 2.1-2). Its main application areas are economical transmission of bulk power over long distances and interconnection of asynchronous power grids. Siemens latest innovation
in high-voltage direct-current technology is HVDC PLUS. The
advantages of the new system, which employs voltage-sourced
converters, include a compact layout of the converter stations,
and advanced control features such as independent active and
reactive power control and black start capability.

North system
50 Hz
Central system
60 Hz
Power exchange
Asynchronous
networks
Avoidance of
loop flows
Tariff
Industrial
energy supply
Tariff
Fault-Current
Limiter
Submarine
cable links
FC
Bulk power and

long distance
Clean
energy
Clean and
low-cost
energy
Power
exchange
South system
60 Hz
Symbols:
TPSC/TCSC
SVC
FSC
DC transmission
and interconnection
HVDC PLUS
B2B as GPFC
SVC PLUS
Fig. 2.1-1: Power transmission and distribution solutions
Power lines
Since the very beginning of electric power supply, overhead lines
have constituted the most important component for transmission
and distribution systems. Their portion of the overall length of
electric circuits depends on the voltage level and on local conditions and practice. When environmental or structural factors make
overhead lines impossible, Siemens underground transmission
path is the ideal solution. Siemens gas-insulated transmission
lines (GIL) can be an economically viable alternative to conventional power cables (section 2.4).
Grid access
Decentralized generating units are custom-engineered, which
involves reconciling contrasting parameters, such as high reliability, low investment costs and efficient transmission, in the
best possible solution. Specific attention is paid to intelligently
designing the collection systems at the medium-voltage level,
which is followed by the high-voltage transmission system
providing the grid access. By relying on both transmission technologies, Siemens can offer AC as well as DC solutions at both
the high- and medium-voltage levels (section 2.5).
Investment
costs
Total
AC
costs
Break-even distance
2xSSC*
DC line
costs
2xSSC*
Total
DC
costs
DC terminal costs
AC line
costs
AC terminal costs
including grid transformers
Transmission distance
* SSC = Series or shunt compensation of AC lines required for each section of the line
Fig. 2.1-2: AC versus DC transmission cost over distance.

The break-even distance amounts typically to 600 km
for a power transmission of 1,000 MW
Solar power
As an alternative power supply for rural electrification, Siemens
integrates solar power in the low-voltage distribution system for
private consumers, as stand-alone systems or even with grid
connection (section 2.6).
19

2.1.3 Totally Integrated Power

We Bring Power to the Point
Safely and Reliably
Efficient, reliable, safe: These are the demands placed on electrification and especially power distribution (fig. 2.1-3). And our
answer for all application areas of the energy system is
Totally Integrated Power (TIP). It is based on our comprehensive
range of products, systems and solutions for low and medium
voltage, rounded out by our support throughout the entire
lifecycle (fig. 2.1-4) from planning with our own software tools
to installation, operation and services.
Fig. 2.1-3: Comprehensive answers for power distribution in complex

energy systems from Siemens
Smart interfaces allow linking to industrial or building automation (fig. 2.1-4), making it possible to fully exploit all the optimization potential of an integrated solution. This is how we provide our customers around the world with answers to their
challenges. With highly efficient, reliable and safe power distribution, we lay the foundation for sustainable infrastructure and
cities, buildings and industrial plants. We bring power to the
point wherever and whenever it is needed.
Safety: A comprehensive range of protection components for

personnel safety, and line and fire protection, safety by means
of type testing
Reliability: A reliable partner who works with system
operators to develop long-lasting solutions that meet the
highest quality standards
Efficiency: Bringing power to the point means greater plant
availability and maximum energy efficiency in power
distribution
Flexibility: End-to-end consistency and modular design of
Totally Integrated Power for any desired expansions and
adaptation to future requirements
Advanced technology: Reliable power distribution especially
for applications in which supply is critical, continuous
refinement of the technology.
Totally Integrated Power offers more:

Consistency: For simplified plant engineering and
commissioning, as well as smooth integration into automation
solutions for building or production processes
One-stop-shop: A reliable partner with a complete portfolio for
the entire process and lifecycle from the initial idea to aftersales service
Automation
Process/Industrial
automation
PROFINET
PROFIBUS
Building
automation
Industrial Ethernet
...
Modbus
Electrification
Renewables
Storage
Medium-voltage
Transformer
technologies
switchgear and
protection technology
Low-voltage switchboard
with protection and
measuring technology
Low-voltage
distribution
110 kV
Products, systems and solutions
Consulting,
planning
Engineering
Order,
delivery
Fig. 2.1-4: TIP is the perfect link to industrial and building automation
20
Installation,
Operation
commissioning
Service,
modernization

2.1.4 Consultant Support

for Totally Integrated Power
Comprehensive services for the planning and concept
drafting of electric power distribution systems
Experts the Siemens TIP Consultant Support team help
electrical designers in many countries find holistic solutions for
the fields of infrastructure, building and industry even when it
comes to critical power supply, for example, in hospitals and
data centers.
All along the various planning phases, planners have recourse,

to efficient software tools, online tender specification texts, and
planning and application manuals.
The innovative SIMARIS planning tools set standards in terms of
planning efficiency. They support the planning process when
dimensioning electric power distribution systems, determining
the equipment and systems required, and preparing tender
specification texts. The product portfolio of devices and systems
required, ranging from the medium-voltage switchgear to
modular installation devices in the distribution board, is
mapped. This enables to plan entire power distribution systems
from start to finish using the free-of-charge SIMARIS planning
tools (fig. 2.1-5).
Fig. 2.1-5: The SIMARIS planning tools easy, fast and safe planning
of electric power distribution
Siemens also provides qualified support for creating technical

specification lists in the form of online tender specification texts
within the framework of Totally Integrated Power. The fully
integrated Siemens portfolio for electric power distribution can
be found there. The clear tree structure in combination with a
search function helps users find texts for the desired products.
The text modules that were selected can be compiled in customized specifications (fig. 2.1-6).
The planning and application manuals will help you familiarize
yourself with the technical background when planning power
supply systems, and implementing it in product and systems
solutions. In addition to the topical introduction provided by the
planning manuals, the application manuals include solution
criteria and approaches for planning power distribution to
industry-specific buildings that meet our customers needs.
Typical configurations and boundary conditions are presented in
the form of examples, which are then turned into feasible
concepts for the relevant building types, using specific products
and system proposals. All manuals can be downloaded from our
website as PDFs (fig. 2.1-7).
For further information:

www.siemens.com/simaris
Fig. 2.1-6: Text modules for tender specifications covering all

Siemens products for electric power distribution
Fig. 2.1-7: Planning and application manuals impart specialized

and up-to-date knowledge
www.siemens.com/specifications
www.siemens.com/tip-cs/planningmanuals
21

2.1.5 Managing Entire Projects

Project management
Supplying power is more than just combining a number of
individual components. It calls for large-scale projects, such as
transmission systems or industrial complexes, especially in
countries where the demand for power is growing at an accelerated pace. The best partner to handle such large projects is an
expert who can carefully analyze the demand, take an integrated
approach to project planning, and consider all the general conditions. A qualified project partner is one that can provide highquality components and services for both power transmission
tasks and power system management. Such a partner also can
ensure that the systems are installed expertly.
Turnkey solutions
Siemens many years of experience allow to offer turnkey
power transmission solutions that are tailored to individual
requirements. Siemens supplies all components, including
power plants, AC or DC transmission systems, and high-voltage
interconnected power systems with high, medium and low
voltage that finally reach the individual customers. What makes
these turnkey solutions so attractive is that one party is responsible for coordinating the entire project, thereby reducing the
number of interfaces between system operator and supplier to a
bare minimum. Turnkey projects also reduce the operators own
share in project risks, since Siemens is responsible for delivering
a system that is ready for operation.
Engineering, procurement, production and construction
In addition to comprehensive planning and management services, engineering is one of Siemens special strengths. Siemens
can produce or procure all necessary components and perform
all construction work up to testing, commissioning and putting
an entire system into operation. With Siemens as a partner,
companies can benefit from Siemens extensive manufacturing
expertise and from the work of experienced Siemens engineers
who have already participated in a wide range of projects worldwide. Working on this basis, Siemens can provide the best
technology for projects based on proprietary Siemens components and additional hardware purchased from reputable vendors. Siemens experts have the important task of determining
which of the various technical options are best suited for implementing the project. They consider transmission capacity,
transmission efficiency and the length of the transmission line,
and after the best technical solution has been determined, they
assess its long-term cost efficiency for the operator. Only then
can the actual implementation begin for installation and on-time
commissioning.
Maintenance
Systems will operate at their best when equipment lasts a long
time and provides continuous trouble-free operation. The
Siemens maintenance service ensures that all components are
always running safely and reliably. Siemens continuously maintains operator systems through regular inspections including all
switchgear and secondary technology. If a malfunction occurs
during operation, Siemens is immediately on the job; support is
22
available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. And with the increased
use of state-of-the-art online monitoring and remote diagnosis
systems, Siemens offers additional possibilities for keeping
operating costs to a minimum.
Optimization and modernization
Technological evolution leads to equipments and systems which
are continuously improving. Siemens offers retrofit and upgrade
services for existing schemes. This fast and economical solution
allows customers to invest their capital wisely and take full
advantage of Siemens experience in adapting older systems
to new technical standards.
2.1.6 Partners throughout the System

Life Cycle
Siemens is with system operators every step of the way to help
them develop their projects, to create financing solutions and to
provide project management (fig. 2.1-8), and supports them
beyond engineering, production and construction. This support
continues as the system is commissioned, as customers need
maintenance services and even when it is time to modernize.
The partnership between Siemens and the system operators
does not stop when a turnkey job is finished: Siemens accompanies the system operators throughout the entire life cycle of
their systems, offering a wide range of services with products
of the highest quality that are always based on the most durable
technologies.
Capabilities for project development, implementation and operation
Development phase
3 years
Technical advice
Feasibility study
Performances values:
Losses
Reliability
Availability
Design transmission
system
Financial close
Implementation phase
3 years
Financial advice
Economical assessment
Feasibility study
Flexibility
Rentability
Estimates
Bankability
Overall project management
Engineering
Basic design
Conceptual design
Detailed design
Procurement
Manufacturing
Global sourcing
Local sourcing
Construction
Erection
Commissioning
Training
Start of
commercial use
Operation
25 years
Maintenance and after-sales services
Fig. 2.1-8: Siemens services for the entire system life cycle

www.siemens.com/energy/power-transmission-solutions
www.siemens.com/energy/hvdc-facts-newsletter

2.2 High-Voltage DirectCurrent Transmission
Siemens HVDC transmission is used when technical and/or
economical feasibility of conventional high-voltage AC transmission technology have reached their limits. The limits are overcome by the basic operation principle of an HVDC system, which
is the conversion of AC into DC and viceversa by means of high
power converters.
Featuring its fast and precise controllability, a Siemens HVDC can
serve the following purposes:
Transmission of power via very long overhead lines or via long
cables where an AC transmission scheme is not economical or
even not possible
Transmission of power between asynchronous systems
Exact control of power flow in either direction
Enhancement of AC system stability
Reactive power control and support of the AC voltage
Frequency control
Power oscillation damping.
2.2.1 Siemens HVDC Technologies

Depending on the converter type used for conversion between
AC and DC, two technologies are available:
Line Commutated Converter technology (LCC) based on
thyristor valves
Voltage Sourced Converter technology (VSC) based on IGBT
valves, also known as HVDC PLUS.
Both technologies enable Siemens to provide attractive solutions
for most challenging transmission tasks ranging from extra-highvoltage bulk power transmission to the connection of systems in
remote locations to main grids; from long distance overhead line
or cable to interconnection of two systems at one location.
Back-to-back
station
Submarine cable
transmission
AC
AC
AC
AC
DC Cable
Long-distance
OHL transmission
AC
AC
DC Line
Fig. 2.2-1: Overview of main power transmission applications with

HVDC
2.2.2 Main Types of HVDC Schemes

The main types of HVDC converters are distinguished by their DC
circuit arrangements (fig. 2.2-1), as follows:
Back-to-back:
Rectifier and inverter are located in the same station. These
converters are mainly used:
To connect asynchronous high-voltage power systems or
systems with different frequencies
To stabilize weak AC links
To supply more active power where the AC system already is at
the limit of its short-circuit capability
For grid power flow control within synchronous AC systems.
Cable transmission:
DC cables are the most feasible solution for transmitting power
across the sea to supply islands/offshore platforms from the
mainland and vice versa.
Long-distance transmission:
Whenever bulk power is to be transmitted over long distances,
DC transmission is the more economical solution compared to
high-voltage AC.
23

2.2 High-Voltage Direct-Current Transmission
2.2.3 LCC HVDC

The Classical Solution
After more than 50 years history with Siemens constantly
contributing to its development, LCC HVDC is still the most
widely used DC transmission technology today.
Technology
Thyristor valves
The thyristor valves are used to perform the conversion from AC
into DC, and thus make up the central component of the HVDC
converter station. The valves are described by the following
features:
Robust design
Safe with respect to fire protection due to consequent use of
fire-retardant, self-extinguishing material
Minimum number of electrical connections and components
avoiding potential sources of failure
Parallel cooling for the valve levels using de-ionized cooling
water for maximum utilization of the thyristors
Earthquake-proof design as required (fig. 2.2-2)
Direct Light-Triggered Thyristors (LTT) with wafer-integrated
overvoltage protection the standard solution for transmission
ratings up to 5,000 MW
Electrically triggered thyristors for bulk power transmission up
to 7,200 MW and above.
Fig. 2.2-2: Earthquake-proof and fire-retardant thyristor valves in

500 kV long-distance transmission in Guizho-Guangdong,
China
Filter technology
Filters are used to balance the reactive power of HVDC and
power system and to meet high harmonic performance standards.
Single-tuned, double-tuned and triple-tuned as well as highpass passive filters, or any combination thereof, can be
installed depending on the specific requirements of a station
Active AC and DC filters are available for highest harmonic
performance
Wherever possible, identical filters are selected maintaining
the high performance even when one filter is switched off.
Applications
The primary application areas for LCC HVDC are:
Economical power transmission over long distances
Interconnection of asynchronous power grids without increase
in short-circuit power
Submarine DC cable transmission
Hybrid integration of HVDC into a synchronous AC system for
stability improvement
Increase in transmission capacity by conversion of AC lines into
DC lines.
Power ratings
Typical ratings for HVDC schemes include:
Back-to-back: up to typically 600 MW
Cable transmission: up to 1,000 MW per HVDC cable
Long-distance transmission: up to typically 7,200 MW.
24
Fig. 2.2-3: Two times two 400 kV converter systems connected in

series form a 800 kV UHV DC station

2.2.4 Ultra-HVDC Transmission

(UHV DC) Bulk Power
UHV DC from Siemens is the answer to the increasing demand
for bulk power transmission from remote power generation to
large load centers. After having been awarded the contract in
2007, Siemens has successfully commissioned the worlds first
800 kV UHV DC system with 5,000 MW in China Southern
Power Grid in 2010 (fig. 2.2-3).
Technology
The high DC voltage imposes extreme requirements to the
insulation of the equipment and leads to huge physical dimensions (fig. 2.2-4). The capability to withstand high electrical and
mechanical stresses is thoroughly investigated during the
design. All components are extensively tested to assure that they
withstand most severe operating conditions and meet highest
quality standards.
The thyristor valves are equipped with either 5 or 6 thyristors
depending on the transmission rating (fig. 2.2-5).
Fig. 2.2-4: A 20.8 m long wall bushing is required in order to connect

the 800 kV terminal of the indoor thyristor valves to the
outdoor HVDC equipment and overhead line
Applications
UHV DC transmission is the solution for bulk power transmission
of 5,000 MW or higher over some thousand kilometers. Compared to a 500 kV LCC HVDC system, the Siemens 800 kV UHV
DC reduces line losses by approx. 60 % an important aspect
with respect to CO2 reduction and operational cost.
Special attention has to be paid to the corresponding AC networks
that have to supply or absorb the high amounts of electric power.
Power ratings
The Siemens 800 kV HVDC systems are designed to transmit up
to 7,200 MW over long distances.
2.2.5 HVDC PLUS One Step Ahead
Fig. 2.2-5: UH voltage and power electronics the thyristor valves

are designed to operate at 800 kV voltage level. YunnanGuangdong, China
VSC technology offers unique advantages for HVDC transmission

which become more and more important for applications like
connecting remote renewable energy sources, oil and gas
platforms or mines to an existing grid.
Using the latest modular IGBT (Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor)
technology in a pioneering Modular Multilevel Converter (MMC)
design, Siemens engineers have developed HVDC PLUS as a
landmark product in the evolution of HVDC transmission.
The high power ratings available today make HVDC PLUS increasingly attractive also for projects where LCC HVDC could be used
from a technical perspective.
Features
HVDC PLUS provides important technical and economical
advantages compared to LCC:
HVDC technology in the smallest possible space:
An HVDC PLUS station does typically not require any harmonic
Fig. 2.2-6: Converter Station of the TransBay Project close to the

city center of San Francisco. The worlds first VSC HVDC
transmission scheme in Modular Multi-level Converter
(MMC) topology
25

filters (fig. 2.2-6). The MMC design allows to realize nearly

perfect sinusoidal AC-side converter terminal voltages which
are virtually free from harmonics. Together with a compact
design of the MMC, this makes HVDC PLUS perfectly suitable
for offshore platforms or stations with limited space
(fig. 2.2-7).
Independence from short-circuit capacity:
HVDC PLUS can operate in networks with very low short-circuit
capacity or even in isolated systems with or without own
generation using its black-start capability.
Unipolar DC voltage
The DC voltage polarity is fixed independently from the
direction of power flow. This allows integration into multiterminal systems or DC grids. HVDC PLUS can operate with
extruded XLPE or mass-impregnated DC cables.
Economical design and standardization:
The modularly designed HVDC PLUS converter stations can be
perfectly adapted to the required power rating.
For symmetrical monopolar configurations, standard AC
transformers can be used, whereas LCC transformers require
special design due to additional stresses from DC voltage and
harmonics.
Fig. 2.2-7: The heart of HVDC PLUS is a modular multilevel converter

(MMC) which can be scaled according to the voltage or
power requirements. Transbay Cable, USA
Uac
Udc
Half-bridge type MMC:

The power capacitor can
be connected in one
polarity to the terminals.
Udc
Uac
"on"
Uac
Udc
Full-bridge type MMC:
Applications
HVDC PLUS can be applied in all fields of HVDC transmission
there are no technical restrictions. The advantages of HVDC PLUS
will be most apparent in circumstances that require the following capabilities:
Black start of AC networks
Operation in AC networks with low short-circuit capacity
Compact design, e. g., for offshore platforms
Operation in DC multi-terminal systems or in a DC grid.
The power capacitor can

be connected in either
polarity to the terminals.
"off"
Udc
Uac
0
-Udc
Fig. 2.2-8: MMC topologies: half and full bridge
+Ud /2
1
2
Power ratings
The design of HVDC PLUS is optimized for power applications in
the range from 30 MW up to 1,000 MW or higher, depending on
the DC voltage.
Topologies (fig. 2.2-8)
Different topologies are available in order to fit best for the
project specific requirements:
Half-bridge (HB) topology
The DC voltage is always controlled in one polarity only. Such a
configuration is preferred for DC circuits with pure cable
configurations. The risk of DC-side faults are small and
typically lead to a permanent shutdown of the link
Full-bridge (FB) topology
The DC voltage can be controlled in a wide range including
both polarities. Such a topology is predestinated for DC circuits
with overhead lines, and provides the same features as known
from HVDC Classic: DC line faults (e.g. due to lightning strikes)
are cleared safely by a short-time reversion of the voltage.
Furthermore, operation at reduced DC voltage levels is possible,
which is often specified in case of pollution problems of line
insulators.
26
UAC
UConv.
0
1
2
n
-Ud /2
Fig. 2.2-9: Half-bridge MMC: The DC voltage is always higher than

the AC voltage
+Ud /2
AC and DC Voltages
2
n
UAC
UConv.
0
1
2
-Ud /2
Fig. 2.2-10: Full-bridge MMC: The DC voltage is independent from

the AC voltage and can be controlled to zero, or even be
entirely reversed maintaining current control on the AC
and DC sides including under short-circuit conditions

2.2.6 DC Compact Switchgear DC CS

Business drivers for the development of DC compact
switchgear
The changing generation and load structure in existing power
grids requires increased transmission capacity. Longer transmission distances and increased loading tend to reduce the AC grids
static and dynamic stability. To amend this, HVDC systems can be
integrated into existing AC grids to provide the required transmission capacity, and at the same time increase grid stability.
What is more, the global trend towards decarbonization of

power generation calls for an increased use of renewable energy
sources (RES). While RES like offshore wind are typically found at
great distances from the load centers, HVDC provides an effective (and in some cases the only) technical solution for power
transmission.
The compact 320 kV DC switchgear DC CS is needed for HVDC
cable connections to remote offshore wind farms, as well as for
onshore HVDC projects. Thanks to its compact design, the DC CS
helps to reduce the HVDC systems space requirements. Hence it
is predestinated for applications where space is limited or expensive, e.g. offshore HVDC platforms for remote windfarms, as well
as close to city centers.
Using the DC CS outdoors even in rough climates adds to this

effect. In the near future, DC compact switchgear and transmission solutions facilitate the realization of multi-terminal arrangements or DC grids, backing up the existing AC networks.
Disconnector and
earthing switch
Surge arrester
Voltage and current

measurement
Interface modules
Passive modules
Fig. 2.2-11: Standardized modules of the DC CS product line
-Z1
= 31C01
= 32C01
= 41C01
= 42C01
-F1
-T1
-Q51
-Q11
-Q52
-F2
-Z2
Fig. 2.2-12: 320 kV DC switchyard in/out bay
27

Modular structure
The 320 kV Direct-Current Compact Switchgear (DC CS) (without
circuit-breaker) is developed based on proven 8DQ1 550 kV AC
GIS design and a new DC insulator following the well-established
resin-impregnated-paper design which is used in wall bushings
for decades.
The DC CS is a highly modularized product line, with standardized and predefined modules (fig. 2.2-11) which minimize the
required interface engineering complexity between the DC CS
modules as well as interfaces to e.g. control and protection
systems. Examples of a 320 kV converter pole feeder arrangements are given in fig. 2.2-12 and fig. 2.2-13.
The range of modules like 0/90 disconnector and earthing
switch modules, 45/90 angle modules grant flexibility to adapt
to complex arrangements such as designs with a single or
double busbar.
Fig. 2.2-13: 320 kV DC compact switchgear in the Siemens factory

in Berlin
The module catalog is completed by an RC divider for voltage

measurement, the zero flux compensated current measurement
system, surge arrester and compensation modules required for
service access, and both axial and lateral heat dilatation.
Application and special arrangements
DC compact switchgear can be applied at various locations with
an HVDC system as displayed in fig. 2.2-13. An important application option for DC CS is between the converter transformer
and the converter valves. With bipolar arrangements where 2 or
more converters are arranged in a line with neutral in between,
the section between the secondary connection of a converter
transformer and the respective converter valves is stressed with
a DC voltage offset resulting in a mixed voltage stress AC/DC
requiring dedicated DC equipment. On the DC terminal, the DC
switchyard, transition stations (enabling compact transition
from cable to overhead line) along the line and finally future
multi-terminal stations can be planned with DC CS.
The most important benefit of 320 kV DC compact switchgear is
its inherent size advantage compared to air-insulated DC switchyard equipment.
Furthermore, the option for outdoor installation, even under
extreme environmental conditions, is an advantage of DC CS. If
for technical reasons, like temperature below -30 C, a housing
is required, the DC CS fits into pre-fabricated, containerized
building modules (fig. 2.2-14). Containerized arrangements
further have the advantage to pre-assemble and test whole
switchyard/substation layouts locally at the manufacturers or
the container builders plant, cutting short remote erection and
commissioning efforts and costs, as well as simplifying the
interface to civil works. Layouts with identical design which are
repetitively used in a HVDC scheme can be planned and executed likewise, e.g. cable transition stations. Building and
foundation costs can therefore be greatly reduced.
28
Fig. 2.2-14: 320 kV containerized arrangement
Finally, an underground installation hidden from view and public

access is possible thanks to the encapsulation and compact
design.
Regarding planned projects in densely populated areas, with
critical points which are already occupied by traffic junctions and
AC overhead lines as well as by natural barriers like rivers, huge
potential for compact DC transmission solutions is existent.

Bipolar
configuration
Converter DC
switchyard
Transition station
cable OHL
Multi-terminal
station
t
t
AC
AC + DC
t
DC
Fig. 2.2-15: Application for DC compact switchgear, between transformer and valves, DC switchyard, transition station and multi-terminal
station
Technical data for switchgear type 320 kV DC CS
Rated voltage
320 kV
Rated current
4,000 A
Rated short-circuit current
50kA/1sec
Max. continuous operating voltage
336 kV
Lightning impulse voltage to earth/

across terminals
1175 kV
1175 kV
336 kV
Switching impulse voltage to earth/

across terminals
950 kV
950 kV
336 kV
DC withstand voltage
504 kV, 60 min
Ambient temperature
-30C+50C
Application
Indoor/Outdoor
Table 2.2-1: Technical data of 320 kV DC CS
Contact person to be quoted in the Power Engineering Guide:

Dr. Denis Imamovic
[email protected]
09131 / 7-44510
Questions regarding this draft:

Maik Behne
[email protected]
09131 / 7-43518
29

2.2. Siemens HVDC Control System:

Win-TDC
The control and protection system is an important element in an
HVDC transmission. The Siemens control and protection system
for HVDC has been designed with special focus on high flexibility
and high dynamic performance, and benefits from the knowledge gained from over 30 years of operational experience in
HVDC and related fields of other industries (fig. 2.2-16).
High reliability is achieved with a redundant and robust design.

All control and protection components from the human-machine
interface (HMI), control and protection systems down to the
measuring equipment for DC current and voltage quantities have
been designed to take advantage of the latest software and
hardware developments. These control and protection systems
are based on standard products with a product lifecycle of
25 years or more.
Operator Level
SIMATIC WinCC
Local HMI
SCADA Interface
Remote HMI
RCI
C&P Level
SIMATIC TDC
PLUSCONTROL
CCS
I/O Level
I/O Unit
I/O Unit
Measuring
MMS 1
MMS n
Fig. 2.2-16: Win-TDC hierarchy More than 30 years of experience

are built into the hierarchical Siemens HVDC control
system which is based on standard components most
widely used also in other industries
The name Win-TDC reflects the combination of the PC-based HMI

system SIMATIC WinCC and the high-performance industrial
control system SIMATIC TDC for Microsoft Windows.
SIMATIC WinCC (Windows Control Centre) is used for operator
control and monitoring of HVDC systems.
SIMATIC TDC (Technology and Drive Control) is a high-performance automation system which allows the integration of both
open-loop and high-speed closed-loop controls within this single
system. It is especially suitable for HVDC (and other power
electronics applications) demanding high-performance closedloop control. For extremely fast control functions as required in
HVDC PLUS systems, SIMATIC TDC is complemented by the
dedicated PLUSCONTROL comprising the fast Current Control
System (CCS) and the Module Management System (MMS).
SIMATIC WinCC and SIMATIC TDC are used in a wide range of industrial applications including power generation and distribution.
In Siemens LCC HVDC systems, the DC currents and voltages are
measured with a hybrid electro-optical system: DC current with a
shunt located at HV potential, DC voltage with a resistive/
capacitive voltage divider. Both systems use laser-powered
measuring electronics so that only optical connections are made
to the ground level controls this provides the necessary HV
isolation and noise immunity.
For HVDC PLUS, the DC currents are measured with a zero flux
measuring system, which provides the required accuracy and
dynamic response for fast control during grid transients. The
zero flux cores are located at ground level on suitable locations,
e. g., converter hall bushings or cable sealing ends.
Siemens provides proven hardware and software systems built
around state-of-the-art technologies. Their performance and
reliability fulfils the most demanding requirements for both new
installations and control system replacement (fig. 2.2-17).
30
Fig. 2.2-17: The control and protection cubicles are intensively tested
in the Siemens laboratories before they are shipped
to site, assuring fast and smooth commissioning of the
HVDC system

2.2. Services
The following set of services completes the Siemens HVDC
portfolio.
Turnkey service
Experienced staff designs, installs and commissions the HVDC
system on a turnkey basis.
Project financing
Siemens is ready to assist customers in finding proper project
financing.
General services
Extended support is provided to customers of Siemens from the
very beginning of HVDC system planning, including:
Feasibility studies
Drafting the specification
Project execution
System operation and long-term maintenance
Consultancy on upgrading/replacement of components/
redesign of older schemes, e. g., retrofit of mercury-arc valves
or relay-based controls.
Studies during contract execution are conducted on system
engineering, power system stability and transients:
Load-flow optimization
HVDC systems basic design
System dynamic response
Harmonic analysis and filter design for LCC HVDC
Insulation and protection coordination
Radio and PLC interference
Special studies, if any.

www.siemens.com/energy/hvdc
www.siemens.com/energy/hvdc-plus
www.energy.siemens.com/hq/en/power-transmission/hvdc/
innovations.htm
31

2.3 Flexible AC Transmission
Systems
Flexible AC Transmission Systems (FACTS) have been evolving to
a mature technology with high power ratings. The technology,
proven in numerous applications worldwide, became a first-rate,
highly reliable one. FACTS, based on power electronics, have
been developed to improve the performance of weak AC systems
and to make long distance AC transmission feasible and are an
essential part of Smart Grid and Super Grid developments (refer
to chapter 1).
FACTS can also help solve technical problems in the interconnected

power systems. FACTS are available in parallel connection:
Static Var Compensator (SVC)
Static Synchronous Compensator (STATCOM)
or in series connection:
Fixed Series Compensation (FSC)
Thyristor Controlled/Protected Series Compensation (TCSC/TPSC).
heavy load conditions. Their utilization has almost no effect on

the short-circuit power but it increases the voltage at the point
of connection
Mechanically switched reactors have exactly the opposite
effect and are therefore preferable for achieving stabilization
under low load conditions
An advanced form of mechanically switched capacitor is the
MSCDN. This device is an MSC with an additional damping
circuit for avoidance of system resonances.
Static Var Compensator (SVC)
Static var compensators are a fast and reliable means of controlling voltage on transmission lines and system nodes (fig. 2.3-1b,
2.3.1 Parallel Compensation

Parallel compensation is defined as any type of reactive power
compensation employing either switched or controlled units that
are connected in parallel to the transmission system at a power
system node.
Mechanically Switched Capacitors/Reactors (MSC/MSR)
Mechanically switched devices are the most economical reactive
power compensation devices (fig. 2.3-1a).
Mechanically switched capacitors are a simple but low-speed
solution for voltage control and network stabilization under
Fig. 2.3-2: Static Var Compensator (SVC) installation
Parallel compensation
a) MSC (DN)/MSR
(DN = Damping network)

800 kV
300 MVAr
b)
c)
SVC
800 kV
250 MVAr
(and more)
800 kV
1000 MVAr
MSC MSR
2
3
MSC DN
d)
Hybrid SVC
800 kV
Individual MVAr
5
1
SVC PLUS
3
9
2
4
3
2
4
1 Switchgear 2 Capacitor 3 Reactor 4 Thyristor valve(s) 5 Transformer 6 IGBT converter 7 DC capacitors 8 Arrester 9 Resistor
Fig. 2.3-1a: Mechanically switched capacitors (MSC), mechanically switched reactors (MSR) and mechanically switched capacitors
with damping network (MSC DN)
Fig. 2.3-1b: Static var compensator (SVC) with three branches (TCR, TSC, filter) and coupling transformer
Fig. 2.3-1c: SVC PLUS connected to the transmission system
Fig. 2.3-1d: Hybrid SVC connected to the transmission system
32

2.3 Flexible AC Transmission Systems
fig. 2.3-2). The reactive power is changed by switching or controlling reactive power elements connected to the secondary
side of the transformer. Each capacitor bank is switched ON and
OFF by thyristor valves (TSC). Reactors can be either switched
(TSR) or controlled (TCR) by thyristor valves.
When system voltage is low, the SVC supplies capacitive reactive

power and rises the network voltage. When system voltage is
high, the SVC generates inductive reactive power and reduces
the system voltage.
Static var compensators perform the following tasks:
Improvement in voltage quality
Dynamic reactive power control
Increase in system stability
Damping of power oscillations
Increase in power transfer capability
Unbalance control (option).
Fig. 2.3-3: Two SVC PLUS units in New Zealand
The design and configuration of an SVC, including the size of the

installation, operating conditions and losses, depend on the
system conditions (weak or strong), the system configuration
(meshed or radial) and the tasks to be performed.
SVC PLUS new generation of STATCOM
SVC PLUS is an advanced STATCOM which uses Voltage-Sourced
Converter (VSC) technology based on Modular Multilevel
Converter (MMC) design.
MMC provides a nearly ideal sinus-shaped waveform on the AC
side. Therefore, there is only little if any need for harmonic
filtering
MMC allows for low switching frequencies, which reduces
system losses.
SVC PLUS uses robust, proven standard components, such as
typical AC power transformers, reactors and switchgear.
Using containerized SVC PLUS solutions with small operating
ranges will result in significant space savings in comparison to
a conventional SVC installation.
Applications
SVC PLUS with its superior undervoltage performance fulfills the
same task as conventional SVCs. Due to the advanced technology, SVC PLUS is the preferred solution for grid access solutions (e. g., wind parks).
Modular system design
The modular SVC PLUS is equipped with industrial class IGBT
(Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors) power modules and DC
capacitors.
A very high level of system availability, thanks to the
redundancy of power modules
Standard WinCC and SIMATIC TDC control and protection
hardware and software are fully proven in practice in a wide
range of applications worldwide.
Fig. 2.3-4: SVC PLUS containerized solution
Portfolio
Standardized configurations are available: 25, 35, and
50 MVAr as containerized solutions. Up to four of these units
can be configured as a fully parallel operating system
Easily expendable and relocatable
Open rack modular system configuration (in a building) allows
for operating ranges of 250 MVAr and more.
Hybrid SVCs comprise a combination of both, multilevel
STATCOM and conventional thyristor based SVC technology.
This solution combines the benefits of the SVC PLUS, especially
the undervoltage performance, with the flexibility of
unsymmetrical operating ranges by TSR and TSC.
33

2.3.2 Series Compensation
Thyristor-Protected Series Capacitor (TPSC)

An enhanced configuration of the FSC is the TPSC. In this case,
high-power thyristors in combination with a current-limiting
reactor are installed in parallel to the limiting series capacitors,
and substitute the spark gap as well as the MOVs as protection
devices. The protection of the power capacitor is performed by
firing a bypass of the thyristors valves. Due to the very short
cooling-down times of the special thyristor valves, TPSCs can be
quickly returned to service after a line fault, allowing the transmission lines to be utilized to their maximum capacity. TPSCs are
the first choice whenever transmission lines must be returned to
maximum carrying capacity as quickly as possible after a failure
(fig. 2.3-6c).
Series compensation is defined as insertion of reactive power

elements into transmission lines. The most common application
is the fixed series capacitor (FSC). Thyristor-valve controlled
systems (TCSC) and thyristor-valve protected systems (TPSC) may
also be installed.
Fixed Series Capacitor (FSC)

The simplest and most cost-effective type of series compensation is provided by FSCs. FSCs comprise the actual capacitor
banks, and for protection purposes, parallel arresters (metaloxide varistors, MOVs), spark gaps and a bypass switch for
isolation purposes (fig. 2.3-6a).
Fixed series capacitor provides the following benefits:
Increase in transmission capacity
Reduction in transmission angle.
Thyristor-Controlled Series Capacitor (TCSC)
Reactive power compensation by means of TCSCs can be
adapted to a wide range of operating conditions. In this configuration, a TCR is connected in parallel to the capacitor bank. This
allows to tune the overall system impedance of the TCSC
according to the varying stystem operation conditions during
dynamic disturbances. Spark gaps and major part of the arresters
can be omitted in this configuration.
Additional benefits of thyristor-controlled series capacitor:
Increase in system stability
Damping of power oscillations (POD)
Load flow control
Mitigation of sub-synchronous torsional interaction (SSTI).
Fig. 2.3-5: View of a TCSC system

www.siemens.com/energy/facts
Series compensation
a)
FSC
b)
800 kV
1000 MVAr
TCSC
800 kV
250 MVAr
TPSC
800 kV
500 MVAr
2
5
c)
2
3
1
6
L im
1 Spark gap 2 Capacitor 3 Reactor 4 Thyristor valve(s) 5 Arrester 6 Circuit-breaker

Fig. 2.3-6a: Fixed series capacitor (FSC) connected to the network
Fig. 2.3-6b: Thyristor-controlled series capacitor (TCSC) connected to the network
Fig. 2.3-6c: Thyristor-protected series capacitor (TPSC) connected to the network
34

2.3.3 Synchronous Condenser

Synchronous condenser solutions are being reintroduced
worldwide to support todays transmission system requirements.
The addition of renewables-based power generation to the
energy mix, phase-out of conventional power plants, new HVDC
systems, and the extension of power supply systems to remote
areas influence the stability of transmission systems. Hence, the
installation of synchronous condenser solutions has become
necessary to provide sufficient support to the transmission
systems.
The benefits of synchronous condensers
Provision of short-circuit power and inertia
Steady-stage and dynamic voltage control
Reactive power control of dynamic loads.
Fig. 2.3-7: Synchronous generator
A synchronous condenser solution generally consists of a synchronous generator connected to the high-voltage transmission
system via a step-up transformer. The synchronous generator is
started up and braked with a frequency-controlled electric motor
(pony motor) or a starting frequency converter. When the generator has reached operating synchronous speed depending on
the system frequency, it is automatically synchronized with the
transmission system, and the machine is operated as a motor
providing reactive and short-circuit power to the transmission
system.
The generator is equipped with either a brushless exciter or with
a conventional static exciter with brushes. The two solutions
have different characteristics with respect to dynamic behaviors,
and are selected according to the project requirements. Contrary
to power-electronics-based static var compensators (SVCs), a
synchronous condenser features the major advantages of
injecting large amounts of short-circuit power and providing
inertia due to its rotating mass.
Fig. 2.3-8: Synchronous condenser in Bjaeverskov, Denmark
Synchronous condensers offered as tailor-made turnkey solutions are based on proven, reliable in-house equipment, extensive know-how on transmission system requirements, and
project execution experience. Siemens supplies a broad range of
generators up to 1,300 MVA at nominal frequency. The generators are based on air, hydrogen or water-cooled technologies.
Applications
1. Stabilization of grids with high amounts of wind energy
infeed
The synchronous condenser provides the transmission system
with short-circuit power and reactive power control to operate
the transmission system including an infeed of large amounts
of wind power.
2. Support of HVDC Classic under weak system conditions
The synchronous condenser can increase the short-circuit power
of weak systems. Furthermore it can improve the phase angle
stability of the AC system by providing an additional rotating
mass (increase in inertia time constant).
Fig. 2.3-9: Synchronous condenser building of the HVDC Black Sea

Transmission Network, Georgia
35

2.4 Power Transmission Lines
2.4.1 Gas-Insulated Transmission Lines
For high-power transmission systems where overhead lines are not
suitable, alternatives are gas-insulated transmission lines (GIL). GIL
exhibit the following differences to cables:
High-power ratings (transmission capacity up to 3,700 MVA
per system)
High overload capability
Auto-reclosing functionality without overheating risk
Suitable for long distances (70 km and more without
compensation of reactive power)
High short-circuit withstand capability (even in the theoretical
case of internal arc faults)
Possibility of direct connection to gas-insulated switchgear
(GIS) and gas-insulated arresters without cable entrance fitting
Non-flammable; no fire risk in case of failures
Lowest electromagnetic field.
History / Siemens experience

When SF6 was introduced in the 1960s as an insulating and
switching gas, it became the basis for the development of gasinsulated switchgear. On basis of the experience collected with
GIS, Siemens started to develop SF6 gas-insulated lines to transmit
electrical energy. The aim was to create alternatives to air insulated overhead lines with decisively smaller clearances. In the early
1970s initial projects were implemented. More installations in
tunnels and above ground followed. In the course of product
optimization, the initially used insulating medium SF6 was
replaced by a gas mixture where the majority of the insulating gas
is nitrogen, a non toxic natural gas. Only a comparatively small
portion of sulfur hexafluoride (SF6) is still needed. Thus, the way
was free for environmentally friendly long transmission projects
with GIL. The latest innovation of Siemens GIL is the directly
buried laying technique, which was a further milestone for long
distance transmission with GIL.
Challenges now and in the future
Continuously growing world population and urbanization lead to
a strongly increased demand for bulk power transmission at
extra high voltage, right into the heart of cities. At the same
time, the available space for transmission systems has been
restricted more and more, and environmental requirements such
as EMC and fire protection have gained increased importance.
GIL fulfil these requirements perfectly. Meanwhile power generation is undergoing a conceptual change as well. As natural
resources are limited, regenerative power generation is
becoming more important. Offshore wind parks and solar power
plants are being installed, providing a huge amount of energy at
remote places. Consequently, transmission systems are needed
which allow to transport this bulk power with utmost reliability
and with the least possible losses.
The transmission systems of the future will be measured by their
overall CO2 balance, asking for the minimum possible environmental impact from production of the equipment through
36
Fig. 2.4-1: GIL arrangement in the tunnel of the pumped-storage

power plant in Wehr, Southern Germany (4,000 m length;
in service since 1975)
Magnetic flux density B [T]

High EM compatibitity
Magnetic fields in
microtesla [T] for GIL,
overhead transmission
line and cable (XLPE,
cross-bonding) for a
400 kV double system
at 2 1,000 MVA load,
GIL and cable laid at a
depth of 1 m.
30
Cable
25
Overhead
line
20
15
10
5
GIL
0
Fig. 2.4-2: A comparison of the magnetic fields for different highvoltage transmission systems
t CO2 equivalent 1 GVA (40 a, 1 km)

75,258
80,000
70,000
60,000
50,000
40,000
30,000
Manufacture
SF6 leaks
Electrical losses
28,466
20,000
10,000
0
GIL
OHL
Fig. 2.4-3: Overall CO2 impact of different transmission systems (one

system)

operational while in service until its end of service life. Due to its
properties and low losses, the overall CO2 impact of GIL is clearly
lower than that of traditional overhead-lines, proving the GILs
environment friendliness.
Reliable technology
The gas-insulated transmission line technique is highly reliable
in terms of mechanical and electrical design. Experience over
the course of 35 years shows that after a GIL system is commissioned and in service, it runs safely without dielectrical or
mechanical failures. Consequently, Siemens GIL in service for
decades did not have to undergo their initially planned revision
after 20 years of operation. Instead, a mere inspection was
sufficient as there was no sign of any weak point. From the
operational experience gained with Siemens GIL and GIB, the
Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) was estimated > 213 years
for a 1-km-long GIL system.
Fig. 2.4-4: Long-term test setup at IPH, Berlin
Basic design
In order to meet electrical and mechanical design criteria, gasinsulated lines have considerable cross-sections of enclosure and
conductor, which ensures high-power transmission ratings and
low losses. Because of the geometry and the gaseous insulating
medium, the systems create only low capacitive loads, so that
compensation of reactive power is not needed, not even for
longer distances. The typical technical data of the GIL are shown
in table 2.4-1.
Testing
GIL systems are tested according to the international standard
IEC 62271-204 Rigid high-voltage, gas-insulated transmission
lines for voltages of 72.4 kV and above (fig. 2.4-4, fig. 2.4-5).
The long-term performance of GIL has been proven by tests at
the independent test laboratory IPH, Berlin, Germany, and the
former Berlin power utility BEWAG (now ELIA). The test pattern
was set by adopting long-term test procedures for power cables.
The test procedure consisted of load cycles with doubled voltage
and increased current as well as frequently repeated highvoltage tests. The results confirmed the meanwhile more than
35 years of field experience with GIL installations worldwide.
The Siemens GIL was the first in the world to have passed these
long-term tests without any problems. Fig. 2.4-6 shows the test
setup arranged in a tunnel of 3 m diameter.
Fault containment
Tests have proven that the arcing behavior of GIL is excellent. It
is even further improved by using mixed-gas insulations. Consequently there would be no external damage or fire caused by an
internal fault.
Electromagnetic compatibility allows flexible route planning
The construction of the GIL results in much smaller electromagnetic fields than with conventional power transmission systems.
A reduction by a factor of 15 to 20 can be achieved. This makes
GIL suitable to follow new routings through populated areas
(e.g., next to hospitals or residential areas, in the vicinity of
flight monitoring systems, etc.). GIL can be laid in combined
Fig. 2.4-5: Siemens lab sample for dielectric tests
Technical data short-circuit capacity 63 kA

Rated voltage
Up to 550 kV
Rated current
up to 5,000 A
Transmission capacity
up to 3,700 MVA
Capacitance
60 nF / km
Length
up to 70 km
Gas mixture SF6/N2
20 % / 80 % (400 kV),
60 % / 40 % (500 kV)
Laying
Directly buried
In tunnels, sloping galleries, vertical shafts
Open-air installation, above ground
Table 2.4-1: Technical data of GIL
37

infrastructure tunnels together with foreign elements (e.g.,

close to telecommunication equipment and similar). Thus, GIL
provides maximum flexibility for the planning of transmission
systems, in EMC-sensitive environments, where magnetic fields
have to be avoided. Siemens GIL systems can satisfy the most
stringent magnetic flux density requirements, for example, the
Swiss limit of 1 T (fig. 2.4-4, fig. 2.4-5).
Jointing technique
In order to perfectionize gas tightness and to facilitate laying of
long straight lines, flanges may be avoided as a jointing technique. Instead, welding the various GIL construction units
ensures highest quality (fig. 2.4-6). Siemens welding process is
highly automated by using orbital welding machines. This as
well contributes to high productivity in the welding process and
a short overall installation time. To ensure quality, the welds are
controlled by a new sophisticated ultrasonic testing system
which exceeds even X-ray test standards.
Laying
During the installation process, climatic influences such as rain,
dust, seasons of the year, etc. need to be taken into account. To
meet Siemens requirements for cleanness and quality, the laying
techniques of GIL differ from pipeline technology. To protect the
assembly area against dust, particles, humidity and other environmental factors, a temporary installation tent is set up for the
installation period. In this way, working conditions are created
which meet the standards of modern GIS factories. After the GIL
is installed, these supporting installations are removed completely, and the entire area is re-naturalized. Thus, GIL are well
suitable for use in environmentally protected areas. Due to the
small width of GIL routes, the system is specifically compatible
with the landscape.
Above ground installation
GIL installation above ground are a trouble-free option for use in
properties with restricted public access. The open air technology
is proven under all climatic conditions in numerous installations
all over the world. GIL are unaffected by high ambient temperatures, intensive solar radiation or severe atmospheric pollution
(such as dust, sand or moisture). Due to the use of corrosion
resistant alloys, corrosion protection can be omitted in most
application cases (fig. 2.4-7).
Fig. 2.4-6: Orbital welding of GIL pipes
Fig. 2.4-7: Above ground installation
Fig. 2.4-8: GIL laying technique for tunnel installation
Tunnel installation
Tunnels made up of prefabricated structural elements provide a
quick and easy method of GIL installation especially in densely
populated areas. The tunnel elements are assembled in a digand-cover trench, which is backfilled immediately. The GIL is
installed once the tunnel has been completed. Thus, the open
trench time is minimized. With this method of installation, the
land above the tunnel can be fully restored to other purpose of
use (fig. 2.4-8).
Vertical installation
Gas-insulated tubular lines can be installed without problems at
any gradient, even vertically. This makes them a top solution
especially for cavern power plants, where large amounts of
38
Fig. 2.4-9: Directly buried GIL

energy have to be transmitted from the bottom of the cavern

(e.g., the machine transformer / switchgear) to the surface (overhead line). As GIL systems pose no fire risk, they can be integrated
without restriction into tunnels or shafts that are accessible to
man, and can also be used for ventilation at the same time. Thus,
cost for tunnelling works can be reduced clearly.
The use of GIL in hydro power plant projects with the highest
demand on reliability transporting electricity of 3900 MVA of
power safely and efficiently from the dam to the population
centers is becoming of more importance.
Direct burying
Especially when used in lesser populated areas, directly buried
GIL are a perfect solution. For that purpose, the tubes are safeguarded by a passive and active corrosion protection. The passive system comprises a HDPE coating which ensures at least
40 years of protection. The active system additionally provides
cathodic DC protection potential for the aluminum tubes.
Magentic fields measured at the surface above the line are
minimal. The high transmission power of GIL minimizes the
width of trench. The land consumption is lower by approx.
1/3 related to comparable cable installations (fig. 2.4-9).
Total length, single phase:

Above ground installation:
Tunnel installation:
Directly buried installation:
> 90,000 m
> 55,000 m
> 25,000 m
> 5,000 m
Fig. 2.4-10: References: Gas-insulated transmission lines,

status 2014
References
Siemens has gained experience with gas-insulated transmission
lines at rated voltages of up to 550 kV, and with phase lengths
totalling more than 90 km (2014). Implemented projects include
GIL in tunnels, sloping galleries, vertical shafts, open-air installations, as well as directly buried. Flanging as well as welding has
been applied as jointing technique.
The first GIL stretch built by Siemens was the connection of the
turbine generator pumping motor of the pumped storage power
plant of Wehr in the Black Forest in Southern Germany with the
switchyard. The 420 kV GIL is laid in a tunnel through a mountain and has a single-phase length of ~4,000 m (fig. 2.4-1). This
connection was commissioned in 1975. One of the later installations is the Limberg II pumped-storage power plant in Kaprun,
Austria, which was commissioned in 2010. Here a GIL system
was laid in a shaft with a gradient of 42 . It connects the cavern
power plant with the 380 kV overhead line at an altitude of
about 1,600 meters. The GIL tunnel is used for ventilation
purposes, and serves for emergency exit as well. That resulted in
substantial cost reduction by eliminating the need for a second
shaft in this project (fig. 2.4-11).
A typical example for a city link is the PALEXPO project in
Geneva, Switzerland. A GIL system in a tunnel substitutes
500 meters of a former 300 kV double circuit overhead line,
which had to move for the raised exhibition centre building. The
line owner based his decision to opt for a GIL over a cable solution on the GILs much better values with respect to EMC. Thus,
governmental requirements are met, and high sensitive electronic equipment can be exhibited and operated in the new hall
without any danger of interference from the 300 kV connection
located below it (fig. 2.4-12).
Fig. 2.4-11: GIL laid in shaft with 42 gradient

(Limberg, Kaprun, Austria)
Fig. 2.4-12: GIL replacing overhead line

(Palexpo, Geneva, Switzerland)
39

A typical example for a directly buried GIL is the reference project

at Frankfurt Airport in Kelsterbach, which was commissioned in
April 2011. The GIL solution allows to continue one phase of the
OHL in one phase of GIL, thus reducing the size of both trench
and transition area at the connection points (fig. 2.4-9).
Typical examples for vertically installed GIL are the hydro power
plant projects Xiluodu and Jinping in China energized in 2013.
Xiluodu (fig. 2.4-13) is the longest vertically installed GIL having
an average vertical distance of more than 460 meters from
turbines in the power cavern to the overhead transmission lines
on top of the dam. In total 12 kilometers of welded GIL were
installed divided on 7 GIL systems.
At Jinping (fig. 2.4-14), the worlds tallest HPP dam, three GIL
Systems from Siemens span 230 meters vertical shafts. For this
project, Siemens had to demonstrate its capability of mastering
extremely difficult site conditions, and at the same time accelerate the installation to meet the energization target for the HPP.
Fig. 2.4-13: Vertically installed GIL in Xiluodu, China
For further information, please contact:

Tel.: ++ 49 91 31-7- 2 72 62
E-mail: [email protected]
40
Fig. 2.4-14: Jinping, China, the worlds tallest HPP dam

2.4.2 High-Voltage Power Cables

Cables intended for the transmission and distribution of
electrical energy are mainly used in power plants, in distribution
systems and substations of power supply utilities, and in
industry. Standard cables are suitable for most applications.
They are preferably used where overhead lines are not suitable.
Cables exhibit the following differences to gas-insulated
transmission lines (GIL):
For operating voltages up to 220 kV, as well as where the rated
design current is below ~2500A, the investment costs for the
primary cable equipment are lower than for other underground
transmission systems
The installation time at site is comparatively short, as long
cable lengths (e.g., up to 800m or even higher depending
on cable design) can be delivered on one drum, which
significantly reduces jointing and installation times
During cable laying, the open-trench-times for earth-buried
systems are comparatively short
Cables do not contain any unbound climate-damaging SF6 gas
The costs of de-installation of a cable plant are significantly
lower; a high level of recycling is possible.
64/110 kV
76/132 kV
67/150 kV
High-voltage
cables
of different
manufacturers
Sealing ends form the termination points of a cable, and serve

as a connection to switchgear, transformers and overhead lines.
Fig. 2.4-16 shows the different types of cable accessories,
fig. 2.4-18 an example of an outdoor sealing end.
Siemens offers vendor-neutral consulting and evaluation of
cable manufacturers, and procurement of high-voltage cables
and accessories, adapted in case of application. The factories of
the cable manufacturers are audited by Siemens chief engineers
taking under consideration all relevant DIN VDE and IEC standards.
In addition, the following engineering tasks can be performed by
specialists from Siemens.
XLPE
insulation
AI wires &
laminated
sheath
Cu corrugated
sheath
127/220 kV
160/275 kV
190/330 kV
230/380 kV
290/500 kV
AI corrugated
sheath
Paper
insulation
Lead sheath
Lead sheath &

copper wires
Fig. 2.4-15: Overview of main cable types
64/110 kV
76/132 kV
67/150 kV
Basic design
There is a variety of high-voltage cables with different design
and voltage levels (fig. 2.4-15).
Cable joints connect lengths of cables in long transmission
routes or at points of repair (example see fig. 2.4-17).
Cu wires &
laminated
sheath
High-voltage
cables
accessories
of different
manufacturers
Outdoor
sealing ends
Cable
sealing
ends
Transformer
sealing ends
GIS
sealing ends
127/220 kV
160/275 kV
190/330 kV
Straith
joints
230/380 kV
290/500 kV
Cable
joints
Transition
joints
Fig. 2.4-16: Overview of cable accessories
Engineering
For operation, cable and accessories must comply with electrical
requirements, and have to satisfy ambient conditions which can
differ significantly depending on location, ground, indoor or
outdoor.
For save project planning of cable installations, the cross-section
of conductor shall be determined such that the requirement
current-carrying capacity lz loading lb is fulfilled for all
operating conditions which can occur. A distinction is made
between the current-carrying capacity
for normal operation
and for short circuit (operation under fault conditions).
Fig. 2.4-17: Slip-on joint
Fig. 2.4-18: Outdoor sealing end
41

For high-voltage cables, the current-carrying capacity is to be

examined by means of special calculation tools for each special
case of application. First of all, the laying and installation conditions have to be taken in consideration. Fig. 2.4-19 shows
different laying arrangements.
Laying in ground
The depth of laying a high-voltage cable in ground is generally
taken as 1,20 m, which is the distance below the ground
surface to the axis of the cable or the center of a bunch of
cables. To lay cables in the ground, calculations show that
the load capacity of the cable decreases as depth increases,
assuming the same temperature and thermal resistivity of the
soil. On the other hand, the deeper regions of the ground are
normally moister and remain more consistent than the surface
layers.
Crossing of cable runs can cause difficulties especially when
these are densely packed (hot spot). At such points, the cables
must be laid with a sufficiently wide vertical and horizontal
spacing. In addition to this, the heat dissipation must be assisted
by using the most favorable bedding material (fig. 2.4-20). A
calculation of conductor heat output and temperature rise is
absolutely necessary because the maximum conductor temperature of XLPE cable must not exceed 90 C (fig. 2.4-21).
Example: Current rating for cable 2XS(FL)2Y 1 x 630RM/50 64/110 kV

at different laying conditions
Free in air
In air-filled channel
1082 A
Direct in ground
In pipes in ground
970 A
543 A
In pipes in ground in
thermally stabilized backfill
In ground in thermally
stabilized backfill
600 A
681 A
598 A
Conditions: Cables in trefoil formation, cable screens bonded at both ends,

air temperature 30C, ground temperature 20C, spec. thermally resistivity
of natural 1.0/2.5 km/W, spec. thermal resistivity of thermal stabilized
backfill 1.2 km/W, PVC pipes 150 x 5 mm, laying depth 1200 mm,
dimensions of cable channel width x height x cover: 1000 x 600 x 150 mm,
thermally stabilized backfill in ground 600 x 600 mm, thermally stabilized
backfill for pipes 700 x 700 mm
Fig. 2.4-19: Laying arrangements
Free in air
T4 =
1
1
TC
In covered channels (air filled)
T4 =
TR
Heat dissipation from cable

by convection and radiation
1
1
TC
+ TChannel
TR
Heat dissipation from cable

by convection and radiation,
from the channel to the
environment by
heat conduction
Fig. 2.4-20: Heat dissipation from cables

Temperature distribution for 2 parallel 110 kV cable circuits with
different load currents
Circuit 1
Circuit 2
0A
0A
515 A
515 A
611 A
611 A
Maximum
conductor
temperature:
136 C
Fig. 2.4-21: Temperature distribution for 2 parallel 110 kV cable circuits
42

In case of using different laying arrangements in ground for a

cable system, the chain principle The weakest link determines
the strength of the whole chain applies. This means that the
thermally most critical section determines the current-carrying
capacity of the whole cable circuit (fig. 2.4-22).
Laying free in air
The highest load capacity is given when laying the cables free in
air on cable trenches with an unhindered heat dissipation by
radiation and convection.
Buried cable circuit with thermal critical sections (principle)
Standard
trench
Cables
in pipes
Nearby
external heat
sources
Section with
increased
laying depth
2
Chain principle: The weakest link determines the strength of the
whole chain.
The thermally most critical section determines the
current carrying capacity of the whole cable circuit.
When cables are installed directly on a wall or on the floor, the

load capacity has to be reduced by using a factor of 0.95.
However, other heat inputs, e.g. solar radiation must be considered or prevented by use of covers. The air circulation must be
secured, and a calculation of the load capacity is recommended.
Fig. 2.4-22: Different laying arrangements in ground
The same applies to laying cables in air-filled channels.
According to DIN VDE standards, cables have to be installed in

such a way that damage, e.g., by pressure points caused by
thermal expansion, are avoided. This can be achieved by
installing the cables in an approximate sine-wave form (snaking)
and fixing as shown in fig. 2.4-23.
When cables are laid in air, the effects of thermal expansion in

normal operating mode and in cases of being subjected to shortcircuit currents have to be considered.
Cable deflection caused by thermal expansion

Project:
Plant:
Cable type: N2XS(FL)2Y 1x630 RM/50 64/110 kV
Input data
Minimum ambient temperature 0min
0 C
Maximum ambient temperature 0max
40 C
Maximum conductor
temperature
Lmax
90 C
Minimum deflection
(at minimum ambient
temperature)
amin
100 mm
Fixing distance in longitudinal

direction
lS
3.00 m
Additional reduction of fixing

distance (i.e. expansion gap)
lS
0.00 mm
Conductor material
Kupfer
Linear expansion coefficient of

conductor material
Cable expansion and deflection

Maximum thermal expansion
of conductor
l (Lmax)
4.39 mm
Deflection at maximum
conductor temperature
amax (Lmax)
124 mm
Deflection at max. cond.

amax (Lmax; lS) 124 mm
temperature and reduced fixing
distance
Initial deflection [mm]
0.0000162 K1
115
110
105
100
95
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
Temperature during installation [C]
Fig. 2.4-23: Snaking of cables
43

Variants of bonding metal sheaths / screens of single cor HV-cables

Bonding at both sides
+ no induced sheath voltage

+ simple cost saving design
circulating sheath currents
additional sheath losses
reduced current carrying capacity
Bonding at single sides

+ no circulating currents
+ increased current carrying capacity
induced voltages at sealing ends
sheath voltage limiters and parallel
earth continuity conductor required
Cross bonding
+ no circulating currents
+ increased current carrying capacity
induced voltages at joints
sheath voltage limiters and sheath
interruption joints required
Fig. 2.4-24: Different types of earthing
Concerning short-circuit currents, DIN VDE stipulates that Singlecore cables must be safely fixed to withstand the effects of peak
short-circuit currents, which means they must withstand the
stresses caused under short circuit, and remain in position such
that neither the cable or the fixing element get damaged.
Earthing
Due to electromagnetic induction, a voltage is induced in the
outer conductor and metallic screen, which depends on the
operating or short-circuit current level. In order to handle all
induced voltages and to guarantee a good earth connection
during a short circuit, the outer conductor and the metallic
sheath must be sufficiently connected to the external earthing
system. Depending on the calculations of the induced voltage,
several different types of earthing can be applied (fig. 2.4-24).
The above-mentioned engineering works and calculations which
are necessary for safe operation of cable systems can completely
carried out by Siemens engineering specialists.
Both-end bonding
For both-end bonding, both ends of the cable screen are connected to the ground. The advantage of the method is that no
standing voltages occur at the cable ends.
The disadvantage is that circulating currents may flow inside the
screen as the loop between the two earthing points is closed
through the ground. As these circulating currents can be as high
as the conductor current itself, they can reduce the cable
ampacity significantly.
44
The losses incurred by both-end bonding means that this is the

most disadvantageous earthing system method as far as economic issues are concerned. It is therefore mainly applied in
selected cases and for short distances.
Single-end bonding
For single-end bonding, only one end of the cable screen is
connected to earth while the other end is left floating. The
voltage is induced linearly along the whole cable length, and at
the open end a standing voltage occurs. The open end should
be protected with a sheath voltage limiter. This diminishes the
chance of overvoltages occurring inside the cable screen, protects the cable system, and ensures that relevant safety requirements are upheld.
The advantage of single-end bonding is that losses caused by
circulating currents cannot occur, and the current carrying
capacity is higher.
The disadvantage is the voltage which occurs at one end of the
termination.
Cross bonding
Cross bonding is necessary for long cable segments with joints.
The cross-bonding system consists of three sections, each
followed by a cyclic sheath crossing. At the terminations,
earthing must be solidly bonded to the ground. In an ideal
cross-bonding system, the three sections are of equal length.

Fig. 2.4-25: High-voltage cable references worldwide
The advantage of cross bonding is the absence of residual

voltages at the end of the three sections. With no driving voltages, the sheath currents and therefore the losses in the system
are zero. In reality, some minor differences between each section and a low current-flow in the sheath do actually cause some
losses. However, with a good cross-bonding system, the sheath
losses can be kept very low. Another advantage of regular cross
bonding is that at the earthed termination ends the voltage is
zero.
The disadvantages of cross bonding are the increased amount of
additional equipment needed, and the fact that in reality three
sections of equal length cannot always be realized.
Project management
In addition to sales and engineering tasks, Siemens is able to
provide certified project managers for execution of all kind of
high-voltage cable projects. The main competences are:
Elaboration of turnkey proposals, interface clarifications
Support of high-voltage cable projects
Planning of installation (schedule, material, manpower)
Procurement of high-voltage cable components
Order processing in turnkey projects
Commissioning of high-voltage cable systems according to
national and international standards
Fault locations, inspections, modernization of plants
Service, maintenance for high-voltage cable systems.
Installation
The installation of high-voltage cable systems can be carried out
by Siemens installation specialists. All site managers, supervisors
and fitters are certified regarding SCC and EHS. It can be taken
for granted that the fitters are trained on various accessories
directly by main manufacturers. The competences are:
Surveillance of civil and underground works
Turnkey installation of high-voltage cable systems, cable laying
and assembly of accessories up to rated voltages level 500 kV
Commissioning of high-voltage cable systems
Supervision of high-voltage tests at site
After-sales service
Fault repair and retrofitting of plants.
References
Siemens looks back on more than 100 years of experience with
design and installation of high-voltage cable systems. Our
worldwide references of oil cable projects reach back to the
1950, and the references concerning XLPE-cable projects to
the 1980.

Tel.: ++ 49 91 31-7- 2 72 62
45

2.4.3 Overhead Lines

Since the very beginning of electric power generation, overhead
transmission lines (OHL) have constituted the most important
component for transmission and distribution of electric power.
The portion of overhead transmission lines within a transmission
and distribution system, depends on the voltage level as well as
on local conditions and practice. In densely populated areas like
Central Europe, underground cables prevail in the distribution
sector, and overhead power lines in the high-voltage transmission sector. In other parts of the world, for example, in North
America, overhead lines are often also used for distribution
purposes within cities. Siemens has planned, designed and
erected overhead power lines for all important voltage levels in
many parts of the world.
Selection of line voltage

For the distribution and transmission of electric power,
standardized voltages according to IEC 60038 are used worldwide. For 3-phase AC applications, three voltage levels prevail:
Low voltage (up to 1 kV AC)
Medium voltage (between 1 kV and 36 kV AC)
High voltage (between 52 kV and 765 kV AC) and higher.
Low-voltage lines serve households and small business consumers. Lines on the medium-voltage level supply small settlements, individual industrial plants and large consumers; the
transmission capacity is typically less than 10 MVA per circuit.
The high-voltage circuits up to 145 kV serve for subtransmission
of the electric power regionally, and feed the medium-voltage
grid. This level is often chosen to support the medium-voltage
level even if the electric power is below 10 MVA. Moreover,
some of these high-voltage lines also transmit the electric power
from medium-sized generating stations, such as hydro plants on
small and medium rivers, and supply large-scale consumers,
such as sizable industrial plants or steel mills. They constitute
the connection between the interconnected high-voltage grid
and the local distribution systems. The bandwidth of electrical
power transported corresponds to the broad range of utilization,
but rarely exceeds 100 MVA per circuit, while the surge impedance load is 35 MVA (approximately).
In Central Europe, 245 kV lines were used for interconnection of
power supply systems before the 420 kV level was introduced for
this purpose. Long-distance transmission, for example, between
the hydro power plants in the Alps and consumers, was done by
245 kV lines. Nowadays, the importance of 245 kV lines is
decreasing due to the existence of the 420 kV transmission
system. The 420 kV level represents the highest operation
voltage used for AC transmission in Central Europe. It typically
interconnects the power supply systems and transmits the
energy over long distances. Some 420 kV lines connect the
national grids of the individual European countries enabling
interconnected network operation (UCTE = Union for the Coordination of Transmission of Electricity) throughout Europe.
Large power plants such as nuclear stations feed directly into the
46
420 kV grid. The thermal capacity of the 420 kV circuits may

reach 2,000 MVA, with a surge impedance load of approximately
600 MVA and a transmission capacity up to 1,200 MVA.
Overhead power lines with voltages higher than 420 kV AC will
be required in the future to economically transmit bulk electric
power over long distances, a task typically arising when utilizing hydro, wind and solar energy potentials far away from
consumer centers. Fig. 2.4-26 depicts schematically the range
of application for the individual AC voltage levels based on the
distance of transmission and the power rating. The voltage
level has to be selected based on the task of the line within the
network or on the results of network planning. Siemens has
carried out such studies for power supply companies all over
the world.
High-voltage direct current
However, when considering bulk power transmission over long
distances, a more economical solution is the high-voltage
direct-current (HVDC) technology. Siemens is in the position to
offer complete solutions for such interconnections, starting with
network studies and followed by the design, assistance in project
development and complete turnkey supply and construction of
such plants. For DC transmission no standard is currently available. The DC voltages vary from the voltage levels recommended
in the above-mentioned standardized voltages used for AC.
HVDC transmission is used for bulk power transmission and for
system interconnection. The line voltages applied for projects
worldwide vary between 300 kV, 400 kV, 500 kV, 600 kV
and recently (2007), 800 kV. The selection of the HVDC line
voltage is ruled by the following parameters:
Amount of power to be transferred
Length of the overhead power line
Permissible power losses
Economical conductor size.
The advantages of DC transmission over AC transmission are:
A DC link allows power transfer between AC networks with
different frequencies or networks that cannot be synchronized.
Inductive and capacitive parameters do not limit the
transmission capacity or the maximum length of a DC
overhead transmission line.
The conductor cross-section can be more or less fully utilized
because there is no skin effect caused by the line frequency.
DC overhead power lines are much more economical to built
and require less right-of-way.
Economical considerations/evaluation of DC voltages
Fig. 2.4-27 shows the economical application of DC voltages in
relation to overhead transmission line length and transmitted
power. This graph must be seen as a general guideline. Any
project should be separately evaluated on a case-by-case basis.
The budgets established for this evaluation are based on 2007
figures.

Power per circuit
2,000
P
MW
1,000
700 kV
500
200
380 kV
100
220 kV
50
20
110 kV
10
Transmission distance
10
20
50
100
200
km
l
500
Limit of operation
Natural limit of load
Fig. 2.4-26: Selection of rated voltage for power transmission
100
Cost per MW and km (%)
Conclusions:
300 kV voltage level:
The range of 750 and 1,000 km with a power transfer of
600 MW has been evaluated. The line and converter costs have
been added, and transferred into a cost factor per MW power
and km of transmission line. The result shows that for longdistance HVDC transmission, the 300 kV voltage level is not
the optimal solution (refer to 400 kV below). However, this
voltage level is useful in short HVDC interconnectors such as
the Thailand-Malaysia Interconnector, which has a line length
of 113 km.
The range 750, 1,000 and 1,500 km with a power transfer of
600, 1,000 and 2,000 MW has been evaluated. The line and
converter costs have been added, and transferred into a cost
factor per megawatt power and kilometer of transmission line
length. The result shows that the 400 kV voltage level is a
suitable solution for line lengths of 750 to 1,000 km with
transmitted power of 600 to 1,000 MW.
The range 1,000 and 1,500 km with a power transfer of 1,000,
2,000 and 3,000 MW has been evaluated. The line and
suitable solution for the line lengths of 1,000 km to 1,500 km
with transmitted power of 1,000 to 2,000 MW. However, the
400 kV voltage level can also be competitive in this range of
power and line length.
The range 1,500, 2,000 and 3,000 km with a power transfer
of 2,000 and 3,000 MW has been evaluated. The line and
suitable solution for the line lengths of 1500 km to 3,000 km
with transmitted power of 2,000 MW, and 3,000 MW for lines
up to 2,000 km. However, the 500 kV voltage level can still be
competitive in parts of this range.
The range 2,000, 3,000 and 4,000 km with a power transfer of
2,000 and 3,000 MW has been evaluated. The line and
factor per megawatt power and kilometer of transmission line.
The result shows that the 800 kV voltage level is a suitable
solution for the line lengths of 2,000 km and above with
transmitted power of 2,000 and 3,000 MW. However, shorter
line lengths of 1,500 to 3,000 km with power rating of 3,000
to 7,000 MW can be economically covered with an 800 kV
solution.
50
4,000
3,500
3,000
2,500
2,000
Line
300 kV
leng
500
1,000
1,500
2,000
1,500
th (
k
400 kV
m)
1,000
500 kV
2,500
500 3,000
600 kV
itte
sm
n
Tra
MW
er (
pow
800 kV
Fig. 2.4-27: Economical application of DC voltages in relation to overhead transmission line length and transmitted power
47

Selection of conductors and earth wires

Conductors represent the most important component of an overhead power line because they have to ensure economical and
reliable transmission and contribute considerably to the total
line costs. For many years, aluminum and its alloys have been
the prevailing conducting materials for power lines due to the
favorable price, the low weight and the necessity of certain
minimum cross-sections. However, aluminum is a very corrosive
metal. But a dense oxide layer is formed that stops further
corrosive attacks. Therefore, up to a certain level, aluminum
conductors are well-suited for areas in which corrosion is a
problem, for example, a maritime climate.
feature affecting the voltage drop and the energy losses along the
line and, therefore, the transmission costs. The cross-section has
to be selected so that the permissible temperatures will not be
exceeded during normal operation as well as under short-circuit
condition. With increasing cross-section, the line costs increase,
while the costs for losses decrease. Depending on the length of
the line and the power to be transmitted, a cross-section can be
determined that results in the lowest transmission costs. The heat
balance of ohmic losses and solar radiation against convection
and radiation determines the conductor temperature. A current
density of 0.5 to 1.0 A/mm2 based on the aluminum cross-section
has proven to be an economical solution in most cases.
For aluminum conductors, there are a number of different

designs in use. All-aluminum conductors (AAC) have the highest
conductivity for a given cross-section; however, they possess
only a low mechanical strength, which limits their application to
short spans and low tensile forces. To increase the mechanical
strength, wires made of aluminum-magnesium-silicon alloys are
adopted. Their strength is approximately twice that of pure
aluminum. But single-material conductors like all-aluminum and
aluminum alloy conductors have shown susceptibility to eolian
vibrations. Compound conductors with a steel core, so-called
aluminum conductor, steel-reinforced (ACSR), avoid this disadvantage. The ratio between aluminum and steel ranges from
4.3:1 to 11:1. An aluminum-to-steel ratio of 6.0 or 7.7 provides
an economical solution. Conductors with a ratio of 4.3 should be
used for lines installed in regions with heavy wind and ice loads.
Conductors with a ratio higher than 7.7 provide higher conductivity. But because of lower conductor strength, the sags are
bigger, which requires higher towers.
High-voltage results in correspondingly high-voltage gradients at

the conductors surface, and in corona-related effects such as
visible discharges, radio interference, audible noise and energy
losses. When selecting the conductors, the AC voltage gradient
has to be limited to values between 15 and 17 kV/cm. Since the
sound of the audible noise of DC lines is mainly caused at the
positive pole and this sound differs from those of AC lines, the
subjective feeling differs as well. Therefore, the maximum surface
voltage gradient of DC lines is higher than the gradient for AC
lines. A maximum value of 25 kV/cm is recommended. The line
voltage and the conductor diameter are one of the main factors
that influence the surface voltage gradient. In order to keep this
gradient below the limit value, the conductor can be divided into
subconductors. This results in an equivalent conductor diameter
that is bigger than the diameter of a single conductor with the
same cross-section. This aspect is important for lines with voltages of 245 kV and above. Therefore, so-called bundle conductors are mainly adopted for extra-high-voltage lines. Table 2.4-2
shows typical conductor configurations for AC lines.
Experience has shown that ACSR conductors, just like aluminum

and aluminum alloy conductors, provide the most economical
solution and offer a life span greater than 40 years. Conductors
are selected according to electrical, thermal, mechanical and
economic aspects. The electric resistance as a result of the conducting material and its cross-section is the most important
Rated voltage
Highest system voltage
[ kV]
20
From a mechanical point of view, the conductors have to be

designed for everyday conditions and for maximum loads
exerted on the conductor by wind and ice. As a rough figure, an
everyday stress of approximately 20 % of the conductor rated
tensile stress can be adopted, resulting in a limited risk of con-
110
220
[ kV]
24
50
120
150
300
435
bundle 2x240
bundle 4x240
bundle 2x560
bundle 4x560
[mm]
9.6
15.5
17.1
24.5
28.8
2x21.9
4x21.9
2x32.2
4x32.2
Ampacity (at 80 C conductor temperature) [A]
210
410
470
740
900
1,290
2,580
2,080
4,160
Conductor diameter
245
420
765
Thermal capacity
[MVA]
14
90
140
340
490
1,700
1,370
5,400
Resistance at 20 C
[/km]
0.59
0.24
0.19
0.10
0.067
0.059
0.030
0.026
0.013
Reactance at 50 Hz
[/km]
0.39
0.34
0.41
0.38
0.4
0.32
0.26
0.27
0.28
Effective capacitance
[nF/km]
9.7
11.2
9.3
10
9.5
11.5
14.4
13.8
13.1
Capacitance to earth
[nF/km]
3.4
3.6
4.0
4.2
4.8
6.3
6.5
6.4
6.1
Charging power
Earth-fault current
Surge impedance
Surge impedance load
[kVA/km]
1.2
1.4
35
38
145
175
650
625
2,320
[A/km]
0.04
0.04
0.25
0.25
0.58
0.76
1.35
1.32
2.38
[]
360
310
375
350
365
300
240
250
260
[MVA]
32
35
135
160
600
577
2,170
Table 2.4-2: Electric characteristics of AC overhead power lines (data refer to one circuit of a double-circuit line)
48
700
[mm2]
Nominal cross-section
123
380

ductor damage. The maximum working tensile stress should be

limited to approximately 40 % of the rated tensile stress.
Earth wires, also called shieldwire or earthwire, can protect a
line against direct lightning strikes and improve system behavior
in the event of short circuits; therefore, lines with single-phase
voltages of 110 kV and above are usually equipped with earth
wires. Earth wires made of ACSR conductors with a sufficiently
high aluminum cross-section satisfy both requirements.
Since the beginning of the 1990s, more and more earth wires
for extra-high-voltage overhead power lines have been executed
as optical earth wires (OPGW). This type of earth wire combines
the functions just described for the typical earth wire with the
additional facility for large data transfer capacity via optical
fibers that are integrated into the OPGW. Such data transfer is
essential for the communication between two converter stations
within an HVDC interconnection or for remote controlling of
power plants. The OPGW in such a case becomes the major
communication link within the interconnection. OPGW are
mainly designed in one or more layers of aluminum alloy and/or
aluminum-clad steel wires. One-layer designs are used in areas
with low keraunic levels (small amount of possible lightning
strikes per year) and small short-circuit levels.
2
Fig. 2.4-28: Cap-and-pin insulator
(above)
Fig. 2.4-29: Long-rod insulator
with clevis caps
Selection of insulators
Overhead line insulators are subject to electrical and mechanical
stresses, because they have to isolate the conductors form
potential to earth and must provide physical supports. Insulators
must be capable of withstanding these stresses under all conditions encountered in a specific line.
4,520
66
marking
43
66
151
66
HTV silicone rubber

Epoxy-resin reinforced with
ECR glass fibers,
(electrical grade corrosion
resistant)
155
Insulator types
Various insulator designs are in use, depending on the requirements and the experience with certain insulator types:
Cap-and-pin insulators (fig. 2.4-28) are made of porcelain or
pre-stressed glass. The individual units are connected by
fittings of malleable cast iron or forged iron. The insulating
bodies are not puncture-proof, which is the reason for a
relatively high number of insulator failures.
In Central Europe, long-rod insulators made from aluminous
porcelain (fig. 2.4-29) are most frequently adopted. These
insulators are puncture-proof. Failures under operation are
extremely rare. Long-rod insulators show superior behavior,
especially in polluted areas. Because porcelain is a brittle
material, porcelain long-rod insulators should be protected
from bending loads by suitable fittings.
Composite insulators are the third major type of insulator for
overhead power line applications (fig. 2.4-30). This insulator
type provides superior performance and reliability, particularly
because of improvements over the last 20 years, and has been
in service for more than 30 years.
145
The electrical stresses result from:

The steady-state operating power-frequency voltage
(highest operation voltage of the system)
Temporary overvoltages at power frequency
Switching and lightning overvoltages.
Fig. 2.4-30: Glass fiber reinforced composite insulator with ball and
socket fittings (lapp insulator)
49

The composite insulator is made of a glass fiber reinforced

epoxy rod. The glass fibers applied are ECR glass fibers that are
resistant to brittle fracture (ECR = electrical grade corrosion
resistant glass fibers). In order to avoid brittle fracture, the glass
fiber rod must additionally be sealed very carefully and durably
against moisture. This is done by application of silicone rubber.
Nowadays, high temperature vulcanized (HTV) silicone is used.
Design of creepage distance and air gaps

The general electrical layout of insulation is ruled by the voltages to be withstood and the pollution to which the insulation is
subjected. The standards IEC 60071-1 and IEC 60071-2 as well
as the technical report IEC 60815, which provides four pollution
classes (the new version will have five classes), give guidance for
the design of the insulation.
The silicone rubber has two functions within this insulator type:
Sealing the glass fiber rod
Molding into insulator sheds to establish the required insulation.
Because IEC 60815 is applicable to AC lines, it should be noted

that the creepage distances recommended are based on the
phase-to-phase AC voltage (UL-L). When transferring these
creepage distances recommended by IEC 60815 to a DC line, it
should be noted that the DC voltage is a pole-to-earth value
(UL-E). Therefore, these creepage distances have to be multiplied
by the factor 3. Furthermore, it should be noted that the AC
voltage value refers to a mean value, while the DC voltage is
comparable to a peak value, which requires a further multiplication with factor 2.
Metal fittings are compressed onto the glass fiber rod at both
ends of the insulator, either with a ball socket or clevis connection fitting. Since the 1980s, compression fittings have been the
prevailing type. The sealing of the area between fitting and silicone housing protecting the rod is most important, and is nowadays done with special silicone elastomer, which offers after
vulcanization the characteristic of a sticky solid, similar to a fluid
of high viscosity.
Advantages of the composite long-rod insulator are:
Light weight, less volume and less damages
Shorter string length compared to cap-and-pin and porcelain
long-rod insulator strings
Up to 765 kV AC and 600 kV DC, only one unit of insulator
(practical length is only limited by the ability of the production
line) is required
High mechanical strength
Vandalism resistance
High performance in polluted areas, based on the
hydrophobicity (water repellency) of the silicone rubber.
Advantages of hydrophobicity are:
Silicone rubber offers outstanding hydrophobicity
over the long term; most other polymeric housing material will
loose this property over time
Silicone rubber is able to recover its hydrophobicity
after a temporary loss of it
The silicone rubber insulator is able to make pollution layers on
its surface water-repellent, too (hydrophobicity transfer)
Low surface conductivity, even with a polluted surface and
very low leakage currents, even under wetted conditions.
Insulator string sets
Suspension insulator sets carry the conductor weight, including
additional loads such as ice and wind, and are arranged more or
less vertically. There are I-shaped (fig. 2.4-31a) and V-shaped
sets in use. Tension insulator sets (fig. 2.4-31b, fig. 2.4-31c)
terminate the conductors and are arranged in the direction of
the conductors. They are loaded by the conductor tensile force
and have to be rated accordingly. Multiple single, double, triple
or more sets handle the mechanical loadings and the design
requirements.
50
Insulators under DC voltage operation are subjected to a more

unfavorable conditions than they are under AC, due to a higher
collection of surface contamination caused by the constant
unidirectional electric field. Therefore, a DC pollution factor has
to be applied. Table 2.4-3 shows specific creepage distances for
different insulator materials under AC and DC application, and is
based on industry experience published by power supply companies in South Africa and China. The results shown were
confirmed by an experienced insulator manufacturer in Germany. The correction factors shown are valid for porcelain
insulators only. When taking composite insulators into consideration, an additional reduction factor of 0.75 can be applied. The
values for a DC system must be seen as a guideline only, that
must be verified on a case-by-case basis for new HVDC projects.
To handle switching and lightning overvoltages, the insulator
sets have to be designed with respect to insulation coordination
according to IEC 60071-1 and IEC 60071-2. These design aspects
determine the gap between the earthed fittings and the live
part. However, for HVDC application, switching impulse levels
are of minor important because circuit-breaker operations from
AC lines do not occur on DC Back-to-back lines. Such lines are
controlled via their valve control systems. In order to coordinate
the insulation in a proper way, it is recommended to apply and
use the same SIL and BIL as is used for the equivalent AC insulation (determined by the arcing distance).
Selection and design of supports
Together with the line voltage, the number of circuits (AC) or
poles (DC) and type of conductors, the configuration of the
circuits poles determines the design of overhead power lines.
Additionally, lightning protection by earth wires, the terrain and
the available space at the tower sites have to be considered. In
densely populated areas like Central Europe, the width of rightof-way and the space for the tower sites are limited. In the case
of extra-high-voltages, the conductor configuration affects the
electrical characteristics, the electrical and magnetic field and
the transmission capacity of the line. Very often there are contradicting requirements, such as a tower height as low as pos-

Cross arm
Cross arm
IEC 60815 level
Porcelain and glass

insulators
AC
system
Conductor
Fig. 2.4-31a: I-shaped suspension insulator set for 245 kV

Conductor
Cross arm
DC
system
Composite
insulators
AC
system
DC
system
I Light
[mm/ kV]
16
39
12
29
II Medium
[mm/ kV]
20
47
15
35
III Heavy
[mm/ kV]
25
59
19
44
IV Very Heavy [mm/ kV]
31
72
24
54
Table 2.4-3: Guideline for specific creepage distances for different

insulator materials
Cross arm
Cross arm
Cross arm
Conductor
Conductor
Fig. 2.4-31b: Double tension insulator set for 245 kV (elevation, top)
Fig. 2.4-31c: Double tension insulator set for 245 kV (plan, bottom)
51

sible and a narrow right-of-way, which can only be met by

compromises. The minimum clearance of the conductors
depends on the voltage and the conductor sag. In ice-prone
areas, conductors should not be arranged vertically, in order to
avoid conductor clashing after ice shedding.
For low-voltage and medium-voltage lines, horizontal conductor

configurations prevail; these configurations feature line post
insulators as well as suspension insulators. Poles made of wood,
concrete or steel are preferred. Fig. 2.4-32 shows some typical
line configurations. Earth wires are omitted at this voltage level.
For high-voltage and extra-high-voltage power lines, a large
variety of configurations are available that depend on the
number of circuits (AC) or poles (DC) and on local conditions.
Due to the very limited right-of-way, more or less all highvoltage AC lines in Central Europe comprise at least two circuits.
Fig. 2.4-33 shows a series of typical tower configurations.
Arrangement e is called the Danube configuration and is
often adopted. It represents a fair compromise with respect to
width of right-of-way, tower height and line costs.
For AC lines comprising more than two circuits, there are many
possibilities for configuring the supports. In the case of circuits
with differing voltages, those circuits with the lower voltage
should be arranged in the lowermost position (fig. 2.4-33g).
DC lines are mechanically designed according to the normal
practice for typical AC lines. The differences from AC Line layout
are the:
Fig. 2.4-32: Configurations of medium-voltage supports
52
Conductor configuration
Electric field requirements
Insulation design.
For DC lines, two basic outlines (monopole and bipole), with
variations should be considered. Fig. 2.4-33il show examples
for HVDC line configurations that are valid for all voltage levels.
The arrangements of insulators depend on the application
of a support within the line. Suspension towers support the
conductors in straight-line sections and at small angles. This
tower type offers the lowest costs; special attention should
therefore be paid to using this tower type as often as possible.
Angle towers have to carry the conductor tensile forces at angle
points of the line. The tension insulator sets permanently
transfer high forces from the conductors to the supports. Finally,
dead-end towers are used at the terminations of a transmission
line. They carry the total conductor tensile forces on the line side
(even under unbalanced load condition, e. g., when conductors
of one tower side are broken) and a reduced tension into the
substations (slack span).
Various loading conditions specified in the respective national
and international standards have to be met when designing
towers. The climatic conditions, the earthquake requirements
and other local environmental factors are the next determining
factors for the tower design.
When designing the support, a number of conditions have to be
considered. High wind and ice loads cause the maximum forces
to act on suspension towers. In ice-prone areas, unbalanced

Fig. 2.4-33: (ah): tower configurations for high-voltage lines (AC); (il): tower configurations for high-voltage lines (DC)
53

conductor tensile forces can result in torsional loading. Additionally, special loading conditions are adopted for the purpose of
failure containment, that is, to limit the extent of damage.
Finally, provisions have to be made for construction and maintenance.
Depending on voltage level and the acting forces of the overhead line, differing designs and materials are adopted. Poles
made of wood, concrete or steel are very often used for lowvoltage and medium-voltage lines. Towers with lattice steel
design, however, prevail at voltage levels of 110 kV and above
(fig. 2.4-34). Guyed lattice steel structures are used in some
parts of the world for high-voltage AC and DC lines. Such design
requires a relatively flat topography and a secure environment
where there is no threat from vandalism and theft. Guyed lattice
steel structures offer a substantial amount of cost savings with
respect to tower weight and foundation quantities. However, a
wider right-of-way has to be considered.
Foundations for the supports
Overhead power line supports are mounted on concrete foundations. The foundations have to be designed according to the
national or international standard applicable for the particular
project.
The selection of foundation types and the design is determined
by the:
Loads resulting from the tower design
Soil conditions on the site
Accessibility to the line route
Availability of machinery
Constraints of the particular country and the site.
Concrete blocks or concrete piers are in use for poles that exert
bending moments on the foundation. For towers with four legs,
a foundation is provided for each individual leg (fig. 2.4-35). Pad
and chimney and concrete block foundations require good
bearing soil conditions without groundwater.
Driven or augured piles and piers are adopted for low-bearing
soil, for sites with bearing soil at a greater depth and for high
groundwater level. In case of groundwater, the soil conditions
must permit pile driving. Concrete slabs can be used for good
bearing soil, when subsoil and groundwater level prohibit pad
and chimney foundations as well as piles.
Route selection and tower spotting
Route selection and planning represent increasingly difficult
tasks, because the right-of-way for transmission lines is limited
and many aspects and interests have to be considered.
Route selection and approval depend on the statutory conditions
and procedures prevailing in the country of the project. Route
selection nowadays involves preliminary desktop studies with a
variety of route alternatives, environmental impact studies,
community communication hearings and acceptance approval
from the local authorities.
54
Fig. 2.4-34: Typical Central European AC line design with different

voltage levels

After the route design stage and approval procedure, the final
line route is confirmed. Following this confirmation and
approval, the longitudinal profile has to be surveyed, and all
crossings over roads, rivers, railways, buildings and other overhead power lines have to be identified. The results are evaluated
with a specialized computer program developed by Siemens that
calculates and plots the line profile. The towers are spotted by
means of the same program, which takes into account the
conductor sags under different conditions, the ground clearances, objects crossed by the line, technical data of the available
tower family, specific cost for towers and foundations and cost
for compensation of landowners.
Pad-and-chimney
foundation
Auger-bored
foundation
2
Rock anchor
foundation
Pile foundation
The result is an economical design of a line that accounts for all

the technical, financial and environmental conditions. Line
planning forms the basis for material acquisition and line erection. Fig. 2.4-36 shows a line profile established by computer.
Siemens activities and experience
Siemens has been active in the overhead power line field for
more than 100 years. The activities comprise design and construction of rural electrification schemes, low-voltage and
medium-voltage distribution lines, high-voltage lines and extrahigh-voltage installations.
Fig. 2.4-35: Foundations for four-legged towers
To give an indication of what has been carried out by Siemens,

approximately 20,000 km of high-voltage lines up to 245 kV and
10,000 km of extra-high-voltage lines above 245 kV have been
set up so far. Overhead power lines have been erected by
Siemens in Germany and Central Europe as well as in the Middle
East, Africa, the Far East and South America.
Outstanding AC projects have been:
The 420 kV transmission lines across the Elbe River in Germany
comprising four circuits and requiring 235 m tall towers
The 420 kV line across the Bosphorus (Crossing II)
in Turkey (1983) with a crossing span of approximately
1,800 m (fig. 2.4-37).
The 500 kV Suez Crossing (1998);
height of suspension tower 220 m
The 420/800 kV Bosporus Crossing III in Turkey (1999).
Furthermore, Siemens has constructed two HVDC interconnectors as turnkey projects that include HVDC overhead transmission lines. The two projects are the 300 kV HVDC interconnector
from Thailand to Malaysia (bipole transmission line, fig. 2.4-38)
and the 400 kV HVDC Basslink project in Australia (monopole
transmission line, fig. 2.4-39ac).
55

f40 = 6.15
302.50
300.70
fE = 6.60
5.74
0.47
6.07
292.00
292.00
16.00
10.00
13.00
f40 = 2.11
282.00
16.20
279.00
2
T+0
DH
1
WA+0
DA
255.00
232.50
175.00
o. D.
286.50
276.50
273.50
281.50
273.00
0.1
0.0
0.0
66.0
132.0
36.0
190.00
280.00
283.00
275.50 270.50
270.00
265.00
284.50
275.00 270.50 272.50
267.50
264.00
0.2
0.3
0.4
264.0
302.0
331.0
360.0
405.0
251.0
291.0
316.0
346.0
386.0
426.0
280.50
106.0
194.0
166.0
M20
Left conductor 251.47 m
1710
6.0
6.0
60.0m 50
190.00
251.0
20 kV line
60.0m
Fig. 2.4-36: Line profile established by computer
56
M21
4.0
4.0

3
T+8
DH
f40 = 17.46
fE = 16.52
284.20
17.30
16.75
16.38
15.86
Stream
Meadow
Road
Fallow land
Forest
Earth wire:
Conductor:
Equivalent sag:
Equivalent span:
7.55
11.38
Arable land
ACSR 265/35 * 80.00 N/mm2

ACSR 265/35 * 80.00 N/mm2
11.21 m at 40 C
340.44 m
8.44
12.29
Bushes, height up to 5 m
263.00
24.20
f40 = 5.56
fE = 5.87
4
WA+0
DA
223.00
1.45
16.00
270.00
292.50
263.00
266.50
265.50
264.00
0.5
462.0
506.0
534.0
544.0
261.50
258.50
260.00 260.00
260.00
626.0
0.7
666.0
688.0
676.0
0.6
586.0
236.00
247.50
229.00
13.9
209.00
207.00
826.0
0.9
904.0
910.0
0.8
776.0
744.0
804.0
Road to XXX
425.0
223.00
215.50
848.0
Left conductor 235.45 m 169.00

1526
4.0
4.0
234.0
5.8
5.8
Road crossing
at km 10.543
169.00
57

Tension tower
Suspension tower
Suspension tower
Tension tower
Conductor: 4x3x1 AACSR/AW 1802/226 mm2 on 420 kV

Upgradeable to 2x3x2 AACSR/A W 1802/226 mm2
on 800 kV
Shieldwire: 2x (ASLH-DBBB 1x22E8/125 - A W 33)
64
160
160
64
158
153
127
88
73
728
1,884
502
Dimensions in m
Fig. 2.4-37: 420/800 kV line across the Bosphorus, longitudinal profile
Fig. 2.4-38: 300 kV HVDC interconnector from Thailand to Malaysia

(bipole transmission line)
58
Fig. 2.4-39a: 400 kV HVDC Basslink project in Australia

(monopole transmission line)

Fig. 2.4-39b, c: 400 kV HVDC Basslink project in Australia (monopole transmission line)
Fax: ++49 (0)91 31 7-3 20 94
59

2.5 Grid Access Solutions
for Decentralized Power
Generation
Grid access solutions are custom-engineered solutions for

decentralized generating units and remote loads. They are an
essential part of Smart Grid and Super Grid developments (refer
to chapter 1). Grid access solutions involve reconciling contrasting parameters, such as high reliability, low investment
costs and efficient transmission, in the best possible solution.
For example, in the design of high-voltage offshore platforms for
offshore wind farm connections to the grid (fig. 2.5-1), special
attention is paid to intelligent collection systems at the mediumvoltage level, followed by the design of the high-voltage transmission system and the onshore receiving substation and its
reactive compensation to meet local grid code requirements.
Turnkey proposition and project execution
By offering a turnkey solution (fig. 2.5-2), Siemens provides a
holistic setup of a complex project involving project administration, design and engineering services, subcontracting, procurement and expediting of equipment, inspection of equipment
prior to delivery, shipment, transportation, control of schedule
and quality, pre-commissioning and completion, performanceguarantee testing, and training of owners operating and/or
maintenance personnel.
For both AC and DC transmission technologies, Siemens offers a
broad range of solutions. The technical constraints of a decentralized generating unit or remote loads in connection with AC or DC
transmission systems are well known and addressed accordingly.
The engineering expertise of Siemens is all inclusive from the
conceptual and basic design to digital and real-time simulations,
therefore assuming responsibility for presenting the solution to
the grid owner which is essential in executing such projects.
System and design studies, engineering

The final design and specification of all equipment to be
installed are verified by system and design studies. Important
steps to achieve final design criteria include determining an
optimized economical network within a system of generating
units, integrating this system within the grid, defining and
configuring grid components, carrying out load flow studies and
short-circuit calculations for the entire system.
Moreover, an earthing concept and coordination of the insulation for the entire grid connection must also be defined. The
static and dynamic characteristics must be checked and the
reactive power compensation defined (static and dynamic). The
resonance phenomenon for all elements should be investigated,
from the transmission system itself to cables, transformers,
reactors, wind turbines and capacitor banks. Compatibility and
conformity with grid code requirements must be established, as
well as a control and protection system.
High-voltage offshore platform
Siemens Wind Power Offshore Substation ( WIPOS) is the
optimal solution that ensures long-term offshore operation. With
WIPOS, Siemens marks an innovative role in the design, engineering and installation of offshore platforms (see section 2.5.1
References).
In the offshore wind industry, the word platform reflects two
construction entities, namely the topside where all the highvoltage, medium-voltage and operational equipment are
installed, and the foundation entity which serves as the base
for the topside. Siemens offers optimized designs for both
entities by joining workforces with offshore, maritime and
shipyard experts.
WIPOS (fig. 2.5-3) serves as an interface between the wind
turbines and the mainland, whereby power harvested from wind
is bundled and then passes through the export cables to reach
the point of connection onshore.
Fig. 2.5-1: A comprehensive overview for both AC and DC offshore wind grid connections
60

2.5 Grid Access Solutions for Decentralized Power Generation
Fig. 2.5-2: Siemens executes projects as an EPC contractor
A typical topside comprises a multi-deck construction with the

main deck, where all electro-technical equipment is installed, as
well as a helideck for helicopter landing designed to meet
aviation regulations.
From a complete platform approach, Siemens also offers the
self-lifting platform concept due to its versatility in function, and
the possibility for transportations and installation without
exorbitant efforts by avoiding heavy crane vessels.
Siemens offers a family of WIPOS designs with the flexibility to
meet various offshore weather, tide and seabed conditions with
three main configurations:
WIPOS self-lifting solution
WIPOS topside solution (topside/jacket)
WIPOS floating solution.
Further potential for the size reduction of offshore grid access
platforms is provided by the application of DC compact switchgear (DC CS) in the DC switchyard, see chapter 2.2.
Fig. 2.5-3: A model of Siemens Windpower Offshore Substation

(WIPOS): Siemens supplies comprehensive offshore
grid connection solutions with flexible substation
configurations for both AC and DC applications
61

2.5.1 References
Fig. 2.5-4: The offshore wind farm Lillgrund, consisting of 48
wind turbines, each 2.3 MW, from Siemens Wind Power, is
installed in Oresund. Its location is on Swedish national waters,
roughly 7 km away from the Swedish coast line near to the City
of Malm. The owner is Vattenfall AB, Sweden. The 33/138 kV
transformer substation with its 120 MVA transformer is mounted
on an offshore platform located within the wind farm area.
Power transmission is realized via one three-phase 138 kV XLPE
submarine cable towards the existing substation in Bunkeflo
(Sweden).
Besides the transformer substation on the platform, Siemens

Energy Transmission performed the grid studies as well as the
design and performance studies for the entire wind farm and its
grid connection.
Fig. 2.5-4: 2007 110 MW Offshore Wind Farm Lillgrund, Sweden
In service since late 2007, the Lillgrund Offshore Wind Farm

provides enough energy for approximately 80,000 homes and
reduces the CO2 emissions by 300,000 tons a year.
Fig. 2.5-5: The offshore wind farms Lynn and Inner Dowsing,
consisting of 54 wind turbines, each 3.6 MW, from Siemens
Wind Power, are located in the Greater Wash area, on Great
Britain national waters. This is roughly 5 km away from the coast
line of Skegness, Lincolnshire. The owner is Centrica Renewable
Energy Ltd., U.K.
The 33/132 kV onshore transformer substation with its two
100 MVA transformers is located at Middle Marsh, approximately
5 km away from the sea wall. Power transmission from the
offshore wind farms is realized via six submarine three-phase
33 kV XLPE cables. Further on to the grid, two 132 kV cables are
used. Besides the transformer substation and the cable system,
Siemens Energy Transmission also performed the grid studies as
well as the design and performance studies for the entire wind
farm and its grid connection.
Fig. 2.5-5: 2008 180 MW Offshore Wind Farm Lynn /

Inner Dowsing, UK
The grid connection was energized in January 2008. Both wind

farms were in full service in autumn 2008. They provide enough
energy for approximately 130,000 homes, and reduce the CO2
emissions by 500,000 tons.
Fig. 2.5-6: The Thanet Offshore Wind Farm, consisting of 100
wind turbines, each 3 MW, from Vestas (Denmark), is located in
the North Sea. It is roughly 11 km away from the coast line of
Kent, Foreness Point. The owner is Thanet Offshore Wind Ltd., U.K.
The 33/132 kV transformer substation with its two 180 MVA
transformers is mounted on an offshore platform located within
the wind farm area. Power transmission is realized via two
three-phase 132 kV XLPE submarine cables. The point of coupling to the grid is a specific switchgear in Richborough, Kent.
Fig. 2.5-6: 2009 300 MW Offshore Wind Farm Thanet, UK
62

Apart from the offshore transformer substation, the onshore

substation with its compensation systems (two SVC PLUS) and
harmonic filters, as well as the cable system, Siemens Energy
Transmission also performed the grid studies as well as the
design and performance studies for the entire wind farm and its
grid connection.
The grid connection was energized in autumn 2009, with all 100
wind turbines running by autumn 2010. Now the offshore wind
farm provides enough energy for approximately 215,000 homes,
and reduces the CO2 emissions by 830,000 tons a year.
Fig. 2.5-7: The Greater Gabbard offshore wind farm, planned
with 140 wind turbines, each 3.6 MW, from Siemens Wind
Power (Denmark), is located in the North Sea close to the
Thames Estuary. It is roughly 26 km (respective 46 km) away
from the coast line of Suffolk.
Fig. 2.5-7: 2010 500 MW Offshore Greater Gabbard, UK
The owner is Greater Gabbard Offshore Winds Ltd., U.K. The

33/132 kV transformer substation with its three 180 MVA transformers is mounted on two offshore platforms (Inner Gabbard
and Galloper) located within the wind farm area. Power transmission is realized via three three-phase 132 kV XLPE submarine
cables.
The point of coupling to the grid is realized in Sizewell Village,
Suffolk, where Siemens built a reactive power compensation
substation to allow the wind farm to meet the requirements of
the GB grid code. SVC PLUS multilevel technology is used for all
of the three export circuits.
Here again, Siemens Energy Transmission performed the grid
studies as well as the design and performance studies for the
entire wind farm.
Now the offshore wind farm provides enough energy for approximately 350,000 homes and reduces the CO2 emissions by
1,350,000 tons a year.
Fig. 2.5-8: In September 2009, Siemens was awarded a contract
for the first phase of the offshore grid access solution to the
prestigious London Array wind farm.
The grid access project was completed in two phases. In phase
one, two offshore substations (each with two 150 MVA transformers) will be delivered to collect the 630 MW of power
generated from 175 wind turbines also supplied by Siemens
before transferring it to shore via the main 150 kV export
cables.
Siemens is responsible for the turnkey construction of the
onshore substation. As for the two offshore substations,
Siemens is responsible for the overall layout design to ensure
that the facility functions as a substation, including all primary
and secondary equipment as well as testing and commissioning.
Fig. 2.5-8: 2012 630 MW London Array , UK
Situated 24 km from Clacton-on-Sea, Essex, the system will

generate 1,000 MW of green power, enough to supply the
electricity needs for nearly 600,000 homes across the South East
of England, and will be the largest offshore wind farm in the
world in 2012.
www.siemens.com/energy/grid-access-solutions
www.siemens.com/energy/wipos
63

BorWin2
800 MW offshore HVDC PLUS link BorWin2, Germany
For the BorWin2 project, Siemens will supply the voltagesourced converter (VSC) system using Siemens HVDC PLUS
technology with a rating of 800 MW. The wind farms Veja
Mate and Global Tech 1 are designed to generate 800 MW and is
connected through Siemens HVDC PLUS link to shore. The
converter is installed on an offshore platform, where the voltage
level is stepped up and then converted to 300 kV DC. The
platform will accommodate all electrical equipment required for
the HVDC converter station, two transformers, four AC cable
compensation reactors and high-voltage gas-insulated switchgear (GIS). The Siemens wind power offshore substation
(WIPOS) is designed as a floating, self-lifting platform. Power is
transmitted via subsea and land cable to Diele close to Papenburg, where an onshore converter station will reconvert the DC
back to AC and feed it into the 380 kV AC network.
Fig. 2.5-9: BorWin 2, 800MW HVDC PLUS, North Sea
HelWin1
576 MW offshore HVDC PLUS link HelWin1, Germany
For the project HelWin1, Siemens is supplying a voltage-sourced
converter (VSC) system with a rating of 576 MW using Siemens
HVDC PLUS technology. The wind farms Nordsee Ost and Meerwind are designed to generate 576 MW and is connected
through a Siemens HVDC PLUS link to shore. The converter is
installed on an offshore platform, where the voltage level is
stepped up and then converted to 250 kV DC. The platform will
accommodate all the electrical high-voltage AC and DC equipment required for the converter station. Similar to the BorWin2
project, the Siemens wind power offshore substation (WIPOS)
will also be designed as a floating, self-lifting platform. Energy is
transmitted via subsea and land cable to Bttel, northwest of
Hamburg, Germany, where an onshore converter station will
reconvert the DC back to AC and transmit it into the high-voltage
grid.
Fig. 2.5-10: HelWin 1, 576 MW HVDC PLUS, North Sea
64

SylWin1
864 MW offshore HVDC PLUS link SylWin1, Germany
Siemens will supply the worlds largest voltage-sourced converter (VSC) offshore system with a rating of 864 MW for the
SylWin1 project. Siemens HVDC PLUS link will connect the Dan
Tysk wind farm to the German shore. The converter is installed
on an offshore platform, where the voltage level is stepped up
and converted to 320 kV DC. The platform will accommodate
all electrical equipment required for the HVDC converter station:
two transformers, four AC cable compensation reactors, and
high-voltage gas-insulated switchgear (GIS). Similar to the
BorWin2 and HelWin1 projects, the Siemens wind power offshore substation (WIPOS) is designed as a floating, self-lifting
platform. The energy is transmitted via subsea and land cable to
Bttel, where an onshore converter station will reconvert the DC
to AC and feed it into the 380 kV AC grid.
Fig. 2.5-11: SylWin 1, 864 MW HVDC PLUS, North Sea
HelWin2
690 MW offshore HVDC PLUS link HelWin2, Germany
Siemens Energy in consortium with the Italian cable manufacturer Prysmian is erecting HelWin 2, the link between the North
Sea offshore windfarm Amrumbank West and the onshore grid.
The customer is TenneT TSO GmbH of Bayreuth, Germany. The
grid connection, designed as a high-voltage direct-current
transmission link, has a rating of 690 megawatts (MW). Amrumbank West is built in the North Sea, about 55 kilometers from
the mainland, 35 kilometers north of Helgoland, and 37 kilometers west of the North Frisian island of Amrum. The wind
farm will have a power capacity between 300 and 400 MW.
Together with the Meerwind and North Sea East offshore windfarms, Amrumbank West is part of the North Sea cluster HelWin.
Fig. 2.5-12: HelWin 2, 690 MW HVDC PLUS, North Sea
65

2.6 SIESTORAGE
2.6.1 The Modular Energy Storage
System for a Reliable Power Supply
As part of Totally Integrated Power, SIESTORAGE Siemens

Energy Storage exemplifies the motto We bring power to the
point. Renewable energy sources have already become key
power sources in the current energy mix. Their heavy penetration and the growth of distributed generation have changed the
structure of power grids (fig. 2.6-1 and 2.6-2). However, the
unpredictable nature of renewable energy generation capacity
can lead to fluctuations and imbalances between generation and
load, affecting grid stability and power quality.
To ensure an stable and reliable power supply, Siemens has
developed SIESTORAGE, a sustainable and modular stationary
energy storage and power flow management system that combines fast-acting power regulation function and lithium-ion
batteries. The batteries are supplied by world leading manufacturers. In case of an imbalance between production and consumption, the system can either release power into the grid, or
store it in milliseconds, thus controlling the frequency of the grid.
Fig. 2.6-1: SIESTORAGE offers solutions for distribution systems with

a high share of distributed renewable energy sources
The challenge: Reliable power supply

The use of renewables on a large scale leads to new challenges
for grid stability: Short-circuit power is a measure for grid stability which producers using wind and solar energy can usually
not provide. The infeed of energy from distributed sources can
cause a reversed load flow. In distribution grids not designed for
this event, damages and power outages can be the result. Even
the shortest interruption of energy supply can lead to a complete failure of production plants and result in an enormous loss
of quality and time, along with noticeable financial damage. A
sufficient amount of balancing energy needs to be provided to
secure a constant high quality of power supply.
The answer: SIESTORAGE
SIESTORAGE is able to deliver available power with next to no
delay by providing balancing power for primary reserve power.
Indeed it improves the voltage and supply quality by providing
active and reactive power on demand, thus compensating for
low voltage fluctuations in generation within milliseconds. In
this way, SIESTORAGE can be readily adapted to specific power
demands and storage capacities, and therefore used for a wide
range of applications (fig. 2.6-3).
Saving potentials
This is dependent on the specific application. Everything begins
with the analysis of the grid to determine the adequate business
model. Siemens offers a complete consultation package that
includes power flow calculation and reactive power analysis,
contingency analysis, short-circuit current calculation, probabilistic reliability analysis, dynamic stability calculation, and
protection coordination. The optimized efficiency of an application also depends on the local regulation and on potential
financial incentives. SIESTORAGE can therefore play a key role
in the achievement of ambitious climate goals.
66
Fig. 2.6-2: SIESTORAGE offers solutions for distribution systems with

a high share of distributed renewable energy sources

2.6 SIESTORAGE
Bulky storage
Resource adequacy
Frequency regulation
Time shifting
Renewable firming
Ancillary services
Spinning reserve
Ramping control
Black start
Reactive power
Upgrade deferral
Renewable smoothing
Congestion relief
Voltage support
Peak load management

Power quality
Backup power
Offset diesel
Fig. 2.6-3: Spot-on for a wide range of applications
Siestorage offers more

Consistency
Comprehensive range from LV, MV and energy storage
components to power supply solution expertise
One-stop-shop
From planning via installation to commissioning and services
Safety
Overall safety equipment, proven components and battery
systems
Reliability
Power supply in milliseconds and high redundancy of the
system for more availability
Efficiency
Optimization and saving potential for a wide range of
applications
Flexibility
Modular concept for all needs of storage power and capacity
up to 20 MW/20MWh
Advanced technology
State-of-the-art components combining cutting-edge power
electronics and Li-ion batteries.
67

2.6 SIESTORAGE
2.6.2 Spot-on for a Wide Range

of Applications
Thanks to SIESTORAGE, energy can be taken from the grid during
low load periods, and stored for peak load periods. This way,
SIESTORAGE provides a cost-efficient and sustainable solution
for industrial processes, infrastructure businesses, and energyefficient building. SIESTORAGE ensures furthermore the reliability of electrical grids for isolated sites and areas where access
to power is limited, and the system is able to guarantee energy
reliability even in the case of an outage. The black-start capability of SIESTORAGE makes the start-up of a grid possible when
the main supply is not available. The energy stored is sufficient,
e.g., to start a gas turbine and bridge the grids power requirements.
Integration of renewables
SIESTORAGE makes it possible to integrate an increasing amount
of solar and wind power into distribution grids without having to
extend them immediately. Thus, the system not only contributes
to grid relief, but also can buffer additional capacity for e.g.,
electromobility (fig. 2.6-4) and public transport. In case a PV or
wind system is connected as a power source, weather and
seasonal dependencies as well as the forecastability of these
dependencies must be looked into.
Fig. 2.6-4: SIESTORAGE can be used for performance buffering at

electric vehicle charging stations
Offset diesel
Microgrids with renewable generation or industrial businesses
with large amounts of power require a self-sufficient reliable
supply of energy. SIESTORAGE stores energy in case of high
generation, and releases it on demand. This makes the system
an eco-friendly alternative to diesel generators. With SIESTORAGE,
the size of generators can be optimized, since it functions as
range extender to smaller gensets. SIESTORAGE is able to
reduce the runtime of diesel generators (switching off at lower
loads), thus providing lower fuel consumption and gas emissions for a better environmental footprint.
T & D deferral
The growing demand for energy and the rising share of renewables can make power supply systems reach the limits of their
transmission capacity. This makes the costly extension of power
supply systems necessary. In case of imminent overloads,
SIESTORAGE stores energy that cannot be transmitted over the
power supply system. It is fed back into the system during low
load levels to avoid a system overload. A costly extension of the
power supply system can be avoided, and consequently grid
operators are better able to meet the high energy demands of
industrial and infrastructure businesses.
Spinning reserve
The variation between power generation and actual load is
compensated with the help of spinning reserve. SIESTORAGE
reliably provides balancing power within milliseconds, guaranteeing a constant energy supply and cost savings for power
generation, and the provision of additional reserve power. In
addition to that, the stored renewable energy can be traded at
electricity exchanges in a more targeted manner.
68
Fig. 2.6-5: SIESTORAGE ensures high reliabiity and quality of the

energy supply for industrial production processes
Peak load management

Industrial businesses and grid operators agree on fixed prices for
power and maximum load. However, production factors can
cause peak loads. Even a single case of exceeding the agreed
maximum load causes high costs. SIESTORAGE stores energy in
times of low energy consumption , providing reliable energy for
peak loads with next to no delay. (fig. 2.6-5). This means that
industrial businesses need not use their own generators for
short-time peak loads, and thus support eco-friendly operation
with SIESTORAGE.

2.6 SIESTORAGE
2.6.3 High Power Availability

and Reliability
The modularity of SIESTORAGE enables the highest design
flexibility. The system can be combined and adapted to suit any
system operators needs. It comprises an inverter cabinet, a
control cabinet, a grid connection cabinet, and up to five battery
cabinets per inverter (depending on the supplier).
The system can reach a performance of up to 20 MW and can be

integrated into a standard container.
Thanks to the parallel connection of the inverters on the AC side,
the very high redundancy of SIESTORAGE is an advantage in
case of a single point of failure, which has no influence on the
availability of the storage system. This leads to the highest
availability of power, and a high reliability. Through individual
balancing of the battery cabinets, the installed battery capacity
is optimized at the maximum, providing more reliability by
minimum maintenance (fig. 2.6-10).
Fig. 2.6-6: Inverter cabinet
Fig. 2.6-7: Grid connection

cabinet
Fig. 2.6-8: Control cabinet
Fig. 2.6-9: Battery cabinet
Inverter cabinet (fig. 2.6-6) fig. 2.6-10 B

Width: 600 mm, depth: 600 mm, height: 2,200 mm
2 inverter modules and related control equipment
Each module:
V nominal: 400 V
I nominal: 170 A
S nominal: 118 kVA
P nominal: depending on the battery type
Grid connection cabinet* (fig. 2.6-7) fig. 2.6-10 A
Cable tap for grid connection
Busbar systems.
Control cabinet (fig. 2.6-8) fig. 2.6-10 C
Human Machine Interface (HMI)
System Control Unit (SCU)
Ethernet switch
24 V DC power distribution
Auxiliary power transformer*
Battery cabinet (fig. 2.6-9) fig. 2.6-10 D
Content example (depending on supplier):
14 modules
1 BMS (Battery Management System)
Power: 90 kW
Capacity: 45 kWh
Fig. 2.6-10: The 4 components in the SIESTORAGE system
* optional
69

2.6 SIESTORAGE
A modular concept to address all needs of storing power

and capacity
The SIESTORAGE system is scalable according to your power
needs (from 500 kW up to 20 megawatts at a capacity of
500 kWh/20 MWh) and can be installed in standard containers.
4 Power Stacks Content (fig. 2.6-12)

2 inverter cabinets (with max. 2 inverter modules)
1 control cabinet
1 grid connection cabinet (optional)
X battery cabinets*
Power: max. 472 kVA
Rated capacity: up 180 to 900 kWh
12 Power Stacks Content (fig. 2.6-13)
6 inverter cabinets with max. 2 inverter modules
1 control cabinet
1 grid connection cabinet (optional)
X battery cabinets*
Rated power: 1,080 kW (scalable)
Rated capacity: up 540 to 2,700 kWh (scalable)
Fig. 2.6-12: 4 Power Stacks
Example of a containerized integrated solution (2x12 Power

Stacks fig. 2.6-14)
incl. HVAC (Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning) control,
fire detection and extinguishing system
Rated power: 2,160 kW (scalable)
Rated capacity: 1,080 kWh (scalable)
* max. 5 connected to one inverter module
Fig. 2.6-13: 12 Power Stacks
Fig. 2.6-11: SIESTORAGE has been installed with a performance of

1 MVA and a capacity of 500 kWh in the MV distribution
grid of ENEL in Italy
70
Fig. 2.6-14: Example of an integrated containerized solution

2.6 SIESTORAGE
2.6.4 Benefits of Comprehensive

Competence
Comprehensive and consistent portfolio
With its comprehensive competence, Siemens contributes to
maximizing returns and optimizing energy consumption.
Decades of experience and continuous innovation are the basis
for this know-how. The results are integrated solutions with
state-of-the-art components ranging from storage components,
including power electronics, to LV and MV switchgear, transformers and energy automation, all of which ensure grid integration. In addition, Siemens provides the HVAC system (heating/
ventilation/air conditioning) for smooth operation at high
ambient temperatures, as well as a fire detection and extinguishing system (fig. 2.6-11). As an E-house manufacturer,
Siemens has expertise in power packaging, and can deliver a
ready-to-install solution that has been thoroughly developed,
manufactured, assembled and pre-tested. This reduces both
construction risks and installation time.
Single source through all phases of the project (fig. 2.6-16)
Siemens is with its customers every step of the way through all
phases of the project, from engineering to installation and
commissioning. Reliable and competent local support is provided
right from planning to after-sales service. Components and
auxiliary equipment are globally sourced, and integrated in an
E-House or the customers building. Siemens experts bring their
experience in project management, financial services, and life
cycle management to every project around the globe.
Technology expertise
Implementation expertise
Power electronics and storage
Experience with grid operators
system
Low- and medium-voltage
switchgear
Transformers
Energy automation and grid
E-house manufacturing
Power packaging solution
expertise
One of the leaders in smart
systems
integration
Fig. 2.6-15: With SIESTORAGE, customers benefit from the
consistency of Siemens portfolio and advanced
technology
After-sales service
Our after-sales service concept is based on a Customer Support
Center (hotline) available 24/7. It offers professional maintenance services, scheduled or on call. Life time of the batteries
can be extended by tracking crucial parameters and optimizing
operation.

www.siemens.com/siestorage
Hotline:
Phone: +49 180 524 84 37
Fax: +49 180 524 24 71
Consulting,
planning
Engineering
Order,
delivery
Installation,
commissioning
Operation
Service,
modernization
Fig. 2.6-16: Project life cycle management
71

2.7 E-Houses for Power
Distribution
2.7.1 Plug-and-Play Power Supply
Solution
E-Houses are pre-fabricated electrical buildings (power equipment

centers) that are fully equipped and pre-tested for a fast and
reliable power supply. They accommodate our comprehensive
portfolio of medium-voltage switchgear, low-voltage switchboards, busbar trunking systems, and auxiliary equipment
(fig 2.7-1).
The E-Houses are completely developed, manufactured, assembled and pre-tested at the factory, connected, and put into
operation on site. They are therefore fast and easy to install and
can be used as an interim solution. They are easy to upgrade,
using available space optimally. This makes them a time-efficient
and cost-effective alternative to conventional site-built substations for a broad range of applications.
Benefits of an E-House at a glance
Cost-effective
Fast to install
Flexible
One-stop solution.
A true alternative to conventional site-built power substations
A conventional solid building is often too expensive or timeconsuming for many projects. In other cases, the project schedule
or the attributed restricted space do not allow for site-built
construction, and sometimes building permits for conventional
buildings are not available. E-houses are the ideal solution in all
these cases. They can be installed in very little time, and they can
be adapted to virtually any situation and application, E-Houses
have been a standard solution for power supply in the oil and gas
(fig. 2.7-3), as well as in the mining industry (fig. 2.7-4) for many
years. They are used ever more frequently for the installation of
equipment in other industries (e.g., metals and chemicals) and in
infrastructure facilities (e.g., data centers, ports), or by grid
operators for the extension of distribution grids, critical and
temporary power supply, grid connection, and balance of plant
for fossil and renewable power generaration.
Fig. 2.7-1: E-House Project Nacala (South Africa)
Fig. 2.7-3: E-House in O&G: 3 container modules on cast-in-situ foundation for Pearl GTL in Qatar (developed by QP and Shell)
Fig. 2.7-2: E-House: Completely developed, manufactured, assembled and pre-tested at the factory; shipped as one single unit or in splitting
sections; installed, connected, and commissioned on site
72

2.7.2 Cost-Effective Solution

The standardization and the modular design of E-Houses lead to
more flexibility and cost-efficiency. The expected saving
potential for typical projects with E-Houses is up to 20 %
(fig. 2.7-5a) of the total costs of ownership, regarding:
Reduced cost in planning
Reduced manpower on-site (pre-fabricated)
Reduced civil works on-site
Reduced construction risks
Flexible and space saving design
Possible interim solution and relocation.
2
Fig. 2.7-4: E-house provides energy to all the processes of mineral
foundry in the mining industry (Cerro Matoso in Columbia)
2.7.3 Time-Efficient Solution

E-Houses are fast and easy to install. Compared to a conventional site-built construction, the overall lead time using an E-House
is reduced up to 50 % (fig. 2.7-5b), thanks to:
Reduced civil works due to pre-fabrication and pre-test
Reduced installation time through Plug, commission and play
Reduced construction delays (e.g., due to weather)
Minimum interference with other on-site activities
Reduced time in planning thanks to modular design
Reduced time in planning (in case a construction permit is not
required).
2.7.4 Flexible and Optimized Design

Thanks to their modular design, various E-House types allow for
tailor-made space saving solutions that can easily be expanded
or moved to another location. The project and application
requirements determine the type of an E-House:
One module , e.g. on pre-cast concrete foundation
Multi-modular E-Houses with several modules that are placed on

top of or next to each other on a foundation, for the transport of
large E-Houses and the optimal use of available space
Mobile modules on wheels or for relocation with own
foundation.
The design requirements of an E-House are also dependent on
the environmental conditions:
Weather (temperature, humidity, rain fall, snow and hail, ice
and frost)
Environment (altitude, radiation, wind loads, atmospheric
pollution)
Hazardous environment/substances (chemicals dangerous
gases and vapors, dusts)
Seismic conditions
Corrosion classification.
E-Houses can be installed on raised platforms to protect them
from flooding and enabling the installation of cable tray and bus
duct systems under the E-House without excavation.
Cost saving potential up to 20%

Expected cost reduction for typical projects with E-Houses
Reduced lead time up to 50%

Scenario simulation with a conventional solution and an E-House
-50% on planning due to standardization

Up to -80% on-site work due to pre-fabrication
Planning/
Controlling cost
20%
Equipment
cost
45%
-10%
-25%
Current cost
to customer
Fig. 2.7-5a: Cost saving potential up to 20 %
10%
5%
80% -20%
Todays lead
time with a
conventional
solution
Year 3
Installation
Commissioning
35%
Year 2
Civil work
Civil
cost
Year 1
Planning
100%
Additional costs of E-House enclosure

compared to conventional building
Extra shipping costs
35%
Main drivers
45%
Expected cost
to customer
Tomorrows
lead time
time with
an E-House
Standardization
Factory-built
Less interfaces
Factorytested
-50%
Fig. 2.7-5b: Reduced lead time up to 50 %
73

Optimized design fitted to our MV and LV portfolio (fig. 2.7-8)

The design of an E-House starts with the overall electrical layout.
The equipment list has to be defined as a first step. Every variable is taken into account, from the dimensions and heat dissipation to the weight of the electrical equipment for load calculation (fig. 2.7.7) and all the way to the project requirements such
as cable layout, external interfaces, etc. The structural and
mechanical design is then performed on the basis of structural
and seismic calculations and simulations in 3D (fig. 2.7.6). The
most widely used designs use self-framing, interlocking wall and
roof panels that are installed on a structural steel base. The manufacturing or procurement of wall, roof and floor panels also
depends on the project requirements (environment), on standards, and on the weight of the equipment to be installed.
Further steps during the design process include planning of
HVAC (heat ventilation air conditioning) access doors and exproofed battery rooms with separate ventilation, for example, all
essential parts of the design process focusing on maximum
personnel and equipment safety.
Fig. 2.7-6: Structural and mechanical analysis are performed on

calculations as well as on simulations in 3D
Auxiliary equipment for equipment utilization and ambient

conditions
Last but not least, there is a wide range of auxiliary equipment
that can be selected according to the local, individual environment, health and safety requirements, standards, and regulations. It includes lighting and earthing systems, sockets, distribution boards, cable trays, electrical metallic tubing, and plug
accessories.
To ensure safe operation, E-Houses are equipped with fire and
smoke detection systems, fire fighting systems, emergency exits,
and access control. A heating, ventilation and air conditioning
system (HVAC) for smooth operation at high ambient temperatures, can be installed on the roof, inside or outside of any
E-House. Air filtration systems, gas-detection and pressurization
systems can be added (e.g. for hazardous areas).
With our E-Houses, you benefit from a single interface competence for the overall electrical design, the structural mechanical
design, HVAC design, and the procurement of the auxiliary
equipment.
Fig. 2.7-7: Load calculation in order to ensure the structural integrity

of the E-House
Benefits
High flexibility due to modular design
Space saving design
Optimized design, fitted to our comprehensive and consistent
MV and LV portfolio.
Fig. 2.7-8: Optimized design fitted to our MV and LV portfolio
74

2.7.5 One-Stop Solution

Comprehensive and consistent portfolio
With its comprehensive and consistent portfolio, Siemens
contributes to maximizing returns, and optimizing energy
consumption. Decades of experience and continuous innovation
are the basis for this know-how. The results are integrated
solutions with state-of-the-art components ranging from:
Low-voltage and medium-voltage switchgear (GIS and AIS) up
to 52 kV
Low-voltage and medium-voltage motor control centers (MCC)
and main distribution centers (MDB)
Variable frequency drives (VFD)
Dry-type transformers
Control and protection panel boards
SCADA and energy automation systems
Relay panels
Busbar trunking systems.
In addition, E-Houses are equipped with batteries, instrumentation, uninterruptible power supply (UPS) and a wide range of
auxiliary equipment. With our E-Houses, system operators
benefit from the consistency of Siemens advanced technology
and expertise in power supply solutions. Everything from a
single source!
Engineering
Network design
Project
management
One interface through all phases of the project (fig. 2.7-9)

Siemens is with its customers every step of the way through all
phases of the project, from engineering to installation and
commissioning. Reliable and competent local support is provided
right from planning to after-sales service. Components and
auxiliary equipment are globally sourced, and integrated in the
E-House. Siemens production facilities and centers of competence are found around the globe. Siemens supports the local
creation of value, and guarantees a competent contact person in
close reach of every project. Siemens experts bring their experience in project management, financial services, and life cycle
management to every project. This enables them to consider any
aspect of safety, logistics, and environmental protection.
Benefits
All equipment from a single source
Reliability and safety thanks to proven Siemens products and
systems
Application expertise
Global experience
One contact for the entire project
Financing support.
Global sourcing
and Integration
Installation and
commissioning
After-sales
services
Worldwide centers of competence and global footprint

C onsulting
P lanning
E xpertise
I ntegration design
S tandard PM process
(based on CMMI,
PMI, PMBOOK)
C ertified project staff
R egular MPM
assessments
Q uality expediting
F ull integration of all

distribution equipment
W orldwide sourcing
G lobal Siemens
product range
I EC and ANSI
E HS and quality
management
C onstruction and
site management
C ommission planning
and execution
Training
Warranty
Organization of
after-sales service
Fig. 2.7-9: From engineering to after-sales service: complete integration from a single source

www.siemens.com/e-house
75

2.8 Microgrids The Next
Step towards an Efficient
Use of Distributed Resources
A microgrid is electricity generation and loads, and in some

cases storage, managed collectively in a network. Besides electricity, microgrids may include other vectors such as heat, gas,
water. Microgrids manage energy resources according to a given
set of criteria. They may be operated in off-grid, on-grid as well
as in dual mode to optimize technical (e.g., power quality,
frequency) and economic aspects (e.g., optimal use of renewable energy). In an optional emergency mode, the microgrid
provides blackstart capabilities.
Siemens microgrid management systems (fig. 2.8-1)
Optimize use of intermittent generation, and increased
efficiency by combining heat and electricity generation
Increase stability of supply and grid resilience through on- and
off-grid functionality
Optimize energy management for reduced or better controlled
energy costs and CO2 footprint
Optimize economic performance of energy system through
peak load management and limitation of grid extensions.
2.8.1 Operation, Monitoring,

Administration, Planning All Under
One Roof
The Siemens microgrid management system monitors and controls
grids with large and small distributed energy generators, renewable
assets, storage and loads. The scalable system helps to automate,
display, alarm and control all elements in the grid, thus assuring the
needed quality of supply at all times. It generates schedules,
automatically monitors their observance, and readjusts them in real

time. This is enabled by automatic switching sequences based on
rules or forecasts that draw on a large number of constantly updated
parameters such as weather forecasts, type of plant or power price.
Siemens solutions also help to efficiently incorporate such as
cogeneration plants. Intelligent networking of energy infrastructure
using Siemens microgrid management systems not only increases
the added value of the power supply, but also protects its operation
from outages, regardless of whether the microgrid is connected
to the supply network or not. Siemens solutions are flexible and
expandable today and in the future (fig. 2.8-2).
Intelligently managing microgrids
Siemens microgrid management systems are the ideal solution
to ensure the most optimized control of fluctuating electricity
generators within a microgrid. The tailored solutions meet the
individual challenges of each power scenario with a modular
structure and flexible scalability. This means that our customers
receive a software solution exactly tailored to their needs.
Microgrid administration comprises a range of intelligent,
versatile and user-friendly tools for a wide range of applications.
End-to-end SCADA and numerous functions for forecasting, planning and real-time optimization support in:
Monitoring and controlling the microgrid components
Monitoring and controlling generation
Monitoring and controlling consumption
Providing ancillary services
Buying and selling power.
It is flexible, direct and progressive.
Benefits
All equipment from a single source
Reliability and safety thanks to proven Siemens products
Application expertise
Global experience
One contact for the entire project
Financing support.
Fig. 2.8-1: Microgrid with one common point of coupling to the utility grid
76

2.8 Microgrids The Next Step towards an Efficient Use of Distributed Resources
Fig. 2.8-2: Operation, monitoring, administration, planning all under one roof
Trouble-free engineering
The intuitive design tools are a core element in the microgrid
management system. Even the most complicated power infrastructures can be represented digitally with just a few clicks of
the mouse. This saves time and minimizes the potential for error,
thanks to many automatic support functions.
Benefits of a fully integrated microgrid solution
Modular construction, flexible and scalable
Reliable microgrid operation
Intuitive modeling and parameterization
Intelligent forecasting and planning
Simple, real-time optimization
Incorporation of distributed generators, storage units and loads
No 24/7 operator required.
2.8.2 Microgrid Market Segments

According to todays experience and publications, there are four
major microgrid market segments:
Institutional microgrids the challenges of renewable
energy
Rising energy prices, as well as reliable and resilient energy are
increasingly becoming concerns to large energy consumers.
Fundamental business changes such as market deregulation
offer new opportunities for corporations, governmental organizations, municipalities and universities to manage their energy
supply optimized for their own use. Siemens delivers tailored
solutions to meet energy goals, like energy reliability, sustainability, resiliency, or economic aspects. By adding renewable
generation sources and storage to the microgrid, the reliability
of energy supply increases, and costs are reduced. As multiple
Fig. 2.8-3: Institutional microgrids the challenges of renewable

energy
generation sources and energy assets are added to a microgrid,

advanced control functionality is required to ensure the system
is operating as efficiently as possible (fig. 2.8-3).
Critical infrastructures microgrids renewable energies in
critical environments
For operation of critical power grid infrastructures, the increasingly deregulated energy market, and the advances in renewable
energy sources offer both opportunities and challenges. The use
of renewables to supply critical infrastructure increases the
77

independence from grid supply and lowers operating costs,

especially since surplus electricity can be sold. If storage systems
are used, operations can to take the form of an electrical island,
providing security in case of emergencies such like storms.
Fluctuations in electricity generation in a microgrid demand
intelligent control mechanisms, reliable forecasts, and especially in island mode a balance between available power and
power consumed (fig. 2.8-4).
Remote locations microgrids stable power supply for

weak grids
For the operation of power grids in remote locations, the
advances in renewable energy sources offer both opportunities
and challenges: By incorporating renewable and storage facilities in the supply systems, operators can cut their power costs
dramatically while increasing grid availability even in poorly
supplied areas. Wherever the transportation of fossil fuels over
long distances is costly and unreliable, the use of wind or solar
plants can take a lasting improvement in terms of both independence and economic efficiency. Fluctuations of electricity generation in a microgrid demand intelligent control mechanisms as
well as reliable load and generation forecasts. It is essential to
maintain a balance between energy generated and energy
consumed (fig. 2.8-5).
Industrial microgrids modern energy challenges
and chances
Operators of industrial power grids face two major challenges:
They need to optimize their average production costs which
includes ensuring a secure and reliable power supply to assure
production and at the same time reducing CO2 emissions. The
use of renewables to supply industrial facilities reduces both CO2
emissions and the requirement for imported electricity. This
lowers operating costs, especially since surplus electricity can be
sold. If storage systems are used, it allows operations to take the
form of an electrical island, ensuring smooth production, regardless of a public power supply that in many locations may be
insufficient. Fluctuations in electricity generation in a microgrid
demand intelligent control mechanisms, reliable forecasts and
especially in island mode a balance between available power
and power consumed (fig. 2.8-6).
Fig. 2.8-4: Critical infrastructures microgrids renewable energies

in critical environments
Fig. 2.8-5: Critical infrastructures microgrids renewable energies

in critical environments
Fig. 2.8-6: Industrial microgrids modern energy challenges and

chances
78

2.8.3 Siemens Microgrid Management

Systems
To meet decentralized infrastructure development needs and
provide advanced functionality to maximize its value, Siemens
supplies scalable microgrid management systems and solutions
based on automation equipment in the SICAM series and
software solutions based on the leading Spectrum Power
platform. These are providing solutions for microgrids covering
energy and optionally heat . Depending on the case of use, the
solution can range from field devices for equipment control
over decentralized automation to a fully functional microgrid
manager. Depending on scale and required functionality, two
main solution lines are available:
SICAM Microgrid Manager
Spectrum Power Microgrid Management System.
Fig. 2.8-7: Schematic diagram of the layout of a SICAM Microgrid

Manager
SICAM Microgrid Manager

The SICAM Microgrid Manager is the ideal solution for small to
medium-sized microgrids covering energy and optionally heat. It
is focused on 24/7 autonomous control with minimum operator
intervention (fig. 2.8-7).
Functionality
Grid monitoring and control
Small and large distributed generator control
(electrical power, heat)
Storage control
Load control
Generation forecast
Load forecast
Schedule optimization.
Spectrum Power Microgrid Management System
The Spectrum Power Microgrid Management System is the ideal
solution for medium- to large-sized microgrids covering electricity
and optionally heat. It offers advanced application functionality,
market interface, enhanced consideration of grid constraints,
and can be enriched with applications up to a full distribution
management system (fig. 2.8-8).
Fig. 2.8-8: Schematic diagram of the layout of a Spectrum Power

Microgrid Management System
Functionality
Grid monitoring and control
Small and large distributed generator control
(electrical power, heat)
Storage control
Load control
Generation forecast
Load forecast
Schedule optimization
Online control.
79
80
3.1
High-Voltage Substations
82
3.1.1 Turnkey Substations
82
3.1.2 High-Voltage Switchgear Overview
83
3.1.3 Circuit Configuration
84
3.1.4 Air-Insulated Substations
87
3.1.5 Mixed Technology (Compact/Hybrid Solutions) 95

3.1.6 Gas-Insulated Switchgear for Substations
3.2
Medium-Voltage Switchgear
99
109
3.2.1 Introduction
109
3.2.2 Basics of Switching Devices
110
3.2.3 Requirements of Medium-Voltage Switchgear 114

3.2.4 Medium-Voltage Switchgear
116
3.2.5 High-Current and Generator Switchgear
132
3.2.6 Industrial Load Center Substation
134
3.3
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Systems
138
3.3.1 Requirements for Electrical Power Systems

in Buildings
138
3.3.2 Dimensioning of Power Distribution Systems
141
3.3.3 Low-Voltage Switchboards
144
3.3.4 Planning Notes for Low-Voltage Switchboards 147

3.3.5 Low-Voltage Switchboard
Panel Types and Example
150
3.3.6 Subdistribution Systems
151
3.3.7 Busbar Trunking Systems
152
3.3.8 Benefits and Data of the BTS Families
155
81
3 Switchgear and Substations

3.1 High-Voltage Substations
3.1.1 Turnkey Substations
Project management
The process of handling such a turnkey installation starts with
preparation of a quotation, and proceeds through clarification of
the order, design, manufacture, supply and cost-accounting until
the project is finally billed. Processing such an order hinges on
methodical data processing that in turn contributes to systematic project handling.
Engineering
All these high-voltage installations have in common their high
standard of engineering which covers all system aspects such as
power systems, steel structures, civil engineering, fire precautions, environmental protection and control systems (fig. 3.1-1).
Every aspect of technology and each work stage is handled by
experienced engineers. With the aid of high-performance computer programs, e.g., the finite element method (FEM), installations can be reliably designed even for extreme stresses, such as
those encountered in earthquake zones.
82
e.g., HV/MV
switchgear,
HV devices,
transformer
Gantries and
substructures
Substation
Control
Control and
monitoring,
measurement,
protection, etc.
Civil
Engineering
Buildings,
roads,
foundations
Design
AC/DC s
e
auxiliari
Ancillary
equipment
ab
rc
Contro
la
signal c nd
ables
les
ge
Sur rters
e
div
g
in
rth
Ea stem
sy
Fire
protection
Env
iron
pro menta
tec
tion l
Lig
ion
lat
nti
Ve
u.
r-freq
Carrie
ent
equipm
Scope
High-voltage substations comprise not only the high-voltage
equipment which is relevant for the functionality in the power
supply system. Siemens plans and constructs high-voltage
substations comprising high-voltage switchgear, mediumvoltage switchgear, major components such as high-voltage
equipment and transformers, as well as all ancillary equipment
such as auxiliaries, control systems, protective equipment and so
on, on a turnkey basis or even as general contractor. The installations supplied worldwide range from basic substations with
a single busbar to interconnection substations with multiple
busbars, or a breaker-and-a-half arrangement for rated voltages
up to 800 kV, rated currents up to 8,000 A and short-circuit
currents up to 100 kA. The services offered range from system
planning to commissioning and after-sales service, including
training of customer personnel.
Structural
Steelwork
we
Major
Components
Po
Introduction
High-voltage substations are interconnection points within the
power transmission and distribution grids between regions and
countries. Different applications of substations lead to highvoltage substations with and without power transformers:
Step up from a generator-voltage level to a high-voltage
system (MV/HV)
Power plants (in load centers)
Renewable power plants (e.g., windfarms)
Transform voltage levels within the high-voltage grid (HV/HV)
Step down to a medium-voltage level of a distribution system
(HV/MV)
Interconnection in the same voltage level.
ht
ni
ng
Fig. 3.1-1: Engineering of high-voltage switchgear
All planning documentation is produced on modern CAD/CAE

systems; data exchange with other CAD systems is possible via
interfaces. By virtue of their active involvement in national and
international associations and standardization bodies, our
engineers are always fully informed of the state of the art, even
before a new standard or specification is published.
Certification of the integrated quality management system
At the beginning of the 1980s, a documented QM system was
already introduced. The basis of the management system is the
documentation of all processes relevant for quality, occupational
safety and environmental protection.
The environment protection was implemented on the basis of
the existing QM system and was certified in accordance with DIN
ISO 14001 in 1996. Occupational safety and health have always
played an important role for Siemens AG and for the respective
Business Units. When the BS OHSAS 18001 standard was introduced, the conditions for a certification analogous to the
existing management systems were created.
Know-how, experience and worldwide presence
A worldwide network of liaisons and sales offices, along with the
specialist departments in Germany, support and advise system
operators in all matters of high-voltage substations technology.

3.1.2 High-Voltage Switchgear

Overview
High-voltage substations comprising high-voltage switchgear
and devices with different insulating systems: air or gas (SF6).
When planning high-voltage substations, some basic questions
have to be answered to define the type of high-voltage switchgear:
What is the function and location within the power supply system?
What are the climatic and environmental conditions?
Are there specific requirements regarding locations?
Are there space/cost restrictions?
Depending on the answers, either AIS or GIS can be the right
choice, or even a compact or hybrid solution.
Fig. 3.1-2: Air-insulated outdoor switchgear
Air-insulated switchgear (AIS)

AIS are favorably priced high-voltage substations for rated
voltages up to 800 kV, which are popular wherever space restrictions and environmental circumstances are not severe. The
individual electrical and mechanical components of an AIS installation are assembled on site. Air-insulated outdoor substations
of open design are not completely safe to touch, and are directly
exposed to the effects of the climate and the environment
(fig. 3.1-2).
Gas-insulated switchgear (GIS)
The compact design and small dimensions of GIS make it possible to install substations of up to 550 kV right in the middle of
load centers of urban or industrial areas. Each switchgear bay is
factory-assembled and includes the full complement of disconnecting switches, earthing switches (regular or make-proof),
instrument transformers, control and protection equipment, and
interlocking and monitoring facilities commonly used for this
type of installation. The earthed metal enclosures of GIS assure
not only insensitivity to contamination but also safety from
electric shock (fig. 3.1-3).
Mixed technology (compact/hybrid solutions)
Beside the two basic (conventional) designs, there are also
compact solutions available that can be realized with air-insulated and/or gas-insulated components.
Fig. 3.1-3: GIS substations in metropolitan areas
83

3.1.3 Circuit Configuration

High-voltage substations are points in the power system where
power can be pooled from generating sources, distributed and
transformed, and delivered to the load points. Substations are
interconnected with each other, so that the power system
becomes a meshed network. This increases reliability of the
power supply system by providing alternate paths for flow of
power to take care of any contingency, so that power delivery to
the loads is maintained and the generators do not face any
outage. The high-voltage substation is a critical component in
the power system, and the reliability of the power system
depends upon the substation. Therefore, the circuit configuration of the high-voltage substation has to be selected carefully.
Busbars are the part of the substation where all the power is
concentrated from the incoming feeders, and distributed to the
outgoing feeders. That means that the reliability of any highvoltage substation depends on the reliability of the busbars
present in the power system. An outage of any busbar can have
dramatic effects on the power system. An outage of a busbar
leads to the outage of the transmission lines connected to it. As
a result, the power flow shifts to the surviving healthy lines that
are now carrying more power than they are capable of. This
leads to tripping of these lines, and the cascading effect goes on
until there is a blackout or similar situation. The importance of
busbar reliability should be kept in mind when taking a look at
the different busbar systems that are prevalent.
Fig. 3.1-4: Special single busbar, H-scheme (1 BB)
Single-busbar scheme (1 BB)

The applications of this simple scheme are distribution and
transformer substations, and feeding industrial areas (fig. 3.1-4).
Because it has only one busbar and the minimum amount of
equipment, this scheme is a low-cost solution that provides only
limited availability. In the event of a busbar failure and during
maintenance periods, there will be an outage of the complete
substation. To increase the reliability, a second busbar has to be
added.
Double-busbar scheme (2 BB)
The more complex scheme of a double-busbar system gives
much more flexibility and reliability during operation of the
substation (fig. 3.1-5). For this reason, this scheme is used for
distribution and transformer substations at the nodes of the
power supply system. It is possible to control the power flow by
using the busbars independently, and by switching a feeder from
one busbar to the other. Because the busbar disconnectors are
not able to break the rated current of the feeder, there will be
a short disruption in power flow.
Fig. 3.1-5: Double-busbar scheme (2 BB)
84

Double circuit-breaker scheme (2 CB)

To have a load change without disruption, a second circuitbreaker per feeder has to be used. This is the most expensive
way to solve this problem. In very important feeders, the 2 CB
solution will be used (fig. 3.1-6).
One-breaker-and-a-half scheme (1.5 CB)
The one-breaker-and-a-half is a compromise between the 2 BB
and the 2 CB scheme. This scheme improves the reliability and
flexibility because, even in case of loss of a complete busbar,
there is no disruption in the power supply of the feeders
(fig. 3.1-7).
3
Fig. 3.1-6: Double circuit-breaker scheme (2 CB)
Fig. 3.1-7: One-breaker-and-a-half scheme (1.5 CB)
85

Fig. 3.1-8: Triple-busbar scheme (3 BB)
Triple-busbar scheme (3 BB)

For important substations at the nodes of transmission systems
for higher voltage levels, the triple-busbar scheme is used. It is
a common scheme in Germany, utilized at the 380 kV level
(fig. 3.1-8).
86

3.1.4 Air-Insulated Substations

In outdoor installations of open design, all live parts are insulated by air and not covered. Therefore, air-insulated substations (AIS) are always set up in a fenced area. Only authorized
personnel have access to this operational area. Relevant
national and international specifications that apply to outdoor
substations and equipment have to be considered. The
IEC 61936 standard is valid for European countries. Insulation
coordination, including minimum phase-to-phase and phase-toearth clearances, is effected in accordance with IEC 60071.
Outdoor switchgear is directly exposed to the effects of the
environmental conditions. Therefore, they have to be designed
both for electrical and environmental specifications. There is
currently no common international standard covering the setup
of air-insulated outdoor substations of open design. Siemens
designs AIS in accordance with IEC standards, in addition to
national standards or customer specifications. The standard
IEC 61936-1, Erection of power installations with rated voltages
above 1 kV, demonstrates the typical protective measures and
stresses that have to be taken into consideration for air-insulated
switchyards.
Protective measures
The protective measures can be categorized as personal
protection and functional protection of substations (S/S).
Personal protection
Protective measures against direct contact, i. e., through
appropriate covering, obstruction, through sufficient
clearance, appropriately positioned protective devices, and
minimum height
Protective measures against indirect touching by means of
relevant earthing measures in accordance with IEC 61936/
DIN VDE 0101 or other required standards
Protective measures during work on equipment, i.e.,
installation must be planned so that the specifications of
DIN EN 50110 (VDE 0105) (e.g., five safety rules) are
observed
Functional protection
Protective measures during operation, e.g., use of
switchgear interlocking equipment
Protective measures against voltage surges and lightning
strikes
Protective measures against fire, water and, if applicable,
noise
Stresses
Electrical stresses, e.g., rated current, short-circuit current,
adequate creepage distances and clearances
Mechanical stresses (normal stressing), e.g., weight, static
and dynamic loads, ice, wind
Mechanical stresses (exceptional stresses), e.g., weight and
constant loads in simultaneous combination with maximum
switching forces or short-circuit forces, etc.
Special stresses, e.g., caused by installation altitudes of
more than 1,000 m above sea level, or by earthquakes.
Variables affecting switchgear installation

The switchyard design is significantly influenced by:
Minimum clearances (depending on rated voltages) between
various active parts and between active parts and earth
Rated and short-circuit currents
Clarity for operating staff
Availability during maintenance work; redundancy
Availability of land and topography
Type and arrangement of the busbar disconnectors.
The design of a substation determines its accessibility, availability
and clarity. It must therefore be coordinated in close cooperation
with the system operator. The following basic principles apply:
Accessibility and availability increase with the number of busbars.
At the same time, however, clarity decreases. Installations
involving single busbars require minimum investment, but they
offer only limited flexibility for operation management and
maintenance. Designs involving one-breaker-and-a-half and
double-circuit-breaker arrangements ensure a high redundancy,
but they also entail the highest costs.
Systems with auxiliary or bypass busbars have proved to be

economical. The circuit-breaker of the coupling feeder for the
auxiliary bus allows uninterrupted replacement of each feeder
circuit-breaker. For busbars and feeder lines, mostly standard
aluminum conductors are used. Bundle conductors are required
where currents are high. Because of the additional short-circuit
forces between the subconductors (the pinch effect), however,
bundle conductors cause higher mechanical stresses at the
terminal points. When conductors (particularly standard bundle
conductors) are used, higher short-circuit currents cause a rise
not only in the aforementioned pinch effect, also in further
force maxima in the event of swinging and dropping of the
conductor bundle (cable pull). This in turn results in higher
mechanical stresses on the switchyard components. These
effects can be calculated in an FEM (finite element method)
simulation (fig. 3.1-9).
Vertical displacement in m
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
Horizontal
displacement in m
2.0
2.2
1.4
1.0
0.6
0.2 0
0.2
0.6
1.0
1.4
Fig. 3.1-9: FEM calculation of deflection of wire conductors in the

event of short circuit
87

Computer-aided engineering/design (CAE/CAD)

A variety of items influence the design of air-insulated substations.
In the daily engineering work, database-supported CAE tools are
used for the primary and secondary engineering of the substations. The database speeds up all the engineering processes by
using predefined solutions and improves the quality (fig. 3.1-10).
Design of air-insulated substations
When rated and short-circuit currents are high, aluminum tubes
are increasingly used to replace wire conductors for busbars and
feeder lines. They can handle rated currents up to 8,000 A and
short-circuit currents up to 80 kA without difficulty. Other
influences on the switchyard design are the availability of land,
the lie of the land, the accessibility and location of incoming and
outgoing overhead-lines, and the number of transformers and
voltage levels. A one-line or two-line arrangement, and possibly
a U-arrangement, may be the proper solution. Each outdoor
switchgear installation, especially for step-up substations in
connection with power plants and large transformer substations
in the extra-high-voltage transmission system, is therefore
unique, depending on the local conditions. HV/MV transformer
substations of the distribution system, with repeatedly used
equipment and a scheme of one incoming and one outgoing line
as well as two transformers together with medium-voltage
switchgear and auxiliary equipment, are usually subject to
a standardized design.
Customer
Documentation
Deriving of 2D-primary
drawings and
completion of secondary
drawings
Specification
clarification
Database
Projects
Solutions
Symbols
Selection of
predefined typical
solutions/modules
Generating of:
Material lists
Equipment lists
Terminal diagrams
Wiring lists
Cable lists
Completion of:
Delta engineering
3D-models
schematic
diagrams
Adapting to the
customer
requirements
Fig. 3.1-10: Database-supported engineering
Preferred designs
Conceivable designs include certain preferred versions that are
often dependent on the type and arrangement of the busbar
disconnectors.
H-arrangement
The H-arrangement is preferred for use in applications for
feeding industrial consumers. Two overhead-lines are connected
with two transformers and interlinked by a double-bus sectionalizer. Thus, each feeder of the switchyard can be maintained
without disturbance of the other feeders (fig. 3.1-11, fig. 3.1-12).
Fig. 3.1-11: H-arrangement 123 kV, GIS (3D view HIS)
Fig. 3.1-12: 110 kV H-arrangement, conventional AIS (3D view)
88

Fig. 3.1-13: H-arrangement 110 kV
H-arrangement
The H-arrangement is preferred for use in applications for feeding
industrial consumers. Two overhead-lines are connected with two
transformers and interlinked by a double-bus sectionalizer. Thus,
each feeder of the switchyard can be maintained without disturbance of the other feeders (fig. 3.1-13, fig. 3.1-14).
Fig. 3.1-14: H-arrangement, 110 kV, Germany
89
2,800
SECTION A-A
BUSBAR 2
6,300
9,000
BUSBAR 1
18,500
12,000
54,300
2,000 2,000
10,000
2,000 2,000
23,800
5,500
4,500
20,000
Fig. 3.1-15: In-line arrangement, 110 kV
In-line longitudinal arrangement (Kiellinie), with center-break

disconnectors, preferably 110 to 220 kV
The busbar disconnectors are lined up one behind the other and
parallel to the longitudinal axis of the busbar. It is preferable to
have either wire-type or tubular busbars. Where tubular busbars
are used, gantries are required for the outgoing overhead lines
only. The system design requires only two conductor levels and
is therefore clear. The bay width is quite large (in-line arrangement of disconnectors), but the bay length is small (fig. 3.1-15,
fig. 3.1-16).
Fig. 3.1-16: Busbar disconnectors in line, 110 kV, Germany
90

3,000
SECTION A-A
BUSBAR 2
9,000
13,000
BUSBAR 1
7,600
18,000
3
17,000
5,500
4,000
13,500
4,000
16,500
3,500
16,000
17,000
17,000
16,000
Fig. 3.1-17: Central/center tower arrangement, 220 kV
Central/center arrangement (classical arrangement) layout with

center-break disconnectors, normally only for 245 kV
The busbar disconnectors are arranged side-by-side and parallel
to the longitudinal axis of the feeder. Wire-type busbars located
at the top are commonly used; tubular busbars are also possible.
This arrangement enables the conductors to be easily jumpered
over the circuit-breakers, and the bay width to be made smaller
than that of in-line designs. With three conductor levels, the
system is relatively clear, but the cost of the gantries is high
(fig. 3.1-17, fig. 3.1-18).
Fig. 3.1-18: Central/center tower arrangement, 220 kV, Egypt
91

4,000
SECTION A-A
18,000
BUSBAR SYSTEM
9,000
15,000
32,000
6,000
4,500 4,500 6,000
21,000
27,000
5,000
4,500 4,500
18,000
4,500 4,500 4,500 4,500
4,500 4,500
15,000
Fig. 3.1-19: Diagonal arrangement, 380 kV
Diagonal layout with pantograph disconnectors, preferably

110 to 420 kV
The pantograph disconnectors are placed diagonally to the axis
of the busbars and feeder. This results in a very clear and most
space-saving arrangement. Wire and tubular conductors are
customary. The busbars can be located above or below the
feeder conductors (fig. 3.1-19, fig. 3.1-20).
Fig. 3.1-20: Busbar disconnectors in diagonal arrangement,

380 kV, Germany
92

SECTION A-A
7,000
BUSBAR 1
BUSBAR 2
27,000
3
31,000
20,250
19,000
33,000
27,000
32,500
27,000
33,000
29,300
16,700
32,000
268,750
Fig. 3.1-21: One-breaker-and-a-half arrangement, 500 kV
One-breaker-and-a-half layout, preferably up to 220 to 800 kV

The one-breaker-and-a-half arrangement ensures high supply
reliability; however, the expenditure for equipment is high as
well. The busbar disconnectors are of the pantograph, rotary or
vertical-break type. Vertical-break disconnectors are preferred
for the feeders. The busbars located at the top can be either
the wire or tubular type. Two arrangements are customary:
Internal busbar, feeders in H-arrangement with two conductor
levels
External busbar, feeders in-line with three conductor levels
(fig. 3.1-21, fig. 3.1-22)
Fig. 3.1-22: One-breaker-and-a-half arrangement, 500 kV, Pakistan
93

SECTION A-A
BUSBAR 2
38,550
6,750
BUSBAR 1
24,000
21,500
15,000
58,500
53,000
58,500
15,000
21,500
22,000
289,000
15,000
15,000
15,000
15,000
15,000
12,000
54,000
12,000
15,000
Fig. 3.1-23: One-breaker-and-a-half arrangement, 800 kV
One-breaker-and-a-half layout, preferably 220 to 800 kV

The one-breaker-and-a-half arrangement ensures high supply
reliability; however, the expenditure for equipment is high as
well. The busbar disconnectors are of the pantograph, rotary or
vertical-break type. Vertical-break disconnectors are preferred
for the feeders. The busbars located at the top can be either the
wire or tubular type. Two arrangements are customary:
Internal busbar, feeders in H-arrangement with two conductor
levels
External busbar, feeders in-line with three conductor
(fig. 3.1-23, fig. 3.1-24)
Fig. 3.1-24: One-breaker-and-a-half arrangement, 800 kV, India
94

3.1.5 Mixed Technology

(Compact/Hybrid Solutions)
Wherever there is a lack of space, system operators have to rely on
space-saving outdoor switchgear, especially in regions where
smaller-scale transformer substations prevail and in industrial
plants. For rated voltages from 72.5 to 170 kV, Siemens Energy
offers two different conventional switchgear versions for a reliable and cost-effective power supply:
SIMOBREAKER, outdoor switchyard featuring a side-break
disconnector
SIMOVER, outdoor switchyard featuring a pivoting circuitbreaker
HIS, highly integrated switchgear
DTC, dead-tank compact
7.5 m
8m
11 m
3m
SIMOBREAKER can also be used as indoor switchgear. Installation

inside a building ensures protection against the elements. This
can be an enormous advantage, particularly in regions with
extreme climates, but it is also relevant in industrial installations
exposed to excessive pollution, e.g., in many industrial plants
(fig. 3.1-25, fig. 3.1-26).
Fig. 3.1-25: SIMOBREAKER module
8m
SIMOBREAKER Substation with rotary disconnector

The design principle of SIMOBREAKER provides for the side-break
disconnector blade to be located on the rotating post insulator,
which establishes the connection between the circuit-breaker
and the transformer. Because the circuit-breaker, the disconnector, the earthing switch and the instrument transformer are
integrated into SIMOBREAKER, there is no need for a complex
connection with cables and pipes, or for separate foundations,
steel, or earthing terminals for each individual device. This
means that the system operator gets a cost-effective and standardized overall setup from one source and has no need to
provide any items. Coordination work is substantially reduced,
and interface problems do not even arise.
Fig. 3.1-26: SIMOBREAKER (schematic)
95

2m
1.7
m
2m
2m
1.7
m
2m
The concept behind SIMOVER is based on customary type-tested

standard components. This ensures high reliability. Thanks to
economizing on the disconnectors, and to the integration of the
instrument transformers and the local control cubicle, implementation costs are considerably reduced. All components
needed for the full scope of functioning of the movable circuitbreaker can be obtained from a single source, so there is no
need for customer-provided items, coordination work is greatly
reduced and interface problems do not even arise (fig. 3.1-27,
fig. 3.1-28).
31 m
25 m
8.3 m
SIMOVER Switchgear with withdrawable circuit-breaker

The compact SIMOVER switchgear, specially conceived for
substations with single busbars, features a pivoting circuitbreaker. It is excellent for use in small transformer substations
such as windfarms or any plants where space is restricted. It
integrates all components of a high-voltage bay. There are no
busbar and outgoing disconnectors for the feeders. The cabling
is simple, and the switching status is clear. Drive technology is
improved and the drive unit is weatherproofed. Pre-assembled
components reduce installation times. In SIMOVER, all components of a high-voltage outdoor switchgear bay, including the
isolating distances, are integrated in one unit. The instrument
transformers and the local control cubicle are part of this substation design.
Fig. 3.1-27: SIMOVER H-arrangement (schematic)
Fig. 3.1-28: H-arrangement with SIMOVER, 145 kV, Czech Republic
96

Dead-tank compact (DTC)

The dead-tank compact is another compact solution for the
145 kV voltage level: a dead-tank circuit-breaker together with
GIS modules for disconnectors (fig 3.1-29, fig. 3.1-30). For more
information, please refer to section 4.1.4.
3
Fig 3.1-29: Dead Tank Compact (DTC)
Fig. 3.1-30: DTC solution (schematic)
97

Highly integrated switchgear (HIS)

Highly integrated switchgear (HIS), fig. 3.1-31 and fig. 3.1-32
combines the advantages of air-insulated installations with
those of gas-insulated switchgear technology. HIS switchgear is
available up to 550 kV. The compact HIS switchgear is especially
suited
for new substations in a limited space
where real estate prices are high
where environmental conditions are extreme
where the costs of maintenance are high.
HIS arrangements are compact solutions used mainly for

renewal or expansion of air-insulated outdoor and indoor substations, particularly if the operator wants to carry out modifications while the switchgear is in service. In new construction
projects, high site prices and increasingly complex approval
procedures mean that the space requirement is the prime factor
in costing. With the HIS solution, the circuit-breakers, disconnectors, earthing switches and transformers are accommodated in
compressed gastight enclosures, thus rendering the switchgear
extremely compact.
23 m
33 m
Fig. 3.1-31: H-arrangement outdoor GIS
16 m
40 m
Space saving > 70 %; AIS 1,300 m HIS 360 m
Fig. 3.1-32: HIS for renewal of AIS space relations
98
Planning principles
For air-insulated outdoor substations of open design, the
following planning principles must be taken into account:
High reliability
Reliable mastering of normal and exceptional stresses
Protection against surges and lightning strikes
Protection against surges directly on the equipment
concerned (e.g., transformer, HV cable)
Good clarity and accessibility
Clear conductor routing with few conductor levels
Free accessibility to all areas (no equipment located at
inaccessible depth)
Adequate protective clearances for installation, maintenance
and transportation work
Adequately dimensioned transport routes
Positive incorporation into surroundings
As few overhead conductors as possible
Tubular instead of wire-type busbars
Unobtrusive steel structures
Minimal noise and disturbance level
EMC earthing system for modern control and protection
Fire precautions and environmental protection
Adherence to fire protection specifications and use of flameretardant and non-flammable materials
Use of environmentally compatible technology and
products.

3.1.6 Gas-Insulated Switchgear for

Substations
Characteristic features of switchgear installations
Since 1968, the concept of Siemens gas-insulated metalenclosed high-voltage switchgear has proved itself in more than
29,000 bay installations in all regions of the world (table 3.1-1).
Gas-insulated metal-enclosed high-voltage switchgear (GIS)
(fig. 3.1-33) is constantly gaining on other types of switchgear
because it offers the following outstanding advantages:
Minimum space requirements:
Where the availability of land is low and/or prices are high,
e.g., in urban centers, industrial conurbations, mountainous
regions with narrow valleys, or in underground power plants,
gas-insulated switchgear is replacing conventional switchgear
because of its very small space requirements.
Full protection against contact with live parts:
The surrounding metal enclosure affords maximum safety
for personnel under all operating and fault conditions.
Protection against pollution:
Its metal enclosure fully protects the switchgear interior
against environmental effects such as salt deposits in coastal
regions, industrial vapors and precipitates, and sandstorms.
The compact switchgear can be installed as an indoor as well
as an outdoor solution.
Free choice of installation site:
The small site area required for gas-insulated switchgear saves
expensive grading and foundation work, e.g., in permafrost
zones. Another advantage is the rapid on-side installation and
commissioning because off the short erection time and the
use of prefabricated and factory tested bay units.
Protection of the environment:
The necessity to protect the environment often makes it
difficult to install outdoor switchgear of conventional design.
Gas-insulated switchgear, however, can almost always be
designed to blend well with the surroundings. Gas-insulated
metal-enclosed switchgear is, because of the modular design,
very flexible, and meets all requirements for configuration
that exist in the network design and operating conditions.
Each circuit-breaker bay includes the full complement of disconnecting and earthing switches (regular or make-proof), instrument transformers, control and protection equipment, and
interlocking and monitoring facilities commonly used for this
type of installation.
More than 50 years of experience with gas-insulated switchgear

1960
Start of fundamental studies in research and development

of SF6 technology
1964
Delivery of first SF6 circuit-breaker
1968
Delivery of first GIS
1974
Delivery of first GIL (420 kV)
1997
Introduction of intelligent, bay integrated control, monitoring

and diagnostic
1999
Introduction of newest GIS generation: self-compression

interrupter unit and spring-operated mechanism
2000
Introduction of the trendsetting switchgear concept HIS

(Highly Integrated Switchgear) for extension, retrofit and new
compact AIS substations
2005
First GIS with electrical endurance capability (class E2)
2007
Introduction of 72.5 kV GIS a new dimension in compactness
2009
New generation of of 145 kV 40 kA GIS
2010
New generation of 420 kV 63 kA GIS
2011
New 170 kV 63 kA GIS
2012
New 420 kV 80 kA GIS
2013
New 245 kV 80 / 90 kA GIS
2014
New 320kV DC CS
Table 3.1-1: Siemens experience with gas-insulated switchgear
Fig. 3.1-33: 8DN8 GIS for a rated voltage of 110 kV
Besides the traditional circuit-breaker bay, other circuits, such

as single busbar, single-busbar arrangement with bypass busbar,
coupler and bay for double and triple busbar, can be supplied.
(Main) product range of GIS for substations
The Siemens product range covers GIS from 72.5 up to 800 kV
rated voltage the main range covers GIS up to 550 kV
(table 3.1-2). Furthermore, in 2014 the portfolio was extended
by gas-insulated solutions for DC voltage with the 320kV DC CS
(see chapter 2.2.5).
99

Switchgear type
up to
8DN8
8DN9
170
245
Rated voltage
kV
Rated frequency
Hz
Rated power-frequency
withstand voltage (1 min)
kV
up to
325
460
Rated lightning impulse

withstand voltage (1.2 / 50 s)
kV
up to
750
Rated switching impulse

withstand voltage
(250 / 2,500 s)
up to
Rated normal current for busbar
Rated normal current for feeder

Rated short-circuit breaking
current
8DQ1
420
420
550
650
650
740
1,050
1,425
1,425
1,550
1,050
1,050
1,175
up to
4,000
4,000
5,000
6,300
5,000
kA
up to
4,000
4,000
5,000
5,000
5,000
kA
up to
63
50
63 / 80* / 90*
80
63
Rated peak withstand current
kA
up to
170
135
170 / 216* / 243*
216
170
Rated short-time withstand

current (3 s)
kA
up to
63
50
63 / 80*
80
63
Rated short-time withstand

current (1 s)
kA
up to
90*
Leakage rate per year and gas

compartment (type-tested)
50/60
< 0.1
stored-energy
spring (common
or single pole
drive)
Operating mechanism of circuitbreaker
stored-energy spring
(single pole drive)
O-0.3 s-CO-3 min-CO
CO-15 s-CO
Rated operating sequence

Installation
indoor/outdoor
Standards
IEC/IEEE/GOST
Bay width
mm
First major inspection
years
800 / 1,000
1,500
2,200
> 25
3,600
Expected lifetime
years
> 50
Other values on request * these values apply to 245 kV rated voltage
Table 3.1-2: Main product range of GIS
The development of this switchgear has been based on two

overall production concepts: meeting the high technical
standards required of high-voltage switchgear, and providing
maximum customer benefit.
This objective is attained only by incorporating all processes in
the quality management system, which has been introduced and
certified according to EN 29001/DIN EN ISO 9001.
Siemens GIS switchgear meets all performance, quality and
reliability demands, including:
Compact and low-weight design:
Small building dimensions and low floor loads, a wide range
of options in the utilization of space, and less space taken up
by the switchgear.
100
Safe encapsulation:
An outstanding level of safety based on new manufacturing
methods and optimized shape of enclosures.
Environmental compatibility:
No restrictions on choice of location due to minimum space
requirement; extremely low noise and EMC emission, as well
as effective gas sealing system (leakage < 0.1 % per year per
gas compartment). Modern spring mechanisms that are
currently available for the whole GIS 8D product spectrum
eliminate the need for hydraulic oil.
Economical transport:
Simplified fast transport and reduced costs, because of
a minimum of shipping units.

Feasibility studies
Financing support
and consulting
Overall project
management
After-sales
services and
recycling
Engineering
and design
Site facilities
and civil works
Training
On-site installation
and commissioning
Production
Procurement
Transport
Factory testing
Fig. 3.1-34: GIS for your full value chain offers
Low operating costs:

The switchgear is practically maintenance-free, e.g., contacts
of circuit-breakers and disconnectors are designed for
extremely long endurance, motor operating mechanisms are
lubricated for life, the enclosure is corrosion-free. This ensures
that the first inspection is required only after 25 years of
operation.
High reliability:
The longstanding experience of Siemens in design, production
and commissioning more than 330,000 bay operating years
in over 29,000 bay installations worldwide is testament to
the fact that the Siemens products are highly reliable. The
mean time between failures (MTBF) is more than 950 bay
years for major faults. A quality management system certified
according to ISO 9001, which is supported by highly qualified
employees, ensures high quality throughout the whole
process chain. Our services provide value added through
constant project-related support and consulting right from the
start and throughout the entire life cycle of our switchgear
all the way to disposal and recycling of old switchgear
(fig. 3.1-34).
Smooth and efficient installation and commissioning:
Transport units are fully assembled, tested at the factory and
filled with SF6 gas at reduced pressure. Coded plug connectors
are used to cut installation time and minimize the risk of
cabling failures.
Routine tests:
All measurements are automatically documented and stored in
the electronic information system, which provides quick
access to measured data for years.
Fig. 3.1-35: 8DN8 GIS for a rated voltage of 145 kV
3-phase enclosures are used for SF6-insulated switchgear type

8DN8 up to 170 kV in order to achieve small and compact component dimensions. The low bay weight ensures low floor
loading, and helps to reduce the cost of civil works and minimize
the footprint. The compact low-weight design allows installation
almost anywhere. Capital cost is reduced by using smaller
buildings or existing ones, e.g., when replacing medium-voltage
switchyards with the 145 kV GIS (fig. 3.1-35).
101

7
3
5
10
1
2
3
4
5
Integrated local control cubicle

Current transformer
Busbar II with disconnector and earthing switch
Interrupter unit of the circuit-breaker
Busbar I with disconnector and earthing switch
6
7
8
9
10
10
Stored-energy spring mechanism with circuit-breaker control unit

Voltage transformer
High-speed earthing switch
Outgoing module with disconnector and earthing switch
Cable sealing end
Fig. 3.1-36: 8DN8 switchgear bay up to 145 kV
The bay is based on a circuit-breaker mounted on a supporting

frame (fig. 3.1-36). A special multifunctional cross-coupling
module combines the functions of the disconnector and
earthing switch in a 3-position switching device. It can be used
as:
An active busbar with an integrated disconnector and work-inprogress earthing switch (fig. 3.1-36, pos. 3 and 5)
An outgoing feeder module with an integrated disconnector
and work-in-progress earthing switch (fig. 3.1-36, pos. 9)
A busbar sectionalizer with busbar earthing.
Cable termination modules can be equipped with either conventional sealing ends or the latest plug-in connectors (fig. 3.1-36,
pos. 10). Flexible 1-pole modules are used to connect overhead
lines and transformers with a splitting module that links the
3-phase enclosed switchgear to the 1-pole connections.
Thanks to their compact design, the completely assembled and
factory-tested bays can be shipped as a single transport unit.
Fast erection and commissioning on site ensure the highest
possible quality.
The feeder control and protection can be installed in a bay-integrated local control cubicle mounted to the front of each bay
(fig. 3.1-36, pos. 1). Moreover, state-of-the-art monitoring
devices are available at the system operators request, e.g., for
partial discharge online monitoring.
102
Fig. 3.1-37: 8DN9 switchgear for a rated voltage of 245 kV,

with a 3-phase enclosed passive busbar
The clear bay configuration of the lightweight and compact

8DN9 switchgear is evident at first glance. Control and monitoring facilities are easily accessible despite the switchgears
compact design.

2 14 4
5 8
10
12
6
4
3 M
5 M
M 8
1
M 9
11
M
12
gas-tight bushings
gas-permeable bushings
1. Circuit-breaker interrupter unit
2. Stored-energy spring mechanism
with circuit-breaker control unit
3. Busbar disconnector I
4. Busbar I
10
13
11
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
13
Busbar disconnector II
Busbar II
Outgoing disconnector
Earthing switch
Earthing switch
10. High-speed earthing switch

11. Current transformer
12. Voltage transformer
13. Cable sealing end
14. Integrated local control cubicle
Fig. 3.1-38: 8DN9 switchgear bay up to 245 kV
The horizontally arranged circuit-breaker forms the basis of

every bay configuration. The operating mechanism is easily
accessible from the operator area. The other bay modules of
1-phase enclosed switchgear design, like the circuit-breaker
module are located on top of the circuit-breaker. The 3-phase
enclosed passive busbar is partitioned off from the active
equipment (fig. 3.1-37, fig. 3.1-38).
Thanks to single-function assemblies (assignment of just one
task to each module) and the versatile modular structure, even
unconventional arrangements can be set up from a pool of only
20 different modules. The modules are connected to each other
with a standard interface that allows implementing an extensive range of bay structures. Switchgear design with standardized modules, and the scope of services ensure that all types of
bay structures can be set up in a small area. The compact design
allows supplying of complete bays that are fully assembled and
tested at the factory, providing smooth and efficient installation
and commissioning.
Fig. 3.1-39: 8DQ1 switchgear for a rated voltage of 550 kV
SF6-insulated switchgear for up to 550 kV, type 8DQ1 is

a 1-phase enclosed switchgear system for high-power switching
stations with individual enclosure of all modules.
103

10 11
7
3
13
M
12
4 M
10
14
11
13
12
14
gas-tight bushings
gas-permeable bushings
1 Integrated local control cubicle
5 Busbar disconnector II
10 Earthing switch
2 Stored-energy spring mechanism

with circuit-breaker control unit
6 Earthing switch
11 Outgoing disconnector
7 Busbar II
12 High-speed earthing switch
3 Busbar I
8 Circuit-breaker interrupter unit
13 Voltage transformer
4 Busbar disconnector I
9 Current transformer
14 Cable sealing end
Fig. 3.1-40: 8DQ1 switchgear bay up to 420 kV
The base unit for the switchgear is a horizontally arranged

circuit-breaker on top of which the housing containing the
disconnectors, earthing switches, current transformers and so
on are mounted. The busbar modules are partitioned off from
the active equipment (fig. 3.1-39, fig. 3.1-40, fig. 3.1-41).
Some other characteristic features of switchgear installation are:
Circuit-breakers with single interrupter unit up to operating
voltages of 420 kV (fig. 3.1-40, fig. 3.1-41), with two
interrupter units up to operating voltages of 550 kV
(fig. 3.1-39)
Short-circuit breaking currents up to 63 kA within 2 cycles
for 50 Hz / 60 Hz and 80 kA up to 420 kV
Horizontal arrangement of the circuit-breakers in the lower
section provides low center of gravity for the switchgear
Utilization of the circuit-breaker transport frame as
a supporting device for the entire bay
Reduced length of sealing surfaces, and thus, decreased risk
of leakage through use of only a few modules and equipment
combinations in one enclosure.
104
Fig. 3.1-41: 8DQ1 switchgear for a rated voltage of 420 kV

Specification guide for metal-enclosed SF6-insulated

switchgear
Note: The points below are not considered exhaustive, but are
a selection of the important. These specifications cover the
technical data applicable to metal-enclosed SF6-insulated switchgear for switching and distributing power in cable and/or overhead-line systems and transformers. Key technical data are
contained in the data sheet and the single-line diagram (SLD)
attached to the inquiry.
A general SLD and a sketch showing the general arrangement of
the substation will be part of a proposal. Any switchgear quoted
will be complete and will form a functional, safe and reliable system after installation, even if certain parts required to
achieve this have not been specifically been included in the
inquiry.
Applicable standards
All equipment is designed, built, tested and installed
according to the latest issues of the applicable
IEC standards, which are:
IEC 62271-1 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear:
Common specifications
Gas-insulated metal-enclosed switchgear for rated voltages
above 52 kV
Alternating-current circuit-breakers
Alternating current disconnectors and earthing switches
IEC 60044 Instrument transformers: Current transformers
National standards on request.
Local conditions
The equipment is tested for indoor and outdoor applications.
All the buyer has to provide is a flat concrete floor with the
cutouts for cable installation if this is required. The switchgear
comes equipped with adjustable supports (feet). If steel support
structures are required for the switchgear, Siemens will provide
these as well. For design purposes, the indoor temperatures
should be between 5 C and + 40 C, and outdoor temperatures
should be between 30 C and + 40 C (+ 50 C). For parts to be
installed outdoors (overhead-line connections), the conditions
described in IEC 62271-203 will be observed. For the enclosures,
aluminum or aluminum alloys are preferred.
A minimum of one-site installation will ensure maximum reliability. Up to six single or three double switchgear bays, completely assembled and tested, come as a single transport unit.
Subassembly size is restricted only by transport requirements.
Siemens will provide the enclosure in a material and thickness
suited to withstand an internal arc and prevent burn-throughs or
punctures within the first stage of protection, referred to the
rated short-circuit current of the given GIS type.
purpose. Density monitors with electrical contacts for at least

two pressure levels are installed to allow monitoring the gas in
the enclosures. The circuit-breakers can be monitored with
density gauges that are fitted in the circuit-breaker control units.
Siemens can assure that the pressure loss for each individual gas
compartment i.e., not just for the complete switchgear installation will not exceed 0.1 % per year and gas compartment.
Each gas-filled compartment comes equipped with static filters
that are capable of absorbing any water vapor that penetrates
into the switchgear installation for a period of at least 25 years.
Intervals between required inspections are long, which keeps
maintenance costs to a minimum. The first minor inspection is
due after ten years. The first major inspection is usually required
after more than 25 years of operation unless the permissible
number of operations is reached before that date.
Arrangement and modules

Arrangement
The system is of the enclosed 1-phase or 3-phase type. The
assembly consists of completely separate pressurized sections,
and is thus designed to minimize any danger to the operating
staff and risk of damage to adjacent sections, even if there
should be trouble with the equipment. Rupture diaphragms are
provided to prevent the enclosures from bursting in an uncontrolled manner. Suitable deflectors provide protection for the
operating personnel. For maximum operating reliability, internal
relief devices are not installed, because these would affect
adjacent compartments. The modular design, complete segregation, arc-proof bushing and plug-in connections allow speedy
removal and replacement of any section with only minimal
effects on the remaining pressurized switchgear.
Busbar module
The busbar modules of adjacent bays are connected with expansion joints which absorb constructional tolerances and temperature-related movements in longitudinal as well as transverse
direction to the busbar. Axially guided sliding contacts between
the conductors compensate temperature-related expansions in
conductor length (fig. 3.1-42).
Fig. 3.1-42: All busbars of the enclosed 3-phase or the 1-phase (fig.)
type are connected with plugs from one bay to the next
All assemblies are designed to allow absorption of thermal

expansion and contraction caused by varying temperatures.
Adjustable metal bellow compensators are installed for this
105

Circuit-breakers
(see chapter 4.1.1 Circuit-Breakers for 72.5 kV up to 800 kV)
The circuit-breakers operate according to the dynamic self-compression principle. The number of interrupting units per phase
depends on the circuit-breakers performance. The arcing chambers and circuit-breaker contacts are freely accessible. The
circuit-breaker is suitable for out-of-phase switching and
designed to minimize overvoltages. The specified arc interruption performance has to be consistent across the entire operating range, from line-charging currents to full short-circuit
currents.
The circuit-breaker is designed to withstand at least 10 operations (depending on the voltage level) at full short-circuit rating.
Opening the circuit-breaker for service or maintenance is not
necessary. The maximum tolerance for phase displacement is
3 ms, that is, the time between the first and the last poles
opening or closing. A standard station battery that is required
for control and tripping may also be used for recharging the
operating mechanism. The drive and the energy storage system
are provided by a stored-energy spring mechanism that holds
sufficient energy for all standard IEC close-open duty cycles. The
control system provides alarm signals and internal interlocks but
inhibits tripping or closing of the circuit-breaker when the energy
capacity in the energy storage system is insufficient or the SF6
density within the circuit-breaker drops below the minimum
permissible level.
Fig. 3.1-43: Disconnectors: In the open position, disconnectors

assure a dielectrically safe gap between system parts at
different potentials; for example, busbar disconnector
isolates the feeders from the busbar. Cast-resin
bushings keep the contact system in place, and the
pressurized gas serves as the high-voltage insulating
medium between live parts and the metal housing. The
conductor terminals vary for different types of adjacent
modules. Up to two earthing switches can be installed
simultaneously
Disconnectors
All disconnectors (isolators) are of the single-break type. DC
motor operation (110, 125, 220 or 250 V), which is fully suited
to remote operation, and a manual emergency operating mechanism are provided. Each motor operating mechanism is self-contained and equipped with auxiliary switches in addition to the
mechanical indicators. The bearings are lubricated for life
(fig. 3.1-43).
Earthing switches
Work-in-progress earthing switches are generally provided on
either side of the circuit-breaker. Additional earthing switches
may be used to earth busbar sections or other groups of the
assembly. DC motor operation (110, 125, 220 or 250 V) that is
fully suited for remote operation and a manual emergency
operating mechanism are provided. Each motor operating
mechanism is self-contained and equipped with auxiliary position switches in addition to the mechanical indicators. The
bearings are lubricated for life. Make-proof high-speed earthing
switches are generally installed at the cable and overhead-line
terminals. They are equipped with a rapid closing mechanism to
provide short-circuit making capacity (fig. 3.1-44).
Instrument transformers
Current transformers (CTs) are of the dry-type design. Epoxy
resin is not used for insulation purposes. The cores have the accuracies and burdens that are shown on the SLD. Voltage transformers are of the inductive type, with ratings of up to 200 VA.
106
Fig. 3.1-44: Earthing switches: Earthing switches (work-in-progress

earthing switches or busbar earthing switches, for
example) are used for properly connecting de-energized
live parts of the high-voltage system to the earthing
system. On the outgoing side of the feeders, a makeproof version (high-speed) is frequently used to dissipate
inductive and capacitive currents from parallel cables or
overhead lines or to reduce the risk to the GIS system in
case of faulty connections. In the insulated design they
are also used for measuring purposes and for testing
protection relays

Cable terminations
1-phase or 3-phase, SF6 gas-insulated, metal-enclosed cable end
housings are provided. The cable manufacturer has to supply the
stress cone and suitable sealings to prevent oil or gas from
leaking into the SF6 switchgear. Siemens will supply a mating
connection piece to be fitted to the cable end. The cable end
housing is suitable for oil-type, gas-pressure-type cables with
plastic insulation (PE, PVC, etc.) as specified on the SLD or the
data sheets. Additionally, devices for safely isolating a feeder
cable and connecting a high-voltage test cable to the switchgear
or cable will be provided (fig. 3.1-45).
Overhead-line terminations
The terminations for connecting overhead-lines come complete with SF6-to-air bushings but without line clamps
(fig. 3.1-46).
Transformer/reactor termination module
These terminations form the direct connection between the GIS
and oil-insulated transformers or reactance coils. Standardized
modules provide an economical way of matching them to various transformer dimensions (fig. 3.1-47).
Control and monitoring
As a standard, an electromechanical or solid-state interlocking
control board is supplied for each switchgear bay. This fault-tolerant interlocking system prevents all operating malfunctions.
Mimic diagrams and position indicators provide the operating
personnel with clear operating instructions. Provisions for
remote control are included. Gas compartments are constantly
monitored by density monitors that provide alarm and blocking
signals via contacts.
Fig. 3.1-45: Example for 1-phase cable termination:

Cable termination modules conforming to IEC are
available for connecting the switchgear to highvoltage cables. The standardized construction of these
modules allows connection of various cross-sections and
insulation types. Parallel cable connections for higher
rated currents are also possible with the same module
Required tests
Partial discharge tests
All solid insulators fitted in the switchgear are subjected to a routine partial discharge test prior to installation. At 1.2 times the
line-to-line voltage, no measurable discharge is allowed. This
test ensures maximum safety with regard to insulator failure,
good long-term performance and thus a very high degree of
reliability.
Pressure tests
Each cast-aluminum enclosure of the switchgear is pressuretested for at least twice the service pressure.
Leakage tests
Leakage tests performed on the subassemblies ensure that the
flanges and cover faces are clean, and that the guaranteed
leakage rate is not be exceeded.
Fig. 3.1-46: Overhead-line terminations: High-voltage bushings

are used for the SF6-to-air transition. The bushings
can be matched to specific requirements with regard
to clearance and creepage distances. They are
connected to the switchgear by means of angulartype modules of variable design
Power frequency tests

Each assembly is subjected to power-frequency withstand tests,
including sensitive partial discharge detection, to verify correct
installation of the conductors, and to make sure that the insulator
surfaces are clean and the switchgear as a whole is not subject
to internal faults.
107

Additional technical data

Siemens will point out any dimensions, weights or other switchgear data that may affect local conditions and handling of the
equipment. Any quotation includes drawings showing the
switchgear assembly.
Instructions
Detailed instruction manuals on the installation, operation and
maintenance of the equipment are supplied with all equipment
delivered by Siemens.
Scope of supply
Siemens supplies the following items for all GIS types and
interfaces as specified:
The switchgear bay, including circuit-breakers, disconnectors
and earthing switches, instrument transformers and busbar
housings, as specified. For the different feeder types, the
following limits apply:
Cable feeder:
According to IEC 60859, the termination housing, conductor
coupling and connecting plate are part of the GIS delivery,
while the cable stress cone with the matching flange is part
of the cable supply (fig. 3.1-45).
Overhead-line feeder:
The connecting stud at the SF6-to-air bushing is supplied
without the line clamp (fig. 3.1-46).
Transformer feeder:
Siemens supplies the connecting flange at the switchgear bay
and the connecting bus ducts to the transformer, including any
expansion joints. The SF6-to-oil bushings plus terminal
enclosures are part of the transformer delivery unless
otherwise agreed (fig. 3.1-47).
Note: This point always requires close coordination between
the switchgear manufacturer and the transformer supplier.
Each feeder bay is equipped with earthing pads. The local

earthing network and the connections to the switchgear are
included in the installation contractors scope.
Initial SF6 gas filling for the entire switchgear supplied by
Siemens is included. Siemens will also supply all gas
interconnections from the switchgear bay to the integral
gas service and monitoring panel.
Terminals and circuit protection for auxiliary drives and
control power are provided with the equipment. Feeder
circuits and cables as well as the pertaining installation
material will be supplied by the installation contractor.
The local control, monitoring and interlocking panels are
supplied for each circuit-breaker bay to form completely
operational systems. Terminals for remote monitoring and
control are also provided.
Siemens will supply the above-ground mechanical support
structures; embedded steel and foundation work are part
of the installation contractors scope.

Fax +49 (9131) 7-34662
www.energy.siemens.com/hq/en/power-transmission
108
Fig. 3.1-47: Transformer termination

3.2 Medium-Voltage
Switchgear
rents) are preferred for power transmission in order to minimize

losses. The voltage is not transformed to the usual values of the
low-voltage system until it reaches the load centers close to the
consumer.
3.2.1 Introduction
According to international rules, there are only two voltage levels:
Low voltage: up to and including 1 kV AC (or 1,500 V DC)
High voltage: above 1 kV AC (or 1,500 V DC)
Most electrical appliances used in household, commercial and

industrial applications work with low-voltage. High-voltage is
used not only to transmit electrical energy over very large distances, but also for regional distribution to the load centers via
fine branches. However, because different high-voltage levels are
used for transmission and regional distribution, and because the
tasks and requirements of the switchgear and substations are
also very different, the term medium-voltage has come to be
used for the voltages required for regional power distribution
that are part of the high-voltage range from 1 kV AC up to and
including 52 kV AC (fig. 3.2-1). Most operating voltages in
medium-voltage systems are in the 3 kV AC to 40.5 kV AC range.
The electrical transmission and distribution systems not only
connect power plants and electricity consumers, but also, with
their meshed systems, form a supraregional backbone with
reserves for reliable supply and for the compensation of load
differences. High operating voltages (and therefore low cur-
1 Medium voltage
In public power supplies, the majority of medium-voltage systems

are operated in the 10 kV to 30 kV range (operating voltage). The
values vary greatly from country to country, depending on the
historical development of technology and the local conditions.
Medium-voltage equipment
Apart from the public supply, there are still other voltages
fulfilling the needs of consumers in industrial plants with
medium-voltage systems; in most cases, the operating voltages
of the motors installed are decisive. Operating voltages between
3 kV and 15 kV are frequently found in industrial supply systems.
In power supply and distribution systems, medium-voltage
equipment is available in:
Power plants, for generators and station supply systems
Transformer substations of the primary distribution level
(public supply systems or systems of large industrial
companies), in which power supplied from the high-voltage
system is transformed to medium-voltage
Local supply, transformer or customer transfer substations for
large consumers (secondary distribution level), in which the
power is transformed from medium to low-voltage and
distributed to the consumer.
2 High voltage
3 Low voltage
Fig. 3.2-1: Voltage levels from the power plant to the consumer
109

3.2 Medium-Voltage Switchgear
Low
voltage
Medium voltage
1 kV < U 52 kV
1 kV
High voltage
Alternating voltage
52 kV
Fig. 3.2-2: Voltage definitions
G
Medium voltage
G
Power generation
Power transmission system
High voltage
Transformer substation
Primary
distribution level
Medium voltage
M
Secondary
distribution level
Low voltage
Fig. 3.2-3: Medium voltage in the power supply and

distribution system
3.2.2 Basics of Switching Devices

What are switching devices?
Switching devices are devices used to close (make) or open
(break) electrical circuits. The following stress can occur during
making and breaking:
No-load switching
Breaking of operating currents
Breaking of short-circuit currents
What can the different switching devices do?
Circuit-breakers: Make and break all currents within the scope
of their ratings, from small inductive and capacitive load
currents up to the full short-circuit current, and this under all
fault conditions in the power supply system, such as earth
faults, phase opposition, and so on.
Switches: Switch currents up to their rated normal current and
make on existing short-circuits (up to their rated short-circuit
making current).
Disconnectors (isolators): Used for no-load closing and
opening operations. Their function is to isolate downstream
devices so they can be worked on.
110
Three-position disconnectors: Combine the functions of

disconnecting and earthing in one device. Three-position
disconnectors are typical for gas-insulated switchgear.
Switch-disconnectors (load-break switches): The combination
of a switch and a disconnector, or a switch with isolating
distance.
Contactors: Load breaking devices with a limited short-circuit
making or breaking capacity. They are used for high switching
rates.
Earthing switches: To earth isolated circuits.
Make-proof earthing switches (earthing switches with making
capacity): Are used for the safe earthing of circuits, even if
voltage is present, that is, also in the event that the circuit to
be earthed was accidentally not isolated.
Fuses: Consist of a fuse-base and a fuse-link. With the fusebase, an isolating distance can be established when the fuselink is pulled out in de-energized condition (like in
a disconnector). The fuse-link is used for one single breaking
of a short-circuit current.
Surge arresters: To discharge loads caused by lightning strikes
(external overvoltages) or switching operations and earth
faults (internal overvoltages). They protect the connected
equipment against impermissibly high-voltages.
Selection of switching devices
Switching devices are selected both according to their ratings
and according to the switching duties to be performed, which
also includes the switching rates. The following tables illustrate
these selection criteria: table 3.2-1, next page, shows the selection according to ratings. Table 3.2-2 through table 3.2-5 show
the endurance classes for the devices.
Selection according to ratings
The system conditions, that is, the properties of the primary
circuit, determine the required parameters. The most important
of these are:
Rated voltage: The upper limit of the system voltage the
device is designed for. Because all high-voltage switching
devices are zero-current interrupters except for some fuses
the system voltage is the most important dimensioning
criterion. It determines the dielectric stress of the switching
device by means of the transient recovery voltage and the
recovery voltage, especially while switching off.
Rated insulation level: The dielectric strength from phase to
earth, between phases and across the open contact gap, or
across the isolating distance. The dielectric strength is the
capability of an electrical component to withstand all voltages
with a specific time sequence up to the magnitude of the
corresponding withstand voltages. These can be operating
voltages or higher-frequency voltages caused by switching
operations, earth faults (internal overvoltages) or lightning
strikes (external overvoltages). The dielectric strength is
verified by a lightning impulse withstand voltage test with the
standard impulse wave of 1.2/50 s and a power-frequency
withstand voltage test (50 Hz/1 min).

Device
Withstand capability, rated

insulation
level
voltage
normal
current
Switch(-disconnector)
Disconnector
Circuit-breaker
Earthing switch
Make-proof earthing switch
Contactor
Fuse-link
Fuse-base
x 2)
peak
withstand
current
x
x
1)
x 1)
x
x 3)
x 4)
x
Bushing
x 6)
Post insulator (insulator)
3)
2)
short-circuit
making
current
1)
short-circuit
breaking
current
Current limiting reactor
breaking
current
Surge arrester*
Switching capacity, rated
Selection parameter
Limited short-circuit making and breaking capacity
Applicable as selection parameter in special cases only, e.g.,
for exceptional pollution layer
For surge arresters with spark gap: rated voltage
x 5)
x 6)
4)
5)
6)
*
Rated discharge current for surge arresters

For surge arresters: short-circuit strength in case of overload
For bushings and insulators:
Minimum failing loads for tension, bending and torsion
See also section 3.3
(Parameters of the secondary equipment for operating mechanisms, control and monitoring are not taken into consideration in this table.)
Table 3.2-1: Device selection according to data of the primary circuit
Class
M
Class
Description
M1
1,000
Mechanical endurance
M2
5,000
Increased mechanical endurance
E1
E2
Operating
cycles
10 Iload
10 Iload
2 Ima
30 Iload
20 Iload
3 Ima
E3
100 Iload
20 Iload
5 Ima
C1
10 Icc
10 Ilc
10 Isc
10 Ibb
additionally
each
10 0,1
0,4 Icc,
Isb, Ibb
C2
20 0.05 Iload
10 Icc
10 0.2
to 0.4 Icc
10 Ilc
10 Ief1
10 Ief2
Restrikes
permitted
(number not
defined)
No restrikes
Table 3.2-2: Classes for switches
Test currents:
(old)
Iload active loadbreaking current
I1
Iloo closed-loop
breaking current
I2a
Icc
cable-charging
breaking current
I4a
Ilc
line-charging
breaking current
I4b
Isb capacitor bank
breaking current
I4c
Ibb back-to-back capacitor
bank breaking current I4d
Ief1 earth fault
breaking current
I6a
Ief2 cable- and line-charging
breaking current under
earth fault conditions I6b
Ima short-circuit
making current
Ima
Description
M1
2,000 operating cycles
M
M2 10,000 operating cycles
E1
E
E2
Extended mechanical
endurance, low maintenance
Normal electrical endurance
(not covered by E2)
2 C and 3 O with 10 %,
30 %, 60 % and 100 % Isc
Without
autoreclosing
duty
26 C 130 O 10 % Isc
26 C 130 O 30 % Isc
4 C 8 O 60 % Isc
4 C 6 O 100 % Isc
With autoreclosing
duty
Extended
electrical
endurance
without maintenance of
interrupting
parts of the
main circuit
C1
Low
24 O per 1040% Ilc, Icc, Ibc
probability
24 CO per 1040% Ilc, Icc, Ibc
of restrikes*
C2
24 O per 1040% Ilc, Icc,

Ibc
128 CO per 1040% Ilc, Icc,
Ibc
S1
Circuit-breaker used in a cable system
S2
Circuit-breaker used in a line system or in a cable system with

direct connection (without cable) to overhead lines
2 C and 3 O with 10 %,
30 %, 60 % and 100 % Isc
Normal mechanical
endurance
Restrike-free
breaking
operations at
Very low
2 of 3 test
probability of duties
restrikes**
* Class C1 is recommendable for infrequent switching of transmission lines and cables

** Class C2 is recommended for capacitor banks and frequent switching of
transmission lines and cables
Table 3.2-3: Classes for circuit-breakers
111

Class
Operating cycles
M0
1,000
M1
2,000
M2
10,000
Description
For general requirements
Extended mechanical endurance
Table 3.2-4: Endurance classes for disconnectors
Class
Operating cycles Description
E0
0 Ima
E1
2 Ima
E2
5 Ima
No shortcircuit making
capacity
For general requirements
Short-circuit
making
capacity
Reduced maintenance
required
Table 3.2-5: Endurance classes for earthing switches
Class
Description
Not
explicitely
defined
C0
C1
C2
24 O per 1040% Ilc, Icc, Ibc

24 CO per 1040% Ilc, Icc, Ibc Low
probability
of restrikes*
24 O per 1040% Ilc, Icc,
Ibc
128 CO per 1040% Ilc, Icc,
Ibc
1 restrike
per
interruption
5 cummulated restrikes
on test duties
BC1 and BC2
Very low
probability of No restrikes*
restrikes**
* Class C2 is recommended for capacitor banks
Table 3.2-6: Classes for contactors
Rated normal current:

The current that the main circuit of a device can continuously
carry under defined conditions. The temperature increase of
components especially contacts must not exceed defined
values. Permissible temperature increases always refer to the
ambient air temperature. If a device is mounted in an
enclosure, it may be advisable to load it below its full rated
current, depending on the quality of heat dissipation.
Rated peak withstand current:
The peak value of the major loop of the short-circuit current
during a compensation process after the beginning of the
current flow, which the device can carry in closed state. It is
a measure for the electrodynamic (mechanical) load of an
electrical component. For devices with full making capacity,
this value is not relevant (see the next item in this list).
112
Rated short-circuit making current:

The peak value of the making current in case of short circuit at
the terminals of the switching device. This stress is greater
than that of the rated peak withstand current, because
dynamic forces may work against the contact movement.
Rated breaking current:
The load breaking current in normal operation. For devices
with full breaking capacity and without a critical current range,
this value is not relevant (see the previous item in this list).
Rated short-circuit breaking current:
The root-mean-square value of the breaking current in case of
short circuit at the terminals of the switching device.
Selection according to endurance and switching rates
If several devices satisfy the electrical requirements and no
additional criteria have to be taken into account, the required
switching rate can be used as an additional selection criterion.
Table 3.2-1 through table 3.2-5 show the endurance of the
switching devices, providing a recommendation for their
appropriate use. The respective device standards distinguish
between classes of mechanical (M) and electrical (E) endurance,
whereby they can also be used together on the same switching
device; for example, a switching device can have both mechanical class M1 and electrical class E3.
Switches:
Standard IEC 62271-103 / VDE 0671-103 only specifies classes
for the so-called general-purpose switches. There are also
special switches and switches for limited applications.*
General-purpose switches:
General-purpose switches must be able to break different
types of operating currents (load currents, ring currents,
currents of unloaded transformers, charging currents of
unloaded cables and overhead-lines), as well as to make on
short-circuit currents.
General-purpose switches that are intended for use in
systems with isolated neutral or with earth earth-fault
compensation, must also be able to switch under earth-fault
conditions. The versatility is mirrored in the very exact
specifications for the E classes.
SF6 switches:
SF6 switches are appropriate when the switching rate is not
more than once a month. These switches are usually
classified as E3 with regard to their electrical endurance.
Air-break or hard-gas switches:
Air-break or hard-gas switches are appropriate when the
switching rate is not more than once a year. These switches
are simpler and usually belong to the E1 class. There are
also E2 versions available.
Vacuum switches:
The switching capacity of vacuum switches is significantly
higher than that of the M2/E3 classes. They are used for
special tasks mostly in industrial power supply systems
or when the switching rate is at least once a week.
* Disconnectors up to 52 kV may only switch negligible currents up to 500 mA

(e.g., voltage transformer), or larger currents only when there is an insignificant
voltage difference (e.g., during busbar transfer when the bus coupler is closed).

Circuit-breakers:
Whereas the number of mechanical operating cycles is
specifically stated in the M classes, the circuit-breaker standard
IEC 62271-100/VDE 0671-100 does not define the electrical
endurance of the E classes by specific numbers of operating
cycles; the standard remains very vague on this.
The test duties of the short-circuit type tests provide an
orientation as to what is meant by normal electrical
endurance and extended electrical endurance. The number
of make and break operations (Close, Open) is specified in
table 3.2-3.
Modern vacuum circuit-breakers can generally make and break
the rated normal current up to the number of mechanical
operating cycles.
The switching rate is not a determining selection criterion,
because circuit-breakers are always used where short-circuit
breaking capacity is required to protect equipment.
Disconnectors:
Disconnectors do not have any switching capacity (switches for
limited applications must only control some of the switching
duties of a general-purpose switch). Switches for special
applications are provided for switching duties such as
switching of single capacitor banks, paralleling of capacitor
banks, switching of ring circuits formed by transformers
connected in parallel, or switching of motors in normal and
locked condition. Therefore, classes are only specified for the
number of mechanical operating cycles.
Earthing switches:
With earthing switches, the E classes designate the shortcircuit making capacity (earthing on applied voltage). E0
corresponds to a normal earthing switch; switches of the E1
and E2 classes are also-called make-proof or high-speed
earthing switches.
The standard does not specify how often an earthing switch
can be actuated purely mechanically; there are no M classes
for these switches.
Contactors:
The standard has not specified any endurance classes for
contactors yet. Commonly used contactors today have
a mechanical and electrical endurance in the range of 250,000
to 1,000,000 operating cycles. They are used wherever
switching operations are performed very frequently, e.g., more
than once per hour.
Regarding capacitor applications IEC 62271-106 introduced

classes for capacitice current breaking. If contactors are used for
capacitor banks it is recommended to only install class C2 contactors.
113

3.2.3 Requirements of Medium-Voltage

Switchgear
The major influences and stress values that a switchgear assembly
is subjected to result from the task and its rank in the distribution
system. These influencing factors and stresses determine the
selection parameters and ratings of the switchgear (fig. 3.2-4).
System parameters
System protection and measuring
Protection functions
Selectivity
Measuring
Supplies
Public power systems Emergency power

In-plant power generation Redundancy
Service location
Place of installation
Utilities room
Transport
Accessibility
Buildings
Installation
Ambient conditions
Room climate
Temperature
Altitude
Air humidity
Sector-specific application
Switching duties
Busbar transfer
Switching rate
Availability
Sector-specific operating procedures
Operation
Working
Inspection
Personal protection
Work instructions
Maintenance
Regulations
Standards
Laws
Association guidelines Company regulations
Influences and stress values

System voltage
The system voltage determines the rated voltage of the

switchgear, switching devices and other installed components. The maximum system voltage at the upper tolerance
limit is the deciding factor.
Assigned configuration criteria for switchgear
Rated voltage Ur
Rated insulation level Ud; Up
Rated primary voltage of voltage transformers Upr
Short-circuit current
The short-circuit current is characterized by the electrical values
of peak withstand current Ip (peak value of the initial symmetrical short-circuit current) and sustained short-circuit current Ik.
The required short-circuit current level in the system is predetermined by the dynamic response of the loads and the power
quality to be maintained, and determines the making and
breaking capacity and the withstand capability of the switching
devices and the switchgear (table 3.2-7).
Important note: The ratio of peak current to sustained short-circuit current in the system can be significantly larger than the
standardized factor Ip/Ik = 2.5 (50 Hz) used for the construction
of the switching devices and the switchgear. A possible cause,
for example, are motors that feed power back to the system
when a short circuit occurs, thus increasing the peak current
significantly.
Normal current and load flow
The normal current refers to current paths of the incoming
feeders, busbar(s) and outgoing consumer feeders. Because of
the spatial arrangement of the panels, the current is also distributed, and therefore there may be different rated current values
next to one another along a conducting path; different values
for busbars and feeders are typical.
Reserves must be planned when dimensioning the switchgear:
In accordance with the ambient air temperature
For planned overload
For temporary overload during faults.
114
Rated voltage
Normal current
Load flow
Neutral earthing
Cable/overhead line
Overvoltage protection
Power quality
Redundancy
Tripping times
Metering
Fig. 3.2-4: Influencing factors and stresses on the switchgear

Main and earthing circuits
Rated peak withstand current Ip

Rated short-time withstand current Ik
Switching devices
Rated short-circuit making current Ima

Rated short-circuit breaking current Isc
Current transformers
Rated peak withstand current Ik-dyn

Rated short-time thermal current Ith
Table 3.2-7: Configuration criteria for short-circuit current
Large cable cross-sections or several parallel cables must be

connected for high normal currents; the panel connection must
be designed accordingly.
Rated current of busbar(s) and feeders
Number of cables per phase in the panel (parallel cables)
Current transformer ratings.

Category
When an accessible compartment in a panel is

opened,
LSC 1
other panels must be shut down, i.e. at least one

more
LSC 2
LSC 2
only the connection compartment is accessible,

while busbar and other panels remain energized
LSC 2A
any accessible compartment except the busbar

can be open while busbar and other panels remain
energized
LSC 2B
the connection (cable) compartment can remain

energized while any other accessible compartment
can be open except busbar and connections
and busbar and other panels remain energized
Table 3.2-8: Loss of service continuity categories
Type of accessibility
to a compartment
Access features
Type of construction
Interlock-controlled
Opening for normal

operation and
maintenance, e.g.,
fuse replacement
Access is controlled by
the construction of the
switchgear, i.e.,
integrated interlocks
prevent impermissible
opening.
Procedure-based
Opening for normal

operation or
maintenance, e.g.,
fuse replacement
Access control via

a suitable procedure
(work instruction of the
operator) combined with
a locking device (lock).
Tool-based
Opening not for

normal operation
and maintenance,
e.g., cable testing
Access only with tool for

opening; special access
procedure (instruction of
the operator).
Not accessible
Opening not possible or not intended for

operator; opening can destroy the compartment. This applies generally to the gas-filled
compartments of gas-insulated switchgear.
As the switchgear is maintenance-free and
climate-independent, access is neither required
nor possible.
Table 3.2-9: Accessibility of compartments
The notation IAC A FLR, and contains the abbreviations

for the following values:
IAC
Internal Arc Classification
Distance between the indicators 300 mm, i.e., installation in

rooms with access for authorized personnel; closed electrical
service location.
FLR
Access from the front (F), from the sides (L = Lateral) and from
the rear (R).
Test current = Rated short-circuit breaking current (in kA)
Arc duration (in s)
Table 3.2-10: Internal arc classification according to IEC 62271-200
115

3.2.4 Medium-Voltage Switchgear
Distribution
level
Insulation
Type
of construction
Loss
of service continuity
Primary
Gas-insulated
Extendable
LSC 2
PM
IAC A FLR 31.5 kA, 1 s
LSC 2
PM
IAC A FLR 25 kA, 1 s
LSC 2
PM
IAC A FL 25 kA, 1 s **
IAC A FLR 25 kA, 1 s ***
LSC 2
PM
LSC 2
PM
LSC 2
PM
LSC 2
PM
LSC 2B
PM
Air-insulated
Extendable
Partition
class
Internal
arc classification*
Secondary
Gas-insulated
Air-insulated
* Maximum possible IAC classification
LSC 2B
PM
LSC 2A
PM
LSC 2B
PM
Non-extendable
LSC 2
PM
Extendable
LSC 2
PM
Extendable
LSC 2
PM
Extendable
LSC 2
PM
** Wall-standig arrangement
*** Free-standig arrangement
Table 3.2-11: Overview of Siemens medium-voltage switchgear
116
**** Depending on HV HRC fuse-link

Switchgear
type
Busbar
system
Rated
voltage (kV)
Rated short-time
withstand current (kA)
1s
3s
Rated current,
busbar (A)
Rated current,
feeder (A)
NXPLUS C
Single
15
31.5
31.5
2,500
2,500
24.0
25
25
2,500
2,000
NXPLUS C
Double
24
25
25
2,500
1,250
NXPLUS C Wind
Single
36
25
20
1,000
630/1,000
NXPLUS
Single
40.5
31.5
31.5
2,500
2,500
NXPLUS
Double
36
31.5
31.5
2,500
2,500
8DA10
Single
40.5
40
40
5,000
2,500
8DB10
Double
40.5
40
40
5,000
2,500
NXAIR
Single
17.5
50
50
4,000
4,000
Double
17.5
50
50
4,000
4,000
Single
24
25
25
2,500
2,500
Double
24
25
25
2,500
2,500
NXAIR S
Single
40.5
31.5
31.5
3,150
2,500
8BT1
Single
24
25
25
2,000
2,000
8BT2
Single
36
31.5
31.5
3,150
3,150
8DJH Compact
(panel blocks)
Single
17.5
25
20
630
200 **** /
250 / 400 / 630
24
20
20
630
200 **** /
250 / 400 / 630
17.5
25
20
630
200 **** /
250 / 400 / 630
24
20
20
630
200 **** /
250 / 400 / 630
8DJH
(single panel/
block type)
Single
8DJH 36
Single
36
20
20
630
200 **** / 630
SIMOSEC
Single
17.5
25
21
1,250
1,250
24
20
20
1,250
1,250
117

NXAIR 17.5 kV
Rated
Voltage
kV 7.2
12
17.5
Frequency
Hz 50/60
50/60
50/60
Short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage

(phase/phase, phase/earth)
kV 20*
28*
38
Lightning impulse withstand voltage

kV 60
75
95
max. kA 50
50
50
Short-circuit breaking current
Short-time withstand current, 3 s
max. kA 50
50
50
Short-circuit making current
max. kA 125 / 130**
125 / 130**
125 / 130**
Peak withstand current
max. kA 125 / 130**
125 / 130**
125 / 130**
Normal current for busbar
max. A 4,000
4,000
4,000
Normal current for feeders:

Circuit-breaker panel
Contactor panel
Disconnecting panel
Bus sectionalizer
Busbar connection panel
max. A
max. A
max. A
max. A
max. A
4,000
400***
4,000
4,000
4,000
4,000
4,000
4,000
4,000
4,000
400***
4,000
4,000
4,000
*
32 kV at 7.2 kV and 42 kV at 12 kV optional for GOST standard.
** Values for 50 Hz: 125 kA; for 60 Hz: 130 kA.
*** Current values dependent on HV HRC fuses. Lightning impulse withstand voltage across open contact gap of contactor:
40 kV at 7.2 kV, 60 kV at 12 kV.
Fig. 3.2-5: NXAIR panel
Table 3.2-12: Technical data of NXAIR
Dimensions
Width
in mm
W Circuit-breaker panel
1,000 A 600*
1,250 / 2,500 / 3,150 A 800
2,500 A / 3,150 A / 4,000 A 1,000
Contactor panel
400 A 435 / 600
Disconnecting panel
1,250 A 800
2,500 A / 3,150 A / 4,000 A 1,000
Bus sectionalizer
1,250 A 2 800
2,500 A / 3,150 A / 4,000 A 2 1,000
Metering panel
Busbar connection panel
Height
H1 With standard low-voltage

compartment, natural ventilation
2,300
Height
H2 With high low-voltage compartment or

additional compartment for busbar
components
2,350
Height
H3 With forced ventilation for 4,000 A
2,450
Height
H4 With optional internal arc absorber
2,500
Depth
W
800
4,000 A 800/1,000
D Single busbar, all panel types 31.5 kA 1,350

(except contactor panel)
40 kA 1,500
Contactor panel
40 kA 1,400*/1,500
* 31.5 kA
Fig. 3.2-6: Dimensions of NXAIR
Performance features
The air-insulated, metal-clad switchgear type NXAIR is an
innovation in the switchgear field for the distribution and
process level up to 17.5 kV, 50 kA, 4,000 A.
Type-tested, IEC 62271-200, metal-clad, loss of service
continuity category: LSC 2B; partition class: PM;
internal arc classification: IAC A FLR 50 kA 1 s
Evidence of the making and breaking capacity for the circuitbreakers and the make-proof earthing switches inside the
panel
118
Insulating medium air is always available

Single busbar, double busbar (back-to-back, face-to-face)
Withdrawable vacuum circuit-breaker
Withdrawable vacuum contactor
Platform concept worldwide, local manufacturing presence
Use of standardized devices
Maximum security of operation by self-explaining
operating logic
Maintenance interval 10 years

NXAIR 24 kV
Rated
Voltage
kV
24
Frequency
Hz
50/60

kV
50 *

kV
125
max. kA
25
max. kA
25
max. kA
63/65 **
max. kA
63/65 **
max. A
2,500

Disconnecting panel
Bus sectionalizer
max. A
max. A
max. A
2,500
2,500
2,500
* 65 kV optional for GOST standard
** Values for 50 Hz: 63 kA; for 60 Hz: 65 kA.
Table 3.2-13: Technical data of NXAIR, 24 kV

Fig. 3.2-7: NXAIR, 24 kV panel
Dimensions
Width
in mm
1,250 A
2,500 A
800
1,000
Disconnecting panel
1,250 A
2,500 A
800
1,000
Bus sectionalizer
1,250 A
1,600 A / 2,000 A / 2,500 A
2 800
2 1,000
Metering panel
800
Height
H1
With standard low-voltage

compartment
2,510
Height
H2
With high low-voltage compartment
2,550
Height
H3
With natural ventilation
2,680
Height
H4
With optional internal arc absorber
2,750
Height
H5
With additional compartment for busbar

components
2,770
Single busbar
Double busbar (back-to-back)
1,600
3,350
Depth
Fig. 3.2-8: Dimensions of NXAIR, 24 kV
The air-insulated, metal-clad switchgear type NXAIR, 24 kV is the
resulting further development of the NXAIR family for use in the
distribution and process level up to 24 kV, 25 kA, 2,500 A.
continuity category: LSC 2B; partition class: PM;
internal arc classification: IAC A FLR 25 kA 1s
panel
Single busbar, double busbar (back-to-back, face-to-face)

Platform concept worldwide, local manufacturing presence
Use of standardized devices
Maximum security of operation by self-explaining
operating logic
Maintenance interval 10 years
119

NXAIR S
Rated
Voltage
kV
40.5
Frequency
Hz
50 / 60

kV
185

kV
95
max. kA
31.5
max. kA
31.5
max. kA
80 / 82
max. kA
80 / 82
max. A
3,150

Disconnecting panel
Bus sectionalizer
max. A
max. A
max. A
2,500
2,500
2,500
Table 3.2-14: Technical data of NXAIR S
120
H2
H1
The air-insulated, metal-clad
switchgear type NXAIR S is
based on the construction
principles of the NXAIR family
and designed for use in the
distribution and process level
up to 40.5 kV, 31.5 kA,
3,150 A.
Type-tested, IEC 62271-200,
metal-clad, loss of service
continuity category: LSC 2B;
partition class: PM; internal
arc classification: IAC A FLR
31.5 kA 1 s
Insulating medium air is
always available
Evidence of the making and
breaking capacity for the
circuit-breakers and the
make-proof earthing
switches inside the panel
Withdrawable vacuum
circuit-breaker
Maximum availability due to
modular design
Maximum security of
operation by self-explaining
operating logic
Maintenance interval
10 years
H3
Fig. 3.2-9: NXAIR S panel
Dimensions
Width
in mm
W
1,200
Disconnecting panel
1,200
Switch-fuse panel including auxiliary transformer
1,400
Bus sectionalizer
2 1,200
Metering panel
1,200
Height
H1
With standard low-voltage compartment
2,650
Height
H2
Standard panel
2,800
Height
H3
Optionally with internal arc absorber
3,010
Single busbar
2,650
Depth
Fig. 3.2-10: Dimensions of NXAIR S

8BT1
Rated
Voltage
kV 12
24
Frequency
Hz 50
50

kV 28
50

kV 75
125
max. kA 25
25
max. kA 25
25
max. kA 63
63
max. kA 63
63
max. A 2,000
2,000
Normal current for feeders

with circuit-breaker
with switch-disconnector
with switch-disconnector and fuses
max. A 2,000
max. A 630
max. A 200 A*
2,000
630
200 A*
* Depending on rated current of the HV HRC fuses used.
Table 3.2-15: Technical data of 8BT1
H1
The air-insulated, cubicle-type
switchgear type 8BT1 is
a factory-assembled, typetested indoor switchgear for
lower ratings in the distribution and process level up to
24 kV, 25 kA, 2,000 A.
Type-tested, IEC 62271-200,
cubicle-type, loss of service
continuity category: LSC 2A;
partition class: PM; internal
arc classification: IAC A FLR
25 kA 1 s
Insulating medium air is
always available
Evidence of the making and
breaking capacity for the
circuit-breakers and the
make-proof earthing
switches inside the panel
Single busbar
Withdrawable vacuum
circuit-breaker
All switching operations with
door closed
H2
Fig. 3.2-11: 8BT1 panel
D1
D2
All panel types
Dimensions in mm
7.2/12 kV
Width
For circuit-breaker max. 1,250 A

For circuit-breaker 2,000 A
For switch-disconnector
600
800
600
Height
H1
H2
H2

With pressure relief system
With lead-off duct
2,050
2,300*
2,350*
Depth
D1
D2
Without low-voltage compartment

With low-voltage compartment
1,200
1,410
Width
For circuit-breaker max. 1,250 A

For circuit-breaker 2,000 A
For switch-disconnector
800
1,000
800
Height
H1
H2
H2

With pressure relief system
With lead-off duct
2,050
2,300*
2,350*
Depth
D1
D2
Without low-voltage compartment

With low-voltage compartment
1,200
1,410
24 kV
* For 1 s arc duration.
Fig. 3.2-12: Dimensions of 8BT1
121

8BT2
Rated
Voltage
kV
36
Frequency
Hz
50/60

kV
70

kV
170
max. kA
31.5
max. kA
31.5
max. kA
80/82*
max. kA
80/82*
max. A
3,150

with circuit-breaker
max. A
3,150
* Values for 50 Hz: 80 kA; for 60 Hz: 82 kA.
Table 3.2-16: Technical data of 8BT2
Fig. 3.2-13: 8BT2 switchgear
Dimensions
in mm
Width
Height
H1
Intermediate panel
2,400
Height
H2
End panel with side baffles
2,750 / 2,800*
Height
H3
Panel with closed duct
2,900**
Wall-standing, IAC A FL
2,450
Free-standing, IAC A FLR
2,700
Depth
3,150 A feeder current
1,200
H1
H2
H3
* H2 indicates side baffles for internal arc protection

** Closed duct for IAC-classification A FLR
Fig. 3.2-14: Dimensions of 8BT2
The air-insulated, metal-clad switchgear type 8BT2 is a factoryassembled, type-tested indoor switchgear for use in the distribution and process level up to 36 kV, 31.5 kA, 3,150 A.
continuity category: LSC 2B; partition class: PM; internal arc
classification: IAC A FLR 31.5 kA 1 s
122
panel
Single busbar
All switching operations with door closed

8DA/8DB
Rated
Voltage
kV
12
24
36
40.5
Frequency
Hz
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
kV
28
50
70
85

kV
75
125
170
185
max. kA
40
40
40
40
max. kA
40
40
40
40
max. kA
100
100
100
100
max. kA
100
100
100
100
max. A
5,000
5,000
5,000
5,000
max. A
2,500
2,500
2,500
2,500
Table 3.2-17: Technical data of 8DA/8DB

Fig. 3.2-15: 8DA switchgear
for single-busbar
applications (on the
left), 8DB switchgear
for double-busbar
applications (on the
right)
8DA switchgear
8DA/8DB are gas-insulated

medium-voltage circuitbreaker switchgear assemblies
up to 40.5 kV with the advantages of the vacuum switching
technology for a high degree
of independence in all applications. 8DA/8DB are suitable for
primary distribution systems
up to 40.5 kV, 40 kA, up to
5,000 A.
D1
8DB switchgear
Type-tested according to
IEC 62271-200
Enclosure with modular
standardized housings made
from corrosion-resistant
aluminum alloy
Safe-to-touch enclosure and
standardized connections for
plug-in cable terminations
Operating mechanisms and
transformers are easily
accessible outside the
enclosure
Metal-enclosed, partition
class PM
Loss of service continuity
category for switchgear:
LSC 2
Internal arc classification:
IAC A FLR 40 kA 1 s
D2
Dimensions
Dimensions in mm
Width (spacing)
600
Height
Standard design
Design with higher low-voltage compartment
2,350
2,700
Depth
D1
D2
Single-busbar switchgear
Double-busbar switchgear
1,625
2,665
Fig. 3.2-16: Dimensions of 8DA/8DB
Advantages
Independent of environment
and climate
Compact
Maintenance-free
Personal safety
Operational reliability
Environmentally compatible
Cost-efficient
123

8DJH Compact
Rated
Voltage
kV
124
24
50 / 60
50 / 60
50 / 60
50 / 60
50 / 60
kV
20
28
36
38
50
kV
60
75
95
95
125
Normal current for ring-main feeders
A
max. A
A
400 or 630
630
200*
max. kA
25
25
25
25
20
max. kA
20
20
20
20
20
max. kA
63
63
63
63
50
max. kA
max. kA
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
50
50
50 Hz

max. kA
21
21
21
21
20
max. kA
21
21
21
21
20
max. kA
55
55
55
55
52
max. kA
max. kA
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
52
52
60 Hz

for ring-main feeders
for transformer feeders
* Depending on HV HRC fuse-link
Table 3.2-18: Technical data of 8DJH Compact
IEC 62271-200
Sealed pressure system with
SF6 filling for the entire
service life
3-pole, gas-insulated
switchgear vessel for
switching devices and
busbar
Panel blocks
Switching devices: threeposition switch-disconnector
(OPEN CLOSED EARTHED),
switch-fuse combination for
distribution transformer
protection
Earthing function of
switching devices generally
make-proof
17.5
Hz

The gas-insulated mediumvoltage switchgear type 8DJH

Compact is used for power
distribution in secondary
distribution systems up to
24 kV. Ring-main feeders and
transformer feeders are all
part of a comprehensive
product range to satisfy all
requirements with the highest
level of operational reliability
also for extreme ambient
conditions.
15
Frequency
Normal current for transformer feeders
Fig. 3.2-17: 8DJH Compact
12
Short-duration power-frequency
withstand voltage
7.2
Dimensions
Width
Dimensions in mm
W
Height
Depth
Number of feeders (in extracts)

3 feeders (RRT)
4 feeders (RRT-R)
6 feeders (RRT-RRT)
620** / 700***
930** / 1,010***
1,240** / 1,400***
1,400 / 1,700
Standard switchgear
** Internal arc classification IAC A F, *** Internal arc classification IAC A FLR
Fig. 3.2-18: Dimensions of 8DJH Compact
775

8DJH
Rated
Voltage
kV
17.5
24
Hz
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
kV
20
28*
36
38
50
kV
60
75
95
95
125
A
max.A
400 or 630
630
250 or 630
200**
max.kA
25
25
25
25
20
Short-time withstand current, 3s
max.kA
20
20
20
20
20
max.kA
63
63
63
63
50
max.kA
max.kA
max.kA
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
50
50
50
max.kA
25
25
25
25
21
50 Hz

for circuit-breaker feeders
max.kA
21
21
21
21
20
max.kA
65
65
65
65
55
max.kA
max.kA
max.kA
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
55
55
55
60 Hz

Peak current
*42kV according to some national requirements **Depending on HV HRC fuse-link
Table3.2-19: Technical data of 8DJH
IEC62271-200
service life
busbar
Panel blocks and single
panels available
(ONOFFEARTH), switchfuse combination for
protection, vacuum circuitbreaker with three-position
disconnector, earthing switch
make-proof
15
Frequency
The gas-insulated mediumvoltage switchgear type 8DJH is

used for power distribution in
secondary distribution systems
up to 24kV. Ring-main feeders,
circuit-breaker feeders and
transformer feeders are all part
of acomprehensive product
range to satisfy all requirements with the highest level of
operational reliability
also for extreme ambient
conditions.
12
withstand voltage
Normal current for circuit-breaker feeders
Fig.3.2-19: 8DJH block type
7.2
Dimensions
Width
Dimensions in mm
W
Number of feeders (in extracts)

2 feeders (e.g., RR)
3 feeders (e.g., RRT)
4 feeders (e.g., 3R + 1T)
620
1,050
1,360
Height
Panels without low-voltage compartment

Panels with low-voltage compartment (option)
Switchgear with pressure absorber (option)
1,200/1,400/1,700
1,4002,600
1,8002,600
Depth
Standard switchgear
775
890
Fig.3.2-20: Dimensions of 8DJH block types
125

H2
H2
H1
H1
H2
H1
H1
H2
8DJH
3
W
Fig. 3.2-21: 8DJH single panel
Advantages
No gas work during
installation
Compact
and climate
Maintenance-free
High operating and personal
safety
Switchgear interlocking
system with logical
mechanical interlocks
Operational reliability and
security of investment
Cost-efficient
126
Dimensions
Width
class PM
LSC 2
Internal arc classification
(option):
IAC A FL 21 kA, 1 s
Dimensions in mm
W
Ring-main feeders
Transformer feeders
Circuit-breaker feeders
Bus sectionalizer panels
310 / 500
430
430 / 500
430 / 500 / 620
Busbar metering panels
430 / 500
Billing metering panels
840
Height
H1
H2

Panels with low-voltage compartment
1,200 / 1,400 / 1,700

1,4002,600
1,8002,600
Depth
Standard switchgear
775
890
Fig. 3.2-22: Dimensions of 8DJH single panels
Typical uses
8DJH switchgear is used for
power distribution in secondary distribution systems,
such as
Public energy distribution
Transformer substations
Customer transfer
substations
High-rise buildings
Infrastructure facilities
Airports & ports
Railway & underground
railway stations
Water & wastewater
treatment
Industrial plants
Automotive industry
Chemical industry
Open-cast mines
Renewable power generation
Wind power plants
Solar power plants
Biomass power plants

H1
H2
8DJH 36
3
W
Fig. 3.2-23: 8DJH 36 block type
The gas-insulated medium

voltage switchgear type
8DJH 36 is used for power
distribution in secondary
distribution systems up to
36 kV. Ring-main feeders,
circuit-breaker feeders and
transformer feeders are all
part of a comprehensive
product range to satisfy all
requirements with the highest
level of operational reliability
also for extreme conditions.
Dimensions
Width
Dimensions in mm
W
Ring-main feeders
Transformer feeders
Circuit-breaker feeders
430
500
590
RRT block
RRL block
1,360
1,450
Billing metering panels
1,100
Height
H1
H2

1,600
1,8002,200
Depth
Standard switchgear
920
1,035
Fig. 3.2-24: Dimensions of 8DJH 36
Rated
Metal-enclosed, partion class

PM
LSC 2
Internal arc classifcation
(option):
IAC A FL 20 kA, 1 s
Voltage
kV
36
Frequency
Hz
50/60
withstand voltage
kV
70
kV
170
Advantages
No gas work during
installation
Compact
Independent of enviroment
and climate
Maintenance-free
High operating and
personal safety
Switchgear interlocking
system with logical
mechanical interlocks
Operational reliability and
security of investment
Enviromentally compatible
Cost-efficent
max. kA
20
max. kA
20
max. kA
50
max. kA
max. kA
max. kA
50
50
50
630
max. A
630
Normal current for circuit-breaker feeders
630

50 Hz
200*
max. kA
20
max. kA
20
max. kA
52
max. kA
max. kA
max. kA
52
52
52

60 Hz
IEC 62271-200
service life
plug-in terminations
busbar
Panel blocks and single
panels available
(OPEN CLOSED EARTHED),
switch-fuse combination for
protection, vacuum circuitbreaker with three-position
disconnector
make-proof
* Depending on HV HRC fuse-link
Table 3.2-20: Technical data of 8DJH
127

NXPLUS
Rated
Single
double
Busbar system
Single
double
Single
double
Single
Voltage
kV
12
24
36
40.5
Frequency
Hz
50 / 60
50 / 60
50 / 60
50 / 60
Short-duration power-frequency withstand

voltage
kV
28
50
70
85
kV
75
125
170
185
max. kA
31.5
31.5
31.5
31.5
max. kA
31.5
31.5
31.5
31.5
max. kA
80
80
80
80
max. kA
80
80
80
80
max. A
2,500
2,500
2,500
2,000
max. A
2,500
2,500
2,500
2,000
Table 3.2-21: Technical data of NXPLUS
IEC 62271-200
service life
Separate 3-pole gasinsulated modules for busbar
with three-position
disconnector, and for circuitbreaker
Interconnection of modules
with 1-pole insulated and
screened module couplings
128
NXPLUS switchgear with double-busbar
H2
NXPLUS is a gas-insulated
medium-voltage circuit-breaker
switchgear up to 40.5 kV with
the advantages of the vacuum
switching technology for
a high degree of independence in all applications.
NXPLUS can be used for
up to 40.5 kV, up to 31.5 kA,
up to 2,000 A (for doublebusbar switchgear up to
2,500 A).
NXPLUS switchgear with single busbar
H1
Fig. 3.2-25: NXPLUS switchgear

for single-busbar
applications (on
the left), NXPLUS
switchgear for doublebusbar applications
(on the right)
W1
D1
W2
Dimensions
Width (spacing)
D2
Dimensions in mm
W1
Feeders up to 2,000 A
600
W2
900
W2
1,200
Height
H1
H2
2,450
2,600
Depth
D1
D2
1,600
1,840
Fig. 3.2-26: Dimensions of NXPLUS
transformers are arranged

outside the switchgear
vessels and are easily
accessible
class PM
LSC 2
Internal arc classification:

No gas work during
installation or extension
Advantages
and climate
Compact
Maintenance-free
Personal safety
Cost-efficient

NXPLUS C
Rated
Voltage
kV
7.2
12
15
17.5
24
Frequency
Hz
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
withstand voltage
kV
20
28*
36
38
50
kV
60
75
95
95
125
max. kA
31.5
31.5
31.5
25
25
max. kA
31.5
31.5
31.5
25
25
max. kA
80
80
80
63
63
max. kA
80
80
80
63
63
max. A
2,500
2,500
2,500
2,500
2,500
max. A
2,500
2,500
2,500
2,000
2,000
* 42 kV according to some national requirements
Fig. 3.2-27: NXPLUS C panel
Table 3.2-22: Technical data of NXPLUS C
IEC 62271-200
service life
Without HV HRC fuses:
LSC 2
1-pole insulated and
screened busbar
3-pole gas-insulated
switchgear vessels with
three-position switch and
circuit-breaker
transformers are located
outside the switchgear vessel
and are easily accessible
class PM
H1
H2
H3
The compact NXPLUS C is the

medium-voltage circuitbreaker switchgear that made
gas insulation with the proven
vacuum switching technology
economical in its class. The
NXPLUS C is used for secondary and primary distribution systems up to 24 kV, up to
31.5 kA and up to 2,500 A. It
can also be supplied as
double-busbar switchgear in
a back-to-back arrangement
(see catalog HA35.41).
Dimensions
Dimensions in mm
Width
Height
H1
H2
With horizontal pressure relief duct
H3
D
Depth
630 A/1,000 A/1,250 A
600
2,000 A/2,500 A
900
Standard design
With higher low-voltage compartment
2,250 (W = 600);
2,550 (W = 900)
2,640 (W = 600);
2,640 (W = 900)
2,650
Wall-standing arrangement
Free-standing arrangement
1,250
1,250
Fig. 3.2-28: Dimensions of NXPLUS C
With horizontal pressure

relief duct
Extended number of
operating cycles (up to 15 kV,
up to 31.5 kV, up to 1,250 A)
DISCONNECTING function:
5,000 , 10,000
READY-TO-EARTH function:
5,000 , 10,000
CIRCUIT-BREAKER function:
30,000
Type-approved by LR, DNV,

GL, ABS, RMR
Internal arc classification for:
Wall-standing
arrangement:
IAC A FL 31.5 kA, 1 s
Free-standing
arrangement:
Advantages
No gas work during
Compact
Independent ofenvironment
and climate
Maintenance-free
Personal safety
Cost-efficient
129

NXPLUS C Wind
Rated
Voltage
kV
36
Frequency
Hz
50/60
kV
70
kV
170
max. kA
25
max. kA
25
max. kA
20
max. kA
63
max. kA
63
max. A
1,000
Normal current for circuit-breaker panel
max. A
630
Normal current for disconnector panel
max. A
1,000
Table 3.2-23: Technical data of NXPLUS C Wind
IEC 62271-200
service life
1-pole insulated and
screened busbar
switchgear vessels with
three-position switch and
130
The compact medium voltage

circuit-breaker switchgear
NXPLUS C Wind is especially
designed for wind turbines.
Due to the small dimensions it
fits into wind turbines where
limited space is available. The
NXPLUS C Wind is available for
36 kV, up to 25 kA and busbar
currents up to 1,000 A.
NXPLUS C Wind offers
a circuit-breaker,
a disconnector and a switchdisconnector (ring-main)
panel.
Fig. 3.2-29: NXPLUS C Wind
Width
Disconnector, switch-disconnector panel
Height
1,900
Depth
1,000
Dimensions
Dimensions in mm
600
450
Fig. 3.2-30: Dimensions of NXPLUS C Wind
circuit-breaker
Operating mechanism and
transformers are located
outside the vessel and are
easily accessible
class PM
category LSC 2B

Wall-standing
arrangement:
IAC FL A 25 kA, 1 s
Free-standing
arrangement:
IAC FLR A 25 kA, 1 s
Advantages
No gas work during
Compact
Independent of enviroment
and climate
Maintenance-free
Personal safety
Operational reliabilty
Enviromentally compatible
Cost efficent

SIMOSEC
Rated
7.2 kV
12 kV
15 kV o.r.
17.5 kV
24 kV
Frequency
Hz
50 / 60
50 / 60
50 / 60
50 / 60
50 / 60
Short-duration power-frequency withstand

voltage
kV
20
28*
36
38
50
Voltage

Fig. 3.2-31: SIMOSEC switchgear
The air-insulated mediumvoltage switchgear type

SIMOSEC is used for power
distribution in secondary and
up to 24 kV and up to 1,250 A.
The modular product range
includes individual panels such
as ring-main, transformer and
circuit-breaker panels, or
metering panels to fully satisfy
all requirements for power
supply companies and industrial applications.
IEC 62271-200
Phases for busbar and cable
connection are arranged one
behind the other
switchgear vessel with
three-position disconnector,
circuit-breaker and earthing
switch as a sealed pressure
system with SF6 filling for
the entire service life
Air-insulated busbar system
Air-insulated cable
connection system, for
conventional cable sealing
ends
class PM
LSC 2
kV
60
75
95
95
125
max. kA
25
25
25
25
20
max. kA
25
25
25
25
20
max. kA
21
21
21
20
max. kA
25
25
25
25
20
max. kA
63
63
63
63
50
1,250
1,250
max. A
630 or 1,250
1,250
1,250
1,250
* 42 kV/75 kV, according to some national requirements
Table 3.2-24: Technical data of SIMOSEC
Dimensions
Width (spacing)
Dimensions in mm
W
Ring-main feeders, transformer feeders
375 or 500
Circuit-breaker feeders, bus sectionalizer
750 or 875
Metering panels
500 / 750 / 875
Height
H1
H2

1,760
2,100 or 2,300
Depth
Standard
1,170 and 1,230
Fig. 3.2-32: Dimensions of SIMOSEC

Wall-standing
arrangement:
IAC A FL 21 kA, 1 s
Free-standing
arrangement:
Can be mounted
side-by-side and extended as
desired
Advantages
Compact modular design
High operating and personal
safety
Cost-efficient
131

3.2.5 High-Current and Generator

Switchgear
off extremely high short-circuit currents. Siemens generator

circuit-breakers, designed using environmentally friendly
vacuum switching technology, are designed to withstand
maximum normal currents and meet the demanding
requirements of the generator circuit-breaker standard
IEEE C37.013-1997.
As central components, high-current and generator switchgear

provides the link between the generator and the transformer
(feeding into the transmission and distribution grids). Siemens
offers various generator switchgear types with rated voltages up
to 17.5 kV, rated currents up to 10,000 A and rated short-circuit
breaking currents up to 72 kA for indoor and outdoor installations.
High mechanical stability
Low fire load
High operational safety.
The heart of the generator switchgear is the circuit-breaker. Its

primary function is to withstand very high currents and to switch
HIGS (highly integrated generator switchgear)

HIGS is an air-insulated, metal-enclosed generator switchgear for
voltages and currents up to 13.8 kV, 63 kA, 3,150 A for indoor
and outdoor installation. For the first time, the neutral treatment of the generator as well as the auxiliary feeder are integrated in a single generator switchgear (fig. 3.2-33).
Generator circuit-breaker according to IEEE C37.013 in the
main transformer feeder
Earthing switch on generator and transformer side
Current and voltage transformers
Surge arresters
Surge capacitors
Integrated auxiliary feeder with disconnector and generator
circuit-breaker or with switch-disconnector and fuses.
The technical data of HIGS and generator switchgear is shown
in the table 3.2-25.
Fig. 3.2-33: HIGS
Type
HIGS
Installation
HB1
HB1 Outdoor
HB3
IR, FL
IR
IR
FL
IR, FL
Dimensions L W H
mm
3,430 1,200
2,500
2,300 1,100
2,500
4,000 1,900
2,500*
6,300 1,900
2,600*
2,900 4,040
2,400*
Rated voltage
kV
13.8
max. 17.5
17.5
17.5
17.5
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage
kV
110
95
110
110
110
Rated short-duration power-frequency

withstand voltage
kV
50
38
50
50
50
Rated short-circuit breaking current
kA
31.5 63
50 / 63
50 / 63 / 72
50 / 63 / 72
50 / 63 / 72
Rated normal current:
2,000 3,150
max. 6,100
max. 5,400
max 10,000
for busbar
5,000
for feeder
5,000
* Measurements may vary according to type
Table 3.2-25: Technical data of HIGS and generator switchgear
132
8BK40

8BK40
8BK40 is an air-insulated, metal-enclosed generator switchgear
with truck-type circuit-breaker for indoor installation up to
17.5 kV; 63 kA; 5,000 A (fig. 3.2-34).
Generator circuit-breaker according to IEEE C37.013, or circuitbreaker according to IEC 62271-100
Disconnecting function by means of truck-type circuit-breaker
Surge arresters
Surge capacitors.
HB1, HB1 Outdoor and HB3
This is an air-insulated, metal-enclosed horizontal busbar switchgear, non-phase-segregated (HB1, HB1 Outdoor, fig. 3.2-35,
fig. 3.2-36) or phase-segregated (HB3, fig. 3.2-37).
3
Fig. 3.2-35: HB1
Generator circuit-breaker according to IEEE C37.013
Disconnector
Surge arresters
Surge capacitors
Further options
Integrated SFC starter
Integrated auxiliary feeder, with generator circuit-breaker or
with switch-disconnector and fuses
Integrated excitation feeder
Brake switch.
Fig. 3.2-36: HB1 Outdoor
Fig. 3.2-34: 8BK40
Fig. 3.2-37: HB3
133

3.2.6 Industrial Load Center Substation

Introduction
Industrial power supply systems call for a maximum level of
personal safety, operational reliability, economic efficiency,
and flexibility. And they likewise necessitate an integral
approach that includes before and after sales service,
that can cope with the specific load requirements and, above
all, that is tailored to each individually occurring situation.
With SITRABLOC (fig. 3.2-38), such an approach can be easily
turned into reality.
General
SITRABLOC is an acronym for Siemens TRAnsformer BLOC-type.
SITRABLOC is supplied with power from a medium-voltage
substation via a fuse/switch-disconnector combination and
a radial cable. In the load center, where SITRABLOC is installed,
several SITRABLOCs are connected together by means of cables
or bars (fig. 3.2-39).
Features
Due to the fuse/switch-disconnector combination, the shortcircuit current is limited, which means that the radial cable can
be dimensioned according to the size of the transformer.
In the event of cable faults, only one SITRABLOC fails.
The short-circuit strength is increased due to the connection of
several stations in the load center. The effect of this is that, in
the event of a fault, large loads are selectively disconnected in
a very short time.
The transmission losses are optimized because only short
connections to the loads are necessary.
SITRABLOC has, in principle, two transformer outputs:
1,250 kVA during AN operation
(ambient air temperature up to 40 C)
1,750 kVA during AF operation
(140 % with forced cooling).
Whether in the automobile or food industry, in paint shops or

bottling lines, putting SITRABLOC to work in the right place
considerably reduces transmission losses. The energy is transformed in the production area itself, as close as possible to the
loads. For installation of the system itself, no special building or
fire-protection measures are necessary.
Available with any level of output
SITRABLOC can be supplied with any level of power output, the
latter being controlled and protected by a fuse/switch-disconnector combination.
A high-current busbar system into which up to four transformers
can feed power ensures that even large loads can be brought
onto load without any loss of energy. Due to the interconnection
of units, it is also ensured that large loads are switched off
selectively in the event of a fault.
Fig. 3.2-38: SITRABLOC system
These features ensure that, if one station fails, for whatever

reason, supply of the loads is maintained without interruption.
The SITRABLOC components are:
Transformer housing with roof-mounted ventilation for AN/AF
operating mode
GEAFOL transformer
(Cast-resin insulated) with make-proof earthing switch
AN operating mode: 100 % load up to an ambient air
temperature of 40 C
AF operating mode: 140 % load
LV circuit-breaker as per transformer AF load
Automatic power factor correction equipment (tuned/detuned)
Control and metering panel as well as central monitoring
interface
Universal connection to the LV distribution busway system
(fig. 3.2-40).
Substation
8DC11/8DH10
Load-center
substation
Utilities
substation
LV busways
Fig. 3.2-39: Example of a schematic diagram
134

Integrated automatic power factor correction

With SITRABLOC, power factor correction is integrated from the
very beginning. Unavoidable energy losses e.g., due to magnetization in the case of motors and transformers are balanced
out with power capacitors directly in the low-voltage network.
The advantages are that the level of active power transmitted
increases and energy costs are reduced (fig. 3.2-41).
Reliability of supply
With the correctly designed transformer output, the n-1 criterion
is no longer a problem. Even if one module fails (e.g., a mediumvoltage switching device or a cable or transformer), power
continues to be supplied without the slightest interruption. None
of the drives comes to a standstill, and the whole manufacturing
plant continues to run reliably. With SITRABLOC, the power is
where it is needed and it is safe, reliable and economical.
n-1 operating mode
n-1 criteria
With the respective design of a factory grid on the MV side as
well as on the LV side, the so-called n-1 criteria is fulfilled.
In case one component fails on the line side of the transformer
(e.g., circuit-breaker or transformer or cable to transformer) no
interruption of the supply on the LV side will occur (fig. 3.2-42).
Load required 5,000 kVA = 4 1,250 kVA. In case one load
center (SITRABLOC) is disconnected from the MV network, the
missing load will be supplied via the remaining three (n-1) load
centers. SITRABLOC is a combination of everything that presentday technology has to offer. The GEAFOL cast-resin transformers are just one example of this.
LV busway
Tap-off unit with
HRC fuses
Consumer
distribution
incl. control
SITRABLOC
Fig. 3.2-40: Location sketch
Rated voltage
12 kV and 24 kV
Transformer rating AN/AF
1,250 kV A/1,750 kVA
Transformer operating mode
100 % AN up to 40 C
140 % AF
Power factor correction
up to 500 kVAr without reactors

up to 300 kVAr with reactors
Busway system
1,250 A; 1,600 A; 2,500 A
Degree of protection
IP23 for transformer housing

IP43 for LV cubicles
Dimensions (min) (LxHxD)
3,600 mm 2,560 mm 1,400 mm
Weight approx.
6,000 kg
Table 3.2-26: Technical data of SITRABLOC
Their output is 100 % load without fans plus reserves of up to

140 % with fans. The safety of operational staff is ensured
even in the direct vicinity of the installation.
Another example is the SENTRON high-current busbar system.
It can be laid out in any arrangement, is easy to install and
conducts the current wherever you like With almost no losses.
The most important thing, however, is the uniformity of SITRABLOC throughout, regardless of the layout of the modules.
The technology at a glance
(table 3.2-26, fig. 3.2-44, next page)
SITRABLOC can cope with any requirements. Its features include:
A transformer cubicle with or without fans (AN/AF operation)
GEAFOL cast-resin transformers with make-proof earthing
switch AN operation 1,250 kVA, AF operation 1,750 kVA
(fig. 3.2-43, next page)
External medium-voltage switchgear with fuse/switchdisconnectors
Low-voltage circuit-breakers
Automatic reactive-power compensation: up to 500 kVAr
unrestricted, up to 300 kVAr restricted
The SENTRON high-current busbar system: connection to
high-current busbar systems from all directions
SIMATIC ET 200/PROFIBUS interface for central monitoring
system (if required).
135

How to understand this mode:

Normal operating mode: 4 x 1,250 kVA
AN operating mode (100 %)
n-1 operating mode:
3 x 1,750 kVA
AF operating mode (140 %)
Power distribution
Utilities substation
3
Circuit-breakers and
switch-disconnectors
with HV HRC fuses
Substation
t < 10 ms
SITRABLOC
M
SITRABLOC SITRABLOC SITRABLOC

M Production M
Personal safety
Reduced costs
Low system losses
Fig. 3.2-42: n-1 operating mode
Fig. 3.2-41: Capacitor banks
136
Fig. 3.2-43: Transformer and earthing switch, LV bloc

Information distribution
S7-400
S7-300
S5-155U
PROFIBUS DP
PG/PC
COROS OP
PROFIBUS
ET 200B
ET 200C
Field devices
Communications interface
SITRABLOC
ET 200M
12/24 kV
P
GEAFOL transformer
with built-in
make-proof earthing switch
LV installation with circuitbreakers and automatic

reactive-power compensation
0.4 kV
LV busbar system
with sliding link
(e.g., SENTRON busways)
Option
Fig. 3.2-44: SIMATIC ET 200/PROFIBUS interface for control monitoring system
For further information please contact:

Fax: ++ 49 91 31 7-3 15 73
137

3.3 Low-Voltage Power
Distribution Systems
3.3.1 Requirements for Electrical Power
Systems in Buildings
The efficiency of electrical power supply rises and falls with
qualified planning. Especially in the first stage of planning, the
finding of conceptual solutions, the planner can use his creativity for an input of new, innovative solutions and technologies. They serve as a basis for the overall solution which has
been economically and technically optimized in terms of the
supply task and related requirements.
The following stages of calculating and dimensioning circuits and

equipment are routine tasks which involve a great effort. They can
be worked out efficiently using modern dimensioning tools like
SIMARIS design, so that there is more freedom left for the creative
planning stage of finding conceptual solutions (fig. 3.3-1).
When the focus is limited to power supply for infrastructure
projects, useful possibilities can be narrowed down. The following aspects should be taken into consideration when
designing electric power distribution systems:
Simplification of operational management by transparent,
simple power system structures
Low costs for power losses, e.g. by medium-voltage power
transmission to the load centers
High reliability of supply and operational safety of the
installations even in the event of individual equipment failures
(redundant supply, selectivity of the power system protection,
and high availability)
Easy adaptation to changing load and operational conditions
Low operating costs thanks to maintenance-friendly
equipment
Sufficient transmission capacity of equipment during normal
operation and also in the event of a fault, taking future
expansions into account
Good quality of the power supply, i.e. few voltage changes due
to load fluctuations with sufficient voltage symmetry and few
harmonic voltage distortions
Compliance with applicable standards and project-related
stipulations for special installations.
Standards
To minimize technical risks and / or to protect persons involved in
handling electrotechnical components, essential planning rules
have been compiled in standards. Standards represent the state
of the art; they are the basis for evaluations and court decisions.
Technical standards are desired conditions stipulated by professional associations which are, however, made binding by legal
standards such as safety at work regulations. Furthermore, the
compliance with technical standards is crucial for any approval of
operator granted by authorities or insurance coverage. While
decades ago, standards were mainly drafted at a national level
138
Compilation of
boundary conditions
Influencing factors
Concept finding:
Analysis of the supply task
Selection of the network
configuration
Selection of the type
of power supply system
Definition of the technical
features
Building type / perimeter

Building use
Building management
Power outage reserve
etc.
Calculation:
Energy balance
Load flow (normal / fault)
Short-circuit currents
(uncontrolled / controlled)
Lists of power consumers

Forecasts of expansions
Temperatures
Equipment data
etc.
Dimensioning:
Selection of equipment,
transformers, cables,
protective and switching
devices, etc.
Requirements according to
selectivity and back-up
protection
Equipment data
Electrical data
Dimensions etc.
Selectivity tables
Selectivity limit tables
Characteristic curves,
setting data, etc.
etc.
Fig. 3.3-1: Power system planning tasks
Regional
America
PAS
National USA: ANSI
Europe
CENELEC
Australia
Asia
D: DIN VDE
AUS: SA
CN: SAC
CA:
SCC
I:
NZ: SNZ
IND: BIS
BR:
COBEI
F: UTE
CEI
J:
Africa
SA: SABS
JISC
GB: BS
ANSI
BIS
BS
CENELEC
American National Standards Institute

Bureau of Indian Standards
British Standards
European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization
(Comit Europen de Normalisation Electrotechnique)
CEI
Comitato Ellettrotecnico Italiano Electrotechnical Committee Italy
COBEI
Comit Brasileiro de Eletricidade, Eletrnica, Iluminao e
Telecomunicaes
DIN VDE Deutsche Industrie Norm, Verband deutscher Elektrotechniker
(German Industry Standard, Association of German Electrical
Engineers)
JISC
Japanese Industrial Standards Committee
PAS
Pacific Area Standards
SA
Standards Australia
SABS
South African Bureau of Standards
SAC
Standardisation Administration of China
SCC
Standards Council of Canada
SNZ
Standards New Zealand
UTE
Union Technique de lElectricit et de la Communication
Technical Association for Electrical Engineering & Communication
Table 3.3-1: Representation of national and regional standards in

electrical engineering
and debated in regional committees, it has currently been

agreed that initiatives shall be submitted centrally (on the
IEC level) and then be adopted as regional or national standards.
Only if the IEC is not interested in dealing with the matter, or if
there are time constraints, a draft standard shall be prepared at
the regional level.
The interrelation of the different standardization levels is illustrated
in table 3.3-1. A complete list of the IEC members and further
links can be obtained at www.iec.ch > Members & Experts >
List of Members (NC); www.iec.ch/dyn/www/f?p=103:5:0

3.3 Low-Voltage Power Distribution Systems
System configurations
Table 3.3-2 and table 3.3-3 illustrate the technical aspects and
influencing factors that should be taken into account when
electrical power distribution systems are planned and network
components are dimensioned.
Radial system in an interconnected network

Individual radial systems, in which the connected consumers
are centrally supplied by one power source, are additionally
coupled electrically with other radial systems by means of
coupling connections. All couplings are normally closed.
Simple radial system (spur line topology)

All consumers are centrally supplied from one power source. Each
connecting line has an unambiguous direction of energy flow.
Radial system with changeover connection
as power reserve partial load:
All consumers are centrally supplied from two to n power
sources. They are rated as such that each of them is capable
of supplying all consumers directly connected to the main
power distribution system (stand-alone operation with open
couplings). If one power source fails, the remaining sources
of supply can also supply some consumers connected to the
other power source. In this case, any other consumer must
be disconnected (load shedding).
Radial system with changeover connection
as power reserve full load:
All consumers are centrally supplied from two to n power
sources (stand-alone operation with open couplings). They are
rated as such that, if one power source fails, the remaining
power sources are capable of additionally supplying all those
consumers normally supplied by this power source. No
consumer must be disconnected. This means rating the power
sources according to the (n1) principle. With three parallel
power sources or more, other supply principles, e.g. the (n2)
principle would also be possible. In this case, these power
sources will be rated so that two out of three transformers can
fail without the continuous supply of all consumers connected
being affected.
Depending on the rating of the power sources in relation to the

total load connected, the application of the (n1) principle,
(n2) principle, etc. can ensure continuous and faultless power
supply of all consumers by means of additional connecting lines.
The direction of energy flow through the coupling connections

may vary depending on the line of supply, which must be taken
into account for subsequent rating of switching/protective
devices, and above all for making protection settings.
Radial system with power distribution via busbars
In this special case of radial systems that can be operated in an
interconnected network, busbar trunking systems are used
instead of cables.
In the coupling circuits, these busbar trunking systems are
either used for power transmission (from radial system A to
radial system B, etc.) or power distribution to the respective
consumers.
LV-side system configurations
Partial load
5
Low cost of investment
Full load
5
High reliability of supply
Great voltage stability
Easy and clear system protection
Radial system
with power
distribution via
busbars
Easy operation
Low power losses
Low fire load
High adaptability
Radial system
in an interconnected
network
Radial system with changeover

connection as power reserve
Simple radial
system
Quality criterion
Rating: very good (1) to poor (5) fulfillment of a quality criterion
Table 3.3-2: Exemplary quality rating dependent on the power system configuration
139

Power supply systems according to the type of connection

to earth
Depending on the power system and nominal system voltage

there may be different requirements regarding the
disconnection times to be met (protection of persons against
indirect contact with live parts by means of automatic
disconnection).
Power systems in which electromagnetic interference plays an
important part should preferably be configured as TN-S
systems immediately downstream of the point of supply. Later,
it will mean a comparatively high expense to turn existing
TN-C or TN-C/S systems into an EMC-compatible system.
TN-C, TN-C/S, TN-S, IT and TT systems

The implementation of IT systems may be required by national
or international standards.
For parts of installations which have to meet particularly high
requirements regarding operational and human safety (e.g. in
medical rooms, such as the OT, intensive care or postanaesthesia care unit)
For installations erected and operated outdoors (e.g. in
mining, at cranes, garbage transfer stations, and in the
chemical industry).
The state of the art for TN systems is an EMC-compatible design

as TN-S system.
TN-C
Characteristics
1
TN-C/S
3
Low cost of investment
Little expense for system extensions
Any switchgear/protective technology

can be used
TN-S
3
Fault currents and impedance conditions

in the system can be calculated
Stability of the earthing system
High degree of operational safety
High degree of protection
High degree of shock hazard protection
High degree of fire safety
Automatic disconnection for protection

purposes can be implemented
EMC-friendly
Equipment functions maintained in case

of 1st earth or enclosure fault
Fault localization during system

operation
Reduction of system downtimes by

controlled disconnection
1 = true
2 = conditionally true
3 = not true
Table 3.3-3: Exemplary quality rating dependent on the power supply system according to its type of connection to earth
140
TT system
Earth-fault detection can be

implemented
IT system

When the basic supply concept for the electricity supply system
has been established, it is necessary to dimension the electrical
power system. Dimensioning means the sizing and/or rating of
all equipment and components to be used in the power system.
The dimensioning target is to obtain a technically permissible
combination of switching/protective devices and connecting
lines for each circuit in the power system.
Basic rules
In principle, circuit dimensioning should be performed in compliance with the technical rules standards listed in fig. 3.3-2.
Cross-circuit dimensioning
When selected network components and systems are matched,
an economically efficient overall system can be designed. This
cross-circuit matching of network components may bear any
degree of complexity, because subsequent modifications to
certain components, e.g., a switching/protective device, may
have effects on the neighboring higher-level or all lower-level
network sections (high testing expense, high planning risk).
Dimensioning principles
For each circuit, the dimensioning process comprises the selection of one or more switching/protective devices to be used at
the beginning or end of a connecting line, and the selection of
the connecting line itself (cable/line or busbar connection) after
considering the technical features of the corresponding
switching/protective devices. For supply circuits in particular,
dimensioning also includes rating the power sources.
The objectives of dimensioning may vary depending on the
circuit type. The dimensioning target of overload and short-circuit protection can be attained in correlation to the mounting
location of the protective equipment. Devices applied at the end
of a connecting line can ensure overload protection for this line
at best, but not short-circuit protection.
Circuit types
The basic dimensioning rules and standards listed in fig. 3.3-2
principally apply to all circuit types. In addition, there are specific
requirements for these circuit types (fig. 3.3-3) that are
explained in detail below.
Supply circuits
Particularly stringent requirements apply to the dimensioning of
supply circuits. This starts with the rating of the power sources.
Overload protection
IEC 60364-4-43
VDE 0100-430
Short-circuit protection
IEC 60364-4-43/
IEC 60364-5-54
VDE 0100-430/
VDE 0100-540
Protection against electric shock
IEC 60364-4-41
VDE 0100-410
Voltage drop
IEC 60364-5-52
IEC 60038
VDE 0100-520
VDE 0175-1
Selectivity
IEC 60364-7-710
IEC 60364-7-718
IEC 60947-2
IEC 60898-1
VDE 0100-710
VDE 0100-718
VDE 0660-101
VDE 0641-11
TIP04_13_034_EN
3.3.2 Dimensioning of Power

Distribution Systems
Fig. 3.3-2: Relevant standards for circuit dimensioning
141

Power sources are rated according to the maximum load current

to be expected for the power system, the desired amount of
reserve power, and the degree of supply reliability required in
case of a fault (overload / short circuit).
Load conditions in the entire power system are established by
taking the energy balance (in an energy report). Reserve power
and operational safety in the vicinity of the supply system are
usually established by building up appropriate redundancies, for
example, by doing the following:
Providing additional power sources (transformer, generator,
UPS).
Rating the power sources according to the failure principle;
n- or (n1) principle: Applying the (n1) principle means that
two out of three supply units are principally capable of
continually supplying the total load for the power system
without any trouble if the smallest power source fails.
Rating those power sources that can temporarily be operated
under overload (e.g., using vented transformers).
Independently of the load currents established, dimensioning

of any further component in a supply circuit is oriented to the
ratings of the power sources, the system operating modes
configured and all the related switching states in the vicinity of
the supply system.
As a rule, switching/protective devices must be selected in such a
way that the planned power maximum can be transferred. In
addition, the different minimum/maximum short-circuit current
conditions in the vicinity of the supply system, which are dependent on the switching status, must be determined.
When connecting lines are rated (cable or busbar), appropriate
reduction factors must be taken into account; these factors
depend on the number of systems laid in parallel and the installation type.
When devices are rated, special attention should be paid to their
rated short-circuit breaking capacity. In addition, a high-quality
tripping unit with variable settings is preferred, because this
component is an important foundation for attaining the best
possible selectivity toward all upstream and downstream
devices.
Distribution circuit
Dimensioning of cable routes and devices follows the maximum
load currents to be expected at this distribution level.
As a rule
IB max = installed capacity simultaneity factor

Switching/protective device and connecting line are to be
matched with regard to overload and short-circuit protection.
In order to ensure overload protection, the standardized conventional (non-)tripping currents referring to the devices in application have to be observed. A verification based merely on the
rated device current or the setting value Ir would be insufficient.
142
Supply
Connecting line between

distribution boards
Load feeders in final

circuits
Start node
Transmission
medium
Load
Target node
Fig. 3.3-3: Schematic representation of the different circuit types
Basic rules for ensuring overload protection:

Rated current rule
Non-adjustable protective equipment
IB In Iz
The rated current In of the selected device must be between

the calculated maximum load current IB and the maximum
permissible load current Iz of the selected transmission
medium (cable or busbar).
Adjustable protective equipment
IB Ir Iz
The rated current Ir of the overload release must be between

the calculated maximum load current Ib and the maximum
permissible load current Iz of the selected transmission
medium (cable or busbar).
Tripping current rule
I2 1.45 Iz
The maximum permissible load current Iz of the selected transmission medium (cable or busbar) must be above the conventional tripping current I2 / 1.45 of the selected device.
The test value I2 is standardized and varies according to the type
and characteristics of the protective equipment applied.
Basic rules for ensuring short-circuit protection:
Short-circuit energy
K2S 2 I 2t
(K = Material coefficient; S = Cross-section)
The amount of energy that is set free when a short circuit
occurs and up to the moment it is cleared automatically
must be less than the energy that the transmission medium
can carry as a maximum, or there will be irreparable damage.
As a standard, this basic rule applies in the time range up to
max. 5 s.
Below 100 ms of short-circuit breaking time, the let-through
energy of the switching/protective device (according to the
equipment manufacturers specification) must be taken into
account.

When devices with a tripping unit are used, observance of this

rule across the entire characteristic device curve must be verified.
A mere verification in the range of the maximum short-circuit
current applied (Ik max) is not always sufficient, in particular
when time-delayed releases are used.
Short-circuit time
ta (Ik min) 5 s
The resulting current-breaking time of the selected protective
equipment must ensure that the calculated minimum short-circuit current Ik min at the end of the transmission line or protected
line is automatically cleared within 5 s at the most.
Overload and short-circuit protection need not necessarily be
provided by one and the same device. If required, these two
protection targets may be realized by a device combination.
The use of separate switching/protective devices could also be
considered, i.e., at the start and end of a cable route. As a rule,
devices applied at the end of a cable route can ensure overload
protection for that line only.
Final circuits
The method for coordinating overload and short-circuit protection is practically identical for distribution and final circuits.
Besides overload and short-circuit protection, the protection of
human life is also important for all circuits.
Protection against electric shock
ta (Ik1 min) ta perm

If a 1-phase fault to earth (Ik1 min) occurs, the resulting current
breaking time ta for the selected protective equipment must be
shorter than the maximum permissible breaking time ta perm
that is required for this circuit according to IEC 60364-4-41
(VDE 0100-410) to ensure the protection of persons.
Because the required maximum current breaking time varies
according to the rated system voltage and the type of load
connected (stationary and non-stationary loads), protection
requirements regarding minimum breaking times ta perm may be
transferred from one load circuit to other circuits. Alternatively,
this protection target may also be achieved by observing a maximum touch voltage.
Depending on the system operating mode (coupling open,

coupling closed) and the medium of supply (transformer or
generator), the protective equipment and its settings must be
configured for the worst-case scenario for short-circuit currents.
In contrast to supply or distribution circuits, where the choice
of a high-quality tripping unit is considered very important,
there are no special requirements on the protective equipment
of final circuits regarding the degree of selectivity to be
achieved. The use of a tripping unit with LI characteristics is
normally sufficient.
Summary
Basically, the dimensioning process itself is easy to understand
and can be performed using simple means.
Its complexity lies in the procurement of the technical data
on the products and systems required. This data can be found
in various technical standards and regulations as well as in
numerous product catalogs.
An important aspect in this context is the cross-circuit manipulation of dimensioned components owing to their technical data.
One such aspect is the above mentioned inheritance of minimum current breaking times of the non-stationary load circuit
to other stationary load or distribution circuits.
Another aspect is the mutual impact of dimensioning and network calculation (short circuit), e.g., for the use of short-circuit
current-limiting devices.
In addition, the complexity of the matter increases, when different national standards or installation practices are to be taken
into account for dimensioning.
For reasons of risk minimization and time efficiency, a number
of engineering companies generally use advanced calculation
software, such as SIMARIS design, to perform dimensioning and
verification processes in electrical power systems.
Because final circuits are often characterized by long supply

lines, their dimensioning is often affected by the maximum
permissible voltage drop.
As far as the choice of switching/protective devices is concerned,
it is important to bear in mind that long connecting lines are
characterized by high impedances, and thus strong attenuation
of the calculated short-circuit currents.
143

3.3.3 Low-Voltage Switchboards

When developing a power distribution concept including
dimensioning of the systems and devices, its requirements and
feasibility have to be matched by the end user and the
manufacturer. When selecting a low-voltage main distribution
board (LVMD), the prerequisite for its efficient sizing is
knowledge of its use, availability, and future options for
extension. The demands on power distribution are extremely
diverse. They start with buildings that do not place such high
demands on the power supply, such as office buildings, and
continue through to the high demands, for example, made by
data centers, in which smooth operation is of prime importance.
Because no major switching functions in the LVMD have to

be considered in the planning of power distribution systems
in commercial buildings and no further extensions are to be
expected, a performance-optimized technology with high
component density can be used. In these cases, mainly fuse-
Fig. 3.3-4: SIVACON S8 switchboard
144
protected equipment in fixed-mounted design is used. When

planning a power distribution system for a production plant,
however, system availability, extendibility, control and visualization are important functions to keep plant downtimes as short as
possible. The use of circuit-breaker-protected and fuse-protected
withdrawable design is an important principle. Selectivity is also
of great importance for reliable power supply. Between these
two extremes there is a great design variety that is to be optimally matched to customer requirements. The prevention of
personal injury and damage to equipment must, however, be
the first priority in all cases. When selecting an appropriate
switchboard, it must be ensured that it is a design verified
assembly (in compliance with IEC 61439-2, resp. EN 61439-2,
VDE 0660-600-2) with extended testing of behavior in the
event of an accidental arc (IEC/TR 61641, VDE 0660-500
Addendum 2), and that the selection is always made in light
of the regulations governing the entire supply system (full
selectivity, partial selectivity).

Overview
The SIVACON S8 low-voltage switchboard (fig. 3.3-4) is a variable, multi-purpose and design verified low-voltage switchgear
assembly that can be used for the infrastructure supply not only
in administrative and institutional buildings, but also in industry
and commerce. SIVACON S8 consists of standardized, modular
components that can be flexibly combined to form an economical, overall solution, depending on the specific requirements.
Siemens will perform the following:
The customer-specific configuration
The mechanical and electrical installation
The testing, for which design verified function modules
are used.
The authorized contracting party will use the specified documentation. SIVACON S8 can be used as a design verified power
distribution board system up to 7,000 A.
Standards and regulations
SIVACON S8 is a design verified low-voltage switchgear assembly in
compliance with IEC 61439-2 (VDE 0660-600-2). SIVACON S8 is
resistant to accidental arcs, in compliance with IEC/TR 61641
(VDE 0660-500 Addendum 2). SIVACON S8 is available in several
mounting designs (fig. 3.3-5).
Circuit-breaker design
The panels for installation of 3WL and 3V circuit-breakers are
used for the supply of the switchboard and for outgoing feeders
and bus ties (bus sectionalizer and bus coupler). The rule that
only one circuit-breaker is used for each panel applies to the
entire circuit-breaker design (fig. 3.3-6).
1
2
3
4
5
6
The device mounting space is intended for the following functions:

Incoming/outgoing feeders with 3WL air circuit-breakers in
fixed-mounted and withdrawable unit designs up to 6,300 A
Bus sectionalizer and bus coupler with 3WL air circuit-breakers
in fixed-mounted and withdrawable designs up to 6,300 A
Incoming/outgoing feeders with 3V... molded-case circuitbreakers in fixed-mounted design up to 1,600 A or 3VA
molded-case circuit-breakers up to 630 VA
Circuit breaker section with 3WL air circuit breakers up to 6,300 A

or 3VL molded case circuit breakers up to 1,600 A
Universal installation section for motor and cable feeders
up to 630 A, withdrawable version with combination options
with fixed-mounted version (compartment door) and
3NJ6 in-line design (plug-in)
3NJ6 in-line design (plug-in) for cable feeders up to 630 A
in plug-in design
Fixed installation field (front panel) for cable feeders up to 630 A
and modular installation devices
3NJ4 fuse switch disconnectors, in-line type (fixed
installation) for cable feeders up to 630 A
Reactive-power compensation up to 600 kvar
Fig. 3.3-5: The following mounting designs are available
Universal installation design

The panels for cable feeders in fixed-mounted and plug-in
designs up to 630 A are intended for the installation of the
following switching devices (fig. 3.3-7):
SIRIUS 3RV or 3VA / 3VL circuit-breaker
3K switch-disconnector
3NP fuse switch-disconnector
3NJ6 fuse switch-disconnector in plug-in design.
Plug-in 3NJ6 in-line fuse switch-disconnector design

The panels for cable feeders in the plug-in design up to 630 A
are intended for the installation of in-line switch-disconnectors.
The plug-in contact on the supply side is a cost-effective alternative to the withdrawable design. The modular design of the
plug-ins enables an easy and quick retrofit or replacement under
operating conditions. The device mounting space is intended for
plug-in, in-line switch-disconnectors with a distance between
pole centers of 185 mm. The vertical plug-on bus system is
arranged at the back of the panel and is covered by an optional
touch protection with pick-off openings in the IP20 degree of
protection. This enables the in-line switch-disconnectors to be
replaced without shutting down the switchboard (fig. 3.3-8).
The switching devices are mounted on mounting plates and

connected to the vertical current distribution bars on the supply
side. Plug-in 3NJ6 in-line switch-disconnectors can be installed
using an adapter. The front is covered by panel doors or compartment doors. The withdrawable unit design offers safe and
simple handling. So modifications can be carried out quickly,
ensuring a high level of system availability. No connection work
is required inside the withdrawable unit compartments.
Fixed-mounted design with front covers

The panels for cable feeders in fixed-mounted design up
to 630 A are intended for the installation of the following
switching devices (fig. 3.3-9):
SIRIUS 3RV or 3VL / 3VA circuit-breaker
3K switch-disconnector
3NP fuse switch-disconnector
Modular installation devices (assembly kit available).
145

The switching devices are mounted on infinitely adjustable device

holders and connected to the vertical current distribution bars on
the supply side. The front of the panel has either covers or
additional doors (with or without a window).
Fixed-mounted 3NJ4 in-line fuse switch-disconnector design
The panels for cable feeders in fixed-mounted design up to
630 A are intended for the installation of 3NJ4 in-line fuse
switch-disconnectors. With their compact design and modular
structure, in-line fuse switch-disconnectors offer optimal installation conditions with regard to the achievable packing density.
The busbar system is arranged horizontally at the back of the
panel. This busbar system is connected to the main busbar
system via cross-members. The in-line fuse switch-disconnectors
are screwed directly onto the busbar system (fig. 3.3-10).
Fig. 3.3-6: Circuit-breaker design
Fig. 3.3-7: Universal installation

design
Fig. 3.3-8: Plug-in 3NJ6 in-line

switch-disconnector
design
Fig. 3.3-9: Fixed-mounted design

with front covers
Low-voltage main distribution

When selecting a low-voltage main distribution system, the
prerequisite for its efficient sizing is knowing about its use,
availability, and future options for extension. The requirements
for power distribution are extremely diverse.
Normally, frequent switching operations need not be considered
in the planning of power distribution for commercial, institutional and industrial building projects, and extensions are generally not to be expected. For these reasons, a performanceoptimized technology with high component density can be used.
In these cases, Siemens mainly uses circuit-breaker-protected
equipment in fixed-mounted design. When planning a power
distribution system for a production plant, however, system
availability, extendibility, control, and the visualization of status
information and control functions are important issues related to
keeping plant downtimes as short as possible. The use of circuitbreaker-protected technology in withdrawable design is important. Selectivity is also of great importance for reliable power
supply. Between these two extremes there is a great design
variety that should be optimally matched to customer requirements. The prevention of personal injury and damage to equipment must, however, be the first priority in any case. When
selecting an appropriate switchboard, it must be ensured that it
is a design verified switchgear assembly (in compliance with
IEC 61439-2, VDE 0660-600-2), with extended testing of
behavior in the event of an internal arc fault (IEC/TR 61641,
VDE 0660-500 Addendum 2).
Low-voltage main distribution systems should be chosen among
those featuring a total supply power up to 3 MVA. Up to this rating,
the equipment and distribution systems are relatively inexpensive
due to the maximum short-circuit currents to be encountered.
For rated currents up to 3,200 A, power distribution via busbars
is usually sufficient if the arrangement of the incoming/outgoing
feeder panels and coupler panels has been selected in a performance-related way. Ambient air temperatures, load on individual
feeders, and the maximum power loss per panel have a decisive
impact on the devices to be integrated and the number of panels
required, as well as their component density (number of devices
per panel).
146
Fig. 3.3-10: Fixed-mounted

3NJ4 in-line switchdisconnector design

3.3.4 Planning Notes for Low-Voltage

Switchboards
Installation clearances and corridor widths
The minimum clearances between switchboard and obstacles
specified by the manufacturer must be taken into account when
installing low-voltage switchboards (fig. 3.3-11). The minimum
dimensions for operating and servicing corridors according to
IEC 60364-7-729 (VDE 0100-729) must be taken into account
when planning the space requirements (table 3.3-4, fig. 3.3-12,
fig. 3.3-13).
Front
B
Caution! If a lift truck is used to insert circuit-breakers or withdrawable units, the minimum corridor widths must be adapted
to the lift truck!
Transportation units
Depending on the access routes available in the building, one
or more panels can be combined into transport units (TU). The
max. length of a TU should not exceed 2,400 mm.
Front
Front
A: 100 mm (150 mm at IP43) from the rear side of the installation
B: 100 mm from the side side panels
C: 200 mm (300 mm at IP43 roof protrusion) from the rear panels
with back-to-back installation
Fig. 3.3-11: Clearances to obstacles
Width:
For data required for the addition of panels please refer

to the panel descriptions
Rated
current of
the main
busbar
Busbar
position
Depth:
Cable /
busbar entry
2,000 mm and 2,200 mm

(optionally with 100 mm or 200 mm base)
Type of
installation
Height:
2,000 1)
400 2)
Space requirements
600 mm
Rear
4,000 A
Single front
Top & bottom
800 mm
Rear
7,010 A
Single front
Top & bottom
1,000 mm
Rear
4,000 A
Double front
Top & bottom
1,200 mm
Rear
7,010 A
Double front
Top & bottom
500 mm
Top
3,270 A
Single front
Bottom
800 mm
Top
3,270 A
Single front
Top & bottom
800 mm
Top
6,300 A
Single front
Bottom
1,200 mm
Top
6,300 A
Single front
Top & bottom
600
700
1) Minimum
2)
700
600
700
700
height of passage under covers or enclosures
Attention: For SIVACON S8 a clearance of at least 400 mm from

obstacles must bekept free above the cubicles to enable opening
of the pressure relief flap if there is internal arcing
Fig. 3.3-12: Reduced corridor widths within the area of open doors
Table 3.3-4: SIVACON S8 switchboard dimensions
Min. corridor width

700 or 600 mm
Escape
direction
Min. free passage

500 mm 1)
2)
1)
2)
With switchgear fronts facing each other, the space

requirements only account for obstruction by open doors
from one side (i.e. doors that dont close in escape direction)
Take door widths into account,
i.e. door can be opened at 90 minimum
Fig. 3.3-13: Minimum corridor width according to IEC 60364-7-729

(VDE 0100-729)
147

Double-front installations
In the double-front installation, the panels are positioned in
a row next to and behind one another. The main advantage of
a double-front installation is the extremely economic design
through the supply of the branch circuits on both operating
panels from one main busbar system.
Double-front installations top view

Double-front installations only with main busbar system at the rear
(1)
(2)
The "double-front unit" system structure is required for the

assignment of certain modules.
A double-front unit (fig. 3.3-14) consists of at least 2 and a maximum of 4 panels. The width of the double-front unit is determined by the widest panel (1) within the double-front unit. This
panel can be placed on the front or rear side of the double-front
unit. Up to three panels (2), (3), (4) can be placed on the opposite side. The sum of the panel widths (2) to (4) must be equal to
the width of the widest panel (1). The panel combination within
the double-front unit is possible for all technical installations
with the following exceptions.
(3)
(4)
Double-front units
Fig. 3.3-14: Panel arrangement of double-front installations
Exceptions
The following panels determine the width of the double-front
unit and may only be combined with an empty panel:
Bus sectionalizer unit
5,000 A incoming / outgoing feeder
6,300 A incoming / outgoing feeder.
Weights
The panel weights as listed in table 3.3-5 should be used for the
transportation and dimensioning of building structures such as
cable basements and false floors.
Environmental conditions for switchboards
The climate and other external conditions (natural foreign
substances, chemically active pollutants, small animals) may
affect the switchboards to a varying extent. The effect depends
on the heating / air-conditioning systems of the switchboard
room. If higher concentrations are present, pollutant-reducing
measures are required, for example:
Air intake for operating room from a less contaminated point

Slightly pressurizing the operating room (e.g. by blowing
uncontaminated air into the switchboard)
Switchboard room air conditioning (temperature reduction,
relative humidity < 60 %, if necessary, use air filters)
Reduction of temperature rise (oversizing of switchboard or
components such as busbars and distribution bars).
Power losses
The power losses listed in table 3.3-6 are approximate values for
a panel with the main circuit of functional units to determine the
power loss to be discharged from the switchboard room.
Rated current [A]

Size
Approx. weight
[kg]
6302,000
Size I
400
340
2,0003,200
Size II
600
510
4,000
Size III
800
770
4,0006,300
Size III
1,000
915
1,000
400
3NJ4 in-line-type switch-disconnector panel (fixed-mounted)
600
360
3NJ6 in-line-type switch-disconnector design panel (plugged)
1,000
415
800
860
Circuit-breaker design with 3WL

(withdrawable unit)
Universal mounting design panel

(incl. withdrawable units, fixed-mounted with front doors)
Reactive power compensation panel

Table 3.3-5: Average weights of the panels including busbar (without cable)
148
Minimum panel width

[mm]

Circuit-breaker type
Circuit-breaker design
with 3WL (withdrawable unit)
Approx. Pv [W] for % of the rated current of the switch

100 %
80 %
3WL1106 630 A
Size I
215
140
3WL1108 800 A
Size I
345
215
3WL1110 1,000 A
Size I
540
345
3WL1112 1,250 A
Size I
730
460
3WL1116 1,600 A
Size I
1,000
640
3WL1220 2,000 A
Size II
1,140
740
3WL1225 2,500 A
Size II
1,890
1,210
3WL1232 3,200 A
Size II
3,680
2,500
3WL1340 4,000 A
Size III
4,260
2,720
3WL1350 5,000 A
Size III
5,670
3,630
3WL1363 6,300 A
Size III
8,150
5,220
Universal mounting design panel (incl. withdrawable units, fixed-mounted with front doors)
600 W
3NJ4 in-line-type switch-disconnector panel (fixed-mounted)
600 W
3NJ6 in-line-type switch-disconnector design panel (plugged)
1,500 W
Fixed-mounted type panel with front covers
600 W
Reactive power compensation panel
non-choked
choked
1.4 W / kvar
6.0 W / kvar
Table 3.3-6: Power loss generated per panel (average values)
Arc resistance
Arcing faults can be caused by incorrect dimensioning and
reductions in insulation due to contamination etc., but they can
also be a result of handling errors. The effects, resulting from
high pressure and extremely high temperatures, can have fatal
consequences for the operator, the system, and even the
building. SIVACON S8 offers evidence of personal safety through
testing under arcing fault conditions with a special test in accordance with IEC/TR 61641 (VDE 0660-500 Addendum 2).
Active protection measures, such as the high-quality insulation

of live parts (e.g. busbars), standardized and simple operation,
prevent arcing faults and the associated personal injuries. Passive
protections increase personal and system safety many times over.
These include: hinge and locking systems with arc resistance, the
safe operation of withdrawable units or circuit-breakers behind
a closed door and patented swing check valves behind ventilation
openings on the front, arcing fault barriers or arcing fault detection
system combined with the rapid disconnection of arcing faults.
Level 1
High level of
personal safety
without major
restriction of the
effects of arcing
within the power
distribution board.
Level 2
High level of
personal safety
with restriction of
the effects of
arcing on a single
section or doublefronted section.
Level 3
High level of
personal safety
with restriction to
main busbar
compartment in
single or doublefronted section
as well as device
or cable connection
compartments.
Level 4
High personal
safety with
restriction of the
effects of arcing to
the site of origin.
Fig. 3.3-15: The arcing fault levels describe the classification in accordance with the characteristics under arcing fault conditions and the
restriction of the effects of the arcing fault to the system or system section
149

3.3.5 Low-Voltage Switchboard Panel Types and Example

Circuitbreaker
design
Universal
mounting
design
Plug-in 3NJ6 in-line

switch-disconnector
design
Fixed-mounting
with front cover
400
1,000
1,000
1,000
Fixed 3NJ4 in-line Reactive power

switch-disconcompensation
nector design
2,200
2,000
1,800
1,600
1,400
1,200
1,000
800
600
400
200
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
0
600
600
800
400
200
0
4,800
Installation front
Fig. 3.3-16: SIVACON S8, busbar position at rear 2,200 4,800 600 (H W D in mm)
Panel type
Reactive power
compensation
Fixed-mounted
with front
covers
Fixed-mounted
Fixed-mounted
Cable feeders
Cable feeders
Cable feeders
Central
compensation of
the reactive power
Up to 630 A /
Up to 250 kW
Up to 630 A
Up to 630 A
Up to 630 A
Up to 600 kvar
Front or rear side
Front or rear side
Front side
Front side
Front side
Front side
Panel width [mm]
400 / 600 / 800 /

1,000 / 1,400
600 / 1,000 / 1,200
1,000 / 1,200
1,000 / 1,200
600 / 800 / 1,000
800
Internal compartmentalization
1, 2b, 3a, 4b
4 Type 7 (BS)
3b, 4a, 4b, 4

Type 7 (BS)
3b, 4b
1, 2b, 3b, 4a,

4b
1, 2b
1, 2b
Up to IP 54
Up to IP 54
(up to IP 41 with
3NJ6 plug-in
design)
Up to IP 41
Up to IP 54
Up to IP 54
Up to IP 43
Mounting design
Function
Current In
Connection
Protection degree of
panel type against
interior
Circuit-breaker
design
Universal
mounting design
Withdrawable unit
Fixed-mounted
Withdrawable unit
Fixed-mounted
Plug-in
Plug-in
Incoming feeder
Outgoing feeder
Coupling
Cable feeders
Motor feeders
Up to 6,300 A
Protection degree of
assembly against
interior
Busbars
Fixedmounted
design
If section ventilated: IP 30 / IP 31 / IP 40 / IP 41 / IP 43
if section non-ventilated: IP 54
Rear / top
Rear / top
Rear / top
Rear / top
Rear
Rear / top / without
Table 3.3-7: Various mounting designs according to panel types

www.siemens.com/sivacon
Brochure: The low-voltage power distribution board that sets new standards
SIVACON S8, Order no. E10003-E38-2B-D0020-7600
150

3.3.6 Subdistribution Systems

General
Subdistribution systems, as an essential component for the
reliable power supply to all consumers of a building, are used
for the distributed supply of circuits. From the subdistribution
boards, cables either lead directly or via earth contact outlets
to the consumer. Protective devices are located within the
subdistribution systems.
These are:
Fuses
Miniature circuit-breakers
RCD (residual current devices)
Circuit-breakers
Overvoltage protection.
They provide protection against personal injury and protect:
Against excessive heating caused by non-permissible currents
Against the effects of short-circuit currents and the resulting
mechanical damage.
In addition to the protective devices, a subdistribution system
also contains devices for switching, measuring and monitoring.
These are:
Disconnectors
KNX/EIB components
Outlets
Measuring instruments
Switching devices
Transformers for extra-low voltages
Components of the building control systems.
Configuration
The local environmental conditions and all operating data have
utmost importance for the configuration of the subdistribution
systems. The dimensioning is made using the following criteria:
Ambient conditions
Dimensions
Mechanical stress
Exposure to corrosion
Notes concerning construction measures
Wiring spaces
Environmental conditions.
Electrical data
Rated currents of the busbars
Rated currents of the supply circuits
Rated currents of the branches
Short-circuit strength of the busbars
Rating factor for switchboard assemblies
Heat loss.
Protection and installation type

Observance of the upper temperature limit
Protective measures
Installation type (free-standing, floor-mounted distribution
board, wall-mounted distribution board)
Accessibility, e.g., for installation, maintenance and operating.
Type of construction
Number of operating faces
Space requirements for modular installation devices, busbars
and terminals
Supply conditions.
The number of subdistribution boards in a building is determined using the following criteria:
Floors
A high-rise building normally has at least one floor distribution
board for each floor. A residential building normally has one
distribution system for each apartment.
Building sections
If a building consists of several sections, at least one subdistribution system is normally provided for each building section.
Departments
In a hospital, separate subdistribution systems are provided for
the various departments, such as surgery, OP theater, etc.
Safety power supplies
Separate distribution boards for the safety power supply are
required for supplying the required safety equipment.
Depending on the type and use of the building or rooms, the
relevant regulations and guidelines must be observed, such as
IEC 60364-7-710 and -718 (VDE 0100-710 and -718) and the
MLAR (Sample Directive on Fireproofing Requirements for Line
Systems) in Germany.
Standards to be observed for dimensioning
IEC 60364-1 (VDE 0100-100) Low-voltage electrical
installations, part 1: Fundamental principles, assessment of
general characteristics, definitions
IEC 60364-4-41 (VDE 0100-410) Protection against electric
shock
IEC 60364-4-43 (VDE 0100-430) Protection against overcurrent
IEC 60364-5-51 (VDE 0100-510) Selection and erection
of electrical equipment; common rules
IEC 60364-5-52 (VDE 0100-520) Wiring systems
VDE 0298-4 Recommended values for the current carrying
capacity of sheathed and non-sheathed cables
VDE 0606-1 Connecting materials up to 690 V, part 1
Installation boxes for accommodation of equipment and/or
connecting terminals
DIN 18015-1 Electrical systems in residential buildings, part 1
planning principles.
151

3.3.7 Busbar Trunking Systems

General
When a planning concept for power supply is developed, it is not
only imperative to observe standards and regulations, it is also
important to discuss and clarify economic and technical interrelations. The rating and selection of electric equipment, such as
distribution boards and transformers, must be performed in such
a way that an optimum result for the power system as a whole is
kept in mind rather than focusing on individual components.
All components must be sufficiently rated to withstand normal

operating conditions as well as fault conditions. Further
important aspects to be considered for the creation of an energy
concept are:
Type, use and shape of the building (e.g. high-rise building,
low-rise building, multi-storey building)
Load centers and possible power transmission routes and
locations for transformers and main distribution boards
Building-related connection values according to specific area
loads that correspond to the buildings type of use
Statutory provisions and conditions imposed by building
authorities
Requirements of the power distribution network operator.
The result will never be a single solution. Several options must
be assessed in terms of their technical and economic impacts.
The following requirements are the main points of interest:
Easy and transparent planning
Long service life
High availability
Low fire load
Integration in energy management systems
Future-proof investment
Flexible adaptation to changes in the building.
Most applications suggest the use of suitable busbar trunking
systems (BTS) to meet these requirements. For this reason,
engineering companies increasingly prefer busbar trunking to
cable installation for power transmission and distribution.
Siemens offers BTS (fig. 3.3-17) ranging from 40 A to 6,300 A:
The BD01 system from 40 to 160 A for the supply of light
fixtures as well as workshops with tap-offs up to 63 A
The BD2 system from 160 to 1,250 A for supplying mediumsize consumers in buildings and industry
The ventilated LD system from 1,100 to 5,000 A for power
transmission and power distribution at production sites with
a high energy demand as well as on ships or in wind turbines
The LI system in sandwich design from 800 to 6,300 A is
a design verified solution according to IEC 61439-1/-6
(VDE 0660-600-1/-6), mainly used for power transmission
irrespective to the mounting position in buildings, data centers
or industrial applications with the requirements of degree of
protection IP55, low fire load and special conductor
configurations such as double N or insulated PE
The encapsulated LR system from 400 to 6,150 A for power
transmission under extreme environmental conditions (IP68).
152
Planning notes
Considering the complexity of modern building projects, transparency and flexibility of power distribution are indispensable
requirements. In industry, the focus is on continuous supply of
energy as an essential prerequisite for multi-shift production.
Busbar trunking systems meet all these requirements on efficient
power distribution by being easily planned, quickly installed, and
providing a high degree of flexibility and safety. The advantages
of busbar trunking systems are:
Straightforward network configuration
Low space requirements
Easy retrofitting in case of changes of locations and consumer
loads
High short-circuit rating and low fire load
Increased planning security.
Power transmission
Electrical energy from the transformer to the low-voltage
switchboard is transmitted by suitable components in the
busbar trunking system. These components are installed
between transformer and main distribution board, then
branching to subdistribution systems.
Trunking units without tap-off points are used for power transmission. These are available in standard lengths. Besides the
standard lengths, the customer can also choose a specific length
from various length ranges to suit individual constructive
requirements.
Power distribution
Power distribution is the main area of application for busbar
trunking systems. This means that electricity cannot just be
tapped from a permanently fixed point as with a cable installation. Tap-off points can be varied and changed as desired within
the entire power distribution system.
In order to tap electricity, you just have plug a tap-off unit on the
busbar at the tap-off point. This way a variable distribution
system is created for linear and / or area-wide, distributed power
supply. Tap-off points are provided on either or just one side on
the straight trunking units.
For each busbar trunking system, a wide range of tap-off units is
available for the connection of equipment and electricity supply.

Fig. 3.3-17: Busbar trunking systems
Configuration
For the configuration of a busbar system, the following points
are to be noted:
Calculation/dimensioning:
Electrical parameters, such as rated current, voltage, given
voltage drop and short-circuit rating at place of installation.
Technical parameters of the busbar systems:
The conductor configuration depends on the mains system
according to type of earth connection
Reduction factors, e.g., for ambient air temperature, type of
installation, busbar position (vertical, horizontal edgewise or
flat), and degree of protection
Copper is required as conductor material; otherwise, aluminum
has advantages such as weight, price, etc.
How is the system supply to be carried out: as a design verified
solution (according to IEC 61439-6 / VDE 0660-600-6) directly
from the distribution board or by means of cables at the end or
center of the busbar
Max. cable connection options to infeed and tap-off units
Power and size of the tap-off units including installation
conditions
Number of tap-off points
Use of bus systems possible

Influence of a magnetic field (hospitals, broadcasting studios)
Environmental conditions, especially ambient air temperature
(e.g., where there are fire compartments in each floor of
a vertical shaft).
Structural parameters and boundary conditions:
Phase response (changes of direction in the busbar routing
possible, differences in height, etc.)
Functional sections (e.g., various environmental conditions or
various uses)
Check use in sprinkler-protected building sections
Fire areas (provision of fire barriers > what structural
(e.g., type of walls) and fire fighting (local provisions)
boundary conditions are there?
Fire protection classes (EI90 and EI120 according EN 1366-3)
of the fire barriers
Functional endurance classes (E60, E90, E120) and
certifications of the busbar systems (observe relevant
deratings)
Fire loads / halogens (prescribed fire loads in certain functional
sections, e.g., fire escape routes, must not be exceeded).
153

Dimensions of the distribution board, system supplies and

tap-off units:
Installation clearance from ceiling, wall and parallel systems
for the purpose of heat dissipation and installation options
Crossing with other installations (water, gas pipes, etc.)
Swing angle for installing and operating the tap-off units
Minimum dimensions for changes of direction in the busbar
routing, fire protection compartmentalization, wall cutouts
Space requirement for distribution connection
Cutout planning (sizes and locations of the cutouts)
Linear expansion (expansion units, if applicable).
140
I e [%]
Fixing of the busbar systems to the structure:

Maximum clearance from fixings taking into consideration
location, weight of system and additional loads such as tap-off
units, lighting, etc.
Agreement on possible means of fixing with structural analyst
Use of tested fixing accessories for busbar systems with
functional endurance
Observe derating for type of installation.
120
Ie =100
Busbar
80
60
40
Cable
15 10 25 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
Ambient temperature [C]
Fig. 3.3-18: Comparison of temperature response and derating
A comparison between busbar and cable solution is summarized

in table 3.3-8 and fig. 3.3-18.
Characteristic
Cable
Busbar
Planning, calculation
High determination and calculation expense; the

consumer locations must be fixed
Flexible consumer locations; only the total load is

required for the planning
Expansions, changes
High expense, interruptions to operation, calculation,

risk of damage to the insulation
Low expense as the tap-off units are hot pluggable
Space requirements
More space required because of bending radii and the

spacing required between parallel cables
Compact directional changes and fittings
Temperature responses
and derating
Limits depend on the laying method and cable

accumulation. The derating factor must be
determined / calculated
Design verified switchgear assembly; limits from

catalog
Halogen-free
PVC cables are not halogen-free; halogen-free cable is

very expensive
Principally halogen-free
Fire load
Fire load with PVC cable is up to 10 times greater, with

PE cable up to 30 times greater than with busbars
Very low, see catalog
Design verified switchgear assembly
The operational safety depends on the design
Tested system, non-interchangeable assembly
Table 3.3-8: Cable / busbar comparison
154

3.3.8 Benefits and Data of the BTS Families

BD01 system 40 A 160 A
The BD01 system is the BTS for
power distribution in trade
and commerce:
High degree of protection up
to IP55
Flexible power supply
Easy and fast planning
Time-saving installation
Reliable mechanical and
electrical cables and
connections
High stability, low weight
Small number of basic
modules
Modular system reduces
stock-keeping
Variable changes of direction
Multi-purpose tap-off units
Forced opening and closing
of the tap-off point
It is designed for applications

from 40 to 160 A. Five current
ratings are available for only
one size, i.e., all other components can be used for all five
rated currents irrespective of
the power supply. The system
is used primarily to supply
smaller consumers, e.g., in
workshops.
1. Trunking unit
4-conductor (L1, L2, L3, N,
PE = casing)
Degree of protection: IP50,
IP54, IP55
Standard lengths: 2 m and
3m
Rated current: 40 A, 63 A,
100 A, 125 A, 160 A
Spacing of the tap-off
points: 0.5 m and 1 m
Rated operating voltage:
400 V AC
2. Junction unit
Changes of direction in the
busbar routing possible:
flexible, length 0.5 m, 1 m
3. Feeding unit
Universal system supply
4. Tap-off unit
Up to 63 A, with fuses or
miniature circuit-breaker
(MCB) and with fused outlets
With fittings or for
customized assembly
For 3, 4 or 8 modular widths
With or without assembly kit
5. Ancillary equipment unit

For 4 or 8 modular widths
With or without assembly
unit
With or without outlet
installed
6. Possible supplementary
equipment
Installation sets for degree of
protection IP55
Fixing and suspension
Coding set
Fire barrier kit (fire safety
for 90 minutes according to
European standards)
4
6
Trunking unit
Junction unit
Feeding unit
Tap-off unit
Ancillary equipment unit
6 Supplementary equipment
1
2
3
4
5
Fig. 3.3-19: System components for BD01 system
155

BD2 system 160 A 1,250 A

The BD2 system is used for
power distribution in the
aggressive industrial environment:
to IP55
Time-saving and economic
installation
Safe and reliable operation
Flexible, modular system
providing simple solutions
for every application
Advance power distribution
planning without precise
knowledge of device
locations
Ready to use in no time
thanks to fast and easy
installation
Innovative design: expansion

units to compensate for
expansion are eliminated
Tap-off units and tap-off
points can be coded at the
factory
Uniformly sealable.
The choice of aluminum or
copper as busbar material
allows for universal use. It has
not only been designed to
provide flexible power supply
and distribution for consumers
in trade and ndustry, but it can
also be used for power transmission from one supply point
to another. In addition, the
BD2 system is used as rising
power supply system in multistorey buildings, and since
a large number of changes of

direction in the busbar routing
are possible, it can be adapted
to the building geometries
perfectly.
1. Trunking unit
5-conductor (L1, L2, L3, N,
PE or with half PE
Degree of protection: IP52,
IP54, IP55
Busbar material: copper or
aluminum
Rated current: 160 A, 250 A,
400 A (68 mm 167 mm)
630 A, 800 A, 1,000 A,
1,250 A
(126 mm 167 mm)
Standard lengths: 3.25 m,
2.25 m and 1.25 m
3
4
1
5
3
1
2
3
4
5
3. Feeding unit
Feeding from one end
Center feeding
Bolt-type terminal
Cable entry
from 1, 2 or 3 sides
Distribution board feeding
5. Ancillary equipment unit

For 8 modular widths
With or without assembly
unit
156
2. Junction unit
Edgewise or flat position
With or without fire
protection
Elbow unit with or without
user-configurable bracket
Z-unit
T-unit
Cross unit
Flexible changes of direction
in the busbar routing
possible up to 800 A
4. Tap-off unit
25 A to 530 A
With fuse, miniature circuitbreaker (MCB) or fused
outlet installed
Fig. 3.3-20: System components for BD2 system
Lengths available: from

0.5 m to 3.24 m
Tap-off points:
without
on both sides (0.25 or
0.5 m apart)
Fire protection: fire safety
classes (90 and 120 minutes)
according to European
standards
Trunking unit
Junction unit
Feeding unit
Tap-off unit
Supplementary equipment
equipment
End flange
For fixing:
Universal fixing clamp for
edgewise or flat position
Fixing elements for vertical
phases, for fixing to walls or
ceilings
Terminal block

LD system
1,100 A 5,000 A
The LD system fits for power
distribution in industrial
environments:
to IP54
Easy and fast installation
Space-saving, compact
design, up to 5,000 A in one
housing
Tap-off units up to 1,250 A
Design verified connection
to distribution board and
transformers
The LDA/LDC system is used
both for power transmission
and power distribution. A
special feature of the system is
a high short-circuit rating, and
it is particularly suitable for
connecting the transformer to
the low-voltage main distribution and then to the subdistribution system. When there is
a high power demand, conventional current conduction
by cable means that parallel
cables are frequently necessary. Here, the LD system
allows optimal power distribution with horizontal and
vertical phase responses. The
system can be used in industry
as well as for relevant infrastructure projects, such as
hospitals, railroad stations,
airports, trade fairs, office
blocks, etc.
1. Trunking unit
4- and 5-conductor system
Busbar material:
copper or aluminum
Rated current:
1,100 to 5,000 A
LD1 to LD3
(180 mm 180 mm)
LD4 to LD8
(240 mm 180 mm)
Degree of protection:
IP34 and IP54
Standard lengths:
1.6 m, 2.4 m and 3.2 m
Lengths available:
from 0.5 m to 3.19 m
Tap-off points:
Without
With user-configurable
tap-off points
Fire barriers (fire resistance
European standards)
2. Junction unit
With or without fire barrier
user-configurable bracket
Z-unit
U-unit
T-unit
3. Tap-off unit
IP30 and IP54
With fuse switchdisconnector
from 125 A to 630 A
With circuit-breaker
from 100 A to 1,250 A
Leading PEN or PE connector
Switching to load-free state
following defined, forcedoperation sequences
Suspension and fixing
bracket
5. Terminal units for

connection to distribution
board
TTA distribution connection
to the SIVACON system from
the top/bottom
Terminals for external
distribution boards
equipment
End flange
Terminal block
4. Feeding unit
Cable feeding unit
Universal terminal for
transformers
6
4
1
6
Trunking unit
Junction unit
Feeding unit
Tap-off unit
Distribution board connection
Supplementary equipment
Fig. 3.3-21: System components for LDA/LDC system
157

LI system from
800 A 6,300 A
The LI system is used for power
transmission and distribution
in buildings, data centers, and
industrial applications:
High degree of protection of
IP55 as a standard
Hook and bolt connection
with shear-off nut for
optimized connection of the
busbar trunkings
Side-by-side double body
system for compact
construction
Low fire load
with high short-circuit
ratings
Flexibility of tap-off units (up
to 1,250 A); for example
with communication capable
measuring devices
Design verified BTS system
with design verified
connections to SIVACON S8
switchboards
Standard interfaces to
cast-resin LR system of
Siemens for outdoor use
Integration of measuring
devices in a rotatable box
added to tap-off units
possible
Special features of the LIA/LIC
system include high flexibility
and position insensitivity, and
it is particularly suitable for
power distribution in high-rise
buildings and data centers.
The high degree of protection
IP55, which is standard for this
system, and tap-off units up to
1,250 A 2) also guarantee
a safe supply if there is a high
energy demand. It can be used
in industry as well as for other
relevant infrastructure projects
such as hospitals, railroad
stations, airports, sports
venues, etc.
1. Trunking unit
Single and double bodies
with 3 to 6 bars in one
housing, resp. 6 to 12 bars in
two housings
Conductor configurations for
all grid types, with 100 % or
double N, 50 % or 100 % PE
as well as a Clean Earth
solution (insulated PE
conductor for a clean PE,
CPE)
Busbar material:
copper or aluminum
Insulation material:
Mylar
Rated current:
800 up to 6,300 A
For sizes, see table 3.3-9
Degree of protection:
IP55
Selectable lengths: available
from 0.5 m to 3 m on a 1 cm
scale
Layout: horizontal and
vertical without derating
3 tap-off points at 3 m
length:
On one side
On both sides
Fire protection: Fire barriers
according to class EI90 and
EI120 1) (categories of
EN 13501-2) according to
EN 1366-3 are available
2. Junction unit
Various elbow, knee and
offset units are available,
with either standard or
customized dimensions and
angles
3. Modular tap-off units
Degree of protection IP55
With fuse switch-disconnector
from 125 A to 630 A
With circuit-breaker from
50 A to 1,250 A 2)
With measuring device in an
additional rotatable box
6
4
5
3
1
Fig. 3.3-22: System components for LIA/LIC system
158
Transformer feeding unit
Fire barrier
Feeding unit to SIVACON S8
Straight trunking unit
Junction unit
Tap-off unit
Accessories for mounting

Pluggable while energized

up to 1,250 A
Leading PEN or PE conductor
Switching to load-free state
following defined, forcedoperation sequences
Suspension and fixing
bracket
Single body (width 155 mm)

Al
Ie [A]
System
Cu
Height
[mm]
Ie [A]
System
Height
[mm]
800
LIA0800
111
1,000
LIC1000
111
1,000
LIA1000
132
1,250
LIC1250
117
1,250
LIA1250
146
1,600
LIC1600
146
1,600
LIA1600
182
2,000
LIC2000
174
4. Feeding unit
Cable feeding unit
Universal terminal for
transformers
2,000
LIA2000
230
2,500
LIC2500
213
2,500
LIA2500
297
3,200
LIC3200
280
5. Terminal units for

connection to distribution
board
Design verified connection
to the SIVACON S8 system
from the top/bottom
Flanged end
Ie [A]
System
Height
[mm]
Ie [A]
System
Height
[mm]
3,200
LIA3200
182
4,000
LIC4000
174
4,000
LIA4000
230
5,000
LIC5000
213
5,000
LIA5000
297
6,300
LIC6300
280
Double body (width 410 mm)

Al
Cu
Table 3.3-9: Sizes for LIA/LIC system
1) EI120 in preparation
2) Tap-off units from 800 A up to
1,250 A in preparation
159

LR system from
400 A 6,150 A
The LRA/LRC system is used for
power transmission under
extreme ambient conditions
(IP68):
Reliable and safe operation
Fast and easy installation
Cast-resin system up to
6,150 A
Safe connection to
distribution boards and
transformers
High degree of protection
IP68 for outdoor applications
2. Junction unit
offset
Z-unit
T-unit
3. Feeding unit and distributor

units
Universal terminals for
transformers, external
distribution boards and
cable connection
1
2
A special feature of the system

is high resistance to external
influences of chemical and
corrosive substances, and it is
particularly suitable for use
outdoors and in environments
with high air humidity. The
high degree of protection IP68
is guaranteed with the encapsulated epoxy cast-resin
housing and serves to provide
reliable power transmission
when there is a high energy
demand. The system can be
used in industry as well as for
relevant infrastructure projects
such as railroad stations,
airports, office blocks, etc.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
equipment
End flange
Terminal block
Tap-off point every 1 m,
on one side; tap-off unit
on request
Adapters to the LI and LD
systems
LR LI adapter
Cast connection element
Straight busbar trunking unit
Junction unit
Expansion compensation
Feeding unit
Fire barrier
Feeding unit for distribution board connection
Fixing component
Tap-off point with tap-off unit
Cable feeding unit
11
2
3
4
5
1. Trunking unit
4- and 5-conductor system
Busbar material:
copper or aluminum
Degree of protection: IP68
User-configurable lengths:
from 0.30 m to 3.00 m
For sizes see table 3.3-10
Layout: horizontal and
vertical without derating
Fire barriers (fire resistance
European standards)
10
Fig. 3.3-23: System components for LRA/LRC system
160

Al system
Ie [A]
System
Width [mm]
4-conductor
system
5-conductor
system
Height
[mm]
400
LRA01
90
90
90
630
LRA02
90
90
90
800
LRA03
90
90
90
1,000
LRA04
100
120
110
1,200
LRA05
100
120
130
1,400
LRA06
100
120
150
1,600
LRA07
100
120
190
2,000
LRA08
100
120
230
2,500
LRA09
100
120
270
3,200
LRA27
100
120
380
4,000
LRA28
100
120
460
4,600
LRA29
100
120
540
Communication-capable BTS
Communication-capable functional extensions to be combined
with known tap-off units:
For use with the systems BD01, BD2, LD and LI
Applications:
Large-scale lighting control
Remote switching and signaling in industrial environments
Consumption metering of distributed load feeders
Interfacing to KNX / EIB, AS-Interface, PROFINET, PROFIBUS and
Modbus systems
Easy contacting of the bus line with insulation displacement
method
Flexible for extension and modification
Modular system
Retrofitting to existing installations possible.
Cu system
Ie [A]
www.siemens.com/busbar
System
Width [mm]
4-conductor
system
5-conductor
system
Height
[mm]
Planning manual
Busbar trunking system SIVACON 8PS Planning with SIVACON 8PS
German: Order no. A5E 01541017-02
630
LRC01
90
90
90
English: Order no. A5E01541101-02
800
LRC02
90
90
90
Brochures
1,000
LRC03
90
90
90
For safe power flows - SIVACON 8PS busbar trunking systems
1,350
LRC04
100
120
110
1,600
LRC05
100
120
130
1,700
LRC06
100
120
150
An integrated solution for safe and efficient power supply - LI busbar

trunking system
2,000
LRC07
100
120
190
German: Order no. IC1000-G320-A194-V1
English: Order no. IC1000-G320-A194-V1-7600
German: Order no. IC1000-G320-A158-V1
English: Order no. IC1000-G320-A158-V1-7600
2,500
LRC08
100
120
230
3,200
LRC09
100
120
270
4,000
LRC27
100
120
380
The following configurators are available via the Industry Mall

(www.siemens.com/industrymall):
5,000
LRC28
100
120
460
SIVACON 8PS system BD01, 40 160 A
540
SIVACON 8PS system BD2, 160 1,250 A
6,150
LRC29
100
120
Configurators
Table 3.3-10: Sizes for LRA/LRC system
161
162
4.1
High-Voltage Circuit-Breakers
4.1.1 Circuit-Breakers for 72.5 kV up to 800 kV
4.1.2 Live-Tank Circuit-Breakers
for 72.5 kV up to 800 kV
4.1.3 Dead-Tank Circuit-Breakers
4.1.4 The 3AP1 DTC Dead-Tank Compact
a Compact Switchgear up to 245 kV
4.1.5 The DCB Disconnecting Circuit-Breaker
164
164
4.2
High-Voltage Disconnectors
4.2.1 High-Voltage Disconnectors
and Earthing Switches
179
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.3.6
4.3.7
4.3.8
4.3.9
4.3.10
Vacuum Switching Technology and

Components for Medium Voltage
Overview of Vacuum Switching Components
Selection of Components by Ratings
Vacuum Circuit-Breakers
Vacuum Circuit-Breaker
for Generator Switching Application
Outdoor Vacuum Circuit-Breakers
Reclosers
Fusesaver
Vacuum Contactors
Contactor-Fuse Combination
Switch-Disconnectors
4.4
Low-Voltage Devices
4.4.1 Requirements on Low-Voltage Devices
in the Three Circuit Types
4.4.2 Low-Voltage Protection and Switching Devices
4.4.3 Power Management System
for the Low-Voltage Power Distribution
4.4.4 Software for Power System Dimensioning
4.4.5 The Safe Power Supply of Tomorrow
168
172
175
177
179
188
188
189
190
195
196
197
198
200
201
204
206
206
208
210
211
213
4.5
Surge Arresters
4.5.1 High-Voltage Surge Arresters
4.5.2 Low-Voltage and Medium-Voltage
Surge Arresters and Limiters
217
217
4.6
Instrument Transformers
4.6.1 High-Voltage Instrument Transformers
4.6.2 Power Voltage Transformers
223
223
230
4.7
238
Coil Products
219
4.8
Bushings
4.8.1 High-Voltage Bushings
241
241
4.9
245
Medium-Voltage Fuses
Silicone Long Rod Insulators

for Overhead Power Lines
4.10.1 3FL Silicone Long Rod Insulators
Performance Meets Durability
4.10.2 Maximized Service Life
4.10
246
246
247
163
4 Products and Devices

4.1 High-Voltage
Circuit-Breakers
4.1.1 Circuit-Breakers
Circuit-breakers are the central part of AIS and GIS switchgear.

They have to meet high requirements in terms of:
Reliable opening and closing
Consistent quenching performance with rated and shortcircuit currents even after many switching operations
High-performance, reliable, maintenance-free operating
mechanisms.
Siemens patented this method for arc quenching in 1973. Since

that time, Siemens has continued to develop the technology
of the self-compression interrupter unit. One of its technical
innovations is that the arc energy is increasingly used to extinguish the arc. In short-circuit breaking operations, the actuating
energy required is reduced to the energy needed for mechanical
contact movement.
Technology reflecting the latest state of the art and years of

operating experience are put to use in constant further development and optimization of Siemens circuit-breakers. This makes
Siemens circuit-breakers able to meet all the demands placed on
high-voltage switchgear.
That means that the operating energy is truly minimized. The

self-compression interrupter unit allows the use of a compact
stored-energy spring mechanism that provides unrestricted high
dependability.
The comprehensive quality system is certified according to

DIN EN ISO 9001. It covers development, manufacturing, sales,
commissioning and after-sales service. Test laboratories are
accredited to EN 45001 and PEHLA/STL.
The modular design
Circuit-breakers for air-insulated switchgear are individual
components, and are assembled together with all individual
electrical and mechanical components of an AIS installation on
site.
Due to the consistent application of a modular design, all
Siemens circuit-breaker types, whether air-insulated or gas-insulated, are made up of the same range of components based on
our well-proven platform design (fig. 4.1-1):
Interrupter unit
Operating mechanism
Sealing system
Operating rod
Control elements.
Interrupter unit self-compression
arc-quenching principle
The Siemens product range from 72.5 kV up to 800 kV includes
high-voltage circuit-breakers with self-compression interrupter
units for optimum switching performance under every operating condition for every voltage level.
Self-compression circuit-breakers
3AP high-voltage circuit-breakers for the complete voltage range
ensure optimum use of the thermal energy of the arc in the
contact cylinder. This is achieved by the self-compression interrupter unit.
164
Stored-energy spring mechanism

for the complete product range
The operating mechanism is a central part of the high-voltage
circuit-breakers. The drive concept of the 3AP high-voltage
circuit-breakers is based on the stored-energy spring principle.
The use of such an operating mechanism for voltage ranges of
up to 800 kV became appropriate as a result of the development
of a self-compression interrupter unit that requires minimal
actuating energy.
Advantages of the stored-energy spring mechanism are:
Highest degree of operational safety: It is a simple and sturdy
design and uses the same principle for rated voltages from
72.5 kV up to 800 kV with just a few moving parts. Due to the
self-compression design of the interrupter unit, only low
actuating forces are required.
Availability and long service life: Minimal stressing of the latch
mechanisms and rolling-contact bearings in the operating
mechanism ensure reliable and wear-free transmission of
forces.
Maintenance-free design: The spring charging gear is fitted
with wear-free spur gears, enabling load-free decoupling.
Siemens circuit-breakers for rated voltage levels from 72.5 kV up
to 800 kV are equipped with self-compression interrupter units
and stored-energy spring mechanisms.
For special technical requirements such as rated short-circuit
breaking currents of 80 kA, Siemens can offer twin-nozzle
circuit-breaker series 3AQ or 3AT with an electrohydraulic
mechanism.

4.1 High-Voltage Circuit-Breakers
Circuit-breaker for
air-insulated switchgear
Control
elements
Operating
mechanism
Interrupter
unit
Circuit-breaker in
SF6-insulated switchgear
Fig. 4.1-1: Circuit-breaker parts: circuit-breaker for air-insulated switchgear (top), circuit-breaker in SF6-insulated switchgear (bottom)
165

The interrupter unit: self-compression system

The conducting path
The current conducting path of the interrupter unit consists of
the contact support (2), the base (7) and the movable contact
cylinder (6). In the closed position, the current flows via the
main contact (4) and the contact cylinder (6); (fig. 4.1-2).
Breaking operating currents
During the opening operation, the main contact (4) opens first,
and the current commutates to the still closed arcing contact.
During the further course of opening, the arcing contact (5)
opens and an arc is drawn between the contacts. At the same
time, the contact cylinder (6) moves into the base (7) and
compresses the SF6 gas located there. This gas compression
creates a gas flow through the contact cylinder (6) and the
nozzle (3) to the arcing contact, extinguishing the arc.
1
2
3
4
Terminal plate
Contact support
Nozzle
Main contact
5
6
7
8
Closed position
Opening
Main contact open
1
2
3
4
5
Breaking fault currents

In the event of interrupting high short-circuit breaking currents,
the SF6 gas is heated up considerably at the arcing contact due
to the energy of the arc. This leads to a pressure increase in the
contact cylinder. During the further course of opening, this
increased pressure initiates a gas flow through the nozzle (3),
extinguishing the arc. In this case, the arc energy is used to
interrupt the fault current. This energy needs not be provided by
the operating mechanism.
Major features:
Self-compression interrupter unit
Use of the thermal energy of the arc
Minimized energy consumption
High reliability for a long time.
Opening
Arcing contact open
The operating mechanism

Siemens circuit-breakers for voltages up to 800 kV are equipped
with stored-energy spring mechanisms. These operating mechanisms are based on the same principle that has been proving its
worth in Siemens low-voltage and medium-voltage circuitbreakers for decades. The design is simple and robust, with few
moving parts and a vibration-isolated latch system of the highest
reliability. All components of the operating mechanism, the
control and monitoring equipment and all terminal blocks are
arranged in a compact and convenient way in one cabinet.
Depending on the design of the operating mechanism, the
energy required for switching is provided by individual compression springs (i.e., one per pole) or by springs that function
jointly on a 3-pole basis.
Fig. 4.1-2: The interrupter unit
166
Arcing contact
Contact cylinder
Base
Terminal plate
Open position

1 Trip coil CLOSE

1
2 Cam plate
8
3 Corner gear
4 Connecting rod
2
9
5 Connecting rod for closing spring

6 Connecting rod for opening spring
4
5
10
7 Closing spring
11
8 Emergency hand crank
12
13
9 Charging gear
10 Charging shaft
11 Roller lever
14
12 Damper (for closing)

13 Operating shaft
14 Damper (for opening)
15
15 Trip coil OPEN

16 Operating mechanism housing
16
17 Opening spring
7
17
Fig. 4.1-3: Operating mechanism
The principle of the operating mechanism with charging gear

and latching is identical on all types (fig. 4.1-3, fig. 4.1-4).
Differences between mechanism types are in the number, size
and arrangement of the opening and closing springs.
Main features at a glance:
Uncomplicated, robust construction with few moving parts
Maintenance-free
Vibration-isolated latches
Load-free uncoupling of charging mechanism
Easy access
10,000 operating cycles.
The control unit includes all necessary devices for circuit-breaker
control and monitoring, such as:
Pressure / SF6 density monitors
Relays for alarms and lockout
Operation counters (upon request)
Local circuit-breaker control (upon request)
Anti-condensation heaters.
Fig. 4.1-4: Control cubicle
167

4.1.2 Live-Tank Circuit-Breakers

Live-tank circuit-breakers for air-insulated switchgear
The interrupter unit in live-tank circuit-breakers is not earthed
during operation; it is exposed to high-voltage potential and
therefore these circuit-breakers are called live tanks.
The live-tank circuit-breaker family is available for rated voltages
from 72.5 kV up to 800 kV (fig. 4.1-5).
They consist of the following main components based on our
well established platform concept (fig. 4.1-6, 4.1-7, 4.1-8):
Self-compression interrupter unit
Insulator column (AIS)
Operating rod
Circuit-breaker base
Control unit
3AP1 circuit-breakers up to 300 kV are equipped with one interrupter unit per pole, and 3AP2 circuit-breakers up to 550 kV
include two interrupter units. For applications from 362 kV to
550 kV, the circuit-breakers can be equipped with optional
closing resistors (3AP3). The 3AP4 includes 4 interrupter units
per pole and can also be delivered with closing resistors on
request (3AP5).
Moreover, our high-voltage live-tank circuit-breakers are available for three-pole operation with a common base (FG) (fig.
4.1-9), for single-pole operation also with a common base (FE)
or for single-pole operation with separate bases (FI).
Siemens high-voltage circuit-breakers operate safely, and are
capable of withstanding high mechanical loads. Particularly
strong porcelain insulators and a circuit-breaker design optimized by using the latest mathematical techniques give them
very high seismic stability whilst in operation, enabling them to
perform to their full potential during the entire service life of up
to 50 years (table 4.1-1).
The uncomplicated design of the circuit-breakers and the use of
many similar components ensure high reliability. The experience
Siemens has gained from the use of the many circuit-breakers in
service has been applied in improvement of the design. The
self-compression interrupter unit, for example, has proven its
reliability in more than 100,000 installations all over the world.
168
Fig. 4.1-5: 3AP4 FI 800 kV pole

21
22.38
22
16
15.11
22 22.1
21
22.22
22.39
15.16.3
Base
Control cubicle
Operating mechanism
housing
16
Post insulator
21
Bell-crank mechanism
22
Interrupter unit
22.38 Corona ring of the
double-break assembly
22.39 Corona ring of the
pole column
16
11
12
15.1
16
11
15.1
12
Fig. 4.1-6: 3AP2 FI 550 kV pole
16.9
16
15.9
15
15.8.3
15
15.11
15.16.3
15.8.3
15.9
16
16.9
21
22
22.1
22.22
Corner gear
Filter cowl
Filter bag
Shaft
Lever
Post insulator
Operating rod
Bell-crank mechanism
Interrupter unit
Jacket
High-voltage terminal
Fig. 4.1-7: Sectional view of pole column
4,5
1 Interrupter unit
2 Post insulator
3 Circuit-breaker base
4 Control cubicle
5 Operating mechanism housing
6 Pillar
Fig. 4.1-8: 3AP1 FG 145 kV with 3-pole stored-energy spring

mechanism
Fig. 4.1-9: 3AP1 FG 145 kV
169

Type
Rated voltage
3AP1
[kV]
72.5
123
145
170
Number of interrupter units per pole

[kV]
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage/min

Rated switching impulse withstand voltage
Rated short-time withstand current

(1 s 3 s), up to
460
610
800
830
[kV]
325
550
650
750
1,050
1,050
1,425
1,550
2,100
[kV]
850
1,050
1,175
1,425
[A]
2,500
4,000
4,000
4,000
4,000
4,000
5,000
5,000
5,000
31.5
40
40
40
50
40
63
63
63
31.5
40
40
40
50
40
63
63
63
[kA(ms)]
55 up to + 55
0-0.3 s-CO-3 min-CO or CO-15 s-CO
Rated break time
3 cycles
[Hz]
Maintenance after
2 cycles
50/60
25 years
Type
3AV1
[kV]
72.5
1
[A]
2,500
Rated short-time withstand current, up to
[kA]
31.5
Rated short-circuit breaking current, up to
[kA]
31.5
Rated frequency
[Hz]
50
Rated power-frequency withstand voltage
[kV]
140
[kV]
325
Rated peak withstand current (2.7 p.u.)
[s]
[kA]
85
First-pole-to-clear-factor
[p.u.]
1.5/1.3
Capacitive voltage factor
[p.u.]
1.4
Temperature range
460
Rated operating sequence
[C]
30 up to + 55
Maintenance after
25 years
Insulating medium
N2
All values in accordance with IEC; other values on request
Table 4.1-1: Technical data of live-tank circuit-breaker portfolio
170
800
325
[C]
Rated duration of short circuit
550
275
Temperature range
Rated normal current, up to
420
230
[kA]
Rated voltage
300
3AP4/5
140
Rated short-circuit breaking current, up to
Rated frequency
245

withstand voltage
Rated normal current, up to
3AP2/3

Efficiency
Maintenance-free for
25 years
Service-free even with
frequent breaking
operations
Performance
2 cycle current interruption
High number of shortcircuit interruptions
Sustainability
Vacuum interruption
Nitrogen insulation
Beneficial CO2 footprint
Reliability
40 years of experience in
vacuum switching
technology
Perfect for low temperature
applications
Fig. 4.1-10: 3AV1 FG vacuum circuit-breaker 72.5 kV
Live-tank circuit-breakers with vacuum technology

Based on 40 years of experience producing medium-voltage
vacuum interrupters and more than 3 million delivered units,
Siemens has now introduced this proven technology to highvoltage power networks.
The new member of our circuit-breaker family meets the same
high quality standards as our SF6 portfolio regarding high performance and reliability throughout its long service life, and is also
designed according to our well proven modular platform concept.
The new 3AV1 vacuum circuit-breaker has concrete technical
advantages: It features reliable switching capacity, requires no
maintenance even when subjected to frequent breaking operations, and is also environmentally friendly thanks to switching
operations performed in a vacuum, with nitrogen as the insulating medium.
These circuit-breakers will be the right choice for future projects

and a wide range of applications.
A complete set of type tests in accordance with the latest
edition of IEC 62271-100 has proven the suitability of the
72.5 kV live-tank vacuum circuit-breaker.
Field experience
Prototypes of the new Siemens high-voltage vacuum circuitbreakers have already been installed in European power networks. A number of Energy customers are operating the 3AV1
prototypes in their systems and are sharing operating and field
experience with us. In fact, several thousand switching operations have already been performed successfully in the field, and
documented (fig. 4.1-10).
171

4.1.3 Dead-Tank Circuit-Breakers

Circuit-breakers in dead-tank design
In contrast to live-tank circuit-breakers, dead tanks have a
metal-enclosed interrupter unit, and the housing is always
earthed. Therefore they are called dead-tank circuit-breakers.
For certain substation designs, dead-tank circuit-breakers might
be required instead of the standard live-tank circuit-breakers.
The dead-tank circuit-breaker offers particular advantages if the
protection design requires the use of several current transformers per pole assembly. For this purpose, Siemens can offer
dead-tank circuit-breaker types suitable for different voltage
levels (fig. 4.1-11, 4.1-12, 4.1-13).
Most important characteristics of a dead-tank circuit-breaker:

Toroidal-core current transformers on bushings which give it a
compact construction
High short-circuit breaking currents possible (up to 63 kA with
one interrupter unit)
No creepage path across interrupter unit
Low impulse load of the bases
Low center of gravity of the bases which give it a higher
seismic withstand capability
Gas mixture or heating system for lowest temperature
applications
Gas-insulated components ensure highest availability with
minimum maintenance effort
Metal-enclosed interrupter unit (earthed housing)
Current transformers (CT)
The dead-tank circuit-breakers can be equipped with bushing
current transformers for measurement or protection purposes,
fulfilling the requirements according to international standards
such as IEC, ANSI, etc. The current transformers are mounted in
weatherproof housings on both sides of each circuit-breaker
pole and are located at the base of the bushings. The current
transformer leads terminate in the control cubicle at shortcircuiting type terminal blocks. Our standard housing provides
space for up to three current transformers per bushing.
Fig. 4.1-11: SPS2/3AP1 DT 72.5 kV
Fig. 4.1-12: SPS2/3AP1 DT 145 kV
The 3AP DT high-voltage circuit-breaker operates safely and is

capable of bearing high loads. Extra-strong porcelain bushings
and an optimized circuit-breaker design give it a very high
seismic stability while in operation. The circuit-breaker covers
the whole temperature range from -60 C up to 55 C with pure
SF6, which makes it applicable for all climate zones.
Like the other circuit-breakers, our dead tanks are based on
our proven modular design using a patented self-compression
arc-quenching system and the stored-energy spring drive
mechanism. They assure consistent quenching performance
with rated and short-circuit currents even after many
switching operations.
Fig. 4.1-13: SPS2/3AP1 DT 362 kV (two-cycles)
172

Dead-tank circuit-breaker
Type SPS2 and 3AP DT
The type SPS2 power circuit-breakers are used for the US and
ANSI markets, and the 3AP DT circuit-breaker types are offered
in IEC markets. Both types are designed as general, definite-purpose circuit-breakers for use at maximum rated voltages of
72.5 kV up to 550 kV (table 4.1-2). In 2012, two new DT circuitbreakers with 2-cycles interruption for 245 kV and 362 kV have
complemented our DT portfolio and have been established on
the market with great success (fig. 4.1-13).
The design
Dead-tank circuit-breakers (except for the 550 kV version)
consist of three identical pole units mounted on a common
support frame. The opening and closing spring of the FA-type
operating mechanism is transferred to the moving contacts of
the interrupter unit through a system of connecting rods and
a rotating seal at the side of each phase.
The proven Siemens arc-quenching system ensures faultless

operation, consistently high arc-quenching capacity and a long
service life, even at high switching frequencies.
Thanks to constant further development, optimization and
consistent quality assurance, Siemens self-compression arcquenching systems meet all the requirements placed on modern
high-voltage technology.
A control cubicle mounted at one end of the circuit-breaker
houses the spring operating mechanism and circuit-breaker
control components. The interrupter units are located in the
aluminum housing of each pole unit. The interrupters use the
latest Siemens self-compression arc-quenching system.
The stored-energy spring mechanism is the same design as used
within the Siemens 3AP live-tank circuit-breakers, GIS and
compact switchgear. This design has been documented in
service for more than 10 years, and has a well-documented
reliability record.
The connection to the overhead lines and busbars is realized by

SF6-insulated air bushings. The insulators are available in either
porcelain or composite (epoxy-impregnated fiberglass tube with
silicone rubber sheds) materials.
The tanks and the bushings are charged with SF6 as at a rated
pressure of 6.0 bar. The SF6 is used for insulation and arcquenching purposes.
Operators can specify up to four (in some cases, up to six)

bushing-type current transformers (CT) per phase. These CTs,
mounted externally on the aluminum housings, can be removed
without dismantling the bushings.
Operating mechanism
The mechanically and electrically trip-free spring mechanism
type FA is used on type SPS2 and 3AP1/2 DT circuit-breakers. The
closing and opening springs are loaded for O-C-O operations.
The 3AP2/3 DT for 550 kV (fig. 4.1-14, fig. 4.1-15) consists of

two interrupter units in a series that features a simple design.
Technical data
Type
3AP1 DT / SPS2
3AP2/3 DT / SPS2
Rated voltage
[kV]
72.5
123
145
245
362
550
[kV]
140 / 160
230 / 260
275 / 310
460
520
800 / 860
Rated lighting impulse withstand voltage
[kV]
325 / 350
550
650
1,050
1,380
1,865 / 1,800
1,095
1,350
Rated nominal current up to
Rated switching impulse withstand voltage [kV]

[A]
4,000
4,000
4,000
4,000
4,000
4,000 / 5,000
Rated breaking current up to
[kA]
40
40
63
63
63
63
Operating mechanism type
Table 4.1-2: Technical data of dead-tank circuit-breaker
173

22.22
24
28
22.1
22.1.20
22.1.50
27
22.27
22.1.10
22
26
15
23
16.9
22.1.21
15
16.9
22
22.1
22.1.10
22.1.10.1
22.1.20
22.1.21
22.1.50
22.22
22.27
23
24
26
27
28
Fig. 4.1-14: Sectional view of a 3AP2/3-DT circuit-breaker pole
A weatherproofed control cubicle (degree of protection IP55)

has a large door, sealed with rubber gaskets, for easy access
during inspection and maintenance. Condensation is prevented
by heaters that maintain a difference in inside/outside temperature, and by ventilation.
The control system includes all the secondary technical components required for operating the circuit-breaker, which are
typically installed in the control cubicle. The current transformer
connections are also located in the control cubicle.
The control, tripping, motor and heating power supplies are
selectable in a great extent. Depending on customer requirements, two standard control versions are available.
Basic version
The basic variant includes all control and monitoring elements
that are needed for operation of the circuit-breaker. In addition
to the elementary actuation functions, it includes:
19 auxiliary switch contacts (9 normally open, 9 normally
closed, 1 passing contact)
Operations counter
Local actuator.
Compact version
In addition to the basic version, this type includes:
Spring monitoring by motor runtime monitoring
Heating monitoring (current measuring relay)
Luminaire and socket attachment with a common circuitbreaker to facilitate servicing and maintenance work
Overvoltage attenuation
Circuit-breaker motor
Circuit-breaker heating.
174
Fig. 4.1-15: 3AP2 DT 550 kV
Corner g ear
Operating r od
Interrupter u nit
Housing
Cover
Cover
Cover with bursting disc
Cover with filter material
Additional heating
High-voltage t erminal
Conductor c onnection
Grading ca pacitor
Bushing co nductor
Closing r esistor
Current tr ansformer
Bushing

4.1 High-Voltage Circuit Breakers
4.1.4 The 3AP1 DTC Dead-Tank

Compact a Compact Switchgear
up to 245 kV
The hybrid concept
The hybrid concept combines SF6-encapsulated components and
air-insulated devices. The application of gas-insulated components increases availability of switchgear. According to CIGRE
analyses, gas-insulated components are four times more reliable
than air-insulated components. The level of encapsulation can
be defined in accordance with the requirements of the individual
substation layout and the system operators project budget. This
leads to optimized investments and can be combined with
further air-insulated devices.
The modular design
Based on the well-proven modular design, the core components
of the main units are based on the same technology that is used
in the well-established high-voltage circuit-breakers, disconnectors and GIS product family of Siemens.
These components are (fig. 4.1-16):
Self-compression arc-quenching interrupter unit
of the AIS 3AP circuit-breaker
SF6-insulated disconnector/earthing switch
from the GIS type 8DN8
Outdoor earthing switch from the disconnector
product range.
This allows for providing flexible solutions according to different
substation configurations (fig. 4.1-17, fig. 4.1-18, fig. 4.1-20):
Circuit-breaker with single-pole or three-pole operating
mechanism
Disconnector, earthing switch, high-speed earthing switch
Current transformer, voltage transformer and voltage
detecting system
Cable connections possible at various positions
Bushings available as porcelain or composite insulators
Additional separations of gas compartment, with SF6 density
monitor on request
Double breaker modules for ultra compact substation designs
Possibility of combination with stand-alone components, e.g.
disconnector module with voltage transformer.
1. Bushing
2. Current transformer
3. Circuit-breaker with self-compression principle
4. Three-position disconnector and earthing switch
5. Voltage transformer
6. Cable connection assembly
7. High-speed earthing switch
Fig. 4.1-16: Possible components for the 3AP1 DTC
Fig. 4.1-17: 3AP1 DTC 145 kV
Fig. 4.1-18: 3AP1 DTC 245 kV
175

Highlights and characteristics
Simple SF6 filling and monitoring, one gas compartment
possible (separation optional)
Flexibility in confined spaces and extreme environmental
conditions, e.g. low temperature applications down to 55 C
Single-pole encapsulation: no 3-phase fault possible and fast
replacement of one pole (spare part: one pole)
Safety can be enhanced by separated gas compartments, e.g.
between circuit-breaker and disconnector.
Complete module can be moved with a fork-lift truck
Fast installation and commissioning: easy assembly of fully
manufactured and tested modular units
Less maintenance effort: first major inspection after 25 years
Service life minimum 50 years
Single-pole and three-pole operated drive system for 145 kV
and 245 kV (fig. 4.1-19).
Standard
The international IEC 62271-205 standard treats compact
switchgear assemblies for rated voltages above 52 kV. The used
terminology for the hybrid concept is the so-called mixed technology switchgear (MTS).
Rated short circuit-breaking current (kA)
DTC 245 kV
63
50
DTC 145 kV
40
31.5
72.5
123
145
170
245
300
362
Rated voltage (kV)
Fig. 4.1-19: DTC product range, 1-pole or 3-pole operation
Our compact switchgear is fully type-tested in accordance with

this standard (table 4.1-3).
We have one of the most modern testing laboratories available which are certified and part of the European network of
independent testing organizations (PEHLA). Also other international testing laboratories (KEMA, CESI) certify our circuitbreakers high quality standards.
Accessories for 3AP1 DTC
To enhance possibility of circuit-breaker monitoring, the Siemens
voltage detecting system (VDS) or SIVIS camera systems can be
used.
The VDS is an economic alternative to a voltage transformer if
there is no requirement for voltage values to be measured. Up to
three VDS systems can be integrated in the outgoing units to
monitor the voltage. The system is attached directly to the
disconnector and earthing switch component of the DTC, and
enables the voltage condition of the compact switchgear to be
checked.
SIVIS camera systems for the 3AP1 DTC make it possible to
quickly and easily check the disconnecting earthing switch
module positions. The systems are a complementary solution for
preexisting position indicators on earthing switch operating
mechanisms. With these camera systems, we have made it easy
for your maintenance and service personnel to monitor the
disconnector, earthing switch, and high-speed rating positions
during maintenance, which further improves the safety standards of your switchgear. According to your individual requirements you have the choice between a stationary and a mobile
camera system.
Fig. 4.1-20: 3AP1 DTC 145 kV with voltage transformer and

cable connection
High-voltage compact switchgear

Rated voltage
Rated normal current
3AP1 DTC
[kV]
145
245
[A]
3,150
4,000
Rated frequency
[Hz]
50/60
50/60

withstand voltage
[kV]
650
1050
withstand voltage
[kV]
275
460
Rated short-time
withstand current (3 s)
[kA]
40
63
[kA]
108
170
Table 4.1-3: Technical data of 3AP1 DTC
176

4.1.5 The DCB Disconnecting

Circuit-Breaker
ONE device TWO functions
In switchgear, isolating distances in air combined with circuitbreakers are used to protect the circuit state in the grid.
Siemens developed a combined device in which the isolating
distance has been integrated in the SF6 gas compartment on
the basis of an SF6-insulated circuit-breaker in order to reduce
environmental influence. The combined device (DCB Disconnecting Circuit-Breaker) is used as a circuit-breaker and additionally as a disconnector two functions combined in one device
(fig. 4.1-21, fig. 4.1-23).
The DCB was developed on the basis of a higher-rated standard

3AP circuit-breaker to provide the higher dielectric properties
required and type-tested in accordance with IEC 62271-108 for
disconnecting circuit-breakers. Due to the SF6-insulated disconnector function there is no visible opening distance anymore.
The proper function of the kinematic chain has been most
thoroughly verified. The closest attention was paid to developing
a mechanical interlock which guarantees that the circuit-breaker
remains in open position when used as a disconnector. When
this mechanical interlock is activated, it is impossible to close the
breaker (fig. 4.1-22). The current status of the DCB can also be
controlled electrically and is shown by well visible position
indicators.
In addition, an air-insulated earthing switch could be mounted
onto the supporting structure. Its earthing function was implemented by a well-established earthing switch with a Ruhrtal
designed maintenance-free contact system.
Fig. 4.1-21: 3AP1 DCB 145 kV
The disconnecting circuit-breakers are type tested according to

class M2 and C2 of IEC 62271-108, a specific standard for combined switching devices (table 4.1-4).
Fig. 4.1-22: 3AP2 DCB interlock indicator
177

Rated voltage
[kV]
3AP2 DCB
145
420
[kV]
275/315
520/610
[kV]
650/750
1,425/1,665
[kV]
n.a.
1,050/1,245
Rated normal current up to
[A]
3,150
4,000
[kArms]
40 (31.5)
40
[C]
-40 +40
-40 +40
SF6
SF6
M2, C2
M2, C2
Ambient air temperature
1)
Insulating medium
Classification CB
Classification DS
3AP1 DCB
Insulators
Attached earthing switch (optional)
1)
2)
M2
M2
composite 2)
composite
yes
no
Other ambient temperature values on request

Or porcelain
Table 4.1-4: Technical data of 3AP DCB
Combining the strengths of our well proven product portfolio,

we can provide a new type of device which fulfills the system
operators needs for highest reliability and safety, while saving
space and costs at the same time.
Highlights and characteristics
Maximum reliability by applying well-proven and established
components from Siemens circuit-breakers and Ruhrtal
designed earthing switches
Maximum availability due to longer maintenance intervals
Economical, space-saving solution by combining the circuitbreaker and the disconnector in one device
Minimized costs for transportation, maintenance, installation
and commissioning as well as civil works (foundation, steel,
cable ducts, etc.)
Compact and intelligent interlocking and position indicating
device
Optionally available without earthing switch
Porcelain or composite insulators obtainable.
Fig. 4.1-23: 3AP2 DCB 420 kV

Email: [email protected]
or
[email protected]
178

4.2 High-Voltage
Disconnectors
4.2.1 High-Voltage Disconnectors
and Earthing Switches
General
Disconnectors are an essential part of electrical power substations. They indicate a visible isolating distance in air isolated gap.
Modern production technologies and investments in our production sites worldwide ensure sustained product and process
quality in accordance with the high standards of Siemens.
Siemens disconnectors fulfil the system operators requirements
for low life-cycle costs with maximum availability and continuous economic service by:
Delivery of completely routine-tested and pre-adjusted
assembly groups
Easy erection and commissioning
Maintenance-free bearings and contact systems
Lifetime technical support
The contact systems have proved their reliability through
decades of service.
The most important features are:
Self-resilient contact fingers no further spring elements are
necessary to generate the contact force
Silver-plated contact surface provides maximum conductivity
without regular greasing lubrication
Factory set contact forces; no re-adjustments required during
service life
Ice layers up to 20 mm can be broken without difficulties
Maintenance-free contact system for up to 25 years.
Fig. 4.2-1: Center-break disconnector
The reliability of Siemens disconnectors and earthing switches

over many decades is ensured by a comprehensive testing and
quality assurance system certified according to DIN EN ISO 9001.
Center-break disconnectors
The center-break disconnector is the most frequently used disconnector type. The disconnector base supports the operating mechanism and two rotating porcelain support insulators. The current
path arms which are fixed to the insulators open in the center.
Each rotating unit comprises two high-quality ball bearings and is
designed for high mechanical loads. They are lubricated and
maintenance-free for the entire service life (fig. 4.2-1).
The current path of the center-break disconnector consists of
only a few components, thus the number of contact resistances
is reduced to a minimum. The main contact system of block
contact and spread contact fingers assures a steady contact
force even after decades of operation (fig. 4.2-2).
Fig. 4.2-2: Block and finger contact system
179

4.2 High-Voltage Disconnectors
Pantograph disconnectors
This type has a vertical isolating distance and is generally used
in busbar systems to connect two busbars, a busbar to a line or a
busbar to a power transformer.
The main components of a pantograph disconnector are shown
in (fig. 4.2-3).
The geometry of the pantograph ensures optimum operational
behavior. Rotary contact systems inside the joints, which have
thermal and dynamic current-carrying capacity, are used for
current transfer.
Ice loads of up to 20 mm can be broken without difficulties. The
specific contact force is adjusted at the factory and remains
unchanged during service life.
The rigidity of the scissor arms prevents opening during a short

circuit. The switch position cannot be changed by external forces.
In both end positions of the disconnector, the rotary arm in the
bearing frame is switched beyond the dead center point.
Pantograph disconnectors with rated voltages from 123 kV up
to 362 kV are optionally equipped with group operating mechanisms or 1-pole operating mechanisms. All pantograph disconnectors for higher rated voltages are equipped with 1-pole
operating mechanisms.
Vertical-break disconnectors
This type is for small phase distances. The current path of
the vertical-break disconnector opens vertically and requires
a minimum phase distance (fig. 4.2-4).
The current path performs two movements:
A vertical swinging movement
A rotary movement around its own longitudinal axis.
The rotary movement generates the contact force and breaks
possible ice layers.
In both end positions, the rotary arm is switched beyond the
dead center point. This locks the current path in the shortcircuit-proof CLOSED position, and prevents the current path
from switching to the OPEN position under external forces.
1. Scissor arms
2. Bearing frame
3. Support insulator
4. Rotating insulator
5. Motor operating mechanism
Fig. 4.2-3: Components of the pantograph
disconnector
The ample distance between support insulator and rotating

insulator ensures dielectric strength of the parallel insulation
even under saline fog conditions.
The installation and commissioning on site is easy and quick
since the movable part of the current path is one single subassembly which is pre-adjusted and routine tested at the factory.
Fig. 4.2-4: Vertical-break disconnector
180

Double-side break disconnectors

The double-side break disconnector features three support
insulators. The support insulator in the center is mounted
on a rotating unit and carries the current path. Both end support
insulators are fixed.
The main application of double-side break disconnectors are
substations with limited phase distances and where vertical
opening of the current path is not possible. High mechanical
terminal loads are possible due to the compact and
stable design. It can also be combined with an integrated surge
arrester (fig. 4.2-5).
For voltage levels up to 245 kV, the contact fingers of the
double-side break disconnectors are integrated into the current
path tube, and the fixed contacts consist of contact blocks. The
current path performs a horizontal swinging movement, and the
contact force is generated by spreading the contact fingers while
sliding on the contact blocks.
For voltage levels higher than 245 kV, contact strips are attached
to the ends of the current path tubes. The contact fingers are
part of the fixed contacts. In this design, the current path performs a combined swinging and rotary movement. After completion of the swinging movement, the contact force is generated
by the rotation of the current path around its own axis.
Knee-type disconnectors
This disconnector type has the smallest horizontal and vertical
space requirements. The knee-type disconnector has two fixed
and one rotating insulator. Thanks to its folding-arm design, only
limited overhead clearance is required, which results in lower
investment costs (fig. 4.2-6).
Fig. 4.2-5: Double-side break disconnector with integrated

surge arrester
The very compact design has advantages for indoor applications

and mounting on wall or ceiling. This type is also available up to
800kV.
Fig. 4.2-6: Knee-type disconnector
181

Earthing switches
The use of earthing switches (fig. 4.2-7) ensures absolute
de-energization of high-voltage components in a circuit or
switchgear.
Free-standing earthing switches are available for all voltage
levels up to 800 kV.
Suitable built-on earthing switches are available for all disconnector types of the Siemens scope of supply.
According to the system operators requirements, built-on
earthing switches can be arranged laterally or in integrated
arrangement with respect to the position of the main current
path of the disconnector when needed.
Optionally, all earthing switches can be designed for switching

induced inductive and capacitive currents according to
IEC 62271-102, Class A or Class B.
3DV8 and MA6/7 motor operating mechanisms
The 3DV8 type is the standard design and the MA6/7 types can
be provided optionally with the additional advantages given
below:
Motor operating mechanism is mechanically decoupled in the
end positions to prevent damages of the disconnector in case
of operating errors
Aluminum casting housing very robust.
for safety purposes. Heaters are provided to prevent condensation (fig. 4.2-8).
The motor operating mechanism can also be operated manually

by a hand crank which can be inserted in the cubicle. The insertion of the hand crank automatically isolates the motor circuit
The auxiliary switch is custom-fit to the gear unit and signals the
switch position with absolute reliability. This ensures safe substation operation.
Fig. 4.2-7: Free-standing earthing switch
3DV8
Steel, spray-zinc and painted (3DV8) / Cast-aluminum housing (MA6/7)

with door (1) degree of protection IP55; gear unit (2) with motor;
electrical equipment with auxiliary switch (3)
Fig. 4.2-8: Motor operating mechanism
182
MA6/7

Technical data
Center break
Design
Rated voltage
72.5
123
145
170
245
300
362
420
550
230
265
275
315
325
375
460
530
380
435
450
520
520
610
620
800
550
630
650
750
750
860
1,050
1,200
1,050
1,050
(+170)
1,175
1,175
(+205)
1,425
1,425
(+240)
1,550
1,550 (+315)
850
700 (+245)
950
800 (+295)
1,050
900 (+345)
1,175
900 (+450)
Rated power-frequency withstand voltage 50 Hz/1 min

To earth and between phases
Across the isolating distance
[kV]
[kV]
140
160
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50 s

[kV]
[kV]
325
375
Rated switching impulse withstand voltage 250/2,500 s

[kV]
[kV]
[A]
4,000
[kA]
160
Rated short-time withstand current up to [kA]
63
1/3
Rated peak withstand current up to
[s]
Icing class
10/20
Temperature range
[C]
60/+50
Motor operation/Manual operation
Control voltage
[V, DC]
[V, AC]
60/110/125/220
220230, 1~, 50/60 Hz
Motor voltage
[V, DC]
[V, AC]
60/110/125/220
110/125/220, 1~, 50/60 Hz
220/380/415, 3~, 50/60 Hz
Maintenance
25 years
Table 4.2-1: Center-break disconnector
After the motor starts, the auxiliary switch moves and the switch
position signal is cancelled. The disconnector operates thereafter until the end position is reached. The auxiliary switch then
moves again and issues the switch position signal.
This sequence ensures that the CLOSED position is indicated only
after the disconnector is locked and short-circuit-proof, and the
rated current can be carried. The OPEN position is indicated only

after the opened current path has reached the nominal dielectric
strength.
An overview of Siemens disconnectors is shown in table 4.2-1 to
table 4.2-5.
183

Technical data
Pantograph
Design
Rated voltage
123
145
170
245
300
362
420
550
275
315
325
375
460
530
380
435
450
520
520
610
620
800
650
750
750
860
1,050
1,200
1,050
1,050 (+170)
1,175
1,175 (+205)
1,425
1,425 (+240)
1,550
1,550 (+315)
850
700 (+245)
950
800 (+295)
1,050
900 (+345)
1,175
900 (+450)

[kV]
[kV]
230
265

[kV]
[kV]
550
630

[kV]
[kV]
[A]
5,000
[kA]
200
80
1/3
[s]
Icing class
Temperature range
10/20
[C]
Control voltage
[V, DC]
[V, AC]
60/110/125/220
220230, 1~, 50/60 Hz
Motor voltage
[V, DC]
[V, AC]
60/110/125/220
110/125/220, 1~, 50/60 Hz
220/380/415, 3~, 50/60 Hz
Maintenance
Table 4.2-2: Pantograph disconnector
184
60/+50
25 years

Technical data
Vertical break
Design
Rated voltage
123
145
170
245
300
362
420
550
275
315
325
375
460
530
380
435
450
520
520
610
620
800
650
750
750
860
1,050
1,200
1,050
1,050 (+170)
1,175
1,175 (+205)
1,425
1,425 (+240)
1,550
1,550 (+315)
850
700 (+245)
950
800 (+295)
1,050
900 (+345)
1175
900 (+450)

[kV]
[kV]
230
265

[kV]
[kV]
550
630

[kV]
[kV]
[A]
4,000
[kA]
160
160
1/3
[s]
Icing class
10/20
Temperature range
[C]
60/+50
Control voltage
[V, DC]
[V, AC]
60/110/125/220
220230, 1~, 50/60 Hz
Motor voltage
[V, DC]
[V, AC]
60/110/125/220
110/125/230, 1~, 50/60 Hz
220/380/415, 3~, 50/60 Hz
Maintenance
25 years
Table 4.2-3: Vertical-break disconnector
185

Technical data
Knee-type
Design
Rated voltage
123
550
[kV]
[kV]
230
265
620
800
[kV]
[kV]
550
630
1,550
1,550 (+315)
[kV]
[kV]
1,175
900 (+450)

[A]
[kA]
100
160
Rated short-time withstand current up to
[kA]
40
63
[s]
Icing class
1/3
10/20
Temperature range
[C]
60/+50
Control voltage
[V, DC]
[V, AC]
60/110/125/220
220230, 1~, 50/60 Hz
Motor voltage
[V, DC]
[V, AC]
60/110/125/220
110/125/230, 1~, 50/60 Hz
220/380/415, 3~, 50/60 Hz
Maintenance
Table 4.2-4: Knee-type disconnector
186
4,000
25 years

Technical data
Double-side break
Design
Rated voltage
123
145
170
245
300
420
550
800
275
315
325
375
460
530
380
435
520
610
450
520
830
1,150
650
750
750
860
1,050
120
1,050
1,050
(+170)
1,425
1,425
(+240)
1,550
1,550
(+315)
2,100
2,100 (+455)
850
700 (+245)
1,050
900 (+345)
1,175
900 (+450)
1,550
1200 (+650)

[kV]
[kV]
230
265

[kV]
[kV]
550
630

[kV]
[kV]
[A]
4000
[kA]
160
63
1/3
[s]
Icing class
Temperature range
10/20
[C]
60/+50
Control voltage
[V, DC]
[V, AC]
60/110/125/220
220230, 1~, 50/60 Hz
Motor voltage
[V, DC]
[V, AC]
60/110/125/220
110/125/230, 1~, 50/60 Hz
220/380/415, 3~, 50/60 Hz
Maintenance
25 years
Table 4.2-5: Double-side break disconnector

Fax: + 49 30 3 86-2 58 67
187

4.3 Vacuum Switching Technology and
Components for Medium Voltage
4.3.1 Overview of Vacuum Switching
Components
Medium-voltage equipment is available in power stations
(in generators and station supply systems) and in transformer
substations (of public systems or large industrial plants) of the
primary distribution level. Transformer substations receive power
from the high-voltage system and transform it down to the
medium-voltage level. Medium-voltage equipment is also available in secondary transformer or transfer substations (secondary
distribution level), where the power is transformed down from
medium to low voltage and distributed to the end consumer.
The product line of the medium-voltage switching devices

contains (fig. 4.3-1):
Circuit-breakers
Switches
Contactors
Disconnectors
Switch-disconnectors
Earthing switches
Circuit-breakers
Circuit-breakers must make and break all
currents within the scope of their ratings,
from small inductive and capacitive load
currents up to the short-circuit current,
and this must occur under all fault
conditions in the power supply system,
including earth faults and phase
opposition. Outdoor circuit-breakers have
the same applications, but are also
exposed to weather influences.
Switches
Switches must make and break normal
currents up to their rated normal current,
and be able to make on existing short
circuits (up to their rated short-circuit
making current). However, they cannot
break any short-circuit currents.
Fig. 4.3-1: Product line of medium-voltage switching devices
188
Requirements
In CLOSED condition, the switching device has to offer minimum
resistance to the flow of normal and short-circuit currents.
In OPEN condition, the open contact gap must withstand the
appearing voltages safely. All live parts must be sufficiently
isolated to earth and between phases when the switching device
is open or closed.
The switching device must be able to close the circuit if voltage
is applied. For disconnectors, however, this condition is only
requested for the de-energized state, except for small load
currents.
The switching device should be able to open the circuit while
current is flowing. This is not requested for disconnectors.
The switching device should produce switching overvoltages
as low as possible.
Contactors
Contactors are load breaking devices
with a limited making and breaking
capacity. They are used for high
switching rates but can neither make
nor break short-circuit currents.
Switch-disconnectors
A switch-disconnector is to be
understood as the combination of
a switch and a disconnector, or
a switch with isolating distance.

4.3 Vacuum Switching Technology and Components for Medium Voltage
4.3.2 Selection of Components

by Ratings
exceed defined values. Permissible temperature rises always

refer to the ambient air temperature. If a device is mounted in
an enclosure, it is possible that it may not be loaded with its full
rated current, depending on the quality of heat dissipation.
The switching devices and all other equipment must be selected

for the system data available at the place of installation. This
system data defines the ratings of the components (table 4.3-1)

The rated peak withstand current is the peak value of the first
major loop of the short-circuit current during a compensation
process after the beginning of the current flow that the device
can carry in closed state. It is a measure for the electrodynamic
(mechanical) load of an electrical component. For devices with
full making capacity, this value is not relevant (see the paragraph Rated short-circuit making current later in this section).
Rated insulation level

The rated insulation level is the dielectric strength from phase to
earth, between phases and across the open contact gap, or
across the isolating distance.
The dielectric strength is the capability of an electrical component to withstand all voltages with a specific time sequence up
to the magnitude of the corresponding withstand voltages.
These can be operating voltages or higher-frequency voltages
caused by switching operations, earth faults (internal overvoltages) or lightning strikes (external overvoltages). The dielectric
strength is verified by a lightning impulse withstand voltage
test with the standard impulse wave of 1.2/50 s and a powerfrequency withstand voltage test (50 Hz/1 min).
Rated breaking current

The rated breaking current is the load breaking current in normal
operation. For devices with full breaking capacity and without
a critical current range, this value is not relevant (see the paragraph Rated short-circuit breaking current later in this section).
The rated short-circuit breaking current is the root-mean-square
value of the breaking current in the event of short circuit at the
terminals of the switching device.
Rated voltage
The rated voltage is the upper limit of the highest system
voltage the device is designed for. Because all high-voltage
switching devices are zero-current interrupters except for some
fuses the system voltage is the most important dimensioning
criterion. It determines the dielectric stress of the switching
device by means of the transient recovery voltage and the
recovery voltage, especially while switching off.
Rated short-circuit making current

The rated short-circuit making current is the peak value of the
making current in the event of short circuit at the terminals of
the switching device. This stress is greater than that of the rated
peak withstand current, because dynamic forces may work
against the contact movement.

The rated normal current is the current that the main circuit of
a device can continuously carry under defined conditions. The
heating of components especially of contacts must not
Rated insulation
level
Rated voltage
Rated normal
current
Rated peak
withstand current
Rated breaking
current
Rated short-circuit
breaking current
Rated short-circuit
making current
Standards
The switching devices, and also non-switching components, are
subject to national and international standards.
Circuit-breaker
Switch
p1)
p1)
p1)
Component designation
Switching devices
Switch-disconnector
Make-proof earthing switch
Contactor
p Influence on selection of component
p
p
p
No influence on selection of component
1)
Limited short-circuit making capacity
Table 4.3-1: Table of switching devices according to ratings
189

4.3.3 Vacuum Circuit-Breakers
Siemens medium-voltage vacuum circuit-breakers are available

with rated voltages up to 36 kV and rated short-circuit breaking
currents up to 72 kA (table 4.3-2). They are used:
For universal installation in all customary medium-voltage
switchgear types
As 1-pole or multi-pole medium-voltage circuit-breakers for all
switching duties in indoor switchgear
For breaking resistive, inductive and capacitive currents
For switching generators
For switching contact lines (1-pole traction circuit-breakers).
Auto-reclosing in traction line systems

To check the traction line system via test resistors for the
absence of short circuits after a short-circuit shutdown, the
operating sequence is O-15 s-CO.
Switching duties
The switching duties of the circuit-breaker depend partly upon
its type of operating mechanism:
Stored-energy mechanism
For synchronizing and rapid load transfer
For auto-reclosing
Spring-operated mechanism (spring CLOSED, stored-energy
OPEN) for normal closing and opening.
Switching of transformers
In the vacuum circuit-breaker, the chopping current is only 2 to
3 A due to the special contact material used, which means that
no hazardous overvoltages will appear when unloaded transformers are switched off.
Switching duties in detail

Synchronizing
The closing times during synchronizing are so short that, when
the contacts touch, there is still sufficient synchronism between
the systems to be connected in parallel.
Rapid load transfer
The transfer of consumers to another incoming feeder without
interrupting operation is called rapid load transfer. Vacuum
circuit-breakers with stored-energy mechanisms feature the
very short closing and opening times required for this purpose.
Beside other tests, vacuum circuit-breakers for rapid load
transfer have been tested with the operating sequence
O-3 min-CO-3 min-CO at full rated short-circuit breaking current
according to the standards. They even control the operating
sequence O-0.3 s-CO-3 min-CO up to a rated short-circuit
breaking current of 31.5 kA.
Auto-reclosing
This is required in overhead lines to clear transient faults or
short circuits that could be caused by, for example, thunderstorms, strong winds or animals. Even at full short-circuit
current, the vacuum circuit-breakers for this switching duty
leave such short dead times between closing and opening that
the de-energized time interval is hardly noticeable to the power
supply to the consumers. In the event of unsuccessful autoreclosing, the faulty feeder is shut down definitively. For vacuum
circuit-breakers with the auto-reclosing feature, the operating
sequence O-0.3 s-CO-3 min-CO must be complied with according
to IEC 62 271-100, whereas an unsuccessful auto-reclosing only
requires the operating sequence O-0.3 s-CO.
190
Multiple-shot reclosing
Vacuum circuit-breakers are also suitable for multiple-shot
reclosing, which is mainly applicable in English-speaking countries. The operating sequence O-0.3 s-CO-15 s-CO-15 s-CO is
required.
Breaking of short-circuit currents

While breaking short-circuit currents at the fault location directly
downstream from transformers, generators or current-limiting
reactors, the full short-circuit current can appear first; second,
the initial rate of rise of the transient recovery voltage can be far
above the values according to IEC 62 271-100. There may be
initial rates of rise up to 10 kV/s, and while switching off shortcircuits downstream from reactors, these may be even higher.
The circuit-breakers are also adequate for this stress.
Switching of capacitors
Vacuum circuit-breakers are specifically designed for switching
capacitive circuits. They can switch off capacitors up to the
maximum battery capacities without restrikes, and thus without
overvoltages. Capacitive current breaking is generally tested up
to 400 A. These values are technically conditioned by the testing
laboratory. Operational experience has shown that capacitive
currents are generally controlled up to 70 % of the rated normal
current of the circuit-breaker. When capacitors are connected in
parallel, currents up to the short-circuit current can appear,
which may be hazardous for parts of the system due to their
high rate of rise. Making currents up to 20 kA (peak value) are
permissible; higher values are can be achieved if specifically
requested.

Switching of overhead lines and cables

When unloaded overhead lines and cables are switched off,
the relatively small capacitive currents are controlled without
restrikes, and thus without overvoltages.
Switching of motors
When small high-voltage motors are stopped during start-up,
switching overvoltages may arise. This concerns high-voltage
motors with starting currents up to 600 A. The magnitude of
these overvoltages can be reduced to harmless values by means
of special surge limiters. For individually compensated motors,
no protective circuit is required.
Switching of generators
When generators with a short-circuit current of < 600 A are
operated, switching overvoltages may arise. In this case, surge
limiters or arresters should be used.
Switching of filter circuits

When filter circuits or inductor-capacitor banks are switched off,
the stress for the vacuum circuit-breaker caused by the recovery
voltage is higher than when switching capacitors. This is due to
the series connection of the inductor and the capacitor, and
must be taken into account for the rated voltage when the
vacuum circuit-breaker is selected.
Switching of arc furnaces
Up to 100 operating cycles are required per day. The vacuum
circuit-breaker type 3AH4 is especially adequate for this purpose.
Due to the properties of the load circuit, the currents can be
asymmetrical and distorted. To avoid resonance oscillations in
the furnace transformers, individually adjusted protective circuits are necessary.
191

Rated shortcircuit breaking
current
12.5 kA
Rated voltage and frequency
Rated normal
current
7.2 kV
50/60 Hz
12 kV
50/60 Hz
15 kV 50/60
Hz
800 A
17.5 kV
50/60 Hz
SION
1,250 A
SION
13.1 kA
800 A
16 kA
800 A
SION
SION
3AH5
SION
1,250 A
SION
SION
3AH5
SION
800 A
SION
SION
3AH5
1,250 A
SION
SION
3AH5
3AH5
2,000 A
20 kA
SION
2,000 A
3AH5
2,500 A
25 kA
800 A
SION
SION
3AH5
SION
3AH5
1,250 A
SION
SION
3AH5
SION
3AH5
2,000 A
SION
2,500 A
31.5 kA
SION
3AH5
SION
SION
3AH5
SION
3AH5
800 A
SION
SION
1,250 A
SION
SION
3AH5
3AH4
3AH4
SION
SION
3AH5
2,000 A
SION
SION
3AH5
3AH4
3AH4
SION
3AH5
2,500 A
SION
SION
3AH5
SION
3AH5
SION
SION
SION
3AK7
3,150 A
4,000 A
40 kA
1,250 A
1,600 A
3AH4
3AH4
3AH4
3AH4
2,000 A
SION
SION
3AH4
3AH4
SION
3AK7
2,500 A
SION
SION
3AH4
3AH4
SION
3AK7
3,150 A
SION
SION
3AH4
3AH4
SION
3AK7
4,000 A
50 kA
3AK7
1,250 A
3AH3
3AK7
3AH3
3AK7
3AH3
3AH3
3AK7
2,000 A
3AH3
3AK7
3AH3
3AK7
3AH3
3AH3
3AK7
2,500 A
3AH3
3AK7
3AH3
3AK7
3AH3
3AH3
3AK7
3,150 A
3AH3
3AK7
3AH3
3AK7
3AH3
3AH3
3AK7
4,000 A
3AH3
3AK7
3AH3
3AK7
3AH3
3AH3
3AK7
5,000 A
6,300 A
8,000 A
63 kA
1,250 A
3AH3
3AH3
3AH3
3AH3
2,000 A
3AH3
3AH3
3AH3
3AH3
2,500 A
3AH3
3AH3
3AH3
3AH3
3,150 A
3AH3
3AH3
3AH3
3AH3
4,000 A
3AH3
3AH3
3AH3
3AH3
5,000 A
6,300 A
8,000 A
72 kA
3,150 A
4,000 A
5,000 A
6,300 A
8,000 A
Table 4.3-2: Portfolio of vacuum circuit-breakers
192

Rated shortcircuit breaking
current
12.5 kA
Rated normal
current
Rated voltage and frequency

17.5 kV
50/60 Hz
17.5 kV
16 Hz
24 kV
50/60 Hz
800 A
SION
1,250 A
SION
800 A
SION
3AH5
1,250 A
SION
3AH5
2,000 A
SION
27.5 kV
50/60 Hz
36 kV
50/60 Hz
40,5 kV
50/60 Hz
13.1 kA
16 kA
20 kA
25 kA
800 A
SION
1,250 A
SION
3AH5
2,000 A
SION
3AH5
2,500 A
SION
3AH5
800 A
SION
1,250 A
2,000 A
3AH47
2,500 A
31.5 kA
3AH5
SION
3AH5
3AH4
3AH47
3AH5
SION
3AH5
3AH4
3AH47
3AH5
SION
3AH5
800 A
1,250 A
3AH4
2,000 A
3AH4
3AH47
2,500 A
4,000 A
1,250 A
3AH4
1,600 A
3AH4
2,000 A
3AH4
2,500 A
3AH4
3,150 A
3AH4
3AH4
3AH3
3AH4
3AH4
3AH3
3AH4
3AH3
3AH4
3AH3
3AH4
3AH3
3AH4
3AH3
3AH4
3AH3
3AH4
3AH3
3AH4
3AH3
3AH47
3AH3
3AH4
3AH3
3AH4
3AH3
3AH4
3AH3
3AH4
1,250 A
2,000 A
3AH3
2,500 A
63 kA
3AH3
3AH3
3AH3
4,000 A
50 kA
3AH47
3AH47
3AH47
3,150 A
40 kA
3AH47
3AH47
3,150 A
3AH38
3AH3
3AH38
4,000 A
3AH38
3AH3
3AH38
5,000 A
3AH37
3AH37
6,300 A
3AH37
3AH37
8,000 A
3AH37
3AH37
1,250 A
2,000 A
2,500 A
72 kA
3,150 A
3AH38
3AH38
4,000 A
3AH38
3AH38
5,000 A
3AH37
3AH37
6,300 A
3AH37
3AH37
8,000 A
3AH37
3AH37
3,150 A
3AH38
3AH38
4,000 A
3AH38
3AH38
5,000 A
3AH37
3AH37
6,300 A
3AH37
3AH37
8,000 A
3AH37
3AH37
193

Portfolio of circuit-breakers
SION
The standard circuit-breaker for variable application:

p Available as standard circuit-breaker or complete slide-in
module
p Up to 30,000 operating cycles
p Retrofit solution possible
3AH5
The standard circuit-breaker for small switching capacities:

p Up to 10,000 operating cycles.
3AH3
The circuit-breaker for high switching capacities:

p Rated short-circuit breaking currents of up to 63 kA
p Rated normal currents of up to 4,000 A
3AH4
The circuit-breaker for a high number of operating cycles,

i.e. for arc furnace switching:
p Rated normal currents of up to 4,000 A
3AH37/3AH38
The circuit-breaker for high-current and generator applications

(according to IEEE C37.013)
p Rated normal currents up to 6,300 A
p Design for phase segregation
up to 24 kV, 80 kA, 12,000 A
up to 24 kV, 90 kA, 6,300 A
3AH47
The circuit-breaker for applications in traction systems

p System frequency 16 , 25, 50 or 60 Hz
p 1-pole or 2-pole
3AK7
The compact, small circuit-breaker for high-current and

generator applications
p For generator switching according to IEEE C37.013
Rated short-circuit breaking currents of up to 50 kA
p Rated normal currents up to 4,000 A
Table 4.3-3: Different types of vacuum circuit-breakers
194

4.3.4 Vacuum Circuit-Breaker for

Generator Switching Application
In numerous power stations around the world, the 3AH38
high-current and generator circuit-breaker has become the
standard for switching rated operating currents up to 4,000 A.
The circuit-breakers has been modularly constructed in order to
be able to use the best materials for the current circuit, magnetic flux and cooling. In this way, features such as low resistance of the main circuit, high mechanical stability and ideal
cooling behavior have been combined in the 3AH37.
The 3AH37 is the first 72 kA vacuum circuit-breaker in the world
that has been type-tested in accordance with the criteria of the
generator circuit-breaker guideline IEEE Std C37.013. The
3AH37 high-current and generator circuit-breaker has a classic
VCB design and is available to extend the product portfolio to
master operating currents up to 6,300 A on a sustained Basis up
to 24 kV without forced cooling. With forced cooling the 3AH37
is able to carryoperating currents up to 8,000 A.
For generator switching application with phase segregation the

VCBs are designed for pole simultaneity and have been tested
with ratings up to 80 kA with 12,000 A continuing current and
90 kA (fig. 4.3-2).
Advantages in daily operation:
High mechanical stability through the column construction
Compact dimensions through vertical arrangement of the
vacuum interrupters
Low fire load as solid insulation is not required
High normal current possible without forced cooling due to
free convection also in horizontal installation
Secondary equipment can be easily retrofitted
Maintenance-free throughout its entire service life
Suitable for horizontal and vertical installation
3AK, 3AH37 and 3AH38 are type-tested according to

IEEE Std C37.013
In
17.5 kV
24 kV
12,000 A
360 MVA
500 MVA
8,000 A
240 MVA
330 MVA
180 MVA
260 MVA
120 MVA
160 MVA
100 MVA
130 MVA
Design Classic
Design Phase-segregated
3AH371 / 3AH372
3AH373 / 3AH374
6,300 A
4,000 A
3,150 A
3AH381 / 3AH372
3AK763 /
3AK765 /
40 kA
50 kA
63 kA
72 kA
3AH375 / 3AH376
80 kA
90 kA
Ik
with forced cooling
Fig. 4.3-2: Vacuum circuit-breaker for generator switching application 17.5 kV and 24 kV
195

4.3.5 Outdoor Vacuum Circuit-Breakers

Outdoor vacuum circuit-breakers perform the same functions as
indoor circuit-breakers (table 4.3-2) and cover a similar product
range. Due to their special design, they are preferred for use in
power supply systems with a large extent of overhead lines.
When using outdoor vacuum circuit-breakers, it is not necessary
to provide for closed service locations for their installation.
The design comprises a minimum of moving parts and a simple
structure in order to guarantee a long electrical and mechanical
service life. At the same time, these circuit-breakers offer all
advantages of indoor vacuum circuit-breakers.
In live-tank circuit-breakers (fig. 4.3-3), the vacuum interrupter
is housed inside a weatherproof insulating enclosure, e.g., made
of porcelain. The vacuum interrupter is at electrical potential,
which means live.
The significant property of the dead-tank technology is the

arrangement of the vacuum interrupter in an earthed metal
enclosure (fig. 4.3-4).
Fig. 4.3-3: Live-tank circuit-breaker
The portfolio of outdoor vacuum circuit-breakers is shown in

table 4.3-4.
Fig. 4.3-4: Dead-tank circuit-breaker
Type
3AG01 / 3AF01 /
3AF03
3AF04 / 3AF05 for

AC traction power
supply
SDV6 / SDV7
SDV7M
12 40.5 kV
27.5 kV
15.5 38 kV
15.5 27.6 kV
28 70 kV
95 kV
50 80 kV
50 60 kV
Rated voltage
Rated short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage
75 200 kV
200 kV
110 200 kV
110 150 kV
1,250 2,500 A
2,000 A
1,200 3,000 A
1,200 2,000 A
20 31.5 kA
31.5 kA
20 40 kA
20 25 kA
1 or 2

Number of poles
Operating mechanism
Design
Table 4.3-4: Portfolio of outdoor vacuum circuit-breakers
196
Spring
Spring
Spring
Magnetic
Live-tank
Live-tank
Dead-tank
Dead-tank

4.3.6 Reclosers
Vacuum reclosers offer dependable protection for overhead lines
in order to provide improved reliability of the distribution network.
At the core of the system, the controller provides a high level of
protection, easiest operation, and high operating efficiency.
Up to 90 % of the faults in overhead line networks are temporary
in nature. In case of a fault, a vacuum recloser trips to interrupt
the fault current. Technical data and ratings see (table 4.3-5).
After a few cycles, it recloses again and will remain closed if
a transient fault has disappeared. This cycle is performed up to
five times in order to bring the line back to service before the
device finally switches to a lockout state should a permanent
network fault be present.
Fig. 4.3-5: Argus-M controller
Siemens vacuum reclosers can easily be installed anywhere on

the overhead line, so network operators can choose an easily
accessible location. The reclosers will be parameterized to
sequentially protect the feeder in either star, ring or meshed
networks.
The included trouble-free operating features are:
Advanced vacuum switching technology
A sophisticated solid epoxy insulation system with integrated
sensors
A dual-coil low-energy magnetic actuator
The advanced Siemens controller
A weatherproof control cubicle
Reliable operation due to self-monitoring and standby.
Controller
The controller (fig. 4.3-5) the brain of the recloser comprises indicators and control elements, communication interfaces, and a USB port for convenient connection of a laptop.
Access to the user level is protected by multi-level password
authentication. The controller is mounted in a cubicle which also
contains the auxiliary power supply and a battery-backed UPS
unit, fuses, and a general purpose outlet to power a laptop.
The controller provides comprehensive protection functions as:
Earth fault and sensitive earth fault detection along with
overcurrent-time protection (definite and inverse)
Inrush restraint
Load shedding.
Further features of the controller are:
A multitude of inputs and outputs for customer use
Additional communication modules for data transfer
Self-monitoring and measuring functions.
Switch unit
The switch unit (fig. 4.3-6) contains integrated current transformers and optionally also voltage sensors. It consists of one or
three poles and the actuator housing. The poles are made of
weatherproof epoxy resin which holds the vacuum interrupter.
A switching rod connects the vacuum interrupter with the
magnetic actuator.
Fig. 4.3-6: Vacuum recloser with cubicle and controller
A mechanical lockout handle, which allows for mechanical

tripping and lockout, sticks out of the actuator housing. As long
as this handle is extended, the unit can neither be closed electrically nor mechanically. The lockout handle needs to be reset
manually to activate the unit.
A position indicator is located underneath the housing. Thanks
to its size and the application of reflective materials, the indicator is highly visible from the ground and the switching state
can be clearly recognized even at night.
Rated operating current
200 A to 800 A
Rated voltage acc. to ANSI C37-60
12 kV; 15.5 kV; 27 kV; 38 kV
12.5 kA; 16 kA
95 kV to 190 kV
Number of operating cycles
10,000
Number of short circuit operations
up to 200
Number of phases
three-phases; single-phases;
single-triple
Standards
ANSI C37.60; IEC 62271-111;

IEC 60255; IEC 62271-100
Table 4.3-5: Technical data and ratings
197

4.3.7 Fusesaver
In most rural network configurations, the feeder is protected by
a circuit-breaker or recloser. Lateral lines* are usually protected
by fuses.
As a fuse is unable to distinguish between temporary and permanent faults, it blows on ALL faults, causing downstream
customers to lose power and requiring a line crew to replace the
fuse.
Whilst the fuse protects the lateral line, the Fusesaver protects
the fuse from translent faults:
In this case (fig. 4.3-8, the fault disappears during the
Fusesavers dead time. After closing, the power supply is
restored. The fuse did not operate, and the Fusesaver is ready
for the next fault. Only the customers on the affected lateral
line experience an interruption in power during the Fusesavers
dead time, while all other customers on the feeder, including
nearby lateral, did not even notice its operation.
Temporary fault
In rural networks it may take hours for the line crew to drive to
site, patrol the line (only to find no fault) and reconnect supply.
This leads to unnecessary high operating costs for the utility.
Furthermore, downstream users are left without power for
extended periods of time potentially resulting in financial
penalties to the utility.
Since typically 80 percent of a rural networks faults are

transient, 80 percent of its fuses are blown unnecessarily.
Load current
Current
Dead time
Open
Fusesaver Closed
1 30 sec
Blown
Fuse intact
Due to the low customer numbers on rural lateral lines* it is

often difficult for the utility to find a cost-effective solution to
this problem until now!
Fusesaver (fig. 4.3-7, fig. 4.3-10), the worlds fastest mediumvoltage (MV) outdoor vacuum circuit-breaker, is the most costeffective solution for optimizing reliability while minimizing
operating costs of rural overhead MV networks. It is capable of
almost completely removing the impacts of temporary faults on
lateral lines*. Thanks to its unique fault-clearing speed (as fast as
one half-cycle), the Siemens Fusesaver protects the fuse in the
case of temporary faults (table 4.3-6, table 4.3-7). Fusesaver is
a new class of intelligent, compact and low-cost single-phase
circuit-breaker that minimizes lost minutes of supply by protecting lateral line fuses from blowing on transient faults.
Fig. 4.3-8: Performance with temporary faults
When the Fusesaver closes, the fault is still present, resulting

in an immediate fault current. The Fusesaver will not operate
again and allow the fault current to blow the fuse. Loss of
power is unavoidable for customers on this lateral line, while
all other customers receive an uninterrupted power supply.
The Siemens Fusesaver restrict blown fuses on lateral lines to
unavoidable cases of permanent faults (fig. 4.3-9).
Permanent
fault
Current
The Fusesaver complies with the relevant parts of

IEC 62271-100.
* Also referred to as spur lines, T-off or T-taps
Dead time
Open
Fusesaver Closed
1 30 sec
Blown
Fuse intact
Fig. 4.3-9: Performance with permanent faults
Fig. 4.3-7: Fusesaver (left) and Remote Control Unit RCU (right)
198

The Fusesaver is designed to be installed in series with the fuse.

When it senses a fault current, it will open and stay open for
a pre-determined time (dead time). Then, the Fusesaver closes
again reconnecting supply. With on-board microprocessor
control and wireless connectivity, Fusesaver has configurable
protection, multi-phase operation functions, on-board event
history, and can be integrated into a SCADA system for remote
control. It is an electrically floating device that hangs directly
from the MV line. With no earth connection, it has no electrical
stresses on its insulators, resulting in long life. It self-powers by
harvesting and storing energy from the lateral line current. Fault
detection is achieved with a cutting-edge, high-speed protection
algorithm.
Fig. 4.3-10: Fusesaver and RCU installation (with solar panel for RCU)
Model type
Low range
Standard range
High range
Minimum line current for operation
0.15
0.5
1.0
Fuse ratings
2 to 20
5 to 50
5 to100
Rated current
40
100
200
Rated short-circuit breaking current Isc
kA
1.5
Rated short-circuit making current Ipeak
kA
3.75
10
10
Rated short-time withstand current
kA
1.5
0.4
0.2
1.0
No.
200
30
30
Rated short-time withstand current duration

Fault break operations at 100%
Table 4.3-6: Fusesaver types and rating overview
The low range, standard range and high range, Fusesavers are all available with the following voltage rating options:
Rated voltage
kV
12
15.5
24
27
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage Up
kV
75
110
125
125
Rated power-frequency withstand voltage Ud (60s)
kV
42
50
50
60
Table 4.3-7: Fusesaver voltage rating overview
199

4.3.8 Vacuum Contactors

3TL vacuum contactors (fig. 4.3-11 to fig. 4.3-13) are 3-pole
contactors with electromagnetic operating mechanisms for
medium-voltage switchgear. They are load breaking devices with
a limited short-circuit making and breaking capacity for applications with high switching rates of up to 1 million operating
cycles. Vacuum contactors are suitable for operational switching
of alternating current consumers in indoor switchgear.
They can be used, e.g., for the following switching duties:
AC-3: Squirrel-cage motors: Starting, stopping of running
motor
AC-4: Starting, plugging and inching
Switching of three-phase motors in AC-3 or AC-4 operation
(e.g., in conveying and elevator systems, compressors,
pumping stations, ventilation and heating)
Switching of transformers (e.g., in secondary distribution
switchgear, industrial distributions)
Switching of reactors (e.g., in industrial distribution systems,
DC-link reactors, power factor correction systems)
Switching of resistive consumers (e.g., heating resistors,
electrical furnaces)
Switching of capacitors (e.g., in power factor correction
systems, capacitor banks).
Further switching duties are:
Switching of motors
Switching of transformers
Switching of capacitors.
Fig. 4.3-11: Vacuum contactor 3TL6
In contactor-type reversing starter combinations (reversing

duty), only one contactor is required for each direction of rotation if high-voltage high-rupturing capacity fuses are used for
short-circuit protection.
The portfolio of the vacuum contactors is shown in table 4.3-8.
Type
Rated voltage
3TL81
3TL65
3TL68
3TL71
7.2 kV
7.2 kV
12 kV
15 kV
24 kV
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
400 A
450 A
400 A
320 A
800 A
Rated making current*
4,000 A
4,500 A
4,000 A
3,200 A
4,500 A
Rated breaking current*
3,200 A
3,600 A
3,200 A
2,560 A
3,600 A
Mechanical endurance of the contactor*
1 million
operating cycles
3 million
operating cycles
1 million
operating cycles
1 million
operating cycles
1 million
operating cycles
Electrical endurance of the vacuum

interrupter (rated current)*
0.25 million
operating cycles
1 million
operating cycles
0.5 million
operating cycles
0.25 million
operating cycles
0.5 million
operating cycles
Rated frequency
* Switching capacity according to utilization category AC-4 (cos = 0.35)
Table 4.3-8: Portfolio of vacuum contactors
200
3TL61

4.3.9 Contactor-Fuse Combination

Contactor-fuse combinations 3TL62/63/66 are type-tested units
comprising contactors and HV HRC (high-voltage high-rupturing
capacity) fuses. They have been specially developed for flexible
use in restricted spaces and do not require any additional room
for HV HRC fuses or any additional conductors between contactor and fuse. The components are laid out on the base plate
so as to enable optimum ventilation, thereby allowing a high
normal current. This design even meets the high dielectric
strength standards required in countries such as China.
4
3
2
A number of different designs are available for integration in the

switchgear panel, for example with different pole-center distances and widths across flats. A choice of single and double
fuse holders, control transformer and an extensive range of
other accessories are available as delivery versions (table 4.3-9).
Construction
The contactor-fuse combination (fig. 4.3-14, fig. 4.3-15) consists
of the components vacuum contactor (1), insulating cover with
fuse holder (2), fuse-links (3), contacts (4) and optionally a control transformer (5). These are accommodated on a base plate (6).
In normal operation, the vacuum contactor (1) breaks the
corresponding currents reliably. To do this, the vacuum
switching technology, proven for nearly 40 years, serves as arcquenching principle by using vacuum interrupters. The vacuum
interrupters are operated by the magnet system through an
integral rocker.
5
7
1
1 Vacuum contactor
2 Insulating cover
with fuse holder
3 Fuse element
4
5
6
7
Disconnecting contacts
Optional control transformer
Base plate
Cross-member
Fig. 4.3-14: Construction of the contactor-fuse combination 3TL6
The insulating cover with fuse holder (2) is mounted on one

side of the contactor. On the other side it stands on a crossmember (7) under which there is room for the optional control
transformer. The holders, which are especially conceived for the
use of two HV HRC fuse-links, ensure a homogeneous distribution of the current to the two fuse-links of one phase.
The contactor-fuse combination is optimized for using 3GD2
fuses. But also fuse links from other manufacturers can be used
(3). When selecting the fuses for an operational scenario, the
technical limit values such as heating due to power dissipation,
the limit switching capacity and the maximum let-through
current must be taken into account.
The contacts (4) are used to establish the connection to the
busbar compartment and the cable compartment via bushings,
which can also be delivered optionally.
The optional control transformer (5) is connected to the highvoltage terminals of the contactor-fuse combination on its
primary part, so that no additional cables are required. To protect the transformer, a separate upstream fuse is seriesconnected on the primary side and accommodated in the crossmember. Due to its different versions, the control transformer
can be optimally selected to the existing power system.
Fig. 4.3-15: Installation of the contactor-fuse combination in the

contactor panel
201

Type
3TL62
3TL63
3TL66
Rated voltage
7.2 kV
7.2 kV
12 kV
Rated normal current (depending on installation

and coordination with the selected fuses)
450 A
400 A
400 A
Thermal current Ith
Depending on installation and coordination with the selected fuses
Rated short-circuit breaking current ISC

(prospective)
50 kA
50 kA
40 kA
Max. let-through current ID
46 kA
46 kA
46 kA
Short-circuit capability of the contactor

(limit switching capacity)
5 kA
4.6 kA
4.6 kA
60 kV / 40 kV
60 kV / 40 kV
75 kV / 60 kV
20 kV
32 kV
28 kV
1,200 operating cycles/h
600 operating cycles/h
600 operating cycles/h
1 mio. operating cycles
1 315 A or 2 250 A
1 315 A or 2 250 A
1 200 A or 2 200 A
120 mm
120 mm
120 mm

(to earth / open contact gap)
withstand voltage
Switching rate
Mechanical endurance
Max. number of fuses per phase
Pole-center distances
Widths across flats
205 mm, 275 mm, 310 mm
Various different contact systems and comprehensive accessories are available
Table 4.3-9: Portfolio of contactor-fuse combination 3TL6
Mode of operation
Basically, there are three different modes or states of operation:
normal operation, short circuit and overload.
During normal operation, the combination behaves like a
contactor. To close the contactor, the magnetic system can
be operated with a control current, optional taken out of the
control transformer. The DC magnet system operates as an
economy circuit, proving a high mechanical endurance and
a low pickup and holding power. An optional latch may hold the
vacuum contactor in closed position even without excitation of
the magnet system. The vacuum contactor is released electrically by means of a latch release solenoid or mechanically by an
optional cabel operated latch release.
In case of short circuit, the HV HRC fuse melts already during the
current rise. The released thermal striker activates an indication
and operates the vacuum contactor. In the optimum time
sequence, the fuse has already interrupted the short-circuit
current at this time.
In case of overload, a high continuous current overloads the fuselink thermally, thus tripping the thermal striker. The contactor
already operates within the arcing time of the fuse, making
a take-over current flow through the vacuum interrupters. The
take-over current must not exceed maximum switching capability,
as this could damage the vacuum interrupter. This is prevented by
selecting the correct fuse.
202
Application examples
Contactor-fuse combinations are suitable for operational switching
of alternating-current consumers in indoor switchgear. They are
used, for example, for the following switching functions:
Starting of motors
Plugging or reversing the direction of rotation of motors
Switching of transformers and reactors
Switching of resistive consumers (e.g., electric furnaces)
Switching of capacitors and compressors.
With these duties, contactor-fuse combinations are used in conveyor and elevator systems, pumping stations, air conditioning
systems as well as in systems for reactive power compensation,
and can therefore be found in almost every industrial sector.
Standards
Contactor-fuse combinations 3TL62/63/66 are designed
according to the following standards for high-voltage
alternating-current contactors above 1 kV to 12 kV:
IEC 62271-1
DIN EN 62271-1
IEC 62271-106
DIN EN 62271-106
IEC 60529
DIN EN 60529
IEC 60721
DIN EN 60721
IEC 60282-1
DIN EN 60282-1
Test voltage according to GB 14808, DL/T 593

Advantages at a glance
Up to one million electrical operating cycles
Usable for all kinds of switching duties
Maintenance-free, reliable operation of vacuum interrupter and
magnetic operating mechanism for maximum cost-efficiency
Wide range of types for the most varied requirements
Type-tested, compact construction
(also for installation in narrow switchgear panels)
Specially developed fuse holders for homogeneous
current distribution
Optimized construction for high power density
Reliable for optimized availability
Excellent environmental compatibility
Over 35 years experience with vacuum contactors.
203

4.3.10 Switch-Disconnectors
Disconnectors (also called isolators) are used for almost no-load
opening and closing of electrical circuits. While doing so, they
can break negligible currents (these are currents up to 500 mA,
e.g., capacitive currents of busbars or voltage transformers), or
higher currents if there is no significant change of the voltage
between the terminals during breaking, e.g., during busbar
transfer in double-busbar switchgear, when a bus coupler is
closed in parallel.
The actual task of disconnectors is to establish an isolating
distance in order to work safely on other operational equipment
that has been isolated by the disconnector. For this reason,
stringent requirements are placed on the reliability, visibility and
dielectric strength of the isolating distance.
Fig. 4.3-16: Switch-disconnector
Switch-disconnectors (table 4.3-10, fig. 4.3-16) combine the

functions of a switch with the establishment of an isolating
distance (disconnector) in one device, and they are therefore
used for breaking load currents up to their rated normal current.
While connecting consumers, making on an existing short circuit
cannot be excluded. That is why switch-disconnectors today
feature a short-circuit making capacity. In combination with
fuses, switches (switch-disconnectors) can also be used to break
short-circuit currents. The short-circuit current is interrupted by
the fuses. Subsequently, the fuses trip the three poles of the
switch (switch-disconnector), disconnecting the faulty feeder
from the power system.
Type
Rated voltage
12 kV
17.5 kV
24 kV
36 kV
Rated short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage
28 kV/32 kV
38 kV/45 kV
50 kV/60 kV
70 kV/80 kV
75 kV/85 kV
95 kV/110 kV
125 kV/145 kV
170 kV/195 kV
400 A
400 A
400 A
630 A

Rated normal current without fuse-link
630 A/1000 A
630 A
630 A/1000 A
630 A/1000 A
Rated short-time withstand current (1 sec)
25 kA
25 kA
25 kA
20 kA
Rated short-circuit making current
63 kA
63 kA
50 kA
25 kA
Rated closed-loop breaking current
400 A/630 A
400 A/630 A
400 A/630 A
630 A
Rated cable-charging breaking current
50 A
75 A
50 A
25 A
Rated earth-fault breaking current
150 A
200 A
150 A
70 A
Rated cable-charging breaking current under earthfault conditions
86 A
100 A
86 A
40 A
Number of mechanical operating cycles
2,500
2,500
2,500
1,000
Torque of spring-operated/stored-energy mechanism
44/60
54/62
64/64
90/150
Torque of earthing switch
60
65
70
120
Standard fuse reference dimension e
292
362
442
538
Table 4.3-10: Portfolio of switch-disconnectors
204
3CJ2

Arc-extinguishing principle
Switch-disconnectors operate according to the principle of
a hard-gas switch, and so the arc is not extinguished in
a vacuum interrupter. The arc splits off some gas from an insulating material that surrounds the arc closely and this gas
quenches the arc.
Because the material providing the gas cannot regenerate itself,
the number of operating cycles is lower than in vacuum interrupters. Nevertheless, switch-disconnectors that use the hardgas principle are used most frequently because of their good
cost/performance ratio.
3
Fig. 4.3-17: 3CJ2 switch-disconnector: (1) flat hard-gas arcing
chamber, (2) contact blade, (3) auxiliary blade
3CJ2 switch-disconnectors operate with a flat, hard-gas arcing

chamber, (1) in fig. 4.3-17. During the opening movement, the
contact blade, (2) in fig. 4.3-17, is separated first. Because the
auxiliary blade, (3) in fig. 4.3-17, guided in the arcing chamber
is still touching, the current now flows through the auxiliary
blade. When the switching blades reach the isolating distance,
the auxiliary blade opens the connection suddenly. The opening
arc burns in a small gap, and the thermal effect releases enough
gas to extinguish the arc rapidly and effectively.
205

4.4 Low-Voltage Devices
4.4.1 Requirements on Low-Voltage
Devices in the Three Circuit Types
Device application in the supply circuit
The system infeed is the most sensitive circuit in the entire
power distribution. A failure here would affect the whole network, leaving the building or the production concerned without
power. This worst-case scenario must be considered during the
planning. Redundant system supplies and selective protection
settings are important preconditions for a safe network configuration. The selection of the correct protective devices is therefore of elementary importance in order to create these preconditions. Some of the key dimensioning data is described in the
following.
Internal accessories
Depending on the respective control, not only shunt releases (previously: f-releases), but also undervoltage releases are required.
Communication
Information about the current operating states, maintenance,
error messages and analyses, etc. is being increasingly required,
especially from the very sensitive supply circuits. Flexibility may
be required with regard to a later upgrade or retrofit to the
desired type of data transmission.
Rated current
The feeder circuit-breaker in the LVMD must be dimensioned for
the maximum load of the transformer/generator. When using
ventilated transformers, the higher normal current of up to
1.5 IN of the transformer must be taken into account.
Device application in supply circuits (coupling)

If the coupling (connection of network 1 to network 2) is operated in open condition, the circuit-breaker (tie breaker) only has
the function of a disconnector or main switch. A protective
function (release) is not absolutely necessary.
Short-circuit strength
The short-circuit strength of the feeder circuit-breaker is determined by (n1) Ik max of the transformer or transformers (n =
number of transformers). This means that the maximum shortcircuit current that occurs at the place of installation must be
known in order to specify the appropriate short-circuit strength
of the protective device (Icu: rated ultimate short-circuit breaking
capacity). Exact short-circuit current calculations including
attenuations of the medium-voltage levels or the laid cables can
be made, for example, with the aid of the SIMARIS design
dimensioning software. SIMARIS design determines the maximum and minimum short-circuit currents and automatically
dimensions the correct protective devices.
The following considerations apply to closed operation:

Rated current
This must be dimensioned for the maximum possible normal
current (load compensation). The simultaneity factor can be
assumed to be 0.9.
Short-circuit strength
The short-circuit strength of the feeder circuit-breaker is
determined by the sum of the short-circuit components that
flow through the coupling. This depends on the configuration
of the component busbars and their supply.
Utilization category
As for the system supply, utilization category B is also required
for the current-carrying capacity (Icw).
Release
Partial shutdown with the couplings must be taken into
consideration for the supply reliability. As the coupling and the
feeder circuit-breakers have the same current components
when a fault occurs, similar to the parallel operation of two
transformers, the LSI characteristic is required. The special
zone selective interlocking (ZSI) function should be used for
larger networks and/or protection settings that are difficult to
determine.
Utilization category
When dimensioning a selective network, time grading of the
protective devices is essential. When using time grading up to
500 ms, the selected circuit-breaker must be able to carry the
short-circuit current that occurs for the set time. Close to the
transformer, the currents are very high. This current-carrying
capacity is specified by the Icw value (rated short-time withstand
current) of the circuit-breaker; this means the contact system
must be able to carry the maximum short-circuit current, i.e.,
the energy contained therein, until the circuit-breaker is tripped.
This requirement is satisfied by circuit-breakers of utilization
category B (e.g., air circuit-breakers, ACB). Current-limiting
circuit-breakers (molded-case circuit-breakers, MCCB) trip during
the current rise. They can therefore be constructed more compactly.
Release
For a selective network design, the release (trip unit) of the
feeder circuit-breaker must have an LSI characteristic. It must be
206
possible to deactivate the instantaneous release (I). Depending

on the curve characteristic of the upstream and downstream
protective devices, the characteristics of the feeder circuitbreaker in the overload range (L) and also in the time-lag shortcircuit range (S) should be optionally switchable (I4t or I2t
characteristic curve). This facilitates the adaptation of upstream
and downstream devices.
Device application in the distribution circuit

The distribution circuit receives power from the higher level
(supply circuit) and feeds it to the next distribution level (final
circuit).
Depending on the country, local practices, etc., circuit-breakers
and fuses can be used for system protection; in principle, all
protective devices described in this chapter. The specifications
for the circuit dimensioning must be fulfilled. The ACB has
advantages if full selectivity is required. For cost-reasons,

however, the ACB is only frequently used in the distribution

circuit with a rated current of 630 A or 800 A. As the ACB is not
a current-limiting device, it differs greatly from other protective
devices such as MCCB, MCB, and fuses.
Table 4.4-1 shows the major differences and limits of the
respective protective devices.
Device application in the final circuit

The final circuit receives power from the distribution circuit and
supplies it to the consumer (e.g., motor, lamp, non-stationary
load (power outlet), etc.). The protective device must satisfy the
requirements of the consumer to be protected by it.
Note:
All protection settings, comparison of characteristic curves, etc.
always start with the load. This means that no protective devices
are required with adjustable time grading in the final circuit.
ACB
MCCB
Fuse switch-
Switch-
MCB
air
molded-case
disconnector
disconnector
miniature
values,
circuit-breaker
circuit-breaker
with fuses
circuit-breaker
specifications
IEC
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Region
Application
System protection
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Power supply system
Installation
Fixed mounting
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Plug-in
Up to 800 A
Partly
Standards
Reference
Availability
Withdrawable unit
Yes
Yes
Rated current
In
6,300 A
1,600 A
630 A
630 A
125 A
Normal current IB
Short-circuit
breaking capacity
Icu
Up to 150 kA
Up to 100 kA
Up to 120 kA
Up to 120 kA
Up to 25 kA
Maximum shortcircuit current Ik max
Current-carrying
capacity
Icw
Up to 80 kA
Up to 5 kA
Circuit
Number of poles
3-pole
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
4-pole
Yes
Yes
Partly
Tripping
characteristic
Tripping function
Characteristics
Protection against
electric shock,
tripping condition
Communication
(data
transmission)
Activation
Derating
ETU
Yes
Yes
TMTU
Up to 630 A
Yes
Yes
Yes
LI
Yes
Yes
Yes 1)
Yes 1)
Yes
LSI
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Fixed
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Adjustable
Yes
Yes
Optional
Yes
Yes
Detection
of Ik min
No
limitation
No
limitation 1)
Depends on
cable length
Depends on
cable length
Depends on
cable length
High
Yes
Medium
Yes
Yes
Low
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Local
Yes
Yes
Yes
Remote (motor)
Yes
Yes
Full rated current

up to
60 C
50 C
30 C
Yes
Up to 800 A
System
synchronization
1)
Power supply system
Power supply system
Power supply system
Power supply system
Minimum shortcircuit current Ik min

Customer
specification
Customer
specification
30 C
30 C
Switchgear
Power supply system
According to the fuse characteristic
Table 4.4-1: Overview of the protective devices; *) with electronic trip unit (ETU): no limitation / with thermomagnetic trip unit (TMTU):
depends on cable length
207

4.4.2 Low-Voltage Protection and

Switching Devices
The following chapter focuses on the relevant characteristics and
selection criteria of the respective devices (table 4.4-2 and
table 4.4-3) that are used in the main power distribution circuits
in commercial buildings and in industry.
Circuit-breakers
ACB
Air circuit-breaker
Non-current-limiting circuit-breaker
Current-zero cut-off circuit-breaker
MCCB
Molded-case circuit-breaker
Current-limiting circuit-breaker
MCB
Miniature circuit-breaker
MSP
Motor starter protector
MPCB
Motor protector circuit-breaker

Circuit-breaker for motor protection
Note:
All figures apply to low-voltage power systems or distribution
boards in IEC applications. Different regulations and criteria
apply to systems according to UL standards.
Depending on the country, standard specifications, local
practices, planning engineer, technical threshold values, etc.,
low-voltage power distribution systems are made up of various protective devices.*
Circuits and device assignment

(see also section 3.3.2 Dimensioning of Power Distribution
Systems)
Basic configuration of a low-voltage power distribution system
and assignment of the protective devices including core
functions
Core functions in the respective circuits:
Supply circuit
Task: System protection
Protective device:
ACB (air circuit-breaker)
Distribution circuit
Task: System protection
Protective devices:
ACB (air circuit-breaker)
MCCB (molded-case circuit-breaker)
SD (switch-disconnector)
Final circuit
Task: Motor protection
Protective devices:
MCCB (circuit-breaker for motor protection)
SD (switch-disconnector)
MSP (3RT contactor, 3RU overload relay, 3UF motor
protection, and control devices).
Table 4.4-2: Overview of circuit-breaker devices
Switching devices
(fuse switch-disconnector/disconnector)
SD
Switch-disconnector
Depending on the type of
operation, these devices are
divided into two main groups:
Operator-dependent
Without circuit-breaker latching
system, with protection (fuse); with
these devices, the fuse is also
moved when making and breaking
(= fuse switch-disconnector)
With circuit-breaker latching system,
with protection (fuse); with these
devices, the fuse is not moved when
making and breaking
(= disconnector with fuse)
Operator-independent
With circuit-breaker latching system,
without protection (without fuse); these
devices are only used to interrupt the
circuit, similar to a main switch
(= disconnector without fuse)
Table 4.4-3: Overview of switching devices
* If you have questions on UL applications, please contact your local Siemens

representative. Siemens provides solutions for these applications, but they must
be treated completely differently.
208

Criteria for device selection

A protective device is always part of a circuit (fig. 4.4-1) and
must satisfy the corresponding requirements (see also section
3.3.2 Dimensioning of Power Distribution Systems). The most
important selection criteria are shown in the following.
ACB
Main selection criteria

Fig. 4.4-2 shows the seven most important selection criteria that
must be at least taken into account for the device selection.
ACB
MCCB
SD
MCCB
SD
MSP
Fig. 4.4-1: Core functions of the protective devices in the individual

circuit types
1. Application
Plants/motors/disconnectors
2. 3-pole/4-pole
3. Fixed mounting/plug-in/
withdrawable-unit design
4. Rated current In
6,300 A
ACB:
1,600 A
MCCB:
630 A
Fuse:
M
5. Short-circuit
breaking capacity Icu
6. Release
Influences selectivity
and protection setting
Fuse-protected
7. Communication
and data transfer
Circuit-breaker-protected
Fig. 4.4-2: Main selection criteria
209

4.4.3 Power Management System for

the Low-Voltage Power Distribution
The focus of a power management system is on the demand for
improved transparency of energy consumption and energy
quality, as well as on ensuring the availability of power distribution. Holistic transparency is the basis for optimizing power
consumption and costs. The information obtained through this
transparency provides a realistic basis for cost center allocations
as well as for measures to improve the energy efficiency. In
addition, it documents the savings achieved.
Functions of the power management system
Analysis of the energy data / energy flows with specific load
curve diagrams
Visualization of the interdependencies
Detection of savings potentials, assessed minimum and
maximum values
Energy measurements for accounting purposes (internal cost
center allocation, external billing)
Benchmarking, internal (rack-line / building part) or external
(property/installations with comparable use based on obtained
measured values)
Visualization of the power supply with switching states and
energy flows
Preparation of decisions, e.g., regarding power supply
extensions
Verifiable efficiency improvements
Targeted troubleshooting from fast, detailed information about
events and faults that occur in the power distribution system
inside the server room / building
Fault and event messages (e.g., switching sequences) are
logged with a date and time stamp, so that downtimes can be
documented and fault processes traced and analyzed later
using the data recorded
Compliance with purchasing contracts via the selective control
of consuming devices
Automatic notification of the service personnel.
Levels of the power management system

Power management is the special energy view on a building
or an infrastructure property ranging from the power infeed and
distribution through to the power consumers themselves. It
comprises the following levels:
Energy value acquisition using measuring devices 7KM PAC
(fig. 4.4-3)
Processing of the measurement data
Monitoring including visualization, archiving, report, and
messaging.
Data acquisition systems and measuring devices can be directly
connected to the server with the power management software,
e.g. powermanager from Siemens, via Modbus TCP. The software then handles the actual recording, visualization and
logging of the acquired values. A SIMATIC S7 controller allows
a comparable network for industrial bus systems such as
PROFINET or PROFIBUS-DP to be built up. PROFIBUS expansion
modules can be used for the direct integration of measuring
210
devices as well as for the 7KM PAC3200, for example. In both

cases, a 7KM PAC4200 measuring device can serve as gateway to
a subordinate Modbus RTU network linked either via Modbus TCP
or via PROFIBUS-DP using PROFIBUS expansion modules
(fig. 4.4-4).
Fig. 4.4-3: 7KM PAC measuring devices
System configuration
Operation & monitoring
Windows or Web Clients
Ethernet
Data processing server

powermanager
Power monitoring software
Data acquisition
Measuring/protection devices
Ethernet (Modbus)
7KM
PAC3200
7KM
PAC4200
7KM
PAC3200
Modbus RS485
7KM
PAC3100
7KT
PAC1500
3WL air
circuitbreakers
3V...
molded
case circuitbreakers
Fig. 4.4-4: Network structure of a power management system

4.4.4 Software for Power System

Dimensioning
An exact protective device selection, and thus the dimensioning
of power distribution systems, requires extensive short-circuit
current and voltage drop calculations. Catalog data for the shortcircuit energies, the selectivity and the backup protection of the
individual devices and assemblies must also be consulted. In
addition, the appropriate regulations and standards must be
observed. At this point, a reference should be made to the
SIMARIS design dimensioning tool that automatically takes
account of the above mentioned conditions, catalog data,
standards, and regulations and consequently automatically
makes the device selection.
Selectivity and backup protection
Rooms used for medical purposes (IEC 60364-7-710, VDE 0100710) and meeting rooms (IEC 60364-7-718, VDE 0100-718)
require the selection of protective devices in subareas. For other
building types, such as data centers, there is an increasing
demand for a selective grading of the protective devices,
because only the circuit affected by a fault would be disabled
with the other circuits continuing to be supplied with power
without interruption.
Because the attainment of selectivity results in increased costs,
it should be decided for which circuits selectivity is useful.
Backup protection is the lower-cost option. In this case, an
upstream protective device, e.g., an LV HRC fuse as group
backup fuse, supports a downstream protective device in
mastering the short-circuit current, i.e., both an upstream and
a downstream protective device trip. The short-circuit current,

however, has already been sufficiently reduced by the upstream
protective device so that the downstream protective device can
have a smaller short-circuit breaking capacity. Backup protection
should be used when the expected solid short-circuit current
exceeds the breaking capacity of the switching device or the
consumers. If this is not the case, an additional limiting protective device unnecessarily reduces the selectivity or, indeed,
removes it.
The following scheme should be followed for the selectivity or
backup protection decision:
Determine the maximum short-circuit current at the
installation point
Check whether the selected protective devices can master this
short-circuit current alone or with backup protection using
upstream protective devices
Check at which current the downstream protective devices and
the upstream protective devices are selective to each other.
Selectivity and backup protection exemplified

for a data center
Data centers place very high demands on the safety of supply. This
is particularly true for the consumers attached to the uninterruptible power supply, and ensures a reliable data backup in case of
a fault and service interruption. Those solutions providing selectivity and backup protection relying on the previously mentioned
SIMARIS design configuration tool should be presented at this
point. Fig. 4.4-5 shows a distribution system in SIMARIS design.
A 3WL circuit-breaker as outgoing feeder switch of the main
distribution is upstream to the distribution system shown here.
ACB 1.1A.1a
Circuit-breaker
In = 630 A
3WL11062CB411AA2/L51
LVMD 1.1A
Fuse-SD 1.1A.1a
Fuse switch-disc.
In = 100 A
3 x 3NA3830/Size 000
3NP40100CH01
TN-S Un = 400 V
Busbar 1.1A.1
Busbar
14 m
BD2A-2-160
TN-S Un = 400 V
LVSD 1.1A.1
MCB 1.1A.1.1a
In = 13 A
55Y63136/B
MCB 1.1A.1.2a
In = 13 A
55Y61136/B
MCB 1.1A.1.3a
In = 10 A
55Y61106/B
C/L 1.1A.1.1
Cable/Line
30 m
Cu 1(3x1.5/1.5/1.5)
C/L 1.1A.1.2
Cable/Line
30 m
Cu 1(3x1.5/1.5/1.5)
C/L 1.1A.1.3
Cable/Line
30 m
Cu 1(1x1.5/1.5/1.5)
Load 1.1A.1.1
Inner zone
In = 10 A
Un = 400 V
3+N-pole
Load 1.1A.1.2
Inner zone
In = 10 A
Un = 230 V
1+N-pole
Load 1.1A.1.3
Inner zone
In = 6 A
Un = 230 V
1+N-pole
Fig. 4.4-5: Subdistribution in a data center; display in SIMARIS design
211

The following figures show the selectivity diagrams for the

considered distribution system automatically generated by
SIMARIS design (fig. 4.4-6). SIMARIS design specifies the characteristic curve band of the considered circuit (red lines), the
envelope curves of all upstream devices (blue line) and all
downstream devices (green line). In addition to the specification
of the minimum and maximum short-circuit currents, any selectivity limits for the individual circuits are also specified.
Fig. 4.4-7 shows the selective grading of the 3WL circuit-breaker
from the main distribution system and the group backup fuse
(100 A LV HRC fuse) of the subdistribution system. The consumers critical for functional endurance which are installed in
a redundant manner in the subdistribution system should not be
protected with the same backup fuse but rather be assigned to
different groups.
The selectivity diagram shows the circuit diagram of a singlephase consumer in the subdistribution system. This circuit
diagram is protected with a 10 A miniature circuit-breaker with
characteristic B and for a maximum short-circuit current of
5,892 kA selective to the 100 A group backup fuse.
Fig. 4.4-6: Selectivity of the group backup fuse to the upstream

protective devices
The same subdistribution system also contains an example for

backup protection. Fig. 4.4-8 shows the selectivity diagram for
the combination of the group backup fuse with a 13 A miniature
circuit-breaker of the characteristic B. Up to the breaking
capacity of the 6 kA miniature circuit-breaker, the two protective
devices are selective to each other. Above this value, the current
is limited by the fuse and the miniature circuit-breaker protected
by a fuse; both devices trip.
SIMARIS design automatically generates these characteristic
curves to provide exact information about the maximum and
minimum short-circuit currents of the associated circuit.
Fig. 4.4-8 also shows up to which current (Isel-short-circuit) the
protective devices are selective to each other.
Fig. 4.4-7: Selectivity of the group backup fuse/miniature circuitdiagram combination
Fig. 4.4-8: Backup protection of the group backup fuse/miniature

circuit-breaker
212

4.4.5 The Safe Power Supply

of Tomorrow
Whether for wind power, photovoltaics or electromobility:
Siemens integrated portfolio offers high-quality and standardcompliant components for the implementation of sustainable
power concepts.
Ready for the future
In view of the limited resources of fossil fuels, the use of renewable energy sources is becoming increasingly important. Alongside wind turbines, photovoltaic systems are a key area of
interest. Both the ecological and economic aspects of these
systems are of great importance. As a global leading supplier
of first-class, standard-compliant components and systems
for low-voltage power distribution, Siemens contributes to
a responsible and sustainable use of electrical energy.
With a consistent portfolio enabling power supply and

distribution, personal, fire and line protection, as well as
power monitoring, Siemens supports sustainable energy
concepts in the areas of wind energy, photovoltaics, electromobility, and smart buildings, infrastructures, and industry
(fig. 4.4-9).
Wind power plants face demanding ambient conditions
The power output of a wind turbine can change with the wind
strength and direction quickly and unexpectedly. The components used in the nacelle are also subjected to mechanical
stresses and climatic effects around the clock especially lowfrequency vibrations and temperature changes between 25 C
and +50 C. Current-carrying components are also subjected to
thermal stress by the frequent on/off switching of the wind
turbine.
To reliably maintain the functional capability and availability of
the protection equipment under these circumstances, components must be used, which have a safe range that is matched to
the requirements of the wind turbine. Siemens protection,
switching and measuring devices with optional communication
modules, which support the monitoring of the plant and the
adherence to the service intervals, provide an ideal solution.
The main circuit of a wind turbine is responsible for power
generation via the generator and the transmission of power up
to the infeed into the grid (fig. 4.4-10). High power outputs
must be distributed and transmitted in the wind turbine safely
and with as little loss as possible. This can be achieved by means
of the LI system from the SIVACON 8PS busbar trunking systems,
which can be fitted both quickly and safely. It is ideally suited to
the distribution and transmission of power within the main
circuit for a current range of 800 A to 6,300 A.
The 3WL air circuit-breaker from the SENTRON portfolio protects
the main circuit in the event of overload and short circuit. It can
be fitted with various electronic trip units, which enable the
tripping characteristic to be optimally adapted to the conditions
required. The connection between the generator and the con-
Fig. 4.4-9: Key technologies for the power supply of tomorrow
213

verter, which has to contend with variable frequencies, is protected by the externally controlled 3WL air circuit-breaker. The
sensitive power semiconductors of the converter react sensitively to short circuit and overload. In the event of uncontrolled
failure due to extreme circumstances, this can result in substantial damage and downtime for the entire wind turbine. A particularly fast protective device is required for protection. SITOR
semiconductor fuses are the ideal solution for meeting these
requirements.
The equipment of vital functions of the wind turbine, like pitch
and yaw systems as well as ventilation or hydraulic systems,
must be fitted with coordinated components to ensure effective
protection against overvoltages, overloads, and short circuits.
The 3V molded-case circuit-breakers and the 3NP1 fuse switchdisconnectors protect the infeed system of the auxiliary circuits
against short circuit and overload. Miniature circuit-breakers and
fuse systems offer perfect protection for feeders and electrical
equipment against short circuit and overload. Residual current
operated circuit-breakers protect against electrically ignited fires
and offer personnel protection, e.g., in the case of insulation
faults. UC-sensitive residual-current-operated circuit-breakers of
types B and B+ guarantee maximum protection even when
1
2
3
~
6
Due to their usually exposed positions, wind turbines are at

particular risk of being struck by lightning. In order to protect
electrical equipment against lightning and overvoltages,
Siemens offers a graded portfolio of surge arresters of types
1, 2 and 3.
Within the electric circuits of a wind turbine, measurement
technology allows for the precise display and reliable monitoring of electrical variables. By recording changes in harmonic
or current mean values, critical system states, and system
component defects can be detected at an early stage, and
subsequent damage, such as caused by fire, can be prevented.
Thanks to their many communication options, the high-quality
7KM PAC measuring devices can be very easily integrated into
higher-level communication systems of the wind turbine or
wind farm control rooms for further processing of the measured data.
SENTRON circuit protection/

monitoring devices
SENTRON control and

switch-disconnectors
~
~
Gen
smooth DC residual currents arise. These can occur with frequency converters or defective switching network components.
Further key functions are available thanks to an extensive
range of accessories: remote tripping, remote reconnection,
and remote querying of switching states.
Aux
4
SENTRON protection
and measuring devices
5
3
6
SIVACON
busbar trunking systems
Fig. 4.4-10: Low-voltage power distribution devices in wind turbines (exerpt)
214

Standard-compliant components for photovoltaic systems

Photovoltaic (PV) systems play an important role in CO2 reduction and also make good business sense, not least in view of the
feed-in tariffs, guaranteed by local laws (e.g. German Renewable
Energy Sources Act EEG). The construction and operation of
photovoltaic systems is now integrated in a couple of standards
like IEC 60364-7-712 (VDE 0100-712) and IEC 60269-1/-6, as
well as in the series of standards VDE 0126 (also comprising
a couple of international standards like EN 50521, EN 50548,
and the series IEC 60904).
A central factor in the operation of a PV system that feeds into
the local power grid is grid safety. In the event of a fault, the PV
modules must be disconnected from the system at the infeed
point. It is also necessary to prevent infeed to the grid in the
event of grid and system faults. The standards require that
isolating arresters be provided on both sides of the inverter.
These must feature suitable load-switching capacity on both
the DC and AC sides.
It is absolutely necessary that switch-off equipment (disconnection under load for maintenance work, for example) is provided.
DC disconnectors designed with a suitable switching capacity for

direct currents enable functions such as safe disconnection
of the PV generator under load on all poles. According to the
standards, isolating equipment must be provided on the AC side.
The AC main switch must be able to safely disconnect the AC
circuit under load on all poles. The use of switch-disconnectors
with suitable AC switching capacity is recommended for this.
Overvoltage protection devices for the DC and AC sides limit
voltage spikes, caused by lightning strikes or gridside overvoltages, and ensure the safety and uninterrupted availability of
the system.
Siemens offers a high-quality, standard-compliant product range
for the operation of PV systems (fig. 4.4-11, fig. 4.4-12), which
guarantees a high level of operational safety and a long-term
stability of yield. Whether for lightning strikes, overloads, or
simply maintenance work the comprehensive and coordinated
range of SENTRON protection, switching, measuring, and monitoring devices offers all the components needed for the safe
construction and operation of photovoltaic systems from DC
overvoltage protection to universal current sensitive RCCBs
from a single source.
Light
PV generators
2
3
4
Inverter
U<
5TE2 DC disconnector
3NW PV cylinder fuse system
5SD7 DC overvoltage protection
5SL/5SY AC miniature circuit-breaker
5SP3 selective main miniature circuit-breaker
5SD7 AC overvoltage protection
5SM3 residual current circuit-breaker
7KT PAC1500 measuring device
kWh
Consumption meter
5
Infeed meter 8
kWh
For systems consisting of more than three strings,

protection against return currents (PV fuse) should
be provided
Overvoltage protection as well for the AC and DC
For increased safety in hazardous situations, such
as in case of fire, a remotely tripped DC isolator that
safely switches off the strings is recommended
Protection against short circuit and overload
on the AC
Calibrated measuring devices for settlement
purposes
Fig. 4.4-11: Example for the setup of a PV system
215

Sustainable technologies for the electromobility of tomorrow

Electromobility places special demands on the power grid and
the power supply companies, but also on personal and fire
protection at the charging point. Our comprehensive product
portfolio offers components and specific integrated solutions for
all requirements in the charging infrastructure (fig. 4.4-12). Our
tried-and-tested SENTRON protection, switching, and monitoring
devices provide a maximum of safety during the charging
operation. Matching components for the charging power,
ambient conditions, and point of installation are required from
the low-voltage power distribution range. Our offering includes
predefined integrated solutions compliant with standards like
the series IEC 61851 (VDE 0122) and IEC 62196 (VDE 0623),
which can be scaled in their functionality and performance class:
Miniature circuit-breaker or SIRIUS circuit-breaker for reliable
protection against overload and short circuit, as well as an
Insta contactor or a SIRIUS power contactor for switching the
voltage supply
For the conductive charging modes 1 to 4 according to

IEC 61851-1 (VDE 0122-1), Siemens offers overcurrent
protective devices and RCCBs
Surge arresters and measuring devices are recommended
For charging mode 3, the standard-compliant charging
controller family SIPLUS ECC is available
For charging mode 4 (DC charging via rectifier), Siemens
offers AC/DC sensitive RCCBs and overcurrent protective
devices as well as SITOR semiconductor fuses
The WB140A charging unit is a system-tested, CE-compliant
unit for charging electric vehicles in charging mode 3 in
accordance with IEC 61851-1 (VDE0122-1) and IEC 62196-1
(VDE 0623-5-1) for indoor and outdoor use, e.g., carports,
garages, workshops, underground parking garages, or
multistorey parking decks.
Wind power applications
Photovoltaic applications
Electromobility
3WL/3VA/3VL circuit-breakers protect against

short circuit and overload; 7KT/7KM
measuring devices monitor energy flows.
Cylindrical fuses and LV HRC fuses ensure

the safe operation of photovoltaic systems.
The WB140A charging unit is equipped

with tried-and-tested SENTRON protection,
switching, and monitoring devices.
Fig. 4.4-12: SENTRON components for sustainable energy concepts (excerpt)
216

4.5 Surge Arresters
The main task of an arrester is to protect equipment from the
effects of overvoltages. During normal operation, an arrester
should have no negative effect on the power system. Moreover,
the arrester must be able to withstand typical surges without
incurring any damage. Non-linear resistors with the following
properties fulfill these requirements:
Low resistance during surges so that overvoltages are limited
High resistance during normal operation so as to avoid
negative effects on the power system
Sufficient energy absorption capability for stable operation.
With this kind of non-linear resistor, there is only a small flow of
current when continuous operating voltage is being applied.
When there are surges, however, excess energy can be quickly
removed from the power system by a high discharge current.
Arrester voltage
referred to continuous
operating voltage /C
2
1
20 C
115 C
150 C
0
10-4
10-3
10-2
10-1
Rated voltage R
Continuous operating voltage C
104
101
102
103
Current through arrester Ia [A]
Fig. 4.5-1: Current/voltage characteristics of a non-linear

MO arrester
4.5.1 High-Voltage Surge Arresters

Non-linear resistors
Non-linear resistors, comprising metal oxide (MO), have proved
especially suitable for this use. The non-linearity of MO resistors
is considerably high. For this reason, MO arresters, as the
arresters with MO resistors are known today, do not need series
gaps (fig. 4.5-1).
Pressure relief
diaphragm
Seal
Flange with
gas diverter
nozzle
Siemens has many years of experience with arresters with

the previous gapped SiC arresters and the new gapless MO
arresters in low-voltage systems, distribution systems and
transmission systems. They are usually used for protecting
transformers, generators, motors, capacitors, traction vehicles,
cables, and substations
Compressing
spring
Metal-oxide
resistors
There are special applications such as the protection of:

Equipment in areas subject to earthquakes or heavy pollution
Surge-sensitive motors and dry-type transformers
Generators in power stations with arresters that possess
a high degree of short-circuit current strength
Gas-insulated high-voltage metal-enclosed switchgear (GIS)
Valves in HVDC transmission installations
Static compensators
Airport lighting systems
Electric smelting furnaces in the glass and metals industries
High-voltage cable sheaths
Test laboratory apparatus.
MO arresters are used in medium-, high-, and extra-high-voltage
power systems. Here, the very low protection level and the high
energy absorption capability provided during switching surges
are especially important. For high-voltage levels, the simple
construction of MO arresters is always an advantage. Another
very important advantage of MO arresters is their high degree of
reliability when used in areas with a problematic climate, for
example, in coastal and desert areas, or in regions affected by
heavy industrial air pollution. Furthermore, some special
applications have become possible only with the introduction
Composite
polymer
housing FRP
tube/silicone
sheds
Fig. 4.5-2: Surge arrester

in traditional
porcelain housing;
available for system
voltages up to
800 kV
Fig. 4.5-3: Cross-section of

a polymer-housed
arrester in tube
design
of MO arresters. One instance is the protection of capacitor

banks in series reactive-power compensation equipment that
requires extremely high energy absorption capabilities.
217

4.5 Surge Arresters
Tradition and innovation

Fig. 4.5-2 shows a Siemens MO arrester in a traditional porcelain
housing, a well proven technology representing decades of
Siemens experience. Siemens also offers surge arresters with
polymer housings for all system voltages and mechanical
requirements.
SF6-SF6 bushing
(SF6-oil bushing on request)
MO
FRP rods
These arresters are divided into two subgroups:

Cage design arresters
Tube design arresters.
Fig. 4.5-3 shows the sectional view of a tube design arrester. The
housing consists of a fiberglass-reinforced plastic tube with
insulating sheds made of silicone rubber. The advantages of this
design, which has the same pressure relief device as an arrester
with porcelain housing, are absolutely safe and reliable pressure
relief characteristics, high mechanical strength even after pressure relief, and excellent pollution-resistant properties. The very
good mechanical features mean that Siemens arresters with
a polymer housing (type 3EQ) can serve as post insulators as
well. The pollution-resistant properties are the result of the
water-repellent effect (hydrophobicity) of the silicone rubber,
which even transfers its effects to pollution.
Silicone
rubber sheds
Access
cover with
pressure
relief
device and
filter
Spring contact
Grading hood
Metaloxide resistors
Supporting rods
Enclosure
Fig. 4.5-4: 3EL-range surge

arrester in cage
design
Fig. 4.5-5: Gas-insulated metalenclosed arrester

(GIS arrester)
The newest types of polymer surge arresters also feature the

cage design. While using the same MO resistors, they have the
same excellent electrical characteristics as the 3EP and 3EQ
types. The difference is that the 3EL (fig. 4.5-4) types get their
mechanical performance from a cage built up by fiber-reinforced
plastic rods. Furthermore, the whole active part is directly and
completely molded with silicone rubber to prevent moisture
ingress and partial discharges. The polymer-housed high-voltage
arrester design chosen by Siemens and the high-quality materials used by Siemens provide a whole series of advantages,
including long life and suitability for outdoor use, high mechanical stability and ease of disposal.
Another important design are the gas-insulated metal-enclosed
surge arresters (GIS arresters, fig. 4.5-5). Siemens has been
making these arresters for more than 25 years. There are two
reasons why, when GIS arresters are used with gas-insulated
switchgear, they usually offer a higher protective safety margin
than when outdoor-type arresters are used: First, they can be
installed closer to the item to be protected so that traveling
wave effects can be limited more effectively. Second, compared
with the outdoor type, inductance of the installation is lower
(both that of the connecting conductors and that of the arrester
itself). This means that the protection offered by GIS arresters is
much better than that offered by any other method, especially in
the case of surges with a very steep rate of rise or high frequency, to which gas-insulated switchgear is exceptionally
sensitive.
Monitoring
Siemens also offers a wide range of products for diagnosis and
monitoring of surge arresters. The innovative arrester condition
monitor (fig. 4.5-6) is the heart of the future-proof (IEC 61850)
monitoring product line.
218
Fig. 4.5-6: Arrester condition

monitor (ACM)

4.5 Surge Arresters
4.5.2 Low-Voltage and Medium-Voltage

Surge Arresters and Limiters
Surge arresters and limiters protect operational equipment both
from external overvoltages caused by lightning strikes in overhead lines and from internal overvoltages produced by switching
operations or earth faults. Normally, the arrester is installed
between phase and earth. The built-in stack of non-linear,
voltage-dependent resistors (varistors) made of metal oxide
(MO) or zinc oxide (ZnO) becomes conductive from a defined
overvoltage limit value onward, so that the load can be discharged to earth. When the power-frequency voltage underflows
this limit value, called discharge voltage, the varistors return to
their original resistance value so that only a so-called leakage
current of a few mA flows at operating voltage. Because this
leakage current heats up the resistors, and thus the arrester, the
device must be designed according to the neutral-point treatment of the system in order to prevent impermissible heating of
the arrester.
Fig. 4.5-7: Medium-voltage

MO arrester for
special applications
In contrast to the normal surge arrester, the surge limiter contains a series gap in addition to the MO resistor stack. If the load
generated by the overvoltage is large enough, the series gap
ignites, and the overvoltage can be discharged to earth until the
series gap extinguishes and the varistors return to their non-conductive state. This process is repeated again and again
throughout the entire duration of the fault. This makes it possible to design the device with a considerably lower discharge
voltage as a conventional surge arrester, and is especially useful
for the protection of motors with normally a poor dielectric
strength. To guarantee a sufficient protective function, the
discharge voltage value of the arresters or limiters must not
exceed the dielectric strength of the operational equipment to
be protected.
The medium-voltage product range includes:
The 3EB and 3EC surge arresters for railway DC as well as AC
applications (fig. 4.5-7).
The 3EF group of surge arresters and limiters for the
protection of motors, dry-type transformers, airfield lighting
systems and cable sheath as well as for the protection of
converters for drives (fig. 4.5-7).
The 3EK silicone-housed surge arrester for distribution
systems, medium-voltage switchgear up to 72.5 kV and line
surge arresters for outdoor use (fig. 4.5-8 and fig. 4.5-9).

arrester 3EK4 for
distribution systems
An overview of the complete range of Siemens arresters appears

in the table 4.5-1 to table 4.5-3.

arrester 3EK7 for
distribution systems
219

4.5 Surge Arresters
Special
applications
Medium-voltage distribution
class
Railway applications
3EF1; 3EF3;
3EF4; 3EF5
3EB2
3EC3
3EB4
3EB1
3EK4
3EK7
SIEMENS
R
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
R
Motors, dry-type
transformers,
airfield lighting
systems, sheath
voltage limiters,
protection of
converters for
drives
DC overhead
contact lines
DC systems
(locomotives,
overhead
contact lines)
AC and DC
systems
(locomotives,
overhead
contact lines)
AC and DC
systems
(locomotives,
overhead
contact lines),
for highest
speed
Distribution
systems and
mediumvoltage
switchgear
Distribution
systems and
mediumvoltage
switchgear
Highest voltage for

12
equipment (Um) kV
72.5
30
45
72.5
Maximum rated
voltage
60 (AC);
4 (DC)
45 (AC);
4 (DC)
36
60
1
1
20
10
10
20
20
10
10 (AC);
20 (DC)
10
0.8
4
10
12.5
8
10
10
7 (AC);
10 (DC)
3.51)
4.41)
1,500
1,600 (AC);
1,500 (DC)
850 (AC);
1,200 (DC)
325
325
4
Applications
kV
15
3EF1
Nominal discharge
3EF3
current
kA 3EF4
3EF5
Maximum thermal
energy absorption
capability
(per kV of Ur) kJ/kV
3EF1
3EF3
3EF4
3EF5
Maximum longduration current

impulse, 2 ms
3EF4
3EF5
1,600
1,500
1,200
Rated short-circuit
40
current
kA
40
40
40
40
20
20
Housing material
Polyethylene
Silicone
Porcelain
Silicone
Silicone
Silicone
Silicone
Directly
molded
Hollow
insulator
Design principle
3EF1 polyethylene directly

molded onto MO;
3EF3/3EF4/ 3EF5
Hollow insulator
Hollow
insulator,
silicone directly
molded onto
FRP tube
Hollow
insulator,
silicone directly
molded onto
FRP tube
Cage design,
silicone directly
molded onto
MO
Cage design,
silicone directly
molded onto
MO
Pressure relief device
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
1)
Energy absorption capability under the conditions of the operating duty test according to IEC 60099-4
Table 4.5-1: Medium-voltage metal-oxide surge arresters and limiters (300 V to 72.5 kV)
220

4.5 Surge Arresters
Porcelain
Silicone
3EP5
3EP4
3EP6
3EP3
3EL5
3EL1
3EL2
3EQ1
3EQ4
3EQ3
3EQ5
Mediumand highvoltage
systems,
outdoor
installations
systems,
outdoor
installations
Highvoltage
systems,
outdoor
installations
Highvoltage
systems,
outdoor
installations,
HVDC,
SC&SVC
applications
systems,
station
and line
surge
arrester
systems,
station
and line
surge
arrester
systems,
station
and line
surge
arrester
systems,
outdoor
installations
Highvoltage
systems,
outdoor
installations
Highvoltage
systems,
outdoor
installations,
HVDC,
SC&SVC
applications
Highvoltage
systems,
outdoor
installations,
HVDC applications
Highest voltage for

equipment (Um) kV
123
362
800
800
145
362
550
362
800
800
1,200
Maximum rated
voltage
96
288
588
624
126
288
468
288
500
624
850
Maximum nominal
discharge current kA
10
10
20
20
10
10
20
10
20
20
20
Maximum line
discharge class
Maximum thermal
energy absorption
capability
kJ/kV
(per kV of Ur)
14
16
6.0
10
16
16
66
1,100
1,100
2,000
3,200
550
800
1,200
1,100
3,200
3,200
11,000
Rated short-circuit
current
kA
40
65
65
65
20
65
65
50
80
80
80
Maximum permissible
service load
kNm
2.0
(SSL)1)
4.5
(SSL)1)
16.0
(SSL)2)
34
(SSL)1)
0.5
(SSL)1)
1.2
(SSL)1)
4.0
(SSL)1)
6.0
(SSL)1)
38
(SSL)1)
72
(SSL)1)
225
(SSL)1)
Applications
Maximum longduration current

impulse, 2 ms
kV
Housing material
Porcelain
Design principle
Hollow insulator
Silicone directly molded

onto MO
Hollow insulator, silicone directly

molded onto FRP tube
Yes
No
Yes

1)
SSL = Specified short-term load
2)
Silicone
30.0 available on request
Table 4.5-2: High-voltage metal-oxide surge arresters (72.5 to 1,200 kV)
221

4.5 Surge Arresters
3ES5-C/M/N,
3ES4-K
3-phase
Applications
3ES2-E
1-phase
3ES4-L, 3ES5-H
1-phase
3ES9-J
1-phase
3ES with oilSF6

1-phase
3ES6
3-phase
High-voltage systems, protection of metal-enclosed, gas-insulated switchgear and transformers
Highest voltage for equipment (Um)
kV
170
245
550
800
550
420
Maximum rated voltage
kV
156
216
444
612
444
336
Maximum nominal discharge current kA
20
20
20
20
20
20
Maximum line discharge class
Maximum thermal energy absorption

kJ/kV
capability (per kV of Ur)
10
10
13
18
13
1,200
1,200
1,600
2,100
1,600
1,600
63
50
63
63
63
63
Maximum long-duration
current impulse, 2 ms
Rated short-circuit current
A
kA
Maximum permissible service load kNm

Housing material
Metal
Yes
Table 4.5-3: Metal-oxide surge arresters for GIS (72.5 to 800 kV)

Fax: ++ 49 30 3 86-3 32 22
222

4.6 Instrument
Transformers
4.6.1 High-Voltage Instrument
Transformers
Introduction
Electrical instrument transformers transform high currents and
voltages to standardized low and easily measurable values that
are isolated from the high voltage. When used for metering
purposes, instrument transformers provide voltage or current
signals that are very accurate representations of the transmission line values in both magnitude and phase. These signals
allow accurate determination of revenue billing.
When used for protection purposes, the instrument transformer

outputs must accurately represent the transmission line values
during both steady-state and transient conditions. These critical
signals provide the basis for circuit-breaker operation under fault
conditions, and as such are fundamental to network reliability
and security.
Instrument transformers used for network control supply important information for determining the state of the operating
conditions of the network.
Fig. 4.6-1: 800 kV gas-insulated

current transformers
Reliability and security

Reliability of an instrument transformer refers to its ability to
consistently satisfy prescribed performance criteria over its
expected useful lifetime under specified operating conditions.
Security refers to the acceptability and consequences of the
instrument transformer failure mode in the event that it does
fail, due either to being subjected to stresses in excess of those
for which it was designed, or due to its reaching the end of its
expected service life.
Oil-immersed instrument transformers

The reliability and security of Trench oil-insulated inductive
instrument transformers is proven by in-service experience
spanning up to 50 years and more than 100,000 units in service
under a wide variety of different environmental conditions in
almost every country worldwide. The transformer is based on
state-of-the-art design and a secure failure mode approach. In
the event of unexpected stresses from the network, secure
failure is achieved through the use of a barrier construction
design in the free oil section. This approach consists of inserting
insulating barriers at critical points through the free oil space,
thereby preventing the formation of fiber bridges.
The reliability and security characteristics of an instrument

transformer are governed by the electrical and insulation design,
the manufacturing and processing technology used and the
specific physical arrangement. The partial discharge performance under in-service conditions is a key determining factor in
the life expectancy and long-term reliability of an instrument
transformer.
IEC standards for oil-immersed or gas-filled devices require
a partial discharge value of less than 10 pC at Umax. Due to the
demanding requirements of todays HV and UHV networks, the
Trench Group has elected to adopt even more stringent internal
requirements. As such, Trench instrument transformers typically
perform much better than required by these standards with
proven field experience. Typical designs are oil-immersed
(fig. 4.6-2) or gas-insulated (fig. 4.6-1).
Fig. 4.6-2: 550 kV oil-immersed

Furthermore, a rupture of the housing, particularly of the hollow

insulator with built-in finely graded capacitor bushing, is improbable because of the safe dimensioning of the bushing and the
solid electrical connection between the core housing and the
ground.
If over pressure occurs, protection is guaranteed by the:
Welded elastic housing
Stainless-steel bellows for the oil expansion.
Both the welded seam, which connects the upper and lower
portions of the head housing, and the metallic bellows are
designed to act as pressure relief points in the event of severe
internal pressure buildup.
223

4.6 Instrument Transformers
Because the unit has a normal internal oil pressure of approximately 1 bar absolute, it is possible to design these pressure
relief points to rupture at very moderate pressures. Additional
safety is achieved by the selection of composite insulators,
available in the whole range as an alternative to the traditional
porcelain.
Pressure relief for capacitor voltage transformers is provided by
a bellows puncture pin and through the use of porcelain, which
is strong enough to result in any rapid pressure rise being
released through the seal plates at the ends of the porcelain
rather than via explosion of the porcelain itself.
under saline fog or polluted conditions. As a long-term benefit,

the change of cores or windings, even after years, can be realized easily for new requirements like additional metering.
All Trench current transformer (CT) designs are based on head
type construction. CTs are available with either oil (fig. 4.6-2,
fig. 4.6-3) or SF6 gas dielectric systems (fig. 4.6-4).
Gas-insulated instrument transformers

The reliability and security of Trench gas-insulated instrument
transformers is based on:
50 years of experience as a manufacturer of instrument
transformers covering epoxy resin and oil-paper
Thousands of gas-insulated instrument transformers in service
under a wide variety of different environmental conditions.
Explosion-proof design
The present Trench gas-insulated instrument transformers were
initially designed in 1965 at the request of customers who
sought to achieve explosion-proof operation. SF6 gas insulation,
combined with composite insulators, is particularly suitable for
this, because in the event of an internal flashover, the pressure
increase will be linear and hence technically manageable.
A controlled pressure relief device at the head of the transformer
(rupture disc) eliminates unacceptable mechanical stresses in
the housing; i.e., only the rupture disc is released. Gas escapes,
but the complete transformer remains intact and no explosion
occurs.
Fig. 4.6-3: 300 kV oil-immersed current transformers
Most reliable insulation properties

SF6 gas is the main insulation medium between high-voltage
and earth potential. A stable quality can be guaranteed by the
use of SF6 gas according to IEC 60137 (2005) / ASTM 2472 D and
the fact that this inert gas shows no ageing even under the
highest electrical and thermal stresses. The insulation properties
remain unchanged throughout its lifetime. All of these features
guarantee an operation period over many years without any
control of the insulation condition.
Full functional security and monitoring
The guaranteed SF6 leakage rate is less than 0.5 % per year. The
gas pressure can be checked on site or by means of a remote
control device, i.e., a densimeter with contacts for remote
control. In the case of loss of SF6 pressure, the transformer still
operates at rated pressure.
Environmentally beneficial under extremely severe conditions
SF6 gas is absolutely safe for humans. It bears no ecologically
toxic potential and its decomposition products have no deleterious effects on the environment, e.g. groundwater pollution.
This SF6 gas insulation medium allows easy waste management
of the transformers. Furthermore, the hydrophobic features of
the composite insulator result in problem-free service even
224
Fig. 4.6-4: 420 kV gas-insulated current transformers

Features of oil-immersed type

Low weight and minimum oil volume
Excellent seismic performance as a consequence of the
optimized design of flanges, vast choice of porcelain strengths
and their interconnection and low weight
Available for the full voltage range of 72.5 kV up to 550 kV
and full current range of few Amperes up to 5,000 A with
multiple-turn primaries for small primary currents. Ratio
change available either on primary side or secondary side
Short, symmetrically arranged low-reactance bar-type primary
conductor permits higher short-circuit currents up to 80 kA
and avoids large voltage drop across the primary winding
Excellent control of internal and external insulation stresses
through the use of a proprietary finely graded bushing system
Hermetically sealed by stainless-steel metallic bellows and
high-quality gaskets
Uniformly distributed secondary windings guarantee accurate
transformation at both rated and high currents
Essentially unaffected by stray external magnetic fields
Stable accuracy over life-time
Perfect transient performance
Exclusive use of corrosion-resistant materials
Full range of products available with composite insulator.
Features of gas-insulated transformer
Explosion-proof design by the compressible insulation medium
SF6 gas and rupture disc
Excellent seismic performance due to the properties of the
composite insulator
and full current range of 100 A up to 4,800 A
Low-reactance, bar-type primary providing optimal shortcircuit performance
Optimum field grading is accomplished by a fine condenser
grading system especially developed for this application
Multiple-turn primaries for small primary currents and
uniformly distributed secondary windings guarantee accurate
transformation at both rated and high currents
Stable accuracy over life-time
Replacing cores on assembled units is possible without
affecting the integrity of the high-voltage insulation.
Inductive voltage transformers
Inductive voltage transformers are designed for 72.5 kV to
800 kV systems and are used to provide voltage for metering and
protection applications. They are available with either oil
(fig. 4.6-5) or SF6 gas dielectric systems (fig. 4.6-6).
Features of oil-immersed type
Excellent seismic performance as a consequence of optimized
designs of flanges, large choice of porcelain strengths and
their interconnection and low weight
Fig. 4.6-5: 420 kV oil-paper

insulated inductive
voltage transformers

voltage transformer
Optimized high-voltage coil ensures identical electric stresses

under both transient and steady-state conditions
Hermetically sealed stainless-steel metallic bellows for units
rated 123 kV and above
Stable accuracy over a long period of time
Suitable for line discharging
Applicable as a low-cost alternative to small power
transformer
Features of gas-insulated transformer
composite insulator
Wide range ferroresonance-free design without the use of an
external damping device (please ask for details)
225

Essentially unaffected by external stray magnetic fields

Optimized high-voltage coil ensures identical electric stresses
under both transient and steady state conditions
Applicable as a low-cost alternative to small power
transformer.
Capacitor voltage transformer (oil-immersed)
Coupling capacitors (CC) are utilized to couple high-frequency
carrier signals to the power line. A CC supplied with an electromagnetic unit is called a capacitor voltage transformer (CVT) and
is used to provide voltage for metering and protection applications (fig. 4.6-7).
Features
Capable of carrier coupling PLC signals to the network
Optimized insulation system design utilizing state-of-the-art
processing techniques with either mineral oil or synthetic
insulating fluids
Stability of capacitance and accuracy over a long period of
time due to superior clamping system design
Oil expansion by way of hermetically sealed stainless-steel
bellows ensures the integrity of the insulation system over
time
Bellows puncture pin provides for release of internal pressure
in the event of severe service conditions leading to internal
discharges
Extra-high-strength porcelains provide both superior seismic
performance and the ability to mount large line traps directly
on the CVT with corresponding savings in installed cost
Maintenance-free oil-filled cast aluminum basebox
Superior transient response characteristics
Internal company routine tests and quality requirements
exceed those of international standards with impulse tests and
partial discharge test being performed on a routine basis
Not subject to ferroresonance oscillations with the network or
circuit-breaker capacitor
High-capacitance CVTs, when installed in close proximity to
EHV circuit-breakers, can provide enhanced circuit-breaker
short line fault/TRV performance.
Fig. 4.6-7: 245 kV capacitor

voltage transformers
Electronic voltage measuring system for HVDC

Trench offers special voltage transformers for HVDC systems.
These units are primarily used to control the HV valves of the
rectifiers or inverse rectifiers. The measuring system consists of
an RC voltage divider that provides inputs to a specially designed
electronic power amplifier. The high-voltage divider can be
supplied either for outdoor operation or for installation into SF6
gas-insulated switchgear (GIS).
The resulting system can accurately transform voltages within
a defined burden range with linear frequency response of up to
approximately 10 kHz. Thus, the system is ideal for measurement of dynamic and transient phenomena and harmonics
associated with HVDC systems.
Fig. 4.6-8: 245 kV oil-immersed combined instrument transformers
226

Combined instrument transformer

The combined instrument transformer offers the station
designer the ability of being able to accommodate the current
transformer and the voltage transformer in one free-standing
unit. This allows optimum use of substation space while yielding
cost savings by elimination of one set of mounting pads and
support structures. In addition, installation time is greatly
reduced. Combined ITs are available with either oil (fig. 4.6-8) or
SF6 gas dielectric systems (fig. 4.6-9, fig. 4.6-10).
Features of oil-immersed combined instrument transformers
Short symmetrically arranged low-reactance, bar-type primary
conductor permits higher short-circuit currents and avoids
large voltage drop across primary winding
and full current range of 0.5 A up to 5,000 A
Excellent seismic capability as a consequence of optimized
design of flanges, large choice of porcelain strengths and their
interconnection and low weight
Hermetically sealed by stainless-steel metallic bellows and
high-quality gaskets
Only one foundation required in the switchyard as
a consequence of combining the voltage and current-sensing
functions in one transformer
Uniformly distributed secondary windings guarantee accurate
transformation at both rated and high current
Features of gas-insulated combined instrument transformers
Head-type design with voltage transformer section located on
top of the current transformer
Low weight and compact SF6 design
composite insulator
The single-section high-voltage coil (not cascaded) of the
voltage transformer section enables a product range for
combined instrument transformers of up to 800 kV
Wide-range ferroresonance-free design without the use of an
external damping device
Low-reactance type primary conductor allows for high shortcircuit currents and covers all core standards
Less foundation space required compared to individual current
transformers and voltage transformers
Essentially unaffected by external stray magnetic fields
Exclusive use of corrosion-resistant materials.
4
combined instrument
transformers

combined instrument
transformer
227

Instrument transformer for GIS

In addition to the measurement of the voltages and currents,
this instrument transformer type for voltage measurement
(inductive) has the best discharge capabilities for HV lines
(fig. 4.6-11, fig. 4.6-14, fig. 4.6-15, fig. 4.6-16).
Features of inductive type
Custom-designed instrument transformers for each specific
application and extended function designs comply with
dimensional restrictions, flange sizes and insulator
requirements
Standard designs for 1-phase and 3-phase units
Meets all national and international standards in regard to
pressure vessel codes
Prevention of occurrence of stable ferroresonances by
integrated ferroresonance suppression
Shielded against transient overvoltages in accordance with
IEC standards. Special additional shielding is available
Guaranteed SF6 leakage rate of less than 0.5 % per year
Equipped with pressure relief disc and deflection device
All components are designed and tested for mechanical stress
to withstand up to at least 20 g
Accuracy classes in accordance with DIN VDE 0414, IEC 60044,
ANSI: IEEE C57.13, AS 1243 (other standards or classes on
request)
Shock indicators warn against inadmissible acceleration
during transportation.
Fig. 4.6-11: 145 kV inductive

voltage transformer
for GIS
RC dividers
Resistive-capacitive voltage dividers, also called resistive-capacitive voltage transformers, are designed for measurement of
the voltage in HVDC transmission systems, air-insulated (AIS)
(fig. 4.6-13) or gas-insulated (GIS) switchgear (fig. 4.6-12). In AC
transmission systems, the transformers are used for the measurement of harmonics and they give an accurate representation
of the voltage over a wide frequency band (typically from DC up
to 500 kHz).
Features of RC dividers
RC divider for voltage measurements
Conform to microprocessor-based secondary technology
Ferroresonance-free
Able to perform voltage test on site
1-phase or 3-phase system
Significant size and weight reduction.
LoPo the low-power transducers
The low-power current transducers (LPCT) and low-power
voltage transducers (LPVT) can be used for a wide range of
medium-voltage and high-voltage applications in which
they replace the conventional measuring transformers for
measurement and protection purposes.
Fig. 4.6-13: 420 kV RC dividers

(AC) for AIS
228
Fig. 4.6-12: 145 kV RC divider

for GIS

Features
The voltage transducers are based on resistive, capacitive, as
well as resistive-capacitive dividers
The current transducers are based on an iron-core or an
air-core design and provide a secondary voltage that
represents the primary current
Standard cables and connectors; twisted pair and double
shielded cable
Connection capability for multiple protection and measuring
devices
Metal-clad housing ensuring operator safety
Immune to all methods of online switchgear and cable testing
Current transducers provide a linear transmission up to shortcircuit current
Completely EMC shielded: immune to RFI/EMI.
Advantages
System conforms to low-power digital microprocessor-based
technology for protection and metering
Simple assembly with compact size and low weight
No secondary circuit problems; voltage transducers are shortcircuit-proof, current transducers can have an open secondary
Voltage transducers are ferroresonance-free
Environment-friendly (no oil).
Fig. 4.6-14: 420 kV core-in-air current transformer for GIS
Non conventional instrument transformers

Conventional instrument transformers provide high power
output in a proven insulation technology, using mainly inductive
technology. Non conventional instrument transformers (NCIT)
are current and/or voltage measurement devices that provide
a low output power (< 0.5 VA). The NCIT technologies Trench is
providing are Low Power Current Transformers with voltage
output and RC dividers, which are both described in previous
chapters. They have a wide linearity range and their output
signals are suitable to match to modern secondary equipment
such as Merging Units.
Merging units convert the output signals of both conventional
and non conventional instrument transformers into a digital
signal according to the IEC 61850-9-2 protocol. The output is
a standardized data stream independent from sensor features.
The measurements are distributed with one optical Ethernet
connection. The only burden of the instrument transformer is
the input impedance of the merging unit. A Trench Merging Unit
is under preparation.
Fig. 4.6-15: 145 kV Siemens switchgear 8DN8 with Trench voltageand current transformer
Fig. 4.6-16: 420 kV Siemens switchgear 8DQ1 with Trench voltage

transformer and Trench core-in-air current transformer
229

4.6.2 Power Voltage Transformers

Power voltage transformers for AIS
Power voltage transformers (Power VTs) avoid major investments to achieve power supply for remote customers. The Power
VTs just have to be connected directly to the high-voltage overhead line to ensure customized power supply. A power VT for
AIS is shown in fig. 4.6-17.
Features of Power VTs for AIS
Available for the full voltage range of 72.5 up to 800 kV
SF6 or oil insulated power enhanced instrument voltage
transformer with proven reliability
Composite insulator (fibre-glass insulator with silicone sheds)
Maintenance free
Single phase unit.
Applications
Power supply for remote farms and small villages
Power supply for relay stations for mobile phones
Auxiliary power supply for substations
Power supply during substation construction works.
Power voltage transformers for GIS
Inductive Voltage Transformer with different active parts
becomes a Power VT, which then allows for a high-voltage test
of the primary system without special high-voltage test equipment. A Power VT for GIS is shown in fig. 4.6-18.
Fig. 4.6-17: 145 kV, 100 kVA

gas-insulated power
VT for AIS
Features of Power VTs for GIS

Same dimension as standard VTs and also usable like
a standard VT
No extra space needed for installation of huge high-voltage
testing facilities
No SF6-gas handling at site needed for test preparation
Reduced transport and packages requirements
After test the switchgear can be put into operation without
mechanical work on the primary circuit (i.e. normally the
high-voltage test set must be removed)
Easy support by neutral testing companies (e.g. OMICRON)
or testing institutes
With a Power VT the high-voltage test becomes like testing
a protection relay
Light weight units allow handling at site without lifting
facilities or cranes
Power supply via standard socket outlet
(e.g. 1-phase, 230 V, 16 A)
Test facilities available with transport cases allowing transport
as carry-on luggage during travelling to site or the use of
standard parcel services
Test preparation within minutes e.g. after S/S-extension,
re-assembling or extensive service activities
Low investment in site-based testing facilities
Possibility for investigation into sporadic effects at PD test
voltage levels.
An overview of the range of Trench instrument transformers
appears in table 4-6.1 to table 4-6.7.
230
Fig. 4.6-18: 145 kV power VT

for GIS

Current transformers for gas-insulated switchgear (GIS)
Type
Voltage range
[kV]
SAD/SA
LPCT
72.5 550
72.5 550
SF6
Insulation medium
Technical data SAD/SA

Voltage level
[kV]
72.5
123
145
170
245
300
Output current
[A]
Rated short-time thermal

current
[kA]
[s]
Rated dynamic current
[kA]
Rated frequency
[Hz]
16 2/3 50 60
Temperature range
[C]
35 +60
362
420
550
1 5 (LoPo: 3.25 V)
31.5
50
63
13
78.75
Insulation class
125
160
E, F
Metering accuracy class
0.1 0.2 0.2S 0.5 0.5S 1.0
Protection accuracy class
5P 10P TPY TPX TPZ TPS PR PX
Values in accordance with IEC; other values like ANSI are available
Table 4.6-1: Technical data of Trench current transformers for gas-insulated switchgear (GIS)
231

Voltage transformers / RC dividers for gas-insulated switchgear (GIS)
Type
Voltage range
[kV]
SUD/SU
RCVD
72.5 800
72.5 550
SF6
Oil / SF6
Insulation medium
Technical data SUD/SU
Voltage level
[kV]
72.5
123
145
170
245
300
362
420
550
800
withstand voltage
[kV]
140
230
275
325
460
460
510
630
680
975

withstand voltage
[kV]
325
550
650
750
1,050
1,050
1,175
1,425
1,550
2,100

withstand voltage
[kV]
850
950
1,050
1,175
1,550
Output voltage
[V]
110/3 200/3 (other values upon request) (AC & DC RC divider: 5 200V)
Rated voltage factor
1.2 1.5 1.9 (other values upon request)
Rated frequency
[Hz]
16 50 60
Temperature range
[C]
35 +40 (other values upon request)
Insulation class
0.1 0.2 0.5 1.0 3.0
Output burden
for different classes according to customer specification
3P 6P
Output burden
Thermal limiting output
2,000
IID
Values in accordance with IEC; other values like ANSI are available;
1)
3,000 1)
valid only for voltage transformers
Table 4.6-2: Technical data of Trench voltage transformers for gas-insulated switchgear (GIS)
232

Current transformers for air-insulated switchgear (AIS)
Type
Voltage range
[kV]
SAS
TAG
IOSK
72.5 800
72.5 550
72.5 550
Insulation medium
SF6
SF6
Oil
Composite insulator
Porcelain insulator
Technical data
Voltage level
[kV]
72.5
123
145
170
245
300
362
420
550
800
withstand voltage
[kV]
140
230
275
325
460
460
510
630
680
975

withstand voltage
[kV]
325
550
650
750
1,050
1,050
1,175
1,425
1,550
2,100

withstand voltage
[kV]
850
950
1,050
1,175
1,550
[A]
5,000
Output current
[A]
125
Rated short-time thermal

current
[kA]
63 (80 on special request)
Rated duration of short

circuit
[s]
[kA]
Rated frequency
[Hz]
16 50 60
Creepage distance
[mm/
kV]
25 31 (higher upon request)
Temperature range
[C]
Insulation class
13

E (SF6 insulated devices) A (oil insulated devices)
0.1 0.2 0.2S 0.5 0.5S 1.0
Table 4.6-3: Technical data of Trench current transformers for air-insulated switchgear (AIS)
233

Voltage transformers / RC dividers for air-insulated switchgear (AIS)
Type
Voltage range
[kV]
SVS
TVG
VEOT/VEOS
TCVT
AC RCD
DC RCD
72.5 800
72.5 420
72.5 550
72.5 1200
72.5 800
72.5 800
Insulation medium
SF6
SF6
Oil
Oil
Oil
Oil / SF6
Composite insulator
Porcelain insulator
Technical data
Voltage level
[kV]
72.5
123
145
170
245
300
362
420
550
800
withstand voltage
[kV]
140
230
275
325
460
460
510
630
680
975

withstand voltage
[kV]
325
550
650
750
1,050
1,050
1,175
1,425
1,550
2,100

withstand voltage
[kV]
850
950
1,050
1,175
1,550
Output voltage
[V]
110/3 200/3 (other values upon request) (AC & DC RC divider: 5 200V)
Rated frequency
[Hz]
16 50 60 (AC & DC RC divider: 0 1 MHz)
Creepage distance
[mm/
kV]
Temperature range
[C]

E (SF6 insulated devices) A (oil-insulated devices)
Insulation class
0.1 0.2 0.5 1.0 3.0
Output burden (only AC)

(very low output burden for RC divider > 100 k)
3P 6P
Output burden (only AC)
[VA]
3,000 1)
Values in accordance with IEC; other values like ANSI are available; 1) valid only for voltage transformers
Table 4.6-4: Technical data of Trench voltage transformers for air-insulated switchgear (AIS)
234

Combined instrument transformers for air-insulated switchgear (AIS)
Type
Voltage range
[kV]
SVAS
AVG
IVOKT
72.5 800
72.5 245
72.5 300
Insulation medium
SF6
SF6
Oil
Composite insulator
Porcelain insulator
Technical data
Voltage level
withstand voltage
withstand voltage
withstand voltage
[kV]
72.5
123
145
170
245
300
362
420
550
800
[kV]
140
230
275
325
460
460
510
630
680
975
[kV]
325
550
650
750
1,050
1,050
1,175
1,425
1,550
2,100
[kV]
850
950
1,050
1,175
1,550
Rated frequency
[Hz]
16 50 60
Creepage distance
[mm/
kV]
Temperature range
[C]

CT ratings
[A]
5,000
Output current
[A]
125
Rated short-time thermal current [kA]

[s]
[kA]
Insulation class

13
E (SF6 insulated devices) A (oil insulated devices)
0.1 0.2 0.2S 0.5 0.5S 1.0

VT ratings
Output voltage
[V]
0.1 0.2 0.5 1.0 3.0
Output burden
3P 6P
Output burden
110/3 200/3 (other values upon request)

[VA]
3000 (other values upon request)
Table 4.6-5: Technical data of Trench combined instrument transformers for air-insulated switchgear (AIS)
235

Power voltage transformers for air-insulated switchgear (AIS)
Type
PSVS
Technical data
Voltage level
[kV]
72.5
123
145
170
245
362
420
550
Rated power-frequency withstand voltage IEC
[kV]
140
230
275
325
460
460
510
630
680
Rated lighting impulse withstand voltage IEC
[kV]
325
550
650
750
1,050
1,050
1,175
1,425
1,550
Rated switching impulse withstand voltage IEC
[kV]
850
950
1,050
1,175
Rated power frequency withstand voltage IEEE
[kV]
140
230
275
325
460
460
575
800
Rated lighting impulse withstand voltage IEEE
[kV]
350
550
650
750
1,050
1,050
1,300
1,800
Rated switching impulse withstand voltage IEE
[kV]
825
825
1,175
Output power
[kVA]
up to 75
Output voltage
[V]
up to 125
120 to 400 (values in between according to customer specification)
1.5 (30 s) 1.4 (60 s)
Rated frequency
[Hz]
Creepage distance
[mm/kV]
Temperature range
[C]
50 60
30 1) +40 1)
Insulation class
E
0.2 2)
Metering accuracy class IEC
1.0 2) 3.0
3P 2) 6P

Values in accordance with IEC and IEEE; other values upon request
0.5 2)
0.3 2) 0.6 2) 1.2 2)
Metering accuracy class IEEE

1)
lower or higher temperature upon request
2)
not under full load condition
Table 4.6-6: Technical data of Trench power voltage transformers for air-insulated switchgear (AIS)
236
300

Power voltage transformers for gas-insulated switchgear (GIS)
Type
PSUD
Technical data
Voltage level
[kV]
72.5
123
145
[kV]
140
230
275
Rated lighting impulse withstand voltage
[kV]
325
550
650
[kV]
Rated frequency
[Hz]
50 60
Output power
[kVA]
depends on customer-specific load cycle
Output voltage
[V]
as required (typically 110/3)

Temperature range
1.9 for 8 h
[C]
30 +50
Insulation class
E
according to IEC 61869-3
Table 4.6-7: Technical data of Trench power voltage transformers for gas-insulated switchgear (GIS)

Instrument Transformers Portfolio:
http://www.trenchgroup.com/Products-Solutions/Instrument-Transformers
237

4.7 Coil Products
Introduction
With 60 years of successful field experience, Trench is the recognized world leader in the design and manufacture of air-core,
dry-type, power reactors for all utility and industrial applications.
The unique custom design approach, along with fully integrated
engineering and manufacturing facilities in North America,
Brazil, Europe and China have enabled Trench to become the
technical leader for high-voltage inductors worldwide.
A deep commitment to the power industry, along with extensive
investment in engineering, manufacturing and test capability, give
Trench customers the utmost in high-quality, reliable products that
are individually designed for each application. Trench reactor
applications have grown from small-distribution class, current-limiting reactors to complex EHV-applied reactors surpassing 300 MVA
per coil.
Reactors are manufactured in accordance with ISO 9001, 14001

and 18001 standards. Trenchs highly developed research and
development program constantly addresses new technologies
and their potential application in reactor products. Trench
welcomes challenges for new applications for power reactors.
Design features
Design features of air-core dry-type reactors are:
Epoxy impregnated, fiberglass-encapsulated construction
Aluminum construction throughout with all current-carrying
connections welded
Highest mechanical and short-circuit strength
Essentially zero radial-voltage stress, with uniformly graded
axial-voltage distribution between terminals
Low noise levels are maintained throughout the life of the
reactor
Weatherproof construction, with minimum maintenance
requirements
Design service life in excess of 30 years
Designs available in compliance with ANSI/IEEE, IEC and other
major standards.
Construction
A Trench air-core dry-type reactor consists of a number of parallel-connected, individually insulated, aluminum (copper on
request) conductors (fig. 4.7-1). These conductors can be small
wire or proprietary cables custom-designed and custom-manufactured. The size and type of conductor used in each reactor is
dependent on the reactor specification. The various styles and
sizes of conductors available ensure optimum performance at
the most economical cost.
The windings are mechanically reinforced with epoxy resinimpregnated fiberglass, which after a carefully defined ovencure cycle produces an encapsulated coil. A network of horizontal and vertical fiberglass ties coupled with the encapsulation
minimizes vibration in the reactor and achieves the highest
available mechanical strength. The windings are terminated at
each end to a set of aluminum bars called a spider. This con-
238
Lifting eyenut
Metallic spider
Cooling duct
spacers
Terminal
Insulator
Fig. 4.7-1: Typical Trench air-core dry-type reactor construction
struction results in a very rigid unit capable of withstanding the

stresses developed under the most severe short-circuit conditions.
Exceptionally high levels of terminal pull, tensile strength, wind
loading and seismic withstand can be accommodated with the
reactor. This unique design can be installed in all types of climates and environments and still offer optimum performance.
Trench air-core dry-type reactors are installed in polluted and
corrosive areas and supply trouble-free operation. In addition to
the standard fixed reactance type of coil, units can be supplied
with taps for variable inductance. A number of methods are
available to vary inductance for fine-tuning or to provide a range
of larger inductance steps.
In addition, Trench utilizes various other designs for reactors,
e.g., iron-core and water-cooled.
Series reactors
Reactors are connected in series with the line or feeder. Typical
uses are fault-current reduction, load balancing in parallel
circuits, limiting inrush currents of capacitor banks, etc.
Current-limiting reactors
Current-limiting reactors reduce the short-circuit current to
levels within the rating of the equipment on the load side of the
reactor (fig. 4.7-2). Applications range from the simple distribution feeder reactor to large bus-tie and load-balancing reactors
on systems rated up to 765 kV/2100 kV BIL.

4.7 Coil Products
Capacitor reactors
Capacitor reactors are designed to be installed in series with
a shunt-connected capacitor bank to limit inrush currents due to
switching, to limit outrush currents due to close-in faults, and to
control the resonant frequency of the system due to the addition
of the capacitor banks. Reactors can be installed on system
voltages through 765 kV/2100 kV BIL. When specifying capacitor
reactors, the requested continuous current rating should
account for harmonic current content, tolerance on capacitors
and allowable system overvoltage.
Buffer reactors for electric arc furnaces
The most effective performance of electric arc furnaces is achieved
by operating the furnace at low electrode current and long arc
length. This requires the use of a series reactor in the supply
system of the arc furnace transformer for stabilizing the arc.
Duplex reactors
Duplex reactors are current-limiting reactors that consist of two
half coils, magnetising against each other. These reactors provide a desirable low reactance under normal conditions and
a high reactance under fault conditions.
Load-flow control reactors
Load-flow control reactors are series-connected on transmission
lines of up to 800 kV. The reactors change the line impedance
characteristic such that load flow can be controlled, thus ensuring
maximum power transfer over adjacent transmission lines.
Fig. 4.7-2: 3-phase stacked current-limiting reactor
Filter reactors
Filter reactors are used in conjunction with capacitor banks to
form tuned harmonic filter circuits, or in conjunction with
capacitor banks and resistors to form broadband harmonic filter
circuits. When specifying filter reactors, the magnitudes of
fundamental and harmonic frequency current should be indicated. If inductance adjustment for fine-tuning is required, the
required tapping range and tolerances must be specified. Many
filter applications require a Q factor that is much lower than the
natural Q of the reactor. This is often achieved by connecting
a resistor in the circuit.
An economical alternative is the addition of a de-Qing ring
structure on a reactor. This can reduce the Q factor of the reactor
by as much as one tenth without the necessity of installing
additional damping resistors. These rings, mounted on the
reactor, are easily coupled to the magnetic field of the reactor.
This eliminates the concern of space, connection and reliability
of additional components such as resistors.
Shunt reactors
Shunt reactors are used to compensate for capacitive VARs
generated by lightly loaded transmission lines or underground
cables. They are normally connected to the transformer tertiary
winding but can also be directly connected on systems of up to
345 kV.
Thyristor-controlled shunt reactors (TCR) are extensively used
in static VAR systems in which reactive VARs are adjusted by
Fig. 4.7-3: Tertiary-connected shunt reactors
239

4.7 Coil Products
thyristor circuits (fig. 4.7-3). Static VAR compensator reactor

applications normally include:
Thyristor-controlled shunt reactors. The compensating power
is changed by controlling the current through the reactor by
means of the thyristor valves.
Thyristor-switched reactors (TSR)
Thyristor-switched capacitor reactors (TSC)
Filter reactors (FR)
Step less adjustable shunt reactors with iron core in oil filled
design.
HVDC reactors
HVDC lines are used for long-distance bulk power transmission
as well as back-to-back interconnections between different
transmission networks. HVDC reactors normally include
smoothing reactors, AC and DC harmonic filter reactors, as well
as AC and DC PLC noise filter reactors. In addition, self-commutated HVDC schemes include converter reactors.
Smoothing reactors
Smoothing reactors (fig. 4.7-4) are used to reduce the magnitude of the ripple current in a DC system. They are used in power
electronics applications such as variable-speed drives and UPS
systems. They are also required on HVDC transmission lines for
system voltages of up to 800 kV. Several design and construction
techniques are offered by Trench.
Fig. 4.7-4: HVDC smoothing

reactor
Test lab reactors

Test lab reactors are installed in high-voltage and high-power
test laboratories. Typical applications include current-limiting,
synthetic testing of circuit-breakers, inductive energy storage
and artificial lines.
Neutral earthing reactors
Neutral earthing reactors limit the line-to-earth fault current to
specified levels. Specification should also include unbalanced
condition continuous current and short-circuit current duration.
Arc-suppression coils
Single-phase neutral earthing (grounding) reactors
(arc-suppression coils) are intended to compensate for the
capacitive line-to-earth current during a 1-phase earth fault. The
arc-suppression coil (ASC) represents the central element of the
Trench earth-fault protection system (fig. 4.7-5).
Because the electric system is subject to changes, the inductance of the ASC used for neutral earthing must be variable. The
earth-fault protection system developed by Trench utilizes the
plunger core coil (moveable-core design). Based on extensive
experience in design, construction and application of ASCs,
Trench products can meet the most stringent requirements for
earth-fault compensating techniques.
Fig. 4.7-5: Arc-suppression coil 110 kV

Coil Products Portfolio:
www.trenchgroup.com/Products-Solutions/Coil-Products
Coil Products Downloads:
www.trenchgroup.com/Downloads/Coil-Products
240

4.8 Bushings
Introduction
HSP Hochspannungsgerte GmbH known as HSP and Trench
have a long history and a well-known reputation in manufacturing high-voltage bushings and equipment. Both are world
leaders in power engineering and design of specialized electrical
products.
As HSP & Trench Bushing Group they share their knowledge in
the development, design and production of AC and DC bushings
up to 1,200 kV. Customers will substantially benefit from their
close cooperation in terms of innovation, joint research & development, and common design.
The bushing group provides a wide range of bushing products
including bushings for power transformers and HVDC transmission. The portfolio includes epoxy-resin-impregnated bushings
(ERIP) up to 1,200 kV, oil-impregnated paper bushings (OIP) up
to 1,200 kV, and SF6-gas bushings up to 1,200 kV. Whatever
your bushing requirements, the bushing group has the right
bushing for your application.
Their technologies have been successfully in service for more
than 60 years now. The bushing group operates globally from
their production locations in Troisdorf (Germany), St. Louis
(France), Shenyang (China) and their sales office in Pickering
(Canada).
4.8.1 High-Voltage Bushings

A bushing is an electrical engineering component that insulates
a high-voltage conductor passing through a metal enclosure or
a building. Bushings are needed on:
Transformers
Buildings
Gas-insulated switchgear (GIS)
Generators
Other high-voltage equipment.
Typical environmental conditions are:
Oil-to-air
Oil-to-gas
Oil-to-oil
SF6-to-air
Air-to-air.
The internal insulation of a bushing is made of a combination of
different insulating materials:
Oil-impregnated paper (OIP)
Epoxy-resin-impregnated paper (ERIP)
SF6 gas.
The external insulation is made of:
Epoxy resin for indoor applications
Porcelain or fiberglass tubes with silicone rubber sheds for
outdoor application
1
2
3
4
4
7
9
10
1. Terminal
2. Assembly
3. Head
4. Oil filling
5. Insulator
6. Active part
7. Flange
8. CT pocket
9. Oil-side end
10. End shielding
Fig. 4.8-1: Transformer bushing oil-impregnated paper (OIP) design

sectional view
Selected state-of-the-art bushing designs are described in the

sections that follow.
Transformer bushings: oil-impregnated paper design (OIP)
An oil-impregnated paper transformer bushing is made of the
following components (fig. 4.8-1):
1. Terminal
Terminal (Al or Cu) for connection of overhead lines or busbars
and arcing horns. State-of-the-art designs provide maintenancefree termination, and ensure that the connection will not
become loose in service.
2. Assembly
The whole bushing is tightened together by the central tube or
conductor.
241

4.8 Bushings
3. Head
Al-casted head with oil expansion chamber and oil level indicator.
The chamber is hermetically sealed against the atmosphere.
4. Oil filling
State-of-the-art bushings are filled with dried, degassed insulating mineral oil.
5. Insulator
Porcelain insulator made of high-grade electrotechnical porcelain according to IEC 815. The insulator is connected to the
mounting flange using Portland cement, and sealed with O-ring
gasket. Composite insulators are increasingly demanded and are
readily available.
6. Active part
The active part is made of oil-impregnated wide-band paper with
conductive layers made of aluminum foil to control the electrical
field radially and axially. Depending on the current rating, the
paper and foil are wound on either a central tube or a solid
conductor.
7. Flange
The mounting flange with integrated test tap made of corrosion
free aluminum alloy is machined to ensure an excellent seal
between the bushing and the transformer.
8. CT pocket
If current transformers are required on the bushing, the ground
sleeve can be extended.
1
2
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Terminal
Dry filling
Insulator
Active part
Flange
Oil-side end
Fig. 4.8-2: Transformer bushing epoxy-resin-impregnated paper

(ERIP) design sectional view
9. Oil-side end
The insulator on the oil side is made of an epoxy resin tube. It is
designed to stay installed during the in-tank drying process of the
transformer, and can withstand temperatures of up to 130 C.
10. End shielding
For voltages starting with 52 kV, a special aluminum electrode is cast
into the end of the epoxy resin tube. This end shielding controls the
electrical field strength in this area to earth.
Transformer bushings: epoxy-resin-impregnated
paper design (ERIP)
An epoxy-resin-impregnated paper transformer bushing is made
of the following components (fig. 4.8-2).
Fig. 4.8-3: Transformer bushing high current
1. Terminal
Terminal (Al or Cu) for connection of overhead lines or busbars
and arcing horns. State-of-the-art designs provide maintenancefree termination, and ensure that the connection will not
become loose in service.
2. Dry filling
State-of-the-art bushings are filled with dry-type foam.
3. Insulator
The external insulation consists of a composite insulator with
silicone sheds. These are vulcanized on the mechanical support,
242
a high-quality wound insulating tube made of epoxy resins with

glass fiber laminate structure. In most cases the flange is part of
the insulator.
4. Active part
The active part is made of resin-impregnated paper with conductive layers made of aluminum foil to control the electrical field
radially and axially. Depending on the current rating, the paper
and foil are wound on either a central tube or a solid conductor.

4.8 Bushings
5. Flange
The mounting flange with integrated test tap made of corrosion
free aluminum alloy is machined to ensure an excellent seal
between the bushing and the transformer.
6. Oil-side end (including CT pocket if required)
The insulator on the oil side is made of an epoxy resin tube. It is
designed to stay installed during the in-tank drying process of the
transformer, and can withstand temperatures of up to 130 C.
Transformer bushings: high current

High-current bushings for transformer-to-phase busbar-isolated
connections are designed for 24 kV to 52 kV and currents from
7,800 A to 40,000 A. Conductors are in standard aluminum or
copper on request. The main insulation is vacuum-impregnated
epoxy condenser (fig. 4.8-3).
Other transformer bushings: oil-to-gas and oil-to-oil
Oil-to-gas types are intended for the direct connection of power
transformers to gas-insulated switchgear; oil-to-oil types are
intended for the direct connections within the power transformer (fig. 4.8-4). Both consist of a main insulating body of
ERIP (epoxy-resin-impregnated paper). The condenser core is
made of special epoxy resin vacuum-impregnated paper incorporating grading foils to ensure uniform voltage distribution. This
insulation has proven its reliability in over 40 years of service in
Connections
The modular bushing systems offer a large choice of connecting
systems. At the upper end of the bushing head, there is a clamp
through which the conductor or the cable bolt is fixed. A releasable cross-pinned fitting at the clamping device prevents it from
slipping into the transformer during operation. In addition it
serves as locking element. The bolt is sealed through double
seals. The clamp is made of stainless steel, and all screws are of
non-corrosive steel. The venting of the central tube is located on
one side under the edge of the clamp, and can be operated
independently of the conductor bolt. In addition to the
cable bolt, solid conductor bolts are available, e.g., for highercurrent applications. These bolts are wedged against the inner
wall of the central tube with insulated spacers. Solid conductor
bolts can be provided with a separation point, preferably at the
flange or to suit any particular case. The bolts are equipped with
a threaded hole at the top, so that a draw wire or a rod can be
screwed in and the bolt pulled through the central tube.
Fig. 4.8-4: Transformer bushing oil-to-gas
Fig. 4.8-5: Transformer bushing 800 kV UHVDC project YunnanGuangdong, China
Fig. 4.8-6: Transformer bushing 500 kV HVDC project Three

Gorges, China
243

4.8 Bushings
various system applications. A high-quality insulation enables

a compact design. Furthermore, bushings with this insulation
have a low partial discharge level, not only at service voltage but
far in excess.
HVDC bushings: transformer and wall
The growing demand for HVDC transmission requires reliable and efficient transformer and wall bushings of up to
1,000 kV DC (fig. 4.8-6). ERIP solutions are often preferred due
to their superior performance in heavily polluted areas, or due to
their mechanical strength especially regarding seismic behavior.
An example of state-of-the-art solutions is the project YunnanGuangdong/China (fig. 4.8-5, fig. 4.8-8), which incorporates
wall bushings and transformer bushings up to 800 kV.
Wall bushings
Wall bushings (fig. 4.8-7) are designed for use in high-voltage
substations for roof or wall according to their positioning:
Indoor/indoor bushings for dry indoor conditions
Outdoor/indoor bushings for use between open air (outer
atmosphere) and dry indoor conditions
Outdoor/outdoor bushings where both ends are in contact
with the open air (outer atmosphere)
The main insulating body is capacitive-graded. A number of
conductive layers are coaxially located at calculated distances
between the central tube and the flange. This leads to a virtual
linearization of the axial distribution of voltage on the bushing
surface resulting in minimum stress on the surrounding air.
Fig. 4.8-8: Wall bushing 800 kV HVDC project YunnanGuangdong, China
GIS bushings
These bushings are designed for use in GIS substations mainly to
connect to overhead lines. Designs are either electrode design
up to 245 kV or condenser design above 245 kV (fig. 4.8-9).
Composite designs are increasingly demanded, especially for
higher voltage ranges and polluted areas.
Generator bushings
Generator bushings (fig. 4.8-10) are designed for leading the
current induced in the stator windings through the pressurized
hydrogen-gastight, earthed generator housing. Generator
bushings are available from 12 kV to 36 kV and current ratings
of up to 50,000 A. They are natural, gas or liquid-cooled.
Fig. 4.8-9: GIS bushing 420 kV SF6 outdoor bushing with composite
housing
Fig. 4.8-7: Wall bushing air-to-air

www.siemens.com
www.bushing-group.com
[email protected] and [email protected]
Fig. 4.8-10: Generator bushing
244

4.9 Medium-Voltage Fuses
HV HRC (high-voltage high-rupturing-capacity) fuses are used for
short-circuit protection in high-voltage switchgear (frequency
range of 50 to 60 Hz). They protect devices and parts of the
system such as transformers, motors, capacitors, voltage transformers and cable feeders against the dynamic and thermal
effects of high short-circuit currents by breaking them when
they arise.
Fuses consist of the fuse-base and the fuse-links. The fuse-links
are used for one single breaking of overcurrents and then they
must be replaced. In a switch-fuse combination, the thermal
striker tripping of the 3GD fuse prevents the thermal destruction
of the fuse. The fuses are suitable both for indoor and outdoor
switchgear. They are fitted in fuse-bases available as individual
1-phase or 3-phase components, or as built-in components in
combination with the corresponding switching device.
4
Fig. 4.9-2: 3-phase fuse-link with fuse monitor
Fig. 4.9-1: Fuse-link
Rated voltage
Reference dimension
7.2 kV
192 mm
Fig. 4.9-3: Switch-disconnector with fuse-links
Rated current (A)

6
10
16
20
25
31.5
40
50
63
80
100
442 mm
442 mm for
motor protection
12 kV
292 mm
442 mm
442 mm for
motor protection
24 kV
442 mm
36 kV
537 mm
125
160
200
250
315
Table 4.9-1: Portfolio of fuses
245

4.10 Silicone Long Rod Insulators
for Overhead Power Lines
4.10.1 3FL Silicone Long Rod Insulators
Performance Meets Durability
Good reasons to use 3FL
The new Siemens silicone long rod insulators type 3FL
(fig. 4.10-1) combine the highest levels of electrical insulation
and mechanical tensile strength with a compact, lightweight
design. Thanks to their superior design and minimized weight,
3FL long rod insulators are especially suited for overhead compact-line applications where low tower design and short line
spans are required. They are also more economical to transport
and install.
Design
The 3FL insulator housing is a one-piece HTV1 silicone rubber
housing made by the one-shot injection molding process. The
HTV silicone is directly molded onto the core rod by overlapping
the triple junction point and part of the metal end fittings. The
design ensures a total enclosure of the most sensitive part of
a silicone insulator the junction zone (metal end fitting/FRP
rod/silicone housing), where usually the highest electrical field
strength is concentrated. This overlapping system eliminates any
need of traditional sealing systems while preventing any moisture ingress attacks (fig. 4.10-2).
Core
The core rod is a boron-free, corrosion-resistant ECR2 glass-fiberreinforced plastic rod (FRP rod). Due to the extremely high
hydrolysis and acid resistance of the FRP rod the risk of so-called
brittle fracture is completely eliminated for 3FL insulators.
End fittings
The end fittings, made of hot-dip galvanized forged steel or
ductile cast iron, are directly attached to the FRP core rod by
a circumferential crimping process. Each crimping process is
strongly monitored with a special control system. A complete
range of end fittings according to the latest IEC and ANSI standards is available up to 210 kN of SML. The 3FL is 100%
exchangeable and compatible with existing insulators and line
hardware of all types.
The special design of the end fitting in the junction minimizes
the electrical field strength and partial discharge inside the
junction zone as well as on the silicone housing surface, by
utilizing an integrated grading ring. This reliably prevents corrosion of the insulating material and eliminates the risk of subsequent failure of the insulator.
Fig. 4.10-1: 3FL long rod insulators can be used either as suspension
or tension insulatorsrequirements
Brittle-fracture-resistant
ECR-glass FRP rod
One-piece HTV
silicone rubber housing
Junction zone
Junction point: FRP rod/metal

fitting/silicone (triple point)
completely embedded in the
silicone housing
Integrated grading ring reduces the electric field
inside and outside the junction zone
1 HTV: High-temperature vulcanizing

2 ECR glass: Electrical- and corrosion-resistant glass
Fig. 4.10-2: 3FL a superior design to meet the highest requirements
246

3FL HTV silicone rubber housing for best

pollution performances (fig. 4.10-3)
The excellent pollution layer characteristics of the HTV silicone
rubber ensure maximum reliability of the 3FL insulator, even
under extreme service conditions. The high hydrophobic
housing prevents the formation of conductive film on its surface.
Even the most severe ambient conditions, such as salt fog in
coastal regions or dust-laden air in industrial areas, cannot
impair the intrinsic hydrophobicity of the HTV silicone rubber.
Surface currents and discharges are ruled out. Neither water nor
dirt on the housing surface can cause insulator flashovers
a significant factor for insulator performance.
Quality from Siemens
According to long-established Siemens tradition and experience
in high-voltage equipment for more than a century, each production step for the 3FL beginning with numerous incoming
raw material inspections through the assembly of the individual
components to routine tests of the finished product is rigorously monitored and well controlled.
4
Fig. 4.10-3: HTV silicone rubber for best pollution performances
4.10.2 Maximized Service Life

No moisture ingress
The one-piece housing of the 3FL insulators, i.e. weathersheds
and core rod sheath (coating) is one-piece, and has only one
internal interface throughout the whole insulator, namely the
boundary interface between the housing and the FRP core rod.
This design eliminates all internal inter faces between weathersheds and the core rod coating. These kinds of longitudinal
interfaces are normally very sensitive to tangential electrical
field stress, which in worst case scenarios can easily lead to
erosion damage of the polymer interfaces. In particular leading
to erosion of the bonding between sheds and rod sheath, and
thus damage to the insulator housing.
Furthermore, the junction point in the connection zone, where
all three elements (FRP rod, metal end fitting, and silicone
housing) meet each other, is absolutely water- and air-tight
sealed during manufacturing by using an overmolding housing
system. It totally encloses this junction point with the HTV silicone rubber of the housing itself. The highest bonding strength
of the one-piece HTV silicone housing to the FRP core rod combined with the overmolding design system prevent moisture
ingress at the connection zone of the insulator (fig. 4.10-4).
Minimized electrical field strength
After numerous electrical calculations regarding E-field distribution along the insulator, and the connection zone on the
high-voltage side in particular, the design of the 3FL insulator
was optimized for maximum reduction of electrical field stress,
reduced corona effect, and minimized RIV value. Two design
keys ensure improved life expectancy by reducing electrical field
stress in the triple point and on the silicone surface:
Housing
(HTV SiR)
FRP rod
Connection
zone
End fitting
Fig. 4.10-4: 3FL cross-section
247

The spherical-shaped rim of the end fitting inside the housing

homogenizes the E-field distribution on the high-voltage side
of the 3FL insulator with an integrated grading ring up to
170 kV (fig. 4.10-5, table 4.10-1).
The overmolded design system and the silicone housing shape
at the connection zone reduce the electrical field strength
inside the housing, at the inner triple point in particular, as
well as on the silicone surface directly. This by displacing the
higher electrical field strength outside the housing (i.e. to the
surrounding air area), and by taking advantage of the higher
silicone relative permittivity (fig. 4.10-6).
In this way, 3FL insulators can be applied on 170 kV systems
without the need for additional grading/corona rings.
Standards and tests
All 3FL long rod insulators are designed and tested in compliance with the latest IEC standards.
Each Siemens 3FL insulator that leaves the factory is routinely

tested with a corresponding mechanical tensile test load of at
least 50 percent of the defined SML load for at least ten seconds.
248
IEC 61109
Insulators for overhead lines Composite suspension

and tension insulators for a.c. systems with a nominal
voltage greater than 1,000 V
IEC 62217
Polymeric insulators for indoor and outdoor use with

a nominal voltage >1,000 V
IEC 60815
Selection and dimensioning of high-voltage insulators

intended for use in polluted conditions
IEC 61466-1, -2 Composite string insulator units for overhead lines

with a nominal voltage greater than 1,000 V
Table 4.10-1: Product standards

Silicone
surface
Sphericalshaped rim
Inner triple
point
Fig. 4.10-5: E-field distribution (%/mm) in silicone housing and in FRP core rod at 3FL insulator high-voltage end
Fig. 4.10-6: E-field distribution (%/mm) at 3FL insulator high-voltage end
249

Socket and Ball
acc. to IEC 60120

Designation
SML
16
20
Dimensions in mm
A
70 kN / 100 kN / 120 kN
33
17
19
160 kN / 210 kN
41
21
23
Clevis
acc. to IEC 60471 and IEC 61466-1
Designation
Dimensions in mm
SML
13L
70 kN
13
14
17
42
16L
100 / 120 kN
16
18
32
46
16N
100 / 120 kN
16
18
32
46
19L
160 kN
19
20
37
56
19N
160 kN
19
22.5
26
56
22L
210 kN
22
20
43
60
22N
210 kN
22
26
30
60
Tongue
acc. to IEC 60471 and IEC 61466-1
Designation
SML
13L
70 kN
Dimensions in mm
A
13
14
42
16L
100 kN / 120 kN
16
17.5
46
16N
100 kN / 120 kN
12.7
17.5
46
19L
160 kN
19
20
56
19N
160 kN
19
20.6
46
22L
210 kN
19
24
60
22N
210 kN
22
23.8
52
Y-Clevis
acc. to IEC 61466-1
Dimensions in mm
SML
Designation
16
70 kN
16
32
19
100 / 120 kN
19
34
22
160 / 210 kN
22
41
Eye
250
acc. to IEC 61466-1
Designation
SML
Dimensions in mm
A
17
70 kN
20
32
15
24
100 kN / 120 kN
24
48
19
25
160 kN / 210 kN
25
50
22
30
160 kN / 210 kN
30
60
25

Arcing horns
Recommended corona rings (diameter in mm) by line voltage
Corona ring
Line voltage (kV)
Ground end (top end fitting)
Line end (conductor end fitting)
170 kV
None
None
245 kV
None
210
300 kV
None
330
362 kV
None
330
420 kV
210
330
550 kV
210
420
Maximum values
Accessories
Arc protection devices such as arcing horns
and corona rings for reduction of electrical
field stress and corona effect are carefully
designed based on numerous electrical
simulations regarding electrical field
distribution. For system voltages above
170 kV, corona rings are included in the 3FL
insulator application as a standard feature.
Customer-specific solutions as well as other
connection and cable clamps are also
available on request.
Highest voltage for equipment, Um
Nominal system voltage, Un
units
3FL2
3FL3
3FL4
3FL5
3FL6
from
kV
12
72.5
72.5
72.5
72.5
to
kV
72.5
550
550
550
550
from
kV
10
60
60
60
60
to
kV
69
500
500
500
500
kN
70
100
120
160
210
from
mm
332
821
821
871
871
to
mm
782
6,125
6,125
6,125
6,125
Specified mechanical load, SML class

Maximum section length,
length increments 52 mm
(with Socket and Ball)
Long rod insulators type 3FL2, SML 70 kN

3FL2 long rod insulators are designed to
meet the highest requirements in distribution
power systems up to 72 kV. They have high
lightning impulse and power-frequency
withstand voltages and a long creepage class
(> 31 mm/kV). 3FL2 insulators are available
with mechanical ratings up to SML = 70 kN.
End fittings with SML = 70 kN

Designation as per standard
Standard
Connection length
Name/size
V, mm
Ball 16
IEC 60120
75
Socket 16A
IEC 60120
79
Clevis 13L
IEC 60471
87
Tongue 13L
IEC 60741
87
Y-clevis 16
IEC 61466-1
94
Eye 17
IEC 61466-1
93
Technical data 3FL2

Highest
voltage
for equipment
Typical
nominal
system
voltages
Lightning
impulse
withstand
voltage
(1.2/50 s, dry)
Powerfrequency
withstand
voltage (50 Hz,
1min., wet)
Arcing
distance
Creepage
distance
Housing
length
Section
length*
(with
Socket and
Ball)
Um, kV
Un, kV
LIWL min, kV
PFWL min, kV
S, mm
C, mm
H, mm
L, mm
12.0
10, 11, 12
158
73
214
426
178
331
3FL2 018-4SB11-1XX1
24.0
15, 20, 22, 24
216
89
300
805
268
421
3FL2 027-4SB11-1XX1
2.0
36.0
30, 33, 35, 36
243
111
390
1,184
358
511
3FL2 036-4SB11-1XX1
2.4
72.5
60, 66, 69, 72
400
200
660
2,321
628
781
3FL2 063-4SB11-1XX1
3.6
Catalog number
Weight
(with Socket
and Ball)
W, kg
1.6
*Reference value of the section length of an insulator for version with Socket and Ball end fittings of size 16 in accordance with IEC 60120. To obtain the section length
of an insulator equipped with other end fittings, the housing length and connection lengths (see table End fittings) of both end fittings must be added together.
251

Long rod insulators 3FL3 and 3FL4
3FL silicone long rod insulators for suspension and tension
applications are available in lengths appropriate for 60 kV through
550 kV. Length increments are 52 mm. A few selected insulator
lengths are listed in the following table. Intermediate, shorter, or
longer lengths available on request.
Specified mechanical load

Routine test load
3FL3
3FL4
SML:
100 kN
120 kN
RTL:
50 kN
60 kN
Technical data 3FL3 and 3FL4
252
Highest
voltage for
equipment
based on
25 mm/kV
Lightning
impulse
withstand
voltage
(1.2/50 s,
dry)
Switching
impulse
withstand
voltage
(250/
2,500 s,
positive,
wet)
Powerfrequency
withstand
voltage
(50 Hz,
1 min,
wet)
Arcing
distance
Standard
creepage
distance
catalog
code: 3
Extra-high
creepage
distance
catalog
code: 4
Nominal
housing
length
Section
length*
with
Socket
and Ball
Um
kV
LIWV
kV
SIWV min
kV
PFWV
kV
S
mm
C
mm
C
mm
H
mm
L
mm
Catalog code
3FL_1-___2-_3_4_521-1_6_71
Grading
ring
diameter
top/
bottom
(earth-/
HV-side)
App. net
weight for
standard
creepage
distance
D
mm
W
kg
<72.5
449
160
644
1,706
2,291
614
821
3FLx - 061-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
3.2
72.5
476
180
696
1,868
2,516
666
873
3FLx - 067-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
3.3
72.5
503
200
748
2,031
2,740
718
925
3FLx - 072-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
3.4
72.5
530
220
800
2,194
2,964
770
977
3FLx - 077-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
3.5
72.5
556
240
852
2,356
3,189
822
1,029
3FLx - 082-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
3.6
72.5
583
260
904
2,519
3,413
874
1,081
3FLx - 087-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
3.7
72.5
610
280
956
2,681
3,637
926
1,133
3FLx - 093-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
3.8
72.5
637
300
1,008
2,844
3,862
978
1,185
3FLx - 098-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
3.9
72.5
664
320
1,060
3,007
4,086
1,030
1,237
3FLx - 103-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
4.0
123
690
340
1,112
3,169
4,310
1,082
1,289
3FLx - 108-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
4.1
123
717
360
1,164
3,332
4,535
1,134
1,341
3FLx - 113-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
4.2
123
744
380
1,216
3,494
4,759
1,186
1,393
3FLx - 119-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
4.3
145
771
400
1,268
3,657
4,983
1,238
1,445
3FLx - 124-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
4.4
145
797
420
1,320
3,820
5,208
1,290
1,497
3FLx - 129-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
4.5
145
824
440
1,372
3,982
5,432
1,342
1,549
3FLx - 134-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
4.6
145
851
460
1,424
4,145
5,656
1,394
1,601
3FLx - 139-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
4.7
170
882
469
1,476
4,307
5,881
1,446
1,653
3FLx - 145-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
4.8
170
913
478
1,528
4,470
6,105
1,498
1,705
3FLx - 150-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
4.9
170
943
488
1,580
4,633
6,329
1,550
1,757
3FLx - 155-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
5.0
170
974
497
1,632
4,795
6,554
1,602
1,809
3FLx - 160-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
5.1
170
1,005
506
1,684
4,958
6,778
1,654
1,861
3FLx - 165-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
5.2
170
1,036
515
1,736
5,120
7,002
1,706
1,913
3FLx - 171-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
5.3
170
1,066
525
1,788
5,283
7,227
1,758
1,965
3FLx - 176-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
5.4
170
1,097
534
1,840
5,446
7,451
1,810
2,017
3FLx - 181-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
5.5
170
1,128
543
1,892
5,608
7,675
1,862
2,069
3FLx - 186-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
5.6
170
1,159
552
1,944
5,771
7,900
1,914
2,121
3FLx - 191-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
5.7
170
1,189
562
1,996
5,933
8,124
1,966
2,173
3FLx - 197-3SB11-1XX1
x/x
5.8
245
1,220
571
2,003
6,096
8,348
2,018
2,225
3FLx - 202-3SB11-1XS1
x / 210
6.8
245
1,251
580
2,055
6,259
8,573
2,070
2,277
3FLx - 207-3SB11-1XS1
x / 210
6.9
245
1,282
586
2,107
6,421
8,797
2,122
2,329
3FLx - 212-3SB11-1XS1
x / 210
7.0
245
1,313
593
2,159
6,584
9,021
2,174
2,381
3FLx - 217-3SB11-1XS1
x / 210
7.1
245
1,344
599
2,211
6,747
9,246
2,226
2,433
3FLx - 223-3SB11-1XS1
x / 210
7.2
245
1,375
605
2,263
6,909
9,470
2,278
2,485
3FLx - 228-3SB11-1XS1
x / 210
7.3
245
1,406
612
2,315
7,072
9,694
2,330
2,537
3FLx - 233-3SB11-1XS1
x / 210
7.4
245
1,437
618
2,367
7,234
9,919
2,382
2,589
3FLx - 238-3SB11-1XS1
x / 210
7.5
245
1,468
1,032
625
2,419
7,397
10,143
2,434
2,641
3FLx - 243-3SB11-1XS1
x / 210
8.4
300
1,499
1,042
631
2,456
7,560
10,367
2,486
2,693
3FLx - 249-3SB11-1XM1
x / 330
8.5
300
1,530
1,052
637
2,508
7,722
10,592
2,538
2,745
3FLx - 254-3SB11-1XM1
x / 330
8.6
300
1,561
1,062
644
2,560
7,885
10,816
2,590
2,797
3FLx - 259-3SB11-1XM1
x / 330
8.7
300
1,623
1,081
656
2,664
8,210
11,265
2,694
2,901
3FLx - 269-3SB11-1XM1
x / 330
8.9
300
1,654
1,091
663
2,716
8,373
11,489
2,746
2,953
3FLx - 275-3SB11-1XM1
x / 330
9.0
300
1,716
1,111
676
2,820
8,698
11,938
2,850
3,057
3FLx - 285-3SB11-1XM1
x / 330
9.2
362
1,778
1,130
688
2,924
9,023
12,386
2,954
3,161
3FLx - 295-3SB11-1XM1
x / 330
9.4
362
1,809
1,140
695
2,976
9,186
12,611
3,006
3,213
3FLx - 301-3SB11-1XM1
x / 330
9.5
362
362
1,840
1,873
1,150
1,170
701
709
3,028
3,132
9,348
9,673
12,835
13,284
3,058
3,162
3,265
3,369
3FLx - 306-3SB11-1XM1
3FLx - 316-3SB11-1XM1
x / 330
x / 330
9.6
9.8

1
Specified mechanical load (SML): use 3 for 100 kN; use 4 for 120 kN.
Nominal housing length in mm/10. 3 Standard creepage distance: 3;
Extra-high creepage distance: 4.
4 Upper end fitting (earth side) 5 Bottom end fitting (high-voltage side)
6 Upper corona ring (earth side) 7 Bottom corona ring (high-voltage side).
For all insulator types having no preinstalled corona rings and indicated
by the code X optional corona rings can be added, if requested. For
this, use the smallest corona ring available, i.e. catalog code S, please
refer to page 10 for further catalog numbering information.
2

Highest
voltage for
equipment
based on
25 mm/kV
Lightning
impulse
withstand
voltage
(1.2/ 50 s,
dry)
Switching
impulse
withstand
voltage
(250/
2500 s,
positive,
wet)
Powerfrequency
withstand
voltage
(50 Hz,
1 min.,
wet)
Arcing
distance
Standard
creepage
distance
catalog
code: 3
Extra-high
creepage
distance
catalog
code: 4
Nominal
housing
length
Section
length*
with
Socket
and Ball
Um
kV
LIWV
kV
SIWV min
kV
PFWV
kV
S
mm
C
mm
C
mm
H
mm
L
mm
Catalog code
3FL_1-___2-_3_4_521-1_6_71
Grading ring App. net

diameter
weight for
top/bottom
standard
(earth-/HVcreepage
side)
distance
D
mm
W
kg
362
1,889
1,179
713
3,184
9,836
13,508
3,214
3,421
3FLx - 321-3SB11-1XM1
x / 330
9.9
362
1,922
1,199
720
3,288
10,161
13,957
3,318
3,525
3FLx - 332-3SB11-1XM1
x / 330
10.1
362
1,939
1,209
724
3,340
10,324
14,181
3,370
3,577
3FLx - 337-3SB11-1XM1
x / 330
10.2
420
1,971
1,229
732
3,399
10,649
14,629
3,474
3,681
3FLx - 347-3SB11-1SM1
210 / 330
11.3
420
2,004
1,248
740
3,503
10,974
15,078
3,578
3,785
3FLx - 358-3SB11-1SM1
210 / 330
11.5
420
2,037
1,268
748
3,607
11,300
15,527
3,682
3,889
3FLx - 368-3SB11-1SM1
210 / 330
11.7
420
2,054
1,278
752
3,659
11,462
15,751
3,734
3,941
3FLx - 373-3SB11-1SM1
210 / 330
11.8
420
2,070
1,288
756
3,711
11,625
15,975
3,786
3,993
3FLx - 379-3SB11-1SM1
210 / 330
11.9
420
2,103
1,307
763
3,815
11,950
16,424
3,890
4,097
3FLx - 389-3SB11-1SM1
210 / 330
12.1
420
2,136
1,327
771
3,919
12,275
16,873
3,994
4,201
3FLx - 399-3SB11-1SM1
210 / 330
12.3
420
2,169
1,346
779
4,023
12,600
17,321
4,098
4,305
3FLx - 410-3SB11-1SM1
210 / 330
12.5
420
2,185
1,356
783
4,075
12,763
17,546
4,150
4,357
3FLx - 415-3SB11-1SM1
210 / 330
12.6
420
2,201
1,366
787
4,127
12,926
17,770
4,202
4,409
3FLx - 420-3SB11-1SM1
210 / 330
12.7
420
2,218
1,376
791
4,179
13,088
17,994
4,254
4,461
3FLx - 425-3SB11-1SM1
210 / 330
12.8
420
2,251
1,396
798
4,283
13,413
18,443
4,358
4,565
3FLx - 436-3SB11-1SM1
210 / 330
13.0
550
2,284
1,415
806
4,362
13,739
18,892
4,462
4,669
3FLx - 446-3SB11-1SL1
210 / 420
14.8
550
2,300
1,425
810
4,466
14,064
19,340
4,566
4,773
3FLx - 457-3SB11-1SL1
210 / 420
15.0
550
2,300
1,425
810
4,674
14,714
20,238
4,774
4,981
3FLx - 477-3SB11-1SL1
210 / 420
15.4
550
2,300
1,425
810
4,778
15,040
20,686
4,878
5,085
3FLx - 488-3SB11-1SL1
210 / 420
15.6
550
2,300
1,425
810
4,882
15,365
21,135
4,982
5,189
3FLx - 498-3SB11-1SL1
210 / 420
15.8
550
2,300
1,425
810
4,986
15,690
21,584
5,086
5,293
3FLx - 509-3SB11-1SL1
210 / 420
16.0
550
2,300
1,425
810
5,090
16,015
22,032
5,190
5,397
3FLx - 519-3SB11-1SL1
210 / 420
16.2
550
2,300
1,425
810
5,194
16,340
22,481
5,294
5,501
3FLx - 529-3SB11-1SL1
210 / 420
16.4
2,300
1,425
810
5,350
16,828
23,154
5,450
5,657
3FLx - 545-3SB11-1SL1
210 / 420
16.7
2,300
1,425
810
5,454
17,153
23,603
5,554
5,761
3FLx - 555-3SB11-1SL1
210 / 420
16.9
2,300
1,425
810
5,558
17,479
24,051
5,658
5,865
3FLx - 566-3SB11-1SL1
210 / 420
17.1
2,300
1,425
810
5,662
17,804
24,500
5,762
5,969
3FLx - 576-3SB11-1SL1
210 / 420
17.4
2,300
1,425
810
5,818
18,292
25,173
5,918
6,125
3FLx - 592-3SB11-1SL1
210 / 420
17.7
Section length adjustment table* for other end fittings combinations,

Base end fittings: Socket and Ball (catalog code: SB)
End fittings types and standards
Type
Standard
Catalog
code
Length
V
Upper end fitting

(earth side)
Bottom end fitting

(high-voltage side)
Catalog
code
Length change,
mm
Ball 16
IEC 60120
108 mm
Clevis 16L
Tongue 16L
CT
+30
Socket 16A
IEC 60120
99 mm
Clevis 16L
Clevis 16L
CC
+31
Socket 16B
IEC 60120
103 mm
Clevis 16L
Eye 24
CE
+40
Clevis 16L
IEC 60471
119 mm
Clevis 16L
Ball 16
CB
+20
Tongue 16L
IEC 60741
118 mm
Tongue 16L
Tongue 16L
TT
+29
Y-clevis 19
IEC 61466-1
127 mm
Eye 24
Ball 16
EB
+29
Eye 24
IEC 61466-1
128 mm
Eye 24
Eye 24
EE
+49
Y-clevis 19
Eye 24
YE
+48
Y-clevis 19
Ball 16
YB
+28
* To determine the section length of an insulator with a different end fitting combination than Socket and Ball, please add the appropriate adjustment section length shown in the table above.
For all other configurations not shown in this table, contact your Siemens representative.
253

Long rod insulators 3FL5 and 3FL6
3FL silicone long rod insulators for suspension and tension
applications are available in lengths appropriate for 60 kV
through 550 kV. Length increments are 52 mm. A few selected
insulator lengths are listed in the following table. Intermediate,
shorter, or longer lengths available on request.
Specified mechanical load

Routine test load
3FL5
3FL6
SML:
160 kN
210 kN
RTL:
80 kN
105 kN
254
Highest
voltage for
equipment
based on
25 mm/kV
Lightning
impulse
withstand
voltage
(1.2/50 s,
dry)
Switching
impulse
withstand
voltage
(250/
2,500 s,
positive,
wet)
Powerfrequency
withstand
voltage
(50 Hz,
1 min,
wet)
Arcing
distance
Standard
creepage
distance
catalog
code: 3
Extra-high
creepage
distance
catalog
code: 4
Nominal
housing
length
Section
length*
with
Socket
and Ball
Um
kV
LIWV
kV
SIWV min
kV
PFWV
kV
S
mm
C
mm
C
mm
H
mm
L
mm
Catalog code
3FL_1-___2-_3_4_521-1_6_71
Grading
ring
diameter
top/
bottom
(earth-/
HV-side)
App. net
weight for
standard
creepage
distance
D
mm
W
kg
<72.5
449
160
643
1,702
2,288
614
878
3FLx - 061-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
5.2
72.5
476
180
695
1,865
2,512
666
930
3FLx - 067-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
5.3
72.5
503
200
747
2,027
2,736
718
982
3FLx - 072-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
5.4
72.5
530
220
799
2,190
2,961
770
1,034
3FLx - 077-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
5.6
72.5
556
240
851
2,352
3,185
822
1,086
3FLx - 082-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
5.7
72.5
583
260
903
2,515
3,409
874
1,138
3FLx - 087-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
5.9
72.5
610
280
955
2,678
3,634
926
1,190
3FLx - 093-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
6.0
72.5
637
300
1,007
2,840
3,858
978
1,242
3FLx - 098-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
6.1
123
664
320
1,059
3,003
4,082
1,030
1,294
3FLx - 103-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
6.3
123
690
340
1,111
3,166
4,307
1,082
1,346
3FLx - 108-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
6.4
123
717
360
1,163
3,328
4,531
1,134
1,398
3FLx - 113-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
6.5
123
744
380
1,215
3,491
4,755
1,186
1,450
3FLx - 119-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
6.7
145
771
400
1,267
3,653
4,980
1,238
1,502
3FLx - 124-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
6.8
145
797
420
1,319
3,816
5,204
1,290
1,554
3FLx - 129-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
6.9
145
824
440
1,371
3,979
5,428
1,342
1,606
3FLx - 134-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
7.1
145
851
460
1,423
4,141
5,652
1,394
1,658
3FLx - 139-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
7.2
170
882
469
1,475
4,304
5,877
1,446
1,710
3FLx - 145-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
7.3
170
913
478
1,527
4,466
6,101
1,498
1,762
3FLx - 150-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
7.5
170
943
488
1,579
4,629
6,325
1,550
1,814
3FLx - 155-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
7.6
170
974
497
1,631
4,792
6,550
1,602
1,866
3FLx - 160-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
7.7
170
1,005
506
1,683
4,954
6,774
1,654
1,918
3FLx - 165-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
7.9
170
1,036
515
1,735
5,117
6,998
1,706
1,970
3FLx - 171-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
8.0
170
1,066
525
1,787
5,279
7,223
1,758
2,022
3FLx - 176-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
8.1
170
1,097
534
1,839
5,442
7,447
1,810
2,074
3FLx - 181-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
8.3
170
1,128
543
1,891
5,605
7,671
1,862
2,126
3FLx - 186-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
8.4
170
1,159
552
1,943
5,767
7,896
1,914
2,178
3FLx - 191-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
8.5
170
1,189
562
1,995
5,930
8,120
1,966
2,230
3FLx - 197-3SB21-1XX1
x/x
8.7
245
1,220
571
2,002
6,092
8,344
2,018
2,282
3FLx - 202-3SB21-1XS1
x / 210
9.7
245
1,251
580
2,054
6,255
8,569
2,070
2,334
3FLx - 207-3SB21-1XS1
x / 210
9.8
245
1,282
586
2,106
6,418
8,793
2,122
2,386
3FLx - 212-3SB21-1XS1
x / 210
10.0
245
1,313
593
2,158
6,580
9,017
2,174
2,438
3FLx - 217-3SB21-1XS1
x / 210
10.1
245
1,344
599
2,210
6,743
9,242
2,226
2,490
3FLx - 223-3SB21-1XS1
x / 210
10.2
245
1,375
605
2,262
6,906
9,466
2,278
2,542
3FLx - 228-3SB21-1XS1
x / 210
10.4
245
1,406
612
2,314
7,068
9,690
2,330
2,594
3FLx - 233-3SB21-1XS1
x / 210
10.5
245
1,437
618
2,366
7,231
9,915
2,382
2,646
3FLx - 238-3SB21-1XS1
x / 210
10.6
245
1,468
1,032
625
2,403
7,393
10,139
2,434
2,698
3FLx - 243-3SB21-1XM1
x / 210
11.5
300
1,499
1,042
631
2,455
7,556
10,363
2,486
2,750
3FLx - 249-3SB21-1XM1
x / 330
11.7
300
1,530
1,052
637
2,507
7,719
10,588
2,538
2,802
3FLx - 254-3SB21-1XM1
x / 330
11.8
300
1,561
1,062
644
2,559
7,881
10,812
2,590
2,854
3FLx - 259-3SB21-1XM1
x / 330
11.9
300
1,623
1,081
656
2,663
8,206
11,261
2,694
2,958
3FLx - 269-3SB21-1XM1
x / 330
12.2
300
1,654
1,091
663
2,715
8,369
11,485
2,746
3,010
3FLx - 275-3SB21-1XM1
x / 330
12.3
300
1,716
1,111
676
2,819
8,694
11,934
2,850
3,114
3FLx - 285-3SB21-1XM1
x / 330
12.6
362
1,778
1,130
688
2,923
9,019
12,382
2,954
3,218
3FLx - 295-3SB21-1XM1
x / 330
12.9
362
1,809
1,140
695
2,975
9,182
12,607
3,006
3,270
3FLx - 301-3SB21-1XM1
x / 330
13.0
362
1,840
1,150
701
3,027
9,345
12,831
3,058
3,322
3FLx - 306-3SB21-1XM1
x / 330
13.1
362
1,873
1,170
709
3,131
9,670
13,280
3,162
3,426
3FLx - 316-3SB21-1XM1
x / 330
13.4

1
Specified mechanical load (SML): use 3 for 100 kN; use 4 for 120 kN.
Nominal housing length in mm/10. 3 Standard creepage distance: 3;
Extra-high creepage distance: 4.
4 Upper end fitting (earth side) 5 Bottom end fitting (high-voltage side)
6 Upper corona ring (earth side) 7 Bottom corona ring (high-voltage side).
For all insulator types having no preinstalled corona rings and indicated
by the code X optional corona rings can be added, if requested. For
this, use the smallest corona ring available, i.e. catalog code S, please
refer to page 10 for further catalog numbering information.
2

Highest
voltage for
equipment
based on
25 mm/kV
Lightning
impulse
withstand
voltage
(1.2/ 50 s,
dry)
Switching
impulse
withstand
voltage
(250/
2500 s,
positive,
wet)
Powerfrequency
withstand
voltage
(50 Hz,
1 min.,
wet)
Arcing
distance
Standard
creepage
distance
catalog
code: 3
Extra-high
creepage
distance
catalog
code: 4
Nominal
housing
length
Section
length*
with
Socket
and Ball
Um
kV
LIWV
kV
SIWV min
kV
PFWV
kV
S
mm
C
mm
C
mm
H
mm
L
mm
Catalog code
3FL_1-___2-_3_4_521-1_6_71
Grading ring App. net

diameter
weight for
top/bottom
standard
(earth-/HVcreepage
side)
distance
D
mm
W
kg
362
1,889
1,179
713
3,183
9,832
13,504
3,214
3,478
3FLx - 321-3SB21-1XM1
x / 330
13.6
362
1,922
1,199
720
3,287
10,158
13,953
3,318
3,582
3FLx - 332-3SB21-1XM1
x / 330
13.8
362
1,939
1,209
724
3,339
10,320
14,177
3,370
3,634
3FLx - 337-3SB21-1XM1
x / 330
14.0
420
1,971
1,229
732
3,398
10,645
14,625
3,474
3,738
3FLx - 347-3SB21-1SM1
210 / 330
15.1
420
2,004
1,248
740
3,502
10,971
15,074
3,578
3,842
3FLx - 358-3SB21-1SM1
210 / 330
15.4
420
2,037
1,268
748
3,606
11,296
15,523
3,682
3,946
3FLx - 368-3SB21-1SM1
210 / 330
15.6
420
2,054
1,278
752
3,658
11,459
15,747
3,734
3,998
3FLx - 373-3SB21-1SM1
210 / 330
15.8
420
2,070
1,288
756
3,710
11621
15,971
3,786
4,050
3FLx - 379-3SB21-1SM1
210 / 330
15.9
420
2,103
1,307
763
3,814
11,946
16,420
3,890
4,154
3FLx - 389-3SB21-1SM1
210 / 330
16.2
420
2,136
1,327
771
3,918
12,272
16,869
3,994
4,258
3FLx - 399-3SB21-1SM1
210 / 330
16.5
420
2,169
1,346
779
4,022
12,597
17,317
4,098
4,362
3FLx - 410-3SB21-1SM1
210 / 330
16.7
420
2,185
1,356
783
4,074
12,759
17,542
4,150
4,414
3FLx - 415-3SB21-1SM1
210 / 330
16.9
420
2,201
1,366
787
4,126
12,922
17,766
4,202
4,466
3FLx - 420-3SB21-1SM1
210 / 330
17.0
420
2,218
1,376
791
4,178
13,085
17,990
4,254
4,518
3FLx - 425-3SB21-1SM1
210 / 330
17.1
420
2,251
1,396
798
4,282
13,410
18,439
4,358
4,622
3FLx - 436-3SB21-1SM1
210 / 330
17.4
550
2,284
1,415
806
4,361
13,735
18,888
4,462
4,726
3FLx - 446-3SB21-1SL1
210 / 420
19.2
550
2,300
1,425
810
4,465
14,060
19,336
4,566
4,830
3FLx - 457-3SB21-1SL1
210 / 420
19.5
550
2,300
1,425
810
4,673
14,711
20,234
4,774
5,038
3FLx - 477-3SB21-1SL1
210 / 420
20.0
550
2,300
1,425
810
4,777
15,036
20,682
4,878
5,142
3FLx - 488-3SB21-1SL1
210 / 420
20.3
550
2,300
1,425
810
4,881
15,361
21,131
4,982
5,246
3FLx - 498-3SB21-1SL1
210 / 420
20.6
550
2,300
1,425
810
4,985
15,686
21,580
5,086
5,350
3FLx - 509-3SB21-1SL1
210 / 420
20.8
550
2,300
1,425
810
5,089
16,012
22,028
5,190
5,454
3FLx - 519-3SB21-1SL1
210 / 420
21.1
550
2,300
1,425
810
5,193
16,337
22,477
5,294
5,558
3FLx - 529-3SB21-1SL1
210 / 420
21.4
2,300
1,425
810
5,349
16,825
23,150
5,450
5,714
3FLx - 545-3SB21-1SL1
210 / 420
21.8
2,300
1,425
810
5,453
17,150
23,598
5,554
5,818
3FLx - 555-3SB21-1SL1
210 / 420
22.1
2,300
1,425
810
5,557
17,475
24,047
5,658
5,922
3FLx - 566-3SB21-1SL1
210 / 420
22.3
2,300
1,425
810
5,661
17,800
24,496
5,762
6,026
3FLx - 576-3SB21-1SL1
210 / 420
22.6
2,300
1,425
810
5,817
18,288
25,169
5,918
6,182
3FLx - 592-3SB21-1SL1
210 / 420
23.0
Section length adjustment table* for other end fittings combinations,

Base end fittings: Socket and Ball (catalog code: SB)
End fittings types and standards
Type
Standard
Catalog
code
Length
V
Upper end fitting

(earth side)
Bottom end fitting

(high-voltage side)
Catalog
code
Length change,
mm
Ball 20
IEC 60120
135 mm
Clevis 19L
Tongue 19L
CT
+25
Socket 20
IEC 60120
129 mm
Clevis 19L
Clevis 19L
CC
+26
Clevis 19L
IEC 60471
145 mm
Clevis 19L
Eye 25
CE
+34
Clevis 22L
IEC 60471
154 mm
Clevis 19L
Ball 20
CB
+16
Tongue 19L
IEC 60741
144 mm
Tongue 19L
Tongue 19L
TT
+24
Tongue 22L
IEC 60741
153 mm
Eye 25
Ball 20
EB
+24
Y-clevis 22
IEC 61466-1
156 mm
Eye 25
Eye 25
EE
+42
Eye 25
IEC 61466-1
153 mm
Y-clevis 22
Eye 25
YE
+45
Y-clevis 22
Ball 20
YB
+27
* To determine the section length of an insulator with a different end fitting combination than Socket and Ball, please add the appropriate adjustment section length shown in the table above.
For all other configurations not shown in this table, contact your Siemens representative.
255
256
Transformers
5.1
Introduction
Transformers
5.1.1 Overview
258
258
5.2
Reliability and Project Performance
260
5.3
Transformer Loss Evaluation
262
5.4
Power Transformers
264
5.4.1 Large Power Transformers
264
5.4.2 Medium Power Transformers
265
5.4.3 Small Power Transformers
265
5.5
Reactors
266
5.6
Special Transformers
for Industrial Applications
267
5.7
Phase-Shifting Transformers
269
5.8
HVDC Transformers
270
5.9
Distribution Transformers
271
5.9.1 Liquid-Immersed Distribution Transformers

for European/US/Canadian Standard
271
5.9.2 Voltage Regulators
274
5.9.3 GEAFOL Cast-Resin Transformers
275
5.9.4 GEAFOL Special Transformers
280
5.10
Traction Transformers
292
5.11
Transformer Lifecycle Management
293
257
5 Transformers
5.1 Introduction
5.1.1 Overview
Whether in infrastructure systems, industry or households,
transformers always play a key role in the reliable transmission
and distribution of power. The construction, rated power,
voltage level and scope of the application are all key factors that
determine the transformers design.
Siemens provides the right transformer for every need from
compact distribution transformers to large power transformers
with ratings far above 1,000 MVA. The Siemens product range
covers all mainstream requirements like UHV DC applications,
low noise emission and environmentally friendly products with
alternative insulation liquids, also embedded in a complete
power system from generation via transmission to distribution
networks. The long-term reliability of a transformer begins with
its initial high quality. Then transformer lifecycle management
measures maintain that quality throughout the transformers
entire life.
Fig. 5.1-1 and table 5.1-1 are an overview of how various transformers can be used in a network.
Global footprint
Emerging countries are not just extended workbenches for
producing goods. First and foremost, they are important future
markets. Through its own local production and sales locations,
Siemens provides service to customers in the most important
global markets. The local presence of Siemens in many countries
also ensures that customers have better access to Siemens
services and that they benefit from an efficient and effective
distribution of Siemens resources as part of a global network. As
Siemens factories around the world develop and produce their
products, Siemens also encourages them to share their expertise.
Siemens meets the growing global demand for transformers in a
variety of ways: by further optimization of value-added steps in the
worldwide network, by use of approaches such as vertical integration and by the pursuit of programs for boosting productivity.
In 2015 the Ecodesign Directive from the European Commission takes effect. The new regulations will apply throughout
Europe starting from July 2015; an additional stage with
stricter minimum standards is planned for 2021. Find the
complete document HYPERLINK here: www.eceee.org/
ecodesign/products/distribution_power_transformers/
revised_ecodesign_directive

www.siemens.com/energy/transformers
258
Transformers
5.1 Introduction
Fig. 5.1-1: Product range of Siemens transformers

Generator and
system
transformers
Above 2.5 MVA up to more than 1,000 MVA, above 30 kV up to 1,500 kV (system and system
Phase shifters
To control the amount of active power by changing the effective phase displacement
Reactors
Liquid-immersed shunt and current-limiting reactors up to the highest rated powers

eactors for HVDC transmission systems
R
HVDC transformers
ransformers and smoothing reactors for bulk power transmission systems up to 800 kV DC
T
ransformers for DC coupling of different AC networks
T
Cast-resin
distribution and
power transformers
GEAFOL
100 kVA to more than 40 MVA, highest voltage for equipment up to 36 kV, of 3-phase or 1-phase
Liquid-immersed
distribution
Transformers
10 to 2,500 kVA, highest voltage for equipment up to 36 kV, with copper or aluminum windings,
Special
transformers for
industry
lectric arc furnace transformers

E
lectric arc furnace series reactors
E
DC electric arc furnace transformers
Rectifier transformers
Converter transformers for large drives
Traction transformers mounted on rolling stock
Traction
transformers
Transformer
lifecycle
management
interconnecting transformers, with separate windings or auto-connected), with on-load tap

changers or off-circuit tap changers, of 3-phase or 1-phase design
design, GEAFOL-SL substations
hermetically sealed or with conservator of 3- or 1-phase design

pole mounted transformers and distribution transformers acc. to IEC and CS/IEEE with amorphous
cores
ondition assessment and diagnostics

C
nline monitoring
O
Consulting and expertise
Maintenance and lifecycle extension
Spare parts and accessories
Repair and retrofit
Transport, installation and comissioning
Table 5.1-1: Product range of Siemens transformers
259
Transformers
5.2 Reliability and Project
Performance
The quality strategy in the transformer business is based on the
three cornerstones of product, people and process quality
(fig. 5.2-1). The objective is to achieve the greatest customer
satisfaction with cost-efficient processes. This is only possible if
all employees are involved in the processes have a profound
understanding of the customer needs and specific requirements
in the transformer business.
The strategy is implemented in the form of mandatory elements.
These elements cover product and service quality, which is visible
to customers; personnel quality, which is achieved by training
and ongoing education; and process quality in all processes used.
Business and process-specific indicators must be used to ensure
that each single element is measurable and transparent.
Nine mandatory elements are defined:
Customer integration
Embedded quality in processes and projects
Consequent supplier management
Business-driven quality planning
Focused quality reporting
Qualification of employees on quality issues
Continuous improvement
Management commitment
Control and support role of quality manager.
Elements of quality (mandatory elements)

Customer integration
Customer integration depends on the consistent use of:
Analysis tools for customer requirements and market studies
Analysis of customer satisfaction
Professional management of feedback from and to the
customer
Complaint management.
Customer requirements need to be precisely defined in a specification. And the specification must be continuously updated
throughout the definition phase of a transformer project. The
actual requirements must also be available to all responsible
employees.
Rapid feedback loops in both directions are essential in order
to increase customer trust and satisfaction.
Siemens resolves customer complaints to the customers satisfaction in a timely manner through its complaint management
system.
Embedded quality in processes and projects
The quality of the processes used to produce a product has a
significant impact on the quality of the product that is actually
produced. Process discipline and process stability can be
260
Product/Service
quality
Greatest possible
customer
satisfaction
Process
quality
Quality
strategy
... combined with

efficient processes
results in the best
cost position
Personnel
quality
... and best trained
and motivated employees
Fig. 5.2-1: Cornerstones of quality strategy
achieved by a high degree of process standardization. All processes should be standardized for all employees based on simple
procedures. If this condition is met, it is possible to implement
clearly defined work instructions (fig. 5.2-2).
Quality gates are placed at points in the process at which
quality-relevant decisions are necessary. The following quality
gates are mandatory for the power transformer business.
Bid approval
Entry order clarified
Release of design
Release of fully assembled transformer
Evaluation of project.
For each quality gate, there is a clear definition of participants,
preconditions, results (traffic light) and the escalation process, if
necessary. If the result is not acceptable, the process must be
stopped until all requirements are fulfilled.
Supplier management
The quality of the product depends not only on the quality of the
own processes but also on that of the suppliers. Problems and
costs caused by inadequate supplier quality can only be reduced
by a systematic supplier management process that includes:
Selection
Assessment
Classification
Development
Phasing out of suppliers as well as the support process
Supplier Qualification.
Transformers
5.2 Reliability and Project Perfomance
A further condition for a high level of supplier quality is close

cooperation with the suppliers. Joint development of requirements for suppliers and processes leads to continuous improvements in quality. In this context, supplier know-how can also be
used to create innovations. This aspect of the relationship with
suppliers is becoming more and more important, especially in
the transformer business.
SIEMENS
TPD
2.01.02
Core assembly stacking core

laminates
PEQ
SIEMENS
PEQ
Page 1/6
1. Purpose/objective
Process description for the manufacture of transformer core
within the tolerances which are laid down
applies to all the core forms of the power transformers

does not apply to the cores of compensating reactors
Adjusting the
construction
supports
3. Process overview/description
Business-driven quality planning

Planning quality means analyzing possible future scenarios and
anticipated problems and taking preventive steps to solve those
problems. It is crucial that both current and future critical business factors are considered in planning. That means that quality
is based on business-driven planning and specific objectives,
activities and quantitative indicators.
Stack of core laminations dimensions checked by the supplier to

ensure that they agree with the drawing
Frame parts dimensions checked by the supplier to ensure that they
agree with the drawing
Insulating parts dimensions checked by the supplier (internal ore
external )to ensure that they agree with the drawing
washers, small accessories Job related core drawings
Process report TPD 2.01.01
Tools
Assembly area with special support beams for fixing the core
laminations which have been put on into position
Stacking
core
laminates
Measure-Measure
ment
> Setting the middle distance of the support beams to one

another in accordance with the drawing guideline
> Tolerance +/5 mm to the desired size
Integrated slewing mechanism for mounting the finished core

> Setting the clearance of the support
trestles (on the support beams) for
the core-limb laminations
Process owner
Staff trained in core assembly
Adjusting
the support
trestles
> The position of support trestles are to be

placed in the middle between the single
bandages
> The position and clearance of the
bandages are defined in the core
drawing
Completed core with clamping frame also completely mounted

OUTPUT
Process report TPD 2.01.02

Max. sheet width BS
Measure-Measure
ment
Checked/approved:
Dr. Knorr
Clearance support trestles

The following clearances
apply to cores without
single bandages (e.g.
wound bandage cylinders):
References/guidelines, recommendations
Stack height tolerances as in drawing N00 08 792
Arrangement of the cooling duct shims as in drawing N10 11 100
Locking the screwed connections in accordance with TPD 3.036.01
Measurement of insulation resistance with TUQ 1634
Drawn up by: Matthes
As of date:
2004-02
Drawn up by:
Matthes
Checked/approved:
Middle distance
support trestles
< 650
550
650 to 800
450
800 to 1,000
350
1,000 to 1,200
300
1,200 to 1,500
The passing on as well as the duplication of this document. use and communication of its contents is not permitted. nor may thecontents be expressed. Offenders are liable to pay damages. All rights
reserved. in particular for the case of patent granting or GM-entry
Focused quality reporting

Reporting is based on:
Focused key performance indicators such as non-conformance
costs, external failure rate, internal failure rate and on-time
delivery
Concrete quality incidents
Root cause analysis of quality problems including definition of
corrective and preventive measures.
Page 1/6
Subprocess 1:
Setting up the construction devices and limit stops
2. Scope/application
INPUT
INPUT
TPD
2.01.02
Core assemblystacking core

laminates
4. Process sequence
Dr. Knorr
As of date:
250
2004-02
The passing on as well as the duplication of this document. use and communication of its contents is not permitted. nor may thecontents be expressed. Offenders are liable to pay damages. All rights
reserved. in particular for the case of patent granting or GM-entry
Fig. 5.2-2: Example of standardized working instruction
For customers, the reliability of transformers is of special importance. ANSI C57.117 has made an attempt to define failures.
Based on this definition, statistics on in-service failures and
reliability values can be derived. An example for power transformers appears in table 5.2-1.
Qualification of employees on quality issues
People are the decisive factor influencing quality. Therefore, all
employees involved in the processes must have the skills and
abilities appropriate to the quality aspects of the process steps
they perform. Any qualification measures that may be necessary
must be determined on the basis of a careful analysis of existing
deficits.
Continuous improvement
Because there is nothing that cannot be improved, continuous
improvement must be an integral part in all processes.
The objective is to continue optimizing each process step. This is
also the purpose of improvement teams. Appropriate coaching
of these teams should make it possible to reach almost all
employees.
E T TR In-service failure statistic 2000 2009 for power transformers

based on ANSI C 57.117
E T TR
Plant
1
Plant
2
Plant
3
Plant
4
Plant
5
Plant
6
Plant
7*
Plant
8
Plant
9
Plant
10
Plant
11
Plant
12
Plant
13*
Plant
14**
Plant
15
11,278
572
1,704
755
793
774
534
735
1,076
705
649
994
1007
980
SY
51,429
2,358
7,479
3,858
4,326
1,996
3,341
4,561
4,17
2,889
4,899
3,781
4,771
91
10
11
11
13
FRe (%)
0.18
0.38
0.09
0.26
0.37
0.02
0.55
0.09
0.13
0.05
0.24
0.16
0.08
0.27
MTBF (yrs)
565
262
1068
386
273
4,326
181
1,114
760
2,085
413
612
1,26
367
nF
* Plant 7 and 13: new plants; ** Plant 14: 9 years 2001 2009
N = No. of units in service
SY = No. of service years
nF = No. of units failed
FRe (%) = Failure rate = nF 100/SY
MTBF (yrs) = Mean time between failures = 100/FRe
FRe
0.5 % <
1.0 % <
1.5 % <
FRe >
0.5 %
FRe 1.0 %
FRe 1.5 %
FRe 2.0 %
2.0 %
excellent
good
satisfactory
acceptable
not acceptable
Table 5.2-1: In-service failure statistic
261
Transformers
5.2 Reliability and Project Perfomance
Methods like, Kaizen, 5S and methods and tools from Six Sigma
e.g. DMAIC circle, FMEA, IPO are helpful in supporting this
continuous improvement process (fig. 5.2-3).
Management commitment
Every manager in a company also bears responsibility for quality.
Thus, each managers actions must be characterized by a high
level of quality awareness.
The level of commitment shown by all levels of management in
the event of quality problems, the establishment of quality
demands and the creation of targeted quality controls in day-today work together produce a culture in which there is a high
level of quality.
The sharply increased cost of electrical energy has made it

almost mandatory for buyers of electrical machinery to carefully
evaluate the inherent losses of these items. For distribution and
power transformers, which operate continuously and most
frequently in loaded condition, this consideration is especially
important. As an example, the added cost of loss-optimized
transformers can in most cases be recovered via savings in
energy use in less than three years.
Control and support role of the quality manager

The role of the quality manager is of fundamental importance
for well-running processes. The quality manager combines a
supporting role with that of a neutral controller. Quality management must be directly involved in processes and projects.
The independence of the quality department and individual
quality managers in the processes and projects must be guaranteed and agreed by top management.
Low-loss transformers use more and better materials for their

construction and are thus intially more expensive than low-cost
transformers. By stipulating loss evaluation figures in the transformer inquiry, the manufacturer receives the necessary incentive to provide a loss-optimized transformer rather than the
low-cost model. Detailed loss evaluation methods for transformers have been developed and are described accurately in
the literature. These methods take the project-specific evaluation factors of a given customer into account.
Conclusion
The quality of a transformer is based on the quality of all processes that are necessary from project acquisition to project
closing. The quality of the processes depends essentially on
people. Only well-trained and motivated employees are able to
guarantee that a process will be performed with a high degree
of quality.
A simplified method for a quick evaluation of different quoted

transformer losses makes the following assumptions:
The transformers are operated continuously.
The transformers operate at partial load, but this partial load is
constant.
Additional cost and inflation factors are not considered.
Demand charges are based on 100 % load.
Define
Our process
should be like this
Check
DpMO
PONC x 1000 RMB
7000
6000
5000
DpMO
NCC
140
120
100
Measure
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
Are we
improving?
DMAIC
circle
Improve
What must be done

in order to achieve
the goal
How far are we

from the goal
Analyze
What is preventing
us to fulfill the
requirements
Fig. 5.2-3: DMAIC circle
ANSI Standard C57.117, 1986,

Guide for Reporting Failure Data for Power Transformers
and Shunt Reactors on Electric Utility Power Systems.
262
5.3 Transformer Loss

Evaluation
The total cost of owning and operating a transformer for one

year is thus defined as follows:
Capital cost (CC), taking into account the purchase price (Cp),
the interest rate (p) and the depreciation period (n)
Cost of no-load loss (CP0) based on the no-load loss (P0) and
energy cost (Ce)
Cost of load loss (CPk) based on the load loss (Pk), the
equivalent annual load factor (a) and energy cost (Ce)
Cost resulting from demand charges (Cd) based on the amount
set by the utility and the total kW of connected load (fig. 5.3-1).
The following examples show the difference between a low-cost
transformer and a loss-optimized transformer (fig. 5.3-2).
Note that the lowest purchase price is unlike the total cost of
ownership.
Transformers
5.3 Transformer Loss Evaluation
Capital cost
Example: Distribution transformer
taking into account the purchase price Cp, the interest rate p,
and the depreciation period n
Depreciation period
Interest rate
Depreciation factor
Energy charge
Demand charge
Equivalent annual load factor
Cc = Cp r / 100 [amount / year]

Cp = purchase price
r
q
p
n
= p . qn / (qn 1) = depreciation factor

= p / 100 + 1 = interest factor
= interest rate in % p.a
= depreciation period in years
Cost of no-load loss

based on the no-load loss P0, and energy cost Ce
CP0 = Ce 8,760 h / year . P0

Ce = energy charges [amount / kWh]
P0 = no-load loss [kW]
a2
Pk
a = constant opperation load / rated load

Pk = copper loss [kW]
Cost resulting from demand charges

based on the no-load loss P0, and energy cost Ce
CD = Cd (P0 + Pk)
Cd = demand charges [amount / (kW . year)]
Fig. 5.3-1: Calculation of the individual operation cost of a

transformer in one year
B. Loss-optimized transformer
P0 = 16 kW
no-load loss
Pk = 124 kW
load loss
C p = 585,000 purchase price
.
Cc = 521,000 13.39
100
.
C c = 585,000 13.39
100
= 69, 762 / year

CP0 = 0.25 . 8,760 . 19
= 41,610 / year
= 234,067 / year
based on the load loss Pk, the equivalent anual load factor a,
and energy cost Ce
= 0.8
no-load loss
P0 = 19 kW
Pk = 167 kW
load loss
Cp = 521,000 purchase price
CPk = 0.25 . 8,760 . 0.64 . 167
Cost of load loss
C Pk = Ce 8,760 h / year
A. Low-cost transformer
n = 20 years
p = 12 % p. a.
r = 13.39
Ce = 0.25 / kWh
Cd = 350 / (kW . year)
CD = 350 (19 + 167)

= 65,100 / year
Total cost of owning and operating

this transformer is thus:
410,539 / year
= 78,332 / year
C P0 = 0.25 8,760 16
= 35,040 / year
CPk = 0.25 8,760 0.64 124

= 170,624 / year
CD = 350 (16 + 124)
= 49,000 / year
332,996 / year
The energy saving of the optimized distribution transformer of

77,543 per year pays for the increased purchase price in less
than one year.
C. Minimum efficiency
as per CSA
P0 = 0.182 kW
Pk = 0.966 kW
Cp = 2,355
no-load loss
load loss
purchase price
D. High efficiency transformer

(Amorphous core)
P0 = 0.078 kW
Pk = 0.732 kW
Cp = 2,654
no-load loss
load loss
purchase price
.
Cc = 2,355 13.39
100
.
Cc = 2,654 13.39
100
= 315 / year
= 355 / year
CP0 = 0.25 . 8,760 . 0.182

= 399 / year
CPk = 0.25 . 8,760 . 0.64 . 0.966
= 1,354 / year
CD = 350 (0.182 + 0.966)
= 402 / year
2,470/ year
CP0 = 0.25 . 8,760 . 0.078

= 171 / year
CPk = 0.25 . 8,760 . 0.64 . 0.732
= 1,026 / year
CD = 350 (0.078 + 0.732)
= 284 / year
1,836 / year
The energy saving of the optimized distribution transformer of

634 per year pays for the increase purchase price in less
than one year.
Fig. 5.3-2: Example for cost saving with optimized distribution

transformer
263
Transformers
5.4 Power Transformers
5.4.1 Large Power Transformers
In the power range above 250 MVA, generator and network
intertie transformers with off-load or on-load tap changers, or a
combination of both, are recommended. Depending on the on-site
requirements, they can be designed as multiwinding transformers
or autotransformers, in 3-phase or 1-phase versions. Even with
ratings of more than 1,000 MVA and voltages up to 1,200 kV
(800 kV), the feasibility limits have not yet been reached. We
manufacture these units according to IEC 60076 as well as other
international and national standards (e.g., ANSI/IEEE), (fig. 5.4-1).
Generator step-up (GSU) transformers
GSU units transform the voltage up from the generator voltage
level to the transmission voltage level, which may be as high as
1,200 kV system voltage. Such transformers are usually YNd-connected.
In order to make an inquiry regarding a GSU power transformer,

the technical data for the items in this section are required.
Step-down transformers
Step-down transformers transform the voltage down from the
transmission voltage level to an appropriate distribution voltage
level. The power rating of step-down transformers may range up
to the power rating of the transmission line.
Fig. 5.4-1: Large power transformer
264
System interconnecting transformers

System interconnecting transformers connect transmission
systems with different voltages together so that active as well as
reactive power can be exchanged between the systems.
Main specification data
Standard
Installation indoor/outdoor
Max. ambient air temperature
Rated frequency f
Vector group
Rated power S
Primary rated voltage UrHV
Tapping range/taps
Voltage regulation
Secondary rated voltage UrLV
Impedance uk at Sr and Ur
Max. sound power level LWA
Insulation level HV-Ph Um/AC/LI
Insulation level HV-N Um/AC/LI
Insulation level LV-Ph Um/AC/LI
Type of cooling
HV connection technique
LV connection technique
Transportation medium
Losses.
Transformers
5.4 Power Transformers
5.4.2 Medium Power Transformers

Medium power transformers with a power range from 30 to
250 MVA and a voltage of over 72.5 kV are used as network and
generator step-up transformers (fig. 5.4-2).
Specific items
Transformer design according to national and international
standards (IEC/ANSI) with or without voltage regulation
3-phase or 1-phase
Tank-attached radiators or separate radiator banks.
Number of systems (HV, LV, TV)
Voltage and MVA rating
Regulation range and type
Vector group
Frequency
Losses or capitalization
Impedances
Type of cooling
Connection systems (bushing, cable)
Noise requirements (no-load, load and/or total noise)
Special insulation fluid
Application of high temperature/extra small size operation.
Fig. 5.4-2: Medium power transformer with natural-oil-based

insulation fluid
5.4.3 Small Power Transformers

Small power transformers are distribution transformers from 5 to
30 MVA with a maximum service voltage of 145 kV. They are used
as network transformers in distribution networks (fig. 5.4-3).
This type of transformer is normally a 3-phase application and
designed according to national and international standards. The
low-voltage windings should be designed as foil or layer windings. The high-voltage windings should use layer or disc execution, including transposed conductors. Normally, the cooling
type is ONAN (oil-natural, air-natural) or ONAF (oil-natural,
air-forced). The tapping can be designed with off-circuit or
on-load tap changers (OCTC or OLTC).
Voltage and MVA rating
Frequency
Regulation range and type
Vector group
Losses or capitalization
Impedances
Noise requirements
Connection systems (bushing, cable)
Weight limits
Dimensions
Information about the place of installation
Special insulation fluid
Application of high temperature/extra small size operation
Type of cooling.
Fig. 5.4-3: Small power transformer
265
Transformers
5.5 Reactors
In AC networks, shunt reactors and series reactors are widely
used in the system to limit the overvoltage or to limit the shortcircuit current. With more high-voltage overhead lines with long
transmission distance and increasing network capacity, both
types of reactors play an important role in the modern network
system.
Made for every requirements
Oil-filled reactors are manufactured in two versions:
With an iron core divided by air gaps
Without an iron core, with a magnetic return circuit.
Oil-filled reactors offer individual solutions: They satisfy all the
specified requirements regarding voltage, rating, type of operation, low-noise and low loss and type of cooling, as well as transportation and installation.
The windings, insulation tank monitoring devices and connection method are practically the same as those found in the
construction of transformers.
Shunt reactors
For extra-high-voltage (EHV) transmission lines, due to the long
distance, the space between the overhead line and the ground
naturally forms a capacitor parallel to the transmission line,
which causes an increase of voltage along the distance.
Depending on the distance, the profile of the line and the power
being transmitted, a shunt reactor is necessary either at the line
terminals or in the middle. An liquid-immersed shunt reactor is a
solution. The advanced design and production technology will
ensure the product has low loss and low noise level.
Shunt reactors also can be built as adjustable shunt reactors.
This offers the possibility in fine tuning the system voltage and
also the reduction of high-voltage equipment by substitution
of several unregulated reactors by a regulated one.
Series reactors
When the network becomes larger, sometimes the short-circuit
current on a transmission line will exceed the short-circuit
current rating of the equipment. Upgrading of system voltage,
upgrading of equipment rating or employing high-impedance
transformers are far more expensive than installing liquidimmersed series reactors in the line. The liquid-immersed design
can also significantly save space in the substation.
Specification
Typically, 3-phase or 1-phase reactors should be considered first.
Apart from the insulation level of the reactor, the vector group,
overall loss level, noise level and temperature rise should be
considered as main data for the shunt reactor.
Although the above data are also necessary for series reactors,
the rated current, impedance and thermal/dynamic stability
current should also be specified.
266
Fig. 5.5-1: Reactor
Transformers
5.6 Special Transformers for
Industrial Applications
A number of industry applications require specific industrial
transformers due to the usage of power (current) as a major
resource for production. Electric arc furnaces (EAF), ladle furnaces (LF) and high-current rectifiers need a specific design to
supply the necessary power at a low-voltage level. These transformer types, as well as transformers with direct connection to a
rectifier are called special-purpose or industrial transformers,
whose design is tailor-made for high-current solutions for
industry applications.
Electric arc furnace transformers
EAF and LF transformers are required for many different furnace
processes and applications. They are built for steel furnaces,
ladle furnaces and ferroalloy furnaces, and are similar to short or
submerged arc furnace transformers (fig. 5.6-1).
EAF transformers operate under very severe conditions with
regard to frequent overcurrents and overvoltages generated by
short circuit in the furnace and the operation of the HV circuitbreaker. The loading is cyclic. For long-arc steel furnace operation, additional series reactance is normally required to stabilize
the arc and optimize the operation of the furnace application
process.
5
Fig. 5.6-1: Electric arc furnace transformer
Specific items
EAF transformers are rigidly designed to withstand repeated
short-circuit conditions and high thermal stress, and to be
protected against operational overvoltages resulting from the
arc processes. The Siemens EAF reactors are built as 3-phase
type with an iron core, with or without magnetic return circuits.
Design options
Direct or indirect regulation
On-load or no-load tap changer (OLTC/NLTC)
Built-in reactor for long arc stability
Secondary bushing arrangements and designs
Air or water-cooled
Internal secondary phase closure (internal delta).
Rated power, frequency and rated voltage
Regulation range and maximum secondary current
Impedance and vector group
Type of cooling and temperature of the cooling medium
Series reactor and regulation range and type (OLTC/NLTC).
DC electric arc furnace transformers
Direct-current electric arc furnace (DC EAF) transformers are
required for many different furnace processes and applications.
They are built for steel furnaces with a Thyristor rectifier. DC EAF
transformers operate under very severe conditions, like rectifier
transformers in general but using rectifier transformers for
furnace operation. The loading is cyclic.
267
Transformers
5.6 Special Transformers for Industrial Applications
Rectifier transformers
Rectifier transformers are combined with a diode or Thyristor
rectifier. The applications range from very large aluminum
electrolysis to various medium-size operations. The transformers
may have a built-in or a separate voltage regulation unit. Due to
a large variety of applications, they can have various designs up
to a combination of voltage regulation, rectifier transformers in
double-stack configuration, phase-shifting, interphase reactors,
transductors and filter-winding (fig. 5.6-2).
Specific items
Thyristor rectifiers require voltage regulation with a no-load tap
changer, if any. A diode rectifier will, in comparison, have a
longer range and a higher number of small voltage steps than an
on-load tap changer. Additionally, an auto-connected regulating
transformer can be built in the same tank (depending on transport and site limitations).
Design options
Thyristor or diode rectifier
On-load or no-load tap changer (OLTC/NLTC)/filter winding
Numerous different vector groups and phase shifts possible
Interphase reactor, transductors
Air or water-cooled.

Regulation range and number of steps
Impedance and vector group, shift angle
Bridge or interphase connection
Number of pulses of the transformer and system
Harmonics spectrum or control angle of the rectifier
Secondary bushing arrangement.
Converter transformers
Converter transformers are used for large drive application, static
voltage compensation (SVC) and static frequency change (SFC).
Specific items
Converter transformers are mostly built as double-tier, with two
secondary windings, allowing a 12-pulse rectifier operation.
Such transformers normally have an additional winding as a
filter to take out harmonics. Different vector groups and phase
shifts are possible.
Impedance and vector group, shift angle
Number of pulses of the transformer and system
Harmonics spectrum or control angle of the rectifier.
268
Fig. 5.6-2: Rectifier transformer for an aluminum plant
Line feeder
This kind of transformer realizes the connection between the
power network and the power supply for the train. Transformer
is operating in specific critical short-circuit condition and overload condition in very high frequencies per year, higher reliability is required to secure the train running in safety.
Impedance and vector group
Overload conditions
Harmonics spectrum or control angle of the rectifier.
Design options
Direct connection between transmission network and railway
overheadcontactline
Frequence change via DC transformation
(e.g. 50 Hz 16,67 Hz)
Thyristor or diode rectifier
On-load or no-load tap changer (OLTC/NLTC)/filter winding
Air or water-cooled.
Transformers
5.7 Phase-Shifting
Transformers
A phase-shifting transformer is a device for controlling the
power flow through specific lines in a complex power transmission network.The basic function of a phase-shifting transformer
is to change the effective phase displacement between the input
voltage and the output voltage of a transmission line, thus
controlling the amount of active power that can flow in the line.
Guidance on necessary information
Beside the general information for transformers, the following
specific data are of interest (fig. 5.7-1):
Rated MVA
The apparent power at rated voltage for which the phaseshifting transformer is designed.
Rated voltage
The phase-to-phase voltage to which operating and
performance characteristics are referred to at no-load.
Rated phase angle
Phase angle achieved when the phase-shifting transformer
is operated under no-load condition, or if stated at full load, at
which power factor.
Phase shift direction
In one or both directions. Changeover from and to under load
or no-load condition.
Tap positions
Minimum and/or maximum number of tap positions.
Impedance
Rated impedance at rated voltage, rated MVA and zero phase
shift connection as well as permissible change in impedance
with voltage and phase angle regulation.
System short-circuit capability
When the system short-circuit level is critical to the design of
phase-shifting transformers, the maximum short-circuit fault
level shall be specified.
BIL
Basic impulse level (BIL) of source, load and neutral terminals.
Special design tests
Besides the standard lightning impulse tests at all terminals, it
has to be considered that the lightning impulse might occur
simultaneously at the source and the load terminal in case of
closed bypass breaker. If such a condition is likely to appear
during normal operation, a BIL test with source and load
terminals connected might be useful to ensure that the phaseshifting transformer can withstand the stresses of lightning
strokes in this situation.
Special overload condition
The required overload condition and the kind of operation
(advance or retard phase angle) should be clearly stated.
Especially for the retard phase angle operation, the overload
requirements may greatly influence the cost of the phaseshifting transformer.
Fig. 5.7-1: Phase-shifting transformer
Operation of phase-shifting transformer

Operation with other phase-shifting transformers in parallel or
series.
Single or dual-tank design
In most cases, a dual-core design requires a dual-tank design
as well.
Symmetric or non-symmetric type
Symmetric means that under a no-load condition the voltage
magnitude at the load side is equal to that of the source side.
For non-symmetric phase-shifting transformers, the
permissible variation in percent of rated voltage at maximum
phase angle must be stated.
Quadrature or non-quadrature type
A quadrature-type phase-shifting transformer is a unit where
the boost voltage, which creates the phase shift between
source and load terminals, is perpendicular to the line voltage
on one terminal.
Internal varistors
It has to be clarified whether internal metal oxide varistors are
allowed or not.
269
Transformers
5.8 HVDC Transformers
HVDC transformers are key components of HVDC stations. HVDC
converter and inverter stations terminate long-distance DC
transmission lines or DC sea cables. This type of transformer
provides the interface between AC grids and high power rectifiers and are used to control the load flow over the DC transmission lines. These actors adapt the AC grid voltage to an adequate
level which is suitable for feeding the valve system of DC converter and inverter.
Design options
The design concept of HVDC transformers is mainly influenced
by the rated voltage, rated power and transportation requirements like dimensions, weight and mode of transportation.
Many large power HVDC converter station are located in rural
areas of low infrastructure. Frequently, special geometrical
profiles have to be fulfilled in order to move such transformers
by railway.
Typically, HVDC transformers are single phase units containing
2 winding limbs. This concept can include either 2 parallel valve
windings (two for delta or two for wye system, fig. 5.8-1) or two
different valve windings (one for delta and one for wye,
fig. 5.8-2). In order to reduce the total transportation height
frequently the core assembly includes 2 return limbs. Due to
redundancy requirements in HVDC stations 3 phase units are
quite uncommon.
Fig. 5.8-1: Converter transformer for UHVDC bipolar transmission

system 800 kVDC, 6,400 MW; 2,071 km: single phase;
550 kVAC, 816 kVDC; 321 MVA; high pulse wye system
feeding
The valve windings are exposed to AC and DC dielectric stress

and therefore a special insulation assembly is necessary. Furthermore, special lead systems connecting the turrets and windings
have to be installed in order to withstand the DC voltage of
rectifier. Additionally, the load current contains harmonic components of considerable energy resulting in higher losses and
increased noise. Above all, special bushings are necessary for
the valve side to access upper and lower winding terminals of
each system from outside. Conclusively, two identical bushings
are installed for star or delta system.
Fig. 5.8-2: Converter transformer for HVDC bipolar transmission
system 500 kVDC; 2,500 MW: single phase; 420 kVAC;
515 kVDC; 397 MVA; wye system (left side of figure) and
delta system (right side of figure)
For approving the proper design and quality of manufacturing

special applied DC and DC polarity reversal tests have to be
carried out. The test bay has to be equipped with DC test apparatus accordingly and needs to provide adequate geometry to
withstand the DC test voltage.
270
Technical items
In addition to the standard parameters of power transformers,
special performance requirements have to be known for the
design of HVDC transformers. These parameters are jointly
defined by designers of the HVDC station and transformer design
engineers in order to reach a cost-effective design for the entire
equipment.
Special parameters are:

Test levels: DC applied, DC polarity reversal and long-time AC
defines the insulation assembly of the transformer
Harmonic spectrum of the load current and phase relation
generate additional losses, which have to compensated by the

cooling circuit
Voltage impedance impacting the dimensions of windings and
the total height of the transformer
DC bias in load and current and transformer-neutral have to be
considered for no-load noise and no-load losses
Derivative of the load current (di/dt) is a key parameter for the
on-load tap changer
Overload requirements have to be considered for cooling
circuit and capacity of coolers
Regulation range and number of steps influence the voltage
per turn which is a key design parameter
Seismic requirements have to be considered for mechanical
strength of turrets, outlets and bushings.
Transformers
5.9 Distribution
Transformers
5.9.1 Liquid-Immersed Distribution
Transformers for European/US/
Canadian Standard
On the last transformation step from the power plant to the
consumer, distribution transformers (DT) provide the necessary
power for systems and buildings. Accordingly, their operation
must be reliable, efficient and, at the same time, silent.
Distribution transformers are used to convert electrical energy
of higher voltage, usually up to 36 kV, to a lower voltage,
usually 250 up to 435 V, with an identical frequency before and
after the transformation. Application of the product is mainly
within suburban areas, public supply authorities and industrial
customers.
Fig. 5.9-1: 1-phase DT, pole-mounted, Canada
Distribution transformers are fail-safe, economical and have a

long life expectancy. These fluid-immersed transformers can be
1-phase or 3-phase. During operation, the windings can be
exposed to high electrical stress by external overloads and high
mechanical stress by short circuits. They are made of copper or
aluminum. Low-voltage windings are made of strip or flat wire,
and the high-voltage windings are manufactured from round
wire or flat wire.
Three product classes standard, special and renewable
are available, as follows:
Standard distribution transformers:
1- or 3-phase, pole-mounted (fig. 5.9-1) or pad-mounted
(fig. 5.9-2), wound or stacked core technology distribution
transformer ( 2,500 kVA, Um 36 kV)
Medium distribution transformer (> 2,500 6,300 kVA,
Um 36 kV)
Large distribution transformer
(> 6.3 30.0 MVA, Um 72.5 kV)
Special distribution transformers:
Special application: self-protected DT, regulating DT, lowemission DT or others (autotransformer, transformer for
converters, double-tier, multiwinding transformer, earthing
transformer)
Environmental focus: amorphous core DT with significant
low no-load losses, DT with special low load-loss design,
low-emission DT in regard of noise and/or electromagnetic
field emissions, DT with natural or synthetic ester where
higher fire-resistance and/or biodegradability is required
Renewable distribution transformers:
Used in wind power plants, solar power plants or sea flow/
generator power plants.
Fig. 5.9-2: 3-phase DT, pad-mounted
271
Transformers
5.9 Distribution Transformers
Oil distribution transformer selection table Technical data, dimensions and weights
Rated
power
Rated
medium
voltage
Impedance
voltage*
No-load
losses *
Load
losses*
Total
losses*
Sn
[kVA]
Um
[kV]
U2
[%]
PO
[W]
Pk 75
[W]
100
12
210
4
4
24
160
12
24
250
12
24
400
12
24
630
12
24
800
12
24
272
Sound
power
level*
Total
weight*
Length
Width
Height
PO +
Pk 75
[W]
Sound
press.
level
1 m*
LPA
[dB]
LPA
[dB]
GGES
[kg]
A1
[mm]
B1
[mm]
H1
[mm]
Distance
between
wheel
centers
E
[mm]
1,750
1,960
34
49
640
1,050
800
1,350
520
210
1,475
1,685
34
49
650
1,000
800
1,350
520
145
1,475
1,620
33
41
625
950
750
1,400
520
210
1,750
1,960
34
49
640
1,050
800
1,350
520
210
1,475
1,685
34
49
650
1,000
800
1,350
520
145
1,475
1,620
33
41
625
950
750
1,400
520
300
2,350
2,650
36
52
740
1,100
800
1,350
520
300
2,000
2,300
36
52
810
1,050
875
1,400
520
210
2,000
2,210
34
44
750
1,100
825
1,450
520
300
2,350
2,650
36
52
740
1,100
800
1,350
520
300
2,000
2,300
36
52
810
1,050
875
1,400
520
210
2,000
2,210
34
44
750
1,100
825
1,450
520
425
3,250
3,675
39
55
980
1,150
850
1,450
520
425
2,750
3,175
39
55
1100
1,150
1,000
1,500
520
300
2,750
3,050
37
47
1050
1,150
850
1,600
520
425
3,250
3,675
39
55
980
1,150
850
1,450
520
425
2,750
3,175
39
55
1100
1,150
1,000
1,500
520
300
2,750
3,050
37
47
1050
1,150
850
1,600
520
610
4,600
5,210
41
58
1,230
1,200
900
1,550
670
610
3,850
4,460
41
58
1,450
1,350
1,050
1,650
670
430
3,850
4,280
39
49
1,400
1,250
950
1,650
670
610
4,600
5,210
41
58
1,230
1,200
900
1,550
670
610
3,850
4,460
41
58
1,450
1,350
1,050
1,650
670
430
3,850
4,280
39
49
1,400
1,250
950
1,650
670
860
6,500
7,360
43
60
1,660
1,550
950
1,700
670
860
5,400
6,260
43
60
1,950
1,550
1,100
1,700
670
600
5,400
6,000
41
52
2,050
1,450
1,100
1,800
670
800
6,750
7,550
43
60
1,670
1,600
1,000
1,650
670
800
5,600
6,400
43
60
2,050
1,650
1,100
1,700
670
560
5,600
6,160
41
52
2,100
1,400
1,100
1,775
670
860
6,500
7,360
43
60
1,660
1,550
950
1,700
670
860
5,400
6,260
43
60
1,950
1,550
1,100
1,700
670
600
5,400
6,000
41
52
2,050
1,450
1,100
1,800
670
800
6,750
7,550
43
60
1,670
1,600
1,000
1,650
670
800
5,600
6,400
43
60
2,050
1,650
1,100
1,700
670
560
5,600
6,160
41
52
2,100
1,400
1,100
1,775
670
930
8,400
9,330
45
62
2,070
1,650
1,050
1,650
670
930
7,000
7,930
45
62
2,400
1,700
1,200
1,750
670
650
7,000
7,650
43
53
2,600
1,800
1,125
1,825
670
930
8,400
9330
45
62
2,070
1,650
1,050
1,650
670
930
7,000
7930
45
62
2,400
1,700
1,200
1,750
670
650
7,000
7,650
43
53
2,600
1,800
1,125
1,825
670
Transformers
Oil distribution transformer selection table Technical data, dimension and weights
Rated
power
Rated
medium
voltage
Impedance
voltage*
No-load
losses *
Load
losses*
Total
losses*
Sn
[kVA]
Um
[kV]
U2
[%]
PO
[W]
Pk 75
[W]
1,000
12
1,100
1,100
24
1,250
12
24
1,600
12
24
2,000
12
24
2,500
12
24
Sound
power
level*
Total
weight*
Length
Width
Height
PO +
Pk 75
[W]
Sound
press.
level
1 m*
LPA
[dB]
LPA
[dB]
GGES
[kg]
A1
[mm]
B1
[mm]
H1
[mm]
Distance
between
wheel
centers
E
[mm]
10,500
11,600
45
63
2,390
1,800
1,150
1850
820
9,000
10,100
45
63
2,800
2,050
1,400
1,900
820
770
9,000
9,770
43
55
2,900
1,850
1,150
2,050
820
1,100
10,500
11,600
45
63
2,390
1,800
1,150
1,850
820
1,100
9,000
10,100
45
63
2,800
2,050
1,400
1,900
820
770
9,000
9,770
43
55
2,900
1,850
1,150
2,050
820
1,350
13,500
14,850
46
64
3,125
1,850
1,160
1,850
820
1,350
11,000
12,350
46
64
2,950
1,600
1,050
1,650
820
950
11,000
11,950
44
56
3,150
1,600
1,140
1,800
820
1,350
13,500
14,850
46
64
3,125
1,850
1,160
1,850
820
1,350
11,000
12,350
46
64
2,950
1,600
1,050
1,650
820
950
11,000
11,950
44
56
3,150
1,600
1,140
1,800
820
1,700
17,000
18,700
47
66
3,570
1,870
1,150
1,950
820
1,700
14,000
15,700
47
66
3,980
1,600
1,130
2,120
820
1,200
14,000
15,200
45
58
3,660
1,770
1,010
1,980
820
1,700
17,000
18,700
47
66
3,570
1,870
1,150
1,950
820
1,700
14,000
15,700
47
66
3,980
1,600
1,130
2,120
820
1,200
14,000
15,200
45
58
3,660
1,770
1,010
1,980
820
2,100
21,000
23,100
48
68
4,480
2,110
1,380
1,900
1,070
2,100
18,000
20,100
48
68
4,500
1,830
1,380
2,200
1,070
1,450
18,000
19,450
46
60
4,200
1,920
1,380
2,150
1,070
2,100
21,000
23,100
48
68
4,480
2,110
1,380
1,900
1,070
2,100
18,000
20,100
48
68
4,500
1,830
1,380
2,200
1,070
1,450
18,000
19,450
46
60
4,200
1,920
1,380
2,150
1,070
2,500
26,500
29,000
51
71
5,220
2,160
1,390
2,100
1,070
2,500
22,000
24,500
51
71
5,300
1,900
1,380
2,300
1,070
1,750
22,000
23,750
46
63
5,200
1,980
1,380
2,250
1,070
2,500
26,500
29,000
51
71
5,220
2,160
1,390
2,100
1,070
2,500
22,000
24,500
51
71
5,300
1,900
1,380
2,300
1,070
1,750
22,000
23,750
46
63
5,200
1,980
1,380
2,250
1,070
Dimensions and weights are approximate values and valid for 400 V on the secondary side, vector-group is Dyn 5.
Rated power figures in parentheses are not standardized.
* Remarks: The guaranteed values are subject to tolerance according to IEC standards as follows:
Impedance voltage: 10%
No-load losses: + 15%
Load losses: + 15%
Total losses (No-load losses + Load losses): +10%
Sound pressure level: + 3 dB (A)
Sound power level: + 3 dB(A)
Rated power > 2500 kVA to 12 MVA upon request.
Loss values according to new EU Directive:
Rated power 1000 kVA > A0 / Ck
Rated power > 1000 kVA > A0 / Bk
Table 5.9-1: Oil distribution transformer selection table Technical data, dimensions and weights
273
Transformers
5.9.2 Voltage Regulators

Siemens invented the voltage regulator in 1932 and pioneered
its use in the United States. Voltage Regulators are tapped step
autotransformers used to ensure that a desired level of voltage
is maintained at all times. A voltage regulator comprises a
tapped autotransformer and a tap changer. The standard
voltage regulator provides 10 % adjustment in thirty-two
0.625 % steps. Voltage Regulators with 15 % and 20 %
regulation are available for some designs.
Voltage regulators are liquid-immersed and can be 1-phase or
3-phase. They may be self-cooled or forced air-cooled. Available
at 50 or 60 Hz and with 55 or 65 C temperature rise, they can
be used in any electrical system to improve voltage quality.
Voltage regulator ratings are based on the percent of regulation
(i.e., 10 %). For example, a set of three 1-phase 333 kVA regulators would be used with a 10 MVA transformer (e.g., 10 MVA
0.10/3 = 333 kVA). 1-phase voltage regulators are available in
ratings ranging from 2.5 kV to 19.9 kV and from 38.1 kVA to
889 kVA (fig. 5.9-3). 3-phase voltage regulators are available at
13.2 kV or 34.5 kV and from 500 kVA to 4,000 kVA.
Auxiliary PT
Operation at different voltages.
Testing
All voltage regulators shall be tested in accordance with the
latest ANSI C57.15 standards.
Standard tests include:
Resistance measurements of all windings
Ratio tests on all tap locations
Polarity test
No-load loss at rated voltage and rated frequency
Excitation current at rated voltage and rated frequency
Impedance and load loss at rated current and rated frequency
Applied potential
Induced potential
Insulation power factor test
Impulse test
Insulation resistance.
Voltage regulators can be partially or completely untanked for

inspection and maintenance without disconnecting any internal
electrical or mechanical connections. After the unit is untanked,
it is possible to operate the voltage regulator mechanism and
test the control panel from an external voltage source without
any reconnections between the control and the regulator.
Standard external accessories
The standard accessories are as follows:
External metal-oxide varistor (MOV) bypass arrester
Cover-mounted terminal block with a removable gasketed
cover. It allows easy potential transformer reconnections
for operation at different voltages
Oil sampling valve
Two laser-etched nameplates
External oil sight gauge that indicates oil level at 25 C
ambient air temperature and oil color
External position indicator that shows the tap changer position
Mounting bosses for the addition of lightning arresters to the
source (S), load (L) and source-load (SL) bushings. They shall
be fully welded around their circumference.
Accessories and options
Remote mounting kit
Extra-long control cable shall be provided for remote mounting
of the control cabinet at the base of the pole.
Sub-bases
To raise the voltage regulator to meet safe operating clearances
from the ground to the lowest live part.
274
Fig. 5.9-3: 1-phase voltage

regulator, JFR
Transformers
5.9.3 GEAFOL Cast-Resin Transformers

GEAFOL transformers have been in successful service since
1965. Many licenses have been granted to major manufacturers
throughout the world since then. Over 100,000 units have
proven themselves in power distribution or converter operation
all around the globe.
Advantages and applications
GEAFOL distribution and power transformers in ratings from 100
to approximately 50,000 kVA and lightning impulse (LI) values
up to 250 kV are full substitutes for liquid-immersed transformers with comparable electrical and mechanical data. They
are designed for indoor installation close to their point of use at
the center of the major load consumers. The exclusive use of
flame-retardant insulating materials frees these transformers
from all restrictions that apply to oil-filled electrical equipment,
such as the need for oil collecting pits, fire walls, fire extinguishing equipment. For outdoor use, specially designed sheet
metal enclosures are available.
GEAFOL transformers are installed wherever oil-filled units

cannot be used or where use of liquid-immersed transformers
would require major constructive efforts such as inside buildings, in tunnels, on ships, cranes and offshore platforms, inside
wind turbines, in groundwater catchment areas and in food
processing plants. For outdoor use, specially designed sheet
metal enclosures are available.
Often these transformers are combined with their primary and
secondary switchgear and distribution boards into compact
substations that are installed directly at their point of use.
When used as static converter transformers for variable speed
drives, they can be installed together with the converters at the
drive location. This reduces construction requirements, cable
costs, transmission losses and installation costs.
GEAFOL transformers are fully LI-rated. Their noise levels are
comparable to oil-filled transformers. Taking into account the
indirect cost reductions just mentioned, they are also mostly
5
Three-leg core
Made of grain-oriented,
low-loss electrolaminations
insulated on both sides
LV terminals
Normal arrangement:
Top, rear
Special version:
Bottom, available on
request at extra charge
LV winding
Made of aluminum strip.
Turns firmly glued together
by means of preimpregnated
fibres (Prepreg)
HV terminals
Variable arrangements,
for optimal station design.
HV tapping links for
adjustment to system
conditions, reconnectable
in de-energized state*
Temperature monitoring
By PTC or Pt 100 thermistor
detectors in the LV winding
Paint finish
on steel parts
Two-component varnish
RAL 5009 (for aggressive
environments or high
humidity several layers)
Ambient class E2
Climatic category C2
(If the transformer is installed
outdoors, degree of protection
IP23 must be assured)
Fire class F1
* on-load tap changers on request
HV winding
Consisting of vacuum-potted
single foil-type aluminum coils.
See enlarged detail
in fig. 5.9-5
Insulation
Mixture of epoxy resin
and quartz powder
makes the transformer
practically maintenancefree, moisture-proof,
tropicalized, flame-resistant
and self-extinguishing
Resilient spacers
To insulate core and
windings from mechanical
vibrations, resulting in low
noise emissions
Clamping frame and truck
Rollers can be swung
around for lengthways
or sideways travel
Fig. 5.9-4: GEAFOL cast-resin dry-type transfomer properties
275
Transformers
cost-competitive. By virtue of their design, GEAFOL transformers

are practically maintenance-free.
Standards and regulations
GEAFOL cast-resin dry-type transformers comply with
VDE 0532-76-11, IEC 60076-11/DIN EN 60076-11 and
DIN EN 50541-1. On request other standards, such as GOST,
SABS or CSA/ANSI/IEEE, can also be taken into account.
Characteristic properties (fig. 5.9-4)
HV winding
The high-voltage windings are wound from aluminum foil
interleaved with high-grade insulating foils. The assembled and
connected individual coils are placed in a heated mold and are
potted in a vacuum furnace with a mixture of pure silica (quartz
sand) and specially blended epoxy resins. The only connections
to the outside are casted brass nuts that are internally
bonded to the aluminum winding connections.
The external delta connections are made of
insulated copper or aluminum connectors to
guarantee an optimal installation design. The resulting highvoltage windings are fire-resistant, moisture-proof and corrosion-proof, and they show excellent aging properties under all
operating conditions.
The foil windings combine a simple winding technique with a

high degree of electrical safety. The insulation is subjected to
less electrical stress than in other types of windings. In a conventional round-wire winding, the interturn voltages can add up to
twice the interlayer voltage. In a foil winding, it never exceeds
the voltage per turn, because a layer consists of only one
winding turn. This results in high AC voltage and impulse
voltage withstand capacity (fig. 5.9-5).
One reason for using aluminum is because the thermal expansion
coefficients of aluminum and cast resin are so similar that thermal
stresses resulting from load changes are kept to a minimum.
LV winding
The standard low-voltage winding with its considerably reduced
dielectric stresses is wound from single aluminum sheets with
epoxy-resin preimpregnated fiberglass fabrics (Pregreg).
The assembled coils are then oven-cured to form uniformly
bonded solid cylinders that are impervious to moisture. Through
the single-sheet winding design, excellent dynamic stability
under short-circuit conditions is achieved. Connections are
submerged arc-welded to the aluminum sheets and are extended
either as aluminum or copper bars to the secondary terminals.
Fire safety
GEAFOL transformers use only flame-retardant and selfextinguishing materials in their construction. No additional
substances, such as aluminum oxide trihydrate, which could
negatively influence the mechanical stability of the cast-resin
molding material, are used. Internal arcing from electrical faults
276
Round-wire winding
The interturn voltages can add up
to twice the interlayer voltage
U
2468
1357
Foil winding
The interlayer voltage is equal
to the interturn voltage
Fig. 5.9-5: High-voltage encapsulated winding design of
GEAFOL cast-resin transformer and voltage stress of a
conventional round-wire winding (above) and the foil
winding (below)
Transformers
and externally applied flames do not cause the transformers to

burst or burn. After the source of ignition is removed, the transformer is self-extinguishing. This design has been approved by
fire officials in many countries for installation in populated
buildings and other structures. The environmental safety of the
combustion residues has been proven in many tests (fig. 5.9-6).
Categorization of cast-resin transformers
Dry-type transformers have to be classified under the categories
listed below:
Environmental category
Climatic category
Fire category.
These categories have to be shown on the rating plate of each
dry-type transformer.
The properties laid down in the standards for ratings within the
category relating to environment (humidity), climate and fire
behavior have to be demonstrated by means of tests.
Fig. 5.9-6: Flammability test of cast-resin transformer
These tests are described for the environmental category

(code numbers E0, E1 and E2) and for the climatic category
(code numbers C1 and C2) in IEC 60076-11. According to this
standard, the tests are to be carried out on complete transformers. The tests of fire behavior (fire category code numbers
F0 and F1) are limited to tests on a duplicate of a complete
transformer that consists of a core leg, a low-voltage winding
and a high-voltage winding.
GEAFOL cast-resin transformers meet the requirements of the
highest defined protection classes:
Environmental category E2 (optionally E3 according
to IEC 60076-16 wind turbines application)
Climatic category C2 *1)
Fire category F1
Insulation class and temperature rise
The high-voltage winding and the low-voltage winding utilize
class F insulating materials with a mean temperature rise of
100 K (standard design).
Overload capability
GEAFOL transformers can be overloaded permanently up to 50 %
(with a corresponding increase in impedance voltage and load
losses) if additional radial cooling fans are installed (dimensions
can increase by approximately 100 mm in length and width.)
(fig. 5.9-7). Short-time overloads are uncritical as long as the
maximum winding temperatures are not exceeded for extended
periods of time (depending on initial load and ambient air
temperature).
Temperature monitoring
Each GEAFOL transformer is fitted with three temperature
sensors installed in the LV winding, and a solid-state tripping
device with relay output. The PTC thermistors used for sensing
are selected for the applicable maximum hot-spot winding
temperature.
Fig. 5.9-7: Radial cooling fans on GEAFOL transformer for AF cooling
Um (kV)
LI (kV) *2)
AC (kV) *2)
1.1
12
75
28
24
95/125
50
36
145 /170
70
*2) other levels upon request
Table 5.9-2: Standard insulation levels of GEAFOL
*1) On request designs for ambient air temperature below 25
277
Transformers
C are available
Additional sets of sensors can be installed, e.g. for fan control
purposes. Alternatively, Pt100 sensors are available. For operating voltages of the LV winding of 3.6 kV and higher, special
temperature measuring equipment can be provided.
Auxiliary wiring is run in a protective conduit and terminated in
a central LV terminal box (optional). Each wire and terminal is
identified, and a wiring diagram is permanently attached to the
inside cover of this terminal box.
Installation and enclosures
Indoor installation in electrical operating rooms or in various
sheet metal enclosures is the preferred method of installation.
The transformers need to be protected only against access to the
terminals or the winding surfaces, against direct sunlight and
against water. Unless sufficient ventilation is provided by the
installation location or the enclosure, forced-air cooling must be
specified or provided by others.
Instead of the standard open terminals, plug-type elbow connectors can be supplied for the high-voltage side with LI ratings
up to 170 kV. Primary cables are usually fed to the transformer
from trenches below but can also be connected from above
(fig. 5.9-8).
Secondary connections can be made by multiple insulated

cables, or by connecting bars from either below or above.
Terminals are made of aluminum (copper upon request).
A variety of indoor and outdoor enclosures in different protection classes are available for the transformers alone, or for
indoor compact substations in conjunction with high-voltage
and low-voltage switchgear panels. PEHLA-tested housings are
also available (fig. 5.9-9).
Cost-effective recycling
The oldest of the GEAFOL cast-resin transformers that entered
production in the mid-1960s are approaching the end of their
service life. Much experience has been gathered over the years
with the processing of faulty or damaged coils from such transformers. The metal materials and resin used in GEAFOL cast-resin
transformers, that is, approximately 95 % of their total mass, can
Fig. 5.9-8: GEAFOL transformer with plug-type cable connections
278
Fig. 5.9-9: GEAFOL transformer in protective housing to IP20/40
be recyled. The process used is non-polluting. Given the value of

secondary raw materials, the procedure is often cost-effective,
even with the small amounts currently being processed.
The GEAFOL Basic a true GEAFOL and more
The GEAFOL Basic is based on almost 50 years of proven GEAFOL
technology and quality, but it offers numerous innovations that
has allowed Siemens to provide it with several very special
characteristics. For example, the GEAFOL Basic distribution
transformer with a maximum rated power of 3.15 MVA and a
maximum medium voltage of 36 kV is almost ten percent lighter
than a comparable model from the proven GEAFOL series. And
this slimming down also positively affects the dimensions. This
could be achieved by a considerably improved heat dissipation
because of the new, patented design.
Of course all GEAFOL Basic distribution transformers meet the
specifications of VDE 0532-76-11/IEC 60076-11/DIN EN 60076-11
and DIN EN 50541-1. They meet the highest requirements for safe
installation in residential and work environments with Climatic
Class C2, Environmental Class E2 and Fire Classification F1. With
fewer horizontal surfaces, less dust is deposited, which leads to a
further reduction in the already minimal time and effort needed
for maintenance and also increases operational reliability.
Optimum compromise
The GEAFOL Basic distribution transformer represents an
optimum compromise between performance, safety and small
dimensions. In addition, the high degree of standardization
ensures the best possible cost-benefit ratio. Thanks to their
compact shape and comprehensive safety certification, GEAFOL
Basic distribution transformers can be used in almost every
environment.
Transformers
6
2
9
3
A new design for your success

the reliable, space-saving GEAFOL Basic
1 Three-limb core made of

grain-oriented, low-loss electric
sheet steel insulated on both sides
2 Low-voltage winding made
of aluminum strip; turns are permanently bonded with insulating sheet
3 High-voltage winding made
of individual aluminum coils using
foil technology and vacuum casting
4 Low-voltage connectors (facing up)
5 Lifting eyes integrated into the
upper core frame for simple transport
6 Delta connection tubes

with HV terminals
7 Clamping frame and truck
Convertible rollers for longitudinal
and transverse travel
8 Insulation made of an epoxy
resin/quartz powder mixture
makes the transformer extensively
maintenance-free, moisture-proof
and suitable for the tropics,
fire-resistant and self-extinguishing
9 High-voltage tappings 2 x 2.5 %
(on the high-voltage terminal side)
to adapt to the respective network
conditions; reconnectable off load
Temperature monitoring with PTC thermistor

detector in limb V of the low-voltage winding
(in all three phases on request)
Painting of steel parts
high-build coating, RAL 5009 on request:
two-component coating (for particularly
aggressive environments)
Structure made of individual components,
for example, windings can be individually
assembled and replaced on site
Climatic Class C2
Environmental Class E2
Fire Classification F1
279
Transformers
5.9.4 GEAFOL Special Transformers
GEAFOL cast-resin transformers with oil-free

on-load tap changers (OLTC)
The voltage-regulating cast-resin transformers connected on the
load side of the medium-voltage power supply system feed the
plant-side distribution transformers. The on-load tap changer
controlled transformers used in these medium-voltage systems
need to have appropriately high ratings.
under control. However, the maximum control range utilizes

only 20 % of the rated voltage.
Siemens offers suitable transformers with OLTC in its GEAFOL

design (fig. 5.9-10), which has proved successful over many
years and is available in ratings of up to 50 MVA. The range of
rated voltage extends to 36 kV, and the maximum impulse
voltage is 200 kV. The main applications of this type of transformer are in modern industrial plants, hospitals, office and
apartment blocks and shopping centers.
The effects of such conversion equipment on transformers and

additional construction requirements are as follows:
Increased load by harmonic currents
Balancing of phase currents in multiple winding systems
(e.g., 12-pulse systems)
Overload capability
Types for 12-pulse systems, if required
Linking 1-pole tap changer modules together by means of

insulating shafts produces a 3-pole on-load tap changer for
regulating the output voltage of 3-phase GEAFOL transformers.
In its nine operating positions, this type of tap changer has a
rated current of 500 A and a rated voltage of 900 V per step.
This allows voltage fluctuations of up to 7,200 V to be kept
Siemens supplies oil-filled converter transformers of all ratings

and configurations known today, and dry-type cast-resin converter transformers up to 50 MVA and 250 kV LI (fig. 5.9-11).
Transformers for static converters

These are special cast-resin power transformers that are
designed for the special demands of thyristor converter or diode
rectifier operation.
To define and quote for such transformers, it is necessary to

know considerable details on the converter to be supplied and
Fig. 5.9-10: 16/22-MVA GEAFOL cast-resin transformer with oil-free on-load tap changer
280
Transformers
on the existing harmonics. These transformers are almost exclusively inquired together with the respective drive or rectifier
system and are always custom-engineered for the given application.
Neutral earthing transformers
When a neutral earthing reactor or earth-fault neutralizer is
required in a 3-phase system and no suitable neutral is available,
a neutral earthing must be provided by using a neutral earthing
transformer.
Neutral earthing transformers are available for continuous
operation or short-time operation. The zero impedance is
normally low. The standard vector group is wye/delta. Some
other vector groups are also possible.
Neutral earthing transformers can be built by Siemens in all
common power ratings.
Fig. 5.9-11: 23-MVA GEAFOL cast-resin transformer 10 kV/Dd0Dy11
Transformers for silicon-reactor power feeding

These special transformers are an important component in
plants for producing polycrystalline silicon, which is needed
particularly by the solar industry for the manufacture of
collectors.
What is special about these transformers is that they have to
provide five or more secondary voltages for the voltage supply
of the special thyristor controllers. The load is highly unbalanced
and is subject to harmonics that are generated by the converters. Special GEAFOL cast-resin transformers with open
secondary circuit have been developed for this purpose. The
rated power can be up to round about 10 MVA, and the current
can exceed an intensity of 5,000 amps depending on the reactor
type and operating mode. Depending on the reactor control
system two-winding or multi-winding transformers will be used
(fig. 5.9-12).
GEAFOL cast-resin transformers in protective housings with
an air-water cooling system
The GEAFOL cast-resin transformers are designed using the
special AFWF cooling system. With this system, the thermal
losses generated in the windings and in the iron core are not
released directly into the environment as hot air, but are collected in a largely airtight protective housing around and above
the transformer, and then compressed using fans via an airwater heat exchanger and released from there into an external
cold water circulation system. The re-cooled, cold air is then
distributed to all phases using a system of air guide plates, and
is fed back to cool the windings from below. A double-pipe
construction system for the coolers with leak monitoring ensures
additional operational safety. The housing-transformer system is
widely used on ships, and is available up to the highest ratings.
Fig. 5.9-12: 4771 kVA GEAFOL converter transformer with

5 secondary tappings 10/0.33 2.4 kV
Fig. 5.9-13: GEAFOL cast-resin transformers in protective housing

with an air-water cooling system
281
Transformers
160
250
(315) 4)
1)
LWA
dB
440
1,850
59
4GB5044-3CY05-0AA2
a2)
b2)
h2)
approx.
kg
mm
mm
mm
600
1,210
670
840
10
0.4
28/75
3/
320
1,850
51
4GB5044-3GY05-0AA2
720
1,230
675
845
10
0.4
28/v75
3/
360
2,000
59
4GB5044-3DY05-0AA2
570
1,200
680
805
10
0.4
28/75
3/
290
2,000
51
4GB5044-3HY05-0AA2
720
1,280
685
890
20
0.4
50/95
3/
600
1,750
59
4GB5064-3CY05-0AA2
620
1,220
740
925
20
0.4
50/95
3/
400
1,750
51
4GB5064-3GY05-0AA2
740
1,260
745
945
20
0.4
50/95
3/
460
2,050
59
4GB5064-3DY05-0AA2
610
1,250
750
915
20
0.4
50/95
3/
340
2,050
51
4GB5064-3HY05-0AA2
730
1,280
750
940
20
0.4
50/125
3/
460
2,050
59
4GB5067-3DY05-0AA2
720
1,260
750
1,145
10
0.4
28/75
3/
610
2,600
62
4GB5244-3CY05-0AA2
820
1,270
690
1,025
10
0.4
28/75
3/
440
2,600
54
4GB5244-3GY05-0AA2
960
1,260
685
1,100
10
0.4
28/75
3/
500
2,750
62
4GB5244-3DY05-0AA2
690
1,220
685
990
10
0.4
28/75
3/
400
2,750
54
4GB5244-3HY05-0AA2
850
1,290
695
1,010
20
0.4
50/95
3/
870
2,500
62
4GB5264-3CY05-0AA2
790
1,280
745
1,060
20
0.4
50/95
3/
580
2,500
54
4GB5264-3GY05-0AA2
920
1,320
755
1,060
20
0.4
50/95
3/
650
2,700
62
4GB5264-3DY05-0AA2
780
1,320
760
1,040
20
0.4
50/95
3/
480
2,700
54
4GB5264-3HY05-0AA2
860
1,350
765
1,050
20
0.4
50/125
3/
650
2,900
62
4GB5267-3DY05-0AA2
870
1,310
720
1,200
10
0.4
28/75
3/
820
3,200
65
4GB5444-3CY05-0AA2
1,010
1,330
700
1,055
10
0.4
28/75
3/
600
3,200
57
4GB5444-3GY05-0AA2
1,250
1,340
700
1,190
10
0.4
28/75
3/
700
3,300
65
4GB5444-3DY05-0AA2
960
1,340
705
1,055
10
0.4
28/75
3/
560
3,300
57
4GB5444-3HY05-0AA2
1,130
1,390
715
1,070
20
0.4
50/95
3/
1,100
3,200
65
4GB5464-3CY05-0AA2
1,070
1,370
730
1,115
20
0.4
50/95
3/
800
3,300
57
4GB5464-3GY05-0AA2
1,230
1,420
740
1,130
20
0.4
50/95
3/
880
3,400
65
4GB5464-3DY05-0AA2
1,020
1,390
740
1,105
20
0.4
50/95
3/
650
3,400
57
4GB5464-3HY05-0AA2
1,190
1,430
745
1,125
20
0.4
50/125
3/
880
3,800
65
4GB5467-3DY05-0AA2
1,070
1,390
740
1,200
30
0.4
70/145
3/
1,280
4,000
67
4GB5475-3DY05-0AA2
1,190
1,450
825
1,365
10
0.4
28/75
3/
980
3,500
67
4GB5544-3CY05-0AA2
1,120
1,340
820
1,130
10
0.4
28/75
3/
730
3,500
59
4GB5544-3GY05-0AA2
1,400
1,400
820
1,195
10
0.4
28/75
3/
850
3,900
67
4GB5544-3DY05-0AA2
1,130
1,360
820
1,160
10
0.4
28/75
3/
670
3,700
59
4GB5544-3HY05-0AA2
1,260
1,400
820
1,170
20
0.4
50/95
3/
1,250
3,500
67
4GB5564-3CY05-0AA2
1,370
1,490
835
1,145
20
0.4
50/95
3/
930
3,500
59
4GB5564-3GY05-0AA2
1,590
1,520
835
1,205
20
0.4
50/95
3/
1,000
3,800
67
4GB5564-3DY05-0AA2
1,350
1,490
835
1,180
20
0.4
50/95
3/
780
3,800
59
4GB5564-3HY05-0AA2
1,450
1,520
840
1,205
20
0.4
50/125
3/
1,000
4,200
67
4GB5567-3DY05-0AA2
1,430
1,520
840
1,235
30
0.4
70/145
3/
1,450
4,700
69
4GB5575-3DY05-0AA2
1,460
1,510
915
1,445
Applies to Ur HV:
10 to 12 kV
20 to 24 kV
30 to 36 kV
2)
Dimension drawing: page 264,

indications are approximate values
Indication of 0.4 kV applies to
the voltage range of 0.40.45 kV
4) Ratings in brackets are not standardized
3)
Table 5.9-3: GEAFOL cast-resin transformers 100 to 16,000 kVA
282
Height
Pk120
Width
Po
Length
uzr
Order No.
Total weight
3/
Noise level
28/75
Load losses at 120 C
0.4
No-load losses
kV
10
Impedance voltage
at rated current
kV
100
Insulation level LV
(AC/LI)
Ur
LV
kV
Sr
Insulation level HV
(AC/LI)
Rated secondary
voltage3) (no-load)
kVA
Ur
HV
kV
Rated power
Rated primary voltage1)

tapping 2 x 2.5 %
GEAFOL cast-resin transformers comply with IEC 60076-11 or DIN EN 60076-11 and VDE
0532-76-11 without housing, vector group Dyn5, 50 Hz, rated power > 3150 kVA are not
standardized. Other versions and special equipment on request.
Transformers
(500) 4)
630
800
1)
LWA
dB
1,150
4,400
68
4GB5644-3CY05-0AA2
Height
Pk120
Width
Po
Length
uzr
Order No.
Total weight
3/
Noise level
28/75
0.4
No-load losses
kV
10
Impedance voltage
at rated current
kV
400
Insulation level LV
(AC/LI)
Ur
LV
kV
Sr
Insulation level HV
(AC/LI)
Rated secondary
voltage3) (no-load)
kVA
Ur
HV
kV
Rated power

tapping 2 x 2.5 %
a2)
b2)
h2)
approx.
kg
mm
mm
mm
1,290
1,370
820
1,230
10
0.4
28/75
3/
880
4,400
60
4GB5644-3GY05-0AA2
1,500
1,390
820
1,330
10
0.4
28/75
3/
1,000
4,900
68
4GB5644-3DY05-0AA2
1,230
1,400
820
1,215
10
0.4
28/75
3/
800
4,900
60
4GB5644-3HY05-0AA2
1,390
1,430
820
1,230
20
0.4
50/95
3/
1,450
3,800
68
4GB5664-3CY05-0AA2
1,470
1,460
830
1,285
20
0.4
50/95
3/
1,100
3,800
60
4GB5664-3GY05-0AA2
1,710
1,520
835
1,305
20
0.4
50/95
3/
1,200
4,300
68
4GB5664-3DY05-0AA2
1,380
1,490
835
1,260
20
0.4
50/95
3/
940
4,300
60
4GB5664-3HY05-0AA2
1,460
1,500
840
1,260
20
0.4
50/125
3/
1,200
4,700
68
4GB5667-3DY05-0AA2
1,530
1,540
845
1,310
30
0.4
70/145
3/
1,650
5,500
69
4GB5675-3DY05-0AA2
1,590
1,560
925
1,500
10
0.4
28/75
3/
1,300
5,900
69
4GB5744-3CY05-0AA0
1,490
1,410
820
1,315
10
0.4
28/75
3/
1,000
5,300
61
4GB5744-3GY05-0AA0
1,620
1,420
820
1,340
10
0.4
28/75
3/
1,200
6,400
69
4GB5744-3DY05-0AA0
1,420
1,450
820
1,245
10
0.4
28/75
3/
950
6,400
61
4GB5744-3HY05-0AA0
1,540
1,490
820
1,265
20
0.4
50/95
3/
1,700
4,900
69
4GB5764-3CY05-0AA0
1,550
1,460
840
1,365
20
0.4
50/95
3/
1,300
4,900
61
4GB5764-3GY05-0AA0
1,700
1,490
845
1,370
20
0.4
50/95
3/
1,400
5,100
69
4GB5764-3DY05-0AA0
1,500
1,530
855
1,275
20
0.4
50/95
3/
1,100
5,100
61
4GB5764-3HY05-0AA0
1,670
1,560
860
1,290
20
0.4
50/125
3/
1,400
6,300
69
4GB5767-3DY05-0AA0
1,610
1,540
855
1,355
30
0.4
70/145
3/
1,900
6,000
70
4GB5775-3DY05-0AA0
1,810
1,560
925
1,615
30
0.4
70/170
3/
2,600
6,200
79
4GB5780-3DY05-0AA0
2,110
1,710
1,005
1,590
10
0.4
28/75
3/
1,500
7,300
70
4GB5844-3CY05-0AA0
1,670
1,410
820
1,485
1,485
10
0.4
28/75
3/
1,150
7,300
62
4GB5844-3GY05-0AA0
1,840
1,440
820
10
0.4
28/75
3/
1,370
7,500
70
4GB5844-3DY05-0AA0
1,710
1,520
830
1,305
10
0.4
28/75
3/
1,100
7,500
62
4GB5844-3HY05-0AA0
1,850
1,560
835
1,330
20
0.4
50/95
3/
2,000
6,900
70
4GB5864-3CY05-0AA0
1,790
1,470
840
1,530
20
0.4
50/95
3/
1,600
6,900
62
4GB5864-3GY05-0AA0
1,930
1,520
845
1,565
20
0.4
50/95
3/
1,650
6,800
70
4GB5864-3DY05-0AA0
1,750
1,560
860
1,365
20
0.4
50/95
3/
1,250
6,800
62
4GB5864-3HY05-0AA0
1,900
1,600
865
1,385
20
0.4
50/125
3/
1,650
7,000
70
4GB5867-3DY05-0AA0
1,830
1,590
865
1,395
30
0.4
70/145
3/
2,200
6,600
71
4GB5875-3DY05-0AA0
2,090
1,620
940
1,640
10
0.4
28/75
3/
1,800
7,800
72
4GB5944-3CY05-0AA0
1,970
1,500
820
1,535
10
0.4
28/75
3/
1,400
7,800
64
4GB5944-3GY05-0AA0
2,210
1,530
825
1,535
10
0.4
28/75
3/
1,700
8,300
72
4GB5944-3DY05-0AA0
2,020
1,590
840
1,395
10
0.4
28/75
3/
1,300
8,300
64
4GB5944-3HY05-0AA0
2,230
1,620
845
1,395
20
0.4
50/95
3/
2,400
8,500
72
4GB5964-3CY05-0AA0
2,020
1,550
850
1,595
20
0.4
50/95
3/
1,900
8,500
64
4GB5964-3GY05-0AA0
2,220
1,570
855
1,595
20
0.4
50/95
3/
1,900
8,200
72
4GB5964-3DY05-0AA0
2,020
1,610
870
1,435
20
0.4
50/95
3/
1,500
8,200
64
4GB5964-3HY05-0AA0
2,220
1,650
875
1,455
20
0.4
50/125
3/
1,900
9,400
72
4GB5967-3DY05-0AA0
2,160
1,660
880
1,485
30
0.4
70/145
3/
2,650
7,900
72
4GB5975-3DY05-0AA0
2,620
1,740
965
1,695
Applies to Ur HV:
10 to 12 kV
20 to 24 kV
30 to 36 kV
2)

Indication of 0.4 kV applies to
3)
283
Transformers
73
4GB6044-3CY05-0AA0
(1,250) 4)
1,600
(2,000) 4)
2,500
1)
284
LWA
Height
10,000
Pk120
Width
2,100
Po
Length
dB
uzr
Order No.
Total weight
3/
Noise level
28/75
0.4
No-load losses
kV
10
Impedance voltage
at rated current
kV
1,000
Insulation level LV
(AC/LI)
Ur
LV
kV
Sr
Insulation level HV
(AC/LI)
Rated secondary
voltage3) (no-load)
kVA
Ur
HV
kV
Rated power

tapping 2 x 2.5 %
a2)
b2)
h2)
approx.
kg
mm
mm
mm
2,440
1,550
990
1,730
10
0.4
28/75
3/
1,600
10,000
65
4GB6044-3GY05-0AA0
2,850
1,620
990
1,795
10
0.4
28/75
3/
2,000
9,500
73
4GB6044-3DY05-0AA0
2,370
1,640
990
1,490
10
0.4
28/75
3/
1,500
9,500
65
4GB6044-3HY05-0AA0
2,840
1,710
990
1,565
20
0.4
50/95
3/
2,800
9,500
73
4GB6064-3CY05-0AA0
2,420
1,570
990
1,790
20
0.4
50/95
3/
2,300
8,700
65
4GB6064-3GY05-0AA0
2,740
1,680
990
1,665
20
0.4
50/95
3/
2,300
9,400
73
4GB6064-3DY05-0AA0
2,310
1,640
990
1,620
20
0.4
50/95
3/
1,800
9,400
65
4GB6064-3HY05-0AA0
2,510
1,660
990
1,620
20
0.4
50/125
3/
2,300
11,000
73
4GB6067-3DY05-0AA0
2,470
1,670
990
1,650
30
0.4
70/145
3/
3,100
10,000
73
4GB6075-3DY05-0AA0
2,990
1,800
1,060
1,795
10
0.4
28/75
3/
2,400
11,000
75
4GB6144-3DY05-0AA0
2,780
1,740
990
1,635
10
0.4
28/75
3/
1,800
11,000
67
4GB6144-3HY05-0AA0
3,140
1,770
990
1,675
20
0.4
50/95
3/
2,700
11,200
75
4GB6164-3DY05-0AA0
2,740
1,780
990
1,645
20
0.4
50/95
3/
2,100
11,200
67
4GB6164-3HY05-0AA0
3,010
1,810
990
1,645
20
0.4
50/125
3/
2,700
10,500
75
4GB6167-3DY05-0AA0
2,980
1,810
990
1,675
30
0.4
70/145
3/
3,600
11,500
75
4GB6175-3DY05-0AA0
3,580
1,870
1,065
1,895
10
0.4
28/75
3/
2,800
14,000
76
4GB6244-3DY05-0AA0
3,490
1,830
990
1,735
10
0.4
28/75
3/
2,100
14,000
68
4GB6244-3HY05-0AA0
4,130
1,880
990
1,775
20
0.4
50/95
3/
3,100
13,500
76
4GB6264-3DY05-0AA0
3,440
1,840
995
1,830
20
0.4
50/95
3/
2,400
13,500
68
4GB6264-3HY05-0AA0
3,830
1,870
1,000
1,880
20
0.4
50/125
3/
3,100
12,500
76
4GB6267-3DY05-0AA0
3,690
1,860
995
1,880
30
0.4
70/145
3/
4,100
13,500
76
4GB6275-3DY05-0AA0
4,350
1,970
1,090
1,995
10
0.4
28/75
3/
3,500
15,700
78
4GB6344-3DY05-0AA0
4,150
1,940
1,280
1,935
10
0.4
28/75
3/
2,600
15,700
70
4GB6344-3HY05-0AA0
4,890
1,970
1,280
2,015
20
0.4
50/95
3/
4,000
15,400
78
4GB6364-3DY05-0AA0
4,170
1,980
1,280
1,960
20
0.4
50/95
3/
2,900
15,400
70
4GB6364-3HY05-0AA0
4,720
2,010
1,280
1,985
20
0.4
50/125
3/
4,000
15,500
78
4GB6367-3DY05-0AA0
4,430
2,020
1,280
2,005
30
0.4
70/145
3/
5,000
15,000
78
4GB6375-3DY05-0AG0
5,090
2,100
1,280
2,135
10
0.4
28/75
3/
4,300
18,700
81
4GB6444-3DY05-0AG0
4,840
2,090
1,280
2,070
10
0.4
28/75
3/
3,000
18,700
71
4GB6444-3HY05-0AA0
5,940
2,160
1,280
2,135
20
0.4
50/95
3/
5,000
18,000
81
4GB6464-3DY05-0AA0
5,200
2,150
1,280
2,165
20
0.4
50/95
3/
3,600
19,000
71
4GB6464-3HY05-0AA0
6,020
2,190
1,280
2,180
20
0.4
50/125
3/
5,000
18,000
81
4GB6467-3DY05-0AG0
5,020
2,160
1,280
2,105
30
0.4
70/145
3/
5,800
20,000
81
4GB6475-3DY05-0AG0
5,920
2,280
1,280
2,215
Applies to Ur HV:
10 to 12 kV
20 to 24 kV
30 to 36 kV
2)

3) Indication of 0.4 kV applies to
Transformers
82
10
0.69
28/75
3/
5,400
18,000
81
4GB6544-8DY05-0AA0
6,480
2,200
1,280
2,055
10
3.3
28/75
10/20
5,400
18,000
81
4GB6544-9DY05-0AA0
6,470
2,230
1,280
2,000
4,000
5,000
1)
LWA
4GB6544-3DY05-0AA0
Height
25,000
Pk120
Width
5,400
Po
Length
dB
uzr
Order No.
Total weight
3/
Noise level
28/75
0.4
No-load losses
kV
10
Impedance voltage
at rated current
kV
3,150
Insulation level LV
(AC/LI)
Ur
LV
kV
Sr
Insulation level HV
(AC/LI)
Rated secondary
voltage3) (no-load)
kVA
Ur
HV
kV
Rated power

tapping 2 x 2.5 %
a2)
b2)
h2)
approx.
kg
mm
mm
mm
6,500
2,450
1,280
2,310
20
0.4
50/95
3/
6,000
24,000
81
4GB6564-3DY05-0AG0
6,170
2,320
1,280
2,230
20
0.69
50/95
3/
6,200
18,000
81
4GB6564-8DY05-0AG0
6,080
2,170
1,280
2,105
20
3.3
50/95
10/20
6,200
18,000
81
4GB6564-9DY05-0AA0
6,660
2,280
1,280
2,030
20
0.4
50/125
3/
6,200
21,000
81
4GB6567-3DY05-0AG0
6,290
2,340
1,280
2,300
20
0.69
50/125
3/
6,200
18,000
81
4GB6567-8DY05-0AG0
6,170
2,170
1,280
2,150
20
3.3
50/125
10/20
7,300
18,000
81
4GB6567-9DY05-0AA0
6,770
2,300
1,280
2,060
10
0.69
28/75
3/
6,300
20,000
81
4GB6644-8DY05-0AG0
7,970
2,360
1,280
2,245
10
3.3
28/75
10/20
6,300
19,000
81
4GB6644-9DY05-0AA0
8,570
2,450
1,280
2,080
10
6.3
28/75
20/40
6,300
19,000
76
4GB6644-9DY05-0AA0
9,210
2,570
1,280
2,125
20
0.69
50/95
3/
7,600
21,000
83
4GB6664-8DY05-0AG0
7,330
2,280
1,280
2,330
20
3.3
50/95
10/20
7,600
19,000
83
4GB6664-9DY05-0AG0
7,450
2,460
1,280
2,050
20
6.3
50/95
20/40
7,600
19,000
83
4GB6664-9DY05-0AA0
8,710
2,590
1,280
2,055
20
0.69
50/125
3/
7,600
21,000
85
4GB6667-8DY05-0AG0
7,430
2,400
1,280
2,335
20
3.3
50/125
10/20
7,600
19,000
83
4GB6667-9DY05-0AG0
7,850
2,430
1,280
2,100
20
6.3
50/125
20/40
7,600
19,000
85
4GB6667-9DY05-0AA0
8,990
2,610
1,280
2,125
10
3.3
28/75
10/20
7,600
21,000
81
4GB6744-9DY05-0AG0
9,620
2,480
1,280
2,290
10
6.3
28/75
20/40
7,600
23,000
78
4GB6744-9DY05-0AA0
10,370
2,590
1,400
2,290
10
3.3
28/75
10/20
7,600
23,000
76
4GB6744-9KY05-0AG0
9,680
2,600
1,280
2,250
10
6.3
28/75
20/40
7,600
24,000
78
4GB6744-9KY05-0AA0
10,490
2,690
1,400
2,290
2,210
20
3.3
50/95
10/20
9,000
21,000
83
4GB6764-9DY05-0AG0
9,090
2,530
1,280
20
6.3
50/95
20/40
9,000
23,000
83
4GB6764-9DY05-0AG0
9,650
2,600
1,280
2,295
20
3.3
50/125
10/20
9,000
21,000
83
4GB6767-9DY05-0AG0
9,400
2,530
1,280
2,280
20
6.3
50/125
20/40
9,000
22,000
83
4GB6767-9DY05-0AA0
9,980
2,640
1,285
2,365
20
3.3
50/95
10/20
9,000
23,000
83
4GB6764-9KY05-0AG0
9,090
2,600
1,280
2,210
20
6.3
50/95
20/40
9,000
24,000
83
4GB6764-9KY05-0AG0
9,750
2,710
1,295
2,295
20
3.3
50/125
10/20
9,000
23,000
83
4GB6767-9KY05-0AG0
9,090
2,610
1,280
2,240
20
6.3
50/125
20/40
9,000
24,000
83
4GB6767-9KY05-0AA0
10,330
2,720
1,400
2,290
Applies to Ur HV:
10 to 12 kV
20 to 24 kV
30 to 36 kV
2)

285
Transformers
5
8,000
10,000
1)
286
LWA
dB
9,200
26,000
76
4GB6844-9DY05-0AG0
Height
Pk120
Width
Po
Length
uzr
Order No.
Total weight
10/20
Noise level
28/75
3.3
No-load losses
kV
10
Impedance voltage
at rated current
kV
6,300
Insulation level LV
(AC/LI)
Ur
LV
kV
Sr
Insulation level HV
(AC/LI)
Rated secondary
voltage3) (no-load)
kVA
Ur
HV
kV
Rated power

tapping 2 x 2.5 %
a2)
b2)
h2)
approx.
kg
mm
mm
mm
11,960
2,570
1,905
2,650
10
6.3
28/75
20/40
9,200
27,000
83
4GB6844-9DY05-0AG0
12,240
2,650
1,905
2,630
10
3.3
28/75
10/20
9,200
26,000
78
4GB6844-9KY05-0AG0
11,670
2,630
1,905
2,610
10
6.3
28/75
20/40
9,200
28,000
83
4GB6844-9KY05-0AG0
12,240
2,730
1,905
2,630
20
3.3
50/95
10/20
10,800
24,000
83
4GB6864-9DY05-0AG0
11,740
2,640
1,905
2,440
20
6.3
50/95
20/40
10,800
26,000
83
4GB6864-9DY05-0AG0
12,120
2,700
1,905
2,540
20
3.3
50/125
10/20
10,800
24,000
83
4GB6867-9DY05-0AG0
11,780
2,640
1,905
2,470
20
6.3
50/125
20/40
10,500
26,000
84
4GB6867-9DY05-0AG0
12,140
2,700
1,905
2,560
20
3.3
50/95
10/20
10,800
26,000
83
4GB6864-9KY05-0AG0
11,850
2,780
1,905
2,440
20
6.3
50/95
20/40
10,800
27,000
84
4GB6864-9KY05-0AG0
12,330
2,840
1,905
2,545
20
3.3
50/125
10/20
10,500
25,500
83
4GB6867-9KY05-0AG0
11,890
2,770
1,905
2,470
20
6.3
50/125
20/40
10,500
27,000
84
4GB6867-9KY05-0AG0
12,290
2,820
1,905
2,560
20
6.3
50/95
20/40
13,000
32,000
85
4GB6964-9DY05-0AG0
14,290
2,840
1,905
2,720
20
11
50/95
28/60
13,000
32,000
85
4GB6964-9DY05-0AG0
15,610
2,950
1,905
2,790
20
6.3
50/125
20/40
13,000
32,000
85
4GB6967-9DY05-0AG0
14,540
2,900
1,905
2,750
20
11
50/125
28/60
13,000
32,000
85
4GB6967-9DY05-0AG0
15,810
2,960
1,905
2,820
20
6.3
50/95
20/40
13,000
34,000
85
4GB6964-9KY05-0AG0
14,360
2,970
1,905
2,720
20
11
50/95
28/60
13,000
34,000
85
4GB6964-9KY05-0AG0
15,600
3,070
1,905
2,790
20
6.3
50/125
20/40
13,000
34,000
85
4GB6967-9KY05-0AG0
14,370
2,940
1,905
2,750
20
11
50/125
28/60
13,000
34,000
85
4GB6967-9KY05-0AG0
15,680
3,080
1,905
2,820
30
6.3
70/145
20/40
13,500
36,000
84
4GB6975-9DY05-0AG0
16,230
2,890
1,905
3,290
30
11
70/145
28/60
13,500
38,000
84
4GB6975-9DY05-0AG0
17,670
3,040
1,905
3,260
2,900
20
6.3
50/95
20/40
15,200
36,000
85
4GB7064-9DY05-0AG0
17,280
3,020
1,905
20
11
50/95
28/60
15,200
36,000
85
4GB7064-9DY05-0AG0
18,130
3,180
1,905
2,830
20
6.3
50/125
20/40
15,200
38,000
85
4GB7067-9DY05-0AG0
17,650
3,080
1,905
2,970
20
11
50/125
28/60
15,200
38,000
85
4GB7067-9DY05-0AG0
18,760
3,230
1,905
2,900
20
6.3
50/95
20/40
15,200
36,000
85
4GB7064-9KY05-0AG0
17,280
3,140
1,905
2,900
20
11
50/95
28/60
15,200
36,000
85
4GB7064-9KY05-0AG0
17,660
3,265
1,905
2,790
20
6.3
50/125
20/40
15,200
38,000
85
4GB7067-9KY05-0AG0
17,410
3,130
1,905
2,930
20
11
50/125
28/60
15,200
38,000
85
4GB7067-9KY05-0AG0
17,740
3,270
1,905
2,820
30
6.3
70/145
20/40
15,600
39,000
85
4GB7075-9DY05-0AG0
19,390
3,090
1,905
3,460
30
11
70/145
28/60
15,600
42,000
85
4GB7075-9DY05-0AG0
20,890
3,270
1,905
3,450
Applies to Ur HV:
10 to 12 kV
20 to 24 kV
30 to 36 kV
2)

Transformers
85
16,000
1)
LWA
4GB7164-9DY05-0AG0
Height
42,000
Pk120
Width
18,200
Po
Length
dB
uzr
Order No.
Total weight
20/40
Noise level
50/95
6.3
No-load losses
kV
20
Impedance voltage
at rated current
kV
12,500
Insulation level LV
(AC/LI)
Ur
LV
kV
Sr
Insulation level HV
(AC/LI)
Rated secondary
voltage3) (no-load)
kVA
Ur
HV
kV
Rated power

tapping 2 x 2.5 %
a2)
b2)
h2)
approx.
kg
mm
mm
mm
21,450
3,205
1,905
3,100
20
11
50/95
28/60
18,200
44,000
85
4GB7164-9DY05-0AG0
22,340
3,325
1,905
3,130
20
6.3
50/125
20/40
18,200
42,000
85
4GB7167-9DY05-0AG0
21,670
3,235
1,905
3,130
20
11
50/125
28/60
18,200
44,000
85
4GB7167-9DY05-0AG0
23,010
3,355
1,905
3,160
20
6.3
50/95
20/40
18,200
44,000
85
4GB7164-9KY05-0AG0
21,280
3,330
1,905
3,060
20
11
50/95
28/60
18,200
46,000
85
4GB7164-9KY05-0AG0
22,930
3,480
1,905
3,130
20
6.3
50/125
20/40
18,200
44,000
85
4GB7167-9KY05-0AG0
21,450
3,350
1,905
3,090
20
11
50/125
28/60
18,200
46,000
85
4GB7167-9KY05-0AG0
23,290
3,500
1,905
3,160
30
6.3
70/145
20/40
18,500
46,000
85
4GB7175-9DY05-0AG0
24,120
3,250
1,905
3,580
30
11
70/145
28/60
18,500
48,000
85
4GB7175-9DY05-0AG0
25,030
3,390
1,905
3,610
20
6.3
50/95
20/40
22,000
53,000
88
4GB7264-9DY05-0AG0
26,440
3,190
1,905
3,980
20
11
50/95
28/60
22,000
53,000
88
4GB7264-9DY05-0AG0
26,380
3,310
1,905
3,700
20
6.3
50/125
20/40
22,000
53,000
88
4GB7267-9DY05-0AG0
26,720
3,230
1,905
4,010
20
11
50/125
28/60
22,000
53,000
88
4GB7267-9DY05-0AG0
26,750
3,385
1,905
3,730
20
6.3
50/95
20/40
22,000
55,000
88
4GB7264-9KY05-0AG0
26,170
3,325
1,905
3,940
20
11
50/95
28/60
22,000
55,000
88
4GB7264-9KY05-0AG0
26,460
3,455
1,905
3,700
20
6.3
50/125
20/40
22,000
55,000
88
4GB7267-9KY05-0AG0
26,530
3,350
1,905
4,010
20
11
50/125
28/60
22,000
55,000
88
4GB7267-9KY05-0AG0
26,680
3,455
1,905
3,730
30
6.3
70/145
20/40
22,000
55,000
86
4GB7275-9DY05-0AG0
28,930
3,410
1,905
3,860
30
11
70/145
28/60
22,000
55,000
86
4GB7275-9DY05-0AG0
29,160
3,575
1,905
3,650
Applies to Ur HV:
20 to 24 kV
30 to 36 kV
2)

287
Transformers
A
2U
2V
2W
2N
1
1U
1V
1W
2
5
k
e
f
Dimension drawing
Dimensions A, B and H, see pages 258 263
Dimension e applies to lengthways and sideways travel
1 High-voltage terminals
2 High-voltage tappings on HV side
3 Low-voltage terminals
Fig. 5.9-14: Dimension drawing of GEAFOL cast-resin transformers
Notes
The technical data, dimensions and weights are subject to change unless otherwise stated on the
individual pages of this catalog. The illustrations are for reference only.
All product designations used are trademarks or product names of Siemens AG or of other suppliers.
All dimensions in this catalog are given in mm.
The information in this document contains general descriptions of the technical options available,
which do not always have to be present in individual cases. The required features should therefore be
specified in each individual case at the time of closing the contract.
288
g
B
Design up to 100 kVA without rollers
Transformers
70
4GT5844-3CY05-0AB0
(800) 1)
1,000
1) Power
LWA
Order No.
Height
7,700
Pk120
Width
1,500
Po
Length
dB
uzr
Total weight
AV3/
Noise level
AV28-LI75
0.4
No-load losses
kV
10
Impedance voltage
at rated current
kV
630
Insulation level LV
(AC/LI)
Ur
LV
kV
Sr
Insulation level HV
(AC/LI)
Rated secondary
voltage (no-load)
kVA
Ur
HV
kV
Rated power1)
Rated primary voltage

tapping 2 x 2.5 %
a2)
b2)
h2)
approx.
kg
mm
mm
mm
1,540
1,270
820
1,430
10
0.4
AV28-LI75
AV3/
1,150
7,700
62
4GT5844-3GY05-0AB0
1,730
1,300
820
1,470
10
0.4
AV28-LI75
AV3/
1,400
7,400
70
4GT5844-3DY05-0AB0
1,490
1,385
835
1285,
10
0.4
AV28-LI75
AV3/
1,100
7,400
62
4GT5844-3HY05-0AB0
1,640
1,415
840
1,325
20
0.4
AV50-LI95
AV3/
1,800
7,700
70
4GT5864-3CY05-0AB0
1,620
1,340
855
1,435
20
0.4
AV50-LI95
AV3/
1,350
7,700
62
4GT5864-3GY05-0AB0
1,880
1,390
860
1,505
20
0.4
AV50-LI95
AV3/
1,650
6,900
70
4GT5864-3DY05-0AB0
1,550
1,460
875
1,270
20
0.4
AV50-LI95
AV3/
1,200
6,900
62
4GT5864-3HY05-0AB0
1,750
1,490
880
1,320
20
0.4
AV50-LI125
AV3/
1,750
7,700
70
4GT5867-3DY05-0AB0
1,680
1,440
920
1,515
30
0.4
AV70-LI145
AV3/
2,150
6,500
71
4GT5875-3DY05-0AB0
2,130
1,630
965
1,625
10
0.4
AV28-LI75
AV3/
1,800
8,700
72
4GT5944-3CY05-0AB0
1,840
1,360
830
1,470
10
0.4
AV28-LI75
AV3/
1,400
8,700
64
4GT5944-3GY05-0AB0
2,040
1,390
835
1,455
10
0.4
AV28-LI75
AV3/
1,700
8,300
72
4GT5944-3DY05-0AB0
1,790
1,440
845
1,400
10
0.4
AV28-LI75
AV3/
1,300
8,300
64
4GT5944-3HY05-0AB0
1,980
1,465
850
1,400
20
0.4
AV50-LI95
AV3/
2,150
8,700
72
4GT5964-3CY05-0AB0
1,870
1,400
865
1,525
20
0.4
AV50-LI95
AV3/
1,550
8,700
64
4GT5964-3GY05-0AB0
2,100
1,435
870
1,510
20
0.4
AV50-LI95
AV3/
1,950
8,500
72
4GT5964-3DY05-0AB0
1,800
1,465
875
1,435
20
0.4
AV50-LI95
AV3/
1,450
8,500
64
4GT5964-3HY05-0AB0
1,990
1,495
880
1,435
20
0.4
AV50-LI125
AV3/
2,100
8,600
72
4GT5967-3DY05-0AB0
1,960
1,510
930
1,550
30
0.4
AV70-LI145
AV3/
2,500
8,500
72
4GT5975-3DY05-0AB0
2,420
1,685
925
1,690
10
0.4
AV28-LI75
AV3/
2,100
10,000
73
4GT6044-3CY05-0AB0
2,170
1,395
990
1,615
10
0.4
AV28-LI75
AV3/
1,650
10,000
65
4GT6044-3GY05-0AB0
2,410
1,435
990
1,615
1,440
10
0.4
AV28-LI75
AV3/
2,000
9,300
73
4GT6044-3DY05-0AB0
2,080
1,500
990
10
0.4
AV28-LI75
AV3/
1,500
9,300
65
4GT6044-3HY05-0AB0
2,300
1,535
990
1,480
20
0.4
AV50-LI95
AV3/
2,500
10,000
73
4GT6064-3CY05-0AB0
2,180
1,435
990
1,655
20
0.4
AV50-LI95
AV3/
1,800
10,000
65
4GT6064-3GY05-0AB0
2,460
1,460
990
1,695
20
0.4
AV50-LI95
AV3/
2,300
9,500
73
4GT6064-3DY05-0AB0
2,120
1,525
990
1,535
20
0.4
AV50-LI95
AV3/
1,700
9,500
65
4GT6064-3HY05-0AB0
2,370
1,575
990
1,520
20
0.4
AV50-LI125
AV3/
2,500
10,000
73
4GT6067-3DY05-0AB0
2,290
1,590
990
1,625
30
0.4
AV70-LI145
AV3/
2,900
10,000
73
4GT6075-3DY05-0AB0
2,720
1,715
1,015
1,760
ratings shown in parentheses are

not preferred values.
2)

indications are approximate values.
All GEAFOL Basic transformers comply with DIN VDE 0532-76-11/DIN EN

60076-11/IEC 60076-11/DIN EN 50541-1. Power ratings >2500 kVA and
different designs and special equipment on request.
Table 5.9-4: GEAFOL Basic cast-resin transformer
289
Transformers
75
4GT6144-3DY05-0AB0
1600
5
(2,000)1)
2,500
1) Power
Order No.
a2)
b2)
h2)
approx.
kg
mm
mm
mm
2,390
1,595
990
1,545
10
0.4
AV28-LI75
AV3/
1,850
11,600
67
4GT6144-3HY05-0AB0
2,670
1,640
990
1,545
20
0.4
AV50-LI95
AV3/
2,700
11,600
75
4GT6164-3DY05-0AB0
2,550
1,635
990
1,635
20
0.4
AV50-LI95
AV3/
2,050
11,600
67
4GT6164-3HY05-0AB0
2,780
1,615
990
1,710
20
0.4
AV50-LI125
AV3/
2,900
11,500
75
4GT6167-3DY05-0AB0
2,680
1,640
1,035
1,725
30
0.4
AV70-LI145
AV3/
3,500
11,800
75
4GT6175-3DY05-0AB0
3,050
1,760
1,025
1,850
10
0.4
AV28-LI75
AV3/
2,800
13,600
76
4GT6244-3DY05-0AB0
2,940
1,705
990
1,605
10
0.4
AV28-LI75
AV3/
2,100
13,600
68
4GT6244-3HY05-0AB0
3,300
1,745
990
1,650
20
0.4
AV50-LI95
AV3/
3,100
13,200
76
4GT6264-3DY05-0AB0
3,150
1,765
1,010
1,690
20
0.4
AV50-LI95
AV3/
2,400
13,200
68
4GT6264-3HY05-0AB0
3,540
1,800
1,015
1,780
20
0.4
AV50-LI125
AV3/
3,500
14,200
76
4GT6267-3DY05-0AB0
3,280
1,790
1,010
1,790
30
0.4
AV70-LI145
AV3/
4,100
13,500
76
4GT6275-3DY05-0AB0
3,620
1,825
1,035
2,035
10
0.4
AV28-LI75
AV3/
3,500
15,500
78
4GT6344-3DY05-0AB0
3,560
1,805
1,280
1,705
10
0.4
AV28-LI75
AV3/
2,600
15,500
70
4GT6344-3HY05-0AB0
4,020
1,855
1,280
1,755
20
0.4
AV50-LI95
AV3/
3,900
15,800
78
4GT6364-3DY05-0AB0
3,620
1,785
1,280
1,900
20
0.4
AV50-LI95
AV3/
2,900
15,800
70
4GT6364-3HY05-0AB0
4,000
1,820
1,280
1,950
20
0.4
AV50-LI125
AV3/
4,200
16,200
78
4GT6367-3DY05-0AB0
3,840
1,845
1,280
1,965
30
0.4
AV70-LI145
AV3/
5,000
15,500
78
4GT6375-3DY05-0AB0
4,390
1,930
1,280
2,130
10
0.4
AV28-LI75
AV3/
4,300
20,000
81
4GT6444-3DY05-0AB0
4,280
1,895
1,280
1,940
10
0.4
AV28-LI75
AV3/
3,000
20,000
71
4GT6444-3HY05-0AB0
4,940
1,920
1,280
2,005
20
0.4
AV50-LI95
AV3/
4,700
19,000
81
4GT6464-3DY05-0AB0
4,370
1,910
1,280
1,950
20
0.4
AV50-LI95
AV3/
3,500
19,000
71
4GT6464-3HY05-0AB0
4,860
1,955
1,280
2,000
20
0.4
AV50-LI125
AV3/
5,000
19,000
81
4GT6467-3DY05-0AB0
4,550
1,900
1,280
2,140
30
0.4
AV70-LI145
AV3/
5,800
17,500
81
4GT6475-3DY05-0AB0
5,210
2,045
1,280
2,250
ratings shown in parentheses are

not preferred values.
290
LWA
Height
11,600
Pk120
Width
2,400
Po
Length
dB
uzr
Total weight
AV3/
Noise level
AV28-LI75
0.4
No-load losses
kV
10
Impedance voltage
at rated current
kV
(1250)1)
Insulation level LV
(AC/LI)
Ur
LV
kV
Sr
Insulation level HV
(AC/LI)
Rated secondary
voltage (no-load)
kVA
Ur
HV
kV
Rated power1)
Rated primary voltage

tapping 2 x 2.5 %
2)

indications are approximate
values.
All GEAFOL Basic transformers comply with DIN VDE 0532-76-11/DIN EN

60076-11/IEC 60076-11/DIN EN 50541-1. Power ratings >2500 kVA and
different designs and special equipment on request.
Transformers
A1
3
2N
2U, 2V, 2W
1
1U
1V
1W
2
H1
5
k
e
f
g
B1
Dimension drawing
Dimensions A1, B1 and H1, see pages 265 266
Dimension e applies for longitudinal and transverse travel
1 High-voltage terminal
2 High-voltage tappings on the HV terminal side
3 Low-voltage terminal
Fig. 5.9-15: Dimension drawing GEAFOL Basic cast-resin transformers

Fax: ++49 (0) 70 21-5 08-4 95
www.siemens.com/energy/transformers
291
Transformers
5.10 Traction Transformers
Siemens produces transformers for railway applications called
traction transformers. These transformers are installed in electric
cars such as high-speed trains, electric multiple units (EMUs)
and electric locomotives. Their main purpose is transform the
overhead contact line voltage, which range mainly from 15 kV
up to 25 kV, to voltages suitable for traction converters
(between 0.7 kV and 1.5 kV) (fig. 5.10-1).
Siemens develops and produces traction transformers for rolling
stock applications of all relevant ratings, voltage levels and
customer-specific requirements.
All products are optimized with regard to individual customer
requirements such as:
Frequency, rating and voltage
Required dimensions and weights
Losses and impedance voltage characteristics
Operational cycles and frequency response behavior
Environmental requirements.
Characterization
Technically, traction transformers are in general characterized as
follows:
1-phase transformers
Ratings up to 10 MVA and above
Operating frequencies from 16 to 60 Hz
Voltages: 1.5 kV DC, 3 kV DC, 15 kV, 25 kV, 11.5 kV
or other specific solutions
Weight: < 15 t
Auxiliary windings and/or heater windings according to
customer specification
Single or multiple system operation
Under floor, machine room or roof assembly
Traction windings to be used as line filters.
Fig. 5.10-1: Traction transformer for high-speed trains
Integrated absorption circuit reactors

Various cooling media for all ratings: mineral oil, silicone or
ester fluid for highest environmental compatibility.
In case of customer request:
With cooling plant integrated in one frame together with the
transformer or stand-alone solution
Nomex insulation for highest energy density.
Examples
The examples shown in the table are typical applications where
traction transformers from Siemens were used (table 5.10-1).
High-speed train AVE S102 for RENFE Spain
Electric locomotive for BB Austria

(1216 Series) for cross-european haulage
Worlds most powerful series-production

freight locomotive for China
Operation: Madrid Barcelona

Travel time: 2 h 30 min for 635 km
Number of cars: 8
Power system: 25 kV/50 Hz
Maximum power at wheel: 8,800 kW
Max. speed: 350 km/h
Number of seats: 404
4 system operation
AC 15 kV: 16 Hz
AC 25 kV 50 Hz
DC 3 kV
DC 1.5 kV
Speed: 200 230 km/h
Weight 87 t
6 axle machine
9,600 kW on 6 axles
hauling of 20,000 t trains
Table 5.10-1: Siemens develops and produces traction transformers for rolling stock applications of all relevant ratings and voltage levels
292
Transformers
5.11 Transformer Lifecycle
Management
Introduction
Power transformers usually perform their work, humming
quietly for decades, without any interruption. Operators have
thus come to rely on their solid transformer capacity, often
performing only minimal maintenance using traditional
techniques.
Today, load requirements, additional environmental constraints,
and recent corporate sustainability objectives to keep a close eye
on the operational value of the equipment, have led Siemens to
provide a comprehensive set of solutions to keep the equipment
at peak level under any operational circumstances. A new generation of asset managers is interested in the operational value,
including the replacement cost, instead of the depreciated
book-value over decades, which is often close to zero.
Power transformers are long-lasting capital investment goods.
Purchasing and replacement require long periods of planning
engineering and procurement. Each individual conception is
specially adapted to the specific requirements. The corresponding high replacement value, and the important lead time
are in the focus.
5
Fig. 5.11-1: Siemens Transformer Lifecycle Management
scope of services
What is TLM?
Siemens Transformer Lifecycle Management (TLM) includes
highly experienced transformer experts who provide the most
effective lifecycle solutions for power transformers of any age
and any brand (fig. 5.11-1).
Maintaining the operators power transformers at peak operating level is the prime objective of the Siemens TLM set of
solutions. Siemens TLM is based on the expertise available in
all Siemens transformer factories, which are well-known for
high quality and low failure rates. The TLM scope of services
is explained in the following briefly:
Conditon assessment and diagnostics (fig. 5.11-2)
Level 1: SITRAM DIAG ESSENTIAL
Level 2: SITRAM DIAG ADVANCED
Level 3: SITRAM DIAG HIGH-VOLTAGE TESTING.
The SITRAM DIAG program consists of three levels, and provides
diagnostic modules for individual transformers, and for the assessment of complete installed fleets and transformer populations.
SITRAM DIAG ESSENTIAL (Level 1)
All modules in the diagnosis level 1 ESSENTIAL are to be
applied on energized transformers. The most powerful toolbox
for this application is the diagnosis of the insulating liquid.
Additional stand-alone modules are available to be applied when
the oil tests and/or the operating personnel informs about
deficiencies or changes.
Fig. 5.11-2: SITRAM DIAG provides diagnostic modules for

individual transformers and for the assessment of
complete fleets
Standard oil test (8 12 parameters)

Dissolved gas in oil analysis (DGA)
Furanic components
Moisture.
293
Transformers
5.11 Transformer Lifecycle Management
SITRAM DIAG HIGH-VOLTAGE TESTING (Level 3)

High-voltage tests on site are usually required following on-site
repairs, factory repairs, refurbishment or relocation, and are also
performed to assure the results from the level 1 and level 2
assessments. The SITRAM DIAG mobile test fields provides
solutions for all kind of HV testing and loss measurement. Heat
runs or long duration tests are feasible depending on size and
voltage level of the transformer under test. Level 3 assessment
can be combined with all modules out of level 1 and level 2.
Load losses
No-load losses and currents
Applied overvoltage tests
Induced overvoltage tests
Partial discharge testing
DC testing
Heat runs
Long duration tests.
The Siemens SITRAM MONITORING range is providing compatible, modular and customized solutions for individual power
transformers (new and retrofit), and solutions for entire transformer fleets.
In general, these systems allow a continuous monitoring of
power transformers, which go far beyond the traditional method
of taking offline measurements. The experience demonstrates
clearly that, with online monitoring, an improved efficiency in
the early detection of faults can be achieved, so that curative
and corrective maintenance actions can be planned and scheduled well in advance. It is also possible to use spare capacities
up to the limits. This results in a higher reliability, efficiency,
and longer service life of power transformers.
294
Substation SCADA
SICAM 230
IEC 60 870-5-104
IEC 61850
Modbus TCP
DNP3
DGA
Bushing
OLTC
PD
Satus siganls
SITRAM DIAG ADVANCED (Level 2)

The extended modules are applied on de-energized and
disconnected transformers. Most measurements repeat the
measurements as shown in the manufacturers test report, and
by comparing the results any differences will be highlighted.
Level 2 provides information about the insulation (dielectric)
condition as well as the mechanical condition (displacements)
of the active part of a transformer.
Ratio and phase angle
Winding resistance
C-tan delta (windings and bushings)
Insulation resistance and
Polarization index (PI)
Impedance
No load current and losses
At low voltage
FDS/PDC
FRA.
Transformer/Shunt/Phase shifter
Temp. etc.
Additional stand-alone modules:

PD (UHF, acoustic sensors, corona camera)
Noise measurement
Vibration measurement
Thermograph scans.
I/O or
3rd Party
Systems
Fig. 5.11-3: System platform
SITRAM sensors
The family of sensors comprises standardized, proven online
sensor technologies as standalone solutions for individual
transformers. Different kinds of warning instruments alert staff
if deviations develop that might lead to failures or unplanned
downtimes. This applies also if diagnostic or repair measures
become necessary. There are four main groups for monitoring
sensors:
DGA monitoring
OLTC monitoring
BUSHING monitoring
PD monitoring.
The top-down priority of the used sensors is according experiences of failure rates of transformers subsystems.
SITRAM Condition Monitor (SITRAM CM):
Experience has shown that early detection of arising failures
is simply not possible without online monitoring. It allows
measures for troubleshooting and repair to be planned and
scheduled in advance, which means greater availability and
a longer service life of transformers.
The SITRAM Condition Monitor is a modular and customized
system, which integrates information from single stream sensors
for each transformer individually, and is able to provide condition
information about all key components. A local data storage
module and a communication interface enable the user to
access the information remotely.
SITRAM Fleet Monitoring
For a fleet monitoring apporach the control system SICAM230 of
Siemens is used. All possible subsystem sensors of any type or
make as well as any I/O devices can be integrated. For effective
information interchange, all necessary protocols to the overlaying SCADA system can be provided. That approach is shown
in fig. 5.11-3.
Transformers
In case of critical transformers and difficult decisions, automated

systems and algorithms are of limited use so far. Siemens TLM
experts via remote access, or experts in a central control room
can in case of raised alarms recommend subsequent actions to
local service personal. The status information management is
optimally supported by the SITRAM CAM.
SITRAM Condition Assessment Monitor (CAM) (fig. 5.11-4)
The SITRAM CAM solution makes it possible to systematically
evaluate individual transformers, and thus to render all transformers in the database comparable with each other. A score is
assigned based on standardized criteria. Three categories are
visualised in the stoplight colors.
Inspection findings are described in detail, and recommendations
regarding meastures to be initiated are generated.
Fig. 5.11-4: Screenshot of the German CAM system in use
Consulting expertise and training

Engineering service
Advice and recommendations
Educational seminars
Customer-tailored workshops or trainings.
The Siemens TLM set of solutions integrates a wide range of

services that are designed to considerably extend the life of the
operators transformers. Siemens preferred approach is to
integrate all transformers of any age and any brand in the
plan that is prepared for the respective customers, so that they
can make the best decision about replacement/extension and
any related matters. Siemens TLM also offers a series of standardized customer trainings. These programs are specifically
designed to broaden the operators awareness of the various
concept and design options. Lifecycle management is, of
course, an integral part of the training.
Preventive and corrective maintenance
On site active part drying and de-gassing
Oil regeneration
Life extension products
End of life management.
Siemens gets your transformers back in top form and without
service interruptions. The TLM products for extending service
life minimize the unavoidable, undetectable and ongoing aging
process that is taking place inside transformers. These internationally-recognized technologies for life extension are rounded
up by a cooling efficiency retrofit solution.
SITRAM DRY (fig. 5.11-5)
The SITRAM DRY is an advanced technology for preventive and
continuous online transformer drying. The system removes
moisture from the insulation oil through disturbing the moisture
equilibrium, so that moisture diffuses from the wet insulation
paper to the dried insulation oil. This process will remove the
moisture in a gentle and smooth way from the solid insulation,
and will increase the dielectric strength of the insulating oil.
Fig. 5.11-5: Cabinet version of the SITRAM DRY equipped

with a control module
Continuous online removal of moisture from solid insulation

and oil
Based on a molecular sieve technology
Easy to install on any transformer in operation
Temperature and moisture monitoring
Cartridge replacement and regeneration service
Cabinet version
SITRAM DRY: smart, mobile solution for distribution
transformers.
Experience the functions of SITRAM DRY in sound and vision:
www.siemens.de/energy/sitram-dry-video
295
Transformers
SITRAM REG
Siemens developed the SITRAM REG technology to clean
contaminated oil and restore its dielectric properties. SITRAM
REG is a modified reclamation process based on the IEC 60422
standard. Oil is circulated continuously through regeneration
columns.
An oil change is not required
Improves the quality of insulating oil to that of new oil
Prolongation of the lifetime, and increased reliability of old
transformers
Preventive action against the progressive insulation ageing
process
Sustainable improvement in the condition of the insulation
Suitable for all power transformers
Economically independent of the current price of new oil
No service interruptions
Great and long-lasting cleaning effect
New: removal of corrosive sulphur.
Experience the function of SITRAM REG in sound and vision in
our video: www.energy.siemens.com/includes/root/apps/pmapi/
siemens-energy-power-transmission-sreg-trailersitram-2818783076001.mp4.
SITRAM COOL
SITRAM COOL is an add-on retrofit solution, and consists of
hardware and software for the automatic, optimized control
of transformer cooling system:
Increase of the total efficiency of the transformer
Reduction of auxiliary losses
Reduction of noise level
Reduction of maintenance
If required and if applicable > upgrading.
Spare parts and accessories
Specific planning and punctual delivery of quality spare parts
and components Siemens TLM fulfills the complete need of
system operators, with the aim of maximizing the availability of
every transformer, minimizing downtimes, and reducing the
total costs involved.
Spare parts from Siemens TLM offer (fig. 5.11-6):
Stringent quality assurance standards to ensure that spare
parts are manufactured in accordance with the Siemens
specifications
Continuous improvement of technology and materials
Outage planning and support based on customized spare parts
programs
Spare parts service for all transformers in the Siemens family
(SIEMENS, Trafo-Union, VA TECH, ELIN, PEEPLES, Volta, AEG)
Spare parts service for transformers from other manufactures
(ABB, BBC, Hyundai, Tamini, SEA, ASA, Alstom, Greta, etc.)
Spare parts service for distribution and transmission
transformers.
In order to provide the best solution, Siemens TLM will verify
alternative products and strive to make technical improvements
using state-of-art technologies, which is especially important
296
Fig. 5.11-6: Maximizing the availibility of every transformer

with the TLM spare part program
when original spare parts are no longer available. Upon request,

Siemens may advise system operators on what accessories will
best fit their needs.
Examples include:
Protection devices
Bushings
Gaskets
Cooling systems
Pumps
OLTCs
and any other changeable parts of the transformer.
What you can expect from Siemens:
Higher availability and reliability
Longer inspection intervals
Lower costs due to longer lifetime
Higher safety in the business
Lower failure costs thanks to an immediate spare part supply.
Repair and retrofit
Can Siemens make an old transformer as good as new? Siemens
can come very close and usually improve old transformers with
new state-of-the-art technologies. One highlight of TLM is the
repair, overhaul, and modernization of power transformers.
Repairs are performed in one of Siemens dedicated repair shops
around the world, but are also done on-site when mobile
Siemens workshops come to the customers facility. In addition,
Siemens can retrofit or modernize transformers in various ways.
Whether the operators transformer has failed or timely corrective maintenance is planne, the Siemens TLM team of experts
is available for short-term repairs.
With its dedicated repair facilities at our technology center in
Nuremberg, Germany, and elsewhere around the world,
Siemens has created a professional setting to get the customers
transformers back into shape. Even the largest and heaviest
transformers in the world can be easily moved, inspected and
repaired.
Transformers
The repair facilities handle all problems that arise over the
lifecycle of a transformer, including installation of new on-load
tap changers and tapping switches, increasing performance,
as well as complete replacement of windings. In addition, all
components can be reconditioned and retrofitted with the latest
materials as needed. For everything from design to the latest
modern winding techniques, as well as to final inspection and
testing, the manufacturing processes at Siemens renowned
transformer plants are continuously being improved. These
improvements support the maintenance and repair of the
customers transformers (fig. 5.11-7).
Transport, installation and commissioning
Siemens technical experts and engineers, who work on projects
that include installing new transformers or changing the locations of old transformers, have decades of experience. They are
expert at disassembly and preparation for transport, storing,
and handling of delicate components. Assembly is the daily
work of these Siemens experts, and Siemens offers its exhaustive experience for complete customer solutions, so that their
equipment value remains at its peak for a long time.
5
Fig. 5.11-7: Repair shop in Nuremberg, Germany
For further information, please contact your

local Siemens sales representative or contact:
Phone: +49 (180) 524 7000
Fax: +49 (180) 524 2471
www.siemens.com/energy/TLM
297
298
Protection, Substation Automation, Power Quality and Measurements
6.1
Introduction
300
6.2
Protection Systems
301
6.2.1 Introduction
301
6.2.2 SIPROTEC and Reyrolle Relay Families
302
6.2.3 Applications
321
6.2.4 Protection Coordination
331
6.3
340
Substation Automation
6.3.1 Introduction
340
6.3.2 Overview and Solutions
340
6.3.3 SICAM PAS
346
6.3.4 SICAM Station Unit
351
6.3.5 SICAM RTUs

(SICAM AK, TM, BC, EMIC, MIC und CMIC)
352
6.4
360
6.4.1 Introduction
360
6.4.2 SICAM P Power Meter
366
6.4.3 SICAM T Electrical Measurement Transducer 368

6.4.4 Power Quality and Monitoring
370
6.4.5 SIPROTEC 7KE85

Fault Recorder, Measurement and Phasor
Measurement Unit (PMU)
374
6.4.6 SICAM PQS Fault Recorder

and Power Quality Analysis Software
378
6.4.7 SIGUARD PDP Phasor Data Processor
381
6.5
Protection and Substation Communication 385
6.5.1 Overview of IEC 61850
385
6.5.2 Principle Communication Structures

for Protection and Substation
Automation Systems
385
6.5.3 Multiple Communication Options

with SIPROTEC 5
389
6.5.4 Network Redundancy Protocols
393
6.5.5 Communication Between Substation Using

Protection Data Interfaces
396
6.5.6 Requirements for Remote Data Transmission
398
6.6
Integrated Advanced Cyber Security
399
6.7
Efficient Network and Energy Automation

Systems (ENEAS)
400
6.7.1 Introduction, Portfolio Overview
400
6.7.2 Solutions for Substation Automation

and Protection
401
6.7.3 Solutions for Distribution Automation
408
6.7.4 Solutions for Industry Grids
411
6.7.5 Solutions for Monitoring and Control Center
414
6.7.6 Solutions for Cyber Security
423
299
6 Protection, Substation Automation,

6.1 Introduction
The demands on substation automation solutions are continually growing, which leads to greater complexity and more interfaces. High availability, with all individual components working
together smoothly, is one of the most important system operator
needs in the area of energy automation.
And that is exactly where energy automation products and
solutions from Siemens come in. With a comprehensive
approach to the entire automation chain, the system operator
gets an overview of the entire plant, from planning and start up
to operation and maintenance.
Energy automation products and solutions are based on three
main pillars that ensure simple operation:
Reliable IT security through high-quality applications and
seamless network structures
Limitless communications by means of international standards
and flexible expandability
Efficient engineering for the entire automation chain, from the
control center to the field device
Fig. 6.1-1: Siemens energy automation products
300
Energy automation from Siemens stands for a simplified

workflow, reliable operations, and a significantly lower total
cost of ownership. Siemens offers expert solutions that will
continue to grow with the markets demands but still remain
manageable. That is how energy automation sets a new
benchmark with products and solutions which are clearly
simpler and more efficient. In the meantime we have delivered
more than 300,000 devices with IEC61850 included.
Energy automation that simply works
Siemens offers a uniform, universal technology for the entire
functional scope of secondary equipment, both in the construction and connection of the devices, and in their operation and
communication. This results in uniformity of design, coordinated
interfaces, and the same operating principle being established
throughout, whether in power system and generator protection,
in measurement and recording systems, in substation control or
protection or in telecontrol.
The devices are highly compact and immune to interference,
and are therefore also suitable for direct installation in switchgear panels.
Complete technology from one partner

Siemens Energy Sector supplies devices and systems for:
Power system protection SIPROTEC and Reyrolle
Substation control and automation SICAM
Remote control (RTUs)
Measurement and recording SIMEAS
This technology covers all of the measurement, control, automation and protection functions for substations.
Furthermore, Siemens activities include:

Consulting
Planning
Design
Commissioning and service
This uniform technology from a single source saves the user
time and money in the planning, assembly and operation of
substations.
6.2 Protection Systems

6.2.1 Introduction
Siemens is one of the worlds leading suppliers of protection
equipment for power systems. Thousands of Siemens relays
ensure first-class performance in transmission and distribution
systems on all voltage levels, all over the world, in countries
with tropical heat or arctic frost. For many years, Siemens has
also significantly influenced the development of protection
technology:
In 1976, the first minicomputer (process computer)-based
protection system was commissioned: A total of 10 systems for
110 / 20 kV substations was supplied and is still operating
satisfactorily today.
In 1985, Siemens became the first company to manufacture a
range of fully numerical relays with standardized
communication interfaces. Siemens now offers a complete
range of protection relays for all applications with numerical
busbar and machine protection.
Section 6.2.2 gives an overview of the various product lines of

the Siemens protection.
Section 6.2.3 offers application hints for typical protection
schemes such as:
Cables and overhead lines
Transformers
Motors and generators
Busbars
To ensure a selective protection system, section 6.2.4 gives hints

for coordinated protection setting and selection for instrument
transformers.
301

6.2.2 SIPROTEC and Reyrolle Relay

Families
Solutions for todays and future power supply systems
for more than 100 years
SIPROTEC has established itself on the energy market for
decades as a powerful and complete system family of numerical
protection relays and bay controllers from Siemens.
SIPROTEC protection relays from Siemens can be consistently
used throughout all applications in medium and high voltage.
With SIPROTEC, operators have their systems firmly and safely
under control, and have the basis to implement cost-efficient
solutions for all duties in modern, intelligent and smart grids.
Users can combine the units of the different SIPROTEC device
series at will for solving manifold duties because SIPROTEC
stands for continuity, openness and future-proof design.
As the innovation driver and trendsetter in the field of protection
systems for 100 years, Siemens helps system operators to design
302
their grids in an intelligent, ecological, reliable and efficient way,

and to operate them economically. As a pioneer, Siemens has
decisively influenced the development of numerical protection
systems (fig. 6.2-1). The first application went into operation in
Wrzburg, Germany, in 1977. Consistent integration of protection and control functions for all SIPROTEC devices was the
innovation step in the 90ies. After release of the communication
standard IEC 61850 in the year 2004, Siemens was the first
manufacturer worldwide to put a system with this communication standard into operation.
How can system operators benefit from this experience?
Proven and complete applications
Easy integration into your system
Highest quality of hardware and software
Excellent operator friendliness of devices and tools
Easy data exchange between applications
Extraordinary consistency between product- and
systemengineering
Reduced complexity by easy operation
Siemens as a reliable, worldwide operating partner

The products of the long-standing British

manufacturer Reyrolle are considered especially
powerful and reliable by many markets. With
the latest numerical products, Reyrolle as a
part of Siemens shows that the development is
being pushed forward, and that new innovations are continuously being developed further
for the users benefit. In this way, Reyrolle
completes the offerings for protection devices,
particularly in Great Britain and the Commonwealth countries.
For further information please visit:

www.siemens.com/protection
Fig. 6.2-2: Siemens protection family
Fig. 6.2-1: SIPROTEC Pioneer over generations
303

SIPROTEC Compact Maximum protection minimum space

Reliable and flexible protection for energy distribution and
industrial systems with minimum space requirements. The
devices of the SIPROTEC Compact family offer an extensive
variety of functions in a compact and thus space-saving 1/6 x 19"
housing. The devices can be used as main protection in mediumvoltage applications or as back-up protection in high-voltage
systems.
SIPROTEC Compact provides suitable devices for many applications in energy distribution, such as the protection of feeders,
lines or motors. Moreover, it also performs tasks such as system
decoupling, load shedding, load restoration, as well as voltage
and frequency protection.
The SIPROTEC Compact series is based on millions of operational
experience with SIPROTEC 4 and a further-developed, compact
hardware, in which many customer suggestions were integrated.
This offers maximum reliability combined with excellent functionality and flexibility.
Simple installation by means of pluggable current and voltage
terminal blocks
Thresholds adjustable via software (3 stages guarantee a safe
and reliable recording of input signals)
Easy adjustment of secondary current transformer values
(1 A/5 A) to primary transformers via DIGSI 4
Quick operations at the device by means of 9 freely
programmable function keys
Clear overview with six-line display
Easy service due to buffer battery replaceable at the front side
Use of standard cables via USB port at the front
Integration in the communication network by means of two
further communication interfaces
Integrated switch for low-cost and redundant optical Ethernet
rings
Ethernet redundancy protocols RSTP, PRP and HSR for highest
availability
Reduction of wiring between devices by means of crosscommunication via Ethernet (IEC 61850 GOOSE)
Time synchronization to the millisecond via Ethernet with
SNTP for targeted fault evaluation
Adjustable to the protection requirements by means of
flexible protection functions
Comfortable engineering and evaluation via DIGSI 4.
304
Fig. 6.2-3: SIPROTEC Compact
Fig. 6.2-4: SIPROTEC Compact

rear view
Fig. 6.2-5: Feeder automation

relay 7SC80

SIPROTEC Compact system features

Field devices in energy distribution systems and in industrial
applications must cover the most varying tasks, and yet be
adjustable easily and at short notice. These tasks comprise, for
example:
Protection of different operational equipment such as lines,
cables, motors and busbars
Decoupling and disconnecting of parts of the power supply
system
Load shedding and load restoration
Voltage and frequency protection
Local or remote control of circuit-breakers
Acquisition and recording of measured values and events
Communication with neighboring devices or the control center
Fig. 6.2-6 shows exemplary how the most different tasks can be
easily and safely solved with the matching
SIPROTEC Compact devices.
Operation
During the development of SIPROTEC Compact, special value
was placed not only on a powerful functionality, but also on
simple and intuitive operation by the operating personnel. Freely
assignable LEDs and a six-line display guarantee an unambiguous and clear indication of the process states.
In conjunction with up to 9 function keys and the control keys
for the operational equipment, the operating personnel can
react quickly and safely to every situation. This ensures a high
operational reliability even under stress situations, thus reducing
the training effort considerably.
Infeed
7SJ80
SIEMENS
7RW80
Backup transformer
protection
Busbar protection via
reverse interlocking
Voltage/frequency
protection
Load shedding
Load restoration
SIEMENS
MV-Substation
7SD80
SIEMENS
7SJ80
Busbar protection via

reverse interlocking possible
SIEMENS
7SJ80
7SD80
SIEMENS
Cable
7RW80
7SC80
7SK80
SIEMENS
7SJ80
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
7SK80
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
Generation
Transformer
Feeder
Motor
Bus Coupler
Fig. 6.2-6: Fields of application in a typical MV system
305

The Feeder Automation device 7SC80 is designed for decentralized as well as for centralized feeder automation applications.
This solution allows various flexible high speed applications like
FLISR (Fault Location, Isolation, and Service Restoration)
Detect and locate a fault in the feeder, isolate the faulty section
and set the healthy portions of the feeder back into service
Source transfer
Detect and isolate a faulty source and set the de-energised
sections of the feeder back into service
Load Balancing
Balance the load within a feeder by moving the disconnection.
Activation of individual line sections
Isolate a dedicated section of a feeder for maintenance without
affecting other sections. Fig. 6.2-7 shows an example of a
typical ring main application with overhead lines and 5 sections.
Every section is protected and automated by the SIPROTEC
7SC80 Feeder Protection.
Substation
Substation
50/50N
50/50N
1
Start fault isolation
Current jump detection
Communication network
50/50N
50/50N
1
50/50N
Fig. 6.2-7: Fields of application with feeder protection SIPROTEC 7SC80
306

Local operation
All operations and information can be
executed via an integrated user interface:
2 operation LEDs
In an illuminated 6-line LC display, process
and device information can be indicated as
text in different lists.
4 navigation keys
8 freely programmable LEDs serve for
indication of process or device information.
The LEDs can be labeled user-specifically. The
LED reset key resets the LEDs.
9 freely configurable function keys support

the user in performing frequent operations
quickly and comfortably.
Fig. 6.2-8a:
with open cover
Numerical operation keys

USB user interface (type B) for modern and
fast communication with the operating
software DIGSI.
Keys "O" and "I" for direct control of
operational equipment.
Battery compartment accessible from outside.
Fig. 6.2-8b:
with closed cover
and open battery
compartment
307

Construction and hardware of SIPROTEC Compact

Connection techniques and housing with many advantages
The relay housing is 1/6 of a 19" rack and makes replacement of
predecessors model very easy. The height is 244 mm (9.61").
Pluggable current and voltage terminals allow for pre-wiring and
simplify the exchange of devices in the case of support. CT
shorting is done in the removable current terminal block. It is
thus not possible to opencircuit a secondary current transformer.
Fig. 6.2-10a:
Voltage terminal block
All binary inputs are independent and the pick-up thresholds are
settable using software settings (3 stages). The relay current
transformer taps (1 A / 5 A) are new software settings. Up to 9
function keys can be programmed for predefi ned menu entries,
switching sequences, etc. The assigned function of the function
keys can be shown in the display of the relay.
With overcurrent protection SIPROTEC 7SJ81 there is also a
device for low-power current transformer applications.
Fig. 6.2-9: 7SK80, 7SJ80, 7SD80

rear view
Fig. 6.2-10b:
Current terminal block
Fig. 6.2-11: 7SJ81 rear view
Fig. 6.2-12: 7RW80 rear view
Current terminals ring cable lugs

Connection
Wmax = 9.5 mm
Ring cable lugs
d1 = 5.0 mm
Wire cross-section
2.0 5.2 mm2 (AWG 14 10)
Current terminals single conductors

2.0 5.2 mm2 (AWG 14 10)
Conductor sleeve with plastic sleeve
L = 10 mm (0.39 in) or L = 12 mm
(0.47 in)
Stripping length
(when used without conductor sleeve)
15 mm (0.59 in)
Only solid copper wires may be used.
Voltage terminals single conductors

Wire cross-section
0.5 2.0 mm2 (AWG 20 14)
Conductor sleeve with plastic sleeve
L = 10 mm (0.39 in) or L = 12 mm
(0.47 in)
Stripping length
(when used without conductor sleeve)
12 mm (0.47 in)
Only solid copper wires may be used.
Table 6.2-1: Wiring specifications for process connection
308
d1
Wire cross-section
Fig. 6.2-13b:
Ring cable lug
Fig. 6.2-13a:
Front view, surface-mounted housing

SIPROTEC 5 the new benchmark for protection, automation

and monitoring of grids
The SIPROTEC 5 series is based on the long field experience of
the SIPROTEC device series, and has been especially designed for
the new requirements of modern high-voltage systems. For this
purpose, SIPROTEC 5 is equipped with extensive functionalities
and device types. With the holistic and consistent engineering
tool DIGSI 5, a solution has also been provided for the increasingly complex processes, from the design via the engineering
phase up to the test and operation phase.
Thanks to the high modularity of hardware and software, the
functionality and hardware of the devices can be tailored to the
requested application and adjusted to the continuously changing
requirements throughout the entire life cycle.
Besides the reliable and selective protection and the complete
automation function, SIPROTEC 5 offers an extensive database
for operation and monitoring of modern power supply systems.
Synchrophasors (PMU), power quality data and extensive operational equipment data are part of the scope of supply.
Powerful protection functions guarantee the safety of the
system operators equipment and employees
Individually configurable devices save money on initial
investment as well as storage of spare parts, maintenance,
expansion and adjustment of your equipment
Clear and easy-to-use of devices and software thanks to userfriendly design
Increase of reliability and quality of the engineering process
High reliability due to consequent implementation of safety
and security
Powerful communication components guarantee safe and
effective solutions
Full compatibility between IEC 61850 Editions 1 and 2
Integrated switch for low-cost and redundant optical and
electrical Ethernet rings
Ethernet redundancy protocols RSTP, PRP and HSR for highest
availability
Efficient operating concepts by flexible engineering of
IEC 61850 Edition 2
Comprehensive database for monitoring of modern power
grids
Optimal smart automation platform for grids based on
integrated synchrophasor measurement units (PMU) and
power quality functions.
Fig. 6.2-14: SIPROTEC 5 modular hardware
Fig. 6.2-15: SIPROTEC 5 rear view
Fig. 6.2-16: Application in the high-voltage system
309

Innovation highlights
With SIPROTEC 5, we have combined a functionality that has
been proven and refined over years with a high-performance
and flexible new platform, extended with trendsetting innovations for present and future demands.
Holistic workflow
The tools for end-to-end engineering from system design to operation will make your work easier throughout the entire process.
The highlight of SIPROTEC 5 is the greater-than-ever emphasis
on daily ease of operation. SIPROTEC 5 provides support along
all the steps in the engineering workflow, allowing for system
view management and configuration down to the details of
individual devices, saving time and cost without compromising
quality (fig. 6.2-17).
Holistic workflow in SIPROTEC 5 means:
Integrated, consistent system and device engineering from
the single-line diagram of the unit all the way to device
parameterization
Simple, intuitive graphical linking of primary and secondary
equipment
Easily adaptable library of application templates for the most
frequently used applications
Manufacturer-independent tool for easy system engineering
Libraries for your own configurations and system parts
Multiuser concept for parallel engineering
Open interfaces for seamless integration into your process
environment
A user interface developed and tested jointly with many users
that pays dividends in daily use
Integrated tools for testing during engineering,
commissioning, and for simulating operational scenarios, e.g.,
grid disruptions or switching operations.
For system operators, holistic workflow in SIPROTEC 5 means:

An end-to-end tool from system design to operation even
allowing crossing of functional and departmental boundaries
saves time, assures data security and transparency throughout
the entire lifecycle of the system.
Operation
Documentation
Testing
Maintenance
Design
Application
Specication
Holistic
Workflow
Commissioning
Test
Documentation
SIPROTEC 5 sets new standards in cost savings and availability

with its innovative modular and flexible hardware, software and
communication. SIPROTEC 5 provides a perfectly tailored fit for
your switchgear and applications unparalleled by any other
system.
Perfectly tailored fit with SIPROTEC 5 means:
Modular system design in hardware, software and
communication ensures the perfect fit for your needs
Functional integration of a wide range of applications, such
as protection, control, measurement, power quality or fault
recording
The same expansion and communication modules for all
devices in the family
Innovative terminal technology ensures easy assembly and
interchangeability with the highest possible degree of safety
Identical functions and consistent interfaces throughout the
entire system family mean less training requirement and
increased safety, e.g., an identical automatic reclosing (AR) for
line protection devices SIPROTEC 7SD8, 7SA8, 7SL8
Functions can be individually customized by editing for your
specific requirements
Innovations are made available to all devices at the same time
and can easily be retrofitted as needed via libraries.
For system operators, perfectly tailored fit with SIPROTEC 5
means:
Individually configurable devices save money in the initial
investment, spare parts storage, maintenance, extending and
adapting of systems.
Smart automation for grids
The extraordinary range of integrated functionalities for all the
demands of your smart grid.
Climate change and dwindling fossil fuels are forcing a total
re-evaluation of the energy supply industry, from generation
to distribution and consumption. This is having fundamental
effects on the structure and operation of the power grids.
Smart automation is a major real-time component designed
to preserve the stability of these grids and at the same time
conserve energy and reduce costs.
SIPROTEC 5 offers the optimum smart automation platform for
smart grids.
Implementation
Device selection
Planning
Engineering
Settings
Fig. 6.2-17: End-to-end tools from design to operation
310
Perfectly tailored fit

Individually configurable devices provide you with cost-effective
solutions that match your needs precisely throughout the entire
lifecycle.
Smart automation for grids with SIPROTEC 5 means:

Open, scalable architecture for IT integration and new
functions
The latest standards in the area of communication and
Cyber Security

Smart functions, e.g., for power system operation, analysis

of faults or power quality (power systems monitoring, power
control unit, fault location)
Integrated automation with optimized logic modules based on
the IEC 61131-3 standard
Highly precise acquisition and processing of process values and
transmission to other components in the smart grid
Protection, automation and monitoring in the smart grid.
Functional integration
Due to the modular design of its hardware and software and the
powerful engineering tool DIGSI 5, SIPROTEC 5 is ideally suited
for protection, automation, measurement and monitoring tasks
in the electrical power systems.
The devices are not only pure protection and control equipment,
their performance enables them to assure functional integration
of desired depth and scope. For example, they can also serve to
perform monitoring, phasor measurement, fault recording, a
wide range of measurement functions and much more, concurrently, and they have been designed to facilitate future functionality expansion.
SIPROTEC 5 provides an extensive, precise data acquisition and
bay level recording for these functions. By combining device
functionality with communication flexibility, SIPROTEC 5 has the
ability to meet a wide range of todays applications and specific
project specifications as well as the functional expansion capability to adapt to changing needs in the future.
With SIPROTEC 5 it is possible to improve the safety and reliability of the operators application. Fig. 6.2-18 shows the
possible functional expansion of a SIPROTEC 5 device.
SIPROTEC 5
Protection
Control
52
Automation
Monitoring
Data acquisition and
recording
Communication
Cyber Security
Functional integration Protection

SIPROTEC 5 provides all the necessary protection functions to
address reliability and security of power transmission systems.
System configurations with multiple busbars and breaker-and-ahalf schemes are both supported. The functions are based on
decades of experience in putting systems into operation,
including feedback and suggestions from system operators.
The modular, functional structure of SIPROTEC 5 allows exceptional flexibility and enables the creation of a protection functionality that is specific to the conditions of the system while
also being capable of further changes in the future.
Functional integration Control
SIPROTEC 5 includes all bay level control and monitoring functions that are required for efficient operation of the substations.
The application templates supplied provide the full functionality
needed by the system operators. Protection and control functions
access the same logical elements.
A new level of quality in control is achieved with the application
of communication standard IEC 61850. For example, binary
information from the field can be processed and data (e.g., for
interlocking across multiple fields) can be transmitted between
the devices. Cross communications via GOOSE enables efficient
solutions, since here the hardwired circuits are replaced with
data telegrams. All devices are provided for up to 4 switching
devices (circuit-breakers, disconnectors, earthing switches) in
the basic control package. Optionally, additional switching
devices and the switching sequence block can be activated
(Continuous Function Chart (CFC)).
Functional integration Automation

An integrated graphical automation function enables operators
to create logic diagrams clearly and simply. DIGSI 5 supports this
with powerful logic modules based on the standard IEC 61131-3.
Example automation applications are:
Interlocking checks
Switching sequences (switching sequence function chart (CFC))
Message derivations from switching actions
Messages or alarms by linking available information
Load shedding a feeder (arithmetic function chart (CFC) and
switching sequence function chart (CFC))
Management of decentralized energy feeds
System transfer depending on the grid status
Automatic grid separations in the event of grid stability
problems.
Of course, SIPROTEC 5 provides a substation automation system
such as SICAM PAS with all necessary information, thus ensuring
consistent, integrated and efficient solutions for further automation.
Test
Fig. 6.2-18: Possible functional expansion of SIPROTEC 5 devices
311

Functional integration Monitoring

SIPROTEC 5 devices can take on a wide variety of monitoring
tasks. These are divided into four groups:
Self monitoring
Monitoring grid stability
Monitoring power quality
Monitoring of equipment (condition monitoring).
Self monitoring
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with many self-monitoring
procedures. These procedures detect faults internal to the device
as well as external faults in the secondary circuits and store
them in buffers for recording and reporting. This stored information can then be used to help determine the cause of the self
monitoring fault in order to take appropriate corrective actions.
Grid stability
Grid monitoring combines all of the monitoring systems that are
necessary to assure grid stability during normal grid operation.
SIPROTEC 5 provides all necessary functionalities, e.g., fault
recorders, continuous recorders, fault locators and phasor
measurement units (PMUs) for grid monitoring.
Power quality
For this, SIPROTEC 5 provides corresponding power quality
recorders. These can be used to detect weak points early so that
appropriate corrective measures can be taken. The large volume
of data is archived centrally and analyzed neatly with a SICAM
PQS system.
Equipment
The monitoring of equipment (condition monitoring) is an
important tool in asset management and operational support
from which both the environment and the company can benefit.
Functional integration Data acquisition and recording
The recorded and logged field data is comprehensive. It represents the image and history of the field. It is also used by the
functions in the SIPROTEC 5 device for monitoring, interbay and
substation automation tasks. It therefore provides the basis for
these functions now and in the future.
Functional integration Communication
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with high-performance
communication interfaces. These are integrated interfaces or
interfaces that are extendable with plug-in modules to provide a
high level of security and flexibility. There are various communication modules available. At the same time, the module is
independent of the protocol used. This can be loaded according
to the application. Particular importance was given to the
realization of full communication redundancy:
Multiple redundant communication interfaces
Redundant, independent protocols with control center possible
(e.g. IEC 60870-5-103 and IEC 61850 or double
IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3 and DNP IP)
Full availability of the communication ring when the switching
cell is enabled for servicing operations
Redundant time synchronization (e.g. IRIG-B and SNTP).
312
Functional integration Cyber Security

A multi-level security concept for the device and DIGSI 5 provides the user with a high level of protection against communication attacks from the outside and conforms to the requirements of the BDEW Whitebook and NERC CIP.
Functional integration Test
To shorten testing and commissioning times, extensive test and
diagnostic functions are available to the user in DIGSI 5. These
are combined in the DIGSI 5 Test Suite.
The test spectrum includes, among other tests:
Hardware and wiring test
Function and protection-function test
Simulation of digital signals and analog sequences by
integrated test equipment
De-bugging of function charts
Circuit-breaker test and AR (automatic reclosing) test function
Communication testing
Loop test for communication connections
Protocol test.
The engineering, including the device test, can therefore be
done with one tool.
Optimizing the application template for the specific application
The system operator can adapt the application templates to the
corresponding application and create his own in-house standards. The required number of protection stages or zones can be
increased without difficulty. Additional functions can be loaded
into the device directly from an extensive function library. Since
the functions conform to a common design structure throughout
the SIPROTEC 5 system, protection functions and even entire
function groups including parameterization can be copied from
one device to another.
The SIPROTEC 5 hardware building blocks offer a freely configurable device. You have the choice:
Either you use a pre-configured device with a quantity structure
already tailored to your application, or you build a device yourself from the extensive SIPROTEC 5 hardware building blocks to
exactly fit your application.
The flexible hardware building blocks offer you:
Base modules and expansion modules, each with different I/O
modules
Various on-site operation panels
A large number of modules for communication, measured
value conversion and memory extension
Flexible and modular
With SIPROTEC 5, Siemens has also taken a new path with the
design. Proven elements have been improved and innovative
ideas have been added. When looking at the new devices, the
modular structure is evident. In this way, the scope of the process data can be adapted flexibly to the requirements in the
switchgear assembly. You can choose: Either you use a preconfigured device with a quantity structure already tailored to

your application, or you build a device yourself from the extensive SIPROTEC 5 hardware building blocks to exactly fit your
application. Pre-configured devices can be extended or adapted
as needed.
With the devices SIPROTEC 7xx85, 7xx86 and 7xx87 you can also
combine different base and expansion modules, add communication modules and select an installation variant that fits the
space you have available. The devices SIPROTEC 7xx82 and
7xx84 can not be extended with expansion modules.
With this modular principle you can realize any quantity structures you desire. In this way, hardware that is tailored to the
application can be selected. Fig. 6.2-19 shows a modular device
consisting of a base module and 4 expansion modules.
The advantage of modular building blocks
The SIPROTEC 5 hardware module building blocks provides the
cumulative experience of Siemens in digital protection devices
and bay controllers. In addition, specific innovations were
realized that make the application easier for you, e.g. recorder
and PQ functionalities.
The SIPROTEC 5 hardware building blocks offer:
Durability and robustness
Tailored hardware extension
Robust housings
Excellent EMC shielding in compliance with the most recent
standards and IEC 61000-4
Extended temperature range
25 C to + 70 C/13 F to + 158 F.
Modular principle
Freely configurable and extendable devices
Large process data range (up to 24 current and voltage
transformers for protection applications and up to 40 for
central busbar protection as well as more than 200 inputs
and outputs for recording applications possible)
Operation panel that is freely selectable for all device types
(e.g. large or small display, with or without key switches,
detached operation panel)
Identical wiring of flush-mounting and surface-mounting
housings.
User-friendly operation panel
Eight freely assignable function keys for frequently required
operator control actions
Separate control keys for switching commands
Context-sensitive keys with labeling in the display
Complete numeric keypad for simple entry of setting values
and easy navigation in the menu
Up to 80 LEDs for signaling, 16 of which are in two colors.
Application-friendly design
No opening of device necessary for installation and servicing
Easy battery replacement on the back of the device
Simple exchange of communication modules with plug-in
Fig. 6.2-19: SIPROTEC 5 device built in modules
technology
Electronically settable (no jumpers) threshold for binary
inputs
Rated current (1 A / 5 A) of current transformer inputs
configurable electronically (no jumpers)
Removable terminal blocks
Pre-wiring of terminals is possible
Simple replacement of current transformers, e.g. with
sensitive ground current transformers if neutral grounding
method is changed.
Increased safety, since open current transformer circuits are
no longer possible (safety CT plug).
Hardware building blocks with a system

SIPROTEC 5 offers a modular, freely configurable device design.
This maximum flexibility is guaranteed by the SIPROTEC 5
modular system. This contains coordinated components which
you can combine to configure your individual device:
Base modules and expansion modules, each with different I/O
board
Various front operation panels, e.g. with large display
A large number of modules for communication, measured
value conversion and memory extension.
With reference to SIPROTEC 5, the term device always designates
all the basic, extension and plug-in modules as well the
matching front panels combined together.
A base module together with a front operation panel is already a
standalone device in itself. In order to obtain additional functionality, and above all more connections for process integration, you can supplement a base module with expansion modules. Fig. 1.4/1 shows you a single line sample configuration
with a base module and 4 expansion modules.
313

Base and expansion modules

A SIPROTEC 5 device can consist of exactly one base module,
and in the case of a two-tier device, optionally up to 9 expansion
modules and a power-supply module. Base and expansion
modules are distinguished firstly by their width. A base module
takes up a third of the width of a 19-inch frame, while an expansion module takes up a sixth. The larger width of the base
module creates sufficient space at the rear for connection to the
process (terminals) as well as plug-in modules. The expansion
module can provide either additional process connections or
additional communication connections.
Fig. 6.2-20 shows the rear side of a device consisting of a base
module in which the power supply, the CPU module and an I/O
board are permanently installed, as well as 4 expansion modules
for extending the I/O quantity structure, and communication
modules. Each expansion module contains an I/O board. The
components are connected by bus connector plugs and mechanical interlockings.
Fig. 6.2-20: Rear view of base module with 4 expansion modules
Such a device can be ordered pre-configured from the factory. In

this context you can choose between the standard variants
predefined by Siemens and the devices you have combined
yourself. Every SIPROTEC 5 device can also be converted or
extended according to your wishes. The modular concept absolutely ensures that the final device meets all standards, particularly with regard to EMC and environmental requirements.
On-site operation panels

The on-site operation panel is a separate component within the
SIPROTEC 5 modular system. This allows you to combine a base
or expansion module with a suitable front operation panel,
according to your requirements. The modular system offers 3
different on-site operation panels for selection, both for base

modules and for expansion modules.
The following variants are available for base modules
(Fig. 6.2-21):
With a large display, keypad and 16 multi-colored LEDs
With a small display, keypad and 16 multi-colored LEDs
16 multi-colored LEDs.
The following variants are available for expansion modules
(Fig. 6.2-22):
Fig. 6.2-21: Operation panels with (from left) large and small display, and operation panel without display
314

Without operating or control elements

With 16 LEDs (single-colored)
With 16 LEDs (single-colored) and key switch.
The SIPROTEC 5 module is flexible with regard to selection of the
operation panel. You can order any device type with a large,
graphical display or with a smaller, economical standard display.
For applications without device operation an operation panel
without display is also available. The operation panel with a
small display seven lines for measured values or menu texts as
well as the graphic representation of for example single busbar.
All operation and control keys are available to the user, i.e. he
can also control switching devices.
The operation panel with large display also enables representation of a more complex control display (Fig. 6.2-23) and thus
offers more room for measured values and the display of event
lists. This operation panel is therefore the first choice for bay
controllers, busbar protection or combined protection and
control devices.
As a third option, an economical variant is available without
keypad and display. This variant is appropriate for devices that
are seldom or never used by the operational crew.
Elements of the on-site operation panels
The operator elements are illustrated with the example of the
on-site operation panel with a large display.
The central element is the generously sized display for text and
graphics. With its high resolution, it creates ample space for
symbols in graphical representations (Fig. 6.2-23).
Fig. 6.2-23: Display of measured values in the large display
need to navigate conveniently and quickly through all information that is shown in the display. 2 LEDs on the upper border of
the operation panel inform you about the current device operating state.
16 additional LEDs, to the left of the keypad, ensure quick,

targeted process feedback. The USB interface enables fast data
transfer. It is easily accessible from the front and well protected
with a plastic cover.
Below the display there is a 12 key keypad. In combination with

4 navigation keys and 2 option keys you have everything you
1
2
1
2
Labeling field for LEDs
16 LEDs (red)
Key switch S5
Remote/Local
Key switch S1
Interlocking Off/Normal
3
4
Fig. 6.2-22: Designs of the expansion modules
315

Elements of the on-site operation panels (continued)

The keys O and I (red and green) for the direct control of equipment, a reset key for the LEDs, and the control key for switching
to the control display (mimic diagram), complete the operation
panel (Fig. 6.2-24).
Options
You can order any SIPROTEC 5 device, regardless of its individual
configuration, in 3 different installation variants:
As flush-mounting device
As surface-mounting device with integrated on-site operation
panel
As surface-mounting device with the on-site operation panel
detached.
The construction of the flush-mounting devices will be recognizable from the previous sections. We would like to briefly introduce you to the two other variants here.
Fig. 6.2-25: Display of measured values in the large display
Surface-mounting device with integrated on-site operation

panel
For wall-installation the SIPROTEC 5 devices can be ordered in
the surface-mounting housing (Fig. 6.2-25). Thanks to a new
concept, these devices have terminal connection diagrams that
are identical to the corresponding flush-mounting devices. This
is achieved by installing the devices using the principle with the
face to the wall and then attaching the operation panels to the
terminal side. With the brackets that are used, sufficient space
remains for the wiring, which can be routed away upwards and
downwards.
Large graphical display
Labeling field for LEDs
16 LEDs (green or red, settable parameters)
16 LEDs (red)
LED reset
USB interfaces
Labeling field for function keys
Numerical keys and function keys
Control/command keys
10
Context-sensitive keys
11
Cursor keys
12
Key switch S5 Remote/Local
13
Key switch S1 Interlocking Off/Normal
10
11
10
Fig. 6.2-24: SIPROTEC 5 operation panel
316
12
13

Surface-mounting device with the on-site operation panel

detached
If the operation panel is to be installed detached from the
device, it can be installed as a separate part and connected to
the device with a 2.5 m long connecting cable. In this way, the
SIPROTEC 5 device can be situated, for example, in the lowvoltage fixture and the operation panel can be installed precisely
at the correct working height in the cabinet door. In this case,
the device is fastened like a surface-mounting device on the
cabinet wall. An opening must be provided in the door for the
operation panel.
The SIPROTEC 5 terminals
Innovative terminals offering many advantages were developed
for the SIPROTEC 5 family.
All terminals are individually removable (Fig. 6.2-26). This
enables pre-wiring of the systems, as well as simple device
replacement without costly re-wiring.
Fig. 6.2-26: Removed current terminal block
Current terminals (safety CT plug)

The 8-pole current terminal with 4 integrated current transformers is available in 3 designs:
4 protection-class current transformers
3 protection-class current transformers +
1 sensitive protection-class current transformer
4 instrument transformers.
The terminal design enables the following advantages for the

connection of currents:
Exchange of the current transformer type also possible
retroactively on-site (e.g. protection-class current transformer
for instrument transformer, sensitive for normal ground
current transformers in cases of network conversions)
Additional safety during tests or device replacement, since the
secondary current transformer circuits always remain closed.
Voltage terminal:
The voltage transformers and the binary input and output
signals are connected via the 14-pole voltage terminal. The
cable entry to the terminal enables clear access to the terminal
connection. Bridges precisely matching the current and voltage
terminals are available for bridging contacts with common
potential (Fig. 6.2-27).
Fig. 6.2-27: Voltage and current terminal block with bridges
317

Selection of the input / output boards

Which and how many process connections a base or expansion
board has depends on the choice of a particular input/output
board. The modular building block concept includes different
input/output boards.
The IO202 input/output board is used e. g. as a base measuring
module. By equipping several modules with this module, you
can achieve up to 40 measuring channels per SIPROTEC 5 device.
In the module there are connections for:
4 voltage transformers
4 current transformers, optionally protection-class current
transformer, sensitive protection-class current transformer or
instrument transformers
8 binary inputs (BI)
6 binary outputs (BO), designed as 4 fast speed (Typ F)
normally-open contacts and 2 fast speed change-over
contacts.
The connections are distributed on (Fig. 6.2-28):
1 x 8-pole current terminal block
3 x 14-pole voltage terminal blocks
Select the modules suitable for your purposes so that you can
build the SIPROTEC 5 device that precisely matches your application. You will find an overview of the modules that are available
and their quantity structures in Table 6.2 - 3 Module quantity
structures.
Fig. 6.2-28: Rear view of an expansion module IO202
Second module tier

If the number of inputs and outputs of a unit with 4 expansion
modules is not enough, a second tier can be added. This requires
a PS203 power supply in the second tier on the first mounting
position. The remaining 5 positions can be filled with expansion
modules from the SIPROTEC5 module range. Exception: The
CB202 must always be in the first tier and only one can be used
with each unit.
Module CB202
Module CB202 represents a special case. CB202 (CB = Communication Board) provides 3 positions for plug-in modules. These
can be used to plug in up to 2 communication modules or up to
3 measurement transducer modules. Combinations are also
possible, e.g. 2 communication modules and one measurement
transducer module.
The power supply is integrated, so that the CB202 can be powered independently of the main device. Communication with the
main device is assured via an RJ45 connector and the bus connection on the front of the module.
The CB202 is always integrated in an expansion module
(Fig. 6.2-29).
318
Fig. 6.2-29: Expansion module based on the example of the CB202

Measuring ranges of the current transformer modules

The measuring range (full modulation) of the current transformers can be set to different values electronically depending
on the field of application. In all cases, you can choose between
protection-class and instrument transformers. Only protection
transformers can be used for busbar protection because of the
large dynamic range involved. The possible measuring ranges
according to rated current are shown in the following Tab. 6.2-2
Measurement ranges according to rated current.
A large dynamic range is necessary for network protection
applications, so that short-circuit currents can be recorded
without distortion. A value of 100 Irated has proven optimal.
For 5 A transformer rated current, this corresponds to a setting
of 500 A, and consequently of 100 A for 1 A transformers. For
applications in generator protection, while it is true that there
are very large primary currents, a dynamic range of 20 Irated is
still quite sufficient. Thus a measuring range of 100 A is
obtained for a setting Irated = 5 A and a measurement range of
20 A for Irated = 1 A.
Protection-class
Instrument
transformers
Sensitive groundcurrent input
Rated current Irated
Measuring range
5A
500 A
5A
100 A
1A
100 A
1A
20 A
5A
40 A
1A
8A
1A
1.6 A
5A
8A
1A
1.6 A
Table 6.2-2: Measuring ranges according to rated current
A smaller dynamic range means that greater accuracy is

achieved in the rated current range. Consequently, the dynamic
range for instrument transformers and sensitive protection-class
current transformer input for ground fault currents is extremely
limited. In this case, limited means that the input current is
chopped on the analog side. Of course, the inputs in this case
are protected against overdriving.
Plug-in modules
Plug-in modules are available for communication or analog
inputs. The communication modules are described in the Communication section.
Fig. 6.2-30: Measuring-transducer input module ANAI-CA-4EL
The analog input module has four 20 mA inputs. It can be

plugged into one of the slots in the PS201 or CB202. Multiple
measured value modules can be used with each device (one in
each available slot), but as a rule one slot is needed for a communication module. The connections are created via an 8-pole
screwed terminal block (Fig. 6.2-30).
319
Available in the
base module
Power supply
Implemented in
device row
PS203
Power supply module for the second device row
CB202
Module with 3 additional slots for modules
IO101
Base module for all 7xx82 devices

that require current measurement
IO102
Base module for all 7xx82 devices that require

current and voltage measurement
IO110
Module for additional binary inputs and

outputs for all 7xx82 devices
IO201
Base module for protection applications that

require no voltage measurement
IO202
Base module for all devices that require

current and voltage measurement
IO203
Module for device numerous current inputs
IO204
This module contains 4 power relays for direct

control of the operating mechanism motors of
grounding switches and disconnectors
10
IO205
For protection applications with binary inputs

and binary outputs
12
IO206
For protection applications with binary inputs

and binary outputs
IO207
Geared toward bay controllers due to the

predominant number of binary inputs
(feedback from switchgear)
IO208
IO209
IO211
Description
It is a typical module for protective
applications. In contrast to the IO202, it is
equipped with more relay outputs
12
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
16
1,2
1,2
16
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
This module is used when extremely fast

tripping times (4 normally-open contacts,
0.2 ms pickup time) are required, such as, e.g.
power system for very high voltages
Module for devices that require a numerous
voltage inputs
IO215
IO230
Base module for all devices that require

current and voltage measurement. In contrast
to the IO202 it has a reduced quantity
structure of binary inputs and outputs
Special module for connecting special highresistance voltage dividers over 10 V voltage
inputs
41)
Module for acquisition of large volumes of

data, for example, in the bay controller or
busbar protection. Process connection is
effected via special terminals
Table 6.2-3: Module overview
Differentiation of relay types:

Type F fast relay with monitoring (pickup time < 5 ms)
Type HS high-speed relay (contact with solid-state bypass) with monitoring
(pickup time < 0.2 ms)
320
IO212 *) Module for devices that require a numerous,

fast measuring transducer inputs
(20 mA, 10 V)
IO214
Availabe in the
expansion module
Number of slots for

plug-in modules
2 2)
BO power relay
Measuring transducer 20 mA/10 V
BO change-over
contacts type F
Power supply module for the first device row
BO change-over
contacts
PS201
BO normally-open
contacts type HS
2 2)
BO normally-open
contacts type F
BO normally-open
contacts
1
BI (isolated)
I-input
Power supply module for all 7xx82 devices
U-input
PS101
Designation
BI (connected to
common potential)
48
*) In preparation
1) 10 V voltage input for high-resistance RC-splitter
2) of which 1 life contact
The connection diagrams of the individual modules are included in the appendix.

6.2.3 Applications
Fig. 6.2-31 provides an overview of the application of
SIPROTEC 5 devices in the grid. This is a simplified illustration.
Particularly with the advent of regenerative suppliers, energy is
being injected into the grid at all voltage levels.
Main protection functions

Distinguishing features
The protection objects are the busbars, the overhead lines or

cables, and the transformers. The corresponding protection
devices have been assigned to these objects.
7 XX
On the next pages youll find beside the SIPROTEC 5 relay

selection guide the application examples for SIPROTEC 5 devices.
YY
Fig. 6.2-32: Definition of device types
Device types
Now that you have been introduced to the innovation highlights
of the SIPROTEC 5 devices, the following text will describe the
devices. They are easily identified with the aid of a five-digit
abbreviation code.
The first digit (6 or 7) stands for the digital equipment. The two
letters describe the functionality, and the last two digits identify
typical properties. Fig. 6.2-32 shows the definition of device
types based on designation.
Application templates
Application templates allow you to fast track your solution. A
library of application templates is available that can be tailored
to the specific functional scope for typical applications.
Generation
Fig. 6.2-33 shows an example of a system configuration. Note

that the functions in the application template are combined in
functional groups (FG). The functional groups (FG) correspond
to the primary components (protection object: line; switching
device: circuit breaker), thereby simplifying the direct reference
to the actual system. For example, if your switchgear includes 2
circuit breakers, this is also represented by 2 circuit breaker
functional groups a schematic map of your actual system.
Transmission
Distribution
7SJ85
7KE85
6MD8
7SL87
7SA87
7SS8
7KE85
7SD87
7KE85
6MD8
7SJ86
7VK87
7UT8
7SK85
7SA82
7SA82
7SJ82
6MD8
7SA86
7SD82
7SJ82
7SJ85
7SS8
7SJ85
7SD86
7SJ85
7SD82
7SK82
7UT8
7KE85
7SJ86
7SL86
7UT8
7SD86
7SK85
7SA86
7SJ85
M
G
M
Fig. 6.2-31: Available device types of the SIPROTEC 5 system
321

52 A-QA
FG Transformer side 1
MP
I-3ph 1
FG Circuit breaker A-QA
I-3ph
I-3ph
49
50BF
Ctrl
87N
Measured values
CB
FG Transf. neutral point 1

MP
I-1ph 1
BI
BO
FG Transformer 1
I-1ph
50N 51N
87
Measured values
MP
I-3ph 2
I-3ph
I-3ph
50
52 B-QA
FG Circuit breaker B-QA
51
FG
Function group
MP
Measuring point
BI
Binary input
BO
Binary output
QA/CB
Circuit breaker
Ctrl
Control
49
Overload protection
50BF
Circuit-breaker
failure protection
Overcurrent protection
50/51
50BF
50N/51N Overcurrent protection,

ground
Ctrl
Measured values
CB
BI
BO
87
Differential protection
87N
Ground-fault
differential protection
Fig. 6.2-33: Protection of a transformer
Protection functions
Device types
Overcurrent protection
Overcurrent protection with PMU and
control
ANSI
Function
Abbr.
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping
3-pole
Protection functions for 1-pole tripping
1-pole
21
Distance protection
Z<
7SJ82, 7SJ85
Line protection
Distance protection with PMU and control
7SA82*, 7SA86, 7SA87
FL
Fault locator
FL
Line differential protection with PMU and

control
7SD82*, 7SD86, 7SD87
25
Synchrocheck, synchronizing function
Sync
27
Undervoltage protection
V<
Combined line differential and distance

protection with PMU and control
7SL86, 7SL87
32
Directional power supervision
P>, P<
Circuit-breaker management device with

PMU and control
7VK87
37
Undercurrent, underpower
I<, P<
46
Unbalanced-load protection
I2>
49
Thermal overload protection
, I2t
50/50N
Definite time-overcurrent protection
I>
50Ns
Sensitive ground-current protection
INs>
Overcurrent protection for lines with PMU
7SJ86
Transformer differential protection

Transformer differential protection with
PMU, control and monitoring
7UT82*, 7UT85, 7UT86,

7UT87
Motor protection
Motor protection with PMU and control
7SK82, 7SK85
Busbar protection
Busbar protection
7SS85
Bay controller
Bay controllers for control/interlocking tasks
with PMU and monitoring, optionally with
protection function
6MD85, 6MD86
Fault recorders and power quality recorders

Digital fault recorder with PMU
7KE85
*) In preparation
Table 6.2-4: Available device types of the SIPROTEC 5 system
322
Protection functions legend
50L
Load-jam protection
I>L
50BF
Circuit-breaker failure protection
CBFP
51/51N
Inverse time-overcurrent protection
IP, INp
51V
Overcurrent protection, voltage controlled
t=f(I)+V<
67
Directional time-overcurrent protection,

phase
I>, IP (V, I)
67N
Directional time-overcurrent protection for

ground-faults
IN>, INP (V, I)
67Ns
Sensitive ground-fault detection for

systems with resonant or isolated neutral
IN>, (V, I)
79
Automatic reclosing
AR
87
Differential protection
PMU
Synchrophasor measurement
PMU
Table 6.2-5: Extract of protection functions

Application examples
Medium-voltage applications for all system grounding types
Fast fault clearance in double-feed lines (closed) rings
52
7SJ82/85
7SJ82/85
52
FG Voltage/current
50/51 50N/51N
7SJ82/85
52
QA1
52
FG Voltage/current
52
QA2
50/51
67N
67
79
FL
50/51 50N/51N
79
67N
Ctrl
Protection communication
PI
Ctrl
67
FG Circuit breaker
Ctrl
Protection communication
FG Circuit breaker QA2
79
67N
FG Circuit breaker
50N/51N
67Ns
FG Voltage/current
67
PI
Fig. 6.2-34: Medium-voltage application for all system grounding

types
Fig. 6.2-36: Fast fault clearance in double-feed lines (closed) rings
Properties
Reliable detection of transients and static ground faults
Cost saving due to integrated transient function
Directional and non-directional protection and control
functions
Acquisition and transmission of PMU variables possible.
Properties
Directional DMT/IDMTL protection without grading times
Fast fault clearance
Low-cost due to integrated protection interface
Monitored data exchange
Adaptable to different communication infrastructures.
Protection and control of multiple feeders with one device
Central control of multiple feeders and dedicated protection
QA1
52
QA1
52
QA2
52
QA3
52
7SJ85
FG Voltage/current 3-phase 1
50/51
50N/51N
50/51
50N/51N
50/51
50N/51N
QA2
52
QA3
52
79
Ctrl
Ctrl
Ctrl
79
Ctrl
Ctrl
79
Ctrl
FG Voltage/current
50/51
50/51
Ctrl
FG Voltage/current
Ctrl
FG Motor
25 46
50/51 27 59
Ctrl
Fig. 6.2-35: Protection and control of multiple feeders with one

device
Fig. 6.2-37: Central control of multiple feeders and dedicated

protection
Properties
Reduced investment because 1 device for multiple feeders
Simple parameterization
Shorter commissioning times
Cost savings because up to 7 feeders possible with 1 device.
Properties
Protection for each bay
Central control for multiple feeders
High availability because backup protection functions can be
activated in the controllers.
323

Autotransformer bank
Two-winding transformer
52
QA1
FG Auto transformer side 1
49
49H
50BF
49
59
50BF
81
FG Auto transformer side 2
FG Transformer 1
87

FG Transformer 1
50/51
87T
87TNode
Auto transformer
FG compensation side
50/51
50BF
Ctrl
Ctrl
Ctrl
50/51
Ctrl
50BF
50BF
Auto transformer ground

FG side
Ctrl
50BF
Ctrl
52
QA2
Fig. 6.2-38: Two-winding transformer
Fig. 6.2-40: Autotransformer bank
Properties
Clear assignment of the functions to the primary element
Reduced investment
Simple parameterization
Reduced wiring and faster commissioning.
Properties
Reduced investment due to integration of the differential and
node protection function in one unit (87 and 87 Node)
High sensitivity with single line to ground faults.
Two-winding transformer with 2 incoming feeders (e.g. double

circuit-breaker switchgear) protection
Protection and backup protection solution for 3-winding

transformers
52
52
QA2
QA1
52
49
87N
50BF
7SA86
21
Ctrl
59N
FG Transf. neutral point 1

7UT86
50N/51N
FG Transformer 1
87
51
50BF
7UT86
Ctrl
51
FG Line
51
7SA86
21
21
87T
7SJ85
50/51
52
QA3
87T
50BF
59N
Ctrl
52
52
324
Fig. 6.2-39: Two-winding transformer with 2 incoming feeders (e.g.

double circuit-breaker switchgear)
Fig. 6.2-41: Protection and backup protection solution for 3-winding

transformers
Properties
Separate acquisition, monitoring and control of all circuit
breakers
High sensitivity with single line to ground-fault differential
protection
Cost savings due to 87T and 87T N in one unit.
Properties
Free design of the protection and backup protection concept
Inclusion of line protection devices
Increased availability.

Motor protection and simplified differential protection
Induction motor: protection and control
52
QA1
52
QA1
FG Motor
27
32
38
50/51 59
46
48
49S
59N 67Ns
FG Motor 1
27
49R
32
38
50/51 59
66
46
48
59N 66
49S
49R
67Ns
FG Motor 2
FG Analog units
87M
RTD
FG Analog units
RTD
Ctrl
RTD
Ctrl
RTD
Fig. 6.2-42: Induction motor: protection and control
Fig. 6.2-44: Protection and control of multiple feeders with one

device
Properties
Reduced investment because protection and control in one
device
Thermal motor protection functions for reliable motor
monitoring
Thermal motor protection functions with direct connection of
temperature sensors.
Properties
High sensitivity and short tripping times due to differential
protection function
Cost saving due to integration of the differential protection
function in a separate function group.
Motor protection with differential protection
Motor differential protection with Krondorfer starter
52
QA1
52
QA
FG Motor 1
27
32
38
50/51 59
46
48
59N 66
49S
51
67Ns
FG
Motor diff
87M
F G Motor side
FG Motor 2
52
QA1
87M
52
QA2
FG Analog units
7UT86
F G Motor (stator)
49R
F G Motor side
F G C ircuit breaker
C trl
RTD
Ctrl
52
QA3
Fig. 6.2-43: Motor protection with differential protection
Fig. 6.2-45: Motor differential protection with Krondorfer starter
Properties
Autonomous differential protection functions
High sensitivity and short tripping times due to differential
protection function
Separate acquisition and monitoring of the current
transformers.
Properties
Acquisition, monitoring and control of all circuit breakers
Differential protection function also available during starting.
325

Distance protection of two parallel lines with one device
Protection and control separate
52
52
QA1
21
52
QA1
FG Line 1
QA2
FG Line 1
87
50BF
87L
Ctrl
79
FG Line 2
50BF
Ctrl
21
79
50BF
Ctrl
FG Voltage/current
50/51
50N/51N
Line 1
Line 2
25
50BF
Ctrl
Fig. 6.2-46: Protection and control separate
Fig. 6.2-48: Distance protection of two parallel lines with one device
Properties
Clear assignment of protection and control in separate devices
Less external components by detection and selection of busbar
voltage in the device
High reliability due to backup protection functions in the 6MD8
bay controller
High availability due to emergency control in the 7SL8
protection device.
Properties
Low-cost due to protection of both lines in one device
Stable due to consideration of the influences of the parallel
line for the distance protection function.
Low-cost protection and device redundancy
Self-restoring multi-leg configurations

7SD8
52
QA1
52
87L
FG Line 2
21
FG Line 2
87L
FG Line 1
21
326
7SD8
87L
87L
QA2
FG Line 1
Line 1
7SD8
87L
79
50BF
Ctrl
Protection interface
PI
52
Ctrl
52
PI
Ctrl
52
PI
Ctrl
PI
79
50BF
Ctrl
79
50BF
Ctrl
PI
7SD8
52
79
50BF
Ctrl
Line 2
Ctrl
7SD8
52
Ctrl
7SD8
52
Ctrl
87L
87L
87L
PI
PI
PI
Fig. 6.2-47: Low-cost protection and device redundancy
Fig. 6.2-49: Self-restoring multi-leg configurations
Properties
High availability due to protection and device redundancy
Low-cost because only 2 devices required for 2 lines
Reliable because of parallel processing of the protection
functions in the devices.
Properties
High availability because differential protection is also active
when a communication link fails
Self-restoring due to automatic switchover from ring to chain
topology
High ease of maintenance because single line ends can be
taken out of the differential protection configuration for
commissioning and servicing.

Modular and distributed protection and control solution
Low-cost device and protection redundancy in breaker-and-a-half

switchgear
BB 1
FG Line 1
21
87L
FG Line 1
87
50BF
52
QA1
79
Ctrl
FG Line 2
21
50BF
79
Ctrl
QA1 52
FG
Circuit breaker QA2
Ctrl
FG
Circuit breaker QA3
Line 1
Ctrl
Circuit breaker QA1
Ctrl
Ctrl
Line 1
52
QA2
FG
25
Ctrl
QA2 52
25
Ctrl
Line 2
25
Line 2
FG Line 1
21
FG Line 2
21
52
QA3
87
50BF
79
Ctrl
Circuit breaker QA1
Ctrl
FG Line 2
87L
FG
FG
Circuit breaker QA2
52 QA3
Ctrl
FG
Circuit breaker QA3
Ctrl
50BF
79
Ctrl
BB 2
Fig. 6.2-50: Modular and distributed protection and control solution
Fig. 6.2-51: Low-cost device and protection redundancy in breakerand-a-half switchgear
Properties
Clarity due to clear assignment of protection and control
High availability due to protection redundancy (Main 1 and
Main 2)
Simple reliable central control of the entire diameter
Reliable due to emergency control in every line in the
protection device
Reduced wiring due to integrated voltage selection
System-wide diameter bus based on IEC 61850
electrically isolated data exchange,
reduced wiring
easy expansion.
Properties
Clear assignment of the primary protection function (line
differential protection 87) to a line in one device (Main 1)
The distance protection function (21) is implemented in the
protection device of the other line by a 2nd line function
group
High availability and reliability due to device and protection
redundancy
Low cost.
327

Protection of a capacitor bank in an H-circuit and of an

associated filter circuit
Protection of a capacitor bank in an H-circuit
BB1
BB2
BB1
52
QA1
QB1 QB2
7SJ85
7SJ85
52
QA1
FG Capacitor bank
50N
37
49
59C
FG Capacitor bank
60C

Ctrl
50N/51N
59C
59N
37
60C
49
67N
Capacitor bank
50BF
50/51
50BF
Ctrl
Filter section
Capacitor bank
50
328
Fig. 6.2-52: Protection of a capacitor bank in an H-circuit
Fig. 6.2-53: Protection of a capacitor bank in an H-circuit and of an

associated filter circuit
Properties
Precisely adapted due to dedicated function group and
application-specific protection function, such as peak
overvoltage protection (ANSI 59C) and sensitive currentunbalance protection (ANSI 60C)
Low cost due to integration of all required functions into
one device.
Properties
Optimum protection of complex banks and filter circuits by
flexible hardware and flexible function design
Low cost due to integration of all necessary functions into one
device with up to 7 3-phase measuring points.

Double busbar with coupling

Bus
coupler
bay
Bay 1
QB1
QB1
...
Bay 2
QB2
52
QB2
BB1
BB2
QB1
QA1
QB2
BI1
7SS85
52
QA1
FG Disconnector QB2
FG Disconnector QB1
FG Current transformer BE1
BI1
50BF
50EF
Ctrl
FG Disconnector QB2
FG Disconnector QB2
FG Disconnector QB1
FG Disconnector QB1
50BF
50EF
Ctrl
52
QA1
50BF
50EF
BI1
Ctrl
FG Busbar
87B
Inherent CBFP
Check zone
Bus zone 1
Bus zone 2
Supervision
Fig. 6.2-54: Double busbar with coupling
Properties
Central busbar protection
Grouping of all primary components of a bay in the
bay image
Configurable busbar function group
One device for up to 15 measuring points
Flexible adaptation to the topology
(up to 4 busbar sections and 4 couplings can be configured)
Integrated disconnector image
Convenient graphical configuration with DIGSI 5.
329

Grid monitoring and PMU
SIGUARD PDP
52
Node device A
SIPROTEC 5
PMU
52
52
Node device B
Node device C
SIPROTEC 5
SIPROTEC 5
PMU
PMU
Fig. 6.2-55: Principle of distributed phasor measurement
Properties
Each SIPROTEC 5 device can be equipped or retrofitted with the
PMU function
Online and offline evaluation of the PMU data in the
monitoring system, SIGUARD PDP.
330

6.2.4 Protection Coordination

Typical applications and functions
Relay operating characteristics and their settings must be carefully coordinated in order to achieve selectivity. The aim is
basically to switch off only the faulty component and to leave
the rest of the power system in service in order to minimize
supply interruptions and to ensure stability.
12.0
11.0
Rush
N
10.0
9.0
8.0
7.0
6.0
5.0
Sensitivity
Protection should be as sensitive as possible in order to detect
faults at the lowest possible current level. At the same time,
however, it should remain stable under all permissible load,
overload and through-fault conditions. For more information:
www.siemens.com / systemplanning. The Siemens engineering
programs SINCAL and SIGRADE are especially designed for
selective protection grading of protection relay systems. They
provide short-circuit calculations, international standard characteristics of relays, fuses and circuit-breakers for easy protection
grading with respect to motor starting, inrush phenomena, and
equipment damage curves.
Phase-fault overcurrent relays
The pickup values of phase overcurrent relays are normally set
30 % above the maximum load current, provided that sufficient
short-circuit current is available. This practice is recommended
particularly for mechanical relays with reset ratios of 0.8 to 0.85.
Numerical relays have high reset ratios near 0.95 and allow,
therefore, about a10 % lower setting. Feeders with high transformer and / or motor load require special consideration.
Transformer feeders
The energizing of transformers causes inrush currents that may
last for seconds, depending on their size (fig. 6.2-56). Selection
of the pickup current and assigned time delay have to be coordinated so that the inrush current decreases below the relay
overcurrent reset value before the set operating time has
elapsed. The inrush current typically contains only about a 50 %
fundamental frequency component. Numerical relays that filter
out harmonics and the DC component of the inrush current can
therefore be set to be more sensitive. The inrush current peak
values of fig. 6.2-56 will be reduced to more than one half in
this case. Some digital relay types have an inrush detection
function that may block the trip of the overcurrent protection
resulting from inrush currents.
Ground-fault protection relays
Earth-current relays enable a much more sensitive setting,
because load currents do not have to be considered (except
4-wire circuits with 1-phase load). In solidly and low-resistance
earthed systems, a setting of 10 to 20 % rated load current can
generally be applied. High-resistance earthing requires a much
more sensitive setting, on the order of some amperes primary.
The earth-fault current of motors and generators, for example,
should be limited to values below 10 A in order to avoid iron
burning. In this case, residual-current relays in the start point
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
10
100
400
Rated transformer power (MVA)

Time constant of inrush current
Nominal power (MVA)
0.5 1.0
1.0 10
> 10
Time constant (s)
0.16 0.2
0.2 1.2
1.2 720
Fig. 6.2-56: Peak value of inrush current
connection of CTs cannot be used; in particular, with rated CT

primary currents higher than 200 A. The pickup value of the
zero-sequence relay would be on the order of the error currents
of the CTs. A special core-balance CT is therefore used as the
earth-current sensor. Core-balance CTs are designed for a ratio of
60 / 1 A. The detection of 6 A primary would then require a relay
pickup setting of 0.1 A secondary. An even more sensitive
setting is applied in isolated or Petersen coil earthed systems
where very low earth currents occur with 1-phase-to-earth
faults. Settings of 20 mA and lower may then be required
depending on the minimum earth-fault current. The integrated
sensitive directional earth-fault function allows settings as low
as 1 mA.
Remark to Earth-Fault Protection with Cable Type CTs:
Please notice the properties of a given Cable Type CT.
The setting of IE> must have sufficient margin against the
maximum error current of the Cable Type CT.
Background:
Even in the case where the 3 conductors are centrally bundled,
when passing through the cable type CT, an error current "I
error" will arise in the secondary circuit. This error current is
generally proportional to load current flowing through the CT.
In the case of non-bundled conductors or when the conductors
are not in the center of the cable type CT, the error current "I
error" may be substantially larger.
331

Motor feeders
The energization of motors causes a starting current of initially
5 to 6 times the rated current (locked rotor current).
A typical time-current curve for an induction motor is shown in
fig. 6.2-57.
In the first 100 ms, a fast-decaying asymmetrical inrush current
also appears. With conventional relays, it was common practice
to set the instantaneous overcurrent stage of the short-circuit
protection 20 to 30 % above the locked rotor current with a
short-time delay of 50 to 100 ms to override the asymmetrical
inrush period.
Numerical relays are able to filter out the asymmetrical current
component very rapidly so that the setting of an additional time
delay is no longer applicable.
The overload protection characteristic should follow the thermal
motor characteristic as closely as possible. The adaptation is
made by setting the pickup value and the thermal time constant,
using the data supplied by the motor manufacturer. Furthermore, the locked-rotor protection timer has to be set according
to the characteristic motor value.
Time grading of overcurrent relays (51)
The selectivity of overcurrent protection is based on time
grading of the relay operating characteristics. The relay closer to
the infeed (upstream relay) is time-delayed against the relay
further away from the infeed (downstream relay). The calculation of necessary grading times is shown in fig. 6.2-57 by an
example for definite-time overcurrent relays.
Inverse-time relays
For the time grading of inverse-time relays, in principle the same
rules apply as for the definite-time relays. The time grading is
first calculated for the maximum fault level and then checked for
lower current levels (fig. 6.2-58).
10,000
1,000
Time in
seconds
100
10
1
0.1
0.01
0.001
10
Current in multiplies of full-load amps

Motor starting current
High set instantaneous O/C stage
Locked-rotor current
Motor thermal limit curve
Overload protection
characteristic
Permissible locked-rotor time
Fig. 6.2-57: Typical motor current-time characteristics
Time
51
51
51
0.2-0.4 seconds
Main
Feeder
Maximum feeder fault level
Current
Fig. 6.2-58: Coordination of inverse-time relays
If the same characteristic is used for all relays, or if when the

upstream relay has a steeper characteristic (e.g., very much over
normal inverse), then selectivity is automatically fulfilled at
lower currents.
Differential relay
Transformer differential relays are normally set to pickup values
between 20 and 30 % of the rated current. The higher value has
to be chosen when the transformer is fitted with a tap changer.
Restricted earth-fault relays and high-resistance motor / generator differential relays are, as a rule, set to about 10 % of the
rated current.
332
lnstantaneous overcurrent protection

This is typically applied on the final supply load or on any protection relay with sufficient circuit impedance between itself and
the next downstream protection relay. The setting at transformers, for example, must be chosen about 20 to 30 % higher
than the maximum through-fault current. The relay must remain
stable during energization of the transformer.

Calculation example
The feeder configuration of fig. 6.2-60 and the associated load
and short-circuit currents are given. Numerical overcurrent
relays 7SJ80 with normal inverse-time characteristics are
applied.
Operating time
52M
51M
52F
The relay operating times, depending on the current, can be

derived from the diagram or calculated with the formula given in
fig. 6.2-61.
52F
51F
51F
0.2-0.4
Time grading
Fault
Fault
inception detection
The Ip / IN settings shown in fig. 6.2-60 have been chosen to get

pickup values safely above maximum load current.
Interruption of
fault current
t 51F
t 52F
Set time delay
Circuit-breaker
interruption time
This current setting should be lowest for the relay farthest downstream. The relays further upstream should each have equal or
higher current settings.
Overshoot*
t OS
Margin tM
t 51M
The time multiplier settings can now be calculated as follows:

Station C:
For coordination with the fuses, we consider the fault in
location F1.
The short-circuit current Iscc. max. related to 13.8 kV is 523 A.
This results in 7.47 for I / Ip at the overcurrent relay in location C.
With this value and Tp = 0.05, an operating time of tA = 0.17 s
can be derived from fig 6.2-58.
This setting was selected for the overcurrent relay to get a safe
grading time over the fuse on the transformer low-voltage side.
Safety margin for the setting values for the relay at station C are
therefore:
Pickup current: Ip / IN = 0.7
Time multiplier: Tp = 0.05
*also called overtravel or coasting time

Time grading
trs = t51M t51F = t52F + tOS + tM
Example 1
tTG =0.10 s + 0.15 s + 0.15 s = 0.40 s
Oil circuit-breaker
t52F = 0.10 s
Mechanical relays
tOS = 0.15 s
Safety margin for

measuring errors, etc.
tM = 0.15 s
Example 2
tTG = 0.08 + 0.02 + 0.10 = 0.20 s
Vacuum circuit-breaker
t52F = 0.08 s
Numerical relays
tOS = 0.02 s
Safety margin
tM = 0.10 s
Fig. 6.2-59: Time grading of overcurrent-time relays
Station B:
The relay in B has a primary protection function for line B-C and
a backup function for the relay in C. The maximum through-fault
current of 1.395 A becomes effective for a fault in location F2.
For the relay in C, an operating time time of 0.11 s (I / Ip = 19.93)
is obtained.
It is assumed that no special requirements for short operating
times exist and therefore an average time grading interval of
0.3 s can be chosen. The operating time of the relay in B can
then be calculated.
F3 C
F4 B
F2
13.8 kV
Station
51
51
51
7SJ80
7SJ80
7SJ80
Max.
load
A
ISCC. max*
CT
ratio
13.8 kV/
0.4 kV
Fuse: D
160 A
625 kVA
5.0 %
L.V. 75
Ip / IN** Iprim***
Load
F1
Load
Load
Iscc. max
I / Ip =
Iprim
300
4,500
400 / 5
1.0
400
11.25
170
2,690
200 / 5
1.1
220
12.23
tB = 0.11 + 0.3 = 0.41 s
50
1,395
100 / 5
0.7
70
19.93
1,395 A
Value of Ip / IN = = 6.34 (fig. 6.2-60)
220 A
523
With the operating time 0.41 s and Ip / IN = 6.34,

Tp = 0.11 can be derived from fig. 6.2-61.
*)
ISCC. max = Maximum short-circuit current
= Relay current multiplier setting
**)
Ip / IN
= Primary setting current corresponding to Ip / IN
***) Iprim
Fig. 6.2-60: Time grading of inverse-time relays for a radial feeder
333

The setting values for the relay at station B are:

Time multiplier Tp = 0.11
Given these settings, the operating time of the relay in B for a
close fault in F3 can also be checked: The short-circuit current
increases to 2,690 A in this case (fig. 6.2-60). The corresponding
I / Ip value is 12.23.
100
50
40
30
20
Tp [s]
10
With this value and the set value of Tp = 0.11, an operating

time of 0.3 s is obtained again (fig. 6.2-61).
Station A:
Adding the time grading interval of 0.3 s, the desired
operating itme is tA = 0.3 + 0.3 = 0.6 s.
Following the same procedure as for the relay in station B, the
following values are obtained for the relay in station A:
Time multiplier Tp = 0.17
For the close-in fault at location F4, an operating time of
0.48 s is obtained.
The normal way
To prove the selectivity over the whole range of possible shortcircuit currents, it is normal practice to draw the set of operating
curves in a common diagram with double log scales. These
diagrams can be calculated manually and drawn point-by-point
or constructed by using templates.
Today, computer programs are also available for this purpose.

Fig. 6.2-62 shows the relay coordination diagram for the
selected example, as calculated by the Siemens program SIGRADE (Siemens Grading Program).
Note:
To simplify calculations, only inverse-time characteristics have
been used for this example. About 0.1 s shorter operating times
could have been reached for high-current faults by additionally
applying the instantaneous zones I>> of the 7SJ60 relays.
Coordination of overcurrent relays with fuses and low-voltage
trip devices
The procedure is similar to the above-described grading of
overcurrent relays. A time interval of between 0.1 and 0.2 s is
usually sufficient for a safe time coordination.
Strong and extremely inverse characteristics are often more
suitable than normal inverse characteristics in this case.
Fig. 6.2-63 shows typical examples.
Simple distribution substations use a power fuse on the secondary side of the supply transformers (fig. 6.2-63a).
In this case, the operating characteristic of the overcurrent relay
at the infeed has to be coordinated with the fuse curve.
334
3.2
5
4
1.6
3
2
0.8
0.4
0.50
0.4
0.2
0.3
0.1
0.2
0.05
0.1
0.05
2
6 8 10
20
p
[A]
Fig. 6.2-61: Normal inverse-time characteristic of the 7SJ60 relay
Normalinverse
0.14
t =
Tp(s)
(I / Ip)0.02 1
Strong inverse characteristics may be used with expulsion-type
fuses (fuse cutouts), while extremely inverse versions adapt
better to current limiting fuses.
In any case, the final decision should be made by plotting the
curves in the log-log coordination diagram.
Electronic trip devices of LV breakers have long-delay, shortdelay and instantaneous zones. Numerical overcurrent relays
with one inverse-time and two definite-time zones can closely
be adapted to this (fig. 6.2-63b).

Setting range setting
IN
Bus-A
Ip = 0.10 4.00 IN
Tp = 0.05 3.2 s
I>> = 0.1 25 IN
400/5 A
52
Ip = 1.0 IN
Tp = 0.11 s
I>> =
7SJ80
Bus-B
Ip = 0.10 4.00 IN
Tp = 0.05 3.2 s
I>> = 0.1 25 IN
200/5 A
52
7SJ80
Ip = 0.7 IN
Tp = 0.05 s
I>> =
Bus-C
100/5 A
52
Ip = 1.0 IN
Tp = 0.17 s
I>> =
Ip = 0.10 4.00 IN
Tp = 0.05 3.2 s
I>> = 0.1 25 IN
7SJ80
TR
13.8/0.4 kV
625 kVA
5.0%
fuse
VDE 160
HRC fuse 160 A
Fig. 6.2-62: Overcurrent-time grading diagram
MV bus
Inverse-time relay
Time
51
Other
consumers
50/51
Fuse
n
a
LV bus
Fuse
a)
MV bus
n
a
LV bus
0.2 s
Current
Maximum fault available at HV bus
Fig. 6.2-63 a + b: Coordination of an overcurrent relay with an MV fuse and low-voltage breaker trip device
Coordination of distance relays

The distance relay setting must take into account the limited
relay accuracy, including transient overreach (5 %, according to
IEC 60255-6), the CT error (1 % for class 5P and 3 % for class
10P) and a security margin of about 5 %. Furthermore, the line
parameters are often only calculated, not measured. This is a
further source of errors. A setting of 80 to 85 % is therefore
common practice; 80 % is used for mechanical relays, while 85 %
can be used for the more accurate numerical relays.
Where measured line or cable impedances are available, the

protected zone setting may be extended to 90 %. The second
and third zones have to keep a safety margin of about 15
to 20 % to the corresponding zones of the following lines.
The shortest following line always has to be considered
(fig. 6.2-64).
As a general rule, the second zone should at least reach 20 %
over the next station to ensure backup for busbar faults, and the
third zone should cover the longest following line as backup for
the line protection.
335

Grading of zone times

The first zone normally operates undelayed. For the grading of
the time delays of the second and third zones, the same rules as
for overcurrent relays apply (fig. 6.2-59, page 335). For the
quadrilateral characteristics (relays 7SA6 and 7SA5), only the
reactance values (X values) have to be considered for the protected zone setting. The setting of the R values should cover the
line resistance and possible arc or fault resistances. The arc
resistance can be roughly estimated as follows:
2.5 larc
RArc =
[]
ISCC Min
larc = Arc length in mm
Z3A
Opet
rating 3
time t 2
Z2A
Z1A
t1
ZL A-B
Z2B
Z1C
Z1B
ZL B-C
B
Load
ZLC-D
C
Load
D
Load
Z1A = 0.85 ZLAB

Z2A = 0.85 (ZLAB + Z1B)
Z2A = 0.85 (ZLAB + Z2B)
Fig. 6.2-64: Grading of distance zones
ISCC Min = Minimum short-circuit current in kA

Typical settings of the ratio R / X are:
Short lines and cables ( 10 km): R / X =2 to 6
Medium line lengths < 25 km: R / X =2
Longer lines 25 to 50 km: R / X =1
X
X 3A
X 2A
B
Shortest feeder protectable by distance relays

The shortest feeder that can be protected by underreaching
distance zones without the need for signaling links depends on
the shortest settable relay reactance.
X1A
VTratio
XPrim Min = XRelay Min
CTratio
R1A
XPrim Min
lmin =
XLine
The shortest setting of the numerical Siemens relays is 0.05
for 1 A relays, corresponding to 0.01 for 5 A relays. This allows
distance protection of distribution cables down to the range of
some 500 meters.
Breaker failure protection setting
Most numerical relays in this guide provide breaker failure (BF)
protection as an integral function. The initiation of the BF protection by the internal protection functions then takes place via
software logic. However, the BF protection function may also be
initiated externally via binary inputs by an alternate protection.
In this case, the operating time of intermediate relays (BFI time)
may have to be considered. Finally, the tripping of the infeeding
breakers requires auxiliary relays, which add a small time delay
(BFI) to the overall fault clearing time. This is particularly the
case with one-breaker-and-a-half or ring bus arrangements
where a separate breaker failure relay (7VK8) is used per
breaker.
The decisive criterion of BF protection time coordination is the
reset time of the current detector (50BF), which must not be
exceeded under any condition during normal current interruption. The reset times specified in the Siemens numerical relay
manuals are valid for the worst-case condition: interruption of a
fully offset short-circuit current and low current pickup setting
(0.1 to 0.2 times rated CT current).
336
R 2A
R 3A
R
Fig. 6.2-65: Operating characteristics of Siemens distance relays
50BF
50BF
P1
P1: primary
protection
P 2: alternate
protection
P2
O
R
A
N
D
Fig. 6.2-66: Breaker failure protection, logic circuit
The reset time is 1 cycle for EHV relays (7SA8, 7VK8) and 1.5 to
2 cycles for distribution type relays (7SJ**).
Fig. 6.2-66 shows the time chart for a typical breaker failure
protection scheme. The stated times in parentheses apply for
transmission system protection and the times in square brackets
for distribution system protection.

CT requirements for protection relays

Instrument transformers
Instrument transformers must comply with the applicable
IEC recommendations IEC 60044 and 60186 (PT),
ANSI / IEEE C57.13 or other comparable standards.
Voltage transformers (VT)
Voltage transformers (VT) in single-pole design for all primary
voltages have typical single or dual secondary windings of 100,
110 or 115 V / 3, with output ratings between 10 and 50 VA
suitable from most applications with digital metering and protection equipment, and accuracies of 0.1 % to 6 % to suit the
particular application. Primary BIL values are selected to match
those of the associated switchgear.
Current transformers (CT) are usually of the single-ratio type
with wound or bar-type primaries of adequate thermal rating.
Single, double or triple secondary windings of 1 or 5 A are
standard. 1 A rating should, however, be preferred, particularly
in HV and EHV substations, to reduce the burden of the connected lines. Output power (rated burden in VA), accuracy and
saturation characteristics (rated symmetrical short-circuit current
limiting factor) of the cores and secondary windings must meet
the requirements of the particular application.The CT classification code of IEC is used in the following:
Measuring cores
These are normally specified with 0.2 % or 0.5 % accuracy
(class 0.2 or class 0.5), and an rated symmetrical short-circuit
current limiting factor FS of 5 or 10.
The required output power (rated burden) should be higher
than the actually connected burden. Typical values are 2.5, 5
or 10 VA. Higher values are normally not necessary when only
electronic meters and recorders are connected.
A typical specification could be: 0.5 FS 10, 5 VA.
Cores for billing values metering
In this case, class 0.25 FS is normally required.
Protection cores
The size of the protection core depends mainly on the
maximum short-circuit current and the total burden (internal
CT burden, plus burden of connected lines, plus relay burden).
Furthermore, a transient dimensioning factor has to be
considered to cover the influence of the DC component in the
short-circuit current.
Fault incidence
BFI =
breaker failure
initiation time
(intermediate
relays, if any)
Normal interrupting time
Protect.
Breaker inter.
Current
detector
(50 BF)
reset time
Margin
time
(2~)
[4~]
(1~)
[2~]
(2,5~)
[2,5~]
time
(1~)
[2~]
0,5~
BFI
BFT =
breaker failure
tripping time
(auxilary relays,
if any)
(5~)
[8~]
0,5~
BF timer (F) (62BF)
BFT
Total breaker failure interrupting time
(2~)
[4~]
Adjacent
breaker
int. time
(9~) [15~]
Fig. 6.2-67: Time coordination of BF time setting
The requirements for protective current transformers for transient performance are specified in IEC 60044-6. In many practical cases, iron-core CTs cannot be designed to avoid saturation
under all circumstances because of cost and space reasons,
particularly with metal-enclosed switchgear.
The Siemens relays are therefore designed to tolerate CT saturation to a large extent. The numerical relays proposed in this
guide are particularly stable in this case due to their integrated
saturation detection function. As an example you find the
current transformer requirements for SIPROTEC 7UT8 transformer protection devices. This example should give you an
overview how to handle CT requirements during you protection
calculation.
For all SIPROTEC 5 devices you find detailed requirement tables
in the device manuals. Please refer to the latest manual version
for your CT requirement calculation.
More accurate dimensioning can be done by more intensive
calculation with Siemens CTDIM (www.siemens.com/ctdim)
program. Results of CTDIM are released by the relay manufacturer.

www.siemens.com/siprotec
337

Fig. 6.2-68: Requirements for Current Transformer (Phase Current Transformer)
338

Fig. 6.2-69: Requirements for Current Transformer (Phase Current Transformer)

339
6.3 Substation Automation

6.3.1 Introduction
In the past, the operation and monitoring of energy automation
and substation equipment was expensive, as it required staff on
site. Modern station automation solutions enable the remote
monitoring and control of all assets based on a consistent communication platform that integrates all elements from bay level
all the way to the control center. Siemens substation automation
products can be precisely customized to meet user requirements
for utilities, as well as for industrial plants and bulk consumers.
A variety of services from analysis to the operation of an entire
system round out Siemens range of supply, and ensure complete
asset monitoring. By acquiring and transmitting all relevant data
and information, substation automation and telecontrol technologies from Siemens are the key to stable grid operation. New
applications, such as online monitoring, can easily be integrated
in existing IT architectures. This is how Siemens enables provident asset management, and makes it possible to have all equipment optimally automated throughout its entire life cycle.
6.3.2 Overview and Solutions
During the last years, the influences on the business of the power
supply companies have changed a lot. The approach to power
grid operation has changed from a static quasi-stable interpretation to a dynamic operational management of the electric power
grid. Enhanced requirements regarding the economy of lifetime
for all assets in the grid are gaining importance.
As a result, the significance of automation systems has increased
a lot, and the requirements for control, protection and remote
control have undergone severe changes of paradigm:
Fig. 6.3-1: Siemens energy automation products
340
Flexible and tailor-made solutions for manifold

applications
Secure and reliable operation management
Cost-effective investment and economic operation
Efficient project management
Long-term concepts, future-proof and open for new
requirements
Siemens energy automation solutions offer an answer to all
current issues of todays utilities. Based on a versatile product
portfolio and many years of experience, Siemens plans and
delivers solutions for all voltage levels and all kinds of substations (fig. 6.3-1).
Siemens energy automation solutions are available both for
refurbishment and new turnkey substations, and can be used in
classic centralized or distributed concepts. All automation
functions can be performed where they are needed.
Flexible and tailor-made solutions for manifold applications
Siemens energy automation solutions offer a variety of standardized default configurations and functions for many typical
tasks. Whereas these defaults facilitate the use of the flexible
products, they are open for more sophisticated and tailor-made
applications. Acquisition of all kinds of data, calculation and
automation functions, as well as versatile communication can be
combined in a very flexible way to form specific solutions, and fit
into the existing surrounding system environment.
The classical interface to the primary equipment is centralized
with many parallel cables sorted by a marshalling rack. In such
an environment, central protection panels and centralized RTUs
are standard. Data interfaces can make use of high density I / O
elements in the rack, or of intelligent terminal modules, which
are even available with DC 220 V for digital inputs and direct
CT / VT interfaces.

Even in such configurations, the user can benefit from full

automation and communication capabilities. This means that
classical RTU solution, interfaces to other IEDs are included, and
HMIs for station operation and supervision can be added as an
option. Also, the protection relays are connected to the RTU, so
that data from the relays are available both at the station operation terminal and in the control centers.
All members of the SICAM RTU family can be equipped with
different combinations of communication, both serial and Ethernet (TCP / IP). Different protocols are available, mainly IEC standards, e.g., IEC 60870-5-101 / 103 / 104 IEC 61850, IEC 62056-21,
but also a lot of other well-known protocols from different
vendors.
Fig. 6.3-2 shows an example of refurbishment and centralized
data acquisition in an MV substation. The interface to the primary equipment is connected via a marshalling rack, but can use
any peripheral voltage (DC 24220 V). The electronic terminal
blocks are designed to substitute conventional terminal blocks,

thereby realizing a very economic design. Existing protection
relays can be connected either by IEC 60870-5-103 or by the
more enhanced IEC 61850.
In new substations, the amount of cabling can be reduced by
decentralizing the automation system. Both protection relays
and bay controllers are situated as near as possible to the primary switchgear. Typically they are located in relay houses (EHV)
or in control cabinets directly beneath HV GIS feeders. The
rugged design with maximum EMC provides high security and
availability.
For station control, two different products are available: SICAM PAS
is a software-oriented product based on standard industrial
hardware, whereas SICAM RTUs represents the modular hardwareoriented design which bridges the gap between remote terminal
units (RTUs) and substation automation (SA) (fig. 6.3-3).
Control centers
IEC -101 or -104
Ax-Bus
SICAM 230
SICAM AK
Ethernet TCP/IP
IEC 61850
SIPROTEC
Protection relais
PE elements
Alternative interface
(substitution of terminal blocks)
Parallel data
(from marshalling rack)
Fig. 6.3-2: Example of refurbishment and centralized data acquisition in an MV substation
Control centers
IEC - 101 or IEC - 104
SICAM 230 or
SICAM SCC
SICAM RTUs
SICAM PAS
Ethernet TCP/IP
IEC 61850
IEC - 104
SIPROTEC
High-voltage
n x bays
SICAM CMIC
Medium-voltage
m relais
Station data
Fig. 6.3-3: Basic principle of a SICAM station automation solution with alternative station controllers
341

Process control system
SICAM TOOLBOX II
SICAM TM Zentralgert
Local input / output
Central processing
NTP
IEC 60870-5-104
SICAM TM
Data node
Front end
Gateway
IEC 60870-5-104
SICAM TM-FW-Unterstation
Local processing
Decentralized acquisition
SICAM TM Station control unit

Process coupling (serial, wide)
Node function
Automatic functions
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-104
IEC 60870-5-101
SICAM RTUs
SICAM TM
Turbine controller
Power plant management
Automation & control
SICAM RTUs
SIPROTEC / IEDs
Fig. 6.3-4: Example of a distribution substation in industry supply
The flexible Siemens solutions are available for every kind of

substation:
For different voltage levels, from ring main unit to
transmission substation
For new substations or refurbishment
For gas-insulated or air-insulated switchgear
For indoor or outdoor design
For manned or unmanned substations
342
single-point data input. This means that multiple data input is

avoided. Even if different engineering tools are necessary for
certain configurations, these tools exchange their data for more
efficient engineering.
Example of a small medium-voltage substation: Typically it
consists of 4 to 16 MV feeders and is unmanned. In most cases,
combined bay control and protection devices are located directly
in the low-voltage compartments of the switchgear panels.
Communication is the backbone of every automation system.

Therefore, Siemens solutions are designed to collect the data
from the high-voltage equipment and present them to the
different users: the right information for the right users at the
right place and time with the required quality and security.
A station operation terminal is usually not required, because

such substations are normally remote-controlled, and in case of
local service / maintenance they are easy to control at the front
side of the switchgear panels.
Here are some default examples for typical configurations. They

are like elements which can be combined according to the
respective requirements. The products, which are the bricks of
the configurations, are an integral part of the harmonized
system behavior, and support according to the principle of
Example of a distribution substation in industry supply: In

principle they are similar to the configuration above, but they
are often connected to a control center via local area network
(LAN). A distinctive feature is the interface to low-voltage
distribution boards and sometimes even to the industrial auto-

mation system for data exchange. Here, the compatibility with

SIMATIC products simplifies system integration.
A subtransmission substation requires even more complexity: 2 or
3 voltage levels have to be equipped; a station operation terminal
is usually required; more communication interfaces to external
locations, separated control and protection devices on HV level,
powerful LAN based on IEC 61850, and remote maintenance
access are typical features of such applications.
In transmission substations, typically two to four voltage levels
are to be automated. According to the high importance of such
substations, availability is of the highest priority. Therefore,
redundancy at substation level is generally required, both for
station control units and station operation. Multiple operator
stations are often required, multiple communication links to
different control centers or neighboring substations are standard. Although most standard applications are IEC protocols,
specific protocols also have to be offered for interfacing existing
third-party devices. Complex automation functions support the
operation and maintenance of such substations, such as voltage
regulation by controlling on-load tap changers, synchrocheck,
automatic command sequences, etc.
Automation functions support operation:

Interlocking
Feeder or remote blocking (option)
Command sequences (option)
Automatic recloser (option)
Automatic switchover (option)
etc.
All images and pictures of the HMI are organized hierarchically
and, for easy access, they guide the user to the required information and to fast alarm recognition. In addition, alarm and
event logs, measurement curves, fault records, archives and
flexible reports support the analysis of any situation in the
power grid (fig. 6.3-5).
The devices are as flexible as the configurations: Bay controllers,

protection relays, station control units, station operation units
and RTUs can be configured from small to very large. The wellknown products of the SICAM and SIPROTEC series are a well
proven base for the Siemens solutions.
Secure and reliable operation

Siemens solutions provide human machine interfaces (HMI)
for every control level and support the operators with reliable
information and secure, easy-to-use control features.
At feeder level:
Conventional panels with pushbuttons and instruments
for refurbishment
Electronic front panels combined with bay control units
(default)
Access points for remote terminals connected to the station
operation units
Portable touch panels with wireless access in defined areas
At substation level:
Single or redundant HMI
Distributed server / client architectures with
multiple and / or remote terminals
Interface to office automation
All images and pictures of the HMIs are designed according to
ergonomic requirements, so as to give the operators clear information that is easy to use. Control commands are only accepted
if access rights are met, the local / remote switches are in the
right position and the multi-step command sequence is actively
handled. Care is taken that only commands which are intended
and explicitly given are processed and sent to the switchgear.
Fig. 6.3-5: Human machine interface for every control level
343

For security reasons only specially authorized personnel is

granted access to operation and engineering tools. Flexible
access rights are defined for operators, design engineers and
service personnel, and differentiate between engineering access
and operation rights.
Security of data transmission is catered for by secure protocols
and secure network design. Especially, easy remote access to
substations creates the need for such complex measures. The
experienced Siemens engineers provide all the necessary knowledge for network security concepts.
Cost-effective investment and economic operation
The customized solutions from Siemens cater for effective
investment. Tailor-made configurations and functions make sure
that only required items are offered. The efficient tools cater for
fast and easy engineering and support all project phases of an
automation system, from collection of the substation data to
deployment of all needed functions, and finally to reporting and
archiving. The long lifetime of the involved future-proof products extend the time period between investments into automation systems.
Siemens solutions ensure low cost of ownership, thus taking
into account all costs during lifetime. The automation systems
are maintenance free and easy to expand at a later date. Last but
not least, the powerful services for remote maintenance (diagnosis, settings, updates, test, etc.) provide a very economic way
to keep any substation up-to-date and running.
Efficient and state-of-the-art projects

The solutions for energy automation are part of the extensive
programme, Siemens One. This means that energy automation
solutions are integrated in different applications of the vast
activity and expertise of Siemens:
Power grids in transmission and distribution
Complete building automation
Solutions for pipelines and infrastructure
Turnkey railway systems
They all make use of the energy automation solutions and the
associated transfer of expertise for efficient project and order
execution. Our worldwide engineering centers are always close
to the system operators (fig. 6.3-6).
Long-term stability and trendsetting features for
new requirements
With Siemens energy automation systems every user benefits
from more than 70 years of experience in remote control and
substation automation. The energy automation systems are
designed for a long lifetime. Innovation is based on existing
products, and compatibility of different product generations is
part of the Siemens development philosophy.
Professional implementation of complete solutions from

competence centers
Consulting
Engineering
services
Simple handling of the solutions is provided by:

Same look and feel of all HMI on different levels.
Vertical and horizontal interoperability of the involved
products.
Plug and play for spare parts by simple exchange of flash cards.
FIN
Reduction of engineering effort by

Seamless data management, only single data input for
whole project.
Easy up and downloads, even remote.
Integrated test tools.
Reduction of service expenses during lifetime by
Integrated self-supervision in all components
Powerful diagnosis in clear text
Remote access for diagnosis, settings, test, expansions, etc.
Reduction of complexity by seamless communication
Worldwide standard IEC 61850 promoted by Siemens
Integrated IT security concepts
Latest technology integrated
344
NOR
USA
GBR
BEL
CH
USA
ITL
MEX
KOL
BRA
GER
OES
TRK
Training
Configuration
Installation and
commissioning
RUS
IND
Lifecycleservices
CHN
SIN
IDS
Local presence with

competence and engineering centers
and worldwide sales organisation
Incl. refurbishment of
old systems and
old equipment
Fig. 6.3-6: The worldwide engineering centers of Siemens

The extensive use of available IEC standards strongly supports

long-term stability and expandability. Examples are communication protocols like IEC 61850 in the substation, IEC 61970 for
control centers, and IEC 60870-5 for remote communication.
They form the strong backbone for the seamless solutions in
energy automation. Additionally, the systems are tested in
rugged environmental conditions and certified according to
applicable IEC standards.
Our solutions are not only compatible with older devices, they
are also very innovative. The Frost&Sullivan Technology Leadership Award 2006 was presented to Siemens for pioneering in the
development of an innovative technology, the IEC 61850.
With Siemens energy automation solutions, every user is on the
safe side: The combination of long-term experience and the
newest innovation supplies safety for many years to come.
Investments in our solutions are secured by the evergreen

concept, which defines migration methods when a new generation of products is introduced to the markets, e.g., the migration
solution for SICAM LSA 678 from the early 90ies: By substituting
the station control device with todays SICAM PAS, it is possible
to retain the installed feeder devices and import the existing
database with the settings into the new tool SICAM PAS UI. This
method reduces the refurbishment work significantly and adds
new features to the system: In the next years the substation can
be expanded with new feeder devices through the use of
IEC 61850, even though some parts of the system might already
be older than 15 years (fig. 6.3-7).
To control centers 1 ... 5
To control centers 1 ... 5

SICAM SCC
SICAM PAS
Fiber-optic
connections
ILSA protocol
Bay 1 ... n
TCP/IP
IEC61850
Fiber-optic
connections
ILSA protocol
Switchgear
Bay 1 ... n
Switchgear
Fig. 6.3-7: Migration from LSA to PAS
345

6.3.3 SICAM PAS

SICAM PAS (Power Automation System) meets all the demands
placed on a distributed substation control system both now
and in the future. Amongst many other standardized communication protocols, SICAM PAS particularly supports the IEC 61850
standard for communication between substations and IEDs.
SICAM PAS is an open system and in addition to standardized
data transfer processes it features user interfaces for the
integration of system-specific tasks and offers multiple automation options. SICAM PAS can thus be easily included in existing
systems and used for system integration, too. With modern
diagnostics, it optimally supports commissioning and maintenance. SICAM PAS is clearly structured and reliable, thanks to its
open, fully documented and tested system (fig. 6.3-8).
System overview, application and functionality of SICAM PAS
SICAM PAS is an energy automation solution; its system
architecture makes it scalable.
SICAM PAS is suitable for operating a substation not only from
one single station level computer, but also in combination with
further SICAM PAS or other station control units. Communication in this network is based on a powerful Ethernet LAN.
With its features and its modular expandability, SICAM PAS
covers a broad range of applications and supports distributed
system configurations. A distributed SICAM PAS system
operates simultaneously on several computers.
SICAM PAS can use existing hardware components and
communication standards as well as their connections.
SICAM PAS controls and registers the process data for all
devices of a substation, within the scope of the data transfer
protocols supported.
SICAM PAS is a communication gateway. This is why only one
single data connection to a higher-level system control center
is required.
Control center
Station unit
full server
SICAM PAS enables integration of a fully graphical process

visualization system directly in the substation.
SICAM PAS simplifies installation and parameterization of new
devices, thanks to its intuitive user interface.
SICAM PAS is notable for its online parameter setting features,
particularly when the system has to be expanded. There are no
generation times; loading into a target system is not required
at all or only required if configuration is performed on a
separate engineering PC.
SICAM PAS features integrated testing and diagnostic functions.
Its user-friendliness, its operator control logic, its orientation
to the Windows world and its open structure ideally suit users
requirements.
SICAM PAS is developed in accordance with selected security
standards and meets modern demands placed on safe
communication.
Communication
Device interfaces and communication protocols
In a substation configured and operated with SICAM PAS, various
types of protection relays, IEDs, bay control units, measuredvalue recorders and telecontrol units from a wide range of
manufacturers can be used. SICAM PAS offers a large number of
commercially available communication protocols for recording
data from various devices and through differing communication
channels. Subsequent expansion is easy.
Available protocols:
These communication protocols and device drivers can be
obtained as optional additions to the standard scope of
SICAM PAS.
IEC 61850 (Client):
IEC 61850 is the communication standard for interconnecting
Corporate
network TCP/IP
IEC 60870-5-101
DNP3
IEC 60870-5-104
DNPi
HMI
Station bus
Ethernet TCP/IP
Serial hub
IEC 61850
Fig. 6.3-8: Typical SICAM PAS configuration; IEDs are connected to the station unit with IEC 61850 and various other protocols
(IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3, etc.). The station unit communicates with the higher-level system control center by means
of IEC 60870-5-101 and / or 104
346

the devices at the feeder and station control levels on the basis
of Ethernet. IEC 61850 supports the direct exchange of data
between IEDs, thus enabling switching interlocks across
feeders independently of the station control unit, for example.
IEC 60870-5-103 (Master):
Protection relays, IEDs, bay control units, measured value
recorders and transformer controllers from many
manufacturers support the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol and can
therefore be connected directly to SICAM PAS.
IEC 60870-5-101 (Master):
The IEC 60870-5-101 protocol is generally used to connect
telecontrol units. The balanced and unbalanced traffic
modes are supported.
Automatic dialing is also supported for the connection of
substations with this protocol. SICAM PAS can establish the
dial-up connection to the substation either cyclically or as
required (e.g., for command output). By contrast, the
substation can also establish a connection cyclically or in
event-triggered mode.
IEC 60870-5-104 (Master):
Furthermore, connection of substations is also supported by
the TCP / IP-based IEC 60870-5-104 protocol.
DNP3 (Master) Level 3:
Apart from the IEC protocols -101 and -104, DNP3 is another
standardized telecontrol protocol used by many IEDs and RTUs
and applied worldwide. The units can be connected both
serially and with TCP/IP (DNPi). TCP/IP-based communication
can operate with an asymmetrical encryption procedure, thus
meeting security requirements.
PROFIBUS DP (Master):
PROFIBUS DP is a highly powerful field bus protocol. For
example, it is used for industrial automation and for
automating the supply of electricity and gas. PROFIBUS DP
serves to interface multifunctional measuring instruments
such as SICAM P (I, V, P, Q, p.f. (cos) or, for example, to
connect ET200 components for gathering messages and for
simple commands. Messages, for example, can be derived
from the signaling contacts of fuse switch-disconnectors.
Mobus (Master)
Besides PROFIBUS DP, the Mobus protocol is also well-known in
industrial applications. SICAM PAS allows to connect IEDs und
RTUs with this protocol, both via serial and TCP/IPbased
connections.
Protocols
SICAM PAS supports the following communication
protocols (optionally available):
Control center connection IEC 60870-5-101,
IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3, Modbus, TG 8979, CDT
Open data exchange OPC server, OPC XML DA server,
OPC client
IED and substation connection IEC 61850,
IEC 60870-5-101, IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104,
DNP3, PROFIBUS FMS (SIPROTEC 4), PROFIBUS DP,
Modbus, SINAUT LSA-ILSA
Fig. 6.3-9: Versatile communication with SICAM PAS
PROFIBUS FMS (SIPROTEC 4)

Most SIPROTEC 4 bay controllers and protection relays can be
connected to the SICAM PAS station unit via PROFIBUS FMS.
SINAUT LSA ILSA (Master)
Communication via the SINAUT LSA ILSA protocol is a special
advantage of SICAM PAS. Existing LSA central units can be
replaced without changing the configuration on bay level.
System control center connections, distributed process
connection and process visualization
SICAM PAS operates on the basis of Microsoft Windows
operating systems. This means that the extensive support
which Windows offers for modern communication protocols is
also available with SICAM PAS.
SICAM PAS was conceived for easy and fast integration of
conventional protocols. Please contact Siemens in case of
questions about integration of user-specific protocols.
For the purpose of linking up to higher-level system control
centers, the standardized telecontrol protocols IEC 60870-5101, IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP3 (Level 3) serially and over IP
(DNPi), as well as Mobus (serially and over IP), TG 8979
(serially) and CDT (serially) are supported. Security or safe
communication are gaining more and more importance.
Asymmetric encryption enables tap-proof communication
connection to higher-level control centers with IEC 60870-5104 and DNP3 via TCP/IP. For DNP3, authentication can be
used as an additional security mechanism.
Distributed process connection in the substation is possible
thanks to the SICAM PAS Device Interface Processor (DIP).
SICAM PAS can also be set up on computers networked with
TCP/IP. Here, one computer performs the task of the so-called
full server. Up to six other computers can be used as DIPs.
With this architecture, the system can be adapted to the
topological situation and its performance also boosted.
SICAM PAS allows use of the SICAM SCC process visualization
system for central process control and monitoring. For
industrial applications, it is easy to configure an interface to
process visualization systems via OPC (object linking and
embedding for process control).
SICAM PAS can be configured as an OPC server or as an OPC
client. The SICAM PAS process variables available with the
OPC server can be read and written with OPC clients working
either on the same device or on one networked by TCP/IP. This
mechanism enables, for example, communication with
another process visualization system. The OPC server is
included in the basic system. Optionally, this server
functionality is also available as OPC XML DA for
communication with clients based on other operating systems
as well as beyond firewall limits. The OPC client can read and
write data from other OPC servers. A typical application could
be the connection of SIMATIC programmable controllers. The
OPC client is available as an optional package.
SICAM Diamond can be used to monitor the system interfaces,
to indicate switching device states and up-to-date measured
values, and also for further diagnostic purposes. Apart from
these configuration-free diagnostic views, SICAM Diamond
also supports message logging in event and alarm lists as well
as process visualization in single-line diagrams, and can thus
347

be used as a simple human-machine interface. Messages and

measured values can be archived in files (monthly). On the
one hand, SICAM Diamond consists of the Diamond Server,
which is directly connected with SICAM PAS and prepares the
data for access with a Web browser, and on the other hand,
the SICAM Diamond Client as operator interface in the context
of the Microsoft Internet Explorer. Except for the Microsoft
Internet Explorer, no additional software has to be installed on
the Web clients. SICAM Diamond allows access to archive files
and fault recordings through the World Wide Web. The archive
files can be saved on the Web client for evaluation, e.g. with
Microsoft Excel. Fault recordings can be visualized directly in
the Internet Explorer.
Further station control aspects
During, e.g., maintenance work or for other operational reasons,
information exchange with the control centers or the substation
itself can be blocked with the telecontrol blocking and bay
blocking functions. The telecontrol blocking function can also be
configured for specific channels so as to prevent the transfer of
information to one particular control center during operation,
while transfer continues with other control centers. The bay
blocking and telecontrol blocking functions act in both the
signaling and the command directions. Channel-specific
switching authority also makes it possible to distinguish
between local control (SICAM SCC) and remote control for the
switching direction, but also between control center connections. For these three functions, information-specific exceptions
can be declared additionally, so that, e.g., certain messages are
transmitted despite an activated block, or special commands are
processed and issued despite of a defined switching authority.
While a 1-out-of-n check is normally effective in IEDs, i.e. only
one command is accepted and issued at the same time, an
m-out-of-n check is supported on the side of the substation
control system with SICAM PAS. This helps to define how many
commands can be processed at the same time for all IEDs.
Circuit-breakers can be controlled in synchronized/unsynchronized mode.
Automation tasks
can be configured in SICAM PAS with the CFC (Continuous
Function Chart), which conforms to IEC 61131. In this editor,
tasks are configured graphically by wiring function blocks.
SICAM PAS comes with an extensive library of CFC function
blocks, developed and system-tested specially for energy automation.
Applications range from generation of simple group indications
through switching interlocks to complex operating sequences.
Creation of operating sequences is supported by the SFC Editor
(Sequential Function Chart).
In this context, additionally pre-configured and system-tested
applications such as frequency-based load shedding, transformer
monitoring and SF6 gas monitoring can be optionally licensed.
Besides special functional components and CFCs, the scope of
supply also covers operating images for SICAM SCC.
348
Redundancy
SICAM PAS features comprehensive redundancy functions to
boost the availability of the station automation system:
The substation control unit can be used in a duplicate
configuration (system redundancy)
The communication to IEDs and RTUs can be redundant
(interface redundancy)
Subordinate units can be duplicated (redundancy at the bay
control level)
Subunits that are only designed for communication with one
master (e.g., with only one serial interface) can be supported.
The individual applications (communication protocols) operate
independently of each other in a hot/standby connection, i.e. a
changeover, e.g., of the IEC 61850 client from one station
control unit to the other due to a disturbance has no effects on
the communication connection to the control center, which
remains on the first station control unit without interruption.
Apart from a higher stability in unaffected communication
connections, the redundancy changeover of affected components takes place within a very short time (depending on application and configuration, between 250 ms and max. 3 sec).
Adjustments during operation such as bay/telecontrol blocking,
switching authority, but also marking commands to the SoftPLC
for operational control of the automation functions, are kept
synchronous in both station control units during redundancy
operation. The current adjustments are also valid after a redundancy changeover. SICAM SCC communicates simultaneously
with both redundant station control units. A redundant structure
is also possible for process visualization with SICAM SCC and
fault-record archiving with SICAM PQ Analyzer as shown in
fig. 6.3-10.
Scope of information
The amount of information to be processed by SICAM PAS is
essentially determined by the following factors:
Computer network concept (multiple-computer network or
single-station system)
Performance data of the hardware used
Performance data of the network
Size of the database (RDBMS)
Rate of change of values
With a distributed PAS system using a full server and up to 6
DIPs, a maximum of 350 IEDs and 20,000 data points can be
supported.
Process visualization with SICAM SCC
In the operation of a substation, SICAM PAS is used for configuration purposes and as a powerful data concentrator.
SICAM SCC serves as the process visualization system. Several
independent SICAM SCC servers can be connected to one
SICAM PAS. Connection of redundant servers is also possible.
SICAM SCC supports the connection of several SICAM PAS systems. In the signal lists, the original time stamps are logged in
ms resolution as they occur in the devices. With every signal, a
series of additional data is also presented to provide information
about causes (spontaneous, command), event sources (close

Corporate
network TCP/IP
HMI
clients
Station unit
Full Server
Station unit
Full Server
Station bus
Ethernet TCP/IP
IEC 61850
Fig. 6.3-10: Typical redundant configuration: The station unit and the HMI server are based on a redundant structure to boost availiability
= D01
= D02
= D03
BBI
= D04 = D05
= D06
220 kV
= D07
= D08
= D09
0.0 kV
BBII
0A
600 A
600 A
0A
600 A
T01
TP 0
10.1 kV
0A
T02
T03
TP 0
= K12/13
TP 0
10.1 kV
= K17
= K22
= K19/20
600 A
T04
TP 0
10.1 kV
= K08
600 A
10.1 kV
= K33
= K26/27
= K01/02
Fig. 6.3-11: Process visualization with SICAM SCC
range, local, remote), etc. Besides process signals, command

signals are also logged. IndustrialX controls are used to control
and monitor switchgear. These switching-device objects support
four different forms of presentation (IEC, DIN, SINAUT LSA,
SICAM) for circuit-breakers and disconnectors. It is also possible
to create bitmaps (defined for a specific project) to represent
switching devices, and to link them to the objects. For informative visualization, not only nominal and spontaneous flashing
are supported, but also the display of various device and communication states (e.g., up-to-date / not up-to-date, feeder and
telecontrol blocking, etc.). Measured values and switching
device states that are not continuously updated due to, e.g.,
device or communication failure or feeder blocking, may be
updated directly via the operation panel with SICAM SCC
(fig. 6.3-11).
349

In conjunction with the SICAM PAS station unit, the switching

devices can be controlled either directly or with select before
operate. When visualizing the process by single-line diagrams,
topological coloring can be used. The WinCC add-on SIMATIC
Web navigator can be used for control and monitoring via the
Internet. SICAM Valpro can be used to evaluate measured and
metered values. It not only allows a graphical and a tabular
display of archived values, but also enables subsequent evaluation functions such as minimum, maximum and averages values
(on an hourly or daily basis). For protection devices connected
with the protocols IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103 as well as
PROFIBUS FMS (SIPROTEC 4) or SINAUT LSA ILSA, fault recordings can be retrieved and archived automatically. SICAM PQ
Analyzer with its component Incident Explorer is used for management and evaluation of the fault recordings.
SICAM SCC SP1 can also be used as a process visualization
system for
SICAM RTUs
IEC 61850 devices (for example, SIPROTEC 4)
SICAM SCC for SICAM RTUs

For communication with SICAM AK, TM, BC, EMIC and MIC, the
protocol IEC 60870-5-104 or IEC 61850 can be used. Both
SICAM TOOLBOX II and SICAM SCC support exchange of configuration data.
SICAM SCC for devices with communication standard IEC 61850
Devices communicating via IEC 61850 can be connected directly
to SICAM SCC. For this usage, SCL files (SCD, ICD, CID) are
imported. The files are created, for example, with the DIGSI 4
system configurator.
SICAM SCC for SICAM PAS, SICAM RTUs and IEC 61850 devices
With SICAM SCC SP1, a common control and monitoring system
for the systems SICAM PAS, SICAM RTUs and for IEC 61850
devices can be realized.
At its core, SICAM SCC uses one of the worlds leading process
visualization systems: SIMATIC WinCC. SICAM SCC was developed as an add-on so that the electrical processes in both highand medium-voltage systems could be operated from one
station.
It runs together with SIMATIC WinCC on one computer. This
integrated solution gives a parallel overview and control of both
the industrial manufacturing process and the electrical energy
process.
SICAM SCC
Integrated PAS protocol
IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-104
Third party IED
SICAM PAS
Distributed process connection
with IEDs
Integrated engineering tool
Integrated configuration and
test function (online)
SICAM AK, TM, EMIC, MIC

Central process connection (RTU)
and distributed process connection
with IEDs
Engineering with SICAM
TOOLBOX II
Fig. 6.3-12: Flexible station unit
350
IEDs
Direct connection of IEDs
with IEC 61850
Engineering with DIGSI 4

6.3.4 SICAM Station Unit

The SICAM Station Unit is the standard hardware platform for
the SICAM PAS station control system and the SICAM PQS power
quality system. It fulfills all requirements for the hardware for
these applications. The big advantage is that the SICAM Station
Unit complies with the highest IT security standards for energy
automation, such as the specifications laid down in the BDEW
Whitepaper or NERC CIP.
The SICAM Station Unit mirrors system memory and operating
data according to RAID 1, enabling faulty data media to be easily
exchanged with no system downtime. The power supply unit,
like the data storage, is of redundant design. Apart from optional
equipment that may contain a hard disk, the SICAM Station Unit
dispenses entirely with rotating parts and is not equipped with a
fan so you can rely on everything to work as it should.
SICAM Station Unit offers a number of different preconnectorized equipment variants to expand the platform at any time. For
example add CompactPCI/CompactPCI serial modules like GPS
time synchronizing cards, in line with the systems requirements.
Coordinated spare-part concepts ensure the long-term delivery
of parts even after product versions have been discontinued.
As an alternative to the 16-GB SSD, the SICAM Station Unit can

be equip with a 100-GB hard disk and an additional 100-GB hard
disk for archive data. In this way, power quality applications are
accommodated equally as well on the platform.
Features
Optimized for the connection of field devices
Meets all requirements with respect to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) and operates even under the harshest
environmental conditions
BIOS password (compliant to NERC CIP)
Windows Embedded Standard 7
User documentation for emergency planning: reliable restoral
of operation after a fault (recovery DVD)
5-year warranty
Long-term availability of components and of the operating
system version
High degree of compatibility
Kommunikationsschnittstellen
7 USB ports
Up to 16 serial ports (RS232/RS485)
Up to 6 Ethernet ports (electrical)Up to 4 Ethernet ports
(optical)
The SICAM Station Unit relies on the latest embedded processor

technology from Intel and four-gigabyte main memory. The
modern bus technology for the embedded element is based on
CompactPCI Serial. The use of solidstate disks (SSD) based on
flash memory ensure extremely rapid startup and shutdown of
the system.
Further information
www.siemens.com/substationautomation
SICAM Station Unit

hardware platform
SICAM PAS
Field devices
Protection devices
SICAM PAS/PQS combined solution

Field devices
Protection devices
Power-qualitiy equipment
SICAM PQS
Power-quality equipment
Fig. 6.3-13: SICAM Station Unit Flexible hardware high IT security
351

6.3.5 SICAM RTUs (SICAM AK, TM, BC,

EMIC, MIC und CMIC)
Versatile functionality and high flexibility are fundamental for a
modern remote control system. SICAM RTUs adds comprehensive options for communication, automation and process
interfaces. The different components of SICAM RTUs offer
optimal scalability regarding the number of interfaces and
signals. Nevertheless these components are all based on the
same system architecture, the same technology, and are handled
with the same engineering tool (SICAM TOOLBOX II).
SICAM AK is the large automation component for a flexible mix
of communication, automation and I / O. It offers optimal
support as master controller or RTU, gateway or front-end,
with local or distributed I / O. Versatile redundancy concepts
are another asset of these components.
SICAM TM is the solution for compact applications. This
component offers up to 4 communication interfaces plus
automation function and process interface per distributed
terminal modules. All modules are easily mounted to standard
DIN rails. The terminal modules can be distributed up to 200 m
with fiber-optic cables.
SICAM BC is the ruggedized component for highest EMC and
direct process interface up to DC 220 V. High switching
capacity and direct interface for measurement transformers,
plus expandability with TM modules provide flexible
application in centralized and distributed configurations. Up to
3 communication interfaces and automation functions are
integrated.
SICAM MIC is a small RTU and offers either a serial interface
according to IEC 60870-5-101 or an Ethernet interface with
IEC 60870-5-104. Up to 8 terminal modules for I / O can be
connected. A simplified automation function and a Web server
for easy engineering are integrated.
SICAM EMIC, the new smart automation system. Thanks to its
node functionality with 3 interfaces,SICAM EMIC has many
different potential applications. It can be used as an ordinary
telecontrol substation with any kind of communication to a
control center. If SICAM EMIC doesnt offer adequate signal
scope, it can be connected additional. Freely programmable
application programs for local control functions complete the
all-round versatility of the SICAM EMIC.
SICAM CMIC is a universal system. It is suitable for electrical
distribution substations, gas distribution substations,
hydropower plants, pipelines, railway power supplies, as well
as in building protection or for alarm signaling.
All components of the ACP family are using the same communication modules, and therefore they can use all available protocols. In addition to standards like IEC 60870-5-101 / 103 / 104
and IEC 61850 (client and / or server), also DNP3 and Modbus are
available in addition to a lot of legacy and third-party protocols
for connecting third-party devices.
Another joint feature of all components is the integrated flash
memory card, where all parameters and firmwares are stored. A
simple exchange of a component is now possible, just by
changing the memory card.
352
The SICAM TOOLBOX II offers all functions for an integrated,

seamless engineering of complete projects, and works with all
components of SICAM RTUs. It supports all phases of an RTU or
station automation project. Data exchange with DIGSI and PAS
UI means a single entry point for data engineering avoiding
multiple manual data inputs for a mixed configuration.
With SICAM RTUs there is always enough performance at hand:
The modular multiprocessor concept grows with every enhancement of the system. The distributed architecture and the principle of evolutionary development cater for a future proof
system with long lifetime expectation and high security of
investment. SICAM RTUs carries the experience of more than
30 years of remote control and automation; many references are
proving the flexible ways of application.
Automation component SICAM AK
Longevity through continuity and innovation
SICAM AK features high functionality and flexibility through the
implementation of innovative and reliable technologies, on the
stable basis of a reliable product platform.
For this, the system concept ACP (Automation, Control and
Protection) creates the technological preconditions. Balanced
functionality permits the flexible combination of automation,
telecontrol and communication tasks. Complemented with the
scalable performance and various redundancy configurations, an
optimal adaptation to the respective requirements of the process
is achieved.
SICAM AK is thus perfectly suitable for automation with
integrated telecontrol technology as:
Telecontrol substation or central device
Automation unit with autonomous functional groups
Data node, station control device, front-end or gateway
With local or remote peripherals
For rear panel installation or 19 inch assembly
SICAM AK the forward-looking product
Versatile communication:
Up to 66 serial interfaces according to IEC 60870-5-101 / 103
LAN / WAN communication according to IEC 60870-5-104
LAN communication according to IEC 61850
Various third-party protocols possible
Easy engineering with SICAM TOOLBOX II:
Object-oriented data model
Creation of open-loop and closed-loop control application
programs according to IEC 61131-3
All engineering tasks can also be carried out remotely
Plug and play for spare parts:
Storage of parameters and firmware on a flash card
Spare part exchange does not require additional loading with
SICAM TOOLBOX II

Open system architecture:

Modular, open and technology-independent system structure
System-consistent further development and therefore an
innovative and future-proof product
Scalable redundancy:
Component redundancy
Doubling of processing / communication elements
The intelligent terminal SICAM TM, EMIC and MIC:
Direct connection of actuators and sensors with wire crosssections up to 2.5 mm2
Can be located remotely up to 200 m
Binary input / output also for DC 110 / 220 V
Assembly on 35 mm DIN rail
Versatile communication capability
With SICAM AK, a variety of media can be utilized for local and
remote communication. (wire connections, FO, radio, dial-up
traffic, GSM, GPRS, WAN, LAN, field bus etc.)
Through the simple installation of serial interface modules, in
total up to 66 communication interfaces are possible in one
SICAM AK, whereby a different individual protocol can be used
for each interface.
For standard communication protocols according to IEC 608705-101 / 103 / 104 and IEC 61850 are implemented.
Besides the standard protocols there are also a variety of thirdparty protocols available (DNP3, Modbus etc.).
Simple process interfacing
In addition to the central acquisition and output of process
signals within an SICAM AK mounting rack, it is possible to use
SICAM RTUs peripheral elements (fig. 6.3-14).
An essential feature of the SICAM RTUs peripheral elements is
the efficient and simple interfacing possibility of the process
signals. This takes place on so-called I / O modules, which are
distinguished through a robust casing, a secure contact as well
as solid electronics. The I / O modules are lined up in rows. The
contact takes place during the process of latching together,
without any further manipulation. Thereby each module remains
individually exchangeable.
A clearly arranged connection front with LEDs for the status
display ensures clarity locally. The structure of the terminals
enables a direct sensor / actuator wiring without using intermediate terminal blocks with wire cross-sections up to 2.5 mm2.
Modules for binary inputs and outputs up to DC 220 V open
further saving potentials at the interface level.
Depending on the requirements, the I / O modules can be fitted
with either an electrical bus or an optical bus, through which the
peripheral signals can be acquired as close as possible to the point
of origin. In this way, broad cabling can be reduced to a minimum.
Fig. 6.3-14: SICAM RTU family
353

Easy engineering
An essential aspect in the overall economical consideration are
the costs that occur for the creation, maintenance and service.
For this, the reliable SICAM TOOLBOX II is used.
Object orientation:
The object orientation makes it possible to also utilize the
same characteristics of same-type primary-technology units
and operational equipment (e.g., disconnectors, circuitbreakers, feeders etc.) for the configuration. The close
coupling with the design tool ensures the consistent, uniform
documentation of the entire plant through to circuit diagram.
Through this, considerable rationalization results with
engineering.
Open-loop and closed-loop control according to IEC 61131-3:
Open-loop and closed-loop control application programs are
created by means of CAEx plus according to IEC 61131-3, a
standard that is generally accepted and recognized in the
market. As a result, the training periods are reduced
considerably.
All engineering tasks can also be carried out remotely:
All engineering tasks, from the system diagnostic through to
the online test, can also be performed remotely with the
SICAM TOOLBOX II. For this, a separate communication link
between SICAM TOOLBOX II and SICAM AK is not necessary:
Every available communication interface can be used. Using
further automation units of SICAM TM, AK or BC, the
SICAM TOOLBOX II can be remotely positioned over an
arbitrary number of hierarchies.
The access to the engineering data is fundamentally protected

by a password.
Plug and play for spare parts
All data of an automation unit such as firmware and parameters are stored non-volatile centrally on an exchangeable flash
card. With a restart of the automation unit, and also with
a restart of individual modules, all necessary data are automatically transferred from the flash card to all CPUs and modules.
Consequently, with the exchange of modules, new loading is no
longer required, since new modules obtain all data from the
memory card. With the replacement of spare parts, plug and
play becomes a reality: No special tool is required, even loading
is no longer necessary.
Thereby, work during a service operation is reduced to a minimum.
Open system architecture
The basis for this automation concept is a modular, open and
consequently technology-independent system architecture for
processing, communication and peripherals (multi-processor
system, firmware).
Standardized interfaces between the individual elements again
permit, even with further developments, the latest state of
technology to be implemented, without having to modify the
existing elements. In this way, a longevity of the product and
354
consequently investment security and continuity can be

ensured.
Every board and every module on which a firmware can run,
forms, together with the function-determining firmware, one
system element.
The adaptation to the specific requirements of the application is
achieved through the individual configuration and through the
loading of standard firmware and parameters. Within their
defined limits, the parameters thereby not only influence the
behavior of the firmware functions, but also that of the hardware functions. With that, for all module types, all mechanical
parameter settings are omitted, such as e.g., the changing of
jumpers or loads, thus enabling not only the online change, but
also a consistent documentation of the set parameters by the
SICAM TOOLBOX II as well as a simplified storage.
SICAM TM (fig. 6.3-15)
SICAM TM is designed especially for easy installation and powerful application. Due to consequent development it fits optimally both for automation and telecontrol systems.
An essential feature of SICAM TM is its efficient and simple way
of interfacing to the process signals. This is accomplished by
so-called I / O modules boasting a robust housing, reliable contacting, and sound electronics. The I / O modules are arranged
side-by-side. Contact between them is established as soon as
they engage with one another, without requiring any further
manual intervention. Even so, it is still possible to replace every
single module separately.
A clearly structured connection front featuring status indicator
LEDs makes sure that things at the site remain clear and transparent. The structure of the terminals permits direct
sensor / actuator wiring without requiring the use of intermediate terminals.
The I / O modules may, depending on the requirements, be
equipped with either an electrical or an optical bus, whereby the
peripheral signals can be acquired very close to their point of
origin. Consequently, wide cabling can be reduced to a minimum.
SICAM TM is highlighted by the following future-oriented
features:
Modular, open and technology-independent system structure
Direct periphery coupling without intermediate terminals
Software parameter setting (hardware and software)
Online parameter modification
LEDs for process and operating conditions
Simplified connection handling by intelligent terminals
35 mm international standard profile rails
Secured internal communication over all bus systems
Little training needed
Data storage via multi media card (plug and play for spares)
Periodical processing and creation of automation functions
carried out with the tool CAEx.plus

Spontaneous processing supports the processing- and

communication-orientated telecontrol functions and includes:
Parameterizable telecontrol processing of the periphery
Change monitoring, signal creation and time-stamping of the
event data of the periodical processing
Timely decoupling of the signal and prioritized transfer with
the aid of a deterministic priority algorithm
Prioritization of messages
Energy metering value collection
Extended temperature range ( 25 C to + 65 C / 13 to 149 F)
High EMC (electromagnetic compatibility)
Increased electric strength (class 2)
System architecture
A SICAM TM forms an automation unit of the SICAM RTU family
and is constituted of the following components:
Master control element
Modular, expandable and detachable peripheral elements
Protocol elements for communications, mountable on the
master control element (fig. 6.3-16).
Fig. 6.3-16: SICAM TM mounted on 35 mm DIN rails
Process control system
SICAM TOOLBOX II
SICAM TM Zentralgert
Local input / output
Central processing
NTP
IEC 60870-5-104
SICAM TM
Data node
Front end
Gateway
IEC 60870-5-104
IEC 60870-5-103
SICAM TM Station control unit

Process coupling (serial, wide)
Node function
Automatic functions
IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-104
IEC 60870-5-101
SICAM TM-FW-Unterstation
Local processing
Decentralized acquisition
SICAM RTUs
SICAM TM
Turbine controller
Power plant management
Automation & control
SICAM RTUs
SIPROTEC / IEDs
Fig. 6.3-15: SICAM TM system architecture: connection of up to 16 peripheral elements via bus interface (electrical)
355

Master control unit

The master control element forms the heart of the SICAM TM
automation module. Process input and output is connected
externally via peripheral elements. The communication interfaces can be fitted directly onto the master control element.
Functions of the master control element:
Communication with peripheral elements via the serial
Ax 1703 peripheral bus
Open / closed-loop control functions with a user program
created freely according to IEC 61131-3, e.g., in function
diagram technology
Parameterizable telecontrol functions
Time management and time synchronization via minute pulse,
serial time signal (DCF77 / GPS-receiver), serial communication
link, NTP server via LAN / WAN
Communication via the mountable protocol elements
Engineering by means of SICAM TOOLBOX II
Storage of parameters and firmware on a flash card
The master control element provides the open- / closed-loop
functions and / or the parameterizable telecontrol function, as
well as the node function for the communication via serial
interfaces and LAN / WAN. Therefore, it also serves as a centrally
coordinating element for all system functions and all internal
and integral concepts.
This architecture ensures

deterministic behavior of the open / closed-loop control
function with guaranteed reaction times,
autonomous behavior (e.g., in the case of communication
failure), and
integration of the telecontrol functionality (spontaneous
processing and spontaneous communication) as well as the
open / closed-loop control functions (periodical processing and
periodical communication with the periphery) into one
common automation device.
To connect peripheral elements to the master control element, a
bus interface module must be arranged side by side with the
master control element.
For this purpose,
the master control element has a 9-pin D-SUB socket
on its right side, and the
bus interface module has a 9-pin D-SUB connector
on its left side.
Up to 2 bus interface modules can be attached to one master
control element.
Up to 14 peripheral elements can be connected to a master
control element
356
Fig. 6.3-17: Peripheral element
Peripherals
A peripheral element is constituted of
1 power supply module,
1 peripheral control module, and
up to 8 I / O modules (fig. 6.3-17)
The respective data sheets document how many I / O modules
may actually be used per peripheral element and in what order
they can be used.
A key feature of SICAM TM is that it provides for the efficient and
simple connection of the process signals. This is done at the I / O
modules standing out for a robust housing, reliable contacting,
and sound electronics.
The I / O modules are added side by side to the peripheral control
module. Contact is established as soon as they engage with one
another, without requiring any further manual intervention.
Even so, every single I / O module can still be exchanged separately and mounted on a DIN rail. It may be installed horizontally
or vertically.
Removable terminals (I / O connectors) are used for the simple
handling of modules when they are to be mounted or
exchanged. Since the terminals carry the wiring, no connections
need to be disconnected when devices are exchanged.
To interface peripheral elements to the master control element,
a bus interface module must be fitted on the side of the master
control element. Using simple, standardized USB cables, the
peripheral control modules are connected to the bus interface
module, thereby reducing the assembly effort required for their
connection to a minimum.
The Ax 1703 peripheral bus permits the secured, serial, insystem communication between the master control element and
the peripheral elements. Serial communication also renders it
possible to detach individual or all peripheral elements via
optical links up to 200 m from the master, with full system
functionality remaining intact.

Functions of the peripheral control module:

Secured data exchange with the master control element
Secured data exchange with the connected I / O modules via
the TM bus (Terminal Module Bus)
Monitoring of the connected I / O modules
Preprocessing of the input and output signals
Functions of the I / O modules:
Acquisition and output of binary and analog process signals,
Secured data exchange with the peripheral control element via
the TM bus
The communication between the I / O modules and the peripheral control module takes place via the TM bus according to the
master / slave method, with the I / O modules being the slaves.
By arranging the various modules side by side, contact will be
established automatically throughout the TM bus so that no
additional wiring is required.
Communication
The communication function is used for the exchange of data
and thus for the transmission of messages via protocol elements to other automation units or control systems.
The hardware for the protocol elements is serial interface modules (SIMs), which can be mounted on the master control element. On one master control element, up to 2 SIMs can be
mounted.
ferent communication protocols can be allocatedfreely. The

option of automation functions roundsout the range of functionality of the SICAM EMIC.
Integrated Web server for simple engineering
Keeping the engineering process as simple as possible was a top
priority with the SICAM EMIC the master control element has
an integrated Web server for configuration, diagnostics and
testing, so that no special tools or additional licenses are
needed. The tool is already integrated in SICAM EMIC and is
operated with a standard Web browser. Engineering, diagnostics
and testing of the SICAM EMIC can also be carried out with the
proven SICAM TOOLBOX II, the integrated engineering tool for
the entire SICAM RTU family. SICAM EMIC puts everything on
one card and receives the parameterizing data via a flash card.
Consequently, the correct parameters are always available locally
and there is no need to load data from a PC. This makes
exchanging devices during servicing a straightforward Plug &
Play operation, and it is very simple to transfer configuration
data to the replacement device with the flash card. For this
reason, and because of the comprehensive remote diagnostics
options, downtimes can be reduced to a minimum.
Thanks to its node functionality, SICAM EMIC has many different
potential applications. SICAM EMIC can be used as an ordinary
telecontrol substation with any kind of communication to a
control center. If SICAM EMIC doesnt offer adequate signal
scope, additional SICAM EMIC systems can be connected. Freely
programmable application programs for local control functions
complete the all-round versatility of the SICAM EMIC.
A serial interface module features:

Two serial communication interfaces, or
one LAN communication interface (Ethernet) plus optional
serial interface, or
one Profibus interface (DP master)
Since a communication interface corresponds to one protocol
element, a total of up to 4 protocol elements can be used for
each SICAM TM. This way, a multitude of communication
options is available.
SICAM EMIC (fig. 6.3-18)
As the logical consequence of these demands, SICAM EMIC
(Terminal Module SICAM enhanced microcontrol) represents the
expansion of the provenproduct SICAM MIC. SICAM EMIC is a
low-cost, flexible and modular telecontrol station, and is part of
the proven SICAM RTU family. The hardware consists of a master
control element and various I/O modules, and is designed for
DIN railmounting. The proven I/O modules can be used and
fitted on all products in the SICAM RTU family.
The master control element is used for interfacing and supplying
the I/O modules and provides three communication interfaces
(1 Ethernet and 2 serial) to meet a wide range of requirements. Complete flexibility is ensured here as well, becausedifFig. 6.3-18: SICAM EMIC the new member of the proven SICAM RTU
family
357

Highly flexible options for communication

to the control center
Multi-point traffic
External data transmission equipment can be connected
via the V.28 interface for multi-point traffic transmission.
Dial-up traffic
A wide range of connection-oriented trans-mission media
(analog, ISDN, GSM, TETRA) are supported as standard for
dial-up traffic as well.
LAN/WAN
IEC 60870-5-104/DNPi communication based on Ethernet
TCP/IP is used for communication via LAN/WAN networks.
SICAM EMIC the system in detail
Functions of the master control element:
Central processing functions
Storing of the parameters and the firmware on a flash card
Interfacing and supplying of the I/O modules
3 communication interfaces, with different individual
communication protocols (IEC 60870-5-101, 103, 104,
Modbus, DNP 3.0, other protocols on request)
SICAM CMIC
Existing equipment has to be used more extensively and efficiently to meet the growing economic demands. For this reason,
small network stations are increasingly becoming automated
and integrated into existing network control systems. The
SICAM CMIC device combines all the monitoring and control
functions required (fig. 6.3-19, fig. 6.3-20).
Device characteristics
Communication interfaces and protocols
2 x Ethernet LAN TCP/IP10/100BASE-TX for communication and
engineering
1 x RS-232, 1 x RS-485 (galvanically isolated)
IEC 60870-5-101/-103/-104, Modbus
IEC 61850 client & server
SNMP V3
Further protocols on request
Operation and display
Local operation with 4 function keys and display (128x96
pixels)
Power, ready and error LED, status LEDs of communication
interfaces
Real time clock
+/- 2 ppm, maintenance-free, buffered, time synchronization
via SNTP (Network Time Protocol), automatic adjustment to
daylight saving time
Electromagnetic compatibility
IEC 60870-2-1, IEC 61010, IEC 60255-5, IEC 61000-4, EN
55022, CE marking
Auxiliary voltage
DC 18 - 72 V
Applications
All the options offered by the SICAM CMIC device can be roughly
subdivided into the following three applications:
Monitoring: The first stage focuses on the monitoring of
stations to enable rapid fault localization and high availability.
Telecontrol: The second stage involves switchgear telecontrol
in addition to monitoring, thus minimizing downtime. Thanks
to this application, fault isolation and power supply restoration
of de-energized network sections are no longer difficult tasks
for power supply utilities.
Load flow control: In the third stage, the effects of
decentralized power feed-ins are managed via automation.
Network losses can be in this way significantly reduced.
The SICAM CMIC device is designed for harsh environmental
conditions and can be used in unheated, small local network
stations, as it has a high degree of electromagnetic compatibility
and is intended for the temperature range from -40 C to +70 C.
If the number of integrated I/O is not sufficient, SICAM CMIC can
be expanded with up to six proven SICAM I/O modules.
Communication
The communication to the control center is possible in several
ways and a multitude of protocols. It doesnt make any difference whether via Multi-Point Traffic, Dial-Up Traffic or LAN/WAN/
GPRS/UMTS.
Fig. 6.3-19: SICAM CMIC
358

Inputs/outputs
12 galvanically isolated digital inputs (24-60 VDC)
8 digital outputs
Temperature range:
From -40C to +70C (basic unit)
From -25C to + 70C (SICAM I/O module)
Housing specification (basic unit)
Plastic housing for DIN rail mounting
Dimensions: 128 x 124 x 123 mm (W / H / D)
Protection class: IP20, IP40 front
Special features
Integrated web server for configuration and diagnostics
Data storage via SD memory card (storage of parameters and
device firmware)
Freely programmable user programs according to
IEC 61131-3
Future security standard (BDEW white paper conformity and
integrated crypto chip)
www.siemens.com/sicam
Control system
NTP
IEC 60870-5-104
Ethernet connection, telecontrol

protocol IEC 60870-5-104
6
SICAM
FCM
MS
NS
SICAM
CMIC
RS 485 connection Modbus RTU
SICAM P850/855
Sample configuration:
SECONDARY SUBSTATION
Fig. 6.3-20: SICAM CMIC with expansion modules in operation
359
6.4 Power Quality and

Measurements
6.4.1 Introduction
Power quality
Electrical supply is one of the most essential basic services

supporting an industrial society. Electricity consumers require
this basic service:
To be available all the time (i.e. a high level of reliability)
To enable all consumers electrical equipment to work safely
and satisfactorily (i.e. a high level of power quality).
The quality of the electricity supply provided to final customers

results from a range of quality factors, for which different sectors of the electricity industry are responsible. Quality of service
in the electrical supply has a number of different dimensions,
which can be grouped under three general headings: commercial relationships between a supplier and a user, continuity of
supply, and voltage quality.
Voltage quality
Voltage quality, also termed power quality (PQ), covers a variety
of characteristics in a power system. Chief among these is the
quality of the voltage waveform. There are several technical
standards defining voltage quality criteria, but ultimately quality
is determined by the ability of customers equipment to perform
properly. The relevant technical phenomena are: variations in
frequency, fluctuations in voltage magnitude, short-duration
voltage variations (dips, swells, and short interruptions), longduration voltage variations (overvoltages or undervoltages),
transients (temporarily transient overvoltages), waveform
distortion, etc. In many countries voltage quality is regulated to
some extent, often using industry-wide accepted standards or
practices to provide indicative levels of performance.
To avoid the high cost of equipment failures, all customers must

make sure that they obtain an electricity supply of satisfactory
quality, and that their electrical equipment is capable of func-
Everybody is now aware of the effects of poor power quality but

few really have it under control. The levels of power quality
disturbances need to be monitored weekly, sometimes even
Supply quality
Quality is generally recognized as an important aspect of any
electricity supply service. Customers care about high quality just
as much as low prices. Price and quality are complementary.
Together, they define the value that customers derive from the
electrical supply service.
tioning as required even when small disturbances occur. In

practice, the voltage can never be perfect.
Vo
lt
Cu
rre
nt
dis
tu
rb
an
ce
ag
ed
ist
ur
ba
nc
es
Fig. 6.4-1: Power quality monitoring provides value to everyone to the local utility, to the consumer, to the local economy and to the
environment
360

6.4 Power Quality and Measurements
Who is responsible?
An interesting problem arises when the market fails to offer
products that meet the customers power quality needs. If a
customer cannot find equipment that is designed to tolerate
momentary power interruptions, the customer may, for
example, pressure the power supplier and the regulator to
increase the power quality of the overall distribution system. It
may be in the suppliers interest to help the customer address
the power quality and reliability problem locally.
daily, in order to trigger appropriate remedial measures before

severe consequences occur.
The power utility therefore has an interest in monitoring the
power quality, showing that it is acting correctly and improving
its know-how about the system. This ensures customer satisfaction by providing electricity with quality and reliability.
The availability and quality of power is of even greater concern
to distribution companies. The liberalization of the electricity
market has put them in the uncomfortable position of being
affected by other players actions. This situation has been stabilizing and power quality is becoming a top priority issue in the
restructuring process. With increasing customer awareness of
energy efficiency, it is clear that the quality of supply will be
receiving much attention.
The electrical supply system can be considered a sort of openaccess resource: In practice, almost everybody is connected to it
and can freely feed into it. This freedom is now limited by
standards, and / or agreements. In European countries, the
EN 50160 European standard is generally used as a basis for the
supply quality, often also termed the voltage or power quality.
There is currently no standard for the current quality at the point
of common coupling (PCC), but only for equipment. The interaction between the voltage and current makes it hard to draw a
line between the customer as receiving and the network
company as supplying a certain level of power quality. The
voltage quality (for which the network is often considered
responsible) and the current quality (for which the customer is
often considered responsible) affect each other in mutual interaction.
Most power quality problems directly concern the end user, or

are experienced at this level. End users have to measure the
power quality and invest in local mitigation facilities. However,
consumers often turn to the utility company, instead, and exert
pressure to obtain the required supply quality.
The EN 50160 power quality standard describes the main characteristics of the voltage at the customers supply terminals in
public low, medium, and, in the near future, high-voltage systems, under normal operating conditions.
Harmonic
Reactive power
Flicker
Unbalance
Harmonic
predistortion
Voltage dips/swells
Voltage variations
Interruption
Fig. 6.4-2: Utility and industries, both are responsible for voltage quality
361

Problem
Voltage signal
f1
f2
0.1
f1
time (s)
0.2
Description
Cause
Effect
Frequency distortions:
A frequency variation involves
variation in frequency above or
below the normally stable utility
frequency of 50 or 60 Hz
Start-up or shutdown of very

large item of consumer
equipment, e.g. motor
Loading and unloading of
generator or small co-generation
sites
Unstable frequency power
sources
Misoperation, data loss, system

crashes and damage to
equipment and motor
For certain kinds of motor load,
such as in textile mills, tight
control of frequency is essential
Supply interruption:
Planned or accidental total loss of
power in a specific area
Momentary interruptions lasting
from a half second to 3 seconds
Temporary interruptions lasting
from 3 seconds to 1 minute
Long-term interruptions lasting
longer than 1 minute
Switching operations attempting

to isolate an electrical problem
and maintain power to your area
Accidents, acts of nature, etc.
Fuses, actions by a protection
function, e.g. automatic recloser
cycle
Sensible processes and system

shutdown or damages
Loss of computer / controller
memory
Production losses or damage
Voltage dip / sag or swell:

Any short-term (half cycle to
3 seconds) decrease (sag) or
increase (swell) in voltage
Start-up or shutdown of very

large item of consumer
equipment, e.g. motor
Short circuits (faults)
Underdimensioned electrical
circuit
Utility equipment failure or utility
switching
Memory loss, data errors, dim or

bright lights, shrinking display
screens, equipment shutdown
Motors stalling or stopping and
decreased motor life
Voltage signal
f1 > f2
interruption
time up to
three minutes
0
0.1
0.2
time (s)
0.4
0.5
Voltage signal
short voltage dip
0.1
0.2
time (s)
0.4
0.5
Voltage signal
reduced voltage level
0.1
0.2
Voltage signal
reduced voltage level
0.1
0.2
time (s)
0.4
0.5
with repetition
time (s)
0.4
0.5
Voltage signal
Transients
0.02
0.04
time (s)
0.08
0.1
Supply voltage variations:

The line voltage amplitude may
Variation in the voltage level above
change due to normal changing
or below the nominal voltage under
load situations
normal operating conditions
Equipment shutdown by tripping

due to undervoltage or even
overheating and / or damage to
equipment due to overvoltage
Reduced efficiency or life of
electrical equipment
Flicker:
Impression of unsteadiness of
visual sensation induced by a light
stimulus, the luminance or spectral
distribution of which fluctuates
with time
Intermittent loads
Motor starting
Arc furnaces
Welding plants
Changes in the luminance of

lamps can result in the visual
phenomenon called flicker on
people, disturbing concentration,
causing headaches, etc.
Transient:
A transient is a sudden change in
voltage up to several thousand
volts. It may be of the impulsive or
oscillatory type (also termed
impulse, surge, or spike)
Notch:
This is a disturbance of opposite
polarity from the waveform
Utility switching operations,

starting and stopping heavy
equipment, elevators, welding
equipment static discharges, and
lightning
Processing errors
Data loss
Lock-up of sensitive equipment
Burned circuit boards
Noise:
Noise is caused by
This is an unwanted electrical signal
electromagnetic interference
of high frequency from other
from appliances, e.g. microwave,
equipment
radio and TV broadcasts, arc
Harmonic:
welding, heaters, laser printers,
Distortion is alteration of the pure
thermostats, loose wiring, or
sine wave due to non-linear loads
improper grounding
on the power supply
Harmonic distortion is caused by
non-linear loads
Table 6.4-1: Main problems with power quality
362
Noise interferes with sensitive

electronic equipment
It can cause processing errors and
data loss
Harmonic distortion causes
motors, transformers, and wiring
to overheat
Improper operation of breakers,
relays, or fuses

PQ
application
Regulatory
power
quality:
Explanatory
power
quality:
Description
Hardware
Measurements
Regulative PQ analysis approaches the

comparison of the quality of voltage or
power with recognized standards (e.g.
EN 50160) or with the quality defined
in power supply contracts. Periodically
produce compliance reports.
Power Quality
Recorders
(mainly
Class A)
Voltage quality parameters

(at least) at selected system
interfaces and customer
supply points (e.g.
EN 50160) for:
Power system performance
Planning levels
(i.e. internal objectives)
Specific customer contracts
Explanatory PQ analysis to provide an

understanding of what is going on in
particular cases, such as fault analysis,
to support the wider aspects of system
stability.
It is a process that aims to document
selected, observed power quality and
maximize the level of understanding,
possibly including knowledge of the
cause and consequences and possible
mitigation of power quality problems.
PQ recorders
Class A, S or B
and fault
recorder / PMU
V+Irms, waveforms, status of

binaries, power swing, MV
transformers, busbars and
loads
Table 6.4-2: Power quality applications
Power quality recording steps
Project
phases
Planning
activities
SICAM
Q80
support
System
installation
and
configuration
Defining PQ
objectives
Define PQ
measurement
objectives (regulative,
explanatory, or both)
and define the targets
Start
measuring
Evaluation
System
improvement
and/or
countermeasures
Define measuring
points and install
devices and systems
Automatic
notification or
systemic system
check-up for events or
standards violations
Power quality
compliance
Reporting and/or
event evaluation
Analysis of information,
controlling, action plan,
adaptation to standards,
comparison with
defined targets
Easy configuration
with SICAM Q80
Manager
Reliable
measurement
of defined quantities
Remote access for

automatic evaluation
Automatic report
generator in case
of limit valutation
Fig. 6.4-3: Power quality recording in five steps
Standards
The purpose of power quality indexes and measurement objectives is to characterize power system disturbance levels. Such
indexes may be defined as voltage characteristics and may be
stipulated in a Grid Code that applies to electrical system interfaces. Power quality Grid Codes make use of existing standards
or guidelines defining voltage and current indexes to be applied
to interfaces in low, medium, or high-voltage systems, for
example, EN 50160. This standard defines and describes the
main characteristics of the voltage at the system operators
supply terminals in public LV and MV power distribution systems.
Indexes for HV-EHV will also be described in the new edition of
EN 50160. Since electrical systems among regions and countries
are different, there are also many other regional or national

recommendations, mainly described in Grid Codes, defining
specific or adapted limit values.
These local standards are normally the result of practical voltage
quality measurement campaigns or the system experience,
which are mostly acquired through a permanent and deep
electrical system behavior know-how. Measuring according to
EN 50160 is, however, only part of the power quality measurement process. Another important standard for power quality
measurement is IEC 61000-4-30, which defines the measurement methodology.
363

EN 50160
VA
Guide to application of EN 50160
Range of the supply voltage variations

during 95 % of the supplying time
1.1 VA
0.9 VA
1.1 Vn (rms)
Vn (rms)
0.9 Vn (rms)
V(rms)
IEC 61000-4-30
Measurement of voltage quality
Other local power

quality standards
IEC 61000-4-7
Harmonics
IEC 61000-4-15
Flickermeter
Fig. 6.4-4: Overview of international and national standards for

power quality
Parameter
Supply voltage characteristics according to

EN 50160
Power frequency
LV, MV: mean value of fundamental measured

over 10 s 1 % (49.5 50.5 Hz) for 99.5 % of
week 6 % / + 4 % (47 52 Hz) for 100 % of
week
Voltage magnitude
variations
LV, MV: 10 % for 95 % of week, mean 10

minutes r.m.s. values (fig. 6.4-5)
Rapid voltage changes
Fig. 6.4-5: Illustration of a voltage dip and a short supply

interruption, classified according to EN 50160; VN
nominal voltage of the supply system (r.m.s.), VA
amplitude of the supply voltage, V(r.m.s.) the actual r.m.s.
value of the supply voltage
Odd harmonics
Not multiples of 3
Order h
Relative
voltage
(%)
Even harmonics
Multiples of 3
Order h
Relative
voltage
(%)
Order h
Relative
voltage
(%)
1.5
LV: 5 % normal 10 % infrequently Plt 1 for

95 % of week
MV: 4 % normal 6 % infrequently Plt 1 for
95 % of week
11
3.5
15
0.5
6 24
0.5
13
21
0.5
17
Majority: duration < 1 s, depth < 60 %. Locally

limited dips caused by load switching on LV:
10 50 %, MV: 10 15 %
19
1.5
23
1.5
Short interruptions of
supply voltage
LV, MV: (up to 3 minutes) few tens few

hundreds / year duration 70 % of them < 1 s
25
1.5
Long interruption of
supply voltage
LV, MV: (longer than 3 minutes)

< 10 50 / year
Temporary, power
frequency
overvoltages
LV: < 1.5 kV r.m.s. MV: 1.7 Vc (solid or

impedance earth) 2.0 Vc (unearthed or
resonant earth)
Transient overvoltages
LV: generally < 6 kV, occasionally higher; rise

time: s to ms
MV: not defined
Supply voltage
unbalance
LV, MV: up to 2 % for 95 % of week, mean 10

minutes r.m.s. values, up to 3 % in some
locations
Harmonic
voltage / THD
Harmonics LV, MV THD: 8
Interharmonic voltage
LV, MV: under consideration
Supply voltage dips
Table 6.4-3: Requirements according to EN 50160
364
Short supply
interruption
t < 3 min
Voltage dip, t > 10 ms
Table 6.4-4: Values of individual harmonic voltages at the supply

terminals for orders up to 25, given in percent of VN
From IEC 61000-4-30 also accuracy classes, Class A higher

accuracy and Class S lower accuracy are derived. In other
words, in a simple way, if the EN 50160 defines what to measure, the IEC 61000-4- 30 defines how to measure it. The end
result of a measurement process is expected to be fully automated, standard compliant documentation of all measurements.
Calculation of r.m.s. values after every half period is the touchstone of an IEC 61000-4-30 Class A measurement device. To defi
ne the range of normal voltage states, a hysteresis range is
specifi ed for event detection. SICAM Q80 meets the precision
requirements for a Class A measurement device according to the
IEC 61000-4-30 standard.

IEC 61000-4-30, Ed. 2, 2008-10:

Power Quality Measurement Methods: This standard defines the
methods for measurement and interpretation of results for
power quality parameters in AC supply systems.
Transmission
1
2
IEC 61000-4-15:1997 + A1:2003:

Flickermeter, Functional and Design Specifications: This section
of IEC 61000 provides a functional and design specification for
flicker measuring apparatus intended to indicate the correct
flicker perception level for all practical voltage fluctuation waveforms.
IEC 61000-4-7, Ed. 2, 2002-08:
General Guide on Harmonics and Interharmonics: This is a
general guide on harmonics and interharmonics measurements
and instrumentation, for power supply systems and equipment
connected thereto.
Subtransmission
Generation/
Distributed
generation
4
7
5
Distribution
LOAD
(industrial)
6
8
Low voltage
9
LOAD
Fig. 6.4-6: General system online diagram
Definition of a measuring point and power quality

measurement objectives
Power quality measurements address the aspect of power
performance by describing the quality of every individual interface in an electrical system and in the networks of its various
customers. Identifying, defining, profiling the power quality
measurement points are essential tasks in defining a power
quality project. However, the electrical system is dynamic by
nature, so optimizing the measuring points is a routine that is
developed by day-to-day learning. This may not help predict
changes, but will permit a more effective response to them.
Identification of measuring points
Measurement points may be located and defined as shown in
table 6.4-5.
Measuring power quality requires not only an effective choice of
measuring points but also defined objectives for the PQ analysis
at the measuring points.
We generally classify power quality monitoring as a mixture of
data gathering technologies classified by their purpose or application.
No.
Measurement points
Location
Transmission feeder (line

or transformer)
Possibly busbar
Generation
station / distributed
generation
Busbar, transformer or generator

connection
Subtransmission, line
supply
Busbar (e.g. where the busbar is

owned and operated by the
transmission company)
Subtransmission feeder
(line or transformer)
Remote line terminals (e.g. where

the lines are owned and operated
by the transmission company)
Distribution, line supply
Transformer secondary side or cable

to neighbors substation
Distribution feeder (line

or transformer)
Step-down transformers
Distribution load
Step-down transformers, (e.g.

where the transformers are owned
by the distribution company)
LV supply
Transformer of the distribution

company
LV load
Load or transformer at the

customer
Table 6.4-5: Measurement points and system location
365

6.4.2 SICAM P Power Meter

SICAM P is a power meter for panel mounting with graphic
display and background illumination, or for standard rail
mounting, used for acquiring and / or displaying measured values
in electrical power supply systems. More than 100 values can be
measured, including r.m.s. values of voltages (phase-to-phase
and / or phase-to-ground), currents, active, reactive and apparent
power and energy, power factor, phase angle, harmonics of
currents and voltages, total harmonic distortion per phase plus
frequency and symmetry factor, energy output, as well as
external signals and states.
SICAM P is available with mounting dimension of 96 mm 96
mm and can be ordered with or without display.
The SICAM P50 comes standard with two binary outputs, which
can be configured for energy counters, limit violations or status
signals. By ordering, SICAM P can be fitted with 1 additional
analog input or output modules. (Sample application SICAM P
fig. 6.4-8)
The unit is also able to trigger on settable limits. This function
can be programmed for sampled or r.m.s. values. SICAM P
generates a list of minimum, average and maximum values for
currents, voltages, power, energy, etc. lndependent settings for
currents, voltages, active and reactive power, power factor, etc.
are also possible. In case of a violation of these limits, the unit
generates alarms. Up to 6 alarm groups can be defined using
AND / OR for logical combinations. The alarms can be used to
increase counter values, to trigger the oscilloscope function, to
generate binary output pulses, etc.
Function overview
Measurement of voltage, current, active & reactive power,
frequency, active and reactive energy, power factor, symmetry
factor, voltage and current harmonics up to the 21st, total
harmonic distortion
Single-phase, three-phase balanced or unbalanced connection,
four-wire connection
Communications: PROFIBUS-DP, MODBUS RTU / ASCII or
IEC 60870-5-103, MODBUS RTU / ASCII (only SICAM P50 Series)
communication protocol
Simple parameterization via front key or RS485 communication
port using SICAM P PAR software
Graphic display with background illumination with up to 20
programmable screens
Real-time clock: Measured values and states will be recorded
with time stamps
1 MB memory management: The allocation of the nonvolatile
measurement memory is programmable
Recording and display of limit value violations and log entries.
Battery: Recordings like limit value violations or energy counter
values stay safely in the memory up to 3 months in case of a
blackout.
Applications
Power monitoring systems with SICAM P, a permanently installed
system, enables continuous logging of energyrelated data and
provides information on operational characteristics of electrical
systems. SICAM P helps identify sources of energy consumption
and time of peak consumption. This knowledge allows to allocate and reduce energy costs.
SICAM P 7KG775x
Option
Voltage
L1
L2
Binary
outputs
Auxiliary
power
Measuring inputs
Inputs/
outputs
Communication via
RS485
Terminal A
Current
L3
L1
L2
L3
W
N/-
Terminal F
Terminal E
B2
B1
N/+
Terminal H
Terminal G
DC: 24-250 V
AC:100-230 V
k
L1
l
k
L2
l
k
L3
RS485
N
PE
RS232
Parameterization
Fig. 6.4-7: Input / outputs for P50 Series
366
Master
station

The major application area is power monitoring and recording at

MV and LV level. The major information types are measured
values, alarms and status information.
SICAM P850
SICAM P850 (fig. 6.4-9) is a new multifunctional device and is
used to collect, display and transmit measured electrical variables such as AC current, AC voltage, power types, harmonics,
etc. The communications interfaces can be used to output the
measurands to a PC and the control center or display them on a
display.
Applications
SICAM P8505 device is used in single-phase systems, threephase
systems and four-phase systems (with neutral conductors). It is
used primarily in power utilities, but also in other industrial and
commercial applications. The web server integrated into the
device is used to configure the parameters and output measured
values via HTML pages on a connected PC / laptop. In devices
with displays, the parameters can also be configured with the
function keys on the front of the device, and the measured
values can be output to the display. The output variables can
also be transmitted to control or other systems such as
SICAM PQS V8.01 (planned) via the communications interfaces
(Ethernet, e.g., IEC 61850) in the form of digital data. (Sample
application SICAM P850 fig. 6.4-10)
Analog inputs
from transducers 020 mA
Analog outputs
Water
Flow rate, pressure, PH, etc.
Elec. quantities U, I, cos , f,

etc. (DC: 020/420 mA)
Gas
Flow rate, pressure, etc.
Energy metering
Binary outputs
Oil
Flow rate, pressure, etc.
Messages, limit-value
violations
Long-distance heading
Relay contacts
Electrical quantities
of other breakouts
Switch at limit-value
violations
Communication
Measured values and

electrical quantities can
be shown on different
screens and stored in
the memory
Digital inputs
All measured values can be

transmitted to a master station
via PROFIBUS DP or MODBUS
Messages, switch settings,

states
The measured values recorded
can be read out and evaluated
on the PC using the
SICAM P Manager software
Time synchronization
Fig. 6.4-8: SICAM P50 sample applications
Mean features
Use in the IT, TT and TN power systems
Ethernet communication via the Modbus TCP or IEC 61850
Edition 2 protocol; serial communication via Modbus RTU and
IEC 60870-5-103 via the RS485 interface is optional
External time synchronization via the Network Time
Protocol (NTP).
SICAM P850 system view
SICAM P850 can communicate flexibly with automation systems
and evaluation stations via open protocols such as IEC 61850
and Modbus TCP.
They are available directly from the device in the form of HTML
pages on a connected PC.
Fig. 6.4-9: SICAM P850
Evaluation station - control center
via NTP server
Ethernet:
Modbus TCP
or IEC 61850
Web server functions

HTML parameterization
Value display
Analysis
Field device level
Serial:
Modbus RTU or
IEC 60870-5-103
Fig. 6.4-10: Sample application SICAM P850
367

6.4.3 SICAM T Electrical

Measurement Transducer
The SICAM T is an digital measurement transducer (fig. 6.4-11)
that allows the measuring of electrical quantities in electrical
networks in a single unit. In industries, power plants and substations, transducers are especially used for measurand (e.g.
current, voltage, power, phase angle, energy or frequency)
assignment into further processing through analog outputs or
communication interface for precise control, notification or
visualization tasks.
Device type
Top-hat rail mounted device
Plastic case 96 mm 96 mm 100 mm /
3.7795 3.7795 3.9370 inch (W H D)
Degree of protection IP20.
Fig. 6.4-11: SICAM T electrical measurement transducer
Input and output circuits

4 inputs for alternating voltage measurements
3 inputs for alternating current measurements up to 10 A
continuous
4 optional DC analog outputs freely configurable:
Direct currents: 0 mA to 20 mA, 4 mA to 20 mA
and 20 mA to 20 mA
Direct voltages: 0 V to 10 V and 10 V to 10 V
individually programmable binary outputs.
4 x voltage
terminal
Terminal
block F
Terminal
block E
Terminal
block H
Communication
Ethernet: IEC 61850 or MODBUS TCP communication protocol
Optional serial RS485 interface that enables the device to
communicate via the MODBUS RTU or the IEC 60870-5-103
communication protocol.
4 x analog outputs
Current:
0 mA to 20 mA
4 mA to 20 mA and
20 mA to 20 mA
Max. AC 690 V
(phase-phase)
Max. AC 400 V
(phase-neutral)
Signalization LEDs
Automatically monitor the functions of the hardware, software
and firmware components.
Field level
4 x LEDs
Terminal
block K
Voltage:
0 V to 10 V and
-10 V to 10 V
3 x current
terminals
2 x binary outputs
AC 1 A
AC 5 A
AC 230 V or
DC 250 V
Power supply
DC 24-250 V
AC 100-230 V
IP addr button
Terminal
block G
RS 485 Serial
Modbus RTU / IEC
60870-5-103
Terminal
block J
Ethernet
Modbus TCP
10/100 Mbit/s
Terminal
block Z
Fig. 6.4-12: Block diagram SICAM T 7KG9661
1. RTU
2. 4 analog outputs
3. 4 analog outputs
4. Binary outputs
V, I
Control center
V, I
V, I
V, I
Alarms, measurements
and indications
Ethernet/MODBUS TCP or
IEC 61850 (7KG9662)
Serial: MODBUS RTU or IEC 60870-5-103 (optional)
Field device level

1
Fig. 6.4-13: SICAM T applications
368
Parameterization/
value display

Measurands
The following measurands can be recorded or calculated from
the measured quantities:
TRMS (True RMS) for alternating voltage and current
Active, reactive and apparent power
Active, reactive and apparent energy
Power frequency
Phase angle
Power factor and active power factor
Voltage and current unbalance
Mean value of the 3 phase voltages: Vavg
Mean value of the 3 phase currents: Iavg
For a common time basis when communicating with peripheral
devices and time stamping of the process data.
External time synchronization via Ethernet NTP
External time synchronization via field bus using the RTU or
the IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
Internal time synchronization via RTC (if external time
synchronization is not available).
Response time for analog and binary outputs
The faster response time of the analog and binary output is a
very important feature of SICAM T that enables a reliable reaction of the controlling applications. The response time of the
device is 120 ms at 50 Hz and 100 ms at 60 Hz.
Applications
Conversion and integration of measurands into substation
automation, protection or SCADA process via RTU and / or via
protocols IEC 61850 (for KG9662 variant), MODBUS TCP,
IEC 60870-5-103 for further control and / or monitoring tasks
Monitoring of lower voltage levels and heavy load control, e.g.
air conditioning and motors
Depending on the device type, the input circuits for voltage
measurement are either designed as voltage dividers or they
are galvanically isolated. Devices with galvanic isolation can be
used without voltage transformers in the power systems IT, TT
and TN. Devices with a voltage divider can also be used in
these power systems; for IT power systems, however, an
upstream voltage transformer is required.
369

6.4.4 Power Quality and Monitoring

SICAM Q80
Power quality is a complex issue. The voltage quality is affected
by all parties connected in the power system: power utilities of
transmission and distribution, power producers and consumers.
Inadequate power quality has an adverse effect on the dependability of loads in the power supply system, and can have serious
consequences. SICAM Q80 is a compact and powerful recorder
designed for utilities and industries to continuously monitor the
power quality for regulatory purposes (e.g., evaluation against
the standards) as well as event-based recordings for explanatory
purposes (e.g., wave shape recording), from the generation
plant to the last customer in the electrical supply chain.
With SICAM Q80, the quality of the power supply system can be
continuously monitored. This can be based on the quality criteria
defined in the European electricity supply system quality standard EN 50160 or other assessment criteria. Moreover, data that
are above or below the defined threshold values are stored and
can thus be used for a meaningful overall analysis. It provides
information that allows to see the whole electrical healthy of the
power system!
Application
Regulatory power quality application: measurement,
comparison and profiling of power quality parameters at the
individual electrical system interfaces: e.g., generation,
transmission, subtransmission and distribution systems.
Explanatory power quality application: disturbance recording
(e.g., waveform capture) support to understand the causes
and consequences of power quality problems.
Benefits
Customer satisfaction: Companies with a suitable power
quality monitoring system are proven to be more reliable
suppliers and users of energy.
Asset protection: Early identification of disturbances and active
response to them. Comprehensive information for enhancing
the visibility and control of assets at the edge of the grid.
In case of negotiations or disputes, power quality monitoring
provides evidences to align interests and to support
agreements between parts.
Quality of supply is in the interests of power utilities,
regulators, consumers and the environment.
Function overview
Measurement of continuous phenomena and disturbances
according to the necessary accuracy requirements, as stipulated
in IEC 61000-4-15, IEC 61000-4-7 and IEC 61000-4-30 (Class A).
370
Fig. 6.4-14: SICAM Q80 the quality recorder
Recording and evaluation

Voltage frequency: frequency deviation
Slow voltage variation: detection and monitoring of supply
interruption
Rapid voltage variations: voltage dips, voltage swells, rapid
voltage changes and voltage fluctuations (flicker)
Power line signaling superimposed on the supply voltage
Voltage waveshape: harmonics (up to the 50th harmonic) and
up to 10 interharmonics
Flexible value limit and event definition
Fault recording triggered by waveform and binary values
Comparison and reporting of power quality profile according
to EN 50160 or local standards.
Transients 1) recording till 17 microseconds for 60 Hz and
20 microseconds in 50 Hz networks.
1)
1. Option for transient recognition is OFF
a. Sampling rate is 10 kHz
b. Fault records with 10 kHz
2. Option for transient recognition is ON
a. Available for V3.X.
b. 2 sampling rates 10 kHz and 50 kHz
c. 10 kHz data to calculate all mean values, flicker etc.
d. 50 kHz only for U1, U2, U3 to detect transients. The fault records have a
sampling rate of 50 kHz.

Features
Suitable for monitoring single-phase, 3- and 4-wire power
systems (up to 1,000 Vrms)
4 voltage, 4 current, or 8 voltage measuring channels
Standard: 4 binary inputs, 4 binary outputs
Sampling rate 10 kHz for network analysis
Measurement accuracy 0.1 % of the range
High local storage capability: removable compact flash
(standard delivery 2 GB)
Enhanced data compression process (power quality data)
Automatic data transfer
Automatic comparison and reporting of the power quality
profile according to EN 50160 or your local standards
Automatic notification in case of a fault or violations by e-mail,
SMS, and fax
Export functions
Ethernet and modem communication interfaces for
parameterization, remote monitoring and polling
GPS / DCF-77 / IRIG-B and NTP for synchronization
Network trigger system
Simple operation, compact and robust design.
SICAM Q100
The SICAM Q100 multifunctional measuring device is used for
acquisition, visualization, evaluation and transmission of electrical measured variables such as alternating cur-rent, alternating voltage, frequency, power, harmonics etc. The acquisition, processing and accuracy of measured variables and events
are performed according to the IEC 61000-4-30 Class A power
quality measurement standard. The measured variables can be
output to a PC or system control via communication interfaces
or shown on a display. In addition to the monitoring function,
the SICAM Q100 all-in-one device provides a combined recording and evaluating function: measured values can be recorded in
parameterizable time intervals with various recorders such as
power quality and fault recorders. Long-time data and events are
evaluated directly in the device and displayed as a report
according to the power quality standards (e.g., EN 50160).
Application
The SICAM Q100 device is used in single-phase as well as in
three-wire and four-wire systems (with neutral conductor). The
device is applied wherever comprehensive meas-urement of
supply quality is necessary at power utilities as well as in
industry and trade sectors.
Central 1
Central 2
NTP synchronization
Ethernet
Substation 1
Substation 2
Ethernet
Ethernet
GPS synchronization
GPS synchronization
Fig. 6.4-15: Model configuration for a PQ monitoring system
Fig. 6.4-16: SICAM Q100 multifunctional measuring device
Benefits
Comprehensive acquisition of relevant network parame-ters
for early identification of supply quality problems.
Manufacturer-independent, comparable measured values
obtained by using the IEC 61000-4-30 Class A standard
measurement methods.
PQ reporting according to EN 50160 direct in web server.
Easy operation via integrated web server for parameterization,
diagnosis, evaluation and reporting.
Interoperability is guaranteed by using standard inter-faces
and standard protocols (IEC 61850, MODBUS TCP) and data
formats (PQDIF, Comtrade and CSV).
371

Device characteristics of SICAM Q100

Input measuring circuits
4x alternating voltage, 4x alternating current
Binary input / outputs
individually programmable binary inputs / outputs
Binary expansion (up to additional 12 inputs and 12 outputs)
by using SICAM I / O Unit devices
Measured variables
Measured value acquisition according to the IEC 61000-4-30
Class A power quality measurement standard
Mean value, event and fault recorder functionality
Load Profile and TOU (Time of use, 2 x Tariffs)
Power frequency, active, reactive and apparent power, power
factor and active power factor, phase angle
Alternating voltage and alternating current harmonic up to the
63rd order
Ethernet: MODBUS TCP, IEC 61850 Edition 2
MODBUS Master and Gateway function for RS485 de-vices (as
Switcher 3WL, PAC3x00, SICAM P50)
Full graphic display, operation via 4 function keys
Integrated web server to interact with PC via HTML pages
Via Ethernet: NTP client (Network Time Protocol)
Auxiliary voltage
DC 24 250 V and
AC 110 230 V, 50 / 60 Hz
Housing specification
Compact dimensions: 96 x 96 x 100 mm (W / H / D)
Special features
PQ reporting according to EN 50160 and CBEMA direct over
HTML web server
Evaluation of events directly in HTML via COMTRADE
Viewer / SIGRA Plugin
Flexible data export in the PQDIF, COMTRADE and CSV format
Memory capacity of 2 GB for storage of the recorder data for
years of power quality data
MODBUS Master and Gateway function
372
SICAM P855
The SICAM P855 multifunctional device is used to collect, display
and transmit measured electrical variables such as AC current,
AC voltage, power types, harmonics, etc. The measurands and
events are collected and processed according to the Power
Quality Standard IEC 61000-4-30. The communications interfaces can be used to output the measurands to a PC and the
control center or display them on a display.
In addition to the monitoring function, the SICAM P855 all-inone device also provides a combined recording and evaluation
function. It can record measurands at programmable time
intervals, using a wide range of recorders, such as power quality
and fault recorders. Long-term data and events are evaluated
directly in the device according to the power quality standards
(such as EN 50160) and output as reports.
Applications
SICAM P855 device is used in single-phase systems, threephase
systems and four-phase systems (with neutral conductors). They
are used primarily in power utilities but also in other industrial
and commercial applications.
The web server integrated into the device is used to configure
the parameters and output measured values via HTML pages on
a connected PC / laptop. In devices with displays, the parameters
can also be configured with the function keys on the front of the
device, and the measured values can be output to the display.
The output variables can also be transmitted to control or other
systems such as SICAM PQS V8.01 (planned) via the communications interfaces (Ethernet, e.g., IEC 61850) in the form of digital
data.
Feautres
Robust and compact design according to IEC 62586-1, Class S
(leading standard)
Use of SICAM P850 / P855 in the IT, TT and TN power systems
Ethernet communication via the Modbus TCP or IEC 61850
Edition 2 protocol; serial communication via Modbus RTU and
IEC 60870-5-103 via the RS485 interface is optional
External time synchronization via the Network Time Protocol
(NTP)
The measurands and events are detected according to the
Power Quality Standard IEC 61000-4-30. The measurement
system corresponds to Class A. In terms of functional scope,
measuring ranges and accuracy, SICAM P850 / P855 are Class S
devices.
Additional measurands: Minimum / mean / maximum values,
flicker, event detection, voltage dips (Udip), voltage
interruptions and overvoltages (swells)
Events are evaluated directly in HTML via the integrated web
server
2-GB memory for recording recorder data
Evaluations: Power quality reports and online viewer output
directly on the HTML page
Data export: PQDIF and COMTRADE data.

Device characteristics
Input measuring circuits
4x alternating voltage, 3x alternating current (max. 10A)
Measured variables
True RMS alternating voltage and alternating current up to the
100th harmonic
Power frequency, active, reactive and apparent power, power
factor and active power factor, phase angle
Alternating voltage and alternating current unbalance
Alternating voltage and alternating current harmonic up to
the 40th order
THD (total harmonic distortion) of alternating voltage and
alternating current
Ethernet: MODBUS TCP, IEC 61850 Edition 2
Serial: Modbus RTU, IEC 60870-5-103
Full graphic display including operation via 4 function keys
4 LEDs for state and system messages
Integrated web server to interact with PC via HTML pages
Fig. 6.4-17: SICAM P855 multifunctional device
Via Ethernet: SNTP client (Simple Network Time Protocol)
Via fieldbus
Internal Real Rime Clock (RTC)
Auxiliary voltage
DC 24 250 V
AC 110 230 V, 50 / 60 Hz
Housing specification
Plastic housing for DIN rail mounting, optional panel
mounting, protection class max. IP51
Dimensions: 96 x 96 x 100 mm (W / H / D)
Special features
Measured value acquisition according to the IEC 61000-4-30
power quality measurement standard including flicker
Automatic PQ reporting according to EN 50160
Mean value, event and fault recorder functionality
Data export in the PQDIF and COMTRADE format
Memory capacity of 2 GB for storage of the recorder data
Evaluation of events directly in HTML via the integrated web
server
373

6.4.5 SIPROTEC 7KE85

Fault Recorder, Measurement and
Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
SIPROTEC 7KE85 fault recorder is designed to suit present and
future requirements in a changing energy sector. Powerful and
reliable monitoring combined with flexible engineering and
communication features provide the basis for maximum supply
reliability.
Commissioning and maintenance work can be completed safely,
quickly and thus cost-effectively with high-performance test
functions. Due to a modular design, the SIPROTEC 5 fault
recorder can always be flexibly adapted to specific requirements.
Application
Stand-alone stationary recorder for extra-high, high and
medium-voltage systems
Component of secondary equipment of power plants and
substations or industrial plants
Function overview
Integration to SIPROTEC 5 family
Consistent HW concept
Variety of extension modules
DIGSI as configuration tool
Choice of functionality via functional points
Disturbance recorder class S for applications in substations at
MV / HV / EHV level and in power plants
1 FastScan recorder
2 SlowScan recorder
5 Continuous recorder
Power quality recorder class S according to EN50160 for
analysis and recording / archiving of power quality problems of
all power applications
Event recorder for binary signals for observation of the status
of various primary components like circuit-breakers,
disconnectors, etc.
PMU according to IEEE C37.118.
Communication with IEC 61850
Sampling frequencies programmable between 1kHz and 16KHz
Time synchronization via IRIG B / DCF77 / SNTP
Internal mass storage:
12 GByte ring buffer
Health monitoring / Lossless data compression
Flexible routing
Any assignment of a measured value to each recorder
Free combination of measuring groups for power calculation
Recorded quality bits
Quality statement for each recorded value + monitoring of
channel quality in SIGRA or SIC AM PQ Analyzer
Recording of and triggering on GOOSE values
Creating of flexible trigger conditions with CFC (Continuous
Function Chart)
Auxiliary functions for simple tests and comissioning
Test recorder for commissioning and system test
*in preparation
374
Fig. 6.4-18: Fault Recorder SIPROTEC 7KE85 (1 / 3 device with 1 / 6

expansion module and LED operation panel)
Fig. 6.4-19: Rear view of a basic module

Application as Phasor Measurement Unit

With the fault recorder SIPROTEC 7KE85, the function "Phasor
Measurement Unit" (PMU) is available like in the past.
V1
1
Fig. 6.4-20 shows the principle. A measurement of current and

voltage with regard to amplitude and phase is performed with
PMUs on selected substations of the transmission system. Due to
the high-precision time stamps assigned to these phasor quantities by the PMU, these measured values can be displayed
together at a central analysis point. This provides a good overview of the condition of the system stability, and enables the
display of dynamic processes, e.g., power swings.
Substation 1
V2
2
Substation 4
Substation 2
Substation 3
If the option Phasor Measurement Unit is selected, the devices

determine current and voltage phasors, mark them with highprecision time stamps, and send them to a phasor data concentrator together with other measured values (frequency, rate of
frequency change) via the communication protocol IEEE
C37.118, see fig. 6.4-21.
V3
3
Fig. 6.4-20: Principle of distributed phasor measurement
By means of the synchrophasors and a suitable analysis program

(e.g., SIGUARD PDP) it is possible to determine power swings
automatically and to trigger alarms, which are sent, for example,
to the network control center.
Intelligent PMU placement is crucial for cost saving and for an
optimum observability of the dynamic system behavior.
Optimum PMU placement studies are offered as consulting
services from Siemens PTI (see Chapter 9.1).
ICCP to control center

Region 1
User interface 1
Region 2
User interface 2
PDC 2
PDC 1
IEEE C37.118
to substation automation system
PMU 1
PMU 2
PMU 3
PDC = Phasor Data Concentrator

PMU = Phasor Measurement Unit
Fig. 6.4-21: Connection of 3 Phasor Measurement Units with two Phasor Data Concentrators (PDCs) SIGUARD PDP
375

QB1
QB2
QA1 52
V4
MP
V-1ph 1
FG PMU
QB9
I1
I2
I3
V-1ph
MP
V-3ph
I-3ph 1
I-3ph
I4
V1
V2
V3
Phasor calculation for

V and I
MP
Comm.
IEEE C37.118
V-3ph 1
Line
FG
MP
PMU
Function group
Measuring point
Phasor Measurement Unit
Fig. 6.4-22: Application example
When the PMU function is used, a PMU function is created in

the device, see fig. 6.4-22. This function group calculates the
phasors and analog values, sets the time stamps, and sends the
data to the selected Ethernet interface with the protocol IEEE
C37.118. There they can be received, stored and processed by
one or more clients. Up to three client IP addresses can be
allocated in the device.Information for project planning with
SIPROTEC 7KE85
Typical applications of SIPROTEC 7KE85

Monitoring the power feed
Monitoring the infeed from a high-voltage network via 2
transformers on two busbars of the medium-voltage
network. This application is relevant for the infeeds of
municipal utilities companies and medium to large industrial
enterprises (fig. 6.4-23).
Monitoring the infeed (fig. 6.4-24)
The secondary components of high or medium-voltage systems

can either be accommodated in a central relay room or in the
feeder-related low-voltage compartments of switchgear panels.
For this reason, the SIPROTEC 7KE85 system has been designed
in such a way as to allow both centralized or decentralized
installation.
Fault monitoring and power quality in power distribution

networks
Power supply companies with distribution networks are not only
suppliers but also consumers, particularly of renewable energy.
Therefore, it is important to monitor power quality both at the
transfer points of critical industrial enterprises and at the power
supply points of the suppliers (fig. 6.4-25).
The SIPROTEC 7KE85 can be delivered in different widths,

depending on the selected IO combinations. For example the
small version is favorable if measurands of only one feeder are
to be considered (8 analog and 8 binary signals).This often
applies to high-voltage plants where each feeder is provided
with an extra relay kiosk for the secondary equipment. In all
other cases the extension with more analogue und binary
signals via IOs is more economical.The modular structure with a
variety of interface and communication modules provides a
maximum of flexibility.
376
Monitoring power quality in an industrial enterprise

All industrial enterprises with sensitive productions need to
document the power quality at the transfer point, and thus
document any claims for damages against the suppliers. For
internal control, it is important to monitor individual breakouts
with regard to cost-center accounting and specific quality features (fig. 6.4-26).

Solution 2:
Solution 1:
Evaluated with:
Evaluated with:
SICAM PQS
PQ Analyzer
SICAM PQS
PQ Analyzer
SIPROTEC
7SK85
SIPROTEC
7SK85
Fig. 6.4-23: Monitoring the power feed
Fig. 6.4-24: Monitoring the infeed
220 kV
Solution:
SIPROTEC
7KE85
Evaluated with:
SICAM PQS
PQ Analyzer
110 kV
SIPROTEC
7KE85
20 kV
SICAM Q80
Industrial enterprise
SICAM Q80
Municipal utilities companies
SICAM Q100
Wind energy
Fig. 6.4-25: Monitoring the quality in power distribution systems
Solution:
20 kV
SIPROTEC
7KE85
Evaluated with:
SICAM PQS
PQ Analyzer
400 V
SICAM Q80
Welding shop
SICAM Q80
Press shop
SICAM Q100
Paint shop
Fig. 6.4-26: Monitoring the power quality in an industrial enterprise
377

6.4.6 SICAM PQS Fault Recorder and

Power Quality Analysis Software
Additionally automatic distance to fault calculation and report

generation will be executed after an event was recognized in the
power supply system.
SICAM PQS offers a variety of applications and evaluation tools

enabling the operator to carry out detailed fault record analysis
by using time diagrams with curve profiles, vector diagrams etc.
The individual diagrams can, of course, be adjusted to individual
requirements with the help of variable scaling and zoom functions. The different quantities measured can be immediately
calculated by marking a specific point in a diagram with the
cursor (impedance, reactance, active and reactive power, harmonics, peak value, r.m.s. value, symmetry, etc.).
The power quality analysis is based on the applicable standards

EN 50160 and IEC 61000 or on any user-defined Grid Code, and
uses an effective reporting tool that provides automatic information about any deviations from the defined limit value.
The data transmission is preferably effected via WAN (Wide Area
Network) or telephone network. Depending on the power system
which has to be monitored the SICAM PQS system can be aligned
accordingly. The modular structure of SICAM PQS permits the use
of individual functional packages perfectly matched the requirements. Furthermore the SICAM PQS can also easily expand to
create a station control system for combined applications. The
program fully supports server / client system architecture.
Highlights
Vendor-neutral integration of fault recorders, protection
devices and power quality equipment via standard protocols or
COMTRADE / PQDIF import
Quick overview of system quality through the chronological
display of the PQ index
Seamless documentation of power system quality
Automatic notification in case of violation of thresholds of a
predefined Grid Code.
Substation level
(Validation)
Automatism of SICAM PQS

Fault location
Grid code evaluation
Creating scheduled reports
Notification via e-mail & SMS

COMTRADE/PQ dif. Export
Report Export
SICAM PQS Archive

Topological information
Evaluation results
Process level
(Recording)
IEC61850
IEC 60870-5-103
Profibus FM8
SIPROTEC
Others
Protection devices
SICAM R
Autom. COMTRADE import

Autom. PQ dif. Import
7KE85 Others
Fault recorder
Fig. 6.4-27: SICAM PQS One System for all Power Quality Data
378
SIGRA (opt.)
Complete documentation
Fault location reports

Scheduled reports
Modbus
Profibus DP
SICAM Q80 SICAM P855 Others
PQ recorder
Snapshot
of violated
operational data
via SoftPLC&PDR
SICAM P/P850
SICAM Diamond (opt.)
Office level
(Analysis)
Quick overview of system power quality
Fault records
Power quality data
PDR records
Extended
fault record analysis
SICAM PQ Analyzer
One Cockpit forthe whole SICAM PQS archive
SICAM T
Power meter
Evaluation via Web
SICAM PQS fault record and power quality analysis software

The SICAM PQS software package is suitable for use in personal
computers provided with the operating systems MS Windows 7.
It is used for remote transmission IEC61850, evaluation and
archiving of the data received from SIPROTEC 7KE85, digital
protection devices as well as from SICAM Q80 power quality
recorders. The program is used to setup the system configuration
and to parameterize the SIPROTEC 7KE85 and SICAM Q80 units
installed in the field. It enables fully-automated data transmission
of all recorded data (fault records, events, mean values) from the
acquisition units to one or more networked SICAM PQS evaluation stations; the received data can then be immediately displayed and evaluated and benchmarked according to quality standards so called Grid Codes (fig. 6.4-27).
Others

Automatic and precise fault location with parallel line

compensation
Structured, consistent and permanent data documentation
and archiving
Automatic generation of cyclic power quality report
SICAM PQS functional packages
Incident explorer
Incident explorer is the central navigation interface of
SICAM PQS. It acts as a cockpit for the user and delivers a structured overview of events throughout the whole system. It
visualizes the contents of the entire power quality archive with
fault records, fault locating reports, post-disturbance review
reports, power quality reports, and the ability for manual fault
location and manual import of comtrade files. The comtrade
viewer, which is part of the scope of delivery, makes it possible
to analyze the fault (fig. 6.4-28).
Fig. 6.4-28: Incident explorer
PQ explorer
PQ explorer makes detailed analyses possible based on comparing the measured power quality data directly with the Grid
Codes. This comparison and the large number of different
diagrams available for displaying power quality data make it
possible to understand the nature and extent of a power quality
violation very quickly and to initiate adequate (fig. 6.4-29).
Report browser
Reports are created automatically at weekly, monthly, and
annual intervals and in the event of a violation of the Grid Code.
The report browser shows an overview of these automatically
generated reports in selected time ranges and the assessment of
the results. The individual reports can be opened directly in the
report browser (fig. 6.4-30).
PQ inspector
The PQ inspector is a supplementary module that shows at a
glance the power quality condition of the entire network for a
selected period. This allows for quick identification of the origin
and type of violation. Another feature of PQ inspector is the
option of generating power quality reports through step-by-step
user prompting and on the basis (fig. 6.4-31).
Fig. 6.4-31: PQ inspector
Fig. 6.4-29: PQ explorer
Fig. 6.4-30: Report browser
379

Station 1
Segment A1
Segment A2
Field 21
Field 12
Segment B1
Segment C1
Field 22
Field 11
Ca
Voltage levels
bl
bl
Monitoring of fault records and PQ reports via Web Tool

SICAM Diamond (fig. 6.4-33)
Simple access via web to the PQ Archive with SICAM Diamond. It
is possible to monitor the Fault records, PQ violation reports (the
result of a validation of the PQ data against a assigned Grid
Code), fault location reports, scheduled reports (the automatic
cyclically generated user-defined PQ reports).
Station 2
Cable A
Ca
Fault location with parallel line compensation

Single- or two-sided fault location allows precise pinpointing of
the fault, and this can be refined even more through the inclusion of parallel line compensation. The report generated for
each fault location computation contains all the important data
required. Fast, reliable localization of the fault allows more
efficient coordination of personnel deployment and thus helps
minimize downtimes (fig. 6.4-32).
Segment B2
Segment C2
Field 31
Field 32
Station 3
Fig. 6.4-32: Fault location with parallel line compensation
SICAM PQ Analyzer Client(s)
SICAM PQ Analyzer Client(s)
6
SICAM Diamond Server
& SICAM PQS Fullserver/SICAM PQ Analyzer
SDS
Internet / Intranet
SIPROTEC
SIMEAS R
SICAM Q80
Others
Fig. 6.4-33: SICAM PQS V7.01 / SICAM Diamond V4.0 HF1 goes Web via SICAM Diamond
380

6.4.7 SIGUARD PDP Phasor Data

Processor
NbgH/400/MlhM/U1
MlhM/400/NbgH/U1
kV 400
SIGUARD PDP Reliable System Operation with Wide Area

Monitoring
The load on electricity supply systems has increased continuously over the past few years. There are many reasons for this:
Increased cross-border power trading in Europe, for example,
is placing new demands on the tie lines between control areas.
For example, power transmission on tie lines in the European
grid increased almost 6-fold from 1975 to 2008 (source:
Statistical Yearbook of the ENTSO-E 2008)
Increased input of wind power and the planned shutdown of
existing power plants will extend the transmission distances
between generation and consumers.
Severe weather and storms can put important lines out of
operation, for a short time exposing the remaining grid to
increased load quickly.
This means that the power system is increasingly operated
closer to its stability limit and new load fl ows arise that are
unfamiliar to network control center operators.
This is where SIGUARD PDP (Phasor Data Processor) comes in.
This system for network monitoring using synchrophasors helps
with fast appraisal of the current system situation. Power swings
and transients are indicated without delay to help the control
center personnel fi nd the causes and take countermeasures.
Advantages for the user:
SIGUARD PDP, a fast monitoring system, detects the events and
trends in grids with fluctuating load flows or highly loaded
lines which conventional systems cannot detect at all or can
detect too late.
Detailed search of causes can take place after failures.
Investment decisions for new equipment can be taken based
on valid dynamic measurements.
Protection settings can be checked and improved using the
measured dynamic processes.
Highlights
Phasor data processor per IEEE C37.118 standard
2 selectable monitoring modes:
Online mode
Offline mode (analysis of past events)
Vector view or time chart view can be selected for all p hasors
Calculation and display of the power system status curve
Intelligent functions for problem display and analysis (e.g.
power swing recognition, island state detection)
System monitoring, incl. communication links and PMU status
Geographic overview (based on Google Earth)
Basis for fast reporting after faults
Flexible analysis with formula editor for calculations based on
measured values
Limit values that can be changed online
300
200
100
0
-100
-200
-300
-400
Fig. 6.4-34: Voltage vector of two measurement points in the
network
Runs under Windows XP and Windows 7 (32-bit or 64-bit

version), as a pure PDC (without user interface) also under
Windows Server 2008 (32-bit or 64-bit version).
Applications
Analysis of the power flows in the system
SIGUARD PDP can display a clear and up-to-date image of the
current power fl ows in the system with just a few measured
values from widely distributed phasor measurement units
(PMU). This requires no knowledge of the network topology.
The power flows are shown by means of phase angle
differences.
Monitoring of power swings
All measured values from PMUs can be displayed and
monitored with easy-to-configure phasor diagrams and time
charts (see fig. 6.4-35). Any power swings that occur are
detected quickly and reliably. The monitored zone can be
flexibly adjusted to the current situation in terms of time,
geography, and content.
Evaluation of the damping of power swings
Using the function Power Swing Recognition an incipient
power swing is detected and the appropriate damping is
determined. Detection of a power swing and, if applicable, its
insufficient or non-existing damping is signaled (alarm list).
There are two ways of detecting a power swing: Based on
angle differences between two voltages (two PMUs necessary)
or based on power swing recognition of the active power (one
PMU for current and voltage measured values is adequate).
Monitoring of the load on transmission corridors
The voltage-stability curve is especially suitable for displaying
the instantaneous load on a transmission corridor. The
currently measured operating point is shown on the work
curve of the line (voltage as a function of the transmitted
power). In this way, the remaining reserve can be shown at
any time. This requires PMUs at both ends of the line.
381

Fig. 6.4-35: Monitoring diagrams from the application "power sing recognition"
MlhM to NbgH
11:09:52....
2010-...
Island
detection
ISD potential
network
subsplit
appearing
11:09:52....
2010-...
Island
detection
ISD network
subsplit
appearing
11:09:52....
2010-...
Island
detection
ISD potential
network
subsplit
disappearing
kV 500
400
300
200
Fig. 6.4-37: Island state detection
100
0
-1.50
-1.00
-0.50
0.00
0.50
1.00
1.50
GW
Fig. 6.4-36: Voltage stability curve
382

Possible applications (cont.)

Island state detection
This function automatically indicates if parts of the network
(fig. 6.4-37) become detached from the rest of the network.
For this purpose, frequency differences and rates of frequency
changes can be automatically monitored. If islands are
detected, warnings and event messages are generated. In
addition, the islands are marked in the graphic overview as
colored areas.
Line thermal estimation
The Line Thermal Estimation function calculates the line
resistance and the average line temperature with the help of
the current and voltage measured values of two PMUs at the
line ends. This principle is applicable for short and medium
lines (up to ca. 300 km). Fig. 6.4-38 shows the principle in the
event of a sudden current variation on a line. The upper curves
show the current and the calculated line resistance, the lower
curve shows the line temperature calculated from them.
Retrospective event analysis
SIGUARD PDP is ideal for analyzing critical events in the
network. After switchover to offl ine mode, the entire archive
can be systematically analyzed and the events played back as
often as necessary. This makes dynamic events transparent,
and reports can be quickly and precisely compiled. Simply copy
the informative diagrams from SIGUARD PDP into your reports.
Alarming on limit value violation with an alarm list and color
change in the geographic network overview map
This allows you to locate the position and cause of the

disturbance quickly. This function is also available for
analyzing the archive.
Display of the power system status as a characteristic value for
the stability of the power system
Due to the constant availability of the power system status
curve in the upper part of the screen, the operator is
constantly informed about trends in system dynamics and any
remaining reserves. This curve shows a weighted average of
the distances of all measured values, to their limit values.
Retrospective event analysis
SIGUARD PDP is ideal for analyzing critical events in the
network. After switch over to offline mode, the entire archive
can be systematically analyzed and the events played back as
often as necessary. This makes dynamic events transparent,
and reports can be compiled quickly and precisely. Simply copy
the informative diagrams from SIGUARD PDP into your reports.
Alarming on limit value violation with an alarm list and color
change in the geographic network overview map. This allows
you to locate the position and cause of the disturbance
quickly. This function is also available for analyzing the
archive.
Display of the power system status as a characteristic value for
the stability of the power system. Due to the constant
availability of the power system status curve in the upper part
of the screen, the operator is constantly informed about trends
in system dynamics and any remaining reserves. This curve
shows a weighted average of the distances of all measured
values to their limit values.
Fig. 6.4-38: Calculated line temperature and current / resistance curve
383

Possible applications (cont.)

Phase Angle Display (in preparation, V3.10)
The Phase Angle Display Function can be activated in the
geographic overview (fig. 6.4-39). It shows the voltage phase
angle values between PMUs in a colored area. Together with
the color scale for the voltage phase angles, the operator can
check immediately the stability situation in the system.
Colouring as well as min- and max-values can be set with the
SIGUARD PDP Engineer (fig. 6.4-40).
Event-Triggered Archiving
Use SIGUARD PDP to automatically save recordings of abnormal
system events. Define trigger events such as limit violations,
recognized power swings etc. Select Lead Time and Follow-up
time with SIGUARD PDP Engineer
(fig. 6.4-41). The system then automatically saves all
measurements in case the predefined event happens.
Intelligent PMU placement is crucial for cost saving and for an
optimum observability of the dynamic system behavior.
Optimum PMU placement studies are offered as consulting
services from Siemens PTI (see Chapter 9.1).
Fig. 6.4-39: Phase Angle Display (in preparation for V3.10)
6
f
[Hz]
50.04
50.02
Trigger
event
50.00
49.98
49.96
49.94
49.92
Lead
time
Follow-up time
t [s]
Fig. 6.4-41: Automatic Time Trigger (example for frequency)
Fig. 6.4-40: Engineering of the Phase Angle Display with the

SIGUARD PDP Engineer

www.siemens.com / powerquality
384
6.5 Protection and

Substation Communication
6.5.1 Overview of IEC 61850
Since being published in 2004, the IEC 61850 communication
standard has gained more and more relevance in the field of
substation automation. It provides an effective response to the
needs of the open, deregulated energy market, which requires
both reliable networks and extremely flexible technology flexible enough to adapt to the substation challenges of the next
twenty years. IEC 61850 has not only taken over the drive of the
communication technology of the office networking sector, but
it has also adopted the best possible protocols and configurations for high functionality and reliable data transmission.
Industrial Ethernet, which has been hardened for substation
purposes and provides a speed of 100 Mbit/s, offers bandwidth
enough to ensure reliable information exchange between IEDs
(Intelligent Electronic Devices), as well as reliable communication from an IED to a substation controller.
The definition of an effective process bus offers a standardized
way to connect conventional as well as intelligent CTs and VTs
to relays digitally. More than just a protocol, IEC 61850 also
provides benefits in the areas of engineering and maintenance,
especially with respect to combining devices from different
vendors.
Key features of IEC 61850
As in an actual project, the standard includes parts describing
the requirements needed in substation communication, as well
as parts describing the specification itself.
The specification is structured as follows:
An object-oriented and application-specific data model focused
on substation automation.
This model includes object types representing nearly all
existing equipment and functions in a substation circuitbreakers, protection functions, current and voltage
transformers, waveform recordings, and many more.
Communication services providing multiple methods for
information exchange. These services cover reporting and
logging of events, control of switches and functions, polling of
data model information.
Peer-to-peer communication for fast data exchange between
the feeder level devices (protection devices and bay
controller) is supported with GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented
Substation Event).
Support of sampled value exchange.
File transfer for disturbance recordings.
Communication services to connect primary equipment such
as instrument transducers to relays.
Decoupling of data model and communication services from
specific communication technologies.
This technology independence guarantees long-term stability
for the data model and opens up the possibility to switch over
to successor communication technologies. Today, the standard

uses Industrial Ethernet with the following significant features:
100 Mbit/s bandwidth
Non-blocking switching technology
Priority tagging for important messages
A common formal description code, which allows a
standardized representation of a systems data model and its
links to communication services.
This code, called SCL (Substation Configuration Description
Language), covers all communication aspects according to
IEC 61850. Based on XML, this code is an ideal electronic
interchange format for configuration data.
A standardized conformance test that ensures interoperability
between devices. Devices must pass multiple test cases:
positive tests for correctly responding to stimulation
telegrams, plus several negative tests for ignoring incorrect
information
IEC 61850 offers a complete set of specifications covering all
communication issues inside a substation
Support of both editions of IEC 61850 and all technical issues.
6.5.2 Principle Communication

Structures for Protection and
Substation Automation Systems
SIPROTEC communication of protection relays
and bay controllers
Communication interfaces on protection relays are becoming
increasingly important for the efficient and economical
operation of substations and networks.
The interfaces can be used for:
Accessing the protection relays from a PC using the DIGSI
operating program for aspects of configuration, access of
operational and non-operational data.
Remote access via modem or Ethernet modem is possible with a
serial service port at the relay. This allows remote access to all
data of the protection relay.
By using the remote communication functions of DIGSI it is
possible to access relays, e.g., from the office via network. For
example, the error log can be transferred to the office and DIGSI
can be used to evaluate it.
Integrating the relays into control systems with IEC 60870-5103 protocol, PROFIBUS DP protocol, DNP 3.0 protocol and
MODBUS protocol.
385

6.5 Protection and Substation Communication
The new standardized IEC 61850 protocol has been available

since October 2004, and with its SIPROTEC units Siemens was
the first manufacturer worldwide to provide this standard.
Thanks to the standardized interfaces IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5103, DNP 3.0 (serial or over IP), MODBUS, PROFIBUS DP,
SIPROTEC units can also be integrated into non-Siemens
systems or in SIMATIC S5/S7. Electrical RS485 or optical
interfaces are available. The optimum physical data transfer
medium can be chosen thanks to opto-electrical converters.
Thus, the RS485 bus allows low-cost wiring in the cubicles and
an interference-free optical connection to the master can be
established.
Peer-to-peer communication of differential relays and distance
relays (section 6.5.1) to exchange real-time protection data via
fiber-optic cables, communication network, telephone
networks or analog pilot wires.
Ethernet-based system with SICAM
SIPROTEC is tailor-made for use with the SICAM power automation system together with IEC 61850 protocol. Via the 100 Mbit/s
Ethernet bus, the units are linked electrically or optically to the
station unit. Connection may be simple or redundant. The interface is standardized, thus also enabling direct connection of units
from other manufacturers to the LAN. Units featuring an
IEC 60870-5-103 interface or other serial protocols can be connected via the Ethernet station bus to SICAM by means of serial/
Ethernet converters. DIGSI and the Web monitor can also be used
over the same station bus. Together with Ethernet/IEC 61850 an
interference-free optical solution can be provided. Thus, the
installation Ethernet interface in the relay includes an Ethernet
switch. Thus, the installation of expensive external Ethernet
switches can be avoided. The relays are linked in an optical ring
structure (fig. 6.5-1).
Additional features of TCP/IP communication

Besides the traditional protocols mentioned for data exchange
with IEDs, in the world of Ethernet it is also important to be
aware of the status of communication infrastructure devices
such as switches. In this context, the protocol SNMP (Simple
Network Management Protocol) helps a lot. SICAM PAS supports
this protocol, thereby providing status information, e.g., to the
control center, not only for IEDs and substation controllers, but
also for Ethernet switches and other SNMP devices.
Another communication protocol, well-known from the industrial automation sector, is also required for substation automation applications: OPC (OLE for Process Control, see also Control
Center Communication). Additional interoperable solutions are
possible with OPC, especially for data exchange with devices and
applications of industrial automation. SICAM PAS supports both
OPC server and OPC client.
The linking of protection relays and/or bay controllers to the
station level is chosen according to the size and importance of
the substation. Whereas serial couplings with IEC 60870-5-103
are the most economical solution in small distribution substations (only medium voltage), Ethernet in compliance with
IEC 61850 is normally used for important high-voltage and
extra-high-voltage substations. In addition there are a number of
different physical designs, based on the local situation as
regards cable runs and distances, and on the requirements in
terms of availability and EMC influences.
Further communication options for IED connection

Apart from supporting IEC 61850, modern substation automation systems like SICAM also support the connection of IEDs
(Intelligent Electronic Devices) with other protocol standards like
the well-known standard IEC 60870-5-103 for protections units
as well as DNP3 (serial or over IP), and also protocols such as
PROFIBUS DP and MODBUS.
SICAM
Station unit
Ethernet cable
Specifically with SICAM PAS, the devices with serial communication can be reliably connected directly to the substation
controller. Moreover it is also possible to use LAN for backbone
communication throughout the substation, connecting such
serial devices with serial hubs in a decentralized approach.
Additionally it is also possible to connect subordinated
substations and Remote Terminal Units (RTU) using the protocol
standards IEC 60870-5-101 (serial communication) and
IEC 60870-5-104 (TCP/IP).
Especially for communication with small RTUs, dial-up
connections can be established based on IEC 60870-5-101.
Switch
Switch
Switch
max. 6 relays
per switch
SIPROTEC relays with IEC 61850

protocol and Ethernet interface
SIPROTEC relays with serial

IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Fig. 6.5-1: Ethernet-based system with SICAM
386
Serial Ethernet
E converter
serial hub
IEC 60870-103
protocol

The simplest version is the serial bus wiring in accordance with

RS 485 in which the field devices are electrically connected to a
master interface on the SICAM central unit (fig. 6.5-2). This
wiring is particularly recommended in new installations. Special
attention should also be paid to correct handling of the earthing,
and also to possible impact on the EMC due to the primary
technology or power cables. Separate cable routes for power
supply and communications are an essential basis for this. A
reduction of the number of field devices per master to about 16
to 20 devices is recommended in order to be able to make
adequate use of the data transfer performance.
optical fiber. Here again, the number of devices per master

should be limited as before (fig. 6.5-3).
The configurations with Ethernet are similar, with star and ring
versions available. Variants with redundancy complete these
configurations. The star configuration is especially recommended for central arrangements with short distances for the
cable routes (fig. 6.5-4).
A fiber-optic ring can be made up of individual switches. That is
especially advisable if several devices are to be connected in
each feeder (fig. 6.5-5).
A star configuration of the wiring is rather easy to handle and

can be in the form either of electrical wiring as per RS 232, or
Control center
IEC 60870-5-101 or -104
SICAM
Switch
Switch
Converter
RS 485/232
IEC 60870-5-103 (RS 485)
SIPROTEC
Fig. 6.5-2: Serial bus wiring in accordance with RS 485
Fig. 6.5-4: Ethernet: Star configuration electrical or optical
Control center
SICAM
IEC 60870-5-101 or -104
SICAM
Starcoupler
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
IEC 60870-5-103
SIPROTEC
Fig. 6.5-3: Star wiring in accordance with RS 232 or
per fiber-optic cable
Fig. 6.5-5: Ethernet: Optical ring with external switches
387

A more economical solution is the fiber-optic ring with SIPROTEC

relays because these devices have a switch directly integrated
(fig. 6.5-6). In this application, though, a suitable device from
RuggedCom must be used for the central switch so that the fast
switchover times can also be used in the case of a malfunction
on the ring. The number of devices in the ring is restricted to 27.
SICAM
Several rings can also be combined on the basis of this fundamental structure, e.g., one per voltage level. Usually these
rings are combined to form a higher level ring which then
communicates with redundant station devices. This version
offers the highest availability for station-internal communication (fig. 6.5-7).
Switch
Fig. 6.5-6: Optical ring with integrated switches
Switch
Switch
Switch
EHV
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
HV
Switch
Fig. 6.5-7: The combination of several rings offers

the highest availability
388
Switch
Switch
MV

6.5.3 Multiple Communication Options

with SIPROTEC 5
The SIPROTEC 5 modular concept ensures the consistency and
integrity of all functionalities across the entire device series.
Significant features here include:
Powerful and flexible communication is the prerequisite for
distributed and peripheral system landscapes. In SIPROTEC 5 this
is a central element of the system architecture enabling a wide
variety of communication requirements to be satisfied while
providing utmost flexibility. Fig 6.5-8 shows a possible hardware
configuration equipped with 4 communication modules. Fig
6.5-9 shows the CB202 expansion module with 3 slots for
plug-in modules. Two of these slots can be used for communication applications.
Owing to the flexibility of hardware and software, SIPROTEC 5
features the following system properties:
Adaptation to the topology of the desired communication
structure, such as ring or star configurations
Scalable redundancy in hardware and software (protocols)
Multiple communication channels to various superordinate
systems
Pluggable communication modules that can be retrofitted
The module hardware is independent of the communication
protocol used
2 independent protocols on a serial communication module
Up to 8 interfaces are available
Data exchange via IEC 61850 for up to 6 clients using an
Ethernet module or the integrated Ethernet interface.
Fig. 6.5-8: SIPROTEC 5 device with 4 communication module
6
Fig. 6.5-9: CB202: expansion
modules with
communication
modules and analog
input module
389

Communication examples with SIPROTEC 5

Regardless of the desired protocol, the communication technology used enables communication redundancies to be tailored
to the requirements of users. They can basically be divided into
Ethernet and serial communication topologies.
Protocols
Serial protocols
Ethernet protocols
Different degrees of protocol redundancy can be implemented.
The 4 plug-in module slots limit the number of independent
protocol applications that run in parallel. For serial protocols, 1
or 2 masters are usually used.
Serial protocols
Redundant or different serial protocols are capable of running
simultaneously in the device, e.g., DNP 3 and IEC 60870-5-103.
Communication is effected to one or more masters.
Fig. 6.5-10: Serial optical double module
Two serial protocols can run on a double module (fig 6.5-10). It

is not relevant in this context whether these are two protocols of
the same type or two different protocols.
The communication hardware is independent of the required
protocol. This protocol is specified during parameterization with
DIGSI 5.
Ethernet protocols
The Ethernet module can be plugged in once or multiple times
in the device. This enables running identical or different protocol
applications in multiple instances. Multiple networks are possible for IEC 61850 or DNP3 TCP, but they can also be operated
in a common Ethernet network. A module implements the
IEC 61850 protocol application, e.g., the data exchange between
devices using GOOSE messages. The other module is responsible
for the client-server communication over the DNP TCP protocol.
The client-server architecture of IEC 61850 enables one server
(device) to send reports to up to 6 clients simultaneously. In this
case, only one network is used.
390
Fig. 6.5-11: Optical Ethernet module

Examples
Redundancies to substation automation systems
2 redundant substation automation systems
2 different substation automation systems.
Example 1: Two redundant substation automation systems
Fig. 6.5-12 show shows a serial optical network which connects
the serial protocol interfaces of the device to one master, respectively. Transmission is accomplished in multipoint-star configuration and with interference-free isolation via optical fiber.
For the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, the device supports special
redundancy procedures. For instance, a primary master can be
configured that is preferred to the second master in control
direction. The current process image is transmitted to both
masters.
The fig. 6.5-13 describes a fully redundant solution based on
IEC 61850. 2 Ethernet communication modules are plugged into
each SIPROTEC 5 device. 2 redundant fiber-optic rings are set up
by means of the switches integrated in the module and connected to the redundant clients (substation automation systems). Alternatively, the redundant IEC 61850 communication
could also be accomplished via a common optical ring.
IEC 60870-5-103/
DNP3
Master
IEC 60870-5-103/
DNP3
Master
Serial connections
Star coupler
Star coupler
IEC 103 via serial

double module
or independent
serial modules
SIPROTEC 5
Device 1
Device 2
Device n
Fig. 6.5-12: Redundant IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP 3 communication
IEC 61850,
DNP3 TCP
Client
Switch
IEC 61850,
DNP3 TCP
Client
Switch
Switch
Switch
SIPROTEC 5
Device 1
Device 2
Device n
Fig. 6.5-13: Redundant communication to two IEC 61850 or DNP3 TCP

clients
391

Example 2: Two substation automation systems

with different protocols
Since both the serial protocols and the Ethernet-based protocols
are only specified during parameterization, the configuration
described previously can also be implemented using mixed
protocols. This can be a particularly interesting case of application if different control centers are connected via different
protocols. This could be, for example, the control center of the
transmission system and the control center of the distribution
system. Fig. 6.5-14 and fig. 6.5-15 show a possible combination.
Multiple substations buses
Substation-wide Ethernets are increasingly being used in
modern substation automation systems in practice. These
networks transport both the communication services to the
central substation computer controller and the signals between
the devices of the bay level. Usually, a single Ethernet subsystem
is set up for this purpose since the bandwidth of todays Ethernet networks is sufficient for the entire data traffic.
By using multiple communication modules and protocols in
SIPROTEC 5 it is now possible to set up several subsystems, and
to separate the different applications. For example, a separate
process bus for process signals (GOOSE) could be implemented
on bay level, and a separate bus to the central substation computer. See fig. 6.5-16 (2 substation buses).
Substation controller
IEC 61850 Client
Switch
DIGSI 5
DIGSI
Ethernet
switch
Star coupler
Serial optical
USART
module
Client-Server communication
via the integrated Ethernet
interface
Fig. 6.5-14: Communication to IEC 61850 client and serial connection
to an IEC 61870-5-103 master
DNP3 TCP Slave
Switch
DIGSI 5
DIGSI
Ethernet
switch
Switch
Redundant substation control connection
Switch
Reporting/control
Switch
IEC 60870-5-103 Master
DNP3 Master
Star coupler
Serial optical
USART
module
Client-Server communication
via the integrated Ethernet
interface
Ethernet ring
Fig. 6.5-15: Communication to DNP3 TCP slave and serial connection
to an DNP3 master
SIPROTEC 5
GOOSE
Fig. 6.5-16: Separate buses for reporting and GOOSE communication
392

6.5.4 Network Redundancy Protocols

Todays configuration of a substation network RSTP
The electrical and optical Ethernet modules of SIPROTEC devices
support different network topologies. This applies independently
of the selected protocol (IEC 61850 or DNP TCP).
If the module operates in dual homing redundancy (without
integrated switch), it can be connected to external switches
either in simple or redundant configuration. Only one interface
at a time processes the protocol applications (e.g., IEC 61850) in
this case. The second interface operates in standby mode (hot
standby), and the connection to the switch is monitored. If the
interface which processes the protocol traffic fails, the standby
interface is activated within a few milliseconds and takes over)
(fig. 6.5-17).
Switch
Switch
Switch
SIPROTEC 5
SIPROTEC 5
Seemless redundancy PRP and HSR

New technologies reduce the time for reconfiguration of
communication networks in case of interruptions to about
nothing. These technologies are:
PRP = Parallel Redundancy Protocol
HSR = High Available Seamless Ring Redundancy
Both systems have the same principle and are specified in
IEC 62439-3.
The same information (Ethernet frame) is being sent over two
ways. The receiver takes the first that comes in and discards the
second one. If the first does not get through, the second one is
still available and will be used. The mechanism is based deeply
in the Ethernet stack, means one MAC and one IP address for
both.
PRP uses two independent Ethernet systems. This means
double amount of network equipment and respectively cost,
but it is simple.
HSR is using the same principle, but in one Ethernet network in
a ring configuration. The same information (Ethernet frame)
will be sent in the two directions into the ring, and the receiver
gets it from the two sides of the ring. This means some more
effort in the devices but saves the costs for a second Ethernet
network.
SIPROTEC 5
Fig. 6.5-17: Redundant or single star connection to external switches

(dual homing redundancy)
When activating the integrated switch, SIPROTEC devices can be

integrated directly into the optical communication ring consisting of up to 40 devices (fig. 6.5-18). In this case, both interfaces of the module send and receive at the same time. The ring
redundancy procedure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)
ensures short switchover times if the communication is interrupted, allowing the protocol applications to continue operation
virtually without interruption. This configuration is independent
of the protocol application running on the Ethernet module.
Today, more than 250,000 Siemens devices in more than 3,000
substations are in operation worldwide in stations with RSTP. In
case of ring interruptions, RSTP reconfigures the communication
within a short time, and provides a secure operation of substations.
SIPROTEC 5
Switch
Redundant substation control connection
Switch
Switch
Ethernet ring
SIPROTEC 5
Fig. 6.5-18: Operation with integrated switch and ring redundancy
Ring structure
Switch 1
Switch 2
Optical ring
FastEthernet
RSTP
FastEthernet
RSTP
RSTPSwitch
Non
RSTP IED
Fig. 6.5-19: Example of an RSTP solution
393

HSR and PRP can be combined by so called RedBoxes (Redundancy Boxes).

The figs. 6.5-20 and 6.5-21 show some examples of PRP and HSR
configurations.
This cost-effective solution of fig. 6.5-21 can be achieved by:
2 switches at the control room
2 switches in the field
2 Redboxes (RB) per HSR ring
Up to 50 devices per HSR ring
Easy expansion by additional 2 PRP switches
Summary
Siemens offers redundancy solutions
Dual link redundancy
RSTP
PRP (seamless)
HSR (seamless)
Dual link and RSTP: Field proven established technology
PRP: High level redundancy through double network solution
HSR: High level redundancy through cost effective ring
network structure. Combinable with PRP network.
Siemens Seamless Ethernet Media Redundancy Suite:
SICAM PAS, SIPROTEC and Redbox
SIPROTEC with integrated RSTP/PRP/HSR switches
> Siemens solutions produce significant user advantage

in terms of functionality.
394

Switch
PRP-B
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
PRP-B
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
Fig. 6.5-20: Seamless redundancy by use of PRP only
PRP-A
Switch
PRP-B
Switch
B
up to 50 devices on the ring
Switch
Switch
non HSR devices

Fig. 6.5-21: Most cost-effective seamless n-1 structure
395

6.5.5 Communication Between

Substation Using Protection Data
Interfaces
SIPROTEC 4 differential and distance protection
Typical applications of differential and distance protection are
shown in fig. 6.5-22. The differential protection relay is connected to the current transformers and to the voltage transformers at one end of the cable, although only the currents are
required for the differential protection function. Direct connection to the other units is effected via single-mode fiber-optic
cables and is thus immune to interference. Various communication modules are available for different communication media.
In the case of direct connection via fiber-optic cables, data
communication is effected at 512 kbit/s and the command time
of the protection unit is reduced to 15 ms.
SIPROTEC 4 offers many features to reliably and safely handle
data exchange via communication networks. Depending on the
bandwidth available, a communication converter for
G703-64 kbit/s or X21-64/128/512 kbit/s can be selected. For
higher communication speed, a communication converter with
G703-E1 (2,048 kbit/s) or G703-T1 (1,554 kbit/s) is available.
Teleprotection using protection data interface
The teleprotection schemes can be implemented using digital
serial communication. The distance protection SIPROTEC 7SA6 is
capable of remote relay communication via direct links or multiplexed digital communication networks. The link to a multiplexed communication networks is made by separate communication converters (7XV5662). These have a fiber-optic interface
with 820 nm and ST connectors to the protection relay. The link
to the communication networks is optionally an electrical X21 or
a G703.1 interface (fig. 6.5-23).
SIPROTEC 5 transfer of data via the protection interface

The protection interface and protection topology enable data
exchange between the devices via synchronous serial point-topoint links from 64 kbit/s to 2 Mbit/s. These links can be established directly via optical fibers or via other communication
media, e.g., via dedicated lines or communication networks.
This information has the following tasks:

Topology data and values are exchanged for monitoring and
testing the link
Protection data, for example differential protection data or
direction comparison data of the distance protection,
is transferred.
Time synchronization of the devices can take place via the
link, in which case a device of the protection topology
assumes the role of timing master.
The link is continuously monitored for data faults and failure,
and the runtime of the data is measured.
Protection links integrated in the device have previously been
used for differential protection (fig. 6-5.22) and for teleprotection of the distance protection. In addition to these protection
applications, you can configure protection links in all devices in
SIPROTEC 5. At the same time, any binary information and
measured values can be transferred between the devices. Even
connections with low bandwidth, e.g., 64 kbit/s can be used for
this.
Use of the protection link for remote access with DIGSI 5
Access with DIGSI 5 to devices at the remote ends is possible via
the protection interface. This allows devices at the remote ends
to be remotely read out, or parameters to be set using the
existing communication connection.
10 km overhead line, 110 kV cable

Multi-mode FO 62.5/125 mm
Module 1: 1.5 km ST connectors
Module 2: 3.5 km ST connectors
Single-mode FO 9/125 mm
Module 3: 24 km LC connectors
7SD610
7SA6
7SD610
7SA6
Fig. 6.5-22: Protection Data Interface using direct FO connection
200 km overhead line, 400 kV
A protection topology consists of 2 to 6 devices, which

communicate point to point via communication links. It can be
structured as a redundant ring or as a chain structure, and
within a topology the protection links can have different bandwidths. A certain amount of binary information and measured
values can be transmitted bi-directionally between the devices
depending on the bandwidth. The connection with the lowest
bandwidth determines this number. The user can route the
information with DIGSI 5.
396
820 nm
max.
1.5 km
7SD610
7SA6
X21
G703.1
Communication
converter
Digital
communication
network
Communication
converter
7SD610
7SA6
Fig. 6.5-23: Protection Data Interface using digital communication

networks

Protection topology
52
4 ends differential protection

and binary input signals
PI 1
PI 2
2 km with 62.5 m/125 m

multi-mode optical fiber
PI 1
52
PI 2
52
PI
SIPROTEC 5
SIPROTEC 5
C37.94
SIPROTEC 5
52
PI 1
PI 1
4
SIPROTEC 5
2 km with 62.5 m/125 m

52
PI
X21
G703.1
Communication
network
Module type:
USART-AD-1FO
USART-AE-2FO
Communication converter
2 Mbits/s
PI
SIPROTEC 5
52
52
5 kV fix
52
9 m/125 m
single-mode
optical fiber
up to 170 km
PI
SIPROTEC 5
Module type:
USART-AD-1FO/ST
USART-AE-2FO/ST
Fig. 6.5-28: Protection communication via single-mode fiber and

repeater
52
SIPROTEC 5
Communication converter
2-wire copper cables
PI
PI
USART-AD-1FO
USART-AE-2FO
SIPROTEC 5
2 km with 62.5 m/125 m

SIPROTEC 5
2 km with 62.5 m/125 m

52
Fig. 6.5-27: Protection communication via an IEEE C37.94 (2 Mbits/s)

interface direct fiber-optic connection to a multiplexer
Repeater
52
Fig. 6.5-25: Protection communication via a communication network

with X21 or G703.1 (64 kbit/s), G703.6 (2 Mbit) interface
PI
2 Mbits/s
52
C37.94
SIPROTEC 5
Fig. 6.5-24: Protection communication of the differential protection

and transfer of binary signals
SIPROTEC 5
Communication
network
Module type:
USART-AD-1FO/ST
USART-AE-2FO/ST
52
Multiplexer
PI
SIPROTEC 5
Module type:
USART-AD-1FO/ST
USART-AE-2FO/ST
Fig. 6.5-26: Protection communication via a copper connection
52
9 m/125 m single-mode optical fiber

PI
SIPROTEC 5
FO direct connection
PI
SIPROTEC 5
Module type:
Single module USART-AF-1LDFO/4 km/duplex LC
Double module USART-AW-2LDFO/4 km/2 x duplex LC
Single module USART-AG-1LDFO/60 km/duplex LC
Double module USART-AU-2LDFO/60 km/2 x duplex LC
Single module USART-AK-1LDFO/100 km/duplex LC
Double module USART-AV-2LDFO/100 km/2 x duplex LC
Fig. 6.5-29: Protection communication via direct fiber-optic

connections
397

6.5.6 Requirements for Remote Data

Transmission
40 km with 9 m/125 m with
a single-mode optical fiber
52
PI
FO direct connection
SIPROTEC 5
52
PI
SIPROTEC 5
Single module USART-AH-1LDFO/simplex LC

Single module USART-AJ-1LDFO/simplex LC
Fig. 6.5-30: Protection communication via a single-mode fiber
In principle, both RTUs and station automation are very flexible

for adapting to any remote communication media supplied by
the user.
Small substations are usually associated with small data
volumes and poor accessibility of communication media.
Therefore, dial-up modems are often used, also radio (if no
lines available) or PLC communication. Sometimes even GPRS
is an alternative, depending on the availability of a provider.
Protocols also depend on the capabilities of the control center,
but are mostly based on international standards like
IEC 60870-5-101 (serial) and IEC 60870-5-104 (Ethernet),
although DNP 3.0 is also found in some places (serial or over
TCP/IP). Some small substations do not necessarily need to be
online continuously. They can be configured to occasional
calls, either locally or by external polling from the control
center.
Medium-size substations are generally connected via
communication cables or optical fibers with serial end-end
links. Serial lines with 1,200 Bd or higher are sufficient for
IEC -101 or DNP. Sometimes, multiple lines to different
control centers are necessary, while redundant communication
lines are reserved for important substations only. WAN
technology is increasingly used in line with the trend towards
more bandwidth.
Large substations, especially at transmission level, can have
serial links as before, but with higher transmission rates.
Anyway there is a trend towards wide area networks using
Ethernet. For IEC -104 or similar protocols a minimum of
64 kbit/s should be taken into account. If large data volumes
are to be exchanged and additional services (e.g., Voice over
IP, Video over IP) provided, the connection should have more
bandwidth (64 kbit/s < Bandwidth 2,048 kbit/s).
398
6.6 Integrated Advanced

Cyber Security
The importance of Cyber Security
Increased networking of systems, standardization of communication protocols and operating systems simplifying processes
ensures efficient operation. But the other side of the coin is that
these trends also make our networks vulnerable.
SICAM 230 and SICAM SCC

Protection from malware through virus scanner
Role-based access controls
Integration into central user and computer management
(Microsoft Active Directory Server).
What can effectively protect our energy supply from attack? A

solution which takes security into account at every stage of the
development process. And at the end, contains exactly the
security features that are needed. Looking at security as an
integral component is important for a secure infrastructure
during both network planning and the design process.
SIPROTEC 5 and DIGSI 5

Encrypted communication between engineering tool and
protection device
Secure communication password
Password protection for system-critical actions
Secure storage of key material
Firmware integrity protection with digital signature.
Siemens offers well-thought-out products, systems and solutions

to ensure the security of the energy automation infrastructure.
From the outset, they meet the most stringent security requirements including those of the BDEW Whitepaper (German
Association of Energy and Water Industries) and NERC CIP (North
American Electric Reliability Corporation, Critical Infrastructure
Protection), and certification in accordance with the process
industry security standard WIB 2.0 (Working-party on Instrument Behaviour). The main parts of the WIB requirements will
be merged under the roof of IEC 62443.
Siemens solutions offer:

Secure operational management of plants and systems
Integrated security at the product, system and solution level
Experience gained from multiple projects and international
committee work
Siemens CERT as partner for security-related incidents
Well tested security architectures (blueprints)
Certified complete solution in accordance with WIB 2.0
(fig. 6.6-1)
Future-proof according to IEC 62443 and IEC 62351.
Our systems and solutions:

Covered from end to end
The more comprehensively IT security is taken into account in
energy automation systems, the more effective and cost-effective the solutions. Siemens offers complete designs for efficient
security architecture in your plant.
End-to-end designs for security architectures including the
requisite ruggedization measures
Well tested security architectures
Recommendations for network components
Security updates, virus protection
Solutions for system-wide user and computer management
End-to-end solutions for monitoring and logging security
events
Secure remote access solutions
Patch management.
Our products:
Integrated Advanced Cyber Security
SICAM PAS and PQS
Encrypted communication with network control center
optionally via VPN/IPSEC or in accordance with IEC 62351 for
IEC 60870-5-104 or DNP3 TCP
Protection from malware through virus scanner or application
whitelisting solutions
Role-based access controls with fixed roles
Integration into central user and computer management
(Microsoft Active Directory Server).
Fig. 6.6-1: Achilles Practices Certification (APC) based on WIB 2.0

www.siemens.com/sicam
www.siemens.com/powerquality
399
6.7 Efficient Network and Energy

Automation Systems (ENEAS)
6.7.1 Introduction, Portfolio Overview
The importance of energy automation for power grids today
Energy automation is a highly complex topic, not least of all
because the considerable number of products and systems that
make up a given solution must work perfectly together within
the network. The change in energy grids, from generation to
transmission and distribution, affects the structure and operation of power grids, as well as and the supporting functions and
applications of energy automation. In addition to stabilizing
power grids, intelligent energy automation helps to reduce
energy consumption and costs. Due to this fact, the optimized
capacity utilization of power grid assets takes the highest priority
for utility companies, municipal utilities, and industry. Maximum
reliability and availability are crucial, and it is important that
redundant systems are only as good as the weakest part of it.
Main challenges and questions for the design of energy
automation systems
To remain competitive from a cost perspective over the long
term means to rely on a system with optimized total costs over
the entire useful life of a system, from the initial investment
through the operation.
There may be chances during the lifecycle of the energy automation system that are not known today. This future demand can
be addressed already today by scalable systems that are easy to
expand, updated and retrofitted.
A main value of an automation system is the data model. The
data model still remains the same even if the automation system
is changed, because it is based on the process level (e.g., switchgear). The value of the data model can be preserved on a longterm basis through systematic data transfer and an evolutionary
development of existing systems.
To benefit from technological advances on a continuing base,
while remaining flexible, it is necessary to work with standardized communications based on open interfaces.
For system integration without any problems, the right system
architecture (redundancies, communication, system functions)
and all interfaces have to be clearly defined and optimized.
ENEAS
(Efficient Network and Energy Automation Systems)
Solutions
for substation
automation and
protection
Digital substation
automation systems
Telecontrol systems
Protection systems
Solutions
for distribution
automation
Medium voltage
automation
Feeder automation
Applications
Solutions
for monitoring
Disturbance and
fault record analysis
Condition
monitoring
Power quality
systems
Solutions
for control center
Network management systems

Applications
Telecontrol nodes,
frontends, gateways
Infrastructure
Integrated energy automation
Fig. 6.7-1: ENEAS system solutions portfolio for pathbreaking energy automation
400
Solutions
for life cycle
management
Consulting
Training
Support
Maintenance
Retrot
Financing

6.7 Efficient Network and Energy Automation Systems (ENEAS)
Energy automation system landscape

ENEAS system solutions cover all areas of energy automation
throughout the entire lifecycle of a power network, while also
taking the growing importance of Smart Grids into consideration. Every individual component of an energy automation
network should be optimized to coordinate with each other.
Furthermore, the topics cyber security, engineering and
communication must be handled for all the components in a
homogeneous and consistent way. The energy automation
system landscape consists of the following main parts:
Solutions for substation automation and protection
Solutions for distribution automation (primary & secondary
distribution)
Solutions for monitoring (monitoring of primary & secondary
equipment and operation supporting systems)
Solutions for control center
Solutions for lifecycle management (service & maintenance,
consulting & training)
Efficient engineering for less complexity and more
investment protection
In the field of systems engineering, the demand for new and
highly efficient engineering solutions is becoming more insistent, not least because of the continuing integration of different
subsystems, and the resulting growth of the data volume in a
wide variety of data models. Efficient engineering is characterized by its simple, straightforward operability. It offers users
optimal support for creating and maintaining their system
configuration and project planning data, based on international
standards. Integrated energy automation guarantees the harmonized, optimized management of the project planning data
thanks to migration-capable data structures and uniform, standardized data models such as IEC61850. The tool landscape has
to be optimized to an engineering process with existing or given
database.
6.7.2 Solutions for Substation

Automation and Protection
Introduction
New challenges and dynamic market developments
Today, network operators and energy suppliers are confronted
with steadily mounting challenges. Through energy efficiency
and emission reduction requirements, legislators and regulatory
agencies are exerting more and more influence on operating
parameters. In addition, intelligent networks are emerging that
require entirely new approaches to energy automation. The
burgeoning number of distributed renewable energy generators
is causing a bidirectional load flow and, in the foreseeable
future, demand response will replace load-oriented power
generation. But intelligent applications can be used to full
advantage only if standardized communication and interfaces
are in place. The use of networks and TCP / IP is making cyber
security a priority topic as well. With appropriate solutions, these
challenges can be transformed into opportunities and competitive advantages. And that is exactly the goal driving the development of ENEAS solutions from Siemens.
Always one step ahead with ENEAS solutions from Siemens
Comprehensive and efficient overall solutions for all areas of
energy automation based on time-tested Siemens products
this is the idea behind Siemens ENEAS (Efficient Network and
Energy Automation Systems). This integrated concept offers
compelling benefits in all areas:
Efficiency thanks to low costs throughout the entire lifecycle
Sustainability through extensive performance reserves and
open interfaces
An ideal technical basis for the intelligent grids of the future
The high level of safety only a demonstrably dependable
business partner can guarantee.
Ready for Smart Grids with ENEAS

ENEAS solutions are an important element in the establishment
of intelligent electricity networks with automated functions,
distributed applications, and interlinked communication for the
monitoring and optimization of network components. These
intelligent networks meet societal and regulatory demands
for highly efficient, environmentally sustainable network infrastructures. They also allow the optimization of work processes,
enable more efficient operation management, and ensure a
higher degree of supply security.

www.siemens.com/eneas
Use synergies and save costs

System solutions for substation automation technology and
telecontrol systems form the basis for automation, metering, and
power quality. They make it possible for plant operators to benefit
from many synergistic effects when it comes to both investment
and operation. They are especially effective in conjunction with
other ENEAS solutions. The resulting synergies save time and
costs, for example, when creating communication links among
distributed components. Consistent workflow and ongoing data
exchange across all areas of energy and network automation
401

provide a solid foundation for intelligent networks, and are also

the keys to ensuring reliable, economical operation of transmission
and distribution networks in an increasingly competitive market.
Overview
Intelligent substation automation on a consistent basis
Siemens ENEAS solutions for substation automation and
protection incorporate a complete range of proven concepts
for all substation automation tasks at all voltage levels and
for all types of substations:
Decentralized substation automation based on distributed
bay units
Compact systems for ring-main units and pole-mounted
switches, for efficient network monitoring, troubleshooting,
and fault correction
Central telecontrol systems with integrated automation and
node functions
Multifunctional protection systems for the coordination and
interaction of different protection devices
Knowledge as a factor of success
The most important factor in successful substation automation
and network operation improvement is the rapid availability of
the right information. As the market leader in energy automation, Siemens is spearheading the development. The Siemens
specialists have hands-on experience with the worlds largest
installed base, and play a major part in driving technological
development. Siemens leading role in the development and
implementation of the IEC 61850 communication standard is
just one of many recent examples.
An example of technology leadership in action: IEC 61850

Siemens was the worlds first company to commit to full implementation of the IEC 61850 standard. The object-oriented
structure of this standard includes protection and control, and it
makes the operational management of substations significantly
more efficient. IEC 61850 supports the interoperability and
integration capability of substation automation systems, facilitates vendor independent substation engineering, and reduces
planning effort at the same time. The first plant using this
standard commenced operation in 2004, and since that time
over 2,000 IEC 61850-compliant systems with over 120,000
devices have gone into operation.
Experience and technology leadership
Today, Siemens is one of the worlds leading companies in
energy automation due in no small measure to the companys
extraordinarily long practical experience in this field. Siemens
has been working in protection technology for over 100 years,
and for some 70 years in substation automation and telecontrol
technology. Siemens has repeatedly set new benchmarks in
energy automation. The introduction of the analog protection
relay in 1957, or the first digital substation automation system
in 1987, are just two striking examples. Today, over 5,000
Siemens digital substation automation systems are in operation
around the world, along with over 100,000 telecontrol systems
and over a million digital protection devices.
402
Traditional T&D business

Digital substation automation systems
The integrated concept of the ENEAS solutions covers the entire
spectrum of substation automation. It can be adapted to any
existing infrastructure, and special configurations can be developed for individual customer requirements. In addition, for many
of the most widespread applications Siemens offers generic
solutions that are preconfigured, and therefore especially
economical. The extensive range of available applications allows
intelligent, environmentally sustainable, reliable, and highly economical network operation. ENEAS solutions provide efficient,
reliable digital substation automation technology everywhere
in transmission and distribution networks as well as municipal
utilities, combined systems, and industry. The digital automation
of substations is based on distributed devices, and it provides a
wide range of functions for data acquisition, control and monitoring, as well as for protection and communication. ENEAS solutions are composed of Siemens components and products that
from the start are coordinated to work together perfectly especially the devices in the SIPROTEC, SICAM and SIMEAS product
families. Third-party components that may be needed are qualified in system testing (fig. 6.7-2).
Fig. 6.7-2: ENEAS substation in transmission networks

Telecontrol systems
Telecontrol systems designed as ENEAS solutions provide multihierarchical monitoring and remote control as well as automation functions at all levels. The modular system can be adapted
to any primary processes and their spatial distribution. System
solutions are available for both energy transmission and distribution to optimally perform telecontrol tasks for all aspects of data
acquisition and process interfacing, communication, data concentration, and automation. From small substations using
terminal block technology to large telecontrol stations with high
signal density and numerous interfaces, ENEAS covers the entire
spectrum. Its modular structure ensures long-term expandability.
All components are based on a shared system architecture and
technology, so that entire systems can be parameterized with a
common tool throughout all project phases. Data point entry on
individual devices is a thing of the past, and multiple entries are
effectively prevented, even in mixed systems. All components
deployed in ENEAS telecontrol systems utilize the same communication functions, so that the available protocols are usable in
all telecontrol components. Along with the IEC 60870-5 series
and IEC 61850 standard protocols, DNP 3.0 and Modbus are also
available for all applications. In addition to these standards,
numerous proprietary protocols for components by other manufacturers are also supported. The modular concept, distributed
architecture, and evolutionary development principle ensure
that these systems have long life expectancy and are open for
future developments, thus providing a high degree of investment safety and enabling the creation of Smart Grids (fig. 6.7-3).
Protection systems
Reliable, efficient, adaptable substation protection systems are
crucial for high- and medium-voltage power supply operations.
They must react to faults in milliseconds in order to prevent
damage to costly equipment such as switchgear, transformers
and cables, ensure a high level of safety, and avoid failures of
supply. ENEAS solutions for protection systems ensure a reliable,
efficient power supply. They are designed to allow selective
procedures for different network structures and changes in
operational processes, and they provide much more than just
the dependable fulfillment of the basic functions of protection,
control and monitoring. ENEAS solutions incorporate innovative
approaches such as harmonized interfaces and interoperability,
multi-layered safety mechanisms, and efficient engineering.
Intelligent functions form one of the key prerequisites for Smart
Grids. ENEAS protection systems support network operation
during fault tracking or power quality analysis, adding useful
features to the proven benefits of older protection systems.
ENEAS solutions for protection systems allow individual protection devices to work together perfectly using the powerful
communication technologies available today. Examples are,
among others, the complex protection requirements of 1.5 CB
schemes or automatic load shedding between power plants in
industrial networks (fig. 6.7-4).
Fig. 6.7-3: Typical multi-hierarchy ENEAS telecontrol system
Fig. 6.7-4: Example of ENEAS protection system for 1.5 CB scheme
403

ENEAS generic solutions

Siemens ENEAS generic solutions are out of the box solutions
the effective, comprehensive and modern total system answer
for turnkey substation automation. They comprise pre-engineered
and universally applicable components for substation layouts at
various voltage levels precisely tailored for a range of selected
applications.
Speed
Faster project delivery
Reduced effort in the definition of requirement and detail
clarifications
Faster project documentation
Faster service and support-based on known project design
(fig. 6.7-5).
Siemens ENEAS generic solutions, all based on field proven

engineering concepts, allow reduced project times, offer a high
degree of economic efficiency, and afford the reliability of both
the tried and proven Siemens solutions and products.
ENEAS generic solutions for MV

ENEAS generic solutions for medium voltage are a set of
modules for all typical substation automation purposes within
the medium-voltage distribution grid for
Air-insulated switchgear (carriage type)
Gas-insulated switchgear
Single busbar
Double busbar (fig. 6.7-6).
Benefits
Quality
Multiple tested applications and templates provide improved
quality to projects
Increased quality of proposals
More transparency of proposed services
Improved quality of project documentation
Improved quality of hotline and after-sales services.
Security
Easier to adapt and enhance the system even after
commissioning
Safe operation from the user interface to the command output
Secure maintenance: standardized documentation
Secure lifetime support: longterm maintenance because of
large installed base
Security of investment: migration strategies thanks to a wide
installed base.
MV GIS DBB
MV GIS SBB
BE5
-QC91
BE5
BE2
Plant type
MV AIS SBB
Incoming cable/
trafo-feeder
Incoming-feeder
Over-Head Line
(CHL)
QB1
QC9
BE2
BE1
QC1
BE1
Bus section
coupler
QA1
BA1
QA2
QA1
QB22
QC23
QB12
QC13
QB1
QC9
QB2
QC22
BA1
BC1
QC9
QB1
QB1
QC9
QB1
QC9
QB2
QA1
QA1
QA1
BC1
BC1
BC1
BC2
BC2
BC2
BA1
BA1
BA1
-QC92
-QB1
-QB1
-QB1
-QB1
-QB1
-QA1
-QA1
-QA1
-QA1
-QA1
QA1
QB21
QB11
QC13
QB2
QB1
QC9
QB1
QC2
QB10
QA1
BA1
QA1
QB1
QC9
Fig. 6.7-5: ENEAS generic solutions landscape
BC2
Bus section
coupler
BA1
QA1
-BC1
-BC1
-BC1
-BC2
-BC2
-BC2
-BA1
-QC9
BC1
-BA1
-QC9
-BC1
-BC2
-BA1
-BA1
-QC9
-QC9
BC2
BA1
Incoming-feeder
Over-Head Line
Outgoing
feeder
Outgoing
cable-feeder
Outgoing cable/
trafo-feeder
Incoming-feeder
Over-Head Line
(CHL)
Incoming cable/
trafo-feeder
Outgoing-feeder
Bay level
Outgoing cable/
trafo-feeder
12 bay types
11 bay types
Fig. 6.7-6: ENEAS generic solutions for MV plant types
404
11 bay types
Bus section
coupler
Outgoing-cable
feeder

The set of modules has been specially designed to provide

off-the-shelf solutions for medium-voltage switchgear, and are
applicable for greenfield projects as well as for refurbishment.
Suitable for all market sectors such as utilities, industry and
infrastructure, as well as for all MV plant types, ENEAS generic
solutions for medium voltage considerably reduce planning and
engineering efforts, increase the overall project quality and
transparency, and speed up project planning and implementation.
Based on Siemens long-standing experience in automation
of distribution substations of all sizes and configurations,
ENEAS generic solutions for medium voltage offers a set of
pre-engineered, universally applicable solutions for substation
automation and protection that cover all types of mediumvoltage switchgear. All system solutions are precisely tailored
for a range of selected applications, and include the entire
documentation in a standardized and pre-prepared format.
On the bottom line, they make possible faster returns through
reduced project times and faster project implementation, and
they ensure long-term reliable operation and economic efficiency
(table 6.7-1).
No.
Type
1.0
Incoming feeder
1.1
Incoming cable feeder
1.2
Incoming cable feeder with remote transformer
1.3
Incoming feeder with overhead line
2.0
Outgoing feeder
2.1
Outgoing cable feeder
2.2
Outgoing cable feeder with remote transformer
2.3
Transformer feeder MV / MV
2.4
Transformer feeder MV / LV
Incoming feeder
Outgoing feeder
Coupler
3.1
Bus coupler
3.2
Bus sectionalizer
Central
4.1
Station typical for central IO
Table. 6.7-1: Defined bay typical example for gas-insulated doublebusbar switchgear
Geared towards state-of-the-art digital substation automation,

Siemens ENEAS generic solutions for medium voltage are a
comprehensive set of modules comprising tried and tested
solutions for substation automation in distribution grid applications (fig. 6.7-7).
Station overview
To control centers
Station level
Communication
Interface station data
Station-wide function
Station operation
Station communication
Connecting all devices
IEC-compliant
IEC -101 or -104

Station unit
Station
operation
HMI
IEC 61850
Bay level
Combined control and protection
Bay functions
Bay operation
n x bay units
Fig. 6.7-7: ENEAS generic solutions for MV plant types
405

Based on Siemens long-standing experience in substation

automation of wind power plants of all sizes, ENEAS generic
solutions for wind power comprise a set of pre-engineered,
universally applicable solutions for substation automation and
protection that cover wind turbine tower switchgear as well as
medium-voltage and high-voltage switchgear. All system solutions are precisely tailored for a range of selected applications,
and include the entire documentation in a standardized and
pre-prepared format. On the bottom line, they make possible
faster returns through reduced project times and faster project
implementation, and they ensure long-term reliable operation
and economic efficiency (fig. 6.7-9).
Geared towards state-of-the-art digital substation automation,
Siemens ENEAS generic solutions for wind power are a comprehensive set of modules comprising tried and tested solutions for
HV HIS
Compact grid connection
Bay x
Plant type
-QO2
-QZ1
-QA1
Bay x
Bay x
-QA1
-BC1
-QO2
-BA5
-QZ1
-QZ1
-QA1
-T
1 bay types
-QO2
-BA5
3 bay types
Fig. 6.7-8: ENEAS generic solutions wind power: HV plant types
Fig. 6.7-9: ENEAS generic solutions for wind power
Turbine strings
(no of strings/turbines
per string is indicative only)
Offshore Substation
Single undersea cable
(no diverse path)
2 out of 3 undersea cables

used for diverse fibre route
Workplace
Switch/Router
IEC 60870-5-104
to TNO
red. Option
Fig. 6.7-10: Example Automation of the power collection grid with ENEAS generic solutions for wind power
-QA1
-BC1
Remote Terminal Unit

SICAM 1703 AK
406
-BC1
-QZ1
Offshore Substation
HMI Server
SICAM 230
-QO3
-QZ2
-BC1
-QA1
WEB UI Provided
by Others
Onshore Substation
-BA5
-QO3
-QZ2
-QZ1
WTG Transition
Piece (Option
Cost)
SIPROTEC Relay
Bay x
-BA5
-BA5
Turbine strings
(no of strings/turbines
per string isindicative only)

SICAM 1703 emic
MV AIS SBB
Bay level
ENEAS generic solutions for wind power

ENEAS generic solutions for wind power are a set of modules for
all typical substation automation purposes within the power
collection grid of all levels of a wind power plant power collection grid. The set of modules has been specially designed to
provide off-the-shelf solutions for wind power purposes, and are
applicable to onshore and offshore wind power projects of all
sizes. ENEAS generic solutions for wind power considerably
reduce planning and engineering efforts, increase the overall
project quality and transparency, and speed up project planning
and implementation (fig. 6.7-8).

The set of the three base modules has been specially designed
to provide SIPROTEC 5 devices for off-the-shelf solutions for
high-voltage switchgear.
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
-QB2
-QB1
-QA1
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
-QB1
-BC1
-BC2
-QA1
-BC1
-BC2
SIEMENS
-QB2
Double-busbar
transformer feeder
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
-QB2
-BA12
ENEAS generic solutions SIPROTEC 5 HV

ENEAS generic solutions using the new generation of protection
devices and bay controllers SIPROTEC 5 for high voltage (GS SIP5
HV) are a set of modules for basic typical substation automation
purposes within the high-voltage transmission grid for
Gas-insulated switchgear
Double-busbar systems (fig. 6.7-11)
-QB1
SIEMENS
Double-busbar
bus coupler
-BA11
Double-busbar
line feeder
substation automation in power collection grid applications. This

modular kit covers the entire range of types and sizes of wind
power plants from a single turbine to large-scale wind farms
(fig. 6.7-10)
-QA1
-BC1
-BC2
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
-QB9
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
-BC3
-BC4
-QC9
-QA2
-BA1
-BA1
Fig. 6.7-11: ENEAS generic solution Siprotec 5 HV bay typicals
This generic solution covers the most common substation

typicals in 380 kV. It shows new features and solutions to find
a cost-efficient, secure and future-proof solution. Furthermore,
the generic solution shows different approaches of communication architectures to find the best configuration for the system
operators requirements. The generic solution contains functional and non-functional features concerning a state-of-the-art
substation automation system.
It supports and uses the following new SIPROTEC 5 system
features:
Direct tripping without external trip relays
Synchrocheck with multiple voltage sources
Flexible configuration of the device function
Test disconnect terminal UTME 6-MP and test plug SMP
User-friendly position of the device
Migration of legacy systems
Migration of legacy systems
The product lifecycles of primary and secondary equipment
differ substantially:
Primary equipment:
30 ... 45 years
Secondary equipment:
15 ... 20 years
One lifecycle for primary equipment may include 2 ... 3 lifecycles
for the secondary equipment.
However, a system including both primary and secondary
equipment is unlikely to be modified, as long as its components
function properly (fig. 6.7-12).
Product lifecycle and its impact
Components, operating systems, application software is
available on the market for a limited time only
Suppliers cannot deliver and maintain products and tools for
an indefinite period
No new systems can be implemented after phase-out
declaration
Siemens obligations for repair, replacement and maintenance
cease typically 10 years after product cancellation (fig. 6.7-13).
6
Fig. 6.7-12: ENEAS migration: different life and investment cycles for
primary and secondary equipment
Product availability
Product phase-out
Phase-out
declaration
Repair and service available,

no more delivery of complete systems
~ 2 years
Product
cancellation
~ 10 years
AB: Last call to purchase complete legacy system

B:
Legacy systems no longer available for purchase,
limited availability of extensions
BC: Repair, spare parts and service available
C:
Cancellation, repair, spare parts, service unavailable thereafter
Fig. 6.7-13: ENEAS migration: typical Siemens obligations for repair,
replacement and maintenance for substation automation
equipment
407

To avoid faults or breakdowns, a proactive planning and timely

execution of migrations is essential.
Protection of existing investment only such components are
being replaced, for which an immediate need exists
Minimization of the effort to renew or modify existing wiring
or communication lines
Retention of the original functionality with respect to
protection, interlocking, switching sequences, automation
functions, etc.
Preparation of the systems for new functionalities and future
requirements
Re-use of engineering data, parameter settings and
configuration data, wherever possible
Reduced, partial or even no outage times
Reliable and trouble-free execution of the migration
Distribution of the migration activities and the associated cost
over a certain period of time
Simple and step-by-step readjustment and familiarization for
the operating staff to the new solution.
The ENEAS migration concept and approach for the legacy
systems takes all the relevant aspects for a smooth migration
from the legacy systems
LSA 676 (substation automation system)
SINAUT LSA (substation automation system)
8TK (substation interlocking system)
SICAM SAS (substation automation system) to the actual and
future-proof system out of the SIEMENS substation automation
portfolio.
Especially the following requirements are solved by the ENEAS

migration approach
Parallel operation of legacy system and target system
components during migration, possibly with fallback solution
Deployment of dismantled material as spare parts or for
extensions in other parts of the system
Look & feel of the target system resembles the legacy systems
regarding user interface and operation
Many legacy protocols, including those proprietary to Siemens,
are being supported by the target systems
A variety of conversion tools and procedures for parameter
and configuration data is available
In-house know-how within Siemens facilitates tailored
migration solutions
All components required to implement the migration
solution can be provided by Siemens from one single source
Migration steps and procedures can be tested in the
Siemens lab, and in many cases offline on the live system
Training of the operating personnel on-the-job in
synchronization with the migration.

ENEAS substation automation and protection
http://w3.siemens.com/smartgrid/global/en/products-systems-solutions/substation-automation/solutions/Pages/overview.aspx
408
6.7.3 Solutions for Distribution

Automation
ENEAS distribution automation
Distribution automation is the complete automation of all controllable equipment and functions in the distribution power system.
Main tasks are the operation and maintenance of distribution
system facilities to improve the quality of service, reduce the operating costs, increase the efficient use of energy, and fast adaption
to the changing energy environment. Distribution automation also
includes newer applications such as fault detection, fault location analysis, voltage control, and power quality measurements.
Medium- and low-voltage automation
Medium- and low-voltage solutions for distribution automation
guarantee the cost-optimized operation and maintenance of
primary equipment, increased supply safety and voltage quality,
and a rapid adjustment to changes in the distribution network.
A major requirement on electricity supply systems is a high supply
reliability for the customer which is mainly determined by the
distribution network. Supply reliability is influenced by various
technical and organizational factors, and typically quantified by
criteria such as SAIDI and SAIFI. In general, customer expectations on supply reliability are steadily increasing. In some cases,
explicit power quality criteria are even included in negotiated
contracts between customers and utilities. Moreover, in liberalized markets, regulators typically require the utilities to report on
the reliability performance, or define explicit performance targets
that are even penalized in case of violations in several countries.
Given this background, the power quality performance of distribution networks is coming more and more into the focus of
system operators. Cost-effective measures and concepts for
system development and operation are necessary. Performance
targets demanded by customers and regulators are becoming a
key factor for economic system operation. Understanding the
correlations between the respective measures and their detailed
and quantitative impact on the systems reliability performance is
therefore becoming more and more important.
Benefits of medium- and low-voltage automation:
Increase of distribution reliability
Improvement of distribution operations and maintenance
Faster disturbance analysis and fault location
Asset monitoring for ageing infrastructure and avoidance of
asset overload
Increase of distribution power quality to be in line with given
voltage range, and avoidance of power quality issues for
medium-sized industry
Leverage of medium-sized distributed generation and small
decentralized generation
Clear view about power flow
Active load balancing and rearrangement in distribution
network for operational issues
Utilization of up-to-date technology like communication node
with broadband infrastructure

types of primary equipment: circuit-breakers, reclosers, disconnectors, sectionalizers and load breakers.
Portfolio:
Medium- and low-voltage automation
Self-healing applications and wide area monitoring
Monitoring, remote control, and self-healing application
High supply reliability for the customer a major requirement
for electricity supply systems is mainly determined by the
distribution networks, which typically feature a low degree of
automation only. Even the automation of a smaller part of the
network with Monitoring, remote control, and self-healing
application can realize significant improvements. Intelligent
automation equipment in primary and secondary substations
allows for effective monitoring and decision-making without
human intervention. Reliability of energy supply primarily
depends on the distribution network, and its importance is
growing. It is generally quantified by two indicators: SAIDI
(non-availability) and SAIFI (interruption frequency).
Scalable distribution automation solutions start with simple
monitoring and control of distribution substations, and end
with closed-loop self-healing (Fault Location Isolation and
Service Restoration). In cable networks, mainly RTUs and shortcircuit detectors are used for the automation of ring-main units.
For overhead line networks, IEDs and protection relays ensure
control and monitoring of reclosers and sectionalizers. Selfhealing automation can provide secure and reliable operation
of overhead lines and cable networks, and can be used for all
Principle of self-healing (Fault Location, Isolation and Service

Restoration FLISR)
Fault location: Analysis and detection of permanent faults,
broken jumpers, loss of substation source, and lockout due
to miscoordinated protective devices
Fault isolation: The distribution network is broken into feeder
section zones that can be isolated or energized from one or
more sources using fault-interrupting or switching devices
(i.e., circuit-breaker, recloser, load breaker, etc.). Evaluation
to determine if any unfaulted zones are de-energized
Service restoration: Automatic restoring of unfaulted zones
using alternative sources (if available). Change of settings
groups to better coordinate the protective devices in the new
network topology. Restoration of upstream zones that were
de-energized due to miscoordination of the protective devices
Return to initial conditions: @ Operator request.
Distribution automation architectures
Centralized: Automation logic is implemented in the
control center
Semi-decentralized: Automation logic is implemented
at the primary substation level
Decentralized: Automation logic is implemented at
RMU / feeder level (fig. 6.7-14).
Decentral
Intelligence Provided
by RMU and Feeders
Semi-Decentral
Automation systems
at substation level
Central
Automation
implemented
at Control Center
Fig. 6.7-14: Semi-decentralized architecture
409

Semi-decentralized Automation Architecture

The regional controller based on the SICAM substation automation system ensures local self-healing automation, and also
provides additional supervisory information. It is located in the
primary substation as a link between the central SCADA system
and the intelligent field devices. Protection relays like SIPROTEC
monitor and protect distribution feeders in the primary substation. Disconnectors and switches at the ring-main units can be
controlled and monitored via a customized ENEAS distribution
automation box including SICAM RTUs and SICAM FCM.
Standard ANSI protection functions in the SIPROTEC relay handle
critical fault situations by tripping circuit-breakers at the in-feed
point. The ENEAS distribution automation box sends the status
of the distribution network to the regional controller for analysis
and for taking further actions.
Fig. 6.7-15: Decentralized architecture
The regional controller is set up to:

Detect fault location using fault indications from the field
Manage standardized switching sequences for fault isolation
Handle further actions for reconfiguration and service
restoration (fig. 6.7-15).
Decentralized Automation Architecture
The system is designed to work using independent automated
devices. The self-healing logic resides in individual SIPROTEC
7SC80 feeder automation controllers located in the feeder level.
Each feeder section contains a SIPROTEC 7SC80 with a powerful
programmable logic controller (PLC) that can be easily configured by the utility to operate the switching devices in response
to local or network conditions. Because the relays communicate
with each other in a peer-to-peer fashion, the system operates
autonomously with no need for a master controller.
Modern communication systems primarily use the open

IEC 61850 standard to support this decentralized application.
IEC 61850 provides the required logic and flexibility for the
realization of the self-healing functionality. Peer-to-peer functionality via IEC 61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation
Events (GOOSE) messages not only provide binary data, but also
analog values. Each SIPROTEC 7SC80 unit contains extensive
programmable logic, which is designed with the FASE (Feeder
Automation Sequence Editor) engineering tool to realize the
automation functionalities. The IEDs then handle the selfhealing functionality, attempting to clear and isolate the faults
in order to initiate the service restoration logic (fig. 6.7-16).
410
Fig. 6.7-16: Semi-decentralized architecture

Wide area monitoring application

In many cases, explicit power quality criteria are even being
included in contracts between customers and utilities. Moreover,
regulators in liberalized markets are requiring that utilities
document network reliability, or they define explicit performance targets. Many countries even impose penalties for noncompliance. This being the case, power quality is becoming
more and more of a focus. Operators are requiring suitable
measures that allow them to acquire information from the
distribution network at any time, and thus to control the distribution network more efficiently.
The regional controller based on the SICAM substation automation
system ensures intelligent concepts for voltage regulation, and can
help achieve the defined performance goals of a defined network
area. The regional controller makes them a key factor in supplying
energy cost-effectively and reducing investments in new lines.
Knowing which measures supply which measurable added value
for network operation is becoming increasingly important.
Our system solutions take all these topics into account and
provide a secure voltage level. The primary transformer or a line
voltage regulator will receive their tap changes from the wide
area monitoring application of regional controller based on the
basis of the distributed voltage measurement in the mediumvoltage grid and low-voltage grid (fig. 6.7-17).
6.7.4 Solutions for Industry Grids

Industry solutions
Every industrial process relies on an adequate supply of electrical
power. In large industrial plants, power is usually supplied via
the companys own grid. Such industry grids feature integrated
electricity generation with on-site generator sets that can supply
at least a large part of the energy required for production.
Industry grids are typically connected to a power utilitys
external grid, but can also be operated in island mode. Several
are designed as dedicated island grids especially in the oil and
gas industry, in remote regions, and in offshore locations.
ENEAS industry solutions covers the whole range of energy automation for industry grids: Monitoring, control, protection and
power management are supporting the efficient grid operation,
and cater for high reliability and quality of power supply for
industrial production processes.
The base for ENEAS industry is the substation automation
system: Proven components of the product families SICAM and
SIPROTEC are connected with network communication based on
IEC 61850 and distributed functions. They also cater for interfaces to external devices, such as LV feeders or the process
control center (DCS).
Typically, ENEAS industry solutions are based on a 3-level

configuration consisting of
Feeder level
Station level
Plant level.
For more details of ENEAS substation automation and protection,
please see chapter 6.7.2.
ENEAS power management
Reliable power supply and stability of the power grid are essential for an efficient industrial production. These requirements
are met by ENEAS power management. The functions cater for
stable frequency and voltage, keep power import within desired
range according to load agreements with external power supplier, protect primary equipment from overloading, and cater for
a secure power supply even in critical situations (fig. 6.7-18).
Fig. 6.7-17: Secure voltage level based on distributed voltage

measurement in the medium-voltage grid and low-voltage grid

ENEAS distribution / feeder automation
http://w3.siemens.com/smartgrid/global/en/products-systemssolutions/distribution-grid-applications/solutions/Pages/
solutions.aspx
Automatic load shedding

In case of overload, the automatic load shedding stabilizes the
power supply of industrial plants through the prioritized disconnection of consumers, thereby ensuring that core processes
remain under power in critical situations, and expensive downtimes are avoided. Load shedding is especially important when
critical events, such as the tripping of a generator, endanger the
grid stability. In such situations, low priority consumers are
disconnected to restore the balance between energy generation
and consumption.
ENEAS load shedding includes 3 different functional versions,
which can be combined according to the operational needs of
411

the grid, and which complement each other for a comprehensive

and selective reaction (fig. 6.7-19).
Fast power-based load shedding
Power-based load shedding continously calculates the necessary
reactions to critical scenarios that could occur in the grid in
advance. Therefore it is always prepared for such contingencies
in a predictive way, and takes into account the actual distribution of power.
For every contingency, load shedding calculates how much
power has to be shed, and which feeders are to be tripped
according to their predefined priority. By this method, load
shedding sheds only as much load as necessary for restoring the
nominal frequency.
The predictive calculation enables a very fast reaction when a
contingency occurs. Critical trigger events are transmitted to all
feeder devices over Ethernet using IEC 61850 with GOOSE
messages. This method is more reliable and economic than
traditional parallel wiring, and caters for reaction times below
70 ms.
Fig. 6.7-18: Functions of ENEAS power management
Dynamic power-based load shedding

Loads change as needed by the industrial production process. In
island mode, these variations are balanced by the on-site turbines. As the need for power increases, the spinning reserve of
the generators decreases, reducing the flexibility of the operator
for starting additional big loads. Such a situation will still maintain balanced load and generation, and frequency will be stable,
therefore fast reaction is not necessary. On the contrary it is
required that dynamic load shedding includes a time delay
avoiding too sensitive shedding activity.
Dynamic load shedding monitors the spinning reserve for a

defined limit. By shedding low priority loads, the required
reserve is restored. Dynamic load shedding includes supervision
of gradual overload. This means that generators may be overloaded for a limited time and with limited value. As long as
these limits are not exceeded, shedding will not be activated.
As an alternative to shedding, the start of big loads can be
inhibited if the spinning reserve is not sufficient.
Frequency-based load shedding
This function reacts to a violation of a defined set of underfrequency limits. For every limit it can be defined which feeders
have to trip in order to restore the nominal frequency. The
assignment of feeders to the limits is stored in the bay devices,
therefore they react independently of the central load shedding
controller. The operator has full overview and control of the
assignments on the HMI.
Frequency-based load shedding is often used as a backup function to the fast load shedding, because of this high availability,
but it can be also used as an independent main function for
smaller applications.
412
Fig. 6.7-19: Principle of ENEAS load shedding
Generation control
Industry grids are often supported by several generators to
support island mode in case of a fault of the intertie to the
external utility. Beyond that, these generators are used to
reduce energy production costs and improve the security of
supply. In industry grids there are mainly gas turbines, steam
turbines, and diesel engines to drive the generators. They
all are typically equipped with their own primary controllers:
the governor and the excitation with voltage control.
If several generators operate jointly in an islanded industry grid,
they need to be coordinated to maintain nominal frequency and
voltage. This is the task of a secondary control, which is the
main part of generation control (fig. 6.7-20).
ENEAS generation control supports the grid operator in all
modes:
In connected mode it keeps power import and phase angle
within contractual limits by controlling own production
In island mode it stabilizes frequency and voltage in the grid.

In all modes, generation control shares the produced power

between the running generators to maximize the spinning
reserve (fig. 6.7-21).
ENEAS generation control runs on a central server, based on
SICAM 230, and needs distributed controllers at each generator
set to exchange the necessary data. Typically there is a mix of
serial and parallel interfaces to the primary controllers, with
raise/lower commands for the setpoints. A small SICAM controller can handle the interface and provide the necessary logics.
It is connected with IEC 61850 to the central controller on plant
level.
Integrated solution
ENEAS power management is totally integrated in ENEAS substation automation, and runs on a controller on plant level, which is
often designed redundant. The system configuration can easily
be adapted to the size and importance of the plant and its grid.
There are no additional devices needed for power management,
and the efficient communication structure is based on reliable
fiber-optic cables with redundant ring structures. The communication reduces parallel wiring significantly, and is open for the
future by using the international standard IEC 61850.
The system configuration is based on proven concepts, and
includes certified security concepts (fig. 6.7-22).
There is only ONE user interface used for monitoring and control as well as for power management. Thus, operation is very
efficient and fast to learn, with high ergonomics and clear
screens guiding the operator in critical situations, and providing
both overview and detailed cockpits for the electrical engineers.
Set 1
Turbine
Set n
Generator
Governor
Turbine
Excitation Primary
controller
AVR
Governor
Generator
Excitation Primary
controller
AVR
Secondary
controller
Generation control
Fig. 6.7-20: Principle of ENEAS generation control
Load/frequency
control
Automatic voltage
control
Spinning reserve
calculation
Load
sharing
Fig. 6.7-21: Structure of ENEAS generation control
Workstation 1
Workstation n
SICAM 230
control center
Redundant server
for SCADA and
generation
control
Plant level
Ethernet
ENEAS power management offers even more functions for

project-specific solutions. These include automatic switchover
to island mode in the event of faults, and synchronisation for
reconnection. Protection schemes and interlocking are just to
be mentioned here.
If energy costs are a large part of the production costs of the
plant, it is possible to upgrade the system to optimize the
schedule for the generators based on load forecasts.
Substation level:
SICAM SCU
and HMI
Feeder level:
SIPROTEC
protection
and control
6
Redundant
controller for
load shedding
Substation operation
Remote maintenance
Station n
Router
Station bus:
Ethernet and
IEC 61850
Interface to the primary controller
Fig. 6.7-22: Configuration with integrated power management
ENEAS power management usually starts with a thorough

analysis of the grid. Powerful tools to simulate and test the
industry grid are available, combined with the expertise of
skilled electrical engineers who can identify weak points in
the grid and recommend measures to operate the grid in a
safe way. Their analysis also delivers important parameters
for ENEAS power management functions.

ENEAS power management for industry grids
http://w3.siemens.com/smartgrid/global/en/products-systemssolutions/substation-automation/power-management-forindustry-grids/Pages/overview.aspx
413

6.7.5 Solutions for Monitoring and

Control Center
The Power Enginering Guide deals with three application fields

concerning system solutions for control centers. It is focused on
the requirements and features of the main system, and describes
the basis for all control center applications.
Introduction
Flexibility, modularity and scalability ENEAS solutions for
monitoring and control center
The borders between substation automation, control center and
branch systems like wind power, airport and industry are fluent
because of the increased performance of modern host systems
and the software architecture behind them. Also, customer
demands require a highly flexible, scalable and reliable control
center system that support the workflows of today and make
them prepared for the requirements of the future.
ENEAS monitoring and control center solutions cover a large
range of application fields. With the engineering experience of
thousands of systems for:
Substation automation
Control center for utilities incl. electricity, gas, water and
district heating
Wind power application
HVDC platform
Condition monitoring
Industry
Airports
Buildings and hospitals
Data centers
Smart Grid applications.
Monitoring and control center solutions are a powerful part of

modern energy automation.
The chapters Solutions for renewable wind power and ISCM

Integrated Substation Condition Monitoring describe more
in detail two applications based on a common platform but
covering totally different demands.
Only a flexible platform allows to implement a lot of different
system solutions as provided in the ENEAS solution portfolio.
System solutions for control center
Modern control centers have to fulfill a large number of requirements. They gather a wide range of highly detailed information
about the network and its current state. This assists operating
personnel in controlling the central network, and allows rapid
reaction and specific countermeasures to be taken in the event
of a fault. Additional high-quality applications, such as energy
management, metering, asset management, etc., can either be
integrated directly in the control system, or can be linked to it
via interfaces to offer further value added. This provides an
efficient system for the small to medium-sized range of applications that enhance the large network control systems available
from Siemens (fig. 6.7-23).
Control center basic functionalities:
Editor
Alarm and event lists
Worldview
Database management
Topology
Virtualized
Hardware
Electricity
Region I
Gas
Region II
Renewable
Management
Server
Service
Region III
Workstation
Terminal
Region I WorkServer
station
Terminal
Region II
Server
Editor
Main workstation 24/7
Daytime workstation 8/5
Fig. 6.7-23: Flexibility and scalability of control center solutions
414
Emergency workstation

All-in-one, server-client
Redundancy
Web server integration
Power distribution calculation
Message control (SMS, mail, etc.)
Communication protocols
Multi-touch applications
Report generator.
With a powerful basis of functionalities it is possible to ensure the
main workflows. But as a functional shaping, a lot of expansion
modules that support the operator are needed. A flexible control
center system also has to provide extension functions like:
Topological coloring
Fault localization out of protection data
Switching sequence management
EMS energy management system for electricity and gas
Power distribution calculation
Simulation
Switching procedure management
SQL outsourcing / Database connectivity
Report generator
Energy management for renewables
Distribution automation functionalities.
Modularity
Our control system software has always proven effective for
traditional applications in substation automation and in power
grids with electricity, gas, water, and district heating. It also
serves as the basis for wind farm, industry, and airport technology. More importantly, we use the same platform for implementing application-specific solution packages, for example,
condition monitoring, load shedding, network monitoring, meter
integration, and power quality monitoring. These modules can
be used in any combination, depending on the application.
they are integrated into the operation and process areas as an

integral component in the security concept. With control center
solutions, customers benefit from tested updates and patches,
as well as from continual development as per accepted cyber
security standards. Because update and backup management is
simple and fool-proof, system support is as simple as possible
and as secure as necessary.
Furthermore, a long term upgrade strategy is a must. To protect the investment of the installations and applications, the
systems have to be portable without engineering efforts to
newer versions. For example, the SICAM 230 platform provides
an upgrade over the last 20 years, thus ensuring software
availability at least for the next 10 years.
Scalability focus on small to medium-sized systems as
expansions to large control centers
From industry PCs to multi-server solutions with over 100,000
data points, Siemens small to medium-sized control center
solutions are all based on the same system platform. This platform can be installed on all current Windows operating systems
from a DVD, in order to order to ensure a consistent system
quality environment which is both simple and convenient.
In addition, the control center systems are more and more
integrated in the companys IT landscape. Not like in former
times, where control center and business IT infrastructure were
separated. This implents a nearly seamless integration into the
companys IT infrastructure (fig. 6.7-24).
Virtualization
Virtualization enabled the number of physical servers to be
reduced substantially, with a commensurate decrease in maintenance costs. Hardware can be shared and jointly monitored. Only
four physical servers are used for all of the virtual servers, with
data stored on a RAID system that is shared by all of the systems.
Modularity allows to integrate new applications into proven

systems without redesign of the existing system. That makes
SCADA systems highly flexible.
Communication
Communication is a key factor for successfully integrating a wide
variety of sensors into one control system. In the beginnings,
control center systems started with proprietary vendor specific
protocols. Interoperability was not provided. But to replace or
update a control center it is necessary to implement the older
communication protocols. In addition to the IEC 61850 and
IEC 60870-5-104 standards, the Siemens solutions offer another
200 protocols, from the building automation bus to accepted
industry protocols. Todays control systems must serve as the
hub for communication with other control and monitoring
systems, thereby permitting the connection of higher-level
systems with, for example, IEC 61850 servers, ICCP / TASE.2,
and IEC 60870-5-104.
Fig. 6.7-24: Seamless integration into IT infrastructure

Solutions for small control center
Maintenance and Cyber Security

Maintenance and Cyber Security are becoming increasingly
important for command and control systems, which is why
http://w3.siemens.com/smartgrid/global/en/productssystems-solutions/control-center-solutions/small/Pages/
Solutions-for-Small-Control-Center.aspx
415

Solutions for renewable wind power

With the great experience from large onshore and offshore wind
power projects over the last years, Siemens has engineered a lot
of applications requested by wind power systems.
At the beginning, mainly substation automation and grid connection were the standard solutions covered by energy automation (see ENEAS generic solutions for wind power).
In addition, solutions are designed for asset monitoring, connectivity to turbine control systems, onshore and offshore applications, infeed controllers, and last but not least the integration of
HVDC controllers into a SCADA system.
So finally it is possible to design a complete bundle of secondary
applications for wind park solutions that represents a modular
solution for wind power:
Grid connection and grid code compliance, voltage/VAr
controller capacitor bank controller
Energy automation solution for onshore and offshore
substations
Integration of auxillary components
Platform signals (pumps, engines)
Fire protection
Lighting
Building heating and conditioning
Fig. 6.7-25: Offshore wind farm grid
416
Asset monitoring
SCADA workstation ( onshore and offshore )
Energy management (e.g. German EEG)
Remote operation center for renewables
Communication to wind power controller
Communication to TSO grid operator (fig. 6.7-25)
Maintenance and remote operation
Maintenance and remote operation are becoming increasingly
important for wind power systems. Two drivers for remote
control centers are:
Distributed wind turbines
Operation and maintenance crews observe turbines that are
installed across larger regions, up to a country or a continent.
That kind of installations are not easy to reach. With a remote
system, the fault diagnosis is much faster and crews are
coordinated much more effectively.
Large wind power plants onshore and offshore
Especially in offshore installations, the platforms and
wind turbines are hard to access. Thus, on-site work must
be planned very carefully, and is very expensive. A wellimplemented operation and maintenance system supports
onshore and offshore crews in order to reduce working time
on site, maintenance efforts, and downtimes of the plant
(fig. 6.7-26).

SCADA System
(Offshore)
SCADA System
(Offshore)
SICAM 1703
Data Concentrator
& Auxillary Park Signals
REMOTE
Access
132 kV
Connection to:
G rid Operator
P latform / Wind Farm Owner
S ervice and Support Provider
IEC 61850
Switch
32 kV
Switch
SIPROTEC (Onshore Substation)
SIPROTEC (Turbines)
Onshore
Offhore
Fig. 6.7-26: SCADA system with onshore and offshore part
Large control centers for renewables have a different view on

the wind farms and platforms than just the part of energy
automation or substation control. Nowadays it is possible to
implement it with the Siemens ENEAS solution for renewable
wind power:
Operation of the wind farm
Observation of the complete system with
Turbines
Energy automation
Platform or wind farm auxillary signals
Asset condition monitoring
Fault management
Remote operation.
ISCM Integrated Substation Condition Monitoring

Maximum availability and reliability, along withknowledge of
the maintenance condition, are vital for transmission and distribution networks. For this reason, equipment must be constantly
monitored and analyzed with a view to keeping maintenance
and outage costs to a minimum. There is no other way to optimize the performance of all technical equipment. With ISCM
(Integrated Substation Condition Monitoring), Siemens offers
a solution that integrates all technical equipment into one
central condition monitoring system, thus helping customers
to improve their reaction time when it comes to preventing
failures (fig. 6.7-27).
Forced by effectivity and economical pressure, the wind power

control center becomes a more complete and challenging
application than any other control center application before.
Fig. 6.7-27: Seamless integration into IT Infrastructure
417

ISCM centralized condition monitoring of all equipment

Regardless of whether monitoring the condition of transformers,
switchgear (gas- or air-insulated), overhead lines, cables, or
surge arresters is required, ISCM offers suitable packages for
monitoring the condition of all components used. Additional
signals from a system (access control, battery standby supplies,
emergency power supply equipment, etc.) can also be
integrated.
Unlike conventional systems that only monitor individual
components, Siemens integrated analysis system permits
meaningful predictions about the future condition of all
equipment throughout the entire network.
In addition to its wide range of monitoring functions, ISCM
excels in terms of scalability. Both these factors are essential
when it comes to precisely adapting the condition monitoring
package to the actual requirements of a particular system or
network. The knowledge modules specially developed for ISCM
provide exact analyses and calculations of the raw monitoring
data, thereby permitting monitoring and timely alarm signaling
that go far beyond mere limit monitoring.
Transformer
Hot-spot temperature (ANSI / IEEE)
Ageing / loss of lifetime
Energy efficency / cooling efficiency
Gas-in-oil analysis
Bushing monitoring.
GIS (HV / MV)
Gas density monitoring
Partial discharge monitoring.
Circuit-breaker monitoring
CT / VT monitoring
Performance monitoring (tripping and reaction time)
Spring or hydraulic system monitoring
Maintenance counter and alarms.
Overhead line monitoring
Voltage and sag monitoring
Icing monitoring
Ampacity monitoring (fig. 6.7-28)
ISCM can be integrated into any existing switchgear. As a complete, integrated solution, this innovative condition monitoring
system delivers comprehensive information on the systemss
condition in a standardized data format.
Fig. 6.7-28: ISCM example of a central system for monitoring information
418

Condition Monitoring (ISCM)
http://w3.siemens.com/smartgrid/global/en/products-systems-solutions/
condition_monitoring/solutions_monitoring/Pages/overview.aspx

Grid diagnostics
SIMEAS SAFIR efficiency in grid analysis and monitoring
Changing market conditions, more and diverse tasks, and
increasingly small windows of time for an adequate reaction to
grid disturbances pose new challenges to power grid operators.
The detailed real-time overview of a power systems performance is of the utmost importance today due to increased
bidirectional power flow and a need for real time system awareness. This supports the grid operators in having a clearer picture
of the network supporting blackout prevention, having clearer
information of assets and infrastructure being used. The electrical markets are in the deregulation process and cost minimizing programs are put in place. In addition, more and more
tasks must be fulfilled by the same crew (or by a reduced crew)
at the system operator's site. Users require fast fault identification and fault clearance.
SIMEAS SAFIR
Is a web-based system giving real-time grid information for
better situation awareness
Is a software platform that provides the basis for optimal data
integration of various devices within a power system
Collects fault records, substation automation events, power
quality measurements, and synchrophasors
Enables manufacturer independent, system-wide access to
measurements
Analyzes this data automatically

Alows operators and experts to quickly focus on essential facts
and take appropriate decisions.
Fault analysis, power quality and wide area monitoring
all under one roof (fig. 6.7-29)
SIMEAS SAFIR is a server-based solution which is scalable from
a single-server up to a multi-server solution consisting of application servers and specific data collectors. The data collectors
can connect to substation automation systems (e.g., SICAM
PAS), dedicated data gateways, SCADA, lightning detection
databases, disturbance recording and power quality systems
(e.g., SICAM PQS), phasor data concentrators, data warehouses,
etc., and collect both event-related and statistical data from
these sources. Moreover, the software can be customized to
take full advantage of existing infrastructure and legacy systems.
SIMEAS SAFIR standardizes all data to make them fully understandable and usable for automatic processing of any kind.
Typical data sources:
Technical data
Protection relays
Digital fault recorders
Power quality meters
Phasor measurement units
Power meters
RTU
Fig. 6.7-29: SIMEAS SAFIR analysis cores: fault analysis, power quality and wide area monitoring
419

Business data
Data warehouses
Supervisory control and data acquisition
Geographic information systems.
Data processing with SIMEAS SAFIR provides a number of
tangible advantages for all departments that have to work with
system monitoring data:
Control and protection staff benefit from the automatic
reading and processing of all available data, and a unified
report standard. This makes cumbersome and time-consuming
manual reporting a thing of the past.
The asset management benefits from consistent fault analysis
and the drawn conclusions about faults related to assets. In
this way, manual fault and power quality reports handling
becomes obsolete, and maloperation or defects can be
prevented beforehand.
The management can act on the basis of more and more
transparent data, which makes maintenance faster and more
calculable.
Control center operators benefit from automated data
collection and processing that makes possible timely and
well-informed decisions on the basis of full access to all
relevant data.
Fig. 6.7-30: Information overview of a selected event
420
Fault analysis
Collecting data and putting the pieces of the event analysis
puzzle together does not need to be a tedious, time-consuming
matter. SIMEAS SAFIR utilizes data from all sources for time- and
cost-efficient grid control and maintenance. Line faults due to
environmental influences cannot be prevented. SIMEAS SAFIR
makes handling such faults faster, easier, and more efficient.
SIMEAS SAFIR collects fault records from all data sources like
protection relay or digital fault recorder automatically usually
in COMTRADE format. In this process, time synchronization is
verified and optimized, so the records can be grouped in event
folders. These records are pre-processed to facilitate further
analysis. The software detects analog signal changes, and
provides numerous measurements, such as phasors and loop
impedances, for each electrical state of the power system. User
can also flag fault records and hide them, which occur during
commissioning or protection testing. SIMEAS SAFIR enables for
the control and protection staff a time-efficient analysis and
reporting. This reduces costs and contributes to a better
system reliability through measures derived from
comprehensive data (fig. 6.7-30).

SIMEAS SAFIR also can collect the events at the source by using
RTUs or dedicated IEC 61850 gateways, for instance.
Alternatively, SCADA databases or exports from substation
automation systems can be used. This way, SIMEAS SAFIR
becomes a system-wide sequence of events (SOE) recorder,
which is the optimum solution (fig. 6.7-33).
SIMEAS SAFIR groups all data that are related to a power
system event into a single folder, which considerably facilitates
the analysis: fault records, slow-scan records, voltage dips,
and others. The application can then determine critical event
patterns. Users browse the list of events which draws the
attention on the spots and patterns of interest for each event.
Events are tagged as important based on several criteria, and
users can register to receive notifications based on their own
preferences.
Power quality
Addressing the new challenges power system operators have to
master Power Quality (PQ) monitoring. Traditionally focused on
the quality of supply at the lower voltage levels, PQ monitoring
plays an increasing role on all voltage levels today. The reasons
include the obligation to know the quality of supply to distribution systems or major customers, and to quickly assess the
impact of voltage events. But the flow of harmonic currents or
unbalanced currents often also needs to be understood, from
the origin of disturbances to the locations where it may disturb

proper operation of power electronics or controls. That is why
control and protection staff requires continuous, accurate
recording nowadays (fig. 6.7-31).
SIMEAS SAFIR uses voltage and current quality measurements
from various power quality devices and systems from Siemens
and from other suppliers. The preferred data sources are
configurable PQ recorders featuring TCP / IP communication
and standard protocols, such as Modbus. SIMEAS SAFIR can
fetch essential measurements directly from these devices,
even at short intervals. Alternatively, measurements can be
imported in PQDIF format or from vendor-specific PQ
databases.
SIMEAS SAFIR displays the measurements on the web
interface, regardless of their origin, and facilitates easy
browsing of numerous data channels. SIMEAS SAFIR also
provides a scaled comparison between the PQ indicators
and the relevant compatibility thresholds For reference,
the power quality measurements can be compared to
regulatory thresholds (e.g., according to EN 50160).
In the end, SIMEAS SAFIR can also send a PQ summary of
the last seven days by e-mail to detect and understand
quality issues.
Fig. 6.7-31: Power quality web page
421

Wide area monitoring

Automated data collection from PMU, enables transparent
information about critical grid situations in order to react
adequately company-wide and web-based.
6
Fig. 6.7-32: Phasor diagram
Fig. 6.7-33: Event list
422
SIMEAS SAFIR takes advantage of the increasing availability

of phasor measurement units (PMU). By connecting to
phasor data concentrators (PDC), the server can display
synchrophasors just as easily as other online measurements
on any connected client PC, thus allowing frequency
tracking and phase monitoring (fig. 6.7-32), (fig. 6.7-33).

Using either power quality meters or phasor measurement units,

SIMEAS SAFIR can compute the average value of power system
frequency, and display trend diagrams with various time scales.
Measured frequencies exhibiting significant deviations are
partitioned in islands. The frequencies of each island are traced
and compared to detect islanding and assess its gravity in
numerous situations.
SIMEAS SAFIR displays tables and geographical views of the
positive-sequence voltage amplitudes and angles across the
monitored power system. Furthermore, the user can select
couples of PMU locations and appropriate thresholds in order
to trigger phase events.
Further functionalities
SIMEAS SAFIR keeps recorded measurements from PQ recorder
and PMUs in a database buffer for several weeks. This makes it
possible to capture recordings afterwards, even weeks after
the event of interest.
SIMEAS SAFIR can provide estimates of the source impedance
whenever a significant power change takes place. This feature
is especially useful with renewable generation units and HVDC
stations that require the verification of short-circuit power.
SIMEAS SAFIR takes a broader approach toward voltage change
than power quality recording, and looks at the changes of
phase-to-earth, phase-to-phase, and sequence voltages altogether.
6.7.6 Solutions for Cyber Security

Protection against unauthorized access, operator errors, and
other internal and external threats is becoming increasingly
important in energy automation, because such threats can
have serious consequences for the power supply.
ENEAS cyber security is the framework for various measures
to increase the cyber security in customer projects.
ENEAS Secure Substation is a generic approach based on
products with implemented cyber security functionalities, and
adaptable to all kind of substation automation solutions.
ENEAS Secure Substation covers the base cyber security requirements, and defines measures for pre-acquisition, offering and
project delivery, as well as the creation of the corresponding
material. It contains documents for cyber security reference
architecture, technical solution, and necessary process descriptions.
As a result of those activities, a typical ENEAS solution has been
successfully WIB 2.0 certified by Wurldtech in September 2012,
covering a typical energy automation configuration in the
industrial environment.
ENEAS Secure Substation is integral part of the energy automation solutions for Smart Grid, see section 8.5 (IT-Security).

Cyber security
http://w3.siemens.com/smartgrid/global/en/products-systems-solutions/
security/Pages/Overview.aspx
423
424
Energy Management
7.1
Principles of Energy Management
426
7.1.1
The Role of the Network Control System

in Power System Management
426
7.1.2
Network Control Centers

in a Deregulated Energy Market
434
7.1.3
Common Information Model
437
7.1.4
IT Integration and
Service-Oriented Architecture
439
7.1.5
Spectrum Power Security
441
7.2
Energy Management Products

and Solutions
443
7.2.1
Spectrum Power Control Systems
443
7.2.2
Power and Generation Applications
450
7.2.3
Transmission Applications
452
7.2.4
Distribution Applications
455
7.2.5
Advanced Distribution
Management System (ADMS)
459
7.2.6
Active Network Management
461
7.2.7
Smart Grid Energy Manager (SGEM)
462
7.2.8
Decentralized Energy
Management Systems (DEMS)
463
425
7 Energy Management
7.1 Principles of Energy
Management
Maintaining a reliable supply of electrical power to consumers is
a highly complex process as most of this power cannot be stored
and the individual components of this process, forming what is
called a power system, can be spread over a wide geographical
area. Energy management in the age of Smart Grid is becoming
exceedingly more complex and challenging. Networks are
expanding at a much faster pace than even a few years ago
and demand a high degree of individual control and monitoring.
With the integration of renewable and distributed energy,
varying grid capacities, and often weakened infrastructure,
there are many different aspects to be taken into account.
Spectrum Power links power systems of any size and volume/
extent into an easily and centrally controlled grid/energy network, enabling a reliable overview and fast assessments. Information can be accessed remotely anytime, anywhere making
it the perfect tool for flexible and efficient network control.
Power system operators need a solution that ensures a high level
of energy reliability and the lowering of costs, fast fault detection based on smart meter information, network-wide voltage/
VAr optimization and blackout prevention measures, on-time
delivery, controlled budget, expert risk management, and
sustainable, environmentally friendly products and solutions
(fig. 7.1-1).
7.1.1 The Role of the Network Control

System in Power System Management
History
The control and information technology used for the management of a power system has its origins in the automation of
power plants. The primary objective was then to improve operational reliability.
With the increasing number of power plants and their interconnection via the grid, primary frequency control, also referred to
as generator droop control, was no longer sufficient. To improve
on power delivery quality, coordination, including secondary
frequency control, of power generation and, later, external
interchange became unavoidable and was promptly implemented in control centers.
Before the introduction of the transistor in 1947, the vast
majority of protection and control devices used in power system
control were of electromechanical design. In the early days,
information was transmitted by means of relays and pulse
techniques, but with the introduction of electronics it became
possible to implement increasingly efficient transmission means.
At the end of the 1960s, with the introduction of the first process control computer, the first computerassisted power and
frequency control systems became possible.
As computers became more efficient in the 1970s, the switchgear in transmission networks was also gradually monitored and
automated with the aid of power system control technology. In
Fig. 7.1-1: Power control systems serving the complete energy chain from generation to load
426
Energy Management
7.1 Principles of Energy Management
Fig. 7.1-2: Todays operator user interface of a large power control system
response to the growing demand for network control systems, a

number of companies began developing standardized systems
for these applications. The systems of that period can be called
the first generation of network control systems.
Because of the inadequate graphics capability of computer
terminals at that time, the master computers were used mainly
for remote monitoring of unmanned stations or for performing
calculations to support operations. The network state was displayed visually on large switch panels or mosaic walls that were
also used to control the switchgear. Only as the performance of
graphical displays improved were operation management functions gradually transferred to VDU-based workstations.
As computing power continued to increase in the mid-1970s, it
also became possible to use computers for optimization processes. With the aid of optimization programs run initially as
batch Jobs and later online as well, it was possible, for instance,
to determine the most economical use of hydroelectric and
thermal power plants. These programs also provided a method
of economically assessing the exchange of energy, a basic
requirement for energy trading later on. Increasing computer
power was, however, also harnessed to further develop manmachine communication towards greater user friendliness.
In the mid-1980s, power system control, which had until then
been restricted to transmission networks, was increasingly used
in the distribution network area as well. Apart from pure network supervision, additional functions such as work or material
administration were integrated into control systems during the
ongoing automation of the distribution network.
Network control in Smart Grids
Since these good old days, a constant and reliable energy
supply has been central to the growth of industries, vital to
economic stability, and crucial to social wellbeing. This has
not changed, but as the complexity of the world continues
to increase, energy systems must adapt to contend with these
new and dynamic challenges. The energy infrastructure needs
to be smarter.
The control center, as the utility nerve center, needs to integrate

operations and information technology for continued improvements in grid reliability management (fig. 7.1-2).
CFE
CMS
DNA
Communication Front End

Crew Management System
Distribution Network
Applications
DSA Dynamic Stability Analysis
ELC
ELCOM Communication
Protocol
EMM Energy Market Management
FA
Forecasting Applications
GIS
Geographical Information
System
HIS
Historical Information System
ICCP Inter-Control-Center
Communication Protocol
IMM Information Model Manager
LME Load Management Electricity
LMG Load Management Gas
LMW Load Management Water
MERO Multi-Energy Resource
Optimization
OPF
Optimal Power Flow
PA
Power Applications
RO
Resource Optimization
SA
Scheduling Applications
TCS
Trouble Call System
TNA Transmission Network
Applications
TS
Training Simulator
Fig. 7.1-3: Power control system components overview
427
Energy Management
To meet these challenges, Spectrum Power provides customized SCADA/EMS/DMS solutions from a range of proven and
innovative components basic components of SCADA, communications, and data modeling, plus additional applications for
grid optimization and renewable management (fig. 7.1-3).
Thanks to a Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA), Spectrum
Power is able to use other IT systems in a company and these
systems can access the services of the grid control system in
turn. Standardized processes, interfaces, and messaging specifications based on IEC 61968 and IEC 61970 standards support
the trouble-free exchange of data between the systems.
From database management to network applications, Spectrum
Power is equipped with the latest functionality for maximum
reliability and efficiency under all operating conditions. Once
integrated in the data processing environment, it supports all
business processes. As a leading supplier of EMS, Siemens has years
of experience in providing applications that have proven highly
successful in systems of every conceivable size and complexity.
Spectrum Power offers you a comprehensive range of functions for requirements in energy generation, network operations
management and communications, including:
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA).
Data input and data modeling:
Data modeling based on IEC 61970 using the Common
Information Model (CIM)
Powerful graphics editor
Parallel multi-station engineering with job management und
undo functions
Powerful online data activation
Extensive communications options with communcation
protocols
Maintenance and outage management:
Fault report handling
Planning and monitoring
Fault correction
Functions for managing transmission networks:
State estimation
Load flow calculation or short-circuit calculation
Contingency analysis
Functions for managing distribution networks:
Fault isolation and restoration of power
Load flow calculation
Short-circuit calculation
Expert system
Functions for energy data management
Schedule management
Forecasting
Archiving
Reporting
Functions for demand side management
Load management for electricity and gas
Water supply management
Functions for electric power producers
Automatic generation control with load frequency control
Scheduling applications.
428
Real-time processing
SCADA applications are basic functions of the network control
system and provide a means of supervising and controlling the
power supply system. For this purpose, all information transmitted from the network is collected, preprocessed and visually
displayed in order to keep the operator constantly informed
about the current operating state of the power supply system.
The operator can also store additional Information in the system
or enter corrections for incorrectly reported Information or
Information reported by phone into the system in order to
complete the current operational network display (fig. 7.1-4).
The main objective of preprocessing is to relieve the operator of
routine work and to supply the operator with essential Information. The most important preprocessing Steps to mention are
limit value monitoring and alarm processing. These are absolutely essential, especially in the case of a fault incident, in order
to enable the operator to identify the cause of the fault quickly
and precisely and to take suitable countermeasures. The supply
state of the network elements is shown in color (topological
network coloring) in the process Images used for network monitoring in order to provide better visualization of the current
network state. As a result, the operator can see at a glance
which network sections are supplied and can identify any interruption in the supply at that particular moment.
Another important function performed by the SCADA applications is the so-called operational logbook, in which the process
history is shown chronologically in plain text. Entries in the operational logbook can be triggered by events in the power supply
system as well as by operator actions.
Switching measures in the power supply system, such as disconnecting and earthing a cable so that maintenance can be carried
out without danger, generally require a sequence of individual
commands. Because disconnection processes of this type have
to be checked for plausibility in advance, a switching sequence
management system in a control system can assist the operator
in drawing up and testing the required switching sequences.
During this process, the switching actions carried out in a simulation environment are recorded and can then be carried out
partly or fully automatically after positive testing and in the
real-time environment.
Fig. 7.1-4: Example for a network diagram of a power grid
Energy Management
Process data and control center communication

Process data from operational equipment is transferred and
recorded directly from the process. There is often also an
exchange of process data with other control centers. This
exchange of information also has the purpose of enabling
processes in the directly adjacent section of the network to be
included in the network supervision and control process.
Today, the standardized IEC 870-5-101 and 104 protocols are
increasingly used alongside old proprietary transmission protocols for transferring information from the local network. The
OPC (OLE for Process Control) standard also offers a method of
process communication and a means of communicating with the
world of automation. The Inter-Control Center Communication
Protocol (ICCP), also known as TASE2, has now become the
established form of data exchange between control centers and
is compliant with IEC standard 870-6.
Archiving
Another basic function of a control system is the processing of
archive data. Archive data processing is responsible for cyclical
collection, storage and aggregation. The archive allows different
functions for data collection that group together and further
process the data received from the real-time database. The
resulting values are stored in turn in the archive. However,
archives often also provide additional functions such as generating a sliding average or determining maximum and minimum
values in order to process the real-time values before they are
stored (fig. 7.1-5).
The calculation functions of an archive usually also comprise
functions for implementing recurring calculations for timedependent data. For example, the four fundamental operations
can be used on measurement values. These calculations can be
carried out at several levels, with the calculations at the lowest
level being completed before the calculations at the next higher
level are started. A typical application is the totaling of power
generation in its entirety and per power plant type, or the
balancing of energy consumption according to regions under
different customer groups.
Load forecasting
In order to ensure a reliable power supply, a forecast of energy
consumption (load) over time is required. Forecasting methods
working on the basis of a regression approach, Kalman filtering
or neural networks are used for medium-term planning in the
range of up to one year (load planning). For the short term, i.e.,
in the range of up to one week, pattern-based approach is
typically used with options to adjust for actual load values, for
actual weather data, etc.
Power generation planning
A power producer company has typically a portfolio of different
power plants available for generating electrical power. Power
generation planning is made whilst economically optimizing the
generation of the power needed according to the load forecast,
market price forecast and contracts, taking into account the
characteristics of the different power plants in the portfolio (fuel
Fig. 7.1-5: Spectrum Power HIS diagrams
costs, start-up and shutdown times and costs, and rate of power
change) to produce a generation timetable for all power generating units. These timetables are then used as target for power
generation control.
Note that to meet its load the power producer may opt to buy
additional energy
from a 3rd party within the same power system in which case
purchase contracts will be integrated to this optimization
process, and/or
from a 3rd party outside the same power system in which case
interconnection exchanges will be integrated to this
optimization process.
Accordingly purchase and interchange schedules will then be
integrated to these timetables.
Power generation control and frequency regulation

The advantage that electric power has of being universally
usable is offset by the disadvantage that it is difficult to store.
For this reason, the generation of electrical power must take
place simultaneously with consumption. The frequency is used
as the means of measuring whether generation and consumption are balanced. As long as generation and consumption are in
equilibrium, the network frequency corresponds to the rated
frequency. If consumption exceeds the power generation, the
difference is covered from the kinetic energy of the rotating
generator or turbine masses. This drawing of energy, however,
causes a reduction in the rotational speed and hence a drop in
the frequency. In the reverse situation, in other words, in overgeneration, the difference is converted into kinetic energy, and
the speed of rotation increases and so too does the frequency.
Because the system frequency is equal at all points in the
system, it can be easily used as the input quantity for controlling
the frequency of power systems. New setpoint values for the
individual generators are determined there from the measured
frequency deviation on the basis of technical and economic
factors, and transmitted to the decentralized generator control
systems by means of telecontrol. If a power supply system is
linked to adjacent power systems, the frequency as well as the
power exchange with the adjoining systems must be monitored
and controlled. This power exchange is taking place over a
number of interconnections for which the flow is telemetered.
429
Energy Management
A PI-type controller, based on a so-called Area Control Error (ACE)

updated, typically, every 2-10 seconds, is used to identify the net
generation adjustment required to maintain the frequency at or
very near its nominal value. Contractual power exchanges can
also be accounted for by the same controller such that deviations
from the interchange schedules are minimized. Accordingly,
individual generation unit adjustments will be calculated and
sent as correction signals to the generating units participating to
this regulation. This assignment process will also account for the
committed (economic or market) schedules of the generating
units and the reserve requirements. The set of applications
supporting this process is referred to as Automatic Generation
Control (AGC).
Transmission network management applications
A transmission network is characterized by a meshed structure,
being mesh-operated and having a number of interconnections
with one or more external networks. Most, if not all, of its substations are automated. Typically most, if not all, of its switchgear
statuses, busbar voltages and line flows are telemetered. The
transmission network includes typically an extra high voltage
(EHV) part and a high voltage (HV) part. The latter is sometimes
referred to as the sub-transmission network. Typically, these
measurements are in such a number that they provide more
information than it is necessary to solve a power flow. However
these measurements include errors due to the accuracy of their
measurement equipment and are even sometimes outright
wrong due to faulty measurement equipment and/or telecommunication. A least square approach for optimal estimation combined with a statistical analysis for bad measurement is applied
to this problem to determine most accurately the state of the
network. This function is commonly referred to as State Estimation. The estimation of the network state supplies the operator
with a complete load flow solution for supervising the network,
including those sections of the network for which no measurement values are available.
The network state estimation is generally followed by a limit

value monitoring process that compares the result of the estimation with the operating limits of the individual operational
equipment in order to inform the operator about overloads or
other limit violations in a timely fashion. The load flow solution
of the network state estimation is then used by other network
functions such as contingency analysis, short-circuit analysis or
optimal power flow.
The contingency analysis carries out a, typically very large,
number of What if? studies in which the failure of one or more
items of operational equipment is simulated. The results of these
load flow calculations are then compared against the operational
equipment limits in order to assess the network security resulting
from an operational equipment failure. Typically a transmission
network must remain secure against any single equipment failure
(n-1 criterion) and against selected double and other multiple
equipment failures which will be all simulated by this contingency analysis application. In the case of security violations other
application tools can then be used to identify preventive or
corrective solutions for such cases with violations.
430
The short-circuit analysis simulates different types, e.g., phaseto-earth, of short circuits at selected node points, typically
busbars, of the network to calculate the resulting fault current
and fault current contributions from neighboring branches and
generating units. The results are then compared to the shortcircuit ratings of these near-the-fault equipments, i.e., breaker,
branch and/or generating unit, for possible violations. The
operator is informed about any limit violations so that suitable
remedial action can be taken in a timely fashion.
The optimal power flow attempts to determine the settings of
control equipments, e.g., the tap of a transformer, to operate
optimally the power system according to some selected
criterion and subject to operating constraints such as equipment limits:
Network loss minimization network losses are directly
related to the amount of reactive power flow and, therefore,
to the voltage profile throughout the network. The optimal
power flow will minimize the transmission losses by
determining the optimal settings of all voltage controls
available, i.e., generators, transformers, capacitors, etc.
Generation cost minimization The optimal power flow will
minimize the total cost of generation by determining the
optimal dispatch of each generating units. Today this criterion
is applied mostly in pre-deregulation or centralized markets.
Variations of this criterion, e.g., involving deviations from
market set points, are also solved by optimal power flow in
fully deregulated energy markets.
Network security In the presence of equipment limit
violations the optimal power flow will determine corrective
actions in terms of voltage control settings and/or real power
control settings to minimize equipment limit violations, i.e.,
the settings to restore the network to a secure state. Similarly,
the optimal power flow can also be used in normal operating
conditions to increase the security of the network by
increasing operational margins to limits, i.e., by enforcing
tighter equipment limits. As increased security margin can be
operationally very expensive it is typically applied only to a
few selected critical equipments.
The network calculation functions just described can also be
used to study network conditions different from actual conditions. This study mode is used, for example, for checking a
planned switching operation.
Distribution network management applications
A distribution network is characterized by a mostly radial and
lightly meshed structure that is operated mostly radial. The
distribution network typically includes a medium voltage (MV)
part and a low voltage (LV) part and is interconnected to the
transmission network at HV/MV substations. Depending upon
countries few to all of the HV/MV substations are today automated. Under the Smart Grid pressure automation of the MV/LV
substations is now accelerating in Europe whilst automation of
the MV feeders is now accelerating as well in the US. For these
reasons telemetry, e.g., that of power flows, is relatively limited
but rapidly increasing (fig. 7.1-6).
Energy Management
Perhaps the most important application in distribution network

is the outage management that is responsible for the management of all planned and unplanned outages, the latter part
being also referred to as Fault Management. Outage Management integrates information from SCADA (events), metering
(events), and customers (trouble calls) to infer one or more
concurrent network outages. With the additional help of crews
and support from analysis tools, operators are then able to
promptly locate faults, isolate faults and restore service. Outage
Management will also provide calculation of performance
indices that are typically required by the regulator to assess the
performance of the utility towards its customers. Outage Management with the support from analysis tools provides also for
the coordination of planned outages with the normal operation
of the network to ensure safety of the crews and continuity of
service to the customers.
tion of the distribution network. One resulting requirement is

the need to support balanced, unbalanced and/or unsymmetrical
operation of the network. Due to the limited amount of available
measurements and their quality a distribution load flow with
load scaling has been typically used to determine the state of
the network. However, as measurement availability increases,
this approach is being progressively replaced by a state-estimation-like approach, e.g., load flow in combination with a least
square approach to optimally scale loads to the measurements,
to determine the state of the network. This latter function is
referred to as Distribution State Estimation. The solution will
then be checked against equipment limits for any violations. This
application provides the operator with a complete state of the
network including security risks beyond that available from
SCADA. This applications solution is also used by the other
network applications to perform further analysis.
Other applications in distribution network belong to one of 2

domains: outage analysis or network analysis. Outage analysis
includes typically a fault location application destined at providing
the operator with the (visual and descriptive) location of the fault
from real-time events using, for example, fault indicators and
distance relays, and a fault isolation/service restoration application destined at providing the operator with a switching sequence
for isolating the fault and restoring service to customers. As the
latter may encounter problems meeting all network security
constraints and/or restoring service to all customers one or more
switching sequences may be provided to the operator.
For example, optimal power flow will be used to optimize the

operation of the network, either towards minimizing network
losses by adjusting voltage controls such as capacitors and
transformer taps or towards minimizing network overloads by
reconfiguring the network. A short-circuit application, similar to
that used in transmission, is also used in distribution to identify
security risks against short circuits in different parts of the
network. A security analysis application is also appearing in
distribution to validate restoration procedures in parts of the
network that are under abnormal conditions, the applicability of
pre- and post-planned-outage procedures ahead of schedule,
etc. As the distribution network is often in constant state of
change, a relay coordination application is becoming more and
more common to validate or suggest adjustments to relay
settings under abnormal network configurations.
Distribution network analysis applications are in many ways

similar to those for transmission network but with a different
emphasis due to the specific size, structure and mode of opera-
SCADA
Distribution grid disturbance
Mobile workforce
Asset management
DNA
Smart meter
Meter data management
Customer
Customer service
Workforce management
OMS/GIS
Distribution management
system
Reporting
Enterprise resource
planning
Fig. 7.1-6: Schematic workflow in a distribution management system
431
Energy Management
Load shedding
To insure system stability and maximum service availability
during periods of very high demand concurrent to generation
shortage and/or large disturbances utilities have, sometimes, no
other alternative but to disconnect some loads. This process is
typically referred to as load shedding. It is normally used as a last
resort solution after all other alternatives (generation reserve,
etc.) have been exhausted. This process is supported by an
application called Load Shedding (LS).
Typically load shedding will be implemented via direct SCADA
commands, Load Shedding Controllers (LSC) and/or under-frequency/voltage relays. In the last two implementations configurations/settings may be downloaded from the control center.
Note that these two implementations are the fastest (< 100 ms)
but required careful coordination (e.g., 2003 US blackout). The
following typical load shedding activations are possible:
Manual load shedding
Rotating load shedding (generation shortage for extended time)
Equipment overload load shedding (delay/avoid tripping
of equipment)
Balancing load shedding (import target deviation, islanding)
Under-frequency/voltage load shedding (system stability/
voltage collapse).
As conditions return to normal, the load shedding application
will also provide support for load restoration, i.e., the manual
or automatic re-connection of shed loads.
Load management
As demand has increased much faster than production and
network capacity peak demand has become more and more
difficult and costly to meet. Considering also that the network is
under-used in other periods (e.g., at night) various incentive
programs reducing or shifting consumption have been created
that would allow the utility to manage some of that peak load
should the need arise.
In this context of balancing demand with production, load

serving entities, including distribution utilities, must ensure that
energy balancing is met whilst still respecting their energy
purchase contracts. This process includes the forecasting of the
customer loads, the optimal scheduling (typical cycles of 15, 30
or 60 minutes) of their dispatchable means to meet the forecasted demand and the energy purchase constraints, the monitoring of this plans execution in real-time (typical cycles are 30,
60 or 120 seconds), and, when necessary, the implementation
of corrective actions including load control. The first two steps
are implemented using similar tools to those already described
earlier albeit with adaptations, that is load forecasting and
energy resource optimization. The last two steps will monitor all
resources and control those resources available to control
towards meeting energy purchase schedules over contractual
(tariff) time periods and towards balancing energy as demand
fluctuates outside the forecast. The load control that may be
required must, of course, account for slow, fast and time-constrained load response.
432
Fig. 7.1-7: Load management overview
In the near future, this process will integrate Demand Response,

a concept identifying dynamically the loads to be available for
such control (fig. 7.1-7).
Training simulator
The growing complexity of existing power systems places
increasing demands on operation personnel. Efficient training
simulators are therefore required for carrying out the necessary
comprehensive hands-on training. The following areas can be
covered with training simulators:
Familiarization of operation personnel with the control system
and the existing network
Training of experienced personnel to changes in network,
operating procedures, tools, etc.
Training of personnel to daily work as well as to emergency
conditions (e.g., blackouts)
Simulation and analysis of operational incidents (post-mortem
or anticipated) towards improving on existing operating
procedures
Testing of possible network expansions and analysis of
alternatives, testing of new tools and analysis of results, etc.
For the training of personnel, training simulators must reflect
accurately the power system behavior and provide to the
operator the very same tools, including visualization, as those
used in the control center for an effective training. The training
simulator includes 4 essential components:
A training management component
A power system simulation component
A telemetry simulation component
A copy of the management system (EMS, TMS, DMS or GMS).
The power system simulation component is responsible for the
accurate simulation of the dynamic behavior of the managed
system, i.e., that of all its field equipments (generating units,
network and loads). The telemetry simulation component feeds
into the management system copy the simulated field data as
they would normally come from field equipments into the
control center.
Energy Management
The training simulator provides to the trainee an environment

identical to that used in operation and to the instructor an environment that allows him to create training scenarios, influence
(with or without knowledge of trainee) the training session, etc.
Operator Training Simulator (OTS)
OTS is based on 4 key components (fig. 7.1-8):
A training management component
A power system simulation component
A telemetry simulation component
A copy of the control system (e.g., EMS).
The training management component provides tools for creating
training sessions, executing training sessions and reviewing
trainee performance. It provides tools to:
Initialize the training session, e.g., from real-time or a
saved case
Define the system load profile
Create event sequences, e.g., a breaker opening, a telemetry
failure, etc., that can be either time triggered, event triggered
or command triggered
Create training scenarios, i.e., a number of event sequences,
to be activated during the training.
It also provides start/stop and pause/resume functions for the
execution of the training session. During the training session it
is possible for the trainer to create new events and/or modify
the running scenario.
The power system simulation component provides a realistic
simulation of the power system behavior to support training
from normal operation to emergency operation including
islanding conditions and blackout restoration. The simulation is
based on a long-term dynamic modeling of the power system
including:
Load modeling with voltage & frequency dependency
Generation modeling with governor, turbine/boiler and
generator models
Frequency modeling
Voltage regulator modeling
Protection relay modeling
External company LFC modeling.
The telemetry simulation component provides the simulation of
the data communication between the power system and the
control system. It transfers as simulated field telemetry the
results of the power system simulation to the control system
copy. And it processes all commands issued by SCADA (operator), LFC, etc. and transfers them to the power system simulation. This simulated telemetry can be modified via the scenario
builder by the trainer to reflect measurement errors, telemetry
or RTU failures, etc.
Base
Case
Selection
Training
Sequence
Selection
Instructor
System
Events
Educational
System
Load
Modeling
Generator
Modeling
Network
Simulation
Protection
Modeling
Data
Acquisition
Control Center
Model
Display
and
Control
Supervisory
Control
Power System
Model
Logging
Trainee
Application
Functions
Fig. 7.1-8: Block diagram of a training simulator
no difference in functionality and usability between training and

real operation.
Multi-utility
Some distribution utilities will manage the distribution of multiple
commodities, e.g., electricity, district heating, gas and/or water.
Whilst the distribution process, for example with load management, is commodity specific, inter-dependencies will be created
either by the procurement process or the production model.
It is not unusual to find in distribution cogeneration power
plants, also referred to as combined heat and power (CHP)
power plants, providing electrical power and district heating.
Management of these 2 highly integrated commodities will
require adapted tools accounting for the high inter-dependencies existing between the production and the demand of these
2 commodities.
This operator training simulator provides a dedicated environment for the trainee (operator) and one for the instructor that
allows the instructor to influence the process in order to force
responses from the trainees. The trainee interface is identical
with that of the control system so that, for the trainee, there is
433
Energy Management
7.1.2 Network Control Centers in a

Deregulated Energy Market
As a result of the movement towards deregulation and liberalization of the energy business, the electricity industry has undergone dramatic changes since the beginning of the 1990s. This
process has been marked by the following characteristics:
Competition wherever possible electrical energy is traded as
a commodity. This initially affects power generation, but other
services can also be offered on a competitive basis.
Commercial separation of the natural network monopolies
from the competitive elements. This impacts numerous areas,
such as planning, operation and maintenance of formerly
integrated systems.
Access to the networks by third parties. This is an essential
precondition for open trading in electrical energy via the
natural network monopoly.
Regulation of the network monopolies by a public agency.
Because the network is the basis for competition in the
electrical energy market, considerable importance is attched to
reliable, economical and neutral network operation. In order to
ensure such operation, a new regulatory element must be
introduced at the same time that other sections of the
electricity business are deregulated.
Restructuring models
In a deregulated environment of the type just described, the
power companies that traditionally had a vertically integrated
structure start to split into companies responsible for power
generation (GENeration COmpanies), transmission (TRANSmission COmpanies), distribution (DIStribution COmpanies) and
energy service (Load Serving Entities Service Provider Companies). This restructuring opened the door to many new market
players (fig. 7.1-9), such as electricity traders and brokers who
purchase energy from GenCos, and resell it.
The technically critical part of deregulation concerns the operation of the overall system. Because there is no longer integrated
operation of generation, transmission , distribution and energy
service in one business unit, a dedicated organization must take
over the responsibility for observing specific electrical energy
quality standards such as frequency control, the voltage level and
provision of adequate generation and transmission reserves for
emergencies. When implemented independently of all other
energy business activities this organization is referred to as an
Independent System Operator (ISO), e.g., in North America, and
when integrated with a TransCo it is referred to as a Transmission
System Operator (TSO), e.g., in Western Europe. An ISO is typically managing the energy market over a grid that encompasses
multiple TransCos whilst a TSO is typically managing the energy
market over the grid under its own TransCos responsibility. ISOs
are also referred to as Regional Transmission Operators (RTOs).
The ISO/TSO does not have its own generation capability. Therefore it must purchase regulating energy (active and reactive
power) from the power producers. Whilst many energy contracts
are established as bilateral contracts some of the energy can
also be bought/sold in an open energy market facilitated by one
434
Generation Companies (GenCo)

Power aggregators
Independent system operators

Network services
Power balance
Voltage control
System stability
Power reserve
Transmission System
Operator TSO
Energy traders
Energy brokers
Energy exchange / markets
Spot market,
e.g., day-ahead market
Ancillary market
Distribution System
Operator DSO
Load aggregators
Customer
Large customer
Small customer
Fig. 7.1-9: Players in the deregulated energy market
or more energy exchanges, e.g., the European Energy Exchange

(EEX) in Germany. This market model is typically referred to as a
spot energy market and is most common in TSO-structured
energy markets for better market transparency and liquidity.
Energy markets are often structured along time lines such as
day-ahead, intra-day, etc. energy markets and types such as
balancing, reserve, etc. energy markets. The proportion of
energy traded on the spot market compared with what is fixed
by bilateral agreements can vary from one country to another.
New requirements for network control centers
Energy markets models vary significantly from region to region
and typically take many years to reach relative maturity, i.e.,
stable market rules. There is, therefore, a strong requirement for
high flexibility/customization in the proposed market solutions
(fig. 7.1-10).
The ISO/TSO whilst responsible for rules that have been enforced
for decades are now facing a much more complex process using
market mechanisms to acquire the information and means
enabling them to enforce these rules; information and means
that are now own and controlled by the many competing market
participants. And the ISO/TSO, as it gets access to the data
necessary to fulfill his role and responsibilities from the market
participants, will need to enforce absolute confidentiality since
these data reflects often market participants positioning, i.e.,
market competitive data.
Similarly, network planning necessary to support a properly
functioning energy market, i.e., one operating without
congestion, has become a real challenge between the ISO/TSO,
TransCos and these same market participants.
Energy Management
Last but not least, energy markets require transparency and

auditing. Many services that used to be bundled must now be all
separately identified and accounted for, detailed market compliance monitoring must be performed, and extensive archiving of
it all must be possible.
enue through network access fees. Many new functions will also
be required to support an open and fair access to the network to
all market participants particularly when to manage network
congestion (e.g., locational marginal pricing), transfer capacity
limitation (e.g., cross-border capacity auctioning), etc.
Communication
As extensive communication between the control center and
the various market participants such as power producers,
distribution companies, energy exchanges and traders will
increase greatly. Whilst some communication media have been
already in use in the control center, the use of open media such
as internet will expand significantly. And the many new market
interactions such as network access/capacity requests, ancillary
market requests, etc. will require new solutions using this new
communication infrastructure. The OASIS system (Open Access
Same-Time Information System) for reserving transmission
capacity in the United States is an example of an existing
system of this kind.
To guarantee open and fair access to the network and equal

treatment between all market participants, many of these
functions will be using market mechanisms. This implies that
many of the solutions developed for these functions will be
financially-driven whilst still addressing the same physical
problems and therefore will require a lot more integration with
back office functions such as, for example, settlement.
Fundamental changes to the properties of network

control systems
Many of the ISO/TSO functions will no longer be self-serving but
instead will be to serve the market participants towards open and
fair access to the network. Whilst many functions will remain the
same as those prior to unbundling, many of the tools needed by
the ISO/TSO for executing them will rest with the market participants. The ISO/TSO will therefore need to buy the use of these
tools from the market participants whilst building its own rev-
Network calculations
The basic functions, such as state estimator, load flow calculation, short-circuit calculation and contingency analysis, will not
normally be influenced by the restructuring. However an application such as optimal power flow considering availability/
controllability of generation resources will be affected by the
restructuring of the energy business. The total cost optimization
of generation is no longer the responsibility of the ISO/TSO but
that of each market participants. But the use of generation (MW
and Volt/VAr) whether for security violation relief or network loss
reduction, still responsibilities of the ISO/TSO, will require the
application to account for the cost of using (variable cost) that
resource within the terms agreed in a separate market based
process. The cost of availability (fixed costs) is already included
in this market based process.
Fig. 7.1-10: Integration on the various process layers
435
Energy Management
Power generation planning

Power generation planning is no longer the responsibility of the
ISO/TSO and therefore no longer considered within the control
center. However its results must be communicated by the market
participants to the ISO/TSO for it to assume its network operation and security responsibilities.
This process (fig. 7.1-11 and fig. 7.1-12) is quite elaborate and
varies from market to market (e.g., with/without exchange,
single/multiple buyer, etc.) but with some constants with respect
to the part under the ISO/RTO responsibility. The ISO/TSO basic
process consists in collecting all market participants positions,
i.e., their production plans, and validating it against network
security whilst satisfying load forecasts and planned outage
schedules. In the case network security is not satisfied market
signals are returned to the market participants for a new production plan and this until network security is satisfied. In parallel
or concurrently the ISO/TSO will also request from the market
participants bids to provide power for ancillary services, e.g.,
regulating power. These bids will be finalized upon a market
clearing at the market clearing price. Of course, these bids will
be integrated to the load serving energy schedules in the above
mentioned network security validation process. These market
mechanisms will be, typically, performed at least one day ahead
(day-ahead market), and one hour ahead (real-time market) of
real-time operation. This process will then be completed on the
next day by market settlement to address the actual energy
served.
Power generation control
The full set of generation control applications still apply with,
however, some adjustments. Indeed target generation timetable
is now defined by the market participants (see process description above). And the availability and limits of regulating power
and reserve power are now defined by the process where the
ISO/TSO acquires access to and use of these resources from the
market participants (see process description above). The production cost monitoring application is still sometimes used with
adjustment to account only for the regulating costs.
Bid vs Offer matching
Bid
Offer
Price
MW
Offer vs Demand scheduling
MW
Load Forecast
Price
Offers
Time
Fig. 7.1-11: Fundamentals
Market particpants
Generation/load entites
Energy offers
Energy
offers
Pre day
ahead
Day ahead
market
Quantities,
prices
Real time
market
Schedules and contracts

Set points and prices
Net tie schedules
Real time
dispatch
Payments,
bills
Billing and
settlement
Real-time values
Schedules and forecast
Operating constraints
Energy management system

Control area operations
Outage
scheduling
Contingency
analysis
State
estimation
Fig. 7.1-12: ISO/TSO Overview
436
Generation
control
Load
management
Energy Management
7.1.3 Common Information Model

In order to survive in the deregulated energy market, power
companies today face the urgent task of optimizing their core
processes (fig. 7.1-13). This is the only way that they can survive
in this competitive environment. One vital step here is to combine the large number of autonomous IT systems into a homogeneous IT landscape. However, conventional network control
systems could only be integrated with considerable effort
because they did not use a uniform data model standard. Network control systems with a standardized source data based on
the Common Information Model (CIM), in accordance with
IEC 61970, and its extensions IEC 61968 (DMS) and IEC 62325
(energy market), offer the best basis for IT integration.
CIM key to interoperability and openness
The Common Information Model (CIM) defines a common
language and data modeling with the object of simplifying the
exchange of information between the participating systems and
applications via direct interfaces (fig. 7.1-14). The CIM was
adopted by IEC TC 57 and fast-tracked for international standardization. In the United States, CIM is already stipulated by the
North American Reliability Council (NERC) for the exchange of
data between electricity supply companies. The standardized
CIM data model offers a very large number of advantages for
power suppliers and manufacturers:
Simple data exchange
Standardized CIM data remains stable, and data model
expansions are simple to implement
As a result, simpler, faster and less risky upgrading of energy
management systems, and if necessary, also migration to
systems of other manufacturers
The CIM application program interface creates an open
application interface. The aim is to use this to interconnect the
application packages of all kinds of different suppliers per
Plug and Play to create an EMS.
CIM forms the basis for the definition of important standard
interfaces to other IT systems. Siemens is an active member of
the standardization bodies and the working group in IEC TC 57,
playing a leading role in the further development and international standardization of IEC 61970 and the Common Information Model. Working group WG14 (IEC 61968 Standards) in the
TC57 is responsible for standardization of interfaces between
systems, especially for the power distribution area.
Standardization in the outstation area is defined in IEC 61850.
With the extension of document 61850 for communication to
the control center, there are overlaps in the object model
between CIM and 61850. In order to accelerate harmonization
between CIM and 61850, TC57 currently works on a technical
report that outlines a technical approach for achieving effective
information exchange between power system installations
governed by IEC 61850 and business systems integrated with IEC
CIM standard data exchanges, based on a selected specific set of
use cases, but also with the goal of creating a framework that
will extend successfully to other use cases in the future.
The primary future challenge is to extend the standard beyond

the control center. Once the standard is extended, it will allow
full data management and data exchange between the transmission, distribution, planning, and generation areas of the enterprise. Especially urgent at the present time is to move the standard into the newest areas of Smart Grid, Advanced Metering
Infrastructure (AMI), and Home Area Network (HAN).
CIM data model and packages
The CIM data model describes the electrical network, the connected electrical components, the additional elements and the
data needed for network operation as well as the relations
between these elements. The Unified Modeling Language
(UML), a standardized, object-oriented method that is supported
by various software tools, is used as the descriptive language.
CIM is used primarily to define a common language for
exchanging information via direct interfaces or an integration
bus and for accessing data from various sources.
The CIM model is subdivided into packages such as basic elements, topology, generation, load model, measurement values
and protection. The sole purpose of these packages is to make
the model more transparent. Relations between specific types of
objects being modeled may extend beyond the boundaries of
packages.
Fig. 7.1-13: The Common Information Model as key-enabler

for interoperability
Analyst
CIM Tool
BCS Logical
Models
IEC TC57
CIM Model
Import
IEC TC57 CIM
Export & Extensions
in XMI Format
Data Model
IEC CIM &

Extensions
Store
Generate
XSD
for
Message
CIM Extension
Models
UML
Message
Profile in
OWL
Enterprise
Architect/
XMLSpy
Generate
WSDL
Fig. 7.1-14: Data engineering with Information Model Manager
437
Energy Management
Topology model
The electrically conductive connections between the elements
are defined via terminals and nodes (connectivity nodes). Every
conductive element has one or more terminals. A terminal
connects the element, such as a generator, or one side of, for
example, a circuit-breaker, to a node. A node can hold any
number of terminals and provides an impedance-free connection
linking all elements connected to it. A topology processor can
determine the current network topology via these relations and
with the current states of the circuit-breakers. This topology
model can also be used to describe gas, water, district heating
and other networks for tasks such as modeling interconnected
control centers.
Measurement value model
The dynamic states of an electric network are displayed in the
form of measurement values. Measurement values can contain
numerical values, such as active/reactive power, current and
voltage, or discrete states such as a 1-switch position. Measurement values always belong to a measurement. A measurement
always measures a single physical quantity or a state of the
relevant object. It is either allocated directly to the object or to a
terminal of the object if it is significant at which end of the
object the measurement is made, such as a measurement at the
beginning of a high-voltage line. A measurement contains one
or more measurement values, e.g., the value transmitted by
SCADA, or the value determined by the state estimator or by the
voltage/reactive power optimizer. Whether the current value
comes from the expected source or is a substitute value can also
be indicated if, for example, the connection to the process is
interrupted (fig. 7.1-15).
Interoperability tests and model data exchange

Since September 2001, North American Electric Reliability
Corporation (NERC) has prescribed the CIM/RDF/XML formal for
the exchange of electrical network data between network
security coordinators. With funding from the Electric Power
Research Institute (EPRI), leading manufacturers of complete
EMSs or partial components (ABB, Alstom, CIM-Logic, Langdale,
PsyCor, Siemens and Cisco) have started planning interoperability tests and developing the tools necessary for this. CIM XML
interoperability tests began in December 2000 and take place
regularly today. Interoperability (IOP) testing proves that products from different participants can exchange information and
provide the interfacing requirements based on the use of the
IEC standards that have been developed to date. An additional
feature and objective of this and future IOP tests is to verify and
validate that changes made to the IEC standards have been
implemented and do not prevent or impede data exchange or
interaction between the participants. The verification of
IEC specification updates is an integral part of the IOP testing
process. The IOP test report gets published afterwards and fully
documents all the results as well as the issues discovered during
testing.
438
Power system resource
Terminal
01
01
Navigation
Measurement type
0n
0n
01
01
0n
Control
0n
Measurement
0n
Current
Voltage
Frequency
Power factor
Active power
Value alias set

01
1n
0n
Control type
0n
0n
0n
0n
Value to alias
1 1
Limit
0n
0n
Limit set
Scada
CCLink
Operator
Estimate
Limit
Quality 53850
Measurement value source
0n
Measurement value
Measurement value quality
Fig. 7.1-15: Measurement value model
CIM XML
Doc 1
CIM XML
Doc 2
CIM XML
Validator
3
5
1
2
CIM XML
Import
CIM XML
Export
1,4
CIM XML
Import
1,4
Participant
A
Participant
B
Fig. 7.1-16: Principle of the interoperability test
The principle of the test can be seen in fig. 7.1-16. Participant A

imports the test data using the tool, modifies the data and
exports it for further use by participant B. Participant B imports
the data, processes it and amends it and exports it for participant C, and so on. Some participants provide a model that is
used during the IOP testing (for example: Areva 60 Bus Model,
GE WAPA 262 Bus Model, SNC-Lavalin 60 Bus Model, and Siemens 100 Bus Model). Typically full and incremental model are
exchanged and validated between the participants. Power flow
solution tests are intended to verify the correct exchange of
power system model files including generation and load through
the execution of power flow applications. In addition specific
tests focused on implementing the latest annual IEC standard
contents are performed specifically.
Energy Management
7.1.4 IT Integration and ServiceOriented Architecture

In order to survive in the deregulated energy market, power
companies today face the urgent task of optimizing their core
processes. This is the only way that they can survive in this
competitive environment. The aim is to make the system architecture modular and component-based so that a flexible configuration and IT integration can be implemented in a cost-efficient
manner. The crucial step here is to combine the large number of
autonomous IT systems into one homogeneous IT landscape.
However, conventional network control systems could only be
integrated with considerable effort because they did not use any
integration standard as none did exist. Network control systems
designed with a Service Oriented Architecture (SOA) offer the
best basis for IT integration.
Open systems through the use of standards and
de facto standards
A modern network control system provides the basis for
integration of an energy management system in the existing
system landscape of the utility through the use of standards and
de facto standards.
IEC 61970 Common Information Model (CIM) defines the
standard for data models in electrical networks. It supports the
import and export of formats such as XDF and RDF, which are
based on the XML standard
Web-based user interface, webtechnology
Standardized PC hardware instead of proprietary hardware
Client/server configuration based on Standard LANs and
protocols (TCP/IP)
Open interfaces (ODBC, OLE, OPC, jDBC, etc.)
RDBMS basis with open interfaces
Nationally and internationally standardized transmission
protocols (IEC 60870-5, IEC 60870-6).
Service-oriented architecture
A modern network control system provides a service-oriented
architecture with standardized process, interface and communication specifications based on standards IEC 61968 and
IEC 61970. They form the basis for integrating the network
control system in the enterprise service environment of the
utility.
The services of a control system comprise:
Data services with which, for example, the databases of the
core applications can be accessed, e.g., readout of the
operational equipment affected by a fault incident in the
power supply system
Functional logic services, e.g., for starting a computing
program for calculating the load flow in the power supply
system
Business logic services that coordinate the business logic for
specific energy management work processes of the
participating systems, e.g., fault management in the network
control system within the customer information system at the
utility.
The network control system is one of many systems in the IT
network of the utility that interacts with other systems and that
offers and uses services such as:
Services forming part of the offered scope of functions of the
network control system
Services that are used by the network control system and are
provided by other systems and applications
Fig. 7.1-17 shows a typical example of the incorporation of the

network control system in the enterprise service environment of
the utility. Further planning with respect to the required work
processes and integration in the heterogeneous system landscape of the utility are based on this incorporation.
Fig. 7.1-17: Spectrum Power SOA (Service-Oriented Architecture):

Integration of the network control system in the enterprise service environment of the utility
439
Energy Management
Integration into IT networks

A modern network control system acting as an energy management system fits harmoniously into the IT networks and the
existing IT landscape of the utility (fig. 7.1-18). The network
control system is one of many systems in the IT network of the
utility that interacts with other systems. The following are some
of the points defined for the IT integration process: Access to the
system by intranet users, e.g., from the back office:
Configuration for the DMZ (Demilitarized Zone) Integration of
the corporate network, such as for e-mail notification
Protected area for the application and SCADA Servers
TCP/IP-based communication to substations or to adjoining
control centers
Configuration of switches/routers
Configuration of firewalls
Password protection and requirements.
Transmission reservation
bidding (generation and load)
Bilateral transaction
Market participant
registration
customer access
WEB
Support
systeme
Data
warehouse
CIM
instead
of CM
Market
monitoring
Customer
information
portal
Market
information
portal
Customer
relations
Market
information
systems
Market
cleaning
Billing and
settlement
XML over EAI

Frame
device network
EMS
ICCP
Enterprise application
integration
adapter
Fig. 7.1-19 shows an example of the integration of the network

control system in the IT network of the utility. It forms the basis
for further planning with respect to the tasks required during IT
integration in the heterogeneous system landscapes of the
utility.
Enterprise application
integration
adapter
ICCP
CALISO 1
EMS
CALISO 1
EMS
Fig. 7.1-18: Service-oriented architecture of applications

in the IT landscape of a large utility
Internet
DMZ
Control Center
SCADA Segment
Application
Segment
Terminal
Server 1
SCADA
CIM
Data Model
Client
(Remote
Access)
Security Zone Definition

(Network segmentation based on tier
classification)
- Basis: asset evaluation and priorization
- Not listed: routers, firewalls, IDSs,
print server.
Public
DMZ
Corporate
Terminal
Server n
SCADA
Applications
Protected Area
CC Segments
Historian
Admin Server
(Patch Management)
(Anti-Virus Updates)
(Software Updates)
Corporate Network
Control Center
Communications
Segment
Control Centers
Network
UI Segment
Client
(Remote
Access)
Client 1
DMZ
Demilitarized Zone
ICCP
ICCP
Client 1
(Web Browser)
RTU
Communications
Segment
Other Control
Centers
EMS
Network
Substation
Network
SSA
Enterprise
Applications
Mail
Alarming
(SMS/e-mail)
RTU/GW
Client n
Client n
(Web Browser)
Fig. 7.1-19: Integration of the network control system in the IT network of the utility
440
FEP
IEDs
ICCP
Energy Management
7.1.5 Spectrum Power Security

Supporting NERC CIP and BDEW Whitepaper compliance
A suite solution for a safe power supply
Energy management in the age of Smart Grids is becoming
exceedingly more complex and challenging. Networks are
expanding at a much faster pace than even a few years ago and
demand a high degree of individual control and monitoring.
With the integration of renewable and distributed energy,
varying grid capacities, and often weakened infrastructure, there
are many different aspects to be taken into account.
Staying ahead of the curve
Mitigating the risks associated with regulatory changes with a
flexible and open architecture is a must when modernizing the
grid.
Security on every level

Network control systems must be protected against malfunction,
communication failures, data and application corruption, and
cyber attacks. This requires hardened systems and suitable
software solutions that comply with the latest standards. Siemens Spectrum Power features a comprehensive range of
elements that fulfill the latest security requirements
(Fig. 7.1-20).
Security compliance with the most recent standards
Spectrum Power provides product features, services, and
security options that support compliance with NERC CIP
Standards 002-009 and BDEW Whitepaper requirements
for secure control and telecommunication systems. These
standards set specific guidelines and measurements for
establishing a secure environment.
However, the advantage of openness and interoperability for

seamless integration into the enterprise IT application environment also makes systems more vulnerable to cyber attacks.
Because of the essential nature of electrical power to our
economy and lives, power utilities are an important national
cybersecurity asset. Through all the details of this process,
Siemens is committed to helping system operators achieve
compliance every step of the way.
Fig. 7.1-20: Spectrum Power security services
441
Energy Management
Good reasons for security with Spectrum Power

Spectrum Power brings an enormous wealth of experience
from installation on more than 1,600 network control centers in
operation worldwide. That is why Spectrum Power systems
cover a wide range of applications and meet the strictest
requirements in terms of security.
Security support services

Spectrum Power security service
System hardening
Antivirus support solution
Security backup and recovery
Cybersecurity incident response service.
Spectrum Power security at a glance

Complies with the most recent NERC CIP requirements and
BDEW Whitepaper and enables compliance with any
cybersecurity standard.
Secure system architecture

different security zones ( DMZ Demilitarized Zone).
Secure software and system access

Electronic security perimeter definition and access
Electronic security perimeter logging and alarming
User system security features.
Secure communications
Secure IEC 60870-5 (104) and DNP
Secure ICCP (TASE.2)
Secure serial communications.
Cyber vulnerability assessment (CVA) and incident response

services
Base CVA service
Advanced CVA service.
Security training
Spectrum Power secure coding training
Secure system delivery
System security testing (Fig. 7.1-21).
Fig. 7.1-21: Integrated security approach of Spectrum Power protects assets and secures systems against future threats
for a reliable energy supply
442
Energy Management
7.2 Energy Management
Products and Solutions
7.2.1 Spectrum Power Control Systems
Siemens has supplied more than 1,600 computer-based control
systems for power systems worldwide. The result of these many
years of experience is the development of the product family
Spectrum Power control systems for electric power systems
as well as for gas, water and district heating networks (fig. 7.2-1).
A Spectrum Power control system is divided into various
Subsystems. On the basis of a minimum configuration for
operation, it is possible to add subsystems to meet the other
requirements in terms of additional functions, structure and size
of the system. With its modular structure, the system can be
expanded with little effort, even subsequently. Modules can be
replaced or new modules can be added to implement the
required modifications. On the basis of the standard system,
open programming interfaces permit individual adaptations and
subsequent expansions for new or existing customer-specific
components. In a basic configuration, a Spectrum Power
control system encompasses the following components, which
are described in greater detail in the remainder of this section:
Basic services
To ensure that the basic functions are provided, such as realtime database services, data exchange and coordination of
computers (e.g., redundancy) involved in the control center
User interface
For providing user-friendly, powerful and graphically oriented
interfaces to the operator
Information model management
For data entry and data maintenance of network data, singleline diagrams and data exchange with other IT systems
Communication front end
For interfacing the field remote terminal units (RTU) to the
process
ICCP and ELCOM
For inter-communication between control centers based on
standard protocols (ICCP) and defacto standard protocols
(ELCOM).
SCADA applications
For implementing the functions required for system operation,
i.e., system monitoring and controlling.
In addition to these components, the following subsystems,
which are described in greater detail in the remainder of this
section, are available for expanding the functionality. They are
used and configured to match the tasks and size of the control
systems:
Multi-site operation of control centers
For the flexible and dynamic system management (modeling
and operation) in multi-site configuration
Historical information system
For the archiving and subsequent reconstruction of the
process data
Fig. 7.2-1: Spectrum Power control system
Forecasting applications
For the long-, medium- and short-term forecasting of system
loads
Power scheduling applications
For optimal resource planning, including commitment and
planned dispatch, of the power generating units
Power control applications
For the monitoring and control, i.e., real-time dispatching, of
the power generating units participating to frequency
regulation
Transmission network applications
For fast and comprehensive analysis and optimization of the
transmission network operation
Outage management applications
For efficient management of planned and unplanned outages
in the distribution networks
Distribution network applications
For fast and comprehensive analysis and optimization of the
distribution network operation
Expert system applications
For supporting the operator in critical and complex tasks in the
field of distribution network faults
Training simulator
For training the operator to all range of network behaviors
with the tools and user interface as used in operation.
443
Energy Management
7.2 Energy Management Products and Solutions
SCADA applications
The SCADA applications group together all Spectrum Power
functions that are the minimum required to operate a network
control center. SCADA contains all functions for signaling,
measuring, controlling and monitoring (fig. 7.2-2).
Spectrum Power control systems use a mature network control

concept that reduces the execution time and increases operational reliability. Network control can be performed for any
elements of the energy distribution network from any operator
station that is set up to perform that task. Individual switching
operations and switching sequences can be implemented. Online
adaptations of interlock conditions and safety features permit
network expansion without interrupting operation (using a
preliminary test in study mode). Complex switching operations
such as busbar changeover and line switching permit reduced
switching times and therefore fast execution of the switching
operations. To ensure operational reliability, the network control
concept of Spectrum Power contains various additional safety
features such as checking the various interlock conditions,
network reliability monitoring of planned switching operations,
and monitoring of network changes during switching operations.
Spectrum Power control systems allow the user to freely

position temporary network modifications such as temporary
jumpers, earth connections and isolating points online or to
remove them without having to resort to source data management. Temporary network modifications become active in the
topology immediately (interlocking, path tracing, etc.). They
remain active in topology until they are removed again. The set
temporary network modifications can be parameterized.
Switching procedure management provides the control room
personnel of a dispatch center with powerful tools for creating,
checking and executing switching operations in the network (in
the process and study mode). Up to 1,000 switching procedures
can be managed; each switching procedure can contain up to
100 actions.
Acoustic alarms and blinking display elements on the screen
inform the user about alarms and deviations from the normal
state of the power supply system. Logs are used to record alarms
and indications. Several logs can be kept. Each log can be
assigned to a certain output unit. By using fault data acquisition,
the dispatch center personnel and system engineers can analyze
the states prevailing in the power supply system before and after
a fault. Snapshots, trend data and state changes are stored in
this analysis.
Interactive topological path tracing allows the operator to
determine paths between electrically connected equipment in
444
@pjm 2014
The basic data processing uses preprocessed data of the communication front end for further processing. Value changes are
monitored, and data are distributed to other subsystems and
written to the operational database. Moreover, calculations,
logic operations and special processing functions for special data
types (e.g., metered values) are performed.
Fig. 7.2-2: Large display wall for network operation in a large

control center
the distribution network. The network coloring function controls

the color display of equipment depending on various properties
of individual items of equipment. Partial networks, network
groups (e.g., voltage levels) and operating states of equipment
(e.g., dead, earthed, undefined) can be highlighted in different
colors.
The report generator is an easy-to-use tool for simple and fast
creation, management and output of reports. An SQL interface
permits direct access to the database of the system. The layout
can be configured individually by the operator using the graphic
editor (in the formal world view). The user can define variables
for dynamic values that are updated automatically when a report
is created. Moreover, data views (tables and station diagrams)
can be linked in, and their dynamic elements are updated automatically.
Basic system services
The Spectrum Power contains various basic functions (services
and systems) that govern the fundamental functions required to
operate a network management system. Based on the operating
systems and relational databases, these functions are used to
organize data management, data exchange and communication
between the modules installed on distributed computers.
The multi-computer system is a subsystem that manages
communication between distributed computers and various
services for hardware and software redundancy, multi-computer
coordination and system state monitoring. Bidirectional
communication between individual programs of the system is
possible. The following functions are implemented:
Management of the operating contexts
Process Operation (normal state of the system)
Study context (to perform What if? studies)
Test context (system test after data or program modifications)
Training (context for training Simulator)
Management of computer states
Redundancy
Monitoring
Energy Management
Error detection and automatic recovery

Data consistency
Start-up coordination and switchover
Updating and synchronization of date and time.
The high-speed data bus is a communication system that organizes the link between the user programs and the basic system
via standardized interfaces. This communication is provided
between individual program modules within a computer. Communication between several computers is conducted via the
local area network (via TCP/IP). The high-speed data bus is also
used as the link between the modules and the database. Further
features are:
Integrated time processing
Support of redundant LANs
Support of the test and Simulation mode
Performance of immediate program activation after delay
or cyclically.
The database system of Spectrum Power consists of an operational database for real-time operation (process and application
data) and a relational database that is used by the information
model management. Features of the database system are:
Standard model for all process and application data
Incremental data changes
Import and export of data.
Information model management

The Spectrum Power Information Model Management (IMM) is
the data modeling, data maintenance and data exchange tool
specifically designed to cost effectively and efficiently manage
the power system model data for the EMS/DMS applications,
SCADA, communication to RTUs, ICCP and other enterprise
information (fig. 7.2-3). It provides a single, central location to
input and maintain all power system-related data and is fully
compliant with the international Standard for a Common Information Model (CIM), IEC 61970. The IMM embraces widely
accepted industry standard technology such as a commercial
Relational Database Management System (RDBMS) and Extensible Markup Language (XML).
The task of IMM within the power control system is to manage
the input of the data of the electric power system into the
database, both during commissioning of the system and afterwards for subsequent modifications and extensions of the
network (new substations, changes to the network, etc.).
Input and validation of the data is performed in the source
database, so that current online data and online system operations remain unaffected. Once entered, prepared and checked,
the modified set of data can then be activated in the operational
database at a time convenient to the operator. Activation means
the takeover of modified data from the source database to the
Fig. 7.2-3: The Spectrum Power information model management provides the functionality to enter and maintain all power-system-related data
445
Energy Management
Job management
XDF / RDF
XDF / RDF
SVG
Import
Export
XDF
RDF
SVG
IMM Editor
eXtensible Data Format

Resource Description Framework
Scalable Vector Graphics
Graphic
Editor
Validation /
Trigger
Reports
Fully graphic-oriented data editing

Workflow-oriented and
wizard-based technologies
Data validation
Reports
Oracle source database

Data preparation
Generation of the change log files

for the different application suites
Change log
Job management

CIM IEC 61970
Auto-creation of instances by triggers

Bulk and incremental import / export
Distribution of the incremental data

changes for the different applications
Data transfer and activation
On-line activation within

Spectrum Power control center systems
Change log
ODB
ODB Operation Database
Fig. 7.2-4: Functional overview of Spectrum Power Information Model Management
operational database, without interruption of system operation

and without losing any manually entered data. Data activation is
coordinated automatically with all other subsystems, servers or
activities of a Spectrum Power control system.
After activation, newly entered data (e.g., status information,
analog values, station feeders, entire stations) can immediately
be called up and displayed by the operator.
Modifications that are recognized later as erroneous can be

corrected by an UNDO function, because all modifications carried
out in the database are automatically recorded in a built-in
database change log. Several levels of security-checking functions provide an audit trail for all data changes in the database
and guarantee data consistency throughout the entire system.
An integral part of the user interface is the graphics editor. This
editor is used to build and maintain the graphic displays used in
the system.
All single-line displays of the Spectrum Power control systems
are world-maps. A worldmap is a two-dimensional (2D) graphical
representation of a part of the real world. Each point in a worldmap
is defined by a pair of unique X, Y coordinates (world coordinates). A worldmap is divided into a set of planes. Each plane
covers the complete 2D area including the whole range of the
unique world coordinates. The first plane is visible over the entire
worldmap magnification range. Any other plane is visible within a
certain magnification range only, and contains different graphic
representations of the technological (real) objects (e.g., plane 2
shows the substation state, plane 3 shows the summary state of
the main feeders, plane 4 shows the single-switching states and
so on). Planes can overlap magnification ranges of other planes.
IMM provides standardized interfaces for import and export of
source data (fig. 7.2-4). Network data and facility data, as well
446
as graphic data, can be imported or exported via these interfaces. The ability to import large or small amounts of data is
supported for the purpose of major or minor system updates and
the initial loading of the database (bulk loading). The following
functions are provided:
Single point for all data changes. Avoids the necessity of
redundant data maintenance within multiple systems and
locations
Manual data entry or by incremental or bulk data import
Workflow oriented views on existing, modified or new data
Multiple and simultaneous data entry sessions of different
users on different Spectrum Power user interface consoles
CIM-based data model allows easy incorporation of future
information types
Lifecycle management for planned data modifications
Data structure version management and automatic data model
archiving facilities provides a history of changes as well as an
outlook to the planned model at a certain time in the future to
reflect the evolutionary nature of models
Automatic change detection
Automatic and on request data validation provides information
consistency and secures the integrity of the model
Activation of data modifications without impact on Spectrum
Power runtime system
Automatic Spectrum Power system wide dissemination of
data modifications
Role-based security features and audit records
Instance-level access rights provide clear responsibilities within
the whole data model
Display (worldmap) editing and automatic generation of
displays based on the topology of the network models.
Report generation
Hierarchical Model Management supports data maintenance
and exchange of modified data in a system of hierarchically
arranged control centers in an automated way to prevent
model inconsistencies between or within organizations.
Energy Management
Fig. 7.2-5: Typical control room environment
Providing comprehensive
views on geospatial and
schematic network
diagrams to make the job
of operators more
efficient, effective an
satisfying
7
Fig. 7.2-6: Sample visualization of geospatial and network diagrams
User interface
The user interface of the Spectrum Power control system
provides powerful functions to ensure an overview at all times
and to permit fast and easy switching between views across all
worldmaps. The user interface allows the user to operate the
networks and power plant efficiently and permits the administrator to maintain the database and system parameters. The
system uses static and dynamic display elements to display the
network structure and network state. The user interface provides
means for guiding the operator to the workflows, e.g., by
checking the plausibility of switching actions after each operating step. Multi-screen operation using drag and drop supports
the operator in having a good overview of the power system and
in accessing the required equipment in a fast and comfortable
manner (fig. 7.2-5 - fig. 7.2-7).
Fig. 7.2-7: Sample user interface

The remote terminal interface of Spectrum Power is the Communication Front End (CFE). It is part of the control center
system and communicates with the other subsystems of a
Spectrum Power control system via the local area network
(LAN). CFE has direct access to the remote terminal units (RTU)
of various manufacturers. The control center system is connected to the substations or power plants through these RTUs,
which transmit process data of the power supply system. The
data is preprocessed by the CFE, which exchanges data with the
RTU, preprocesses data in real time and monitors and controls
the system, including redundant components.
447
Energy Management
CFE supports different connections of remote terminal units as

point-to-point, multiple point-to-point and multi-point. The
transmission can be spontaneous, cyclic, periodic or scanned.
The process interface is able to process several protocols such
as IEC 870-5-101 or the metered value protocol IEC 870-5-102.
Substation equipment (RTUs, submasters) having a TCP/IP
Interface according to the standard IEC 60870-5-104 may be
connected via a WAN link directly to the CFE LAN. Both dual
channel connections and multi-channel connections are possible (fig. 7.2-8).
The following data are implemented in the process data
preprocessing:
Detection of state changes with image maintenance (old/new
comparison of Status messages; forwarding only on change)
Intermediate position suppression (parameterizable
monitoring time)
Plausibility check of all numeric values (error message on
invalid data or limit violations)
Threshold value monitoring of analog values (passed on only
if a parameterized threshold value is exceeded)
Measured value smoothing (parameterizable filtering function)
Resultant value formation from raw values using specific
characteristics
Renewal check of cyclically transmitted values
Information type conversion for raised/cleared indication
and transient indications
Time processing and time synchronization. The CFE server
regularly receives the absolute time. The substations are
synchronized via time signal transmitters or by protocol
specific synchronization telegrams. All information is kept
internally with a resolution of 1 ms.
Monitoring of remote terminal units, communication
connections and system components.
Operator workplace
Communication between control centers

with ICCP and ELCOM
The necessity of process data exchange between control centers,
often from different vendors, is increasing worldwide. Examples
are hierarchical control centers, the interconnection of networks, energy exchange between suppliers or the use of
external billing systems.
Defacto standard protocols for communication between control
centers have been established, e.g., ELCOM-90 or ICCP. The ICCP
protocol was defined as an international standard (IEC 870-6
TASE.2) and is now widely accepted and used all over the world.
The Inter-Control Center Communication Protocol (ICCP) is
designed to allow data exchange over wide area networks
(WANs) between a utility control center and other control centers. Examples of other control centers include neighboring
utilities, power pools, regional control centers and non-utility
generators. Exchanged data may include cyclic data, real-time
data and supervisory control commands such as measured
values and operator messages.
Data exchange occurs between a SCADA/EMS server of one
control center and the server of another control center. The ICCP
server is responsible for access control when a client requests
data. One ICCP server may interact with several clients.
Access control of data elements between control centers is
implemented through bilateral agreements. A bilateral agreement is a document negotiated by two control centers that
includes the elements (that is, data and control elements) that
each is willing to transmit to the other.
Operator workplace
B&W
printer
Color
printer
UI server
GPS clock
A B C D E 0 1
F G H I K 2 3
L MN O P 4 5
Q R S T U 6 7
V WX Y Z 8 9
LAN switches
2X
2X
14X
14X
Database server 1 + 2
RTS server 1 + 2
Fig. 7.2-8: Sample hardware configuration of a power control system
448
PSOS server 1 + 2
CS server 1 + 2
Application server 1 + 2
Energy Management
The ICCP data link supports a redundant configuration utilizing

dual communication servers in active and standby mode. A
redundant configuration supports two physically separate paths
between the Spectrum Power control systems and the remote
system to provide backup in the event that the primary data path
becomes unavailable.
Historical information system
Storage of process data and processing of historical data is an
important basis for various power control system functions
(fig. 7.2-9):
Historical data allows trending and general data analysis
Forecast applications (for example load forecast) need a
consistent set of historical data as input
Historical data allows post mortem analysis for example in case
of disturbances
Reports and audit trails are generated from historical data
Historical data is used to restore past scenarios as input for
studies (for example power flow studies)
Historical data is also an important input to asset management
(for example monitoring of equipment maintenance cycles).
Analog values, accumulator values and calculated values (for
example state estimator results) can be stored in the Historical
Information System as well as status information and messages
(for example alarms).
The data to be archived is collected from SCADA and applications
(for example state estimator). The data can be collected either
spontaneously or at a configurable cycle. Based on the stored
data, the historical information system provides aggregations
(minimum, maximum, average, integral, sum) and calculations.
Missing or incorrect data can be entered or updated manually.
Compression,
Aggregation,
Calculation
The online part of the historical information system provides the

historical data for immediate access. The retention period for
this online part is configurable (typically 1 to 3 years). Historical
data that exceeds this retention period can be stored to and
reloaded from the so called long term archive.
Multi-site operation of control centers
With the multi-site operation subsystem in Spectrum Power, the
operator is provided with a powerful tool for optimizing operation management. It is possible to transfer network management
partially or wholly from one control center to another. Emergency
concepts can thus be designed and implemented effectively.
Such a capability provides for greater reliability of the system
(emergency strategies) and makes a considerable contribution to
cost reduction. The multi-site control centers can be configured
from two or more control centers and permit a very flexible and
dynamic system. In the event of failures, each system continues
to work autonomously. After recovery of the communication link,
the data is automatically updated.
Energy accounting
Energy Accounting (EA) provides the capability to collect, edit
and store generation, interchange and other energy values on a
periodic basis. These energy values are processed from accumulator data collected from the field and monitored by SCADA. EA
also performs various aggregate calculations such as the inadvertent energy, calculations of energy values over multiple time
periods (e.g., hourly, weekly, monthly, yearly), etc. for reporting
and billing purposes. EA provides extensive editing support such
as keeping track of original value, changed value, time of
change, author of change, etc. for auditing purpose.
Long Term
Archive
Measurements
Offline
Archive
HIS
Web
Server
Online Archive
Events / Alarms
(Historical
Information
System)
Data Collection
Buffered for
Redundancy
Application Results
Office
Tools
Import
Exportt
ODBC,
JDBC
Incoming Data
HIS Web User Interface
Excel
SQL
Fig. 7.2-9: Smart data archiving solutions for intelligent grids
449
Energy Management
Load shedding
The load shedding application automatically performs load
rejection or disconnection of parts of the network in the event of
certain faults and emergencies in order to maintain system
stability. It analyzes the state of the network, detects significant
events, defines the load to be shed and prepares the required
switching actions. The emergency strategies can be configured
individually. Depending on the customer requirements, a
configuration can be selected from a simple manual solution to a
fully automatic system for dealing with faults and emergencies.
The following strategies are possible:
Manual load shedding
Rotating load shedding (generation shortage for
extended time)
Equipment overload load shedding (delay/avoid tripping
of equipment)
Balancing load shedding (import target deviation, islanding)
Under-frequency load shedding (system stability).
7.2.2 Power and Generation

Applications
The aim of the Power Applications (PA) is to support frequency
control, i.e., the power system stability (equilibrium between
generation and demand), whilst maintaining an optimum
generation dispatch and scheduled interchanges across the
power system interconnections. The power applications support
single area control, multiple autonomous area controls and
hierarchical area control configurations. To enable this real-time
process the power applications provide several functions:
Load Frequency Control (LFC)

LFC provides control mechanisms that maintain equilibrium
between generation and demand in real-time. At the hart of LFC
is a PI-controller that, combining actual generation, interchange
and frequency, calculates the deviation from equilibrium,
referred to as the Area Control Error (ACE), and sends accordingly correction signals to the (single, groups of, virtual, etc.)
generating units participating to this regulation process to
maintain or restore equilibrium. The corrections will be calculated to meet numerous generation unit operating constraints
(base/target point, operating and response limits, etc.). LFC will
also implement the necessary corrections to satisfy performance
criteria defined, typically, by a regulatory body such as NERC in
the US or UCTE in Europe (fig. 7.2-10).
In parallel a performance monitoring function will collect all
data related to the performance of such an automatic control
according to the pre-specified criteria and store this information
for reporting as required by the regulatory body.
Production Cost Monitoring (PCM)
The PCM function calculates, typically, the cost of production for
monitoring, e.g., deviations from optimum cost, from planned
cost, etc. and for recording purpose. In the case of an ISO/TSO
the function may be configured to include the regulating cost.
450
Reserve Monitoring (RM)

RM calculates reserve contributions to reserve from generation
and interchanges and compares them to the requirements.
The requirements are typically defined by a regulatory body to
guarantee continued security of operation following the loss of
a generating unit or an interconnection. These requirements
are divided in 2 or 3 categories, e.g., spinning, secondary and
tertiary reserves, characterized by the response time window in
which such reserves can be activated. Reserve can include many
types of generation and interchange capabilities. For example,
peakers would be included in secondary reserve and load shedding would be included in tertiary reserve.
Economic Dispatch (ED)
ED optimally dispatches generation to meet the net interchange,
system load and network losses whilst respecting generation
operating limits. Depending on the operating business, i.e.,
GMS, EMS or ISO/TSO, ED objective will vary from optimizing
production and/or regulating costs to optimizing profits. ED will
also operates different dispatch modes, each including a different generation set, e.g., online units under AGC control and
in economic mode, online units under automatic control and
online units under plant control, etc.
Forecasting applications
Forecasting applications are used for predicting the system (i.e.,
area and customer group) load, water inflow (hydro) and wind
as the basis for generation and interchange planning/scheduling.
These applications are also used in support of operation as
real-time conditions changes. The load forecast applications
further described below supports, besides electricity, also commodities such as water and gas; supports multiple concurrent
users and a working forecast environment to allow for review
and tuning/adjustments before load forecast is made current for
real-time use; and provides for adjustments (e.g., scaling) and
tracking mode (i.e., the next few hours of the active forecast are
(automatically or on manual request) adjusted based on the
observed deviations between the actual measurement and
forecast during the last few hours).
Power applications
Load
frequency
control
Control area
Production
cost
monitoring
Generation
area
Consumers
Schedules
Generating
units
Schedules
Consumers
Economic
dispatch
Rerserve
monitoring
Fig. 7.2-10: Automatic generation control with power applications
Energy Management
transactions in such a way that either the total operating cost is

minimized or the total profit on energy sales is maximized after
taking all maintenance and operational constraints into account.
Medium-/Long-Term Load Forecast (MTLF/LTLF)

MTLF is used to forecast the load over a period of 1 week up to 2
years whilst LTLF is used to forecast the load over a period of 1
year up to 5 years. The methods used in both applications are
processing historical data with multiple regression analysis (one
method is based on the ARIMA model).
Short-Term Load Forecast (STLF)
STLF is used to forecast the load over a period of few days up to
14 days in 30-60 minutes increments. The load forecast supports
several prediction algorithms (e.g., Similar Day, Pattern
Matching, and Regression Analysis) that can be used separately
or in user configurable combination and provides the operator
with tools to edit the forecast.
Very Short-Term Load Forecast (VSTLF)
VSTLF is used to forecast the load over a 1-2 hour period in
short, e.g., 5 minutes, time increments. The method used by
VSTLF is based on a neural network algorithm and its use divided
in two phases: the training phase and the forecast phase.
Training is executed automatically periodically or on request.
Short-Term Inflow Forecast (STIF)
STIF calculates future inflows into a hydrological system. On the
basis of this data, the planning function (e.g., hydro scheduling)
can calculate the schedule for hydro plant units.
Scheduling applications
The aim of Scheduling Applications (SA) is to optimize the use of
individual power plants (thermal, hydro) and external power
The scheduling applications use a sophisticated combination of

Mixed Integer Linear Programming and successive Linear
Programming. Special techniques are applied to consider
non-linear effects and speed up the solution process (fig. 7.2-11).
The scheduling applications include:
Resource Scheduler (RO)
Resource scheduler optimizes either the medium-term generation plan including energy transactions for minimum cost or the
medium-term electricity delivery contracts including energy
trades for maximum profit subject to optimal use of energy
resources (fuels, water, emission, etc.), to maintenance constraints, to emission rights, etc.
RO determines therefore the optimal generation schedules, the
amount of traded energy in bilateral, forward and spot markets,
and the corresponding consumption of resources (fuels, emission, etc.).
Hydro-Thermal Coordination (HTC)
Generation Scheduler optimizes the short-term (thermal and
hydro) unit commitment & generation plan including energy
transactions for minimum cost subject to maintenance, forecasted load, reserve requirement, energy resources (fuels, water,
emission, etc.) and emission constraints. Results (e.g., reservoir
levels, accumulated fuel consumption, etc.) from the Resource
Stochastic
7
5-20 years
Expansion planning
Applications
Maintenance scheduling
1-5 years
Long-term
planning
Long-term
bilateral trading
1-2 years
1-7 days
Resource optimization
Short-term
planning
Day-ahead
trading
Hydro-thermal coordination
Deterministic
Trade optimizing scheduler
1-15 minutes
Dispatch
Online
Control
Real-time
trading
Economic dispatch
Automatic generation control
Fig. 7.2-11: Generation management and planning
451
Energy Management
Scheduler at the end of the short-term planning horizon are

used as targets by the Generation Scheduler application. Unit
Commitment and Hydro Scheduling are integral parts of this
application.
Trade Optimizing Scheduler (TOS)
TOS is one way of using HTC determining key figures for the
short-term bilateral trading decisions, and for the bidding on the
spot markets. The results of this function are the volumes to be
bid on the spot markets or the marginal costs of production. Free
capacities and profiles of marginal prices may be obtained by
a stepwise variation of demand, which is especially suited for
the intraday business. Detailed results are available for deeper
analysis. Specific market models allow the modeling of regulation markets, reserve markets, energy markets and fuel markets.
7.2.3 Transmission Applications

The Transmission Network Applications (TNA) suite provides
tools for the advanced monitoring, security assessment and
operational improvement of the operation of an electrical
transmission network. They are used to:
Provide a fast and comprehensible assessment of the current
state of the network and improve monitoring by/beyond
SCADA
Assess the security against faults & outages
Provide preventive/corrective measures against planned/
existing events
Optimize operation against costs & losses
These applications considerably increase operational reliability

and efficiency in network management. TNA responds automatically to the many different operational (secure, unsecure,
emergency) conditions to provide the appropriate support the
operator. The application suite will execute, in real-time, periodically, on events and on operator request as a configurable
sequence (fig. 7.2-12). Among many other features, TNA also
supports study mode allowing concurrent users to execute
different studies including preparing corrective strategies,
preparing next day operating plan, analyzing post-mortem
operational events, etc.
In study mode the retrieval of data is user configurable and

offers additional retrieval options typically not applicable in
real-time.
State Estimator (SE)
The purpose of this function is to provide a reliable and complete network solution from the real-time measurements,
pseudo-measurements (e.g., non-telemetered loads) from Model
Update (MU) and operator entries. The state estimator will
identify the observable parts of the network where real-time
measurements are redundant. Using this redundancy, the state
estimator will identify bad measurements, remove them from
the valid set of measurements, and then solve for the complete
network combining, for the portion of the network that is
unobservable, isolated measurements and load, generation and
bus voltage scheduled by the MU function. The state estimator
will also alarm the operator of any operational limit violations. It
will also enable other applications to develop reliable solutions
to specific aspects of network operation (e.g., remedial actions
against operational limit violations). The state estimator features:
Orthogonal transformation algorithm
Measurement consistency check
Chi-Square test w/ Normalized Residual or Measurement
Compensation approach
Single-pass solution
Enforcement of equipment limits in the unobservable parts
of the network.
Although the State Estimators essential task is to process realtime data, the State Estimator can optionally also be executed
in study mode for, for example, post-mortem analysis.
Network Parameter Adaptation (NPA)
The NPA maintains a time-dependent database of adapted
network data used by the network model update to schedule
net interchanges, bus loads, regulated voltages, and statuses
Outage scheduler
Transmission network applications (real-time)

Network sensitivity
OS
SCADA
SCADA
Network
model
update
State
estimator
Fault calculations
Security analysis
Network Model Update (NMU)

The NMU integrates all external and internal information,
construct the network topology, and update accordingly the
network data required to create the operating conditions to
be evaluated by the State Estimator or the Power Flow, i.e.:
Gathering data from SCADA and other external sources such
as AGC, Load Forecast and Outage Scheduler (user options in
study)
Performing topological analysis including identification of
electrical island(s), energized/de-energized equipment(s), etc.
Scheduling accordingly all network loads, generations,
regulation settings, and limits.
User interface
UI
Network
parameter
adaptation
Security analysis
look ahead
Voltage scheduler
Scheduling appl.
STLF
Security dispatch
COP
Case management
Power applications
AGC
Information model
management
Fig. 7.2-12: Spectrum Power TNA real-time sequence
452
Energy Management
of time-dependent breakers. NPA adapts these network data in

real-time via exponential smoothing using the state estimator
results. Then,
In real time execution, the parameters are used by the model
update function to schedule loads and regulated bus voltages
to be used by State Estimator as pseudo measurements at
unobservable buses.
In study, the parameters are used by the model update
function to schedule loads and regulated bus voltages for the
user-specified study day-type and hour. The results are then
used by the Power Flow.
Dispatcher Power Flow (DPF)
DPF is used to evaluate the network state under various operating conditions in the present or the future such as, for
example, tomorrows work plan. It is used exclusively in study
and typically in conjunction with other applications such as
Security Analysis and Optimal Power Flow.
DPF solves either user selectable using the Fast Decoupled or
Newton-Raphson algorithm. DPF supports, among many
standard features,
Continuous (e.g., generator) and discrete controllers (LTCs,
capacitors, etc.);
DC injections and branches (iterative process between DC and
AC power flows)
Area interchange control, single/distributed slack, MVAr/MW
generator curves, etc.
DPF offers plenty of user selectable options for full flexibility of
analysis.
Optimal Power Flow (OPF)
The OPF is used to improve the system operation under normal
(secure) as well as abnormal (unsecure) conditions by recommending control adjustments to achieve either of the following
optimization objectives:
SECURITY: active & reactive security optimization
COST: active cost & reactive security optimization
LOSS: loss minimization
FULL: COST optimization & LOSS optimization.
OPF solves the LOSS minimization using Newton optimization
and the other optimizations using linear programming. OPF
supports, among many standard features,
Constraint & control priorities
Constraint relaxation
(e.g., long-to-medium & medium-to-short limits)
Load shedding
OPF offers also plenty of user selectable options for full flexibility
in identifying remedial measures to operational violations and/or
in optimizing secure operational conditions. Depending on the
optimization objectives, the OPF applications can be defined as a
reactive power optimization or as an active power optimization.
OPF as described here is used only in study whilst two customized versions described below are provided for real-time use.
Voltage Scheduler (VS)

VS is a real-time application version of the OPF. It determines the
optimal use of VAr resources and the optimal voltage profile that
should be maintained in order either to minimize operational
voltage violations or/and to minimize the network losses. For
that purpose, optimal settings of reactive power controls are
determined and displayed for implementation.
When the objective is to alleviate voltage violations, minimum
shifting of controls from specified setpoints (least-squares shift)
is implemented. For that purpose, VS minimizes an objective
function consisting of the sum of the quadratic cost curves for
all control variables. Each such cost curve penalizes its related
control variable for a shift away from the target value. Weighting
of the cost curves is performed by a factor specified for each
control variable.
Remedial Dispatch (RD)
RD is a real-time application version of the OPF. It determines the
optimal use of MW resources and the optimal loading profile that
should be maintained in order either to minimize operational
overloads or/and to minimize the operating costs. For that purpose, optimal settings of active power controls are determined
and displayed for open- or closed-loop implementation. Note that
the set of overload constraints can be automatically extended to
include branch loading constraints corresponding to critically
loaded branches (user specifiable critical loading factor).
Similarly to VS, when the objective is to alleviate overloads,
minimum shifting of controls from specified setpoints (leastsquares shift) is implemented. For that purpose, RD minimizes
an objective function consisting of the sum of the quadratic
cost curves for all control variables. These costs are constructed and handled as described for VS.
Basically, RD provides optimal dispatch similarly to conventional

economic dispatch (ED). Compared to ED, however, it is
extended to also take into account network loading constraints.
This is particularly useful in usually highly loaded systems as well
as during exceptional load situations, e.g., due to outages of
generating units or transmission lines.
Security Analysis (SA)
The purpose of this function is to determine the security of the
power system under a very large number of contingencies (e.g.
n-1 criteria). Contingency evaluation in large meshed transmission networks is an exhaustive task because a lot of contingencies (single outages and multiple outages) have to be studied in
order to get a reliable result. On the other hand, usually only
very few of the possible contingencies are actually critical, and
therefore a lot of computation effort could be wasted. To
overcome this difficulty, a two-step approach is used. The two
sub-functions of SA are as follows:
Contingency Screening (CS) provides a ranking of
contingencies from the contingency list according to the
expected resulting limit violations. For that purpose, a fast
power flow calculation (user definable number of iterations) is
performed.
453
Energy Management
Contingency Analysis (CA) checks contingencies from the

ranked list produced by the CS sub-function. For each of those
contingencies, a complete AC power flow is performed.
Security analysis supports, among many features,
user specified contingency and monitored equipment lists
Single and multiple contingencies
automatic simulation of contingencies corresponding to the
real-time violations
conditional contingencies
load transfer and Generator reallocation
modeling of regulating controllers (LTC, ...)
contingency screening bypass.
Security Analysis Look-Ahead (SL)
SL provides the very same function as SA but merges, to the
base case, outages from Outage Scheduler that are scheduled
within a configurable time window from real-time. SL provides
the operator with the security impact from these scheduled
outages on real-time operation (which may differ from the
conditions used to validate the scheduling of the outage). In
case the scheduled outage put real-time operation at risk, the
operator can decide whether to cancel the outage, reschedule
the outage and/or take preventive measures to allow the
scheduled outage to take place as scheduled.
Network Sensitivity (NS)
The purpose of this function is to support calculation and management of loss penalty factors for use by Power Applications
(PA) and Scheduling Applications (SA). Penalty factors are used
for taking network transmission losses into consideration when
dispatching generation whilst minimizing total cost. This NS
function is executed automatically as part of the real-time network application sequence. It calculates, for the current network
state, the sensitivity of system losses to changes in unit generation and interchanges with neighboring companies. It, then,
maintains, using exponential smoothing, a database of such loss
sensitivities for a number of system load ranges and net interchange ranges. In real-time mode, NS operates from the network
solution produced by the state estimator function, and in study
mode from that produced by the dispatcher power flow function.
Fault Calculation (FC)

The purpose of this function is to calculate the fault current and
fault current contributions for single fault and multiple faults
(user selection). Fault rating violations at and near the fault are
provided to the operator. The short-circuit values are compared
against all circuit-breaker ratings for each circuit-breaker connected to the faulty bus. Fault current contributions from
branches and generating units near the faulted bus are also
calculated and may be compared against their respective fault
ratings. FC includes, among many features, the effects of
mutually coupled lines, the modeling of fault and fault-to-earth
impedance and the combination of a fault with a single branch
outage.
454
Operator Training Simulator (OTS)

OTS is based on 4 key components (fig. 7.1-8, section 7.1.1):
Training management function
Power system simulation
Telecontrol model
Power control system (copy).
The training management component provides tools for creating
training sessions, executing training sessions and reviewing
trainee performance. It provides tools to:
Initialize the training session, e.g., from real-time or a saved
case
Define the system load profile
Create event sequences, e.g., a breaker opening, a telemetry
failure, etc., that can be either time triggered, event triggered
or command triggered
Create training scenarios, i.e., a number of event sequences,
to be activated during the training.
It also provides start/stop and pause/resume functions for the
execution of the training session. During the training session it is
possible for the trainer to create new events and/or modify the
running scenario.
The power system simulation component provides a realistic
simulation of the power system behavior to support training
from normal operation to emergency operation including
islanding conditions and blackout restoration. The simulation is
based on a long-term dynamic modeling of the power system
including:
Load modeling with voltage & frequency dependency
Generation modeling with governor, turbine/boiler and
generator models
Frequency modeling
Voltage regulator modeling
Protection relay modeling
External company LFC modeling.
The telemetry simulation component provides the simulation of
the data communication between the power system and the
control system. It transfers as simulated field telemetry the
results of the power system simulation to the control system
copy. And it processes all commands issued by SCADA (operator), LFC, etc. and transfers them to the power system simulation. This simulated telemetry can be modified via the scenario
builder by the trainer to reflect measurement errors, telemetry
or RTU failures, etc.
This operator training simulator provides a dedicated environment for the trainee (operator) and one for the instructor that
allows the instructor to influence the process in order to force
responses from the trainees. The trainee interface is identical
with that of the control system so that, for the trainee, there is
no difference in functionality and usability between training and
real operation.
Energy Management
7.2.4 Distribution Applications
The isolation function is performed to determine a set of

switching operations to isolate an area of the network.
In distribution networks, the telemetry is relatively limited; the

fault rate is high as well as the frequency of changes in the
network. To meet these requirements, Spectrum Power provides powerful functions with which the operator can operate
the distribution network effectively and efficiently (fig. 7.2-13).
It can be initiated by the location of the faulty segment or area,

or by selecting sections directly on the user interface. The purpose is to isolate sections or areas of the network specified by the
isolation request to minimize the outage effect on the network.
Fault Management
Fault management is a set of applications used for locating
system incidents and providing fault (or planned outage)
isolation and service restoration in distribution networks.
Service restoration provides a possible choice of switching

procedures to restore service. For each switching procedure
suggested by the restoration tool, performance indices are
calculated based on the network conditions.
The main Fault Management functionality consists of:

Fault location
Locating the faulty section or area of the network as closely as
possible
Fault isolation
Isolating the planned outage or the faulty section or area of
the network
Service restoration
Restoring power to de-energized non-faulty areas of the
network
Fault isolation and immediate restoration
Isolating faulty areas and immediately restoring power to
de-energized areas of the non-faulty or isolated network
Restore to normal or pre-fault state
Restoring selected number of switches to their normal state
or pre-fault state.
The user can select the way of ranking of suggested switching

procedures according to one or more performance indices and
select the best one for service restoration.
Fault location, as a part of the Fault Management application,

helps to locate permanent faults. Outage faults (for example,
short circuits) as well as non-outage faults (for example earth
faults) are considered. Fault location is performed by using
remotely controlled and manually updated information (communicated by the field crews) from, for example, protection devices
and fault indicators. Fault Management localizes the faulty
section as closely as possible, based on available real-time data
from SCADA and/or field crews. Measurements from impedance
fault relays can be utilized to locate the faulty section more
accurately.
Fig. 7.2-13: Reliability, safety, efficiency: the advantages of advanced

distribution network operation with Spectrum Power DNA
Fault Management switching procedures are typically transferred

to a Switching Procedure Management (SPM) application for
further processing, that is, edit, review and implementation.
Fault isolation and service restoration can also be used for
sections isolation due to maintenance work.
Outage Management (OM)
is a collection of functions, tools and procedures that an operator/dispatcher uses to manage the detection, location, isolation, correction and restoration of faults that occur in the power
supply system. OM is also used to facilitate the preparation and
resolution of outages that are planned for the network. These
processes are used to expedite the execution of the tasks associated with the handling of outages that affect the network and
provide support to operators at all stages of the outage lifecycle,
starting from events such as the reception of a trouble call or a
SCADA indication of an outage and extending until power is
restored to all customers (fig. 7.2-16). This process is used to
solve the outage regardless of whether the outage is at the level
of a single distribution transformer providing power to one or a
few energy consumers, or at the level of a primary substation
providing power to many energy consumers. All operations,
authorizations and comments that occur in these processes are
documented and collected in outage records. This information is
made available to external sites for further statistical analysis
and processing. OM provides the automatic processing of an
outage record used to monitor changes in the network and has
an internal interface to Crew Management (CM), Switching
Procedure Management (SPM), and Trouble Call Management
(TCM). Data communication to external applications is enabled
through Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA) adapters.
Prediction Engine
A further beneficial feature is the Prediction Engine. It evaluates
trouble information from all available sources, e.g., generated
manually or by external applications such as Customer Information System (CIS), Interactive Voice Response (IVR) or by corporate websites, and is able to relate those calls to a service point
and associated transformer. While doing this, trouble calls are
grouped and associated to a predicted outage event based on
455
Energy Management
configurable rules and heuristics. OM provides the operator with

customer-related information about the outage; the customers
data and outage information is always logged (fig. 7.2-14). The
user has the opportunity to manually push a grouped outage
upstream or downstream forcing it to group respectively to a
common device or disperse into multiple predicted outages.
Storm Mode
During certain peak conditions (e.g., extreme weather conditions), the OM must provide the capability to handle the large
number of trouble calls from customers or via smart meters, and
guide and support the operator to focus on most important
events. By activating the Storm Mode, the Prediction Engine
changes the rule settings appropriately, for example:
Suppress those MDM messages and deactivate them from the
Prediction Engine calculations that are related to already
known outages
Filtering for more severe outages by increasing the threshold
for notified trouble calls or AMI signals that are required to
move a predicted outage location upstream
Suppress local service outages from appearing on the
geospatial worldmaps
Queue up trouble calls for a defined period of time before
using them for prediction.
Switching Procedure Management (SPM)
SPM allows the operator to create, edit, select, sort, print,
execute and store switching procedures. Entries in a switching
procedure can be created manually by recording the operators
actions in a Simulation mode, by modifying an existing procedure or by recording the operators actions in real-time mode or
automatically by applications such as FISR and the OM system.
The switching procedure management capabilities can be used
Fig. 7.2-14: Distribution SCADA, outage management and advanced

fault and network analysis operated under one common
user environment
to prepare, study and execute clearance operations. It can also

be used to execute switching operations to alleviate fault conditions and to restore power following a fault, as well as to optimize the network operation. SPM provides management capabilities via summary displays and easy-to-use menus.
Crew Management (CM)
This system provides convenient access to the information
necessary to track, contact and assign work schedules (outage
records) to the field crews of a utility. The information consists
of data such as crew name, work assignments and locations.
Trouble Call Management (TCM)
This system provides convenient access to the information
necessary to track, contact and assign work schedules (outage
records) to the field crews of a utility. The information consists
of data such as crew name, work assignments and locations.
Enter New
Trouble Call
Unplanned Outage
Trouble Call Operator

(Back Office)
Predicted
Outage
Operator (Control Room)
Review
Outage
Details and
Location
Assign Crew
to Assess
Fault
Manual
Update of
Network
Status
Assign
Crew
for Repair
Work
Assess
Fault
Crew (On Site)
Spectrum Power ADMS supports the complete workflow chain
Fig. 7.2-15: A typical workflow in managing the distribution grid
456
Manual
Update of
Network
Status
Repair
Fault
Close
Outage
Energy Management
Distribution network applications

The distribution system network applications (DNA) provide fast
and comprehensive analysis and optimization of the current
distribution network state. The Distribution System Power Flow
(DSPF) calculates voltages (magnitudes and angles) for all nodes
(busbars), active/reactive powers for slack buses, and reactive
power/voltage angles for nodes with PV generators. All other
electrical result values are calculated from the node voltages and
branch impedances/admittances after DSPF is solved. The most
important result values are flows (powers kW / kVArs and currents
A) through lines and transformers, and active and reactive power
losses that allow to detect potential limit violations.
The minimum shortcircuit current that can be a basis for the

protection sensitivity checking or fuses selection
Fault current calculation at selected locations
DSPF is used to calculate the network statuses under different

load conditions and configurations:
Calculate the actual state of the distribution networks using
real-time measurements and the current topology
Calculate the state of the distribution network in the near
future (look-ahead) with actual topology but load values of the
given time
Study the state of the distribution network in the near future
with different topology (i.e., according to planned
maintenance) and the load values of the given time.
SCC can be started on demand to calculate a single fault and can

run in screening mode. In screening mode, SCC checks breaking
capability, protection sensitivity and earth fault current for a
selectable area or the entire distribution network.
Distribution System State Estimator (DSSE) provides a solution

for monitoring the actual operating state of the network and to
provide a complete network solution for further analysis, for
example, optimization of voltage profile.
DSSE provides the statistical estimates of the most probable
active and reactive power values of the loads using existing measured values, switching positions, and initial active and reactive
power consumption of the power system loads.
The initial active and reactive power values of the loads are
provided by static load curves or load schedules (generated
based on load curves and measured values/meter readings).
Further DSSE estimates the real-time network operating state
using measured values.
DSPF and DSSE can handle both symmetrical balanced as well as
unsymmetrical unbalanced distribution systems.
The results of DSPF/DSSE are presented on network diagrams
and in tabular displays.
Short-Circuit Calculation (SCC)
This application helps operator to detect possible problems
regarding short circuits, to check capability of circuit breakers
and to check if earth fault currents are within the limits. Based
on the results and warnings of SCC, the user can initiate or reject
changes of the network topology.
SCC solves symmetric or asymmetric faults in symmetrical
balanced as well as in unsymmetrical unbalanced distribution
networks. The SCC function is used to determine:
The maximum shortcircuit current that determines the rating of
electrical equipment (normally a circuit-breaker for real-time SCC)
The following fault types are supported, and each of them may
contain fault impedance and/or earthing impedance, depending
on user requirements:
3-phase faults without earth (ground) connection
3-phases faults with earth (ground) connection
2-phase faults without earth (ground) connection
2-phases faults with earth (ground) connection
1-phase to earth (ground), with or without earthed neutral point.
The results of SCC are presented on network diagrams and in

tabular displays.
Voltage/VAr Control (VVC)
VVC calculates the optimal settings of the voltage controller of
LTCs, voltage regulators and capacitor states, optimizing the
operations according to the different objectives. The following
objectives are supported by the application:
Minimize distribution system power loss
Minimize power demand (reduce load while respecting given
voltage tolerance)
Maximize generated reactive power in distribution network
(provide reactive power support for transmission/distribution
bus)
Maximize revenue (the difference between energy sales and
energy prime cost)
Keep the system within constraints.
System operational constraints such as line loading and consumer voltage limits are automatically accounted for in terms of
penalties. VVC supports three modes of operation:
The optional volt/watt optimization allows to control the active
power of battery storage systems and flexible loads (as interface
to demand respond management systems).
Online mode
The purpose of this mode is to provide an optimal solution that
conforms to the desired objective function.
What if? VVC studies online
The purpose of this mode is to provide an optimal solution that
reflects the current Status of the distribution network with the
actual topology but with different loading values.
Study VVC
The purpose of this mode is to allow the user to execute
short-term operational studies, with different topology and
different loading values.
The output of VVC application includes the switching procedure
for implementing the solution and the values of the objective
457
Energy Management
functions before and after optimization. In online mode, VVC

supports both open-loop (VVC proposes switching actions) as
well as closed-loop (VVC actually initiates switching commands
to implement the solution). Results such as flows, currents,
voltages and losses are displayed on network diagrams and
tabular displays.
Optimal Feeder Reconfiguration (OFR)
The objective of this application is to enhance the reliability of
distribution system service, power quality and distribution
system efficiency by reconfiguring the primary distribution
feeders. OFR performs a multi-level reconfiguration to meet one
of the following objectives:
Optimally unload an overload segment (removal of constraint
violations)
Load balancing among supply substation transformers
Minimization of feeder losses
Combination of the latter two objectives (load balancing and
loss minimization), where each objective is included in the
total sum with a user-specified or default weighting factor.
System operational constraints such as line loading and consumer voltage limits are automatically accounted for in terms of
penalties. OFR supports two modes of operation: In online
mode, the application uses the existing real-time measurements
and the current topology. In the study mode, the operator can
simulate short-term operational studies with different topology
and measurements. The output of OFR application includes the
switching procedure for reconfiguration and the values of the
objective functions before and after reconfiguration.
Distribution Contingency Analysis (DCA)

The objective of this application is to see the influence of faults
(unplanned outages) as well as planned outages on the security
of the distribution network.
DCA assesses
N-1 security in all meshed parts of the distribution network
Security of simplified restoration procedures based on the
current reserve
Security of reconfiguration scenarios (back-feed, coupling of
substations, etc.)
Security of pre-defined restoration procedures
Security of scheduled switching procedures.
DCA simulates single, multiple and cascading/conditional faults
as well as outages of distributed generation.
Expert system applications
The Spectrum Power expert system supports the operator in
solving critical and complex tasks in the field of network operation and disturbance analysis. Spectrum Power expert system
applications provide two functions, an intelligent alarm processor (IAP) and an expert system for Advanced Network Operation (ANOP).
458
The IAP provides information about the fault location in case of a

network disturbance. It is based upon a hierarchical, multi-level
problem-solving architecture that combines model-based and
heuristic techniques, and works with an object-oriented data
structure. Within the diagnosis, the IAP determines the location
and the type of disturbances in electrical networks, e.g., fault
within a transformer. The model used by the IAP corresponds to
the model of the protection system. This provides the additional
advantage of monitoring the correct operation of the protection
system. The diagnosis results are displayed in the XPS report list.
Advanced Network Operation (ANOP)
This system supports the following network operations of the
operator:
Automatically triggered operations for:
Automatic fault isolation and restoration
Automatic removal of overload
Manually triggered operations for:
Manual fault isolation and restoration (trigger fault)
Planned outage (take out of Service)
Load relax
Resupply (energizing).
The algorithm of ANOP manages all types of distribution networks for cities or provinces, small networks or large networks
with radial configurations and also with looped configurations.
It can be used in telemetered networks as well as in non-telemetered networks. The algorithm is fully generic, considers the
actual network status (topology, values, tagging), and provides
an authentic and extensive solution for the given task, taking
into account all electrical and operational requirements. The
algorithm develops the best strategy for the given situation and
considers all necessary steps to reach a solution that fulfils the
task in a secure, complete and efficient way.
With the help of the built-in power flow, each step is checked;
tagged equipment is respected. The proposed solution changes
the actual topology of the network in a minimal way. In the
exceptional case in which a complete solution is not available
under the actual circumstances, a partial solution is evaluated,
again taking into account all electrical and operational requirements. The results are displayed in the XPS report list and in the
XPS balance list, and a switching procedure is created and
inserted in the switching procedure management.
Energy Management
7.2.5 Advanced Distribution

Management System (ADMS)
Energy distribution systems become increasingly complex due to
the integration of distributed energy resources and storage,
smart metering and demand response. In combination with
increased grid automation, this leads to inundating utilities
systems with data that needs to be intelligently managed. At the
same time, utilities are under growing regulatory and customer
pressure to maximize grid utilization and provide reliability at all
times.
Traditionally, utilities have approached distribution grid management from different perspectives: Some were applying Distribution SCADA systems with focus on real-time monitoring and
control, while others were applying Outage Management (OM)
systems with focus on managing large amounts of planned work
and unplanned outage activities with less focus on activities in
real-time. Application packages for grid analysis and optimization were somehow available, but more or less only loosely
coupled. Such approaches are inadequate to sufficiently respond
to todays challenges that require common addressing of formerly separated concepts such as grid loss minimization, congestion management, outage management, and automated
service restoration.
An innovative concept is needed to combine SCADA, outage
management, and fault and network analysis functions on a
software platform under a common user interface, and thus
overcome these deficiencies. Furthermore, the concept has
to consider that in todays distribution utilities, everything
concerning managing the grid must be integrated into the
utilitys IT.
Catering to the next era of distribution control systems, the
ADMS integrates three core components Distribution SCADA,
OM, and Advanced Fault and Network Analysis operated under a
Common User Environment (Fig. 7.2-16). It enables the user to:
Monitor, control and optimise the secure operation of the
distribution network
Efficiently manage day-to-day maintenance efforts, while
guiding operators during critical periods such as storms and
outage related restoration activities.
Reducing fault location and service interruption time

Outage Management (OM, incl. Trouble Call Management and
Mobile Crew Management) and Switching Procedure
Management (SPM) integrated with Smart Metering (MDM/
AMI)
Automated Fault Location, Isolation and Service Restoration
(FLOC and FISR). Reducing network loading at peak times and
increasing asset utilization
Optimal Voltage/VAr Control (DNA/VVC) to enable voltage
reduction, integrating the possible use of Distributed
Generation
Optimal Feeder Reconfiguration (DNA/OFR) to enable removal/
reduction of (active/foreseen) overload, integrating the
possible use of Distributed Generation and Demand Response.
Increasing network efficiency and reliability of supply
Optimal Voltage/VAr Control (DNA/VVC) to enable features
such as loss reduction and improved voltage profiles,
integrating the possible use of Distributed Generation
Optimal Feeder Reconfiguration (DNA/OFR) to enable load
balancing, etc.
Distribution Load Forecast (DLF) to enable operational
planning with the above functions.
Increasing operational efficiency
Workspace Management, Test Mode and integrated tools
under a common user environment to automate the users
workflow
Performance and sizing capabilities to enable LV modeling
integration (EU and big US city centers)
Integration with Condition Monitoring for asset usage
reporting and asset secure state retrieval.
Increasing business process integration

SOA framework to enable CIM-based SOA integration with
other systems (e.g., CIS, MDM)
GIS smart integration to enable GIS as distribution network
definition source master.
ADMS integrates the intelligent use of smart meter information

and distributed resources regulating capabilities at the same
time, thus providing a solid foundation for the management of
the emerging Smart Grid.
Increasing the operators situation awareness
and reducing the operators reaction time with its geospatial/
schematic user interface and integrated substation/feeder
auto-displays:
Distribution SCADA (D-SCADA) to enable the integration of
Substation/Feeder Automation; and
Distribution State Estimation (DNA/DSSE) to determine the
real-time state of the network.
Fig. 7.2-16: Spectrum Power ADMS the 3-in-1 solution
459
Energy Management
Fig. 7.2-17: Spectrum Power ADMS Distribution SCADA, Advanced Fault, Network Analysis and Outage Management operated
on one technology platform with one common user interface
CM
DNA
GDIM
HIS
ICCP
IFS
IMM
OM
RTU
SAS
TS
TCM
UI
Crew Management
Distribution Network
Applications
Geographical Data
Import Management
Historical Information
System
Inter Control-Center
Communication
Protocol
Independent
Front-End System
Information Model
Manager
Outage Management
Substation
Automation System
Trainings Simulator
Trouble Call
Management
User Interface
Fig. 7.2-18: Spectrum Power ADMS Architecture
The emerging Smart Grid produces a very large amount of data

to be processed (e.g., data from smart meters). Advanced DMS
provides the transformation of this impressive volume of data
into the minimum amount of actionable information for the
efficient operation of the grid.
Spectrum Power ADMS is characterized by its unique common
user environment enabling operation of all ADMS functions from
a common web-based user interface while using a common
operational network data model (fig. 7.2-17). The operational
model is kept aware of, or synchronized with, model changes
implemented in the GIS when readied for real-time operation.
And the user interface integrates, under a common geospatial
visualization tool (i.e., schematic views, geospatial maps and
tabular lists), the distribution SCADA operation, the complete
work and outage management process, and the use of the
complet suite of advanced applications. Other external applica-
460
tions can also be considered for such integration via dedicated

additional data providers.
With its component-based architecture and common user
environment, Spectrum Power Advanced DMS provides a
flexible, configurable environment for advanced grid management compatible with the different market requirements.
ADMS is typically provided as a full-scope solution, but it is
also available as follows:
Integrated with a Third-party outage management system
Integrated with a Third-party SCADA.
Enterprise integration with external systems, such as GIS, CIS,
IVR, Advanced Metering, Workforce Management and Asset
Management systems, is commonly included in these implementations via the CIM-based SOA integration framework that is an
integral part of Advanced DMS.
Energy Management
7.2.6 Active Network Management

Stable grid operation through targeted monitoring and
fast control
The challenge: unpredictability of energy infeed into the
distribution grid
The entire energy system is in motion. Decentralized power
generation from renewable sources is being expanded more
intensely, and integrated into the distribution grids. Energy
is no longer fed into the distribution grid exclusively via the
transmission grid but also directly from different often
volatile generators.
Grid management is facing challenges like an unclear, fluctuating direction of load flow and, more and more often, critical
voltage violations. There is a growing risk of voltage range
infringement, and thus malfunctions or even damaged equipment on the consumer side. At the same time, the danger of
overloads on lines, transformers and other equipment is
growing, which can even result in grid failure.
The solution: voltage and capacity management including
visualization
Processes in the distribution grids must be made visible at all
times in order to reliably assess the status and take efficient
countermeasures before critical situations arise. The Spectrum
Power Active Network Management (ANM), Siemens flexible
software solution, is a smart tool for distribution grids. It supports a wide range of equipment from transformer tap
changers and capacitor banks to controllable loads and generators including battery storage (fig. 7.2-19).
The Spectrum Power ANM displays the current load flow

directions and calculated load values, as well as voltage range
violations and overload situations. This also includes integrated
analysis and archiving functions, allowing automatic result
validation and comparison as well as reports, and facilitating
meaningful short-term and long-term views.
The Spectrum Power ANM also provides functions for convenient voltage range and capacity utilization management. This
makes it easier to predict voltage violations and equipment
overloads and substantially reduce them in connection with
control algorithms. And what about losses on the distribution
grid? These can be minimized with distinct voltage, reactive
power and active power control. The Siemens software provides
a reliable basis for making these decisions, whether automatically or in manual mode.
The benefits: higher efficiency and secure and stable supply
thanks to the Spectrum Power ANM
The Spectrum Power ANM from Siemens is an effective lever
for operating distribution grids more efficiently and with greater
control especially if there is a growing proportion of renewables in the energy mix.
Your benefits at a glance
Load flow values and load flow directions are reliably
monitored. Voltage violations and equipment overloads are
detected quickly and accurately.
Balancing measures, primarily for maintaining grid stability and
for protecting equipment, can be initiated at an early point.
Distribution losses can be effectively reduced.
An optional automatic mode allows transformer tap changers,
capacitor banks, loads and generators, including battery
storage, to be controlled without operator intervention.
Fig. 7.2-19: Spectrum Power Active Network Management stable grid operation through targeted monitoring and fast control
461
Energy Management
7.2.7 Smart Grid Energy Manager

(SGEM)
In parallel with the liberalization of the energy markets, there is
an ever-increasing need for data sharing, not just to serve the
own enterprise, but also to respond to needs from outside
entities. Sometimes this need is driven by industry entities.
Sometimes, and lately more than others, this need is driven by
industry requirements passed by governing bodies such as NERC
and FERC.
Siemens has been alert to the need for common modeling
language and integration platforms for optimizing the benefit
also to Smart Grid implementation across the power delivery
network. In developing the first product of its kind, the Smart
Grid Energy Manager (Spectrum Power SGEM), Siemens has
compiled within a single data model both planning and operations network models for both transmission and distribution and
presents model editing and tracking on a time-synchronized
basis allowing a model of the system to be derived for any
point in time in the future or history, in either a planning or an
operations protocol.
Siemens is now changing the mindset of modelers from thinking
in terms of traditional network models where individual assets
properties are aggregated into a larger component in the model
(i.e., wave traps, underground cable segments, overhead line
segments are all aggregated into one transmission line in the
network model resulting in the individual assets loosing their
identity) to terms of the network really being a series of interconnected assets. This transitional thinking results in significant
reliability, efficiency and resource optimization.
The Siemens Spectrum Power SGEM provides tools and automation to efficiently manage the exchange, validation, approval,
and commissioning of transmission network model changes
within and between RTO/ISO and Transmission Distribution
Service Provider (TDSP) operations and planning departments.
SGEM enables generating, managing, and synchronizing network model information from a single shared source to support
utility systems and applications, such as network planning,
energy management, market operations, congestion revenue
rights, outage scheduling and more. SGEM also provides
a foundation for Smart Grid information management. The
CIM-based architecture provides a unified model, auditable
model change records, approval levels for model changes,
as well as rich model documentation capabilities. It allows
chronological model tracking in a fully open environment
allowing all applications to share services and data. This greatly
reduces modeling errors, improves coordination, and streamlines processes for transmission network changes. This enables
exchanging information on a level far above the paper or file
exchanges that are in use to day.
The SGEM integrates Spectrum Power Information Model
Manager (IMM) and Siemens Model on Demand (MOD) products
into a single package. The IMM generates and maintains the
operations network model changes, while MOD tracks the
462
planning model and all planning changes. The integrated

package provides consistent, coordinated models for any point
in time based on the planned energization dates provided to the
system (fig. 7.2-20). Point of time models can be exported to
most popular applications using CIM (IEC 61970 and IEC 61968)
and CIM for planning and dynamics international standards.
The key features and capabilities are:
Industry standard CIM-based model representation.
Synchronized chronological model tracking from future to past
horizons.
Single model integration of planning, engineering, operations,
market, etc.
Electronically submit network model changes to facilitate
exchange between the RTO/ISO and the regional TDSP.
Develop a planning model for the RTO/ISO combining the
current regional operating model with the regions proposed
plans. This model can be used as the basis for evaluating
network reliability as network changes are implemented over
time.
Electronic Approval/Rejection Notification provides electronic
notification to the TDSP when a plan is approved or rejected. If
the plan is rejected, it identifies the reasons so the TSDP can
modify and resubmit the plan in a timely manner.
Approved plans are placed in a secure accessible repository.
The TDSP can access its approved plans from the repository
and use these to develop the commissioning plan necessary to
put them into operations.
Managed changes between planning and operations within the
TDSP provides streamlined electronic coordination of planning
model changes to be commissioned with the real-time operating
model.
RTO/
ISO
Dynamic
energy
analysis
Reliability
analysis
Approved
plans:
Plan 1 T&D 1
Plan 2 T&D 1
Plan 1 T&D 2
...
Plan m T&D n
Approved
plans
Transfer
limit
analysis
Congestion
analysis
Outage
evaluation
Fault
analysis
Planning model
Market
operations
Accurate external
network model
Planning model
Secure
repository
Transfer
limit
analysis
Operations
planning
Settlement
Actual network
changes
Planned change
approval, rejection
Reliability
analysis
EMS
Operating model
Current operations
model
Planned network
changes
T&D
Participant
approved
plans
CRR
auction
Current operations
model
Approved planned
network changes
Fault
analysis
Congestion
analysis
Fig. 7.2-20: Common model methodology
EMS
Operating model
Load
management
Shadow
settlement
T&D service provider
Energy Management
7.2.8 Decentralized Energy

Management Systems (DEMS)
All operation planning and scheduling applications require

forecasts with sufficient accuracy. For the characterization of the
forecasts, several operating figures are used, such as the average
forecast error per day or the absolute error per day or per forecasting time period. Depending on the main purpose of the
virtual power plant, the requirements for the forecast methods
may change. If the primary purpose is to reduce the peak load or
Generation unit s
Small hydropower plants
Accounting
DEMS
Photovoltaic
systems
n s o ur c e s
First, a virtual power plant needs a bidirectional communication

between the decentralized power units and the control center of
the energy management system. For larger units, conventional
telemetry systems based on protocols such as IEC 60870-5-101
or 60870-5-104 can be used. In the future, with an increasing
number of small decentralized power units, the communication
channels and protocols will play a more important role. It is likely
that the costly conventional telemetry technique will be substituted by other techniques based on simple TCP/IP adapters or
based on power line carrier techniques. Siemens is contributing
to the upcoming standard IEC 61850-7-420 Ed.1: Communication networks and systems in substations Part 7-420: Communications systems for distributed energy resources (DER) Logical nodes.
Energy
exchange
at i o
5. A powerful front end for the communication of the energy

management system with the decentralized power units
Block heeating
power plants
orm
4. An energy data management system which collects and keeps

the data that is required for the optimization and the forecasts, e.g., profiles of generation and loads as well as contractual data for customer supply
in f
3. A forecasting system for the generation of renewable energy

units. This forecast must be able to use weather forecasts in
order to predict the generation of wind power plants and
photovoltaics
al
2. A forecasting system for the loads that is able to calculate

very short-term forecasts (1 hour) and short-term forecasts
(up to 7 days)
Power control
system
rn
A successful operation of a virtual power plant requires the

following technical equipment:
1. An energy management system that monitors, plans and optimizes the operation of the decentralized power units
Ex
Biomass
power plants
te
In parallel with the liberalization of the energy markets, the

decentralized generation of electrical power, heat and cold
energy becomes more and more important. The generation of
these types of energy near to the consumers offers economical
and ecological benefits. In this context, interest is directed to
so-called virtual power plants. A virtual power plant is a collection of small and very small decentralized generation units that
is monitored and controlled by a superordinated energy management system. In general, these generation units produce heating
and cooling energy as well as electricity (fig. 7.2-21).
Meteorogical
services
Fuel cells
Wind turbines
Fixed loads or loads

that can be influenced
R e qu
ir e m
t
en
un
it s
Fig. 7.2-21: Elements within de-centralized energy management
the balance energy, the forecast has to be very exact in the peak
time or times with the high prices for balance energy. Furthermore, the forecast algorithms must be able to adapt rapidly to
new situations. For example, a virtual power plant operated by
an energy service company must be able to consider changes in
the customer structure.
Based on the results of the forecast algorithms and the actual

situation of the virtual power plant, the load to be covered can
be dispatched by using the decentralized power units and the
existing energy contracts. This is a complex and recurrent task.
Therefore, computer-based methods of operations research are
used. This is the most important component in a virtual power
plant, because it realizes and uses the optimization leeway.
The special structure of a virtual power plant places high
demands on the mathematical models for the optimization. The
models must be very precise because rough models could yield
optimization results that cannot be realized by the power
system. Because the virtual power plant must provide an automatic mode for online control of the decentralized power units,
e.g., for compensating the imbalance, no operator can check
and correct the results. Furthermore, the optimization leeway
can only be used if the optimization package is able to determine the solution cyclically within the settlement period.
Based on the requirements defined in the preceding section, a
Software package for decentralized energy management called
DEMS was developed. The DEMS system is not meant to be a
substitute for all possible automation equipment necessary for
operating the components of a virtual power plant. There must
be at least that much local automation equipment available to
463
Energy Management
allow the basic operation of the decentralized power units in

order to ensure component and personal safety in the absence
of the DEMS system.
The components/units of a virtual power plant and their energy
flow topology are modeled in DEMS by some classes of model
elements, e.g., converter units, contracts, storage units, renewable units and flexible loads.
The DEMS planning application models all cost/revenue and
constraint-relevant energy and media flows, regardless of their
type (e.g., electricity, hot water, steam, cooling, emissions,
hydrogen).
The DEMS control applications provide control and supervision
capability of all generation units, storage units and flexible
demands as well as control capability to maintain an agreedupon electrical interchange energy profile. Fig. 7.2-22 illustrates
the modeling of a decentralized power generation system by
using DEMS model elements (rectangular objects with unit
names), and connecting them via balance nodes (circular objects
with node numbers).
The functions of DEMS (fig. 7.2-23) can be subdivided into
planning functions and control functions. The respective planning functions are the weather forecast, the load forecast,
generation forecast and the unit commitment. Furthermore,
DEMS provides generation and load management as an
exchange monitor and online optimization and coordination.
The planning functions consider a time period of one to seven

days with a time resolution depending on the settlement periods
for energy sales and purchases, e.g., 1 5, 30 or 60 minutes. The
planning functions run cyclically (e.g., once a day or less frequently), on manual demand and can be spontaneously triggered.
The DEMS weather forecast function provides the forecasted
weather data import/calculation that is used as an input for the
other DEMS function modules. The weather forecast function
has import capability for forecasted (and maybe also historical)
weather data provided by external sources like weather forecast
Services. If there is local weather data measurement equipment
located in the virtual power plant, the external imported
weather forecast is adapted to the local site measurements by
using a moving average correction algorithm that minimizes the
difference of the deviation between the external forecast and
locally measured weather data around the actual time step. The
resulting internal weather forecast is provided as an input to the
other DEMS planning functions.
The DEMS load forecast provides a forecast calculation for
multiple load classes. The basic data is the continuous historical
measured load data in the time resolution of the planning
functions. A piecewise linear model is set up explaining the
modeling of the demand behavior as a function of influencing
variables such as day types, weather variables or production
464
Fig. 7.2-22: System topology with DEMS model elements

(rectangular objects with unit names) and connecting
them via balance nodes (circular objects with node
numbers)
Forecast
Weather Generation Load
User
interface
Data
parameterization
Unit commitment
EXCEL
reports
Online component
OOC
EM
XM
LM

Setpoints
Measurements
EM Generation management
XM Exchange monitor
LM
Load management
OOC Online optimization
Fig. 7.2-23: DEMS functions
schedules from industrial loads. The model equation coefficients

are estimated cyclically each day after new measurements are
available.
For each time stamp of the day (e.g., 96 time stamps for a
15-minute time resolution), a separate coefficient analysis is
done. The data used for the analysis starts from yesterday for a
parameterized time range in the past (from 0 to 84 days). The
mathematical method for calculating the model coefficients is a
Kalman filter. By using the Kalman filter, the definition of fully
dynamic, partial static and fully static forecast models is
possible.
Energy Management
The DEMS unit commitment function calculates the optimized

dispatch schedules (including the commitment) for all flexible
units such as contracts, generation units, storage and flexible
demands. The objective function is the difference of revenue
minus costs, the profit. The scheduling considers the parameters
of the model elements and their topological connection, which
defines the financial Information, as well as the technical,
environmental and contractual parameters and constraints of
the virtual power plant. The unit commitment uses mixed
integer linear programming to calculate the results of the optimization problem.
The DEMS generation management function allows for the
control and supervision of all generation and storage units of
the virtual power plant. Dependent on the control mode of the
respective unit (independent, manual, schedule or control
mode) and the unit parameters (minimum/maximum power,
power gradients, energy content), the actual state (start-up,
online, remote controllable, disturbed) and the actual power
output of the unit, the start/stop commands and power setpoints for the units are calculated and transmitted via the command interface. Furthermore, the command response and the
setpoint following status of the units are supervised and signaled. In the event of a unit disturbance, the generation management can start a spontaneous unit commitment calculation
to force a rescheduling of the remaining units under the
changed circumstances while also considering all integral constraints.
The DEMS load management function allows the control and
supervision of all flexible loads in the virtual power plant. A
flexible load class can contain one or several load groups of the
same priority, where one load group is supposed to be switched
on or off completely with one switching command. Dependent
on the control mode of the load class (independent, schedule or
control mode) and the actual switching state, the actual control
state, the actual power consumption and the allowed control
delay time of the load groups, the required switching controls to
fulfill the overall load class setpoint are calculated and transmitted via the command interface (applying a rotational load
shedding of the load groups of one load class). The optimized
load class schedules calculated by the unit commitment function
are the basis for load class control in the operation modes
schedule and control.
SIMATIC protocols
PROFIBUS, MODBUS
OPC, DDE
DEMS
The DEMS generation forecast calculates the expected output of

renewable energy sources dependent on the forecasted weather
conditions. The forecast algorithm is a piecewise linear transformation of two weather variables to the expected power output
according to a given transformation matrix (e.g., wind speed
and direction for wind power units, light intensity and ambient
air temperature for photovoltaic systems). The transformation
matrix can be parameterized according to the unit technical
specifications and/or is estimated on the basis of historical
power and weather measurements by applying neural network
algorithms (in an offline analysis step).
SQL database, ODBC

Excel und ASCII file
XML interface for time series
COM/DCOM interface
TCP/IP
Fig. 7.2-24: DEMS interfaces
The DEMS exchange monitor function calculates the expected

deviation of the agreed-upon electrical interchange schedule of
the current accounting period (15 or 30 or 60 minutes) and the
necessary power correction value to keep the interchange on
schedule. On the basis of the actual energy consumption of the
running accounting period and the actual interchange power
trend, the expected energy interchange at the end of the
accounting period is calculated. The difference between this
value and the agreed-upon interchange value, divided by the
remaining time of the accounting period, gives the necessary
overall power correction value that is needed to be on schedule
with the agreed interchange at the end of the accounting
period. This value is passed to the online optimization and
coordination function for further processing.
The DEMS online optimization and coordination function dispatches the overall power correction value to all individual
generation units, storage units and flexible load classes that are
running in control mode. The distribution algorithm works
according to the following rules: First, the actual unit constraints
(e.g., minimum and maximum power, storage contents, power
ramp limitations) must be considered. Second, the overall power
correction value should be reached as fast as possible. And third,
the cheapest units should be used for control actions. Cheapest
in this context means that the incremental power control costs
of the units around their scheduled operating points are taken as
a reference. The incremental power control costs of the individual units are calculated by the unit commitment function
along with the respective dispatch schedules. The individual
units power correction values are passed to the generation
management function and load management function for
execution. DEMS is based on widespread software components
running on Microsoft Windows-based computers with standardized interfaces and protocols (fig. 7.2-24). This secures the
owners investment in the virtual power plant, because it is easy
to extend the system with new modules.
465
Energy Management
Fig. 7.2-25 depicts the main components of DEMS. As basic

SCADA engine, SIMATIC WinCC (Windows Control Center) is
used.
The application algorithms are realized with Siemens ECANSE
(Environment for Computer-Aided Neural Software Engineering).
A Microsoft Excel interface exists for time series data input and
output. The time series data is stored in the process database of
WinCC (using a commercial relational database system). DEMS
uses CPLEX for solving the mixed integer linear programming
problem. By configuring WinCC, ECANSE and Excel files, a concrete DEMS application system can be configured according to
the specific structure of the virtual power plant.
The user interface plays an import role in operator acceptance. It
must be user-friendly in order to reduce the training effort and
to avoid faulty operations. Therefore, the user Interface of DEMS
is created using the basis of the WinCC user interface builder
(fig. 7.2-26).
DEMS System
WinCC
Configuration
ECANSE
Configuration
DEMS Software
User interface
Data repository
Front end
Algorithms
Job control
Data model
Data entry
Reporting
Mixed integer
linear
programming
SIMATIC
WinCC
Siemens
ECANSE
Microsoft
Excel
Ilog
CPLEX
Microsoft Windows
Fig. 7.2-25: DEMS components
In addition to this, for more complex and flexible graphical

analysis of time series information, Excel report files for result
presentation can be used. By using either a remote desktop
software tool or by using the WinCC web navigator option, ISDN
or Web-based remote access to the DEMS system is possible.
Fig. 7.2-26 shows some examples of the user interface.
As just stated, the interface and protocols of the communication
front end are essential for the success of an energy management
system in a virtual power plant. Therefore, DEMS provides
several interface process data interfaces and protocols:
OPC
MODBUS Protocol Suite, MODBUS Serial
PROFIBUS DP, PROFIBUS FMS
SIMATICS5, S7, Tl
Windows DDE
PLC protocols
In addition, DEMS has a SOAP-based XML Web interface that

allows data exchange of process values and time series data
from DEMS to DEMS or DEMS to Web applications. Furthermore,
DEMS allows the import/export of process values and time series
data from/to ODBC data sources, Excel and ASCII files.
Synchronizing T&D and RTO/ISO operating models
electronically provides TDSP operating model changes to the
RTO/ISO when ready to be commissioned.
Fig. 7.2-26: DEMS user interface
466
Excel
Configuration
Energy Management
467
468
Communication Network Solutions for Smart Grids
8.1
Introduction
470
8.2

for Transmission Grids
(Communication Backbone)
472
8.2.1 Smart Grid Fiber-Optic Communications

on its Way to Carrier and Utility Grade Packet
Transport Networks
472
8.2.2 PowerLink Power Line Carrier

for High-Voltage Lines
474
8.2.3 SWT 3000 Teleprotection

477
8.2.4 Coupling Unit AKE 100
480
8.2.5 Voice Communication with PowerLink
480
8.3
Control Center Communication
482
8.4

for Distribution Grids
(Backhaul/Access Communication)
483
8.4.1 Introduction
483
8.4.2 Communication Infrastructures

for Backhaul and Access Networks
484
8.5
IT Security
487
8.5.1 Integral Approach
487
8.5.2 Secure throughout from Interface to Interface 488

8.5.3 Continuous Hardening of Applications
488
8.5.4 In-House CERT as Know-how Partner
488
8.5.5 Sensible Use of Standards
489
8.5.6 IT Security Grows in the Development Process
489
8.5.7 Integrating IT Security in Everyday Operations 489

8.6
Services
490
469
8 Communication Network Solutions

for Smart Grids
8.1 Introduction
A secure, reliable and economic power supply is closely linked
to a fast, efficient and dependable communication infrastructure. Planning and implementation of communication networks
require the same attention as the installation of the power
supply systems themselves (fig. 8.1-1).
cables are used whenever it is cost-efficient. In the remote ends

of the power transmission system, however, where the installation of fiber-optic cables or wireless solutions is not economical,
substations are connected via digital high-voltage power line
carrier systems.
Telecommunication for utilities has a long history in the transmission level of the power supply system and Siemens was one
of the first suppliers of communication systems for power
utilities. Since the early 1930s Siemens has delivered power line
carrier equipment for high-voltage systems. In todays transmission systems, almost all substations are monitored and controlled online by Energy Management Systems (EMS). The main
transmission lines are usually equipped with fiber-optic cables,
mostly integrated in the earth (ground) wires (OPGW: Optical
Ground Wire) and the substations are accessible via broadband
communication systems. The two proven and optimal communication technologies for application-specific needs are Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) and MPLS-TP solutions. Fiber-optic
The situation in the distribution grid is quite different. Whereas

subtransmission and primary substations are equipped with
digital communication as well, the communication infrastructure at lower distribution levels is very weak. In most countries,
less than 10 % of transformer substations and ring-main units
(RMU) are monitored and controlled from remote.
The rapid increase in distributed energy resources today is
impairing the power quality of the distribution network. That is
why system operators need to be able to respond quickly in
critical situations. A prerequisite for this is the integration of the
key ring-main units as well as the volatile decentralized wind
and solar generation into the energy management system, and
Fig. 8.1-1: Siemens offers complete communication network solutions to build a Smart Grid for power utilities
470

8.1 Introduction
thus into the communication network of the power utilities.

Because the local environment differs widely, it is crucial that
the right mix of the various communication technologies is
deployed. This mix will need to be exactly tailored to the utilities
needs and the availability of the necessary infrastructure and
resources (e.g., availability of fiber-optic cables, frequency
spectrum for wireless technologies, or quality and length of the
power cables for broadband power line carrier).
The selection of a communication solution depends on the

customers requirements. If only meter data and price signals are
to be transmitted, narrowband systems such as narrowband
power line carriers or GPRS modems are sufficient. For smart
homes in which power generation and controllable loads (e.g.,
appliances) or e-car charging stations are to be managed, broadband communication systems such as fiber-optic cables, power
line carriers or wireless solutions are necessary.
In the consumer access area, the communication needs are

rising rapidly as well. The following Smart Grid applications
request a bidirectional communication infrastructure down to
consumer premises.
For these complex communication requirements, Siemens offers

tailored ruggedized communication network solutions for fiber
optic, power line or wireless infrastructures, based on the standards of the Energy Industry. Naturally, this also includes a full
range of services, from communication analysis to the operation
of the entire solution (fig. 8.1-2).
Exchange of conventional meters with smart meters, which

provide bidirectional communications connections between
the consumer and energy applications (e.g., meter data
management, marketplace, etc.)
Management of consumers energy consumption, using price
signals as a response to the steadily changing energy supply of
large distributed producers
If a large number of small energy resources are involved, the
power quality of the low-voltage system must be monitored,
because the flow of current can change directions when feed
conditions are favorable.
For further reading please visit:

www.energy.siemens.com/hq/en/automation/powertransmission-distribution/network-communication
Communications
infrastructure
Fiberoptic/
PLC,
WiMAX
WIFI Mesh
Cellular
DSL, Rout.
Switch
High voltage
HV substation
Generation
HV substation
Virtual Power
Plant
Micro Grid
Controller
110 kV230 kV
Medium voltage
Fiberoptic/
SDH/
MPLS-TP
PLC
WiMAX
WIFI Mesh
Cellular
Router/
Switch
Control Center
(EMS/DMS)
380 kV500 kV
HV substation
Wind offshore
MV substation
Public charging
for e-cars
Cold store
HV substation
30 kV132 kV
Wind onshore
MV substation
Building
Distribution
Automation
Condition
Monitoring
Demand
Response
Management
System
Marketplace
Asset
Management
6 kV22 kV
Meter Data
Management
RMU with
meter data
concentrator
Low voltage
End-to-end security
Network management system
Fiberoptic/
SHD/
MPLS-TP
Power Line
Carrier
Microwave
Router/
Switch
Applications
400 V
400 V
RMU
400 V
RMU
400 V
RMU
Billing/Call
Center
E-Car
Operation
Center
Meter
Meter
Meter
Homes
(smart meter with PLC)
Meter
etc.
Meter
Homes (smart meter

with wireless connection)
Smart homes with

energy gateway
Distributed
energy resources
Fig. 8.1-2: Communication network solutions for Smart Grids
471

8.2 Communication Network
Solutions for Transmission
Grids (Communication
Backbone)
monitoring features. Ethernet-over-SDH provides the capacity to

transport packet-based traffic over the SDH backbone with high
reliability and low latencies. State-of-the-art NG SDH systems are
highly integrated, providing the requested capabilities for utilities in a single device.
At the subscriber side there is still a need to operate a number of
different systems with conventional communication interfaces
in todays substations (e.g., FXS, FXO, E&M, V.24, X.21, etc.). For
this purpose, so-called PDH access multiplexers are used, which
provide the requested interfaces, bundle the communication
signals, and pass them on to the NG-SDH systems.
8.2.1 Smart Grid Fiber-Optic Communications on its Way to Carrier and Utility
Grade Packet Transport Networks
Fig 8.2-1 shows a typical NG-SDH solution with connected PDH

Access Multiplexer.
Today Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) plus PDH
(Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy) Access Multiplexer
Solutions
Today, SDH solutions in combination with PDH Access Multiplexer are used mostly by utilities for the communication
requirements in high-voltage networks. Siemens offers for
these demands the latest generation of SDH equipment,
commonly referred to as NG (Next Generation) SDH systems
or Multi-Service Provisioning Platforms (MSPP).
Migration to highly available (carrier and utility grade)

MPLS-TP (Multi-Protocol Label Switching Transport Profile)
networks
The SDH technology, combined with PDH multiplexer, is a wellproven solution for the manifold communication requirements
of the transmission utilities.
But meanwhile new requirements arise, which clearly identify
the limits of the SDH/PDH technology. Especially the demand for
further cost savings, above all the OPEX part, is the main challenge for the communication departments of the utilities. At the
same time, the portion of packet-based data (Ethernet and IP) in
NG SDH technology combines a number of benefits that makes

it still well-suited to the needs of power utilities. Among those
benefits are high availability, comprehensive manageability, and
OPGW
OPGW
8
Substation
Substation
NG
SDH
NMS
NG
SDH
Router
Access
MUX
IEC 61850
substation ring
Phone
RTU
IEC 61850
substation ring
Fig. 8.2-1: Typical Next Generation SDH solution for transmission grids
472
Control
center
Access
MUX
Phone
RTU

8.2 Communication Network Solutions for Transmission Grids (Communication Backbone)
the wide area networks, caused by new Ethernet- and IP-based

systems (e.g., new RTUs, IEC61850 protection systems, sensors,
IP telephony, IP CCTV, etc.) is increasing dramatically.
In order to follow the general trend of the telecom industry and
the roadmaps of the network manufacturers, the existing traditional communication networks need to be migrated into highly
available, packet-based hybrid systems with low latency.
However, these packet-based optical networks need to meet the
specific communication requirements of the transmission
network operators. The most important requests are:
Cost-optimized installation and operation of the network
Low latency and the possibility of circuit switching
Use for critical Smart Grid applications (e.g., distance and
differential protection)
Easy network extension
Support of conventional communication interfaces.
In order to meet these requirements, we recommend a stepwise
migration of the installed SDH/PDH communication infrastructure to a packet-based, highly available (carrier and utility grade)
and standardized MPLS-TP transport network, which integrates,
besides Ethernet, also conventional interfaces.
This means that MPLS-TP systems offer the integration of voice,
data and protection signals into one system. This allows the
operation of older systems during a transition period.
OPGW
Fig 8.2-2 shows a typical MPLS-TP communication network.

In a final stage, Ethernet would be the single communication
interface, which will be used in the backbone as well as in the
access network.
Based on this easy network structure in combination with a
powerful Network Management System (NMS) and intelligent
network functions, daily network configuration tasks and other
service work can be performed fast and straightforward. This is
the basis for further OPEX reductions.
Benefits of a MPLS-TP communication network
Exceptionally cost-efficient operation of the network
Supports all latency critical Smart Grid applications
SDH-like look-and-feel (e.g., central NMS, fixed communication
paths)
Efficient use of the available transmission bandwidth, etc.)
Supports the conventional interfaces, and is therefore
perfectly applicable for a stepwise migration from SDH to an
Ethernet- and IP-based Next Generation network.
Siemens offers a wide range of end-to-end solutions for utility
grade telecommunication networks, and supports with its Smart
Grid knowledge a smooth migration from todays TDM-based
networks towards IP-based networks.
OPGW
8
Substation
Substation
MPLS-TP
hybrid node
MPLS-TP
hybrid node
Phone
Router
CCTVoIP
Router
IEC 61850
substation ring
Control
center
NMS
Access
MUX
Phone
RTU
IEC 61850
substation ring
Phone
RTU
Fig. 8.2-2: MPLS-TP communication solution for transmission grids
473

8.2.2 PowerLink Power Line Carrier

The digital power line carrier system PowerLink from Siemens
(fig. 8.2-3) uses the high-voltage line between substations as a
communication channel for data, protection signals and voice
transmission. This technology, which has been applied over
decades, adapted to the latest standards, and has two main
application areas:
As a communication link between substations where a fiberoptic connection does not exist or would not be economically
viable
As backup system for transmitting the protection signals,
in parallel to a fiber-optic link.
Fig. 8.2-4 shows the typical connection of the PowerLink system
to the high-voltage line via the coupling unit AKE 100, coupling
capacitor.
Fig. 8.2-3: PowerLink system
8
Substation
Substation
NMS
PowerLink
with integrated
SWT 3000
PowerLink
with integrated
SWT 3000
Phone
Distance
protection
RTU
Router
Fig. 8.2-4: PowerLink high-voltage line communication
474
Phone
Router
Control
center
Distance
protection
RTU

Flexibility the most important aspect of PowerLink

Versatility is one of the great strengths of the PowerLink
system. PowerLink can be matched flexibly to your infrastructure (table 8.2-1).
Multi-service device
PowerLink offers the necessary flexibility for transmitting every
service the customer might want in the available band. All
services can be combined in any way within the available bandwidth/bit rate framework.
Bridge to IP
IP functionality is best suited for the migration from TDM to
packet-switched networks. PowerLink offers electrical and
optical Ethernet interfaces, including an integrated L2 switch,
extending the IP network to remote substations with a bit rate
up to 320 kbps.
Optimal data throughput under changing environmental
conditions
PowerLink adapts the data rate to changes in ambient conditions, thus guaranteeing maximum data throughput. Thanks to
PowerLinks integral prioritization function, which can be configured for each channel, routing of the most important channels is
assured even in poor weather conditions.
Features
Digital
PLC
system
Analog
PLC
system
Universally applicable in analog,

digital, or mixed operation
Frequency range 24 kHz 1,000 kHz
p
p
p
p
p
p
Bandwidth selectable 2 kHz 32 kHz

Data rate up to 320 Kbps @ 32 kHz
Transmission power 20/50/100 W, fine adjustment
through software
Operation with or without frequency band spacing
with automatic cross talk canceller
Digital interface
Synchronous X.21 (max. 2 channels)
Asynchronous RS 232 (max. 8 channels)
TCP/IP (1 x electrical, 1 x optical for user data;
1 x electrical for service)
E1 (2 Mbps) for voice compression
G703.1 (64 Kbps)
Maximum efficiency the integrated, versatile multiplexer

(vMUX)
A large number of conventional communication interfaces
today (e.g., a/b telephone, V.24, X.21, etc.) and in the foreseeable future must be operated in a switching station. For this
purpose, PowerLink uses an integrated versatile multiplexer that
bundles these communication forms together and transmits
them by PLC. The vMUX is a statistical multiplexer with priority
control. Asynchronous data channels can be transmitted in
guaranteed or best effort modes, to guarantee optimum
utilization of available transmission capacity. The priority control ensures reliable transmission of the most important asynchronous and synchronous data channels and voice channels
even under poor transmission conditions. Naturally, the vMUX
is integrated in the management system of PowerLink, and is
perfectly equipped for the power line communication requirements of the future with extended options for transmitting
digital voice and data signals.
p
p
p
p
p
Analog interface
VF (VFM, VFO, VFS), max. 8 channels for voice,
data and protection
p
p
Asynchronous RS232 (max. 4) via FSK

Miscellaneous
Adaptive dynamic data rate adjustment
Variable transmission power

The transmission power can be configured via software in two
ranges (20 50 W or 40 100 W), based on the requirements of
the transmission path. This makes it easy to comply with
national regulations and to enable optimized frequency planning.
TCP/IP layer 2 bridge

Integrated versatile multiplexer for voice and data
Max. 5 compressed voice channels via VF interface
Max. 8 voice channels via E1 interface
StationLink bus for the cross-connection of
max. 4 PLC transmission routes (data and
compressed voice; compressed voice routed
without compression on repeater)
Reverse FSK analog RTU/modem data via dPLC (2 x)
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
Protection signal transmission system SWT 3000
Remote operation via cable or fiber-optic cable

identical to the integrated version
Single-purpose or multi-purpose/
alternate multi-purpose mode
Element manager, based on a graphical user

interface for the control and monitoring of PLC and
teleprotection systems
Command interface binary and in accordance with

IEC 61850
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
Integration of two devices in PowerLink
Remote access to PowerLink

Via TCP/IP connection
Via in-band service channel
SNMP compatibility for integrating NMS
Event memory with time stamp
Simple feature upgrade through software
Table 8.2-1: Overview of features
475

Voice compression
Voice compression is indispensable for the efficient utilization
of networks. Naturally, quality must not suffer, which is why
PowerLink offers comprehensive options for adapting the data
rate to individual requirements. PowerLink offers different
compression stages between 5.3 and 8 kbit/s. To prevent any
impairment of voice quality, the compressed voice band is
routed transparently to PowerLink stations connected in line,
without any further compression or decompression.
Protection signal transmission system SWT 3000
A maximum of two independent SWT 3000 systems can be
integrated into PowerLink. Every integrated teleprotection
system can transmit up to four protection commands. The
command interface type for distance protection devices can be
either standard binary or compliant with IEC 61850. Even a
combination of both command interface types is supported. For
highest availability, an alternate transmission path via a digital
communication link can be connected in PowerLink. SWT 3000
systems are also fully integrated into the user interface of the
PowerLink administration tool.
One administration system for all applications
PowerLink not only simplifies your communications, but also
makes communications cost-efficient. The PowerSys software
administers all integrated applications of PowerLink under a
standard user interface. This ensures higher operating security
while cutting training times and costs to the minimum.
Integration of PowerLink in network management
systems via SNMP
PowerLink systems can also be integrated in higher level management systems via the IP access by means of the SNMP protocol (Simple Network Management Protocol). System and
network state data are transferred, for example, to an alarm,
inventory or performance management system.
476

8.2.3 SWT 3000 Teleprotection for

High-Voltage Lines
The SWT 3000 (fig. 8.2-5) is an highly secure and reliable system
for transmitting time-critical distance protection commands via
analog and digital transmission channels (fig. 8.2-6). This
enables faults in the high-voltage grid to be isolated selectively
as quickly as possible. The SWT 3000 system can be integrated in
the PowerLink system or be operated as a stand-alone system.
Security, reliability and speed of protection signal transmission is
one of the central factors in the operation of high-voltage grids.
For maximum operating reliability, SWT 3000 can be configured
with two separately fed power supplies. If possible, protection
signals should be transmitted over two alternative communication paths to safeguard maximum transmission security.
Fig. 8.2-7 shows the different analog and digital transmission
paths between SWT 3000 systems.
The SWT 3000 also demonstrates its high degree of flexibility
when existing substations are migrated to protection devices via
the IEC 61850 communication standard. The SWT 3000 has all
necessary command interfaces both as binary interfaces and
as GOOSE. This always keeps investment costs economically
manageable, because the substations can be updated step by
step for a new network age.
Fig. 8.2-5: SWT 3000 teleprotection system
8
WAN / MPLS-TP*
Binary I/O
MUX PDH / SDH
Application
Binary I/O
Transmission of protection signals to quickly

identify, isolate and resolve problems in the
transmission network of a utility
Fiber optic
Advantages
Keeps downtimes to an absolute minimum
SWT 3000
SWT 3000
Supports IEC 61850 interfaces as well as

conventional binary interfaces
Pilot cable
GOOSE I/O
IEC 61850
Command
interfaces
Power line carrier
Line interfaces
(analog and digital)
Flexible integration into various customer

communication networks
GOOSE I/O
IEC 61850
Path protection via two different transmission

routes for increased reliability
Command
interfaces
* not applicable in combination with IEC 61850
Fig. 8.2-6: SWT 3000 teleprotection system wide range of Command and Line interface
477

12
11
10
10 11
12 14
8
8
12
13 14
Pilot cable connections

For operation via pilot cable, two SWT 3000
devices can be linked directly through the analog
interfaces (CLE).
Power line carrier connections
The analog link (CLE) between two SWT 3000
devices can also be a PLC link. Depending on
device configuration, SWT 3000 can be used with
PowerLink in alternate multi-purpose, simultaneous
multi-purpose, or single-purpose mode.
Fiber-optic connections
between SWT 3000 and PowerLink
A short-distance connection between an SWT 3000
and Siemens PowerLink PLC terminal can be realized
via an integrated fiber-optic modem. In this
case, an SWT 3000 stand-alone system provides
the same advanced functionality as the version
integrated into PowerLink. Each PowerLink can be
connected to two SWT 3000 devices via optical fibers.
SWT 3000 digital connections
The digital interface (DLE) permits protection signals
to be transmitted over a PDH or SDH network.
SWT 300 Ethernet connections
The ETH line interface (EN 100) supports transmission
via packet based networks.
Alternative transmission routes
SWT 3000 enables transmission of protection
signals via two different routes. Both routes are
constantly transmitting. In the event that one
route fails, the second route still bears the signal.
Direct fiber-optic connection without repeater
SWT 3000 protection signaling incorporates an
internal fiber-optic modem for long-distance
transmission. The maximum distance between
two SWT 3000 devices is 150 kilometers.
Fiber-optic connection
between SWT 3000 and a multiplexer
A short-distance connection of up to two kilometers
between SWT 3000 and a multiplexer can be
realized via the integrated fiber-optic modem according
to IEEE C37.94. Alternately, the multiplexer
is connected via FOBox, converting the optical
signal to an electrical signal in case the MUX does
not support C37.94.
SWT 3000 integration into the PowerLink
PLC system
The SWT 3000 system can be integrated into the
PowerLink equipment. Either the analog interface
or a combination of the analog and the digital
interfaces can be used.
Fig. 8.2-7: SWT 3000 transmission paths
478

PowerLink
IFC
DLE
CLE
PDH
Power Line Carrier System

Interface Command Binary
Digital Line Equipment
Copper Line Equipment
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
EN 100
SDH
FOBox
FO
MUX
Interface IEC 61850 / Ethernet line

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
Fiber-Optic Box
Fiber-Optic Module
Multiplexer
Analog transmission
1
SWT 3000
EN 100
IFC
SWT 3000
CLE
SWT 3000
EN 100
IFC
PowerLink
CLE
SWT 3000
EN 100
IFC
CLE
PowerLink
CSP
CSP
PowerLink
FO
FO
CSP
FO
EN 100
EN 100
Power line analog
IFC
SWT 3000
FO
2-wire link / 4-wire link
IFC
SWT 3000
CLE
PowerLink
CSP
EN 100
IFC
Power line
via optical fibers
Digital transmission
4
SWT 3000
SWT 3000
EN 100
IFC
SWT 3000
IP Network
EN
100
IFC
EN
100
SWT 3000
SDH/PDH
DLE
IFC
DLE
EN 100
IFC
SWT 3000
FO
FP
EN 100
DLE
SDH/PDH
DLE
EN 100
IP Network
EN
100
SWT 3000
FO
SWT 3000
IFC
SWT 3000
IFC
SWT 3000
EN 100
EN
100
FO
FOBox
IFC DLE FO
SWT 3000
DLE
EN 100
FO
IFC
IFC
FO DLE IFC
SDH/PDH Fiber
DLE FO
SWT 3000
MUX
SDH/PDH
MUX
MUX
SDH/PDH
MUX
FO DLE EN 100
FOBox
IFC
DLE
SWT 3000
FO
EN 100
IFC
Ethernet network
Digital network with

optional path protection
Fiber optic integrated,
optional second path
via digital network
Fiber-optic modem
integrated
One path via integrated
optical fibers; second via
fiber-optic box, MUX, and
digital network
Through digital network
via MUX and fiber-optic
C37.94
Analog & digital transmission

10
SWT 3000
IFC
EN
100
EN
100
IP Network
CLE
PowerLink
11
SWT 3000
EN 100
FO
IFC DLE FO
FO
IFC
FO
SWT 3000
PowerLink
CSP
FOBox
SWT 3000
CLE
CSP
MUX
SDH/PDH
MUX
FO
FOBox
FO DLE EN 100
IFC
One path via digital

network; second path
via 4-wire (or 2-wire)
One path via power line

and optical fibers; second
path via optical fibers and
digital network
Integrated into PowerLink

12
13
PowerLink
PowerLink
EN 100
EN 100
IFC
PowerLink
EN 100
IFC
PowerLink
DLE
DLE
EN 100
Power line
IFC
IFC
One path via power line;

second path via digital
network
SDH/PDH
479

8.2.4 Coupling Unit AKE 100

The PLC terminals are connected to the power line via coupling
capacitors, or via capacitive voltage transformers and the coupling unit. In order to prevent the PLC currents from flowing to
the power switchgear or in other undesired directions (e.g.,
tapped lines), traps (coils) are used, which are rated for the
operating and short-circuit currents of the power installation
and involve no significant loss for the power distribution system.
The AKE 100 coupling unit from Siemens described here,
together with a high-voltage coupling capacitor, forms a highpass filter for the required carrier frequencies, whose lower
cut-off frequency is determined by the rating of the coupling
capacitor and the chosen matching ratio.
The AKE 100 coupling unit is supplied in two versions and is
used for:
Phase-to-earth coupling to overhead power lines
Phase-to-phase coupling to overhead power lines
Phase-to-earth coupling to power cables
Phase-to-phase coupling to power cables
Intersystem coupling with two phase-to-earth coupling units.
The coupling units for phase-to-phase coupling are adaptable for
use as phase to-earth coupling units. The versions for phase-toearth coupling can be retrofitted for phase-to-phase coupling, or
can as well be used for intersystem coupling.
Analoge interface
8.2.5 Voice Communication with

PowerLink
The TCP/IP protocol is gaining increasing acceptance in the voice
communication area. However, considerably higher bandwidth
requirements must be taken into account in network planning
with VoIP compared with analog voice links. Table 8.2-2 shows
the bandwidth requirement for a voice link via TCP/IP as a function of the codec used for voice compression.
In the office area today, the LAN infrastructure is usually sufficiently generously dimensioned to make VoIP communication
possible without any restrictions. The situation is distinctly
different if it is necessary to connect distant substations to the
utilitys voice network. If these locations are not integrated in
the corporate backbone network, power line carrier connections
must be installed. Fig. 8.2-8 shows the basic alternatives for
voice communication via PowerLink.
Codec
Net bit rate
Gross bit rate
G.711
64 kbit/s
87.2 kbit/s
G.726
32 kbit/s
55.2 kbit/s
G.728
16 kbit/s
31.5 kbit/s
G.729
8 kbit/s
31.2 kbit/s
G.723.1
5.3 kbit/s
20.8 kbit/s
Table 8.2-2: Bandwidth requirement for VoIP
a/b
Analog connection
of single phones
PowerLink
Analoge interface
PABX
E&M
Analog connection
of PABXs
PowerLink
Digital interface
PABX
fE1
Digital connection
of PABXs
PowerLink
TCP/IP interface
PABX
Connection of phones
or PABXs via TCP/IP
TCP/IP
Router
Fig. 8.2-8: Basic options of voice communication via PowerLink
480
PowerLink

Analog connection
The telephone system is connected to the PowerLink via the
analog E&M interface. A telephone system or an individual
analog telephone can also participate in a PowerLink system at a
different location. The bandwidth requirement can be reduced
to about 6 kbit/s (including overhead) per voice link by means of
voice compression in the PowerLink.
Digital connection
With digital connection, the telephone system is connected to
PowerLink via the digital E1 interface. Because of the restricted
bandwidth, up to 8 of the 30 voice channels (Fractional E1) can
be used. This alternative is only suitable for communication
between telephone systems. Individual telephones must be
connected locally to the particular telephone system. The bandwidth requirement is made up of the user data per voice channel
(e.g., 5.3 kbit/s) and the D-channel overhead for the entire E1
link (approximately 2.4 kbits/s), (i.e., for a voice channel less
than 10 kbit/s).
In the case of series connected locations with both analog and
digital connection, multiple compression/decompression of the
voice channel is prevented by the unique PowerLink function
StationLink.
TCP/IP connection
The telephone system, voice terminals and the PowerLink
system are connected directly to the TCP/IP network. Voice communication is conducted directly between the terminals. Only
control information is transmitted to the telephone system. Use of
the TCP/IP protocol results in a broadband requirement per voice
channel of at least 21 kbit/s (5.3 kbit/s voice plus TCP/IP overhead).
481

8.3 Control Center
Communication
The more recent protocol standards all rely on TCP/IP-based

communication. However, it must be possible today and in the
near future to continue connecting conventional telecontrol
devices (already installed RTUs) via serial interfaces.
Redundant control center communication

A control center for power supply systems such as Spectrum
Power (fig. 8.3-1) is typically configured with full redundancy to
achieve high availability. This includes communications.
Depending on the system operators requirements, various
mechanisms are supported to achieve this goal for communication. This includes:
Automatic failover of communication servers
Configurable load sharing between two or more
communication servers
Automatic failover of communication lines
Supervision of standby communication line, including
telegram buffering.
Interface for industry automation/third-party applications

OPC (OLE for process control) and OPC UA provide a group of
defined interfaces. OPC in general enables the overall data
exchange between automation and control applications, field
systems/field devices, as well as business and office applications.
OPC is based on OLE/COM and DCOM technology. OPC UA (Unified Architecture) is a continuation and further innovation of
OPC. OPC UA is based on native TCP/IP and is available for multiple operating system platforms, including embedded devices.
Communication between control centers
The communication between control centers is provided via the
communication protocols ICCP or ELCOM, and is based on TCP/IP.
Process communication to substations and power plants

Process communication to the substations and to Remote
Terminal Units (RTUs), e.g., in power plants or power supply
systems, is implemented via serial interfaces or by means of TCP/
IP-based network communication with a Communication Front
End. The Communication Front End includes data-pre-processing
functionality like :
Routine for data reduction, e.g., old/new comparison,
threshold check
Data conversion
Scaling and smoothing of measured values
Integrity checks for incoming data
Data completeness checks and cycle monitoring
Statistical acquisition of the data traffic with the RTU.
The Inter Control Center Communication Protocol (ICCP) is an

open and standardized protocol based on IEC 60870-6 and
Telecontrol Application Service Element Two (TASE.2).
The exchanged data is primarily real-time system information
like analog values, digital values and accumulator values, along
with supervisory control commands.
Remote workstations/office communication
Remote workstations can communicate with the control center
via the office LAN or an Internet connection. System and data
integrity has to be ensured by the system security configuration
for
Protection against external attacks
Protection against unauthorized usage
Protection against data loss.
All kinds of different protocols are used for historical reasons.

However, as a result of international standardization there is also
a market trend here towards standardized protocols like
IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3i protocol or IEC-61850.
CFE
ELCOM Electricity Utilities Communication
ICCP
Inter-Control-Center
Communication Protocol
OPC
OLE for Process Control
RTU
Control center, e.g., Spectrum Power (SCADA, Applications)

Communication bus
TCP/IP
CFE
Firewall
Internet/
Office LAN
Different
telecontrol
protocols via
serial interface
IEC 60870 protocol

family (101, 104, DNP3)
IEC 61850, etc. via serial
interface or TCP/IP
Telecontrol
devices:
RTUs
Office
communication
Web
user interface
OPC
SICAM PAS,
SICAM RTU
ICCP
ELCOM
Automation protocols
(SIMATIC NET via TCP/IP for
long distances, Profibus
only for short distances)
Industrial
automation,
3rd party applications
Inter-controlcenter
communication
via TCP/IP
Control center
Utility substation
Fig. 8.3-1: Typical communication interfaces and communication partners of a control center using the example of Spectrum Power
482

8.4 Communication
Network Solutions
for Distribution Grids
(Backhaul/Access
Communication)
One of the key challenges of a Smart Grid therefore is quickly

balancing out the energy supply and energy consumption in the
distribution system (fig. 8.4-1).
A prerequisite for implementing a solution for this demand is
monitoring and managing as many components of a power
supply system as possible all the way to the consumer. The basis
for this is a reliable communication infrastructure. For medium
voltage, at least the following system components must be
integrated into a Smart Grid and managed:
The key ring-main units
All large distributed producers (solar/wind farms, biogas/
hydroelectric power plants, etc.)
Large buildings, campuses, refrigerated warehouses, etc.
8.4.1 Introduction
In the past, electricity was mainly produced by bulk generation
at central locations, and distributed to consumers via the distribution systems. Energy peaks (e.g., at midday) were well-known
and balanced out by reserve capacity of central power plants. It
was therefore usually not necessary to specially control the
lower-level distribution networks, or even to integrate the
consumers into the grid monitoring system.
For low voltage, primarily households and small producers

of renewable energy are involved.
With respect to their role in the power supply system, consumers
can be divided into two groups:
Standard consumers, who have smart meters and optimize
their electricity costs via ongoing price signals depending on
supply and demand
Prosumers (prosumer = producer + consumer), who can feed
surplus energy into the power grid such as solar power or
energy generated by combined heat and power systems (CHP);
many can also intermediately store energy using possibilities
such as night storage heaters or e-cars.
Ever since renewable energy has been significantly expanded,

electricity is being fed into both the medium-voltage and lowvoltage systems, depending on changing external conditions
(e.g., weather, time of day, etc.). These fluctuating energy
resources can severely impair the stability of the distribution
grids.
Buildings account for 40 % of the worlds energy consumption
and 20 % of total CO2 emissions. Therefore, smart buildings also
play a central role in the Smart Grid as they provide a huge
potential for energy efficiency. Actively influencing their consumption and generation, smart buildings support the system
stability and allow generators to consider other options before
adding new generation facilities.
While the communication requirements for standard consumers

are concentrated on smart metering including price signals,
time-critical control signals and power quality data must also be
transmitted for prosumers. Therefore, in addition to smart
meters, prosumers have energy gateways, which process and
forward these control signals accordingly.
Communications
infrastructure
Medium voltage
(Backhaul)
Cold store
MV substation
Virtual Power Plant

Micro Grid Controller
Distribution
Automation
Condition Monitoring
Public charging
Building
for e-cars
6 kV22 kV
Marketplace
Demand Response
Management System
RMU with
meter data
concentrator
Asset Management
Meter Data
Management
400 V
Low voltage
(Access)
Fiber optics
PLC, WiMAX
Wireless mesh
GSM/UMTS/LTE
DSL, router, switch
Control Center
(EMS/DMS)
Wind onshore
MV substation
Fiber optics/
SHD/MPLS-TP
PLC
WiMAX
Wireless mesh
GSM/UMTS/LTE
Router, switch
Applications
Meter
Meter
Meter
Homes
400 V
Meter
RMU
400 V
RMU
400 V
RMU
Billing/Call Center
E-Car Operation Center
etc.
Meter
Homes (smart meter

Smart homes with
with wireless connection) energy gateway
Distributed
energy resources
Fig. 8.4-1: Typical power distribution network integrating ring-main units, consumers, prosumers, distributed energy resources, etc.
483

8.4 Communication Network Solutions for Distribution Grids (Backhaul/Access Communication)
The young history of Smart Grids has already shown that utilities
do not implement it as a whole from the scratch. They usually
start with smart metering projects with later extensions of Smart
Grid applications.
Already with the first roll-out, the design of the communication
infrastructure has to consider the growing requirements for
these extensions. After a large deployment of metering infrastructure in the first step, it is not acceptable to replace the
communication network a few years later because the requirements for the next subsets of Smart Grid applications cannot be
met anymore.
Communications infrastructures for all conditions
The communication infrastructure in the medium-voltage and
low-voltage distribution systems is usually heterogeneous, and
the suitable technologies depend to a large extent on the local
topology (large city, rural region, distances, etc.). It must therefore be specifically tailored for each customer.
In general, the following communication technologies are
available:
Fiber-optic or copper cables are the best option, if present
Power line carrier systems for medium-voltage and low-voltage
networks
Setup of own private wireless networks (e.g., wireless mesh,
private WiMAX), when spectrum is available at reasonable
prices or local regulations allow for it
Public wireless networks, depending on the installation for
narrowband communication in the kbps range (e.g., GPRS), or
in the future in the Mbps range (LTE, WiMAX providers).
Attractive machine-to-machine (M2M) data tariffs and robust
communication in case of power outages are key ingredients
to make this communication channel a viable option.
Depending on the applications being installed inside the RMU,

an Ethernet switch/router might be needed in order to concentrate the flow of communications. These data concentrators can
be implemented as customized solutions or integrated, for
example, in the RTU (remote terminal unit). To meet these
requirements, Siemens offers a full range of all above-mentioned communication technologies including rugged switches
and routers that comply with energy industry standards.
8.4.2 Communication Infrastructures

for Backhaul and Access Networks
Optical fibers
The best choice for all communication needs
Optical fibers is the best transmission medium for mediumvoltage and low-voltage applications because it is robust and not
susceptible to electromagnetic disturbances or capacity constraints. That is why system operators who choose this technology will be well-prepared when their communication needs
multiply in the future.
484
Fiber optics
MV substation
6 kV22 kV
RMU with
meter data
concentrator
Meter
Meter
Energy line
Cold store
400 V
Meter
Homes
400 V
Meter
Energy line with PLC communication
MV substation
Public charging
Building
for e-cars
RMU
400 V
RMU
400 V
RMU
Meter
Homes (smart
meter with wireless
connection)
Smart homes
with energy
gateway
Distributed
energy resources
Fig. 8.4-2: Fiber-optic infrastructure for distribution network
Fig. 8.4-2 shows the typical deployment of a fiber-optic infrastructure in distribution networks.
Fiber-optic cables are laid underground to connect individual
substations. This work is associated with heavy civil works, and
therefore with great expense. However, when new power cables
are installed, the cost-benefit analysis paints a clear picture.
Fiber-optic cables should generally be the first choice in this
case.
Benefits in detail
At the core of a variety of communication systems, from
passive optical networks (PON) to Ethernet and SDH
Durable, insusceptible to electromagnetic disturbances
Practically unlimited transmission capacity.
Medium-voltage power line carrier solutions
Standards-based power line carrier solutions provide an attractive
communication channel for all applications in medium-voltage
and low-voltage Smart Grid scenarios. They use the utilityowned infrastructure in the distribution network, and provide
a reliable and affordable communications channel. Therefore,
PLC solutions are especially useful for connecting elements in
grids, where no other reliable communication channel is available. They transform the DSOs assets into a highly capable
Smart Grid communication infrastructure. With its throughput,
low latency and high reliability, PLC solutions serve for distribution automation applications as well as for backhauling data
from metering applications in the medium-voltage grid.
Combining IEEE 1901 broadband power line products with
IEEE 1901.2 high-speed power line products, the resulting
power line communication solutions allows the DSO to equip
the entire MV grid with a single family of communication
technology.
The resulting PLC network forms a transparent layer 2 bridge, and
can therefore be used flexibly for all Smart Grid applications.

Fig. 8.4-3 shows the typical deployment of power line carrier

solutions in distribution networks.
MV substation
As with every communication technology, the transmission

range and bandwidth provided by the PLC solution depends on
the quality of the used transmission medium. In case of the
transmission over power lines, type and age of the power cable
as well as the number of joints have an impact on the achievable
results. Consequently, a PLC network needs to be engineered
and planned correctly to provide maximum performance. The
unique combination of broadband power line using the frequency range between 2 and 30 MHz and high-speed power line
using the range between 9 and 500 kHz allows the DSO to equip
all MV lines with a single family of communication technologies.
Combined with a coupling unit that spans both frequency
ranges, this provides maximum freedom in choosing the right
technology on each link without changing the coupling units.
Benefits of power line communication solutions:
They transform the utility-owned infrastructure into a highly
capable communication network
They are especially useful for connecting all elements in the
grid where there are no other reliable communications media
available
They provide a communication solution for all MV power grids.
WiMAX
The main application area for WiMAX is backhauling of RMUs,
data concentrators or Distributed Energy Resources (DER). Single
prosumers could technically be served, but this is economically
reasonable only in selected cases.
Fig. 8.4-4 shows the typical deployment of WiMAX solutions in
distribution networks.
Public charging
for e-cars
Cold store
MV
BPL/PLC
MV substation
MV
BPL/PLC
MV
BPL/PLC
MV
BPL/PLC
RMU with
meter data
concentrator
400 V
MV
BPL/PLC
6 kV - 22 kV
MV
BPL/PLC
MV
BPL/PLC
RMU
400 V
400 V
LV
BPL
LV
BPL
Meter
Meter
Meter
Meter
MV
BPL/PLC
RMU
400 V
LV
BPL
LV
BPL
RMU
LV
BPL
Meter
Homes
Homes (smart meter
Smart homes with
(smart meter with PLC) with wireless connection) energy gateway
Energy line
LV
BPL
Distributed
energy resources
MV Energy line with PLC communication

LV Energy line with PLC communication
Fig. 8.4-3: Power line carrier communication solutions for

distribution networks
Communication
Energy line
Energy line with
PLC communication
MV
substation
MV
substation
6 kV22 kV
Service car
RMU with
meter data
concentrator
400 V 400 V
Meter
Meter
Meter
Homes
Meter
RMU
400 V
RMU
400 V
RMU
Meter
Homes (smart
meter with
wireless connection)
Smart homes
with energy
gateway
Distributed
energy resources
Fig. 8.4-4: WiMAX solution for distribution networks
WiMAX (Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access) is a

standards-based telecommunications protocol (IEEE 802.16
series) that provides both fixed and mobile broadband connectivity. The advanced point-to-multipoint technology is fieldproven and deployed globally. In the recent past, certain manufacturers have evolved the system for the requirements of
specific vertical markets such as oil & gas or power utilities.
Differing from telecommunication-carrier-oriented systems,
these implementations support special features such as asymmetric prioritization of uplink traffic, layer-2-based traffic (multicast / IEC 61850 GOOSE), redundancy options, as well as economic system scaling fitting also for smaller, privately owned
regional or local networks.
Besides the application requirements, it is important to assess
regional conditions like area topology and availability of radio
spectrum. Professional radio network planning and network
engineering are mandatory when setting up WiMAX networks.
Basic technical data

Data rates: up to 15 Mbps (uplink, 10 MHz channel,
IEEE 802.16e system)
Coverage:
up to 10 km in non-line-of-sight (e.g., urban) and
up to 30 km in line-of-sight conditions (with range
extension)
Implementations for radio spectrum in licensed or licenseexempt frequency bands available.
Benefits
The WiMAX technology is field-proven, globally deployed, and
continues to evolve. WiMAX networks can be scaled from small
to large, which allows for privately owned networks even on
regional and local levels.
485

Wireless mesh
In general, wireless mesh networks are composed of cooperating radio nodes that are organized in a mesh topology
(fig. 8.4-5). The link communication technology from one hop
to another can be standardized (e.g., IEEE 802.11 series [WiFi]
or IEEE 802.15.4 [LoWPAN, Low-rate Wireless Personal Area
Network]) or proprietary (e.g., FHSS, OFDM technologies). The
mesh protocols and corresponding forwarding algorithms are
on the other hand more recent developments and therefore
still predominantly proprietary. Thanks to their mesh properties
along with self-setup and self-healing mechanisms, mesh networks inherently offer ease of operation and redundancy for
fixed applications. The system performance can be characterized
by the hops throughput capacity, the average reach of a hopto-hop link, and the max. number of hops on a single path.
Detailed requirements as well as specific regional conditions must
be carefully assessed in order to select the best-suited technology.
individual devices with moderate data transmission requirements, such as meters, grid sensors, measuring transformers,
etc. The single RF mesh nodes communicate via each other
towards an access gateway, which serves as take-out point into
other WAN / backhaul communication networks
Average throughput per node: 50 ~ 100 kbps
Coverage: hop-to-hop reach 100m ~ 1 km depending on
system, frequency band and applicable power limit; meshing
among up to ~ 10 hops per path depending on the deployed
system
Radio spectrum primarily in license-exempt frequency bands,
e.g., 868 / 915 MHz.
Benefits
Thanks to their mesh properties along with self-setup and
self-healing mechanisms, mesh networks inherently offer ease
of operation and redundancy for fixed applications.
There are two major categories of wireless mesh networks:

Public cellular networks
Broadband wireless mesh for RMU / DER backhaul
Broadband wireless mesh systems have sufficient transport
capacity to backhaul a high amount of data, that is to say aggregated data of various RMUs / DER plants, with multiple RTU
devices or data concentrators / access gateways.
Maximum throughput (gateway capacity): ~ 20 Mbps (shared
among the nodes connected to the gateway)
Coverage: hop-to-hop reach 300m ~ 10 km depending on
system, frequency band and applicable power limit; meshing
among up to 10 20 hops per path depending on the
deployed system
Radio spectrum primarily in license-exempt frequency bands,
e.g., 5.8 GHz.
Narrowband radio frequency (RF) mesh for access / metering

We use the term RF mesh system to denominate narrowband
wireless mesh technologies. Their capacity suffices to connect
Communication
Energy line
Energy line with
PLC communication
MV substation
For the extension of private communication networks

The main application areas for public mobile radio networks in
the Smart Grid context are meter reading and energy grid monitoring functions (fig. 8.4-6).
In contrast to constructing new, proprietary networks for Smart
Grid communication, there is also the option of using existing
cellular radio networks owned by communication service providers. These networks are standards-based, deployed worldwide, and continuously upgraded and expanded. Activities like
acquiring spectrum licenses, building, operating and maintaining the network as well as assuring sufficient coverage and
bandwidth on a nationwide scale are naturally managed by the
communication service providers. Data rates normally available
range from 50 kbps (GPRS), over 10 Mbps (HSPA), to over 50
Mbps (upcoming LTE). Attractive data tariffs and the availability
of the network are key to use public cellular networks for Smart
Grid applications.
MV substation
MV substation
Service
car
6 kV22 kV
400 V 400 V
RMU
400 V
RMU
400 V
Meter
Homes
Meter
400 V
Meter
Meter
400 V RMU
Meter
400 V
RMU
400 V
RMU
Meter
Meter
Homes (smart
meter with
Smart homes
with energy
gateway
Distributed
energy resources
Fig. 8.4-5: Wireless mesh network
486
6 kV22 kV
RMU
Meter
Meter
MV
substation
RMU with
meter data
concentrator
RMU with
meter data
concentrator
Meter
Communication
Energy line
Energy line with
PLC communication
Homes
Homes (smart
meter with
Fig. 8.4-6: Public cellular network
Smart homes
with energy
gateway
Distributed
energy resources

8.5 IT Security
8.5.1 Integral Approach
Increased networking of systems, standardization of communication protocols and operating systems simplifying processes
ensures efficient operation. But the other side of the coin is that
these trends also make our networks vulnerable.
The graphical display of the security network or network blueprint, as it is called, forms the infrastructure and architecture
of a system. It is the basis for a clear segmentation with which
the risk for every link in the automation chain can be analyzed
precisely while still keeping an eye on the impact on the
system as a whole.
What can effectively protect our energy supply from attack? A

solution which takes security into account at every stage of the
development process. And which, at the end, contains exactly
the security features that are needed. Looking at security as
an integral component is important for a secure infrastructure
during both network planning and the design process.
The network is therefore divided up into manageable zones

in order to equip them with precisely the IT security that is
necessary and worthwhile in order to protect the data in this
zone, as well as ensuring smooth operation of the system at
the same time (fig. 8.5-1).
Siemens offers well-thought-out products, systems and solutions

to ensure the security of the energy automation infrastructure.
The zones are protected at network level by a SCADA firewall that

controls data traffic between the zones and blocks dangerous
packets.
Control center
Spectrum Power client pool
DMZ (demilitarized zone)
Spectrum Power server pool
SCADA
SCADA firewall
Secure remote access
Office network
Other control center
Network blueprint incorporates:
Sophisticated logging and auditing concept
Regular cyber security assessment
Hardened network infrastructure
(switches, router)
Admin LAN
Transfer
networks
Substation
Field devices
SICAM PAS network
SIPROTEC network
SCADA firewall
SCADA firewall
SICAM 1703 network
SIPROTEC network
Trusted network
Hardened host
Web server
Semi-trusted network
VPN tunnel
Anti virus
Untrusted network
Fig. 8.5-1: Zoned IT security concept
487

8.5 IT Security
The architecture is the most visible part of the comprehensive IT

security approach. The energy automation IT security approach
contains the following process measures:
Organizational preparedness
Secure development
Secure integration and aervice
Vulnerability and incident handling
as well as technical measures
Secure system architecture
System hardening
Access control and account management
Security logging/monitoring
Security patching
Malware protection
Backup and restore
Data protection and integrity
Privacy.
All computer systems are equipped with virus scanners in order
to withstand the permanent threat due to malware. The remote
administration and connection of other networks is effected by
VPN tunnels that guarantee access protection at the highest
level.
The complete infrastructure also undergoes system hardening in
order to match up to the consistently high security requirements
for the system as a whole.
8.5.2 Secure throughout from

Interface to Interface
With the advent of the Internet and increasing networking
within the systems, every interface represents a potential risk.
These risks must be easy to estimate in the system. With Integrated Energy Automation, Siemens therefore applies the philosophy of IT security offering simple protection. For this reason,
Siemens attaches greatest importance to homogenization by
means of standardized and reproducible processes for authentication, authorization, malware protection, effective patch
management also for third-party components, standard logging
and continuous security tests.
8.5.3 Continuous Hardening of

Applications
Reliable products are an essential basis for a secure network.
Siemens therefore continuously hardens its products to protect
them against attacks and weak points. Individual risk analyses
and regular tests also specially for third-party components
with a defined combination of IT security test programs for
detecting weak points (test suite) are used for this.
8.5.4 In-House CERT as Know-how

Partner
Siemens has its own in-house Computer Emergency Response
Team (CERT). An organization such as this that discusses subjects critical to IT security and issues current warnings is normally only maintained by universities or governments in order to
provide users with cross-industry information.
The Siemens in-house CERT was established in 1997 and since

then has issued warnings about security loopholes, while
offering approaches for solutions which are processed especially
for the companys areas of competence. As know-how partner,
the work of the Siemens CERT also involves drawing up rules for
the secure development and programming of in-house products
and the continuous further training of in-house programmers.
CERT checks the products for weak points by means of selective
hacker attacks. The team also collects and distributes reports on
weak points and upgrade reports for third-party components
and links them to recommendations, concrete proposals and
implementation specifications.
488

8.5 IT Security
8.5.5 Sensible Use of Standards

The object of standards is to guarantee quality, to increase IT
security in the long term, and to protect investment. There are
now hundreds of IT security standards in existence, but only
some of them are really necessary and worthwhile for a system.
On the basis of its many years experience in the market, Siemens
chooses those standards and guidelines that protect a network
reliably and effectively. This also includes advising customers on
which IT security standards need to be observed at international
and also at regional level.
From the outset, they meet the most stringent security requirements including those of the BDEW Whitepaper (German
Association of Energy and Water Industries) and NERC CIP (North
American Electric Reliability Corporation, Critical Infrastructure
Protection), and certification in accordance with the process
industry security standard WIB 2.0 (Working-party on Instrument Behaviour). The main parts of the WIB requirements will
be merged under the roof of IEC 62443.
The object of Integrated Energy Automation (IT Security) is
permanent IT security for the system in the long term. Therefore
reliable and secure products and infrastructures are not enough.
With Integrated Energy Automation, Siemens also implements
appropriate security processes that ensure that IT security is
actively implemented throughout, both internally and at the
plant operators, and is guaranteed over the entire life cycle of
the plant.
8.5.7 Integrating IT Security in

Everyday Operations
A system is only as secure as the user operating it. A high standard of security can therefore only be achieved by close cooperation between manufacturers and operators. The patch management process is also important after acceptance testing of a
system. For this purpose, the Siemens CERT issues automated
reports on newly discovered weak points that could affect
third-party components in the products. This enables the Siemens customers to be informed promptly, and allows time to
define any service activities arising from this.
A very wide choice of helpful tools is available to enable users to
make IT security a regular part of everyday operation of a
system. Standardized security processes, for example, for
updates and system backups, are implemented directly. At the
same time, efficient tools are provided for administering access
in a system network. This includes effective management of
rights as well as reliable logging tools. Automatically created
protocols or log files are not only stipulated by law, but also help
determine at a later time how damage to a system occurred.
With Integrated Energy Automation, Siemens offers an intelligent interaction of integral solutions for simple and reliable
energy automation.
8.5.6 IT Security Grows in the

Development Process
The integral approach with Integrated Energy Automation not

only involves keeping an eye on the entire system, but also
means that security of products is already integrated in the
entire development process, and not just in the test phase.
IT security guidelines for development, processing, service and
other functions ensure that IT security is actively implemented
throughout all processes. Examples of this are security briefings
for product management before a product is developed or
programmed in the first place. Programmers operate according
to defined guidelines for secure coding, which are specified by
the Siemens CERT.
For an effective patch management, Siemens tests updates of
third-party components, for example, operating systems, router
with firewalls and third-party SW components. Continuous
penetration tests of all relevant products are stipulated in a test
plan. This also includes the definition and establishment of a
security test environment and matching test cases.
In this way, Siemens subjects its products to an objective and
critical certification process with which IT security is guaranteed
and made transparent on the basis of suitably selected standards.
489

8.6 Services
Siemens focuses not only on providing custom-made communication network solutions, customers can furthermore benefit
from Siemens unparalleled energy and communication knowhow and project experience.
Siemens experts are the single point of contact for build, care
and professional services for the complete end-to-end communication solution. Customers can focus on their core business,
leaving the communication network in Siemens expert hands.
Fig. 8.6-1 gives an overview about our service portfolio for
smart communication solutions.
Communication Build Services

Site Survey
Our experts collect data on the field according to given Siemens
work instructions in order to ensure a smooth implementation of
the products or solutions offered. After the survey, the recorded
data are analyzed, and the results are documented in the site
survey report.
Benefits
The Site Survey provides a transparent and complete database,
as an input for effective network planning, as well as for fast and
efficient project execution.
Project Engineering & Integration
The overall know-how of our experts guarantees the perfect
interaction of different net elements, and is the precondition for
a fast installation process and optimal network operation.
Build Services
Site Survey
Project Engineering
& Integration
Factory Acceptance
Test (FAT)
Installation,
Commissioning
& Site Acceptance
Test (SAT)
Care Services
Hotline Service
Technical Support
Maintenance Services
Professional Services
Network
Consulting Services
Training
Fig. 8.6-1: Service portfolio for smart communication solutions
490

8.6 Services
The Siemens offering includes:

Project management
Siemens offers qualified project management services based
on individual customer demands.
Installation of cabinets
Siemens provides robust standard cabinets, especially
designed for the utility market. The services include the
cabinet model layout, wiring engineering documentation,
construction and cabinet wiring according to given technical
specifications.
Network planning
For a given scope, all relevant network parameters, such as
bandwidth, frequency plans, allowable latency, data routing,
protection concepts, etc. will be defined, documented and
configured. Additionally, IP addresses, data communication
network concepts and frequency plans, including quality of
service aspects, will be elaborated.
Supervision
Siemens offers technically qualified supervision to support
installation or commissioning of customer projects.
Communication Care Services

Communication Hotline Service
In order to assure a fast and qualified support for our customers
in case of network problems, and to keep the outage times to an
absolute minimum, we offer a 24x7 hotline service. The hotline
acts as the first contact to insure ticketing process and query
identification for clarifications.
Benefits
The Siemens hotline service assures fastest and competent
support in case of network problems. Defined contact partners
provide continuous assistance throughout the complete problem
solving process. Network downtimes are minimized.
Communication Technical Support
The technical support is usually located in the region and supported by HQ specialists. Our experts care for rapid fault clearance providing optimal network availability.
Benefits
Siemens offers overall system know-how, which ensures the
perfect interworking of different network components, being a
precondition for a fast and effective installation.
Benefits
The Siemens technical support is experienced, well-trained and
worldwide available. These specialists, who are supported by
HQ, provide fast and effective clearance of technical problems,
which minimizes the downtime of the customers communication network.
Factory Acceptance Test

The FATs will usually be performed at Siemens premises. The
basic testing is done according to Siemens standards and
customer-agreed procedures. Certainly, Siemens offers additional testing of customer-specific functions. The FAT can be
expanded by a factory inspection.
Communication Maintenance Services

In order to optimize the lifetime of the installed communication
solutions and to reduce / avoid downtimes, Siemens offers a
complete range of maintenance services consisting of:
Benefits
The FAT ensures that the product functionalities comply with the
customer requirements, and provides a chance for the customer
to see his communication solution in operation upfront to the
actual shipment.
Installation, Commissioning & Site Acceptance Test
Siemens installs and integrates the complete communication
solution into the customers network. The successful Site
Acceptance Test (SAT) finalizes the installation & commissioning
process, and is documented according to Siemens quality
standards.
Benefits
Siemens offers a one-stop installation of the complete communication solution, which includes in particular the optimized
interworking of different communication elements. The customer receives a field-tested solution.
Preventive maintenance
The idea is to execute a regular check of network elements
and perform various routine maintenance works, depending
on the manufacturers recommendations and the customers
requirements. On-site maintenance will produce a regular
report of activities with further instructions.
Extended warranty
Siemens offers a prolonged warranty compared to the normal
Siemens standard.
Repair and replacement
This service covers the repair of a defective module within a
defined turnaround time of Siemens and third-party telecommunication partner products.
Benefits
The Siemens maintenance services extend the lifecycle of the
customers investments and reduce / avoid network downtimes.
The customer is able to plan his staff resources efficiently and
avoids a large spare part stock.
491

8.6 Services
Communication Professional Services

Communication Network Consulting Services
Siemens is offering network consulting services regarding
communication technologies and their optimized mix and
operation in customers individual technical and regulatory
environment.
Our services consist of:
Technology consultancy
Siemens offers technology consultancy for the complete
lifecycle of a communication network, from setting up a
complete new communication infrastructure until the
migration of the existing network towards new technologies.
Proof of concept
Siemens offers to prove the feasibility of customers
telecommunication network concepts, for example, for the
preparation of a planned mass rollout of communication
equipment.
Interoperability lab
Siemens offers testing of complete end-to-end communication
solutions including third-party products at Siemens or
customers premises. We are using mature test management
framework, labs and services based on established
telecommunication testing models.
Benefits
Siemens as technological leader is a member of all important
standardization committees, and guarantees future-proof investment decisions. Our network consulting services provide overall
comprehensive communication solutions, based on geographical, technological and regulatory customer requirements.
The proof-of-concept service confirms the customers overall
concept and reduces planning and budget risks.
Our interoperability lab ensures tested end-to-end solutions

across different components and technologies. This is a precondition for cost-optimized mass rollouts of new applications.
492
Smart Communications Training

Professional training of staff for the optimal configuration of a
communication network is crucial to obtaining the full benefits
from the customers investments. Siemens focuses not only on
providing custom-made communication network solutions, but
also on sharing its knowledge and experience with the customers. Siemens offers a comprehensive training support program in communications solutions for power supply companies.
Customers receive training which is tailored to their area of
responsibility, and which also includes relevant technology and
practical exercises.
The course program is aimed at everyone who is active in the
field of communication technology, for example:
Consultancy
Engineering
Installation
Commissioning
Operation
Maintenance.

8.6 Services
493
494
9.1
Introduction
496
9.2
Power System Consulting
497
9.2.1
General
497
9.2.2
Focus Topics in Todays Power Systems
498
9.2.3
Consulting Domains
500
9.3
Software Solutions
502
9.3.1
PSS Product Suite
502
9.3.2
SIGUARD Solutions
506
495
9 Power System Analysis

and Planning
9.1 Introduction
Every society today is highly dependent on electricity as
becomes painfully evident when large disturbances with supply
interruptions to customers, or even blackouts, occur. In our
increasingly digital societies, almost all aspects of business and
private life are based on the availability of electricity. The reliability
of power supply systems cannot be taken for granted especially
not availability requirements of 99.9 % or higher, a value not often
met by other technical systems of comparable complexity. The
challenge to provide electricity any amount required, at any
time, at any customers premises, and with the appropriate quality
is achieved by a large and complex system of power plants and
extensive transmission and distribution networks.
Building and operating the power supply system are comprehensive tasks of their own, with special facets for the different
system segments:
Generation
Whether conventional, centralized power plants, or decentralized renewable generators the generation equipment has to
be reliably and stably connected to the system, and an appropriate export capacity has to be provided by the system.
Transmission
The key task of transmission networks is to connect generation
and loads over large distances, and to ensure stability and integrity of the overall system.
Distribution
The traditional role of distribution networks is to transfer
power from the infeeding points down to the end customers
however, in todays situation distributed generators need
to be interconnected as well. In any case, the performance of
the distribution networks is decisive for supply reliability and
several other power quality parameters.
Industry
Reliable power supply with defined power quality is a basic
prerequisite for commercial and industrial processes. In addition, larger sites often run captive generation with related
requirements on stability and also operational flexibility.
In addition, the ever faster changing world of today holds special

challenges. Every power supply system worldwide is facing its
individual mix of challenges including aspects like:
Increasing infeed from distributed and/or renewable generation,
often with highly fluctuating power output, and in extreme
cases leading to a complete change of the power generation
system and resulting power flow patterns.
Changes in market regimes, continuing liberalization and entry
of new market players such as renewable generation or active
prosumers.
Introduction of new, smart technologies such as smart metering, demand response, virtual power plants, or advanced,
496
localized automation and control concepts but also power

electronics (HVDC or FACTS), electromobility, or energy storage.
Ever increasing economic pressure.
Ageing equipment and systems.
Emergence of new business models driven by either changes
in market regimes and/or technological advances.
These requirements and challenges call for constant analysis,
adaption, optimization, and strategic development of power
systems. And the pace of change is increasing, as well as the
scope of changes: In certain situations, the appropriate changes
will even be radical modifications of business models and system
hierarchies, starting from, e.g., microgrids up to wide-spread
systems consisting of separate power islands connected by a
trimmed transmission backbone, or even operating completely
independent.
Siemens PTI has built significant competence and expertise on
power systems over decades, and over literally thousands of
successfully completed studies and projects. Engaging actively in
the technical community and Siemens-internal developments,
the scope is constantly expanding into the latest technological
trends and concepts. The worldwide distribution of projects,
combined with local teams of experts in more than 15 countries,
ensures familiarity with both local and, of course, also international standards and requirements. This forms a sound basis
to address independently and objectively any issue in the
strategic and technical development of power systems.
Transmission
Public
utilities
Primary
equipment
Secondary
equipment
Industrial
customers
Distribution
Fig. 9.1-1: Siemens PTIs expertise on power systems

9.2 Power System
Consulting
9.2.1 General
A power supply system is more than just a combination of
switchgear, transformers, overhead lines, cables, and secondary
equipment for protection, control and communication. It is the
integration of all these components into an overall solution
meeting all relevant expectations and requirements: support of
the overall business targets and strategy, sound financial performance and adequate technical performance both in the view
of the utilities and also of the end customers.
While there are highly complex and important tasks to be
addressed in the detailed planning and design work on the
equipment level, it is the task of power system planning to
support the definition of overall business targets and business
models, to design system models, organizational structures and
business processes, and to derive functional specifications for
the separate subsystems, plants and components all in order
to ensure the safe, secure and efficient operation of the system
as a whole. Key requirements to be addressed include:
Strategy
Ensuring that system development and operation support the
overall business strategy of the utility.
Economical performance
Meeting defined budgets and other economic performance
criteria in individual projects and for the system in total.
Safety
Protecting people and equipment against harm and damage
caused by electricity, especially by electrical failures.
Security
Safeguarding the stability of the system, especially after disturbances like load shifts or electrical failures.
Technical adequacy and power quality
Connecting and supplying all end customers according to
the defined technical requirements, including power quality
requirements on, e.g., reliability and voltage level both in
normal operation and also in disturbed operation.
Ecological performance
Preventing pollution and minimizing the impact of electrical
equipment (e.g., lines) on the environment.
Besides the large set of different and often, contradicting
requirements, planning activities in power systems have to
address very different time horizons: from operational planning
focusing on the immediate future within a few minutes or hours,
via project planning addressing months to years, up to long-term
planning developing guidelines and visions for several decades
into the future. In order to ensure that the development of the
power system follows one clear strategy and roadmap, it is
important to have a commonly agreed long-term system concept
available at first so that all activities and measures in short- and
medium-term frames can be oriented and aligned accordingly.
Short
term
Data
collection
Actual
system
Weak
points
Medium
term
Planning
criteria
Long
term
Next year
concept
3-5 year
concept
Long-term
concept
Fig. 9.2-1: Strategic system planning process
Fig. 9.2-2: Planning tasks related to a typical project lifecycle
Power supply systems are under constant development to keep

pace with operational needs and adjustments in day-to-day
business, and to meet the ever changing demands and requirements of customers and regulation. This is why planning activities are relevant and beneficial over the complete lifetime of
equipment, plants and systems and not just in the explicit
concept and planning phases at the beginning of their lifecycle.
Examples for relevant planning tasks along the complete lifecycle are given in fig 9.2-2.
In the first instance, any power system consulting project is fully
individual since it has to consider the specific challenges and
requirements, current status, overall framework, and history of
the system, utility and customers. Still, there are certain focus
topics that are frequently addressed in projects, and typical
domains that contribute to projects. The next chapters give a
short overview over such focus topics and consulting domains.
497

9.2 Power System Consulting
9.2.2 Focus Topics in Todays Power

Systems
Smart Grid Compass
Around the world, the power industry is facing major changes.
On the one hand, the core system paradigm is shifting from
generation follows load to load follows generation, due to
the installation of massive amounts of fluctuating renewable
generation. On the other hand, regulation and market conditions
are getting less stable, which forces utilities to adjust their
capabilities and become more flexible. In order to help utilities
cope with these challenges, Siemens has developed the Smart Grid
Compass framework. Leveraging this framework, Siemens
supports utilities to develop comprehensive strategies and derive
solid implementation roadmaps, according to their business needs.
Orientation phase
Development of a first high-level roadmap consisting of candidate initiatives derived out of the prioritization of business
objectives, an assessment of the current business capability
level, and the definition of the aspired business capability level.
Destination phase
Further detailing of the created roadmap, and evaluating of
the contained elements in order to develop different implementation scenarios. Each scenario will be backed by a qualitative business case, and will include a rough timeline as well as
a first budget estimation.
Routing phase
Extending the level of detail of the chosen scenario in order
to transform it into an implementation program. Quantitative
justification of the program with a business case based on
impact chains, parameters, KPIs, work packages, roles and
hourly rates. Alignment of the program with already existing
investment programs and other relevant plans.
Navigation phase
Ensuring that the program stays on course, and implementation on track incl., e.g., setup of the necessary organizational
structure, training of resources, running a dedicated program
management office, executing value management, implementing regular refresh workshops, and supporting individual implementation projects.
System security
The growing complexity of power systems, and power system
operation at ever closer safety margins increases the risk of
blackouts. To correctly assess a power systems stability, the
operator needs to know the stability margin and have assistance
during the decision making process when it comes to finding
the most efficient solution in case of stability issues.
Dynamic Security Assessment (DSA)
Power system stability plays an increasingly important role in
system operation and planning today. The stability limits of
these systems are often reached far earlier than their thermal
or rated limits. Plus, the growing complexity of power systems
increases the risk of blackouts. This means that network operation cannot rely on data acquisition and static n-1 analyses
only. Using DSA methodologies and tools is the most reliable
way to avoid blackouts and at the same time safely operate the
498
power system closer to its limits. Such tasks are enabled by the
product SIGUARD DSA (see section 9.3) which is also used in
related offline studies.
Protection Security Assessment (PSA)
Protection systems are crucial for system security because they
limit the impact that faults have on power systems.
Continuously evolving power systems and quickly changing
operating conditions make it a complex task to calculate, verify
and validate protection settings. Rigorous protection security
assessment that takes into account all relevant network, operating and fault conditions is required to review the adequacy
of protection settings. Such protection security assessments
should be carried out at regular intervals, and only automated
solutions can manage them efficiently.
Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) placement studies
Optimum PMU placement studies help to decide for the number and location of PMU devices in power systems. The locations are depending on the topology of the power system and
on the physical phenomena the system is prone to, such as
power swings, angle separations, and voltage stability problems. Optimum PMU placement avoids one-time costs for
devices and installation, as well as continuous costs for communication, data storage, and maintenance and support.
Grid code compliance
As electric power system loads continue to increase and older
power plants are being retired, a significant number of new
power generation units, including conventional fossil-fired and
renewable energy units, will be connecting to the transmission
network. These new power plants create new challenges for the
exiting transmission network. Interconnection criteria or grid
codes help ensure that the interconnection of a proposed
generation project will not negatively impact the reliability
performance of the power system.
Screening study
High-level review of the transmission capacity in the immediate neighborhood of one or more proposed plant sites to determine if the plants output can be exported to the network
with no or limited restrictions.
Feasibility study
Steady-state power flow and short-circuit analyses of the transmission network with the proposed plant interconnected. This
will provide the power plant developer or owner with preliminary information on whether major investments will be required
to reinforce the transmission network for interconnecting the
project.
System impact study
Thorough steady-state and short-circuit analyses that consider
a range of relevant system operating scenarios, as well as dynamic simulations that evaluate the transient and dynamic
performance of the network to ensure compliance with the
transmission network criteria or grid code.
Facility study
Definition of equipment requirements for interconnecting the
project and, if necessary, for upgrading the network to maintain reliability. This step typically involves the interconnecting
transmission network owners, who will provide input on their
equipment preferences and practices.

Integration of distributed and renewable energy sources

Due to environmental and also customer-specific, economic or
supply security requirements, there are increasing shares of
power generation from distributed energy resources (DER) or
renewable energy sources (RES), of controllable loads, and
possibly of co-generation or storage units. Beneficial integration
of dispersed and renewable generation into a distribution grid,
and also of large-scale renewable generation into transmission
systems, poses a considerable challenge to existing network
planning as well as operation methods and software tools.
Integration of dispersed generation
Successful integration of dispersed and renewable generation
into distribution networks relies heavily on effective planning
and operation strategies. Integration studies address all relevant issues in system architecture and configuration, especially
the identification of the optimal connection point, power quality, protection concepts, and decoupling concepts.
Wind farm design
Successful wind power plant design and system integration
should consider both the design requirements for the internal
network of wind power plants (WPPs), and a reliable performance and control of the plant amid full compliance with the
grid code. A generation interconnection study ensures an optimum integration of the WPPs into the grid with regards to reliability as well as cost-effectiveness.
Grid code compliance investigation
A thorough analysis enables the project developer and/or network operator to identify the right connection strategy before
the actual installation of DER and/or RES generation. Such an
analysis considers several aspects including optimum connection point to the grid, dimensioning of the switchgear considering technical and economical aspects, losses, power quality,
and reliability of supply.
System interconnection studies
System interconnection studies support the interconnection
of DER/RES plants while maintaining the overall systems technical performance. The results identify impacts on power grids
and solutions, in order to address relevant issues and provide
technical advice to either the project developer or the system
operator.
Wind turbine modeling
Comprehensive modeling of wind turbines with specialized
simulation software forms the basis for detailed wind farm
investigations, which are an essential part of any design or
interconnection study. The validation of model performance
to measurements is required for certification in some markets,
and is a valuable sales asset for the turbine manufacturers.
Smart Grid concepts and new technologies
The increasing share of renewable energy sources and the
growing number of available technologies have brought about
different trends and requirements in the Smart Grid market.
Power system operators are challenged with minimizing the
impact of new generation on performance, and with maintaining or even improving security of supply and power quality.
At the same time, investments for network extensions are
under increasing economic pressure.
Design of Smart Grid network concepts

An optimum overall concept for innovative system architecture
and configuration is developed, considering the latest innovative technologies such as primary components, communication technologies, and Smart Grid applications and functionality. Performance analyses ensure adequate network performance, sustainability, and efficient network operation.
Microgrid and off-grid solutions
Island or off-grid power supply system operators, or developers of special customer projects, often struggle with high costs
for electricity and low supply reliability. Intelligent solutions for
system design, system protection, automation, and the integration of renewable energy sources form the basis for a technically and economically feasible, and even more ecological
microgrid power system concept.
Electromobility
The emerging trend to substitute cars with combustion engines by electric vehicles (EVs) will have a large impact on the
existing power systems, especially on LV and MV distribution.
With an analysis of the current power system and of future
scenarios, the enhancement of system performance, and the
integration of Smart Grid technologies can be prepared for the
integration of electromobility at reasonable extension costs.
AC/DC hybrid systems
The increasing installation of, e.g., offshore wind farms far
away from the shores, and the increasing wide-area power
transfers in large interconnected systems requires transporting
large amounts of power over long distances. In many projects,
DC solutions are preferred over AC solutions due to technical
and/or economical reasons. Due to reliability issues, in the
future the existing point-to-point HVDC connections can be
interconnected, in order to form a DC network integrating,
e.g., several wind farms and connecting several AC networks
into one system. A thorough understanding of the individual
components is required to design complex DC network concepts and hybrid AC/DC systems to ensure appropriate and
stable behavior.
Feasibility studies for projects in the oil & gas industry
Several key processes in the oil & gas industry are highly
energy-intensive, and all-electric concepts often provide
additional benefits in operational flexibility, efficiency and
overall performance. Special requirements and conditions in
the oil & gas industry call for explicit and detailed feasibility
studies to validate the technical and economical appropriateness of solution concepts.
Feasibility studies
Advanced concepts for the power supply system in oil & gas
installations, e.g., new all-electric concepts for LNG compression plants, offshore vessels or refinery processes, pose high
challenges especially on the dynamic performance of power
generation equipment and the network. Special dynamic
models and simulations, considering both the power system
and also key aspects of the production processes explicitly,
can analyze and verify the performance of solution concepts.
499

Subsea systems
New concepts and new technologies for offshore subsea
production units are being developed to exploit such locations
using subsea systems fed from deep water platforms or fed
from onshore grids far away from the oil or gas fields. Suitable
subsea power distribution and transportation is a key aspect
to fulfill the challenging demands of moving power supply
equipment onto the sea bed in deep water.
Disturbance investigation
From the system perspective, equipment faults and failures do
occur frequently. Many fault and failure events do not even
impact system operation however, some events do cause
undesired and sometimes incomprehensible impacts. Especially
for multiple faults, the actual root causes, or even the observed
events in system operation, are not easily to trace. In these cases
knowledge of different specialists has to be coordinated, e.g.,
on protection, insulation coordination, system dynamics, network
operation, and equipment of different vendors. It is also necessary to consider post-failure conditions, events and operational
procedures, and to cross-check official statements.
Site investigation and measurements
Data verification may include site visits, interviews, analysis of
reference events, and measurements on-site or in a laboratory.
The analysis is backed and supported by state-of-the-art, calibrated measuring devices.
Modeling and simulation
Based on the theoretical analyses, a draft hypothesis on the
disturbance event is developed. By modeling the steady-state,
dynamic and transient behavior of equipment and of systems
in appropriate detail, it is possible to verify the root cause and
to validate proposed mitigation measures.
9.2.3 Consulting Domains

Steady-state system studies
Steady-state system studies define the structure and configuration
of power supply networks. This builds the basis for solid system
performance and is an ever more demanding task given todays
challenges, such as system integration of renewable generation,
security requirements, and overall tighter operational margins. The
following types of steady-state system studies can be performed:
Network analysis
Technical calculations of power networks in their present structure and configuration
Network structure development
Development and performance validation of alternative structures and configurations for power networks, from short-term
operational planning to long-term master planning
Neutral earthing studies
Development and performance validation of appropriate neutral earthing concepts and configurations in power systems
Earthing system measurement and design
Measurement of specific soil resistivity, as well as development
and performance validation of earthing system concepts and
configurations
Dynamic system studies
Various activities and events in power supply systems trigger
dynamic phenomena in the interconnected network equipment
and generators. Modeling, analyzing and optimizing the
dynamic performance is a key requirement to ensure stability
and security in the system both in normal, and especially in
disturbed operation and for the design and optimization of
equipment. The following types of dynamic system studies can
be performed:
Dynamic system analysis
Modeling and analysis of dynamic performance of equipment,
such as generators, motors and systems also comprising
mechanical equipment (e.g., shafts of rotating equipment)
and steam supply systems
Power electronics modeling and analysis
Detailed modeling and performance analysis of AC/DC power
converters, high-voltage direct current (HVDC), or flexible AC
transmission systems (FACTS) equipment
Controller and machine measurement, modeling and analysis
Detailed modeling and performance analysis of controllers, as
well as measurement of controller response and performance
on electrical machines
Transient system studies
Overvoltages from lightning strikes, electrical failures or switching
actions, as well as other transient phenomena, may significantly
impact system performance and equipment condition. Respective
modeling, analysis and insulation coordination studies build the
foundation for the resilience of equipment and systems. The
following types of transient system studies can be performed:
Transient studies
Modeling and analysis of overvoltages and other transient
phenomena, as well as detailed modeling and analysis of
switching actions and their impact on system performance
500

Insulation coordination studies

Evaluation of voltage stresses, and determination of appropriate insulation levels and of protective devices for equipment
and systems
Protection and control system studies
Protection and control aspects are essential for the operational
performance of power supply systems, and are thus also integral
parts of planning studies. A sound analysis of requirements, of
the current system, and of relevant operating scenarios, the
development of appropriate schemes, and the detailed coordination of individual relays and equipment ensure that operational
performance targets are achieved. The following types of
protection and control system studies can be performed:
Protection system design and coordination
Development of suitable schemes for power system protection
and coordination of appropriate settings for protection relays
Instrument transformer analysis
Dimensioning of instrument transformers in substations and
switchgear, especially current transformers in gas-insulated
switchgear (GIS)
System control and automation concepts
Concepts, configurations, and equipment for communication,
automation and control in power supply systems
Power quality system studies
Power quality issues, mainly harmonics, but also flicker or
voltage fluctuations, are of increasing concern in todays power
systems, driven, e.g., by the increasing use of power electronics.
These issues may significantly impair system performance and
customer processes up to equipment damages and process
shutdowns. Appropriate studies on the analysis, modeling and
mitigation of such issues built the foundation to ensure operational performance. The following types of power quality system
studies can be performed:
Power quality measurements, analysis, and filter design
Measurement, evaluation and analysis of power quality phenomena, especially harmonics, fault diagnostics, development
and performance validation of appropriate filters
Interference and electromagnetic field analysis
Analysis of interferences from power supply systems to other
networks and systems, as well as modeling and calculation of
electromagnetic fields
Business transformation and solution engineering
The classical utility business environment has been undergoing
massive structural change for the last years due to an increase
in renewable generation, changes in regulatory frameworks,
new market players, and advances in technology. However,
these changes under the overall headline of Smart Grid not only
create new challenges for utilities and their executive management teams, they also provide opportunities and rationales to
transform utilities into customer-focused service companies that
offer innovative and customized products and services. The
primary challenge lies in navigating the transformation through
a comprehensive strategy that integrates technical capabilities
with business opportunities in a structured way, in order to
create sustainable business value.
Business transformation consulting

Utility of the future strategies Development and implementation of strategies for the improvement of a utilitys
business capabilities including detailed planning of measures and financial justification.
Integrated Smart Grid strategies Development and implementation of strategies that combine business capability
enhancements with the definition of innovative business
models.
Smart Grid reference architectures Guide for the development of a utilitys technology footprint.
Solution engineering
Owners engineer Delivery of engineering services in the
context of implementation projects/programs in order to
help utilities reduce overall resource and skill requirements
or bridge short-term gaps in resource and skill availability.
IT / OT convergence Design and realization of concepts
focusing on closing or reducing the gap between the IT and
OT worlds within utilities.
Strategic asset management
Development and setup of strategic grid management concepts considering both technical and financial aspects.
Energy market studies
Modeling and analysis of the entire power market and regulatory regimes and aspects, especially production cost modeling
Due diligence
Investigating and evaluating utilities considered as targets
for future acquisition with respect to technical and economic
current situation and performance, as well as future plans
More information on Siemens Power

Technologies International visit:
www.siemens.com / power-technologies
501

9.3 Software Solutions
Various calculations of technical and economic characteristics of
the actual system or of planning variants are part of the network
planning process. The availability of suitable tools is highly
important. Besides the obvious requirement that calculation
results should be as accurate and reliable as possible, particularly with regard to the quality of both calculation tools and
input data, several other aspects are also relevant for the successful and efficient use of network planning tools:
Network model
The quality of calculation is dependent, above all, on the quality of the input data. The structure and complexity of the data
model must support the various calculations, including those
for very large network models. In large systems, the question
of how the network and the data are structured and presented
to the user is of crucial importance for the effective use of the
software tools.
User interface
Calculation algorithms implemented in the software tools have
reached a very high level of complexity and are controlled by a
multitude of different parameters. The handling and management of large network models is a complex task on its own.
Therefore, an intuitive but comprehensive user interface is a
key requirement for modern software tools.
Management of calculation results
After the actual calculations have been performed, the results
need to be analyzed and presented. In many cases, this means
more than printing tables or network diagrams with certain result values attached to the respective components. The compilation of comprehensive graphical representations, tables and
reports both according to predefined and user-defined structures provides significant support in the execution of network planning projects and should be supported by the software tools.
CTDim, current and voltage transformer dimensioning

PSSODMS, CIM-based model management and analysis for
operations and planning
PSSMOD, project modeling and data management for PSSE
PSSE
PSSE high-performance transmission planning software has
supported the power community with meticulous and comprehensive modeling capabilities for more than 40 years. The
probabilistic contingency analyses and advanced dynamics
modeling capabilities included in PSSE provide transmission
planning and operations engineers a broad range of methodologies for use in the design and operation of reliable networks.
PSSE is the Siemens offering for power system transmission
analysis that continues to be the technology of choice in an ever
growing market that exceeds 115 countries.
PSSE is an integrated, interactive program for simulating,
analyzing and optimizing power system performance. It provides
the user with the most advanced and proven methods in many
technical areas. PSSE base power flow package can be
enhanced to include one or all of the following modules:
Advanced Power Flow
Dynamic Simulation
Short-Circuit Calculations
Optimal Power Flow (OPF)
Geomagnetic Induced Currents (GIC)
Advanced Results Visualization (RAV)
Graphical Model Builder (GMB)
Eigenvalue and Modal Analysis (NEVA)
9.3.1 PSS Product Suite
Siemens has used its great experience and know-how in network

planning to develop powerful system simulation and analysis
tools to assist engineers in their highly responsible work. The
software tools of the Power System Simulator (PSS) Product
Suite are leading products with respect to technical performance
and user-friendliness. Comprehensive interfaces enable the
interaction of all PSS Product Suite tools, and also support the
integration with other IT systems.
The PSS Product Suite includes:
PSSE, power flow, dynamics, short circuit, and optimal power
flow for transmission network planning
PSSSINCAL, power system planning for generation, transmission, distribution and industrial grids
PSSNETOMAC, dynamic system analysis
PSSPDMS, protection device management system
PSSMUST, transmission transfer capability, sensitivity, and
impact analysis
502
Fig. 9.3-1: Visualizing PSSE results using one-line diagram

contouring

PSSSINCAL Platform
PSSSINCAL Platform is a comprehensive, high-end network
analysis software solution for all network planning needs. It is
the Siemens offering for power system transmission, distribution
and industry planning. PSSSINCAL provides a full unbalanced
network model for high-, medium- and low-voltage grids, and
supports in the design, modeling and analysis of electrical
networks as well as pipe networks, such as water, gas, and
district heating / cooling systems.
Through its modular and fully integrated design, PSSSINCAL
enables a high level of customization according to individual
needs, making it the optimum solution for all planning tasks in
the areas of generation, transmission, distribution and industrial
grids.
PSSSINCAL also provides the capability of solving a full range of
tasks with its high-quality algorithms optimized for both accuracy
and performance. User-defined applications can easily be developed with its object-oriented data model. Sophisticated case and
data management facilitate the handling of complex projects
including multi-user projects. PSSSINCAL can be easily integrated into systems such as Geographical Information Systems
(GIS), SCADA and Meter Data Management Systems (MDMS).
The following modules are offered: Power Flow (balanced/
unbalanced), Load and Generation Profiles, Load and Network
Development, Optimum Network Structures, Optimum Load
Flow, Optimum Branching/Tie Open Points, Reactive Power
Optimization & Capacitor Placement, Volt/Var Optimization, Load
Balancing, Load Allocation/Scaling & Transformer Tap Detection,
Contingency Analysis, Probabilistic Reliability, Cost Calculation,
Short Circuit 1-, 2- and 3-phase, Multiple Faults, Dimensioning of
Low-Voltage Networks, Distance Protection, Overcurrent Time
Protection, Protection Simulation, Protection Device Management
System (PSSPDMS), Arc Flash Hazard, Harmonics, Ripple Control,
Motor Start, Stability (RMS) Electromagnetic Transients (EMT),
Eigenvalue/Modal Analysis, Graphical Model Builder (GMB),
NETCAD/BOSL, Eigenvalue Screening, Network Reduction, Flicker
Evaluation, Line Constant Calculation, Generic Wind Models,
FACTS Models, Professional Dynamic Engine (PSSNETOMAC).
Fig. 9.3-2: PSSSINCAL Platform: offshore wind farm with results

from dynamic, harmonic and long-term load profile
simulation
Fig. 9.3-3: Graphical user interface (GUI) of PSSNETOMAC
PSSNETOMAC
PSSNETOMAC was designed to facilitate access to and manage
any kind of information on the dynamic performance of a power
system. PSSNETOMAC offers a wide range of options for simulating all kinds of electromagnetic and electromechanical phenomena in electrical power supply systems. It links up the most
important methods for the analysis of dynamics of electrical
networks in the time and frequency domains. System operators
can choose between a variety of program configurations from
Basic to Professional. Numerous program modules allow for this
program to be adjusted to the individual requirements of each user.
503

PSSPDMS
Numerous settings are needed to parameterize different functions of a modern protection device (time-overcurrent protection, overload protection, impedance protection, intermittent
earth-fault protection, monitoring measurements, etc.). At any
point in time, starting from the setting calculation, parameterization and testing, the settings as well as the accompanying
documents must be traceable, and the workflow state clearly
indicated. Considering the involvement of different staff members during the workflow, as well as the changing network
configurations with corresponding parameter sets and handling
of different firmware, the management of protection data is a
complex process.
PSSPDMS (Protection Device Management System) is a universal program to centrally manage protection devices and their
settings. All data is stored in a central relational database, and is
available for data exchange with other programs such as relay
parameterization software. Settings can be exchanged between
the power system analysis software PSSSINCAL and PSSPDMS.
Fig. 9.3-4: PSSPDMS user interface
PSSMUST
PSSMUST is a powerful tool for quickly and easily calculating
transfer capabilities, finding the impacts of transfers on transmission networks, and performing advanced sensitivity analysis.
PSSMUST complements PSSE data handling and analysis
functions with the most advanced and efficient linear power
flow and user interface available. PSSMUSTs speed, ease-ofuse, and versatile Microsoft Excel interface simplifies and
reduces data setup time, and improves the display and versatility
of the results.
CTDim
The optimization of instrument transformers with respect to
their technical requirements and their economic impact builds
an important milestone within every power system project.
CTDim is a software tool for current transformer (CT) and
voltage transformer (VT) dimensioning.
Fig. 9.3-5: Performing transfer limit analysis using PSSMUST
Main features include the following:

Straightforward check whether CTs and VTs fulfill requirements
of connected devices.
Supports distance protection, generator protection, transformer protection, line differential protection, busbar protection, as well as overcurrent protection.
Powerful documentation: Short and long reports are prepared
automatically.
Includes both protection as well as metering CT cores. Covers
dimensioning for VT protection and metering windings.
Supports international standards IEC and ANSI.
Transient simulation of CT behavior for all above-mentioned
protection CT classes and protection devices. Comtrade export
function allows hardware testing.
Large relay and metering instrument database: Siemens
numerical relays are fully supported, as well as a large
number of non-Siemens devices.
Fig. 9.3-6: CTDim: results of a transient simulation
504

CTDim makes instrument transformer dimensioning more

efficient. It saves engineering and production costs by optimizing the current transformer data.
PSSODMS
PSSODMS is a multi-purpose software product for electrical
power transmission system planners and operators. The software is currently used by power companies around the globe to
manage grid / network models, train system operators, augment
existing SCADA / EMS network analysis functions, and facilitate
compliance with interoperability regulations based on the
IEC CIM 61970 standard.
PSSODMS allows transmission planning and operations
engineers to create, maintain, analyze and exchange networkrelated data quickly and easily. It tears down interoperability
barriers by providing a fully CIM-compliant (IEC 61970) network
modeling platform, including the ability to convert between
various proprietary data formats. PSSODMS customers around
the globe are enjoying the benefits of:
Greater efficiency in their model exchange workflows / business
processes
Higher degree of accuracy in power system studies and simulation
Increased power system reliability / security
Reduced regulatory violations / fines.
Fig. 9.3-7: PSSODMS CIM-based hierarchical network modeling

interface
PSSMOD
PSSMOD is a software product that makes it easier and more
efficient for existing PSSE users to manage a large number of
change cases across multiple concurrent users. The product
brings efficiency, order and accuracy to the process of creating,
maintaining and exchanging PSSE-based network models in
complex, multi-user settings.
PSSMOD revolutionizes traditional approaches to managing
network models used in transmission planning studies by providing a web-based application with an extensive set of features
supported by a centralized data repository. PSSMOD is currently
used by large and small planning departments to coordinate
production and publication of large, aggregated base cases as
well as support for interconnection and reliability cases.
PSSMOD coordinates time-bound network model data inputs
from multiple users, and is able to assemble a complete study
case for any point in time. PSSMOD provides consistency and
transparency for network models.
Fig. 9.3-8: PSSMOD projects
505

9.3.2 SIGUARD Solutions

SIGUARD solutions offer a combination of software, training
and consulting to prepare the customer for the new challenges
and the upcoming security requirements in power system
operations. Applying SIGUARD solutions provides the following
benefits:
Blackout prevention
Increase of power system utilization
Improvement of situational awareness.
SIGUARD solutions support the decision making process of
the power system operator. The basic idea is to increase
the observability and the controllability of the system, and
to perform an automatic, intelligent security assessment.
The SIGUARD family includes:
SIGUARD DSA, dynamic security assessment
SIGUARD PSA, protection security assessment
SIGUARD PDP, wide-area monitoring
Fig. 9.3-9: SIGUARD DSA cockpit showing risk of instability for the
past (left), present (middle), and future (right) power
system states
SIGUARD DSA
SIGUARD DSA, the dynamic security assessment tool, analyzes
possible contingencies and assesses the system stability. It
provides the operator with an overview of the current and
near-future state of system stability.
The highly sophisticated algorithms of the PSS Product Suite
perform dynamic contingency simulations. The computation
power required for this is scalable from a single laptop all the
way to computation clusters. The dynamic stability problems
transient stability, voltage stability, and oscillatory stability are
taken into account. The high-speed simulation engine makes it
possible to analyze the entire range of stability issues ahead of
real time with a single tool that uses a single system model.
Cascading outages caused by system dynamics can be observed
and analyzed with the embedded protection simulation in order
to prevent blackouts of the power system.
Fig. 9.3-10: Selectivity evaluation with SIGUARD PSA
The solution includes customization and integration of

SIGUARD DSA into any IT environment. The adaptation and
long-term maintenance of the power system model as well as
consulting services are offered.
SIGUARD PSA
SIGUARD PSA, the protection security assessment tool, analyzes
the selectivity, sensitivity and speed of the entire protection
system. It enables a rigorous protection system performance
audit.
SIGUARDPSA offers a comprehensive protection security
solution that comprises:
Network and protection data management (including data
collection and update)
Network and protection simulation
Protection security assessment, such as the detection of
non-selectivity, and of hidden as well as critical faults
Online result visualization and documentation
Protection setting improvement
506
SIGUARD PSA enables protection engineers and operators

to perform fast protection security assessments for reliable
protection setting determination, secure system operation,
and of cascading trippings prevention.
SIGUARD PDP
SIGUARD PDP, the phasor data processor tool, uses PMUs
(Phasor Measurement Units) a cutting-edge phasor measurement technology to observe the actual state of the power
system. It monitors system variables and informs about critical
system states.
For more information on this product, please see chapter 6.4.7.
Intelligent PMU placement is crucial for cost saving, and for
optimum observability of dynamic system behavior. Optimum
PMU placement studies are offered as consulting services from
Siemens PTI.

507
508
Services & Support
10.1
Asset Services
510
10.1.1 Network Services
511
10.1.2 Substation Modernization Projects
514
10.1.3 Monitoring and Diagnostics
514
10.1.4 Cable Services
515
10.1.5 Transformer Services
516
10.1.6 Switchgear Services
516
10.1.7 Service Programs
518
10.1.8 Energy Customer Support Center
518
10.2
Siemens Power Academy TD
519
10.3
Metering Services
521
10.3.1 Portfolio Overview
521
10.3.2 Data Collection
523
10.3.3 Data Management
523
10.3.4 Revenue Management
523
10.3.5 Smart Metering
523
10.3.6 Meter Data Management Solution
523
10.3.7 Demand Response Management Software
525
10
509
10 Services & Support

10.1 Asset Services
Asset Services provide expert solutions and services for power
supply systems in the areas of power transmission, power
distribution and industrial energy supply that keep the network
10
510
infrastructure on the cutting edge in terms of lifecycle, reliability

and environmental friendliness. Such expert solutions and
services include Siemens state-of-the-art retrofit.
Services & Support

10.1 Asset Services
Unscheduled OPEX
CAPEX
Network
Services
Scheduled OPEX Programs
Advisory Services & Asset Management
Monitoring &
Diagnostics
Monitoring
Systems
Substation
Modernization
Substation
Modernization/
Green Solution
Audits &
Assessments
O&M
LTM
ROS
Cable &
Line Services
PMI
Transformer
Services
Installation/
Retrofit/
Upgrade/
Extension
Reactive
Maintenance/
Spares/
Repairs
Switchgear
Services
Planned
Maintenance
& Inspection
Remote
Operational
Support
Long-Term
Maintenance
Operation &
Maintenance
Fig. 10.1-1: Asset services portfolio
10.1.1 Network Services

Network Services solutions from Siemens deliver the decisive
plus in reliability, quality and efficiency throughout the entire
power system.
The comprehensive portfolio of Network Services solutions
comprise advisory services, asset management and a wide array
of operation, management and maintenance packages all
provided by professionals with many years of experience and a
proven track record in power technology applications and the
energy business. In a nutshell, Siemens helps making the most
of a given power system in terms of efficiency, reliability and
profitability (fig. 10.1-2).
Operation and maintenance (O&M) services
Siemens provides a wide array of operation and maintenance
services as well as care-free packages that deliver a guaranteed
level of performance for power supply infrastructure facilities.
Siemens works closely with asset owners and/or operators to
develop balanced service solutions tailored to each specific
situation. These solutions are designed to meet the needs and
expectations of customers as far as the technical, financial and
regulatory performance of their assets are concerned.
The Siemens approach to the provision of O&M services is
proven every day. The key to success is combining the organiza-
Operation and Maintenance Services (O&M)

Long-Term Maintenance Services (LTM)
Private Investors/Developers
Asset
Management
Services
Power Utilities & Industries
Advisory
Services
Cities, Infrastructure Operators & EPCs

Public Institutions & Regulators
Fig. 10.1-2: Comprehensive solutions for system operators
10
tions global expert knowledge of asset management and network analysis with local knowledge of the specific network
conditions (that is, global competence delivered locally).
Customers include public or private utilities, industrial organizations, private/equity investors, or real estate development
companies from many countries around the world.
511
Services & Support

10.1 Asset Services
Siemens portfolio of O&M services includes the following
elements (see also fig. 10.1-3):
Operation services (e.g., 24/7 control room operation, metering, energy automation)
Long-term maintenance services (e.g., field services, emergency response, supply chain management)
Management services (e.g., asset strategy planning, transition
& change management)
Special services (e.g., lifecycle management, network extensions, substation refurbishments)
Customer services (e.g., call center, customer support, billing,
revenue collection)
Support services (e.g., human resources, logistics, quality
management).
Management
Services
Special
Services
Operation
Services
O&M
Services
Customer
Services
Long-Term
Maintenance
Services
Support
Services
Fig. 10.1-3: Core elements of O&M services
In a typical engagement, the management of an entire power

supply system or specific targeted portions/functions thereof is
transferred to Siemens for a fixed period of time. Investment
decisions and individual core functions may remain with the
asset owner or may be assumed by Siemens. The operational risk
is transferred to Siemens, and key performance indicators (KPIs)
and/or service programs are established to guarantee the agreed
technical and budget performance.
Siemens provides O&M services for:
Transmission & distribution networks
Wind farms electrical balance of plant systems
HVDC and FACTS facilities onshore or offshore.
O&M services for wind farms:
Siemens provides O&M services for onshore or offshore wind
farms interconnected to the power system using conventional
AC or HVDC technology.
Fig. 10.1-4: Wind farm in Italy, operated and maintained by Siemens
Examples of the scope of O&M services for wind farms include

(fig. 10.1-4):
Electrical balance of plant (HV, MV, LV and DC systems, SCADA
and telecommunication systems)
Buildings and other civil infrastructure
Ancillary facilities (e.g., lighting equipment, network data systems, etc.).
10
O&M services for HVDC and FACTS:

Siemens provides services for a wide range of power-electronicsbased facilities including long-distance (overhead and underground/undersea) and back-to-back HVDC installations, as well
as Static Var Compensators (SVC), Thyristor Controlled Static
Compensators (TCSC), and other similar FACTS devices.
Examples of customized services for HVDC and FACTS installations include the following (fig. 10.1-5):
Maintenance (preventive, corrective)
First line of support (for immediate fault analysis and repair)
Second line of support (for complex fault analysis and repair)
Development of maintenance strategies
Remote maintenance activities, such as monitoring, fault analysis
and diagnostics/repairs of control and protection systems
Spare parts management.
512
Fig. 10.1-5: HVDC system in Scotland, operated and maintained

by Siemens
Services & Support

10.1 Asset Services
Independent
Assessment
Development
Condition Assessment
Inventory, Diagnostic,
Testing, Monitoring
Acquisition
Planning, Design,
Procurement, Commissioning
Licenses, CapEx
Maintenance
Time Based (TBM), Condition
Based (CMB), Reliability
Based (RBM), Rehabilitation,
Replacement, Costs
Implementation
Assistance
Financial Management
Accounting, Taxes, Revenues,
Expenses, Cash Flow, Legal
Asset Management
Program
Operation
Balance Run Time,
Best Efficiency Point,
Energy Management, Costs
Risk Management
Regulatory, Environmental,
Health and Safety, Quality
of Service, Financial
Disposal
Rescue Value,
Environmental, Legal
Performance
Follow-up
Fig. 10.1-6: Core elements of asset management services
Asset management services

Siemens asset management experience, processes and methodologies enable asset owners and/or operators to increase the
profitability and efficiency in the use of their assets while at the
same time safe-guarding required quality levels and minimizing
life-cycle costs.
Asset management services by Siemens leverage a number
of advanced methodologies and tools, including independent
condition assessments and reliability centered asset management (RCAM). Siemens asset management support services
include (fig. 10.1-6):
Independent assessment
Development
Implementation assistance
Performance follow-up
of Asset Management Programs (AMP).
Siemens provides recommendations that are completely independent from product, construction or equipment sales of other
affiliates. Indeed, our recommendations are vendor-neutral and
well accepted by third parties such as lenders and other financial
institutions.
Advisory services
Siemens advisory services enable power asset owners and
operators to get the most out of their assets while providing
options to improve performance. The analysis looks at every
material issue from a holistic vantage point. Answers and
recommendations explicitly recognize that every decision
has technical, economical and regulatory implications.
Technical Review/
Condition Assessment
Assets
Business
Site Visits
Environmental/Permits
OpEx
Standards
Staffing/Equipment/Tools
Budgets
CapEx
Demand Projections
Budgets/Programmes
Historical/Future
Risk Analysis
Technical
Institutional
Regulatory
Other
Fig. 10.1-7: Core elements of advisory services
The results provided by our due diligence/advisory services

enable Siemens customers to:
Gain an insight into the correlation between technical decisions and their business implications (e.g., on network cost
and service quality)
Build a sound approach for evaluating the relevant aspects
of the system expenditures program, with objective and documented decisions
Increase the efficiency of resource utilization while safeguarding the required quality of service levels in the long run.
10
Fig. 10.1-7 provides an overview of the core elements of

Siemens Advisory Services.
513
Services & Support

10.1 Asset Services
10.1.2 Substation Modernization

Projects
Because top priority is given to operational continuity in substations and power systems, any long-term maintenance, modernization and system rehabilitation must be precisely planned.
These are the right opportunities for OEM(Original Equipment
Manufacturer)-driven service projects. Siemens offers a variety
of corresponding service solutions for extending the lifespan
and size of the substation, or for its modernization. Countless
examples worldwide serve as references for successfully executed service projects.
10
10.1.3 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Gas density monitoring monitors the gas tightness with functions

like inventory management, trending, and prediction of alarms.
Gas density monitoring receives its signals from SF6 density
transducers which operate with a 4 to 20mA current loop technology for high noise immunity. The result is a full SF6 inventory
management system, capable of providing advance warning of
SF6 leaks with highest accuracy. The very high accuracy measurement, combined with smart software functions, enables optimal
and profitable gas density monitoring for high-voltage gas-insulated switchgear.
Monitoring systems
The condition of your assets is highly relevant to your decision
making about service or replacement. With insight into the
condition of the assets, the transition to Condition Based Maintenance (CBM) can take place. Minor failures can be repaired
before they turn into a major problem and a breakdown occurs.
Siemens offers both on-site one-time audits (see chapter 10.1.6
Audits and Consulting) and online condition monitoring as a
stand-alone or integrated system.
Partial discharge monitoring monitors the condition of the

dielectric strength of the high-voltage gas-insulated switchgear.
The product is based on more than 20 years experience of
on-line UHF (ultra high frequency) partial discharge monitoring
measurement, and includes OEM experience integrated into the
product. Functions like automatic pattern recognition and the
use of external noise detection complement the offer. A proper
state of the dielectric strength is the key for safe and reliable
operation of the GIS.
With Integrated Substation Condition Monitoring (ISCM),

Siemens provides online asset condition information through a
comprehensive range of innovative tools for diagnostic analysis.
Through prediction and prevention of equipment failures, ISCM
products and services protect the customers company image as
well as his investment. The integrated monitoring system guarantees minimum downtime, maximum asset performance,
nearly real-time rating, and an extended lifespan.
As a manufacturer of power transformers, Siemens integrated all

engineering, manufacturing and maintenance knowledge into
the transformer monitoring products. As a high-end solution,
SITRAM CM is scalable up to most comprehensive monitoring
functionalities with a high level of flexibility and customization.
ISCM products and services are a fundamental prerequisite for

securing the customers required performance level, and with it,
long-term entrepreneurial success. The Siemens ISCM solution,
customized to the individual requirements of the substation,
monitors all relevant components of the power supply system
from transformers and switchgear to overhead lines and cables.
It can be seamlessly integrated into the existing substation
communication and visualization infrastructure, from simple bay
controllers to high-end control center applications. Siemens
offers one integral solution for all network assets.
ISCM products and services provide a highly reliable solution,
based on expert knowledge and advanced technology. With its
unique proficiency and experience along the entire energy
conversion chain, Siemens is ideally positioned to supply a
sophisticated, comprehensive monitoring concept that covers all
equipment within the power supply.
ISCM products and services for high-voltage gas-insulated
switchgear and transformers
Siemens gas density monitoring (GDM) and Siemens partial
discharge monitoring (PDM) ensure reliable and profitable
monitoring of high-voltage gas-insulated switchgear.
514
Based on more than 20 years of experience, Ultra High Frequency (UHF) partial discharge monitoring and gas densitiy
monitoring provide significant insight in the condition of highvoltage gas-insulated switchgear.
Siemens Transformer Condition Monitoring is a standardized

product with high modularity. Transformer monitoring analyzes
the important influences on transformer aging. The collected
data received from fixed sensors cover the most essential measures to gain a clear indication of the transformers condition.
All ISCM products are available as stand-alone products or can be
integrated in a Substation Monitoring Project.
Asset data management
Substation Monitoring Projects integrate all monitored assets in
one platform the ISCM platform. A single screen pictures the
condition of all assets, and operators can grasp at a glance if and
for which asset preventive action is required. Starting with a
complete substation view, a problem is indicated and assigned
to the affected asset.
The collected condition monitoring data is the basis for a profound diagnosis. Diagnosis can take place within intelligent
sensors, or afterwards by evaluating the collected data. To get
optimal results, Substation Monitoring Projects perform both.
Services & Support

10.1 Asset Services
The ISCM platform supports a fast, high-quality decision making

process regarding further actions in case of alarm signals and
warnings. Generated tendency indications help to decide
whether an alarm needs immediate action or scheduled maintenance. Furthermore, guidance to fault locations and an adequate risk assessment is presented to the system user with
explicit messages.
Remote services
Siemens provides remote supervision and expert support
worldwide through Remote Diagnostic Centers. Siemens remote
services comprise:
Hosting of your condition monitoring product or Substation
Monitoring Project:
Save on investments and operational cost for your own dedicated monitoring system, but have full functionality and related financial benefits available
Supervision:
Have your system supervised by Siemens on alarms or unexpected behavior. Own personnel remain for operational work
System support and asset expertise:
Have Siemens system experts available on demand for support
requests regarding the monitoring system and monitored assets
Reporting:
Automated reporting service with or without review and comments from system and asset experts. The reporting provides a
solid basis for a structured and condition based asset management approach.
The close cooperation between the Remote Diagnostic Center
und the Energy Customer Support Center which processes
requests in the field of transmission and distribution 24 hours a
day offers Siemens customers one central point of contact.
Asset performance management
Reliability centered asset management (RCAM) is a leading-edge
methodology which combines asset data, subject matter expertise, and several years of experience on assets behavior. This is in
order to assess the asset condition and performance, and quantify the associated risk.
Reliability Centered Asset Management is a unique software
which has been designed as a decision support tool helping
asset managers to optimize investment while sustaining targeted levels of network reliability.
Reliability centered asset management software calculates the
expected performance:
Health indices will be computed to define asset condition
Reliability indices will be computed to define asset importance
Both aspects enable synthesis of optimized asset management
strategies.
10.1.4 Cable Services

The backbone of the electric power supply consists of high- and
medium-voltage cable systems. The limited availability of space
and other external factors that restrict the load-carrying capacity
of cable systems call for special measures, so that the reliable
transmission of electric power can be guaranteed. At the same
time, highly specific requirements for the expansion of transmission networks are appearing in Germany and worldwide as a
result of the integration of renewable energies. Siemens offers
the full range of services for cable systems from a single source,
including cable monitoring and diagnostics.
Design and accomplishments for high-voltage cable systems
As your partner, we offer the full range of services for highvoltage cable systems up to 500 kV, starting with engineering of
the cable dimensions up to the final test after installation. Our
service comprehends cables with synthetic insulation (e.g XLPE)
for various designs (up to 500 kV), low-pressure oil-filled cables
(up to 400 kV) and gas-pressure cables (up to 110 kV). Backed
by over 150 years of experience, we have an excellent overview
of the entire market, and can offer you vendor-neutral advice
and support for entire systems and accessories. We employ
technologies and high-grade materials matched to your needs
for all work activities, from cable laying tools to the professional
assembly of fittings with cable-sealing ends and joints. We can
also assist you if you are planning to retrofit, convert or extend
your system. And if you intend to dismantle an existing installation, we will manage the disposal or recycling of cables and
cable fittings. Performing all our work activities in accordance
with national and international regulations and guidelines is
mandatory for us.
Cable measurement
Siemens offers cable diagnostics with different detection methodologies, which allow reliable cable condition assessments and
ensure exact fault location of installed high- and mediumvoltage cables. Namely partial discharge (PD) diagnostics,
dissipation factor (tan ) measurement, and frequency domain
reflectometry (FDR) are offered by Siemens. For the third
methodology, Siemens uses Line Resonance Analysis LIRA
technology.
The LIRA system assesses and monitors the general degradation
of the cable insulation caused by harsh environmental conditions (high temperatures, humidity, radiation). It also detects
local degradation of the insulation material as a result of
mechanical impact or local abnormal environmental conditions.
These diagnostics services are valuable for specific applications
in power transmission and distribution systems, for subsea cable
installations like in offshore windfarms, or in oil and gas
industry, as well as in power plants.
10
Cable life extension

Siemens cable life extension service heals and rejuvenates
medium-voltage cables up to 69 kV, insulated with PE, XLPE or
EPR. This can extend the lifespan of these cables up to 40 years
without the burden of replacing old cables with new ones.
515
Services & Support

10.1 Asset Services
Many medium-voltage cables that were laid in the seventies

and eighties are gradually reaching the end of their maximum
service lives. This is also true for more recently laid cables that
are subject to special aging processes. To prevent any malfunctions in the medium-voltage grid, the affected cables are usually
replaced. Siemens new service for cable life extension offers
an alternative that can be substantially more cost-effective
and time-saving than replacing the entire power cable.
10.1.5 Transformer Services

The remaining lifetime of transformers decreases continuously
as a consequence of normal ageing processes. The transformers
rate of ageing varies considerably from one type of construction
to the next. It depends on several different facts such as
transformer design, capacity, service and load history, climate,
and environmental conditions. The critical factors which
influence the rate of ageing are:
Operating temperatures (under load, ambient)
Moisture content and increases (e.g., decomposition product
of hydrocarbons in insulation)
Oxygen level and inrush (e.g., trough conservator)
Mechanical and electrical stress (e.g., short-circuit events, harmonics, system overvoltage).
That is why Siemens offers transformer services including:
Condition assessment and diagnostics
Online monitoring
Consulting and expertise
Spare parts, accessories
Repair and retrofit
Installation & commissioning.
10
Planned maintenance and inspection (PMI)

Equipment and systems with a long service life and continuous
fault-free operation provide the best conditions for efficient
utilization of the operators system. Siemens maintenance
services ensure that all components work safely and reliably,
including major revisions and overhauls to bring assets back to
reference condition. Siemens keeps customer network assets like
switchgear, transformers and the substation secondary equipment well maintained at all times through regular inspections
and revisions. Siemens Planned Maintenance and Inspection
(PMI) comprehends condition-based and preventive maintenance, including recommended spare parts.
Repair service and spare parts
The primary objectives of the maintenance services offered by
Siemens are to avoid emergency repairs and ensure fault-free
operations.
However, in case of emergency if a failure occurs Siemens will
be on site rectifying the fault as quickly as possible. Operators can
contact Siemens at any time 24/7 via the on-call duty service. An
on-call duty contract determines assured reaction times and the
scope of on-site emergency measures.
The prerequisite for successful and fast fault recovery is, of
course, the availability of required spare parts. Siemens
delivers spare parts, components and kits for all asset series
from current production to series, which have already been
phased-out.
In addition, Siemens Transformer Service Programs serve as an

umbrella and provide a range of proactive services for all phases
of the transformer lifecycle from a single source, customized,
and aligned with each other.
For long-term planning, Siemens modular designed Strategic

Spare Part Solution (SSPS) provides comprehensive consulting
services that enable network operators to optimize their spare
parts management.
For Details please refer to Transformers, Transformer Lifecycle

Management.
Modernizations and extensions

Naturally, the system operator cannot upgrade equipment at the
same rapid pace that technology changes. However, Siemens
modification and retrofit capabilities offer many opportunities
for optimization, so that the system operator can benefit from
the latest technical improvements. Modernizations and extensions increase the performance of individual assets or complete
substations.
10.1.6 Switchgear Services

Worldwide customer-focused Siemens service centers are able to
manage all product-related services for Siemens products, as
well as for Magrini Galileo, Merlin Gerin, Elin Holec, Reyrolle and
Allis Chalmers products.
Whether in industrial companies, public or private power supply
and infrastructure, or building technology power distribution
plants must basically be available continuously, and provide the
highest degree of operational safety. Switchgear in particular
have to meet the requirements of the steadily increasing
demand for electrical energy; but their aging and wear can
significantly impact their functioning.
516
Therefore, Siemens switchgear services provide the full range

from planned maintenance and inspections, repair services and
spare parts, modernizations and extensions up to audits and
consulting.
With these cost-effective solutions, the system operator will be

investing capital wisely and taking advantage of the experience
offered by Siemens in adapting older systems to new technical
standards, resulting in reduced lifecycle costs.
Siemens is the experienced partner to depend on when it is time
to retrofit high- and medium-voltage switchgear and other
related equipment. The offering includes:
Services & Support

10.1 Asset Services
Evaluation of all required technical information. The switchgear to be retrofitted remains in place and in operation
Measurement and development of the most suitable solution,
testing, and verifications in AutoCAD
Transport of the ready-to-use medium-voltage trucks to the
system operators plant, installation, and commissioning
Thorough testing of prototype; series production begins after
all tests are successfully passed.
Retrofits quickly pay off. Solutions from Siemens provide many
benefits and the most important is the high level of system
availability that can be achieved with the new equipment. In
addition to prolonging the equipments service life and securing
the customers investments, retrofitting also reduces maintenance costs. In addition, retrofitting with Siemens also means a
secure and cost-effective supply of spare parts anywhere in the
world.
Siemens
ABB-Calor Emag
Magrini
Reyrolle
Retrofit benefits at a glance:

Minimized downtimes for greater availability of the switchgear
Increased security of energy supply
Cost reduction for maintenance and fault clearance
No additional cost for plant and building modifications
Secure global supply of spare and wear parts.
As another cost-effective option to increase the switchgear
performance, Siemens switchgear services offer bay extensions:
With actual components, as well as extensions with new
designed reconstructed components for existing older switchgear types.
Audits and consulting
Besides inspections during maintenance services, Siemens also
offers extended diagnostics and condition assessments to
provide the basis for asset management and maintenance
strategies.
The Siemens Standard Audit is a standardized approach for
condition assessments of high- and medim-voltage switchgear.
The results are illustrated in user-friendly and well structured
reports, and can be utilized instantly by asset management
decision makers.
Siemens also manages all associated network assets like cable
connections and overhead lines. Installation and commissioning
as well as decommissioning and recycling are a part of the
standard service portfolio.
Fig. 10.1-8: Examples for retrofit

OEM
Type
Siemens
8BD
ABB Calor Emag
QD3M
ABB Sace
Uniarc
Univer4
ABB
Safesix
Magrini
Epoclad
Composit
Distrivan
Multiclad
Venus
Reyrolle
LMT
C-Gear
SMS
SA 14
SA 36
Ansaldo
Siclad
Schneider
Fluair
10
Belldonne
Sprecher & Schuh
HPTW
Table 10.1-1: Examples for equipment that can be retrofitted
517
Services & Support

10.1 Asset Services
10.1.7 Service Programs

Service programs serve as an umbrella spanning the entire
Siemens portfolio. They are one way for system operators to
ensure that they receive the best possible service. Guaranteed
availability of staff and spare parts, as well as short response
times can all be included.
These agreements minimize the customers operational risk to a
calculable factor by defining which individual maintenance and
emergency response services will be provided. Remote services
and even O&M based on KPIs can be incorporated in a service
program.
With the available service programs, an exact match with the
system operator requirements can be achieved in several areas:
from single assets to entire networks, from preventive maintenance to remote services, and from short-term contracts to
long-term agreements.
Referring to fig. 10.1-1 Siemens has prepared four service
programs which can be adapted in scope and volume exactly to
the system operators requirements.
Panned Maintenance and Inspection (PMI)
The focus here is on scheduled OEM maintenance and inspections to become a calculable operational factor.
10.1.8 Energy Customer

Support Center
Good morning, Energy Customer Support Center, Betty Smith
speaking. How can I help you? Buenos das! Le atiende Pedro
Garca. En qu le puedo ayudar? This is what customers hear
when visiting the Customer Support Center based in Nuremberg.
Inquiries are answered 24/7 in numerous languages by the support agents. The Energy Customer Support Center is the central
contact channel for all inquiries regarding the Energy Sector. This
has been a service of the Energy Sector to answer questions and
point people in the right direction helping to achieve best-in-class
customer satisfaction for more than 10 years.
The Energy Customer Support Center ensures the availability of
the entire Energy Sector around the clock. All customer inquiries
are taken according to the defined processes, entered in the
Customer Support Management (CSM) tool, and forwarded to
the person in charge. Inquiries are processed during the locally
prevailing office hours.
This ensures quick processing of all inquiries to the customers
satisfaction. Periodically conducted customer satisfaction surveys give customers the possibility for feedback, and for actively
forming the process.
Remote Services (ROS)

This program includes all remote service offerings. The focus
point is on alarming and reaction times for advisory and field
services.
Long-Term Maintenance (LTM)
This refers to project-like managed services with the need for a
service team to be recruited.
Operation and Maintenance (O&M)
In this highest degree of service, Siemens takes over the operational responsibility. All operational risk is taken by the service
provider.
10
The Energy Customer Support Center
is available around the clock:
Phone: +49 180 524 7000
Fax: +49 180 524 2471
Internet: www.siemens.com/energy-support/en
518
Services & Support

10.2 Siemens Power
Academy TD
The Siemens Power Academy specializes in power supply related
training for customers and Siemens employees. Training programs range from power generation to power transmission
and distribution. As part of the Siemens Power Academy, the
Siemens Power Academy TD offers professional training in the
areas of power transmission and distribution, all the way to
industrial and commercial consumption, including Smart Grids.
Training from experts
Customers will find trained and certified instructors, a welldesigned instructional and methodical approach, and productoriented exercises using the latest Siemens technology.
Many subjects even more development opportunities
In addition to training classes, workshops and certification for
technical employees, the Siemens Power Academy TD program
also includes courses for non-technical employees working in
power transmission and distribution. One of our focus areas is
the training program for competence development. In addition
to individual courses, Siemens Power Academy TD also offers
several curricula featuring a logically structured series of classes
that help efficiently and systematically build knowledge.
An overview of the training portfolio is presented in

table 10.2-1. For detailed information on the standardized
training portfolio, please visit www.siemens.com/poweracademy. Customized training is developed and defined on
demand in close cooperation with the customer.
Our core competence the right mix of theory and practice
In the Siemens Power Academy TD training programs, theory
and practice go hand-in-hand. This means that theoretical
approaches are always supplemented by practical exercises on
real devices and systems. To make that possible, the training
centers use original components, devices and systems from the
transmission & distribution product portfolio. This hands-on
training principle guarantees a maximum learning effect.
Our strength flexibility
Product-oriented training
The latest products and solutions from Siemens
Comprehensive teaching material
The use of professional presentation methods, lecture notes,
slides and course documents
Power System Operation

Power Control Systems, Power System Security, Operation Management
Power System Simulation Software

PSSE, PSSSINCAL
Power System Engineering

Network Planning, Smart Grid, Renewable Integration
Secondary Technology
10
Protection, Substation Automation & Information, Power Quality
Primary Technology
Medium-Voltage and High-Voltage Technology, Transformers
Fig. 10.2-1: Siemens Power Academy TD: training portfolio for transmission & distribution
519
Services & Support

10.2 Siemens Power Academy TD
Tests and certification

Certificates for demonstrated performance
Subject-specific curricula:
An integrated continuing education concept
Combining technology + business learning
Interdisciplinary courses optimally prepare for day-to-day business operations
Personal coaching
Identifying technical expertise and determining the training
required.
Curriculum competence development program of the
Siemens Power Academy TD
Well-trained employees are vital for successful companies. The
challenge comes from increasingly rapid transformation of the
economic environment and technologies. Faced with changes
like this, continuously improvement of skills and knowledge
is essential if employees are to be a reliable resource who contribute to the success of the company.
Qualification levels
Professional experience
> 5 years
Expert level
Advanced level
> 2 years
> 1 years
Associate level
Objectives:
The participant can
perform specific
technical tasks
under supervision
as part of his/her
professional routine.
Objectives:
The participant can
independently
perform technical
tasks as part of his/
her professional
routine and can
develop the
necessary solutions
on his/her own.
Objectives:
The participant can
independently
perform complex
technical tasks
and is able to
communicate
solutions to third
parties for
implementation.
Fig. 10.2-2: Qualification levels of competence development program
Therefore the Siemens Power Academy TD has developed a

competence development program. This program is based on
the curricula approach.
Unlike individual training seminars, a curriculum provides incremental learning through a structured, logical combination of
various classes on a specific topic. This allows the necessary
skills and abilities to be developed.
Associate
What does the Curriculum consist of?

Training program for competence development
The possibility to apply and be certified in three different qualification levels.
Associate Advanced Expert
Per qualification level: Series of aligned courses and associated
e-tests
Certificate is valid for 5 years.
Advanced
Expert
SIPROTEC 7SD Intensive course

Line differential protection
10
Basics Ethernet IEC61850 GOOSE

Configuration with DIGSI
SIPROTEC 7UT Intensive course

Transformer differential protection
SIPROTEC
Applications, exercises
Accessory equipment
for protection systems
SIPROTEC 7SA Intensive course

Distance protection
DIGSI Basics
Protection and control functions
SIPROTEC
Secondary testing of protection relays
with the OMICRON test system
Protection technology
Principles
Fig. 10.2-3: Curriculum: Simplified example SIPROTEC Protection
520
Services & Support

10.3 Metering Services
10.3.1 Portfolio Overview
The Siemens metering services portfolio delivers measurable

improvements to the acquisition and processing of meter data,
to meter management and to customer communications.
Siemens supplies integrated solutions right through the value
chain, from metering to billing. The key offering is high-quality,
accurate meter data and the services which provide it. As a
leading provider of metering services, Siemens works in partnership with some of the largest global utilities for electricity, gas
and water. All Siemens services are provided within the framework of strict industry and regulatory standards.
Services offered by Siemens include meter-to-cash services to

power supply companies as well as to business-to-business (B2B)
customers.
The following sections provide an overview of customer requirements and the different elements of Siemens service portfolio.
Fig. 10.3-1 summarizes the ranges of services Siemens offers in
the UK and globally.
The role of meter operations for utilities and B2B customers is

fundamentally concerned with meter installation, meter functionality changes, meter fault resolution, meter removals, and
connection of new supplies. Siemens installs both credit and
prepayment meters. The provision, installation and operation
of fiscal meters has to be carried out only by a fully accredited
service provider like Siemens.
Before meter purchasing takes place, Siemens carries out site
surveys to determine the best design, sizing and location of
meters. Siemens configures and commissions the metering systems (fig. 10.3-2), and provides ongoing maintenance, including
calibration, storage, removal and repair of equipment as needed.
Customers
Residential >> Commercial and Industrial >> Power Generation
Energy Utilities >> Transmission >> Water Utilities >> Distribution
Meter Operations
Data Collection
Data Management
Revenue Management
We provide measurement
instruments for:
- Meter asset provision
- Meter asset management
- Meter installation, including
prepayment meters
- Grid metering
- Submetering
- Smart metering
Data collection includes:

- Manual data collection for
residential customers
- Remote data collection for
- Prepayment cards for
- Remote data collection for
business customers
- Manual data collection for
business customers
We make data
meaningful via:
- Processing
- Validation
- Aggregation
- Data storage
- Data sharing
- Data cleansing
We convert data
into knowledge via:
- Billing management
- Data mining
- Revenue protection
- Energy management
- Meter data management
solution for smart grid
Electricity
Water
10
Gas
Fig. 10.3-1: Metering services portfolio overview
521
Services & Support

Siemens offers expert advice in high-accuracy metering, grid

metering and submetering solutions to monitor the consumption
levels of equipment.
Typical users of Siemens metering services include large energy
and water retailers and millions of residential, commercial and
industrial customers potentially everybody who has an interest
in their meter equipment for gathering up-to-date and accurate
data. The Siemens meter operations service supports the data
collection process. All these services together help to ensure the
highest levels of data quality.
Meter asset maintenance and provision
Siemens provides energy and gas distribution companies
with meter equipment and ongoing maintenance service, an
additional service that is frequently used by meter operations
customers. Siemens also has experience in financing and
leasing meter assets, and has access to expert knowledge
regarding meter asset purchasing.
Prepayment
Some domestic customers prefer to pay for their energy before
they use it, adopting a pay-as-you-go approach to energy. This
can be done via a special prepayment meter that uses a top-up
card or key mechanism.
Fig. 10.3-2: Meter installation
The UK has the worlds largest meter system, with over 2 million
meter points.
Siemens is responsible for maintaining the system, as well as for
installing new prepayment meters and for distributing top-up
cards to customers. The latest technologies and process knowledge are combined in this prepayment meter in order to ensure
that the customer is completely satisfied (fig. 10.3-3).
10
Grid metering
Siemens is a leading provider of grid metering and high-accuracy
metering solutions in the electricity value chain. Siemens offers
services to power generation and transmission companies worldwide, which enables them to get the most accurate view of the
electricity they produce and put through the network. This
product and service offering fits perfectly with the meter operations element of the value chain, and enables power generation
and distribution customers to manage and maintain their revenue stream.
Submetering
Siemens provides meter operations services for non-fiscal purposes, including submetering applications. These can be
installed and integrated into energy management systems for
individual or multi-utility (gas, water, electricity) applications.
Siemens provides accurate consumption information at the point
of use and visibility via Web-based solutions. Siemens offers
tailored solutions and enables the system operator to monitor
and control energy usage in different business locations. Large
retailers and industrial customers use this service, which can be
linked to their billing or finance system.
522
Fig. 10.3-3: Q-Smart prepayment meter installed
Services & Support

10.3.2 Data Collection

Data collection services comprise meter reading (data retrieval),
data processing and data aggregation services. Siemens data
collectors carry out routine reads, special request reads and
change of tenancy reads as well as re-programming of meters.
The data processing system has been developed to comply with
strict industry standards and fully supports all work scheduling,
validation and distribution of meter readings for up to 12 million
meters. To meet special needs and requirements, ad-hoc projects
such as providing solutions for hard-to-read sites can be
performed upon request. The field force consists of 750 Siemens
employees. Siemens reads over 14 million residential meter
points in the UK on behalf of energy and water suppliers. Systems
are continually being enhanced to provide greater flexibility and
adaptability, which enables Siemens to meet the constantly
evolving market requirements. The automated remote collection
systems utilize a range of technologies (e.g., in-field mobile data
terminals), providing affordable data collection solutions.
10.3.3 Data Management

In this section of the meter-to-cash value chain, Siemens ensures
that the data is accurate. That means Siemens aggregates and
processes the data, deletes duplicates in the database and verifies
the data before passing it on to the system operator. In most cases,
the system operator uses this data directly for billing purposes.
For commercial and industrial customers, Siemens provides a full
range of utility metering data from electricity to gas and water
meters. Large nationwide retail chains are particularly interested
in this service so that they can monitor and control the energy
consumption of their stores. The IT warehouse enables Siemens
to collect a wide variety of data, and Siemens can provide
custom-designed solutions based on the operators in-house IT
system. Siemens also offers custom-designed reporting systems
and works with various communication interfaces to transfer
data to the system operator.
10.3.4 Revenue Management

In this section of the meter-to-cash value chain, Siemens
ensures that the data is meaningful to the system operator.
For instance, revenue protection affects the whole value chain
from energy generation, transmission and distribution down
to the energy retailers.
The key features of the Siemens revenue protection service are
investigation of power theft, selective and sensitive targeting
and helping to increase the rate of loss discovery, with special
focus on high non-residential usage. Siemens packages these
features as a non-technical losses solution and offers loss assessments and training to data collection agents.
Property management is part of the revenue protection services

portfolio. Siemens is a member of the UK Revenue Protection
Association and can offer these services internationally.
10.3.5 Smart Metering

Smart metering is the combination of automatic meter reading
with the ability to control and update the meter point. Having
two-way communications between the meter and the central
communications hub allows data to be collected on demand
whilst enabling critical actions to be taken without having to
make a visit to the property.
It is anticipated that smart metering will drive:
Consumers to become more aware of their consumption
and to participate in energy saving initiatives
Energy retailers to bill more accurately with few, if any, estimated readings, and even to forecast and settle their energy
based on actual rather than synthesized energy profiles
As the global competency center within Siemens for metering
services, Siemens has a smart metering portfolio which is
meter independent enabling a variety of devices to be used
for electricity, gas and water metering.
Siemens also has the ability to support a number of different
communications technologies GPRS, Power Line Carrier (signaling wire for the low-voltage cables) and fixed radio technologies depending upon what the customer or market requires.
The core of the offering is the smart metering scheme. This is
a business process solution combining IT technology, business
process execution and field force management.
The smart metering scheme brings together the data
processing and device control systems with business processes
designed to optimize the operation of the smart meter asset
and the skills to transition from a dumb meter to an installed
base of smart meters.
Smart metering is an important global trend, and our regional
capability and sales network combined with specialist resources
makes Siemens the ideal provider of smart metering and smart
grid solutions.
10.3.6 Meter Data Management

Solution
10
As utilities deploy Advanced Metering Infrastructure (AMI) across

their distribution grids, the amount of utility and customerrelated data explodes from monthly hand-held meter reads to
interval consumption received on a 15-minute or less basis. The
challenge for the electric, water or gas utility is to convert this
massive amount of data into actionable information for multiple
purposes across the enterprise.
523
Services & Support

Siemens provides comprehensive metering and energy information management services to the utility industry, including
Meter Data Management System (MDMS) software, integration
services, and consulting.
Whether the customers Smart Grid investment is focused
on enhanced meter-to-cash processes to support increased
customer choice, or on improvement in customer service,
our EnergyIP meter data management platform provides a
solid, smart foundation for information management.
EnergyIP core functionality
EnergyIP captures the complex relationships among devices,
premises, customer accounts, users, applications, networks and
services that must be managed in any Smart Grid. With its
automated process and workflows, EnergyIP provides real-time
information and automation to integrate enterprise systems and
drive Smart Grid management, acting as the central nervous
system of your utility.
Data synchronization engine
The key to providing useful information to all parts of your
business is ensuring the data is synchronized across your organization. The EnergyIP Data Synchronization Engine manages the
synchronization of data with the AMI, Customer Information
System (CIS), and other enterprise applications.
The Data Synchronization Engine supports the use of FlexSync
real-time web services. FlexSync is an incremental, transactional-based approach to synchronizing data. Changes to master
data contained in utility systems (CIS, WMS or other system) are
reflected in real-time, keeping EnergyIP up to date with the most
recent information. For processes such as meter changes and
rate changes, this approach improves billing acuracy, and
reduces rework which would be necessary without proper
synchronization.
Data repository
The Metered Usage Data Repository (MUDR) is the data store
that maintains the meter readings, register reads, interval
records, outage and restoration events, and event logs. The
MUDR also maintains derived or computed data, along with
trace of versions and audit trails, which is important to keep
your auditors happy.
10
The MUDR uses database partitioning to achieve highly scalable

performance even with extremely large data stores. In order to
meet a typical utilitys AMI system requirements, the MUDR may
store and have available on-line any amount of data but typically
has 13 to 36 months of meter readings including daily electric
and gas register reads, interval data reads, derived billing determinants, meter event logs, and computed or derived data.
Service-oriented architecture
The system operators meter data management platform needs
to be built around a Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA) that
integrates all legacy, current and future systems with no loss
of data and without the need to update existing systems. The
524
energy information platform must deliver a consistent way of

viewing information across all the types of meters and meterdata collection systems that might be used in the future. This
ensures that system operators do not have to retain all their
employees every time a new kind of meter is added.
EnergyIPs open SOA avoids complexity and lowers the total
cost of ownership by enabling seamless integration and
non-disruptive change within the enterprises application
environment.
Workflow engine
The Workflow Engine in EnergyIP is a persistent application that
maintains and handles requests requiring workflow processing.
The engine is also responsible for tracking the progress of open
transactions. It tracks the state of each operation, captures
time-outs on failed transactions, and progresses the state
machine for multi-state operations.
Audit tracking
We know that keeping good records is serious business. EnergyIP
provides extensive logging and audit features in support of
system operations and Sarbanes-Oxley requirements. Audit trail
is a configurable feature that allows users to choose business
components and fields to audit, and to determine the scope of
the audit. EnergyIP allows system operators to choose to audit
all activity, or to limit the scope of auditing to those operations
performed by certain responsibilities, positions, or employees.
Reports and reporting framework
EnergyIP stores a massive amount of meter read, event, asset
and workflow data. But, the data itself is not very useful for
decision-making if it cannot be made sense of. In order to mine
all of the data to help make better business decisions and find
data anomalies and trends, Siemens provides a wide range of
standard pre-built reports within EnergyIP. These reports are
based on best practice uncovered while working with system
operators. The framework also enables to create custom reports,
and to configure how and when to receive them.
Validation, estimation and editing
The EnergyIP VEE (Validation, Estimation and Editing) application performs real-time register read and interval data validation and estimation according to configurable rules. The VEE
application also allows graphical editing of metered data.
With VEE, the accuracy of interval data can instantaneously
be verified, and corrections are possible in real-time. This
ensures the availability of the most current and accurate data
to drive billing or customer service, and the optimization of
just-in-time operations.
Analytics foundation
The Analytics Foundation for EnergyIP allows to quickly turn
AMI data into actionable information that can be leveraged
across the utility. The Analytics Foundation is separate from
the EnergyIP core transaction database, so that access to near
real-time data is possible without compromising operational
performance. The data is transformed into a star-type scheme,
Services & Support

so that the data can be easily analyzed and reported by using the
reporting tools included in EnergyIP or any other reporting / BI tool.
10.3.7 Demand Response Management

Software
Demand response refers to all functions and processes applied
to influence the behavior of energy consumption. This can range
from simple signaling, e-mail, SMS, or a phone call to a person
who switches a load on or off, to fully integrated load management, where many consumption devices are dynamically controlled according to availability, or to the price of energy. Since
the demand for electrical energy in many cases is closely connected to the demand for alternative forms of energy, heating
and cooling energy, or mechanical energy, demand response
solutions must reach far beyond the electrical grid itself. In
particular, optimization must include all energy forms which
are interconnected.
Siemens Demand Response Management System (DRMS) is a
proven software platform that allows utilities, retailers and
aggregators to manage all aspects of their Demand Response
(DR) programs through a single, unified, open-standards-based
system.
Siemens DRMS solves the challenge of creating a cohesive and
comprehensive solution by:
Ensuring DR capacity is scaled in a cost effective manner; automating the manual processes that are typically used to execute
DR events and settlement
Fully integrating with both field and back-office utility systems
to leverage investments in Smart Grid technology
Intelligently targeting surgical planned load curtailments at
localized grid environments where localized grid stress is present.
World view on DRMS
Demand response is an ever evolving topic with respect to
todays environment. Business, operations, and regulatory needs
are consistently changing and, as a result, the value of demand
response resources has become increasingly important.
Integrated and automated demand response technology
improves not only a consumers capability to reliably participate
in DR programs, but also allows a utility to better utilize and optimize the consumer DR loads, both holistically and surgically. As
such, utilities are able to leverage demand response for activities
such as near real-time load balancing and frequency regulation,
and other types of ancillary services.
secure, web-based interface allows access from multiple locations with role-based access and full auditing of system activities. The interactive customer portal increases performance by
showing customers their historical results and real-time feedback during DR events.
Evolution and innovation for the future
As the field of demand response continues to mature, enabling
technologies allow DR further extend the value of utility assets.
Siemens DRMS makes it easier to maximize the value of each
DR resource, and minimize DR operational costs through more
efficient processes and process automation.
Ensures committed reduction levels are met by providing a
forecast of both connected and sheddable load, thereby increasing reliability and reducing uncertainty
Includes added support for DR program definitions and thirdparty integration, and event notification allows many types of
programs and consumer classes to be managed through a single application in a more cost-effective manner
Extends the number and type of business processes that can
be mapped into the DRMS via configuration, not through expensive customization. This capability allows for increased operational efficiency by dispatching DR programs and assets in a
consistent and logical manner, while also providing more accurate results over time.
A real-world illustration
An excellent illustration of how the Siemens DRMS works and
delivers benefits can be seen at an east-coast generation and
transmission (G&T) operator that has adopted the use of this
DRMS technology to implement targeted load reductions. This
G&T has limited generation capability and procures much of its
supply through bi-lateral power purchase agreements or through
the wholesale markets. In times of peak demand, the G&T is
forced to procure expensive peaking power to meet demand.
Their goal was to utilize technology to help alleviate grid stress
and reduce the need to purchase expensive power through the
use of demand response technology. Using the Siemens DRMS,
the G&T was able to create several demand response programs
to operate within their three main operating territories. They are
also using Siemens DRMS to create and manage load control
groups based on zip codes and several other attributes, which
allows them to effectively manage peaks for each of their participating member coops at the substation level. In roughly eight
months, they enrolled 50MW of load reduction capacity equivalent to nearly half the capacity of a typical natural gas-powered
peaking plant. Not only has the G&T been able to reduce power
purchase costs, but they anticipate reduced operations and
maintenance costs as well.
10
A proven and reliable application

Siemens DRMS has successfully been deployed at several utilities, each with their own unique requirements, using open
protocols and standards like MultiSpeak and OpenADR.
Siemens DRMS is both reliable and scalable, supporting over
several hundred thousand endpoints per customer class. The
525
526
Glossary
11
527
Glossary
11 Glossary
A
Air circuit-breaker
A > circuit-breaker in which the contacts open

and close in air at atmospheric pressure.
Air-insulated
outdoor switchyards
of open design (AIS)
High-voltage substation where all live parts are

insulated by air and are not covered. AIS are
always set up in a fenced area with access for
authorized personal only.
Ambient air
temperature
Temperature (measured under specific

conditions) of the air surrounding an item
of electrical equipment. The ambient air
temperature affects heat dissipation, which
can make it necessary to reduce the > rated
current.
Auto-reclosing (of a
mechanical
switching device)
The operating sequence of a mechanical

switching device whereby, following its
opening, it closes automatically after a
predetermined time.
Automatic multipleshot reclosing
An automatic reclosing repeated two or three

times (usually not more) if it is not successful.
B
Backup protection
Interaction of two carefully matched

overcurrent protective devices connected in
series at points where, in the event of a fault,
a single device is not capable of switching
the prospective short-circuit current. If a
correspondingly high short-circuit current
occurs, the backup overcurrent protective
device relieves the next downstream
overcurrent protective device, thus preventing
it from being overloaded.
Blackout
Complete power outage.
Breaking operation
Interruption of an electric circuit as a result of

the contact members of a switching device
being opened.
Breaking capacity
Highest current a switching device is capable of

breaking under specific conditions.
Busbar
A low impedance conductor, to which several

electric circuits can be connected separately.
Busbar trunking
system
Extended enclosed busbars, equipped with tapoff points for supplying machines and other
loads with power via variable tap-off units.
Bushing
Device that enables one or several conductors

to pass through a partition such as a wall or
a tank, and insulate the conductors from it.
Circuit-breaker
A mechanical switching device, capable of

making, carrying and breaking currents under
normal circuit conditions and also making,
carrying for a specified time, and breaking
currents under specified abnormal circuit
conditions such as those of short circuit.
Common
Information Model
(CIM)
An open standard that defines how managed

elements in an IT environment are represented
as a common set of objects and relationships
between them. This is intended to allow
consistent management of these managed
elements, independent of their manufacturer
or provider.
Contactor
Load breaking device with a limited shortcircuit making or breaking capacity, used for
high switching rates.
Continuous Function
Chart (CFC)
A Siemens engineering tool that offers

graphical interconnection and parameterization
of off-the-shelf or user-defined function blocks
to solve sophisticated continuous control
applications > SFC.
Current limiting
Ability of an overcurrent protective device (fuse

or circuit-breaker) to reduce the peak current in
a circuit beyond the value of the peak shortcircuit current expected on the basis of the
circuit constants (R, L), by opening and clearing
the fault in a subcycle time frame.
Current-limiting
circuit-breaker
A circuit-breaker with a break time short

enough to prevent the short-circuit current
reaching its otherwise attainable peak value.
Current transducer
Transducer used for the measurement of an

alternating current.
Current transformer
(CT)
Type of instrument transformer designed to

provide a current in its secondary winding
proportional to the alternating current flowing
in its primary. CTs facilitate the safe
measurement of large currents, often in the
presence of high voltages. The current
transformer safely isolates measurement and
control circuitry from the high voltages
typically present on the circuit being measured.
D
DCF77
A longwave time signal and standard-frequency

radio station. Every minute, the transmitted
data repeats the current date and time, a leap
second warning bit, a summertime bit, a
primary/backup transmitter identification bit,
and several parity bits. The callsign DCF77
stands for D=Deutschland (Germany), C=long
wave signal, F=Frankfurt, 77=frequency:
77.5 kHz.
Dead-tank circuitbreaker
A > circuit-breaker with interrupters in an

earthed metal tank.
Design verified
assembly
Assembly which fulfills the requirements of the

relevant part of IEC 61439 (for low-voltage
power switchgear and control gear assembly:
IEC 61439-2; EN 61439-2, VDE 0660-600-2),
verified by testing, calculation, physical
measurement, or validation of design rules.
C
Capacitor voltage
transformer (CVT)
11
528
A > voltage transformer comprising a

capacitor divider unit and an electromagnetic
unit designed and interconnected so that the
secondary voltage of the electromagnetic unit
is substantially proportional to the primary
voltage, and differs in phase from it by an angle
which is approximately zero for an appropriate
direction of the connections.
CAPEX
Capital expenditures of an enterprise for fixed

assets, e.g., means of production, buildings,
etc. > OPEX.
Continuous
Improvement
Process (CIP)
> Kaizen.
Glossary
Dielectric strength
Capability of an electrical component to

withstand all voltages with a specific time
sequence up to the magnitude of the
corresponding withstand voltages. These can
be operating voltages or higher-frequency
voltages caused by switching operations, earth
faults (internal overvoltages), or lightning
strikes (external overvoltages).
Demilitarized zone
(DMZ)
A subnetwork between an organizations LAN

and an external network, usually the Internet.
The hosts in the DMZ contain and provide all
external services of an organization such as
e-mail or web server, but are not allowed to
connect directly to the internal LAN.
Disconnector
(isolator)
Mechanical switching device which, in the

open position, disconnects all the poles of an
electric circuit. Disconnectors are used for noload closing and opening operations, e.g., to
isolate downstream devices so they can be
worked on.
Distributed
generation units
Generation units, such as PV panels, wind

turbines, or co-generation units, which are
connected to the LV or MV distribution
network.
E
Ear and Mouth
(E&M)
A technology in voice over IP (VoIP) that uses a

traditional telephone handset with an
earphone (or earpiece) for listening to
incoming audio and a microphone (or
mouthpiece) for transmitting audio. Calls using
an E&M interface can be made from, received
from, or disconnected by a private branch
exchange (PBX) as well as from a VoIP-capable
computer. The term ear and mouth interface is
sometimes used as a synonym for a telephone
handset itself, or for a headset-and-microphone
combination that allows hands-free operation.
Earth fault
Occurrence of an accidental conductive path

between a live conductor and the earth.
Earthing switch
Mechanical switching device for earthing parts

of an electric circuit, capable of withstanding
for a specified duration electric currents under
abnormal conditions such as those of short
circuit, but not required to carry electric current
under normal conditions of the electric circuit.
ECR glass
A zero boron glass that is free of added

fluorides. It conforms to ASTM D578-1999
specification for E-glass. It combines the
electrical and mechanical properties of E-glass
with superior inherent corrosion resistance.
ECR glass fiber is an electrical grade corrosion
resistant glass fiber.
Fuse
A protective device that by the fusing of one or

more of its specially designed and proportioned
components, opens the circuit in which it is
inserted by breaking the current when this
exceeds a given value for a particular period of
time. The fuse comprises all the parts that form
the complete device.
G
Gas-insulated
switchgear (GIS)
Indoor and outdoor switchgear of compact

design and small dimensions for substations up
to 550 kV to be installed in urban or industrial
load centers. All components are housed in
earthed metal enclosures filled with sulfur
hexafluoride (SF6) gas for insulation.
Gas-insulated
transmission line
(GIL)
Transmission lines composed of pipes that

house conductors in highly insulative sulfur
hexafluoride (SF6) gas, which have high loadtransfer capacity.
Generic Interface
Definition (GID)
A set of common services used for enterprise

integration in the utility industry, defined in IEC
standard IEC 61970.
General Packet Radio

Service (GPRS)
A packet-oriented mobile data service available

to users of > GSM.
Grid-connected
photovoltaic system
A photovoltaic system in which the

photovoltaic array acts like a central generating
plant, supplying power to the grid.
Grid Power Flow

Controller (GPFC)
A concept in system technology within the >

FACTS family of devices that provides an
economic solution for the purpose of power
transmission between two or more adjacent AC
systems. The AC systems can be either
synchronous or non-synchronous. The most
proper power rating is between 10 MW and
300 MW, although higher ratings are also
achievable.
GSM (French: Groupe

Spcial Mobile)
A worldwide standard for mobile phones.
H
Harmonics
The sinusoidal (harmonic) oscillations in the

Fourier analysis of non-sinusoidal, periodic
oscillations that oscillate at a frequency which
is an integer multiple of the fundamental
(= system) frequency. The amplitudes of
harmonics are considerably smaller than
the fundamental frequency.
High voltage
In general a set of voltage levels in excess of >

low voltage (< 1 kV). In a more restrictive sense
HV is used for voltage levels typically used for
bulk transmission of electricity (> 60 kV).
HTTP/HTTPS
The hypertext transfer protocol/hypertext transfer protocol secure is a communications protocol

for the transfer of information on the Intranet
and the World Wide Web; HTTPS is widely used
for security-sensitive communication.
F
Feeder
An electric line originating at a main substation

and supplying one or more secondary
substations.
Flexible AC
transmission system
(FACTS)
A power-electronic based system and other

static equipment that provide control of one or
more AC transmission system parameters to
enhance controllability and increase power
transfer capability.
File transfer protocol

(FTP)
Transfer protocol for exchanging files over any

> TCP/IP-based network.
I
Incoming feeder
In a substation, a feeder bay which is normally

used to receive power from the system.
Instrument
transformer
Transform high currents and voltages into small

current or voltage values for measuring or
protection purposes.
11
529
Glossary
Inter-Control Center
Communications
Protocol (ICCP)
The Inter-Control Center Communications

Protocol (ICCP or IEC 60870-6/TASE.2) is being
specified by utility organizations throughout
the world to provide data exchange over wide
area networks (WANs) between utility control
centers, utilities, power pools, regional control
centers, and non-utility generators.
Insulated gate
bipolar transistor
(IGBT)
A three-terminal power semiconductor device,

noted for high efficiency and fast switching.
Inter-Range
Istrumentation
Group time codes
(IRIG)
Family of standardized timecodes used by the

U.S. Government and the private industry for
the correlation of data and time.
IT system
Isolated power supply system that does

not provide a direct connection between
live conductors and earthed parts;
exposed conductive parts are earthed.
J
K
Kaizen
Konnex (KNX)
A Japanese philosophy that focuses on

continuous improvement throughout all
aspects of life, which was first implemented in
several Japanese businesses as a management
strategy after World War II, adopted to
businesses throughout the world also as
Continuous Improvement Process (CIP).
Standardized bus system for home and building
applications according to EN 50090 and ISO/
IEC 14543, comprising switching, signaling,
controlling, monitoring, and indicating
functions in the electrical installation.
N-tripping
Neutral conductor protection.
Open Access Same

Time Information
System (OASIS)
System for reserving transmission capacities in

the US power transmission networks.
Open DataBase
Connectivity (ODBC)
Standard database access method for using

database management systems.
Object Linking and

Embedding (OLE)
A technology that allows embedding and

linking to documents and other objects
developed by Microsoft.
Object Linking and

Embedding for
Process Control
(OPC)
A set of connectivity standards for industrial

automation from the OPC foundation, which
offers interoperability between gauges,
databases, Programmable Logic Controllers
(PLCs), Distributed Control Systems (DCSs),
and Remote Terminal Units (RTUs).
Operating voltage
(in a system)
The value of the voltage under normal

conditions, at a given instant and a given point
of the system.
Operational
expenditure (OPEX)
On-going cost for running a product, business

or system.
OSCOP P
A PC program for retrieving and processing of

records made with the SIMEAS R digital fault
and power quality recorder, the SIMEAS Q
power quality recorder, or with numerical
protection relays using the IEC 60870-5-103
protocol.
Open Systems
Interconnection
Basic Reference
Model (OSI)
A layered, abstract description for

communications and computer network
protocol design.
A method to dynamically increase or decrease

the bandwidth of virtual concatenated
containers to effectively transfer asynchronous
data streams over > SDH.
Outgoing feeder
Live-tank circuitbreaker
A > circuit-breaker with interrupters in a tank

insulated from earth.
A feeder bay in a substation which is normally

used to transmit power to the system.
Overcurrent
Low voltage (LV)
Set of voltage levels used for the distribution of

energy up to 1,000 V AC, or 1,200 V DC.
Any current in an electric circuit that exceeds

the > rated current.
Overload
L-tripping
Overload protection.
Operating conditions in an electrically sound,

fault-free electric circuit that give rise to an >
overcurrent.
Miniature circuitbreaker (MCB)
Automatically-operated low-voltage switching

device designed to protect an electrical circuit
from overload or short-circuit. Also used to
manually connect or disconnect an electric
circuit at will. Rated current not more than
125 A.
Molded-case circuitbreaker (MCCB)
A circuit-breaker having a supporting housing

of molded insulating material forming an
integral part of the circuit-breaker.
Medium voltage
(MV)
Set of voltage levels lying between > low

voltage (LV) and > high voltage (HV). The
boundaries between HV and LV depend on local
circumstances and history or common usage.
The band 1kV to 52 kV is commonly accepted
in Europe. The term medium voltage is neither
used in the U.K. nor in Australia.
Metal-oxide varistor
(MOV)
530
A conductor connected to the neutral point of a

system, which is suitable for transmitting
electrical energy.
Link Capacity
Adjustment Scheme
(LCAS)
11
Neutral conductor
(N)
A discrete electronic component that is

commonly used to divert excessive current to
the ground and/or neutral lines.
Private Automatic
Branch Exchange
(PABX)
A telephone exchange that serves a particular

business or office, as opposed to one that
a common carrier or telephone company
operates for many businesses or for the general
public.
Pulse-code
modulation (PCM)
A digital representation of an analog signal

where the magnitude of the signal is sampled
regularly at uniform intervals, then quantized
to a series of symbols in a numeric (usually
binary) code.
Plesiochrone digital
hierarchy (PDH)
An international multiplexing standard.
PE conductor
Conductor provided for purposes of safety, for

example protection against electric shock. In an
electrical installation, the conductor identified
PE is normally also considered as protective
earthing conductor.
Glossary
Phase-shifting
transformer
A device for controlling the power flow through

specific lines in a complex power transmission
network.
(Photovoltaik) peak
watt
Maximum rated output of a photovoltaic cell,

module, or system. Typical rating conditions
are 1000 W/m2 of sunlight, 20 oC ambient air
temperature and 1 m/s wind speed.
PEN (conductor)
Combined > PE and > N conductor.
Power line carrier

(PLC)
A device for producing radio-frequency power

for transmission on power lines.
Potential
transformer (PT)
A device required to provide accurate voltages

for meters used for billing industrial customers
or utility companies.
Python
A dynamic object-oriented programming

language.
Ring-main unit
(RMU)
Switchgear in distribution systems comprising

of switches for switching power cable rings and
of switches in series with fuses for the
protection of distribution transformers.
Rapid Spanning Tree

Protocol (RSTP)
Networking protocol according to IEEE 802.1w

to deactivate redundant paths in a local
network or to activate them if required (e.g.,
in case of a failure of a switch, bridge, etc.).
Resistance
temperature device/
detector (RTD)
Device for temperature detection based on

the resistance change in a metal, with the
resistance rising more or less linearly with
temperature.
Remote terminal
unit (RTU)
An electronic device to transmit data to a

distributed control system or a SCADA system
and to alter the state of connected objects
based on control messages received from the
system.
Q
S
R
Rated breaking
capacity
Value of the short-circuit current a switching

device is capable of breaking at the rated
operating voltage, rated frequency, and
specified power factor (or specified time
constant).
Rated breaking
current
The load breaking current in normal operation.
Rated current
The current that an electrical device can carry,

under specified conditions, without resulting in
overheating or mechanical overstress.
Rated insulation
level
The > dielectric strength from phase to earth,

between phases and across the open contact
gap, or across the isolating distance. The
dielectric strength is verified by a lightning
impulse withstand voltage test with the
standard impulse wave of 1.2 / 50 s and a
power-frequency withstand voltage test
(50 Hz/1 min).
Rated peak
withstand current
The peak value of the major loop of the shortcircuit current during a compensation process
after the beginning of the current flow, which
the device can carry in closed state.
Switch-disconnector
A switch which, in the open position, satisfies

the isolating requirements specified for a
disconnector.
Switch-disconnector/
fuse (SDF)
A switch-disconnector comprising a > switchdisconnector and (connected in series zo this)

fusebases for insertign fuse-links.
Synchronous Digital
Hierarchy (SDH)
A multiplexing protocol for transferring

multiple bit streams over the same optical fiber.
Selectivity
Combined operation of overcurrent protective

devices connnected in series to provide graded
disconnection.
Series reactor
A reactor intended for series connection in a

network, either for limiting the current under
fault conditions or for load sharing in parallel
circuits.
Sequential Function
Chart (SFC)
A graphical programming language used for

PLCs. It is one of the five languages defined by
IEC 61131-3 standard. The SFC standard is
defined in IEC 848, Preparation of function
charts for control systems.
Short circuit
Connection of two or more points of an

electrical circuit that are meant to be at
different voltages across a nebligible small
resistance or impedance.
Overcurrent which flows through the >

short circuit which may result in thermal or
mechanical overloading of the electrical
equipment.
Rated short-circuit
breaking current
The root-mean-square value of the breaking

current in case of short circuit at the terminals
of the switching device.
Rated short-circuit
making current
The peak value of the making current in case of

short circuit at the terminals of the switching
device.
Rated voltage
The maximum voltage at which an electric

component can operate for extended periods
without undue degradation or safety hazard.
Short-circuit
strength
The mechanical resistance of switching devices

to short-circuit stress, particularily of busbars in
switchgear assemblies and distribution boards.
Release (of a
mechanical
switching device)
A device, mechanically connected to a

mechanical switching device, which releases
the holding means and permits the opening
or the closing of the switching device.
Shunt release
A release energized by a source of voltage.
Shunt reactor
A reactor intended for shunt connection in a

network to compensate for capacitive current.
Residual current
The sum of the instantaneous values of all

currents that flow through all the active
conductors of an electrical system at one point.
Single-line diagram
(SLD)
A simplified notation for representing a threephase power system in which the polyphase
links are represented by their equivalent single
line.
Residual-current
device (RCB)
A mechanical switching device designed to

make, carry and break currents under normal
service conditions and to cause the opening of
the contacts when the residual current attains
a given value under specified conditions.
11
531
Glossary
Smart Grid
Evolving intelligent power distribution network

using communication, advanced sensors, and
distributed computers to improve the
efficiency, reliability and safety of power
delivery and use. It includes the possibility for
demand side management, facilitating grid
connection of distributed generation power
(with photovoltaic arrays, small wind turbines,
micro hydro, or even combined heat power
generators in buildings), grid energy storage
for distributed generation load balancing, and
improved reliability against many different
component failure scenarios.
SNCP
A protection mechanism used in > SDH
Simple Network
Management
Protocol (SNMP)
SNMP is used in network management systems

to monitor network-attached devices for
conditions that warrant administrative
attention. It consists of a set of standards for
network management, including an application
layer protocol, a database schema, and a set of
data objects.
TN-S, TN-C, TN-C-S

systems
Power supply systems; in the TN-S system the

neutral conductor and the protective-earthconductor-function is separated throughout the
system; in the TN-C system neutral-conductor
and protective-earth-conductor-function are
combined throughout the system; the TN-C-S
system is a combination of a TN-C and a TN-S
system. In one part of the system neutralconductor and protective-earth-conductor
function are combined, in another part, they
are separate.
Total harmonic
distortion (THD)
The THD of a signal is a measurement of the

harmonic distortion present and is defined as
the ratio of the sum of the powers of all
harmonic components to the power of the
fundamental frequency.
Transformer
substation
A substation containing power transformers

interconnecting two or more networks of
different voltages.
Transient
overvoltage
Very short duration increase in voltage

between two or more conductors. Transient
overvoltages are mainly caused by the
secondary effects of lightning or by electrical
switching events, and may cause serious
damages to components of the electrical supply
network.
SOAP
A protocol for exchanging > XML-based

messages over computer networks, normally
using > HTTP/HTTPS. Formerly SOAP was an
acronym for Simple Object Access Protocol,
which was dropped with Version 1.2.
Synchronous Optical
Network (SONET)
Multiplexing protocol for transferring multiple

bit streams over the same optical fiber.
Tripping current
Current value at which a tripping element trips

within a particular time.
Structured Query
Language (SQL)
Database computer language designed for the

retrieval and management of data in relational
database management systems.
TT system
Synchronous
Transport Module
(STM)
The basic unit of framing in > SDH.
Power supply system; in the TT system one

point is directly grounded, all exposed
conductive parts are connected to grounding
electrodes which are separated from the system
grounding.
S-tripping
Short-time delay short-circuit protection.
Substation
A part of an electrical system, confined to a

given area, mainly including ends of
transmission or distribution lines, electrical
switchgear and controlgear, buildings and
transformers. A substation generally includes
safety or control devices (for example,
protection).
U
Universal Mobile
Telecommunications
System (UMTS)
Third-generation cell phone standard that

allows significantly higher data transfer rates
than GSM.
Universal Serial Bus

(USB)
Serial bus standard to interface devices.
V
Virtual power plant
(VPP)
A cluster of distributed generation installations

which are collectively run by a central control
entity. The concerted operational mode shall
result in an extra benefit as to deliver peak load
electricity or balancing power at short notice.
Device for making or breaking a current in an

electric circuit.
Visual Basic for

Applications (VBA)
A switch which, in the open position, satisfies

the isolating requirements specified for a >
disconnector.
An event-driven programming language

and associated Integrated Development
Environment (IDE) which is built into
most Microsoft Office applications.
Voltage divider
Device comprising resistors, inductors,

capacitors, transformer(s), or a combination of
these components such that, between two
points of the device, a desired fraction of the
voltage applied to the device as a whole can be
obtained.
(Line) voltage drop
The difference at a given instant between the

voltages measured at two given points along a
line.
Voltage regulator
A tapped step autotransformer used to

maintain a desired voltage level all the time.
Surge arrester
A device designed to protect the electrical

apparatus from high transient overvoltages
caused by lightning strikes or switching
operations.
Switch / switching
device
Switch-disconnector
T
Total harmonic
distortion (THD)
11
532
The THD of a signal is a measurement of the

harmonic distortion present, and is defined as
the ratio of the sum of the powers of all
harmonic components to the power of the
fundamental frequency.
Glossary
Voltage surge
A transient voltage wave propagating along a

line or a circuit and characterized by a rapid
increase followed by a slower decrease of the
voltage.
Voltage transducer
Transducer used for the measurement of an

alternating voltage.
Voltage transformer
An instrument transformer in which the

secondary voltage, in normal conditions of use,
is substantially proportional to the primary
voltage, and differs in phase from it by an angle
which is approximately zero for an appropriate
direction of the connections.
W
Wavelength Division
Multiplexing (WDM)
Technology which multiplexes multiple optical

carrier signals on a single optical fiber by using
different wavelengths (colours) of laser light to
carry different signals .
Wireless Broadband
(WiBro)
South-Korean service name for the

international standard IEEE 802.16e (mobile
WiMAX).
Worldwide
Interoperability for
Microwave Access
(WiMAX)
A wireless broadband telecommunications

technology based on the IEEE 802.16 standard.
X
Extensible Markup
Language (XML)
Markup language to faciliate the sharing of

structured data across different information
systems; it is used both to encode documents
and to serialize data.
Y
Z
11
533
534
12.1 Abbreviations
536
12.2 Trademarks
541
12
535
12.1 Abbreviations
CAM
Condition Assessment Monitor
AAC
All-Aluminum Conductor
CAPEX
Capital Expenditure
AC
Alternating Current
CB
Circuit-Breaker
ACB
Air Circuit-Breaker
CBM
Condition Based Maintenance
ACE
Area Control Error
CCS
Cubicle for Customized Solutions
ACSR
Aluminum Conductor, Steel-Reinforced
CCS
Current Control System
ADC
Analog-to-Digital Converter
CERT
Computer Emergency Response Team
ADM
Asynchronous Digital Multiplexer
CFC
Continuous Function Chart
ADMS
Advanced Distribution Management System
CFE
AF
Air-Forced (transformer cooling)
CHP
Combined Heat and Power
AFWF
Air-Forced/Water-Forced (transformer cooling)
CIM
AGC
Automatic Generation Control
CIP
AIS
a) Air-Insulated Switchyard (HV)

b) Air-Insulated Switchgear (MV)
a) Continuous Improvement Process

b) Critical Infrastructure Protection
CIS
Customer Information System
Al
Aluminum
CIT
Combined Instrument Transformer
AMI
Advanced Metering Infrastructure
CM
AMIS
Automated Consumption Data Acquisition and

Information System
a) Condition Monitoring
b) Crew Management
CMMI
Capability Maturity Model Integration
AMP
Asset Management Programs
CMS
Crew Management System
AN
Air-Natural (transformer cooling)
CO2
Carbon dioxide
ANM
Active Network Management
CPU
Central Processing Unit
ANOP
Advanced Network Operation
CS
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
a) Compact Switchgear
b) Contingency Screening
AR
Auto-Reclosure
CSA
Canadian Standards Association
CSM
Customer Support Center
CT
Current Transformer
CTDim
Current and Voltage Transformer Dimensioning
Cu
Copper
CVA
Cyber Vulnerability Assessment
CVT
Capacitor Voltage Transformer
ASC
Arc Suppression Coil
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATM-IMA
AVR
Inverse Multiplexing over ATM

Automatic Voltage Regulator
B
B2B
a) Building-to-Building
b) Business-to-Business
536
DAC
Digital-to-Analog Converter
BCU
Bay Control Unit
DA-RTU
Distribution Automation Remote Terminal Unit
BDEW
Bundesverband der Energie- und Wasserwirtschaft

(German Association of Energy and Water Industries)
DAS
Dynamic Security Assessment
DAU
Data Acquisition Unit
DC
Direct Current
DC CS
Direct-Current Compact Switchgear
DCA
Distribution Contingency Analysis
DCB
Disconnecting Circuit-Breaker
DCS
Distributed Control System
DEMS
Decentralized Energy Management System
DER
Distributed Energy Resources
DG
Distributed Generation
DGA
Dissolved Gas in Oil Analysis
DIE
Integrated Development Environment
DIN
German: Deutsches Institut fr Normung e. V.

(German Institute for Standardization)
DINEMO
Digital Network Model
DIP
Distributed Interface Processor
DisCo
Distribution Company
BF
Breaker Failure
BFI
Breaker Failure Initiation (time)
BFT
Breaker Failure Tripping (time)
BI
Business Intelligence
BIL
Basic Impulse Level
BIPV
Building-Integrated Photovoltaic System
BMS
Battery Management System
BOSL
Block-Oriented Simulation Language
BPL
Broadband over Power Lines
BS
British Standard
12
CA
Contingency Analysis
CAD/CAE
Computer-Aided Design /Computer-Aided

Engineering
Califex
Cable Life Extension
12.1 Abbreviations
DLF
Distribution Load Forecast
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute
DMAIC
Define-Measure-Analyse-Improve-Control
ETU
Electronic Trip Unit
DMS
Distribution Management System
EU
European Union
DMZ
Demilitarized Zone
EV
Electric Vehicle
DN
Damping Network
DNA
Distribution Network Applications
FA
Forecasting Applications
DNP
Distributed Network Protocol
FACTS
Flexible AC Transmission System
DPF
Dispatcher Power Flow
FASE
Feeder Automation Sequence Editor
DQS
German: Deutsche Gesellschaft zur Zertifizierung

von Managementsystemen (German Association for
Certification of Management Systems)
FAT
Factory Acceptance Test
FB
Full Bridge
FC
Fault Calculation
FCITC
First Contingency Incremental Transfer Capability
FDR
Frequency Domain Reflectometry
FDS
Frequency Domain Spectroscopy
Fe
Iron
FEM
Finite Element Method
FHSS
Frequency-Hopping Spread Spectrum
FISR
Fault Isolation and Service Restoration
FLISR
Fault Location, Isolation and Service Restoration
FLOC
Fault Location
FMS
Fieldbus Message Specification
FO
Fiber Optic
FR
Filter Reactor
FRA
Frequency Response Analysis
FRP
Fiber-Glass Reinforced Polyester
FSC
Fixed Series Capacitor
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
DR
DRMS
Demand Response
Demand Response Management System
DSA
Dynamic Stability Analysis
DSA
Dynamic Security Assessment
DSL
Digital Subscriber Line
DSO
Distribution System Operator
DSPF
Distribution System Power Flow
DSSE
Distribution System State Estimator
DT
Distribution Transformer
DTC
Dead-Tank Compact
E
E&M interface
Ear and Mouth interface
EA
Energy Accounting
EAF
Electric Arc Furnace
ECANSE
Environment for Computer-Aided Neural Software
ECR (glass
fiber)
Electrical Grade Corrosion Resistant (glass fiber)
ED
Economic Dispatch
EDP
Electronic Data Processing
G&T
Generation and Transmission
EEX
European Energy Exchange
GA
Generator connection cabinet
EHS
Environment, Health and Safety
GDM
Gas Density Monitoring
EHV
Extra High Voltage
GenCo
Generation Company
EIB
European Installation Bus
GFP
Generic Framing Procedure
EIRP
Effective Isotropic Radiated Power
GIC
Geomagnetic Induced Currents
ELC
ELCOM Communication Protocol
GID
Generic Interface Definition
ELCOM
Electricity Utilities Communication
GIL
Gas-Insulated Transmission Line
EM
Environmental Management
GIS
Geographical Information System
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility
GIS
Gas-Insulated Switchgear
EMM
Energy Market Management
GMB
Graphical Model Builder
EMS
Energy Management System
GMS
Generation Management System
EMU
Electric Multiple Units
GOOSE
Generic Object Oriented Substation Event
EN
European Standard (German: Europa-Norm)
GPFC
Grid Power Flow Controller
ENEAS
Efficient Network and Energy Automation Systems
GPRS
General Packet Radio Service
Engineering
Engineering
GPS
EPC
Engineering, Procurement, Construction (contract)
a) General Power Supply

b) Global Positioning System
EPR
Ethylene Propylene Rubber
Global System for Mobile Communications
EPRI
Electric Power Research Institute
GSM (French:
groupe spcial
mobile)
EPROM
Erasable Programmable Read-only-Memory

Epoxy-Resin Impregnated Paper
GSU
transformer
Generator Step-up Transformer
ERIP
12
537
12.1 Abbreviations
G-tripping
Ground-Fault Tripping
GUI
Graphical User Interface
KNX
Konnex
HAN
Home Area Network
KPI
Key Performance Indicators
HB
Half Bridge
HF
High Frequency
LAN
Local Area Network
HIGS
Highly Integrated Generator Switchgear
LCAS
Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
HIS
a) Highly Integrated Switchgear

b) Historical Information System
LCC
Line Commutated Converter
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display
HMI
Human Machine Interface
LED
Light Emitting Diode
HPP
Hydro Power Plant
LF
Ladle Furnace
HQ
Headquarters
LFC
Load Frequency Control
HRC fuse
High-Rupturing-Capacity fuse
LI
Lightning Impulse
HSB
High-Speed Bus
LIRA
Line Resonance Analysis
HTC
Hydro Thermal Coordination
LME
Load Management Electricity
HTTP/HTTPS
Hypertext Transfer Protocol/Hypertext Transfer

Protocol Secure
LMG
Load Management Gas
HTV
High Temperature Vulcanizing (silicone rubber)
LMW
Load Management Water
LoWPAN
Low-Rate Wireless Personal Area Network
LPVTG
Low-Power Voltage Transducer for Medium-Voltage

GIS systems
LS
Load Shedding
HV
High Voltage
HVAC
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
HVDC
High-Voltage Direct Current
HVDCT
High-Voltage Direct-Current Transmission
HW
Hardware
I
IAC
Internal Arc Classification
IAP
Intelligent Alarm Processor
ICCP
Inter-Control-Center Communication Protocol
IDS
Intrusion Detection System
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
IED
Intelligent Electronic Device
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IFS
Independent Front-End System
IGBT
Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor
ILSA
Industrial Link State Advertisement (protocol)
IMM
Information Model Manager/Management
IO
Input/Output
IOP
Interoperability
IP
Internet Protocol
IP code
Ingress Protection (code)
IPP
Independent Power Provider
IRIG time
codes
Inter-Range Instrumentation Group time codes
ISCM
12
538
a) Integrated Substation Condition Monitoring

b) Integrated Services and Support Condition
Monitoring
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network
ISO
a) International Organization for Standardization

b) Independent System Operator
IT
Information Technology
I-tripping
Instantaneous short-circuit protection
IVR
Interactive Voice Response
LSC
Load Shedding Controller
LSC (category)
Loss of Service Continuity (category)
LTLF
Long-Term Load Forecast
LTM
Long-Term Maintenance
LTT
Light-Triggered Thyristors
LV
Low Voltage
LVMD
Low-Voltage Main Distribution
M
MBR
Management Business Review
MCB
Miniature Circuit-Breaker
MCC
Motor Control Centers
MCCB
Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker
MD
Main Distribution
MDM
Master Data Management
MDMS
Meter Data Management System
MECE
Mutually Exclusive and Collectively Exhaustive
MERO
Multi-Energy Resource Optimization
MFC
Microsoft Foundation Class
MMC
Modular Multilevel Converter
MMS
Module Management System
MO
Metal Oxide
MOD
Model on Demand
MOV
Metal-Oxide Varistor
MPCB
Motor Protection Circuit-Breaker
MPDSL
Maximum Permissible Dynamic Service Load
MPLS-TP
Multi-Protocol Label Switching - Transport Profile
MPM
Multi-Project Management
MPSL
Maximum Permissible Service Load
12.1 Abbreviations
MSC
Mechanically Switched Capacitor
OPF
Optimal Power Flow
MSCDN
Mechanically Switched Capacitor Bank with

Damping Network
OPGW
Optical Ground Wire
OSI
Open Systems Interconnection Basic Reference Model
MSP
Motor Starter Protector
OTS
MSPP
Multi-Service Provisioning Platform
a) Operator Training Simulator

b) Operation Technology
MSR
Mechanically Switched Reactor
MS-SPRing (2F)
(2-Fiber) Multiplex Section-Shared Protection Ring
PA
Power Applications
PABX
Private Automatic Branch Exchange
MTBF
Meantime Between Failures
PAS
Power Automation System
MTLF
Medium-Term Load Forecast
PBX
Private Branch Exchange
MU
Model Update
PCI
Peripherical Component Interconnect
MUDR
Metered Usage Data Repository
PCM
MUST
Managing and Utilizing System Transmission
a) Production Cost Monitoring

b) Pulse code modulation
MUX
Multiplexer
PD
Partial Discharge
MV
Medium Voltage
PDC
MWFM
Mobile Workforce Management
a) Polarization and Depolarization Current

b) Phasor Data Concentrator
PDH
Plesiochrone Digital Hierarchy (international

multiplexing standard)
PDM
Partial Discharge Monitoring
PDP
Phasor Data Processor
PE
Polyethylene
PE conductor
Protective Earth conductor
PEHLA
German: Prfung elektrischer Hochleistungsapparate

(Association of owners of high-power testing
laboratories in Germany and Switzerland)
N
N conductor
Neutral conductor
N2
Nitrogen
NERC
North American Electric Reliability Corporation
NETOMAC
Network Torsion Machine Control
NEVA
Eigenvalue and Modal Analysis
NG
Next Generation
NIP
Network Interface Processor
NLTC
No-Load Tap Changer
NMS
Network Management System
NMU
Network Model Update
NPA
Network Parameter Adaptation
NS
Network Sensitivity
NTP
Network Time Protocol
N-tripping
Neutral Conductor Protection
O
O&M
Operation and Maintenance
OASIS
Open Access Same Time Information System
ODB
Operation Database
ODBC
Open Database Connectivity
ODMS
Operational Database Maintenance System
OEM
Original Equipment Manufacturer
OFDM
Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing
OFR
Optimal Feeder Reconfiguration
OHL
Overhead Line
OIP
Oil-impregnated Paper (design of transformer

bushings)
OLE
Object Linking and Embedding
OLTC
On-Load Tap Changer
OM
Outage Management
ONAF
Oil-Natural/Air-Forced (transformer cooling)
ONAN
Oil-Natural/Air-Natural (transformer cooling)
OPC
Object Linking and Embedding for Process Control
OPEX
Operational Expenditure
PEN conductor
Combined PE and N conductor
PI
Polarization Index
PLC
a) Power-Line carrier
b) Programmable Logic Controller
PMBOK
Project Management Body of Knowledge
PMI
Planned Maintenance and Inspection
PMU
Phasor Measurement Unit
POD
Power Oscillation Damping
POTT
Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip
PP
Polypropylene
PQ
Power Quality
PROFIBUS
Process Fieldbus
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS for Decentralized Peripherals
PROFIBUS FMS
PROFIBUS with FMS protocol
PSA
Protection Security Assessment
PSS
Power System Simulator
PST
Phase-Shifting Transformer
PT
Potential Transformer
PTC
Positive Temperature Coefficient (thermistor)
PTI
Power Technologies International (Siemens)
PUTT
Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip
PV
Photovoltaics
PV/QV
Power/Voltage VAr/Voltage (analysis)
PVC
Polyvinyl Chloride
Q
QM
Quality Management
12
539
12.1 Abbreviations
SIP
Serial Interface Processor
R&D
Research and Development
SIPLINK
Siemens Multifunctional Power Link
RAV
Advanced Results Visualization
SL
Security Analysis Look-Ahead
RBM
Rehabilitation Based Maintenance
SLD
Single-Line Diagram
RC
Resistive/Capacitive
SNCP
Subnetwork Connection Protection
RCAM
Reliability-Centered Asset Management
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
RCD
Residual-Current Protective Device
RD
Remedial Dispatch
SOA
Service-Oriented Architecture
RDBMS
Relational Database Management System
SOE
Sequence of Events
RDC
Remote Diagnostic Centers
SONET
Synchronous Optical Network
RDF
Resource Description Framework
SPM
Switching Procedure Management
RES
Renewable energy sources
SPS
Safety Power Supply
SQL
Structured Query Language
RF
Radio Frequency
RM
Reserve Monitoring
SSPS
Strategic Spare Part Solution
RMS
Root-mean-square (also rms, r.m.s.)
SSR
Subsynchronous Resonance
RMU
Ring-Main Unit
SSTI
Subsynchronous Torsional Interaction
RO
Resource Optimization
STATCOM
Static Synchronous Compensator
RO
Resource Scheduler
STIF
Short-Term Inflow Forecast
ROS
Remote Operational Support
STL
Short-Circuit Testing Liaison
RPS
Redundant Power Supply
STLF
Short-Term Load Forecast
RSTP
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
STM
Synchronous Transport Module
RTD
Resistance Temperature Device/Detector
S-tripping
Short-time delay short-circuit protection
RTO
Regional Transmission Operator
SVC
Static VAr Compensator
RTU
SVG
Scalable Vector Graphics
SW
Software
12
540
SA
Scheduling Applications
SA
Security Analysis
SAIDI
System Average Interruption Duration Index
SAS
Station Automation System
SAT
Site Acceptance Test
T
TAI
Technical Applications Integration
TBM
Time Based Maintenance
TCM
Trouble Call Management
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol
SCADA
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
SCC
Safety Certificate Contractors
TCR
Thyristor-Controlled Shunt Reactor
SCC
Short-Circuit Calculation
TCS
Trouble Call System
SCCL
Short-Circuit Current Limiter
TCSC
Thyristor Controlled Series Capacitor
SCL
Structured Control Language
TDC
Technology and Drive Control
SCUC
Security Constrained Unit Commitment
TDM
Time-Division Multiplexing
SD
Switch-Disconnector
TDSP
Transmission Distribution Service Provider
SDF
Switch-Disconnector/Fuse
THD
Total Harmonic Distortion
SDH
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (multiplexing protocol

for transferring multiple bit streams over the same
optical fiber )
TLM
Transformer Lifecycle Management
TM
a) Terminal Module (bus)

b) Thermal-Magnetic (tripping)
TNA
Transmission Network Applications
TOS
Trade Optimizing Scheduler
TPSC
Thyristor-Protected Series Capacitor
TransCo
Transmission Company
TRV
Transient Recovery Voltage
TS
Training Simulator
TSC
Thyristor-Switched Capacitor
SE
State Estimator
SF6
Sulphur Hexafluoride
SFC
Sequential Function Chart
SGEM
Smart Grid Energy Manager
SiC
Silicon Carbide
Siemens PTI
Siemens Power Technologies International
SIM
Serial Module Interface
SINCAL
Siemens Network Calculation
12.2 Trademarks
TSO
Transmission System Operator
TSR
Thyristor-Switched Reactor
TSSC
Thyristor-Switched Series Capacitor
TTA
Type-Tested Low-Voltage Switchgear Assembly
U
UCTE
Union for the Coordination of Transmission of Energy
UHF
Ultra High Frequency
UHVDC
Ultra-High-Voltage Direct Current
UI
User Interface
UML
Unified Modeling Language
UMTS
Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
UPS
Uninterruptible Power Supply
USB
Universal Serial Bus (serial bus standard to interface

devices)
V
VBA
Visual Basic for Applications
VCAT
Virtual Concatenation
VDE
German: Verband der Elektrotechnik, Elektronik und

Informationstechnik (Association for electrical,
electronic and information technologies)
VDS
Voltage Detecting Systems
VDU
Visual Display Unit
VEE
Validation, Estimation and Editing
VF
Voice Frequency
VFD
Variable Frequency Drives
VHF
Very High Frequency
VoIP
Voice over IP
VPP
Virtual Power Plant
VS
Voltage Scheduler
VSA
Voltage Stability Analysis
VSC
Voltage-Sourced Converter
VSTLF
Very Short-Term Load Forecast
VT
Voltage Transformer
VVC
Voltage/VAr Control
W
WAN
Wide Area Network
WDM
Wavelength Division Multiplex
WIB
Working-Party on Instrument Behavior
WiBro
Wireless Broadband
WiMAX
Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access
WIPOS
Siemens Wind Power Offshore Substation
WLAN
Wireless Local Area Network
WMS
Warehouse Management System
WPP
Wind Power Plant
X
XLPE
Cross-Linked Polyethylene
XML
Extensible Markup Language
Y
Z
ZnO
Zinc Oxide
All product designations used are trademark or product names of

Siemens AG, its affiliates, or their respective owners. Microsoft, Encarta,
MSN, and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
DIGSI
ET 200
GEAFOL
ISCM
Kiellinie
LIRA
MOD
Model On Demand
NETOMAC
NXAIR
NXPLUS
OSCILLOSTORE
OSCOP
PSS
PSSE (PSS for Engineering)
PSSMOD (PSS for Project Modeling)
PSSMUST (PSS for Managing and Utilizing System Transmission)
PSSNETOMAC (PSS for Network Torsion Machine Control)
PSSO (PSS for Operations)
PSSODMS (PSS for Operational Database Maintenance System)
PSSPDMS (PSS for Protection Device Management System)
PSSSINCAL (PSS for Siemens Network Calculation)
RCAM
S7-300
S7-400
SENTRON
SICAM PAS
SICARO
SIGRADE
SIGUARD
SIGUARD DAS
SIGUARD PDP
SIGUARD PSA
SIHARBOR
SIMARIS
SIMATIC
SIMEAS SAFIR
SIMEAS
SIMOBREAKER
SIMOVER
SINCAL
SINVERT
SION
SIPLINK
SIPROTEC
SIRIUS
SITRAM
SIVACON
Smart Grid Compass
SPECTRUM POWER
SURPASS
TAI
Technical Applications Integration
TLM
Totally Integrated Power
WinCC
WIPOS
12
541
Published by and copyright 2014:

Siemens AG
Energy Sector
Freyeslebenstrasse 1
91058 Erlangen, Germany
Infrastructure & Cities Sector
Wittelsbacherplatz 2
80333 Munich, Germany
Download: siemens.com/energy/peg
This guide is not to be relied upon in the US market.
For more information, please contact
our Customer Support Center.
Phone: +49 180 524 70 00
Fax:
+49 180 524 24 71
(Charges depending on provider)
52461 0814
All rights reserved.

Trademarks mentioned in this document
are the property of Siemens AG, its affiliates,
or their respective owners.
Subject to change without prior notice.

The information in this document contains general
descriptions of the technical options available, which
may not apply in all cases. The required technical
options should therefore be specified in the contract.

Power Engineering Guide Edition 7 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Power Engineering Guide Edition 7 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Power Engineering Guide Edition 7 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of the Power Engineering Guide?

What is the purpose of the Power Engineering Guide?

Who is the intended audience of the Power Engineering Guide?

Who is the intended audience of the Power Engineering Guide?

Power Engineering Guide

Answers for energy.

Siemens Energy Sector Power Engineering Guide Edition 7.1

Siemens Energy Sector Power Engineering Guide Edition 7.1

Siemens Energy Sector Power Engineering Guide Edition 7.1

Power Transmission and Distribution Solutions

Switchgear and Substations

Products and Devices

Protection, Substation Automation,

Communication Network Solutions

Power System Analysis and Planning

Services & Support

Smart Grids and the New Age of Energy

Siemens Energy Sector Power Engineering Guide Edition 7.1

1 Smart Grids and the New Age of Energy

Siemens Energy Sector Power Engineering Guide Edition 7.1

Smart Grids and the New Age of Energy

Siemens Energy Sector Power Engineering Guide Edition 7.1

Smart Grids and the New Age of Energy

Siemens Energy Sector Power Engineering Guide Edition 7.1

Smart Grids and the New Age of Energy

Transmission Systems (FACTS) address the greatest challenges in

FACTS devices can significantly increase the power transmission

Siemens Energy Sector Power Engineering Guide Edition 7.1

Smart Grids and the New Age of Energy

Control room HMI

Energy automation system

Our solutions integrate

Fig. 1-4: Siemens smart substation automation systems

Energy Management System (EMS)

Siemens Energy Sector Power Engineering Guide Edition 7.1

scheduling to online closed-loop control of generating units

Smart Grids and the New Age of Energy

Telecommunication systems for power grid transmission have

See section 10.1.3, page 514.

Siemens Energy Sector Power Engineering Guide Edition 7.1

Smart Grids and the New Age of Energy

Catering to the next era of distribution control systems, the

Fig. 1-5: Spectrum Power ADMS combines SCADA, outage

See section 7.2, page 443.

Siemens Energy Sector Power Engineering Guide Edition 7.1

To fulfill all these requirements in a Smart Grid feeder automation

Smart Grids and the New Age of Energy

In the virtual power plant, decentralized energy management

See section 7.2.8, page 463.

Siemens Energy Sector Power Engineering Guide Edition 7.1

Smart Grids and the New Age of Energy

Siemens smart metering portfolio includes:

Siemens Energy Sector Power Engineering Guide Edition 7.1

on or off, ensuring efficient load management. From generating

Smart Grids and the New Age of Energy

Siemens Energy Sector Power Engineering Guide Edition 7.1

Siemens Energy Sector Power Engineering Guide Edition 7.1

Power Transmission and Distribution Solutions

2.1 Overview of Technologies and Services

Flexible AC Transmission Systems

2.1 Overview of Technologies and Services

Flexible AC Transmission Systems